summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/memoir/memman.tex
blob: 2a8b26a57083ebc6b1c5091989348d3e3a8bd7fd (plain)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
991
992
993
994
995
996
997
998
999
1000
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007
1008
1009
1010
1011
1012
1013
1014
1015
1016
1017
1018
1019
1020
1021
1022
1023
1024
1025
1026
1027
1028
1029
1030
1031
1032
1033
1034
1035
1036
1037
1038
1039
1040
1041
1042
1043
1044
1045
1046
1047
1048
1049
1050
1051
1052
1053
1054
1055
1056
1057
1058
1059
1060
1061
1062
1063
1064
1065
1066
1067
1068
1069
1070
1071
1072
1073
1074
1075
1076
1077
1078
1079
1080
1081
1082
1083
1084
1085
1086
1087
1088
1089
1090
1091
1092
1093
1094
1095
1096
1097
1098
1099
1100
1101
1102
1103
1104
1105
1106
1107
1108
1109
1110
1111
1112
1113
1114
1115
1116
1117
1118
1119
1120
1121
1122
1123
1124
1125
1126
1127
1128
1129
1130
1131
1132
1133
1134
1135
1136
1137
1138
1139
1140
1141
1142
1143
1144
1145
1146
1147
1148
1149
1150
1151
1152
1153
1154
1155
1156
1157
1158
1159
1160
1161
1162
1163
1164
1165
1166
1167
1168
1169
1170
1171
1172
1173
1174
1175
1176
1177
1178
1179
1180
1181
1182
1183
1184
1185
1186
1187
1188
1189
1190
1191
1192
1193
1194
1195
1196
1197
1198
1199
1200
1201
1202
1203
1204
1205
1206
1207
1208
1209
1210
1211
1212
1213
1214
1215
1216
1217
1218
1219
1220
1221
1222
1223
1224
1225
1226
1227
1228
1229
1230
1231
1232
1233
1234
1235
1236
1237
1238
1239
1240
1241
1242
1243
1244
1245
1246
1247
1248
1249
1250
1251
1252
1253
1254
1255
1256
1257
1258
1259
1260
1261
1262
1263
1264
1265
1266
1267
1268
1269
1270
1271
1272
1273
1274
1275
1276
1277
1278
1279
1280
1281
1282
1283
1284
1285
1286
1287
1288
1289
1290
1291
1292
1293
1294
1295
1296
1297
1298
1299
1300
1301
1302
1303
1304
1305
1306
1307
1308
1309
1310
1311
1312
1313
1314
1315
1316
1317
1318
1319
1320
1321
1322
1323
1324
1325
1326
1327
1328
1329
1330
1331
1332
1333
1334
1335
1336
1337
1338
1339
1340
1341
1342
1343
1344
1345
1346
1347
1348
1349
1350
1351
1352
1353
1354
1355
1356
1357
1358
1359
1360
1361
1362
1363
1364
1365
1366
1367
1368
1369
1370
1371
1372
1373
1374
1375
1376
1377
1378
1379
1380
1381
1382
1383
1384
1385
1386
1387
1388
1389
1390
1391
1392
1393
1394
1395
1396
1397
1398
1399
1400
1401
1402
1403
1404
1405
1406
1407
1408
1409
1410
1411
1412
1413
1414
1415
1416
1417
1418
1419
1420
1421
1422
1423
1424
1425
1426
1427
1428
1429
1430
1431
1432
1433
1434
1435
1436
1437
1438
1439
1440
1441
1442
1443
1444
1445
1446
1447
1448
1449
1450
1451
1452
1453
1454
1455
1456
1457
1458
1459
1460
1461
1462
1463
1464
1465
1466
1467
1468
1469
1470
1471
1472
1473
1474
1475
1476
1477
1478
1479
1480
1481
1482
1483
1484
1485
1486
1487
1488
1489
1490
1491
1492
1493
1494
1495
1496
1497
1498
1499
1500
1501
1502
1503
1504
1505
1506
1507
1508
1509
1510
1511
1512
1513
1514
1515
1516
1517
1518
1519
1520
1521
1522
1523
1524
1525
1526
1527
1528
1529
1530
1531
1532
1533
1534
1535
1536
1537
1538
1539
1540
1541
1542
1543
1544
1545
1546
1547
1548
1549
1550
1551
1552
1553
1554
1555
1556
1557
1558
1559
1560
1561
1562
1563
1564
1565
1566
1567
1568
1569
1570
1571
1572
1573
1574
1575
1576
1577
1578
1579
1580
1581
1582
1583
1584
1585
1586
1587
1588
1589
1590
1591
1592
1593
1594
1595
1596
1597
1598
1599
1600
1601
1602
1603
1604
1605
1606
1607
1608
1609
1610
1611
1612
1613
1614
1615
1616
1617
1618
1619
1620
1621
1622
1623
1624
1625
1626
1627
1628
1629
1630
1631
1632
1633
1634
1635
1636
1637
1638
1639
1640
1641
1642
1643
1644
1645
1646
1647
1648
1649
1650
1651
1652
1653
1654
1655
1656
1657
1658
1659
1660
1661
1662
1663
1664
1665
1666
1667
1668
1669
1670
1671
1672
1673
1674
1675
1676
1677
1678
1679
1680
1681
1682
1683
1684
1685
1686
1687
1688
1689
1690
1691
1692
1693
1694
1695
1696
1697
1698
1699
1700
1701
1702
1703
1704
1705
1706
1707
1708
1709
1710
1711
1712
1713
1714
1715
1716
1717
1718
1719
1720
1721
1722
1723
1724
1725
1726
1727
1728
1729
1730
1731
1732
1733
1734
1735
1736
1737
1738
1739
1740
1741
1742
1743
1744
1745
1746
1747
1748
1749
1750
1751
1752
1753
1754
1755
1756
1757
1758
1759
1760
1761
1762
1763
1764
1765
1766
1767
1768
1769
1770
1771
1772
1773
1774
1775
1776
1777
1778
1779
1780
1781
1782
1783
1784
1785
1786
1787
1788
1789
1790
1791
1792
1793
1794
1795
1796
1797
1798
1799
1800
1801
1802
1803
1804
1805
1806
1807
1808
1809
1810
1811
1812
1813
1814
1815
1816
1817
1818
1819
1820
1821
1822
1823
1824
1825
1826
1827
1828
1829
1830
1831
1832
1833
1834
1835
1836
1837
1838
1839
1840
1841
1842
1843
1844
1845
1846
1847
1848
1849
1850
1851
1852
1853
1854
1855
1856
1857
1858
1859
1860
1861
1862
1863
1864
1865
1866
1867
1868
1869
1870
1871
1872
1873
1874
1875
1876
1877
1878
1879
1880
1881
1882
1883
1884
1885
1886
1887
1888
1889
1890
1891
1892
1893
1894
1895
1896
1897
1898
1899
1900
1901
1902
1903
1904
1905
1906
1907
1908
1909
1910
1911
1912
1913
1914
1915
1916
1917
1918
1919
1920
1921
1922
1923
1924
1925
1926
1927
1928
1929
1930
1931
1932
1933
1934
1935
1936
1937
1938
1939
1940
1941
1942
1943
1944
1945
1946
1947
1948
1949
1950
1951
1952
1953
1954
1955
1956
1957
1958
1959
1960
1961
1962
1963
1964
1965
1966
1967
1968
1969
1970
1971
1972
1973
1974
1975
1976
1977
1978
1979
1980
1981
1982
1983
1984
1985
1986
1987
1988
1989
1990
1991
1992
1993
1994
1995
1996
1997
1998
1999
2000
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
2011
2012
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
2021
2022
2023
2024
2025
2026
2027
2028
2029
2030
2031
2032
2033
2034
2035
2036
2037
2038
2039
2040
2041
2042
2043
2044
2045
2046
2047
2048
2049
2050
2051
2052
2053
2054
2055
2056
2057
2058
2059
2060
2061
2062
2063
2064
2065
2066
2067
2068
2069
2070
2071
2072
2073
2074
2075
2076
2077
2078
2079
2080
2081
2082
2083
2084
2085
2086
2087
2088
2089
2090
2091
2092
2093
2094
2095
2096
2097
2098
2099
2100
2101
2102
2103
2104
2105
2106
2107
2108
2109
2110
2111
2112
2113
2114
2115
2116
2117
2118
2119
2120
2121
2122
2123
2124
2125
2126
2127
2128
2129
2130
2131
2132
2133
2134
2135
2136
2137
2138
2139
2140
2141
2142
2143
2144
2145
2146
2147
2148
2149
2150
2151
2152
2153
2154
2155
2156
2157
2158
2159
2160
2161
2162
2163
2164
2165
2166
2167
2168
2169
2170
2171
2172
2173
2174
2175
2176
2177
2178
2179
2180
2181
2182
2183
2184
2185
2186
2187
2188
2189
2190
2191
2192
2193
2194
2195
2196
2197
2198
2199
2200
2201
2202
2203
2204
2205
2206
2207
2208
2209
2210
2211
2212
2213
2214
2215
2216
2217
2218
2219
2220
2221
2222
2223
2224
2225
2226
2227
2228
2229
2230
2231
2232
2233
2234
2235
2236
2237
2238
2239
2240
2241
2242
2243
2244
2245
2246
2247
2248
2249
2250
2251
2252
2253
2254
2255
2256
2257
2258
2259
2260
2261
2262
2263
2264
2265
2266
2267
2268
2269
2270
2271
2272
2273
2274
2275
2276
2277
2278
2279
2280
2281
2282
2283
2284
2285
2286
2287
2288
2289
2290
2291
2292
2293
2294
2295
2296
2297
2298
2299
2300
2301
2302
2303
2304
2305
2306
2307
2308
2309
2310
2311
2312
2313
2314
2315
2316
2317
2318
2319
2320
2321
2322
2323
2324
2325
2326
2327
2328
2329
2330
2331
2332
2333
2334
2335
2336
2337
2338
2339
2340
2341
2342
2343
2344
2345
2346
2347
2348
2349
2350
2351
2352
2353
2354
2355
2356
2357
2358
2359
2360
2361
2362
2363
2364
2365
2366
2367
2368
2369
2370
2371
2372
2373
2374
2375
2376
2377
2378
2379
2380
2381
2382
2383
2384
2385
2386
2387
2388
2389
2390
2391
2392
2393
2394
2395
2396
2397
2398
2399
2400
2401
2402
2403
2404
2405
2406
2407
2408
2409
2410
2411
2412
2413
2414
2415
2416
2417
2418
2419
2420
2421
2422
2423
2424
2425
2426
2427
2428
2429
2430
2431
2432
2433
2434
2435
2436
2437
2438
2439
2440
2441
2442
2443
2444
2445
2446
2447
2448
2449
2450
2451
2452
2453
2454
2455
2456
2457
2458
2459
2460
2461
2462
2463
2464
2465
2466
2467
2468
2469
2470
2471
2472
2473
2474
2475
2476
2477
2478
2479
2480
2481
2482
2483
2484
2485
2486
2487
2488
2489
2490
2491
2492
2493
2494
2495
2496
2497
2498
2499
2500
2501
2502
2503
2504
2505
2506
2507
2508
2509
2510
2511
2512
2513
2514
2515
2516
2517
2518
2519
2520
2521
2522
2523
2524
2525
2526
2527
2528
2529
2530
2531
2532
2533
2534
2535
2536
2537
2538
2539
2540
2541
2542
2543
2544
2545
2546
2547
2548
2549
2550
2551
2552
2553
2554
2555
2556
2557
2558
2559
2560
2561
2562
2563
2564
2565
2566
2567
2568
2569
2570
2571
2572
2573
2574
2575
2576
2577
2578
2579
2580
2581
2582
2583
2584
2585
2586
2587
2588
2589
2590
2591
2592
2593
2594
2595
2596
2597
2598
2599
2600
2601
2602
2603
2604
2605
2606
2607
2608
2609
2610
2611
2612
2613
2614
2615
2616
2617
2618
2619
2620
2621
2622
2623
2624
2625
2626
2627
2628
2629
2630
2631
2632
2633
2634
2635
2636
2637
2638
2639
2640
2641
2642
2643
2644
2645
2646
2647
2648
2649
2650
2651
2652
2653
2654
2655
2656
2657
2658
2659
2660
2661
2662
2663
2664
2665
2666
2667
2668
2669
2670
2671
2672
2673
2674
2675
2676
2677
2678
2679
2680
2681
2682
2683
2684
2685
2686
2687
2688
2689
2690
2691
2692
2693
2694
2695
2696
2697
2698
2699
2700
2701
2702
2703
2704
2705
2706
2707
2708
2709
2710
2711
2712
2713
2714
2715
2716
2717
2718
2719
2720
2721
2722
2723
2724
2725
2726
2727
2728
2729
2730
2731
2732
2733
2734
2735
2736
2737
2738
2739
2740
2741
2742
2743
2744
2745
2746
2747
2748
2749
2750
2751
2752
2753
2754
2755
2756
2757
2758
2759
2760
2761
2762
2763
2764
2765
2766
2767
2768
2769
2770
2771
2772
2773
2774
2775
2776
2777
2778
2779
2780
2781
2782
2783
2784
2785
2786
2787
2788
2789
2790
2791
2792
2793
2794
2795
2796
2797
2798
2799
2800
2801
2802
2803
2804
2805
2806
2807
2808
2809
2810
2811
2812
2813
2814
2815
2816
2817
2818
2819
2820
2821
2822
2823
2824
2825
2826
2827
2828
2829
2830
2831
2832
2833
2834
2835
2836
2837
2838
2839
2840
2841
2842
2843
2844
2845
2846
2847
2848
2849
2850
2851
2852
2853
2854
2855
2856
2857
2858
2859
2860
2861
2862
2863
2864
2865
2866
2867
2868
2869
2870
2871
2872
2873
2874
2875
2876
2877
2878
2879
2880
2881
2882
2883
2884
2885
2886
2887
2888
2889
2890
2891
2892
2893
2894
2895
2896
2897
2898
2899
2900
2901
2902
2903
2904
2905
2906
2907
2908
2909
2910
2911
2912
2913
2914
2915
2916
2917
2918
2919
2920
2921
2922
2923
2924
2925
2926
2927
2928
2929
2930
2931
2932
2933
2934
2935
2936
2937
2938
2939
2940
2941
2942
2943
2944
2945
2946
2947
2948
2949
2950
2951
2952
2953
2954
2955
2956
2957
2958
2959
2960
2961
2962
2963
2964
2965
2966
2967
2968
2969
2970
2971
2972
2973
2974
2975
2976
2977
2978
2979
2980
2981
2982
2983
2984
2985
2986
2987
2988
2989
2990
2991
2992
2993
2994
2995
2996
2997
2998
2999
3000
3001
3002
3003
3004
3005
3006
3007
3008
3009
3010
3011
3012
3013
3014
3015
3016
3017
3018
3019
3020
3021
3022
3023
3024
3025
3026
3027
3028
3029
3030
3031
3032
3033
3034
3035
3036
3037
3038
3039
3040
3041
3042
3043
3044
3045
3046
3047
3048
3049
3050
3051
3052
3053
3054
3055
3056
3057
3058
3059
3060
3061
3062
3063
3064
3065
3066
3067
3068
3069
3070
3071
3072
3073
3074
3075
3076
3077
3078
3079
3080
3081
3082
3083
3084
3085
3086
3087
3088
3089
3090
3091
3092
3093
3094
3095
3096
3097
3098
3099
3100
3101
3102
3103
3104
3105
3106
3107
3108
3109
3110
3111
3112
3113
3114
3115
3116
3117
3118
3119
3120
3121
3122
3123
3124
3125
3126
3127
3128
3129
3130
3131
3132
3133
3134
3135
3136
3137
3138
3139
3140
3141
3142
3143
3144
3145
3146
3147
3148
3149
3150
3151
3152
3153
3154
3155
3156
3157
3158
3159
3160
3161
3162
3163
3164
3165
3166
3167
3168
3169
3170
3171
3172
3173
3174
3175
3176
3177
3178
3179
3180
3181
3182
3183
3184
3185
3186
3187
3188
3189
3190
3191
3192
3193
3194
3195
3196
3197
3198
3199
3200
3201
3202
3203
3204
3205
3206
3207
3208
3209
3210
3211
3212
3213
3214
3215
3216
3217
3218
3219
3220
3221
3222
3223
3224
3225
3226
3227
3228
3229
3230
3231
3232
3233
3234
3235
3236
3237
3238
3239
3240
3241
3242
3243
3244
3245
3246
3247
3248
3249
3250
3251
3252
3253
3254
3255
3256
3257
3258
3259
3260
3261
3262
3263
3264
3265
3266
3267
3268
3269
3270
3271
3272
3273
3274
3275
3276
3277
3278
3279
3280
3281
3282
3283
3284
3285
3286
3287
3288
3289
3290
3291
3292
3293
3294
3295
3296
3297
3298
3299
3300
3301
3302
3303
3304
3305
3306
3307
3308
3309
3310
3311
3312
3313
3314
3315
3316
3317
3318
3319
3320
3321
3322
3323
3324
3325
3326
3327
3328
3329
3330
3331
3332
3333
3334
3335
3336
3337
3338
3339
3340
3341
3342
3343
3344
3345
3346
3347
3348
3349
3350
3351
3352
3353
3354
3355
3356
3357
3358
3359
3360
3361
3362
3363
3364
3365
3366
3367
3368
3369
3370
3371
3372
3373
3374
3375
3376
3377
3378
3379
3380
3381
3382
3383
3384
3385
3386
3387
3388
3389
3390
3391
3392
3393
3394
3395
3396
3397
3398
3399
3400
3401
3402
3403
3404
3405
3406
3407
3408
3409
3410
3411
3412
3413
3414
3415
3416
3417
3418
3419
3420
3421
3422
3423
3424
3425
3426
3427
3428
3429
3430
3431
3432
3433
3434
3435
3436
3437
3438
3439
3440
3441
3442
3443
3444
3445
3446
3447
3448
3449
3450
3451
3452
3453
3454
3455
3456
3457
3458
3459
3460
3461
3462
3463
3464
3465
3466
3467
3468
3469
3470
3471
3472
3473
3474
3475
3476
3477
3478
3479
3480
3481
3482
3483
3484
3485
3486
3487
3488
3489
3490
3491
3492
3493
3494
3495
3496
3497
3498
3499
3500
3501
3502
3503
3504
3505
3506
3507
3508
3509
3510
3511
3512
3513
3514
3515
3516
3517
3518
3519
3520
3521
3522
3523
3524
3525
3526
3527
3528
3529
3530
3531
3532
3533
3534
3535
3536
3537
3538
3539
3540
3541
3542
3543
3544
3545
3546
3547
3548
3549
3550
3551
3552
3553
3554
3555
3556
3557
3558
3559
3560
3561
3562
3563
3564
3565
3566
3567
3568
3569
3570
3571
3572
3573
3574
3575
3576
3577
3578
3579
3580
3581
3582
3583
3584
3585
3586
3587
3588
3589
3590
3591
3592
3593
3594
3595
3596
3597
3598
3599
3600
3601
3602
3603
3604
3605
3606
3607
3608
3609
3610
3611
3612
3613
3614
3615
3616
3617
3618
3619
3620
3621
3622
3623
3624
3625
3626
3627
3628
3629
3630
3631
3632
3633
3634
3635
3636
3637
3638
3639
3640
3641
3642
3643
3644
3645
3646
3647
3648
3649
3650
3651
3652
3653
3654
3655
3656
3657
3658
3659
3660
3661
3662
3663
3664
3665
3666
3667
3668
3669
3670
3671
3672
3673
3674
3675
3676
3677
3678
3679
3680
3681
3682
3683
3684
3685
3686
3687
3688
3689
3690
3691
3692
3693
3694
3695
3696
3697
3698
3699
3700
3701
3702
3703
3704
3705
3706
3707
3708
3709
3710
3711
3712
3713
3714
3715
3716
3717
3718
3719
3720
3721
3722
3723
3724
3725
3726
3727
3728
3729
3730
3731
3732
3733
3734
3735
3736
3737
3738
3739
3740
3741
3742
3743
3744
3745
3746
3747
3748
3749
3750
3751
3752
3753
3754
3755
3756
3757
3758
3759
3760
3761
3762
3763
3764
3765
3766
3767
3768
3769
3770
3771
3772
3773
3774
3775
3776
3777
3778
3779
3780
3781
3782
3783
3784
3785
3786
3787
3788
3789
3790
3791
3792
3793
3794
3795
3796
3797
3798
3799
3800
3801
3802
3803
3804
3805
3806
3807
3808
3809
3810
3811
3812
3813
3814
3815
3816
3817
3818
3819
3820
3821
3822
3823
3824
3825
3826
3827
3828
3829
3830
3831
3832
3833
3834
3835
3836
3837
3838
3839
3840
3841
3842
3843
3844
3845
3846
3847
3848
3849
3850
3851
3852
3853
3854
3855
3856
3857
3858
3859
3860
3861
3862
3863
3864
3865
3866
3867
3868
3869
3870
3871
3872
3873
3874
3875
3876
3877
3878
3879
3880
3881
3882
3883
3884
3885
3886
3887
3888
3889
3890
3891
3892
3893
3894
3895
3896
3897
3898
3899
3900
3901
3902
3903
3904
3905
3906
3907
3908
3909
3910
3911
3912
3913
3914
3915
3916
3917
3918
3919
3920
3921
3922
3923
3924
3925
3926
3927
3928
3929
3930
3931
3932
3933
3934
3935
3936
3937
3938
3939
3940
3941
3942
3943
3944
3945
3946
3947
3948
3949
3950
3951
3952
3953
3954
3955
3956
3957
3958
3959
3960
3961
3962
3963
3964
3965
3966
3967
3968
3969
3970
3971
3972
3973
3974
3975
3976
3977
3978
3979
3980
3981
3982
3983
3984
3985
3986
3987
3988
3989
3990
3991
3992
3993
3994
3995
3996
3997
3998
3999
4000
4001
4002
4003
4004
4005
4006
4007
4008
4009
4010
4011
4012
4013
4014
4015
4016
4017
4018
4019
4020
4021
4022
4023
4024
4025
4026
4027
4028
4029
4030
4031
4032
4033
4034
4035
4036
4037
4038
4039
4040
4041
4042
4043
4044
4045
4046
4047
4048
4049
4050
4051
4052
4053
4054
4055
4056
4057
4058
4059
4060
4061
4062
4063
4064
4065
4066
4067
4068
4069
4070
4071
4072
4073
4074
4075
4076
4077
4078
4079
4080
4081
4082
4083
4084
4085
4086
4087
4088
4089
4090
4091
4092
4093
4094
4095
4096
4097
4098
4099
4100
4101
4102
4103
4104
4105
4106
4107
4108
4109
4110
4111
4112
4113
4114
4115
4116
4117
4118
4119
4120
4121
4122
4123
4124
4125
4126
4127
4128
4129
4130
4131
4132
4133
4134
4135
4136
4137
4138
4139
4140
4141
4142
4143
4144
4145
4146
4147
4148
4149
4150
4151
4152
4153
4154
4155
4156
4157
4158
4159
4160
4161
4162
4163
4164
4165
4166
4167
4168
4169
4170
4171
4172
4173
4174
4175
4176
4177
4178
4179
4180
4181
4182
4183
4184
4185
4186
4187
4188
4189
4190
4191
4192
4193
4194
4195
4196
4197
4198
4199
4200
4201
4202
4203
4204
4205
4206
4207
4208
4209
4210
4211
4212
4213
4214
4215
4216
4217
4218
4219
4220
4221
4222
4223
4224
4225
4226
4227
4228
4229
4230
4231
4232
4233
4234
4235
4236
4237
4238
4239
4240
4241
4242
4243
4244
4245
4246
4247
4248
4249
4250
4251
4252
4253
4254
4255
4256
4257
4258
4259
4260
4261
4262
4263
4264
4265
4266
4267
4268
4269
4270
4271
4272
4273
4274
4275
4276
4277
4278
4279
4280
4281
4282
4283
4284
4285
4286
4287
4288
4289
4290
4291
4292
4293
4294
4295
4296
4297
4298
4299
4300
4301
4302
4303
4304
4305
4306
4307
4308
4309
4310
4311
4312
4313
4314
4315
4316
4317
4318
4319
4320
4321
4322
4323
4324
4325
4326
4327
4328
4329
4330
4331
4332
4333
4334
4335
4336
4337
4338
4339
4340
4341
4342
4343
4344
4345
4346
4347
4348
4349
4350
4351
4352
4353
4354
4355
4356
4357
4358
4359
4360
4361
4362
4363
4364
4365
4366
4367
4368
4369
4370
4371
4372
4373
4374
4375
4376
4377
4378
4379
4380
4381
4382
4383
4384
4385
4386
4387
4388
4389
4390
4391
4392
4393
4394
4395
4396
4397
4398
4399
4400
4401
4402
4403
4404
4405
4406
4407
4408
4409
4410
4411
4412
4413
4414
4415
4416
4417
4418
4419
4420
4421
4422
4423
4424
4425
4426
4427
4428
4429
4430
4431
4432
4433
4434
4435
4436
4437
4438
4439
4440
4441
4442
4443
4444
4445
4446
4447
4448
4449
4450
4451
4452
4453
4454
4455
4456
4457
4458
4459
4460
4461
4462
4463
4464
4465
4466
4467
4468
4469
4470
4471
4472
4473
4474
4475
4476
4477
4478
4479
4480
4481
4482
4483
4484
4485
4486
4487
4488
4489
4490
4491
4492
4493
4494
4495
4496
4497
4498
4499
4500
4501
4502
4503
4504
4505
4506
4507
4508
4509
4510
4511
4512
4513
4514
4515
4516
4517
4518
4519
4520
4521
4522
4523
4524
4525
4526
4527
4528
4529
4530
4531
4532
4533
4534
4535
4536
4537
4538
4539
4540
4541
4542
4543
4544
4545
4546
4547
4548
4549
4550
4551
4552
4553
4554
4555
4556
4557
4558
4559
4560
4561
4562
4563
4564
4565
4566
4567
4568
4569
4570
4571
4572
4573
4574
4575
4576
4577
4578
4579
4580
4581
4582
4583
4584
4585
4586
4587
4588
4589
4590
4591
4592
4593
4594
4595
4596
4597
4598
4599
4600
4601
4602
4603
4604
4605
4606
4607
4608
4609
4610
4611
4612
4613
4614
4615
4616
4617
4618
4619
4620
4621
4622
4623
4624
4625
4626
4627
4628
4629
4630
4631
4632
4633
4634
4635
4636
4637
4638
4639
4640
4641
4642
4643
4644
4645
4646
4647
4648
4649
4650
4651
4652
4653
4654
4655
4656
4657
4658
4659
4660
4661
4662
4663
4664
4665
4666
4667
4668
4669
4670
4671
4672
4673
4674
4675
4676
4677
4678
4679
4680
4681
4682
4683
4684
4685
4686
4687
4688
4689
4690
4691
4692
4693
4694
4695
4696
4697
4698
4699
4700
4701
4702
4703
4704
4705
4706
4707
4708
4709
4710
4711
4712
4713
4714
4715
4716
4717
4718
4719
4720
4721
4722
4723
4724
4725
4726
4727
4728
4729
4730
4731
4732
4733
4734
4735
4736
4737
4738
4739
4740
4741
4742
4743
4744
4745
4746
4747
4748
4749
4750
4751
4752
4753
4754
4755
4756
4757
4758
4759
4760
4761
4762
4763
4764
4765
4766
4767
4768
4769
4770
4771
4772
4773
4774
4775
4776
4777
4778
4779
4780
4781
4782
4783
4784
4785
4786
4787
4788
4789
4790
4791
4792
4793
4794
4795
4796
4797
4798
4799
4800
4801
4802
4803
4804
4805
4806
4807
4808
4809
4810
4811
4812
4813
4814
4815
4816
4817
4818
4819
4820
4821
4822
4823
4824
4825
4826
4827
4828
4829
4830
4831
4832
4833
4834
4835
4836
4837
4838
4839
4840
4841
4842
4843
4844
4845
4846
4847
4848
4849
4850
4851
4852
4853
4854
4855
4856
4857
4858
4859
4860
4861
4862
4863
4864
4865
4866
4867
4868
4869
4870
4871
4872
4873
4874
4875
4876
4877
4878
4879
4880
4881
4882
4883
4884
4885
4886
4887
4888
4889
4890
4891
4892
4893
4894
4895
4896
4897
4898
4899
4900
4901
4902
4903
4904
4905
4906
4907
4908
4909
4910
4911
4912
4913
4914
4915
4916
4917
4918
4919
4920
4921
4922
4923
4924
4925
4926
4927
4928
4929
4930
4931
4932
4933
4934
4935
4936
4937
4938
4939
4940
4941
4942
4943
4944
4945
4946
4947
4948
4949
4950
4951
4952
4953
4954
4955
4956
4957
4958
4959
4960
4961
4962
4963
4964
4965
4966
4967
4968
4969
4970
4971
4972
4973
4974
4975
4976
4977
4978
4979
4980
4981
4982
4983
4984
4985
4986
4987
4988
4989
4990
4991
4992
4993
4994
4995
4996
4997
4998
4999
5000
5001
5002
5003
5004
5005
5006
5007
5008
5009
5010
5011
5012
5013
5014
5015
5016
5017
5018
5019
5020
5021
5022
5023
5024
5025
5026
5027
5028
5029
5030
5031
5032
5033
5034
5035
5036
5037
5038
5039
5040
5041
5042
5043
5044
5045
5046
5047
5048
5049
5050
5051
5052
5053
5054
5055
5056
5057
5058
5059
5060
5061
5062
5063
5064
5065
5066
5067
5068
5069
5070
5071
5072
5073
5074
5075
5076
5077
5078
5079
5080
5081
5082
5083
5084
5085
5086
5087
5088
5089
5090
5091
5092
5093
5094
5095
5096
5097
5098
5099
5100
5101
5102
5103
5104
5105
5106
5107
5108
5109
5110
5111
5112
5113
5114
5115
5116
5117
5118
5119
5120
5121
5122
5123
5124
5125
5126
5127
5128
5129
5130
5131
5132
5133
5134
5135
5136
5137
5138
5139
5140
5141
5142
5143
5144
5145
5146
5147
5148
5149
5150
5151
5152
5153
5154
5155
5156
5157
5158
5159
5160
5161
5162
5163
5164
5165
5166
5167
5168
5169
5170
5171
5172
5173
5174
5175
5176
5177
5178
5179
5180
5181
5182
5183
5184
5185
5186
5187
5188
5189
5190
5191
5192
5193
5194
5195
5196
5197
5198
5199
5200
5201
5202
5203
5204
5205
5206
5207
5208
5209
5210
5211
5212
5213
5214
5215
5216
5217
5218
5219
5220
5221
5222
5223
5224
5225
5226
5227
5228
5229
5230
5231
5232
5233
5234
5235
5236
5237
5238
5239
5240
5241
5242
5243
5244
5245
5246
5247
5248
5249
5250
5251
5252
5253
5254
5255
5256
5257
5258
5259
5260
5261
5262
5263
5264
5265
5266
5267
5268
5269
5270
5271
5272
5273
5274
5275
5276
5277
5278
5279
5280
5281
5282
5283
5284
5285
5286
5287
5288
5289
5290
5291
5292
5293
5294
5295
5296
5297
5298
5299
5300
5301
5302
5303
5304
5305
5306
5307
5308
5309
5310
5311
5312
5313
5314
5315
5316
5317
5318
5319
5320
5321
5322
5323
5324
5325
5326
5327
5328
5329
5330
5331
5332
5333
5334
5335
5336
5337
5338
5339
5340
5341
5342
5343
5344
5345
5346
5347
5348
5349
5350
5351
5352
5353
5354
5355
5356
5357
5358
5359
5360
5361
5362
5363
5364
5365
5366
5367
5368
5369
5370
5371
5372
5373
5374
5375
5376
5377
5378
5379
5380
5381
5382
5383
5384
5385
5386
5387
5388
5389
5390
5391
5392
5393
5394
5395
5396
5397
5398
5399
5400
5401
5402
5403
5404
5405
5406
5407
5408
5409
5410
5411
5412
5413
5414
5415
5416
5417
5418
5419
5420
5421
5422
5423
5424
5425
5426
5427
5428
5429
5430
5431
5432
5433
5434
5435
5436
5437
5438
5439
5440
5441
5442
5443
5444
5445
5446
5447
5448
5449
5450
5451
5452
5453
5454
5455
5456
5457
5458
5459
5460
5461
5462
5463
5464
5465
5466
5467
5468
5469
5470
5471
5472
5473
5474
5475
5476
5477
5478
5479
5480
5481
5482
5483
5484
5485
5486
5487
5488
5489
5490
5491
5492
5493
5494
5495
5496
5497
5498
5499
5500
5501
5502
5503
5504
5505
5506
5507
5508
5509
5510
5511
5512
5513
5514
5515
5516
5517
5518
5519
5520
5521
5522
5523
5524
5525
5526
5527
5528
5529
5530
5531
5532
5533
5534
5535
5536
5537
5538
5539
5540
5541
5542
5543
5544
5545
5546
5547
5548
5549
5550
5551
5552
5553
5554
5555
5556
5557
5558
5559
5560
5561
5562
5563
5564
5565
5566
5567
5568
5569
5570
5571
5572
5573
5574
5575
5576
5577
5578
5579
5580
5581
5582
5583
5584
5585
5586
5587
5588
5589
5590
5591
5592
5593
5594
5595
5596
5597
5598
5599
5600
5601
5602
5603
5604
5605
5606
5607
5608
5609
5610
5611
5612
5613
5614
5615
5616
5617
5618
5619
5620
5621
5622
5623
5624
5625
5626
5627
5628
5629
5630
5631
5632
5633
5634
5635
5636
5637
5638
5639
5640
5641
5642
5643
5644
5645
5646
5647
5648
5649
5650
5651
5652
5653
5654
5655
5656
5657
5658
5659
5660
5661
5662
5663
5664
5665
5666
5667
5668
5669
5670
5671
5672
5673
5674
5675
5676
5677
5678
5679
5680
5681
5682
5683
5684
5685
5686
5687
5688
5689
5690
5691
5692
5693
5694
5695
5696
5697
5698
5699
5700
5701
5702
5703
5704
5705
5706
5707
5708
5709
5710
5711
5712
5713
5714
5715
5716
5717
5718
5719
5720
5721
5722
5723
5724
5725
5726
5727
5728
5729
5730
5731
5732
5733
5734
5735
5736
5737
5738
5739
5740
5741
5742
5743
5744
5745
5746
5747
5748
5749
5750
5751
5752
5753
5754
5755
5756
5757
5758
5759
5760
5761
5762
5763
5764
5765
5766
5767
5768
5769
5770
5771
5772
5773
5774
5775
5776
5777
5778
5779
5780
5781
5782
5783
5784
5785
5786
5787
5788
5789
5790
5791
5792
5793
5794
5795
5796
5797
5798
5799
5800
5801
5802
5803
5804
5805
5806
5807
5808
5809
5810
5811
5812
5813
5814
5815
5816
5817
5818
5819
5820
5821
5822
5823
5824
5825
5826
5827
5828
5829
5830
5831
5832
5833
5834
5835
5836
5837
5838
5839
5840
5841
5842
5843
5844
5845
5846
5847
5848
5849
5850
5851
5852
5853
5854
5855
5856
5857
5858
5859
5860
5861
5862
5863
5864
5865
5866
5867
5868
5869
5870
5871
5872
5873
5874
5875
5876
5877
5878
5879
5880
5881
5882
5883
5884
5885
5886
5887
5888
5889
5890
5891
5892
5893
5894
5895
5896
5897
5898
5899
5900
5901
5902
5903
5904
5905
5906
5907
5908
5909
5910
5911
5912
5913
5914
5915
5916
5917
5918
5919
5920
5921
5922
5923
5924
5925
5926
5927
5928
5929
5930
5931
5932
5933
5934
5935
5936
5937
5938
5939
5940
5941
5942
5943
5944
5945
5946
5947
5948
5949
5950
5951
5952
5953
5954
5955
5956
5957
5958
5959
5960
5961
5962
5963
5964
5965
5966
5967
5968
5969
5970
5971
5972
5973
5974
5975
5976
5977
5978
5979
5980
5981
5982
5983
5984
5985
5986
5987
5988
5989
5990
5991
5992
5993
5994
5995
5996
5997
5998
5999
6000
6001
6002
6003
6004
6005
6006
6007
6008
6009
6010
6011
6012
6013
6014
6015
6016
6017
6018
6019
6020
6021
6022
6023
6024
6025
6026
6027
6028
6029
6030
6031
6032
6033
6034
6035
6036
6037
6038
6039
6040
6041
6042
6043
6044
6045
6046
6047
6048
6049
6050
6051
6052
6053
6054
6055
6056
6057
6058
6059
6060
6061
6062
6063
6064
6065
6066
6067
6068
6069
6070
6071
6072
6073
6074
6075
6076
6077
6078
6079
6080
6081
6082
6083
6084
6085
6086
6087
6088
6089
6090
6091
6092
6093
6094
6095
6096
6097
6098
6099
6100
6101
6102
6103
6104
6105
6106
6107
6108
6109
6110
6111
6112
6113
6114
6115
6116
6117
6118
6119
6120
6121
6122
6123
6124
6125
6126
6127
6128
6129
6130
6131
6132
6133
6134
6135
6136
6137
6138
6139
6140
6141
6142
6143
6144
6145
6146
6147
6148
6149
6150
6151
6152
6153
6154
6155
6156
6157
6158
6159
6160
6161
6162
6163
6164
6165
6166
6167
6168
6169
6170
6171
6172
6173
6174
6175
6176
6177
6178
6179
6180
6181
6182
6183
6184
6185
6186
6187
6188
6189
6190
6191
6192
6193
6194
6195
6196
6197
6198
6199
6200
6201
6202
6203
6204
6205
6206
6207
6208
6209
6210
6211
6212
6213
6214
6215
6216
6217
6218
6219
6220
6221
6222
6223
6224
6225
6226
6227
6228
6229
6230
6231
6232
6233
6234
6235
6236
6237
6238
6239
6240
6241
6242
6243
6244
6245
6246
6247
6248
6249
6250
6251
6252
6253
6254
6255
6256
6257
6258
6259
6260
6261
6262
6263
6264
6265
6266
6267
6268
6269
6270
6271
6272
6273
6274
6275
6276
6277
6278
6279
6280
6281
6282
6283
6284
6285
6286
6287
6288
6289
6290
6291
6292
6293
6294
6295
6296
6297
6298
6299
6300
6301
6302
6303
6304
6305
6306
6307
6308
6309
6310
6311
6312
6313
6314
6315
6316
6317
6318
6319
6320
6321
6322
6323
6324
6325
6326
6327
6328
6329
6330
6331
6332
6333
6334
6335
6336
6337
6338
6339
6340
6341
6342
6343
6344
6345
6346
6347
6348
6349
6350
6351
6352
6353
6354
6355
6356
6357
6358
6359
6360
6361
6362
6363
6364
6365
6366
6367
6368
6369
6370
6371
6372
6373
6374
6375
6376
6377
6378
6379
6380
6381
6382
6383
6384
6385
6386
6387
6388
6389
6390
6391
6392
6393
6394
6395
6396
6397
6398
6399
6400
6401
6402
6403
6404
6405
6406
6407
6408
6409
6410
6411
6412
6413
6414
6415
6416
6417
6418
6419
6420
6421
6422
6423
6424
6425
6426
6427
6428
6429
6430
6431
6432
6433
6434
6435
6436
6437
6438
6439
6440
6441
6442
6443
6444
6445
6446
6447
6448
6449
6450
6451
6452
6453
6454
6455
6456
6457
6458
6459
6460
6461
6462
6463
6464
6465
6466
6467
6468
6469
6470
6471
6472
6473
6474
6475
6476
6477
6478
6479
6480
6481
6482
6483
6484
6485
6486
6487
6488
6489
6490
6491
6492
6493
6494
6495
6496
6497
6498
6499
6500
6501
6502
6503
6504
6505
6506
6507
6508
6509
6510
6511
6512
6513
6514
6515
6516
6517
6518
6519
6520
6521
6522
6523
6524
6525
6526
6527
6528
6529
6530
6531
6532
6533
6534
6535
6536
6537
6538
6539
6540
6541
6542
6543
6544
6545
6546
6547
6548
6549
6550
6551
6552
6553
6554
6555
6556
6557
6558
6559
6560
6561
6562
6563
6564
6565
6566
6567
6568
6569
6570
6571
6572
6573
6574
6575
6576
6577
6578
6579
6580
6581
6582
6583
6584
6585
6586
6587
6588
6589
6590
6591
6592
6593
6594
6595
6596
6597
6598
6599
6600
6601
6602
6603
6604
6605
6606
6607
6608
6609
6610
6611
6612
6613
6614
6615
6616
6617
6618
6619
6620
6621
6622
6623
6624
6625
6626
6627
6628
6629
6630
6631
6632
6633
6634
6635
6636
6637
6638
6639
6640
6641
6642
6643
6644
6645
6646
6647
6648
6649
6650
6651
6652
6653
6654
6655
6656
6657
6658
6659
6660
6661
6662
6663
6664
6665
6666
6667
6668
6669
6670
6671
6672
6673
6674
6675
6676
6677
6678
6679
6680
6681
6682
6683
6684
6685
6686
6687
6688
6689
6690
6691
6692
6693
6694
6695
6696
6697
6698
6699
6700
6701
6702
6703
6704
6705
6706
6707
6708
6709
6710
6711
6712
6713
6714
6715
6716
6717
6718
6719
6720
6721
6722
6723
6724
6725
6726
6727
6728
6729
6730
6731
6732
6733
6734
6735
6736
6737
6738
6739
6740
6741
6742
6743
6744
6745
6746
6747
6748
6749
6750
6751
6752
6753
6754
6755
6756
6757
6758
6759
6760
6761
6762
6763
6764
6765
6766
6767
6768
6769
6770
6771
6772
6773
6774
6775
6776
6777
6778
6779
6780
6781
6782
6783
6784
6785
6786
6787
6788
6789
6790
6791
6792
6793
6794
6795
6796
6797
6798
6799
6800
6801
6802
6803
6804
6805
6806
6807
6808
6809
6810
6811
6812
6813
6814
6815
6816
6817
6818
6819
6820
6821
6822
6823
6824
6825
6826
6827
6828
6829
6830
6831
6832
6833
6834
6835
6836
6837
6838
6839
6840
6841
6842
6843
6844
6845
6846
6847
6848
6849
6850
6851
6852
6853
6854
6855
6856
6857
6858
6859
6860
6861
6862
6863
6864
6865
6866
6867
6868
6869
6870
6871
6872
6873
6874
6875
6876
6877
6878
6879
6880
6881
6882
6883
6884
6885
6886
6887
6888
6889
6890
6891
6892
6893
6894
6895
6896
6897
6898
6899
6900
6901
6902
6903
6904
6905
6906
6907
6908
6909
6910
6911
6912
6913
6914
6915
6916
6917
6918
6919
6920
6921
6922
6923
6924
6925
6926
6927
6928
6929
6930
6931
6932
6933
6934
6935
6936
6937
6938
6939
6940
6941
6942
6943
6944
6945
6946
6947
6948
6949
6950
6951
6952
6953
6954
6955
6956
6957
6958
6959
6960
6961
6962
6963
6964
6965
6966
6967
6968
6969
6970
6971
6972
6973
6974
6975
6976
6977
6978
6979
6980
6981
6982
6983
6984
6985
6986
6987
6988
6989
6990
6991
6992
6993
6994
6995
6996
6997
6998
6999
7000
7001
7002
7003
7004
7005
7006
7007
7008
7009
7010
7011
7012
7013
7014
7015
7016
7017
7018
7019
7020
7021
7022
7023
7024
7025
7026
7027
7028
7029
7030
7031
7032
7033
7034
7035
7036
7037
7038
7039
7040
7041
7042
7043
7044
7045
7046
7047
7048
7049
7050
7051
7052
7053
7054
7055
7056
7057
7058
7059
7060
7061
7062
7063
7064
7065
7066
7067
7068
7069
7070
7071
7072
7073
7074
7075
7076
7077
7078
7079
7080
7081
7082
7083
7084
7085
7086
7087
7088
7089
7090
7091
7092
7093
7094
7095
7096
7097
7098
7099
7100
7101
7102
7103
7104
7105
7106
7107
7108
7109
7110
7111
7112
7113
7114
7115
7116
7117
7118
7119
7120
7121
7122
7123
7124
7125
7126
7127
7128
7129
7130
7131
7132
7133
7134
7135
7136
7137
7138
7139
7140
7141
7142
7143
7144
7145
7146
7147
7148
7149
7150
7151
7152
7153
7154
7155
7156
7157
7158
7159
7160
7161
7162
7163
7164
7165
7166
7167
7168
7169
7170
7171
7172
7173
7174
7175
7176
7177
7178
7179
7180
7181
7182
7183
7184
7185
7186
7187
7188
7189
7190
7191
7192
7193
7194
7195
7196
7197
7198
7199
7200
7201
7202
7203
7204
7205
7206
7207
7208
7209
7210
7211
7212
7213
7214
7215
7216
7217
7218
7219
7220
7221
7222
7223
7224
7225
7226
7227
7228
7229
7230
7231
7232
7233
7234
7235
7236
7237
7238
7239
7240
7241
7242
7243
7244
7245
7246
7247
7248
7249
7250
7251
7252
7253
7254
7255
7256
7257
7258
7259
7260
7261
7262
7263
7264
7265
7266
7267
7268
7269
7270
7271
7272
7273
7274
7275
7276
7277
7278
7279
7280
7281
7282
7283
7284
7285
7286
7287
7288
7289
7290
7291
7292
7293
7294
7295
7296
7297
7298
7299
7300
7301
7302
7303
7304
7305
7306
7307
7308
7309
7310
7311
7312
7313
7314
7315
7316
7317
7318
7319
7320
7321
7322
7323
7324
7325
7326
7327
7328
7329
7330
7331
7332
7333
7334
7335
7336
7337
7338
7339
7340
7341
7342
7343
7344
7345
7346
7347
7348
7349
7350
7351
7352
7353
7354
7355
7356
7357
7358
7359
7360
7361
7362
7363
7364
7365
7366
7367
7368
7369
7370
7371
7372
7373
7374
7375
7376
7377
7378
7379
7380
7381
7382
7383
7384
7385
7386
7387
7388
7389
7390
7391
7392
7393
7394
7395
7396
7397
7398
7399
7400
7401
7402
7403
7404
7405
7406
7407
7408
7409
7410
7411
7412
7413
7414
7415
7416
7417
7418
7419
7420
7421
7422
7423
7424
7425
7426
7427
7428
7429
7430
7431
7432
7433
7434
7435
7436
7437
7438
7439
7440
7441
7442
7443
7444
7445
7446
7447
7448
7449
7450
7451
7452
7453
7454
7455
7456
7457
7458
7459
7460
7461
7462
7463
7464
7465
7466
7467
7468
7469
7470
7471
7472
7473
7474
7475
7476
7477
7478
7479
7480
7481
7482
7483
7484
7485
7486
7487
7488
7489
7490
7491
7492
7493
7494
7495
7496
7497
7498
7499
7500
7501
7502
7503
7504
7505
7506
7507
7508
7509
7510
7511
7512
7513
7514
7515
7516
7517
7518
7519
7520
7521
7522
7523
7524
7525
7526
7527
7528
7529
7530
7531
7532
7533
7534
7535
7536
7537
7538
7539
7540
7541
7542
7543
7544
7545
7546
7547
7548
7549
7550
7551
7552
7553
7554
7555
7556
7557
7558
7559
7560
7561
7562
7563
7564
7565
7566
7567
7568
7569
7570
7571
7572
7573
7574
7575
7576
7577
7578
7579
7580
7581
7582
7583
7584
7585
7586
7587
7588
7589
7590
7591
7592
7593
7594
7595
7596
7597
7598
7599
7600
7601
7602
7603
7604
7605
7606
7607
7608
7609
7610
7611
7612
7613
7614
7615
7616
7617
7618
7619
7620
7621
7622
7623
7624
7625
7626
7627
7628
7629
7630
7631
7632
7633
7634
7635
7636
7637
7638
7639
7640
7641
7642
7643
7644
7645
7646
7647
7648
7649
7650
7651
7652
7653
7654
7655
7656
7657
7658
7659
7660
7661
7662
7663
7664
7665
7666
7667
7668
7669
7670
7671
7672
7673
7674
7675
7676
7677
7678
7679
7680
7681
7682
7683
7684
7685
7686
7687
7688
7689
7690
7691
7692
7693
7694
7695
7696
7697
7698
7699
7700
7701
7702
7703
7704
7705
7706
7707
7708
7709
7710
7711
7712
7713
7714
7715
7716
7717
7718
7719
7720
7721
7722
7723
7724
7725
7726
7727
7728
7729
7730
7731
7732
7733
7734
7735
7736
7737
7738
7739
7740
7741
7742
7743
7744
7745
7746
7747
7748
7749
7750
7751
7752
7753
7754
7755
7756
7757
7758
7759
7760
7761
7762
7763
7764
7765
7766
7767
7768
7769
7770
7771
7772
7773
7774
7775
7776
7777
7778
7779
7780
7781
7782
7783
7784
7785
7786
7787
7788
7789
7790
7791
7792
7793
7794
7795
7796
7797
7798
7799
7800
7801
7802
7803
7804
7805
7806
7807
7808
7809
7810
7811
7812
7813
7814
7815
7816
7817
7818
7819
7820
7821
7822
7823
7824
7825
7826
7827
7828
7829
7830
7831
7832
7833
7834
7835
7836
7837
7838
7839
7840
7841
7842
7843
7844
7845
7846
7847
7848
7849
7850
7851
7852
7853
7854
7855
7856
7857
7858
7859
7860
7861
7862
7863
7864
7865
7866
7867
7868
7869
7870
7871
7872
7873
7874
7875
7876
7877
7878
7879
7880
7881
7882
7883
7884
7885
7886
7887
7888
7889
7890
7891
7892
7893
7894
7895
7896
7897
7898
7899
7900
7901
7902
7903
7904
7905
7906
7907
7908
7909
7910
7911
7912
7913
7914
7915
7916
7917
7918
7919
7920
7921
7922
7923
7924
7925
7926
7927
7928
7929
7930
7931
7932
7933
7934
7935
7936
7937
7938
7939
7940
7941
7942
7943
7944
7945
7946
7947
7948
7949
7950
7951
7952
7953
7954
7955
7956
7957
7958
7959
7960
7961
7962
7963
7964
7965
7966
7967
7968
7969
7970
7971
7972
7973
7974
7975
7976
7977
7978
7979
7980
7981
7982
7983
7984
7985
7986
7987
7988
7989
7990
7991
7992
7993
7994
7995
7996
7997
7998
7999
8000
8001
8002
8003
8004
8005
8006
8007
8008
8009
8010
8011
8012
8013
8014
8015
8016
8017
8018
8019
8020
8021
8022
8023
8024
8025
8026
8027
8028
8029
8030
8031
8032
8033
8034
8035
8036
8037
8038
8039
8040
8041
8042
8043
8044
8045
8046
8047
8048
8049
8050
8051
8052
8053
8054
8055
8056
8057
8058
8059
8060
8061
8062
8063
8064
8065
8066
8067
8068
8069
8070
8071
8072
8073
8074
8075
8076
8077
8078
8079
8080
8081
8082
8083
8084
8085
8086
8087
8088
8089
8090
8091
8092
8093
8094
8095
8096
8097
8098
8099
8100
8101
8102
8103
8104
8105
8106
8107
8108
8109
8110
8111
8112
8113
8114
8115
8116
8117
8118
8119
8120
8121
8122
8123
8124
8125
8126
8127
8128
8129
8130
8131
8132
8133
8134
8135
8136
8137
8138
8139
8140
8141
8142
8143
8144
8145
8146
8147
8148
8149
8150
8151
8152
8153
8154
8155
8156
8157
8158
8159
8160
8161
8162
8163
8164
8165
8166
8167
8168
8169
8170
8171
8172
8173
8174
8175
8176
8177
8178
8179
8180
8181
8182
8183
8184
8185
8186
8187
8188
8189
8190
8191
8192
8193
8194
8195
8196
8197
8198
8199
8200
8201
8202
8203
8204
8205
8206
8207
8208
8209
8210
8211
8212
8213
8214
8215
8216
8217
8218
8219
8220
8221
8222
8223
8224
8225
8226
8227
8228
8229
8230
8231
8232
8233
8234
8235
8236
8237
8238
8239
8240
8241
8242
8243
8244
8245
8246
8247
8248
8249
8250
8251
8252
8253
8254
8255
8256
8257
8258
8259
8260
8261
8262
8263
8264
8265
8266
8267
8268
8269
8270
8271
8272
8273
8274
8275
8276
8277
8278
8279
8280
8281
8282
8283
8284
8285
8286
8287
8288
8289
8290
8291
8292
8293
8294
8295
8296
8297
8298
8299
8300
8301
8302
8303
8304
8305
8306
8307
8308
8309
8310
8311
8312
8313
8314
8315
8316
8317
8318
8319
8320
8321
8322
8323
8324
8325
8326
8327
8328
8329
8330
8331
8332
8333
8334
8335
8336
8337
8338
8339
8340
8341
8342
8343
8344
8345
8346
8347
8348
8349
8350
8351
8352
8353
8354
8355
8356
8357
8358
8359
8360
8361
8362
8363
8364
8365
8366
8367
8368
8369
8370
8371
8372
8373
8374
8375
8376
8377
8378
8379
8380
8381
8382
8383
8384
8385
8386
8387
8388
8389
8390
8391
8392
8393
8394
8395
8396
8397
8398
8399
8400
8401
8402
8403
8404
8405
8406
8407
8408
8409
8410
8411
8412
8413
8414
8415
8416
8417
8418
8419
8420
8421
8422
8423
8424
8425
8426
8427
8428
8429
8430
8431
8432
8433
8434
8435
8436
8437
8438
8439
8440
8441
8442
8443
8444
8445
8446
8447
8448
8449
8450
8451
8452
8453
8454
8455
8456
8457
8458
8459
8460
8461
8462
8463
8464
8465
8466
8467
8468
8469
8470
8471
8472
8473
8474
8475
8476
8477
8478
8479
8480
8481
8482
8483
8484
8485
8486
8487
8488
8489
8490
8491
8492
8493
8494
8495
8496
8497
8498
8499
8500
8501
8502
8503
8504
8505
8506
8507
8508
8509
8510
8511
8512
8513
8514
8515
8516
8517
8518
8519
8520
8521
8522
8523
8524
8525
8526
8527
8528
8529
8530
8531
8532
8533
8534
8535
8536
8537
8538
8539
8540
8541
8542
8543
8544
8545
8546
8547
8548
8549
8550
8551
8552
8553
8554
8555
8556
8557
8558
8559
8560
8561
8562
8563
8564
8565
8566
8567
8568
8569
8570
8571
8572
8573
8574
8575
8576
8577
8578
8579
8580
8581
8582
8583
8584
8585
8586
8587
8588
8589
8590
8591
8592
8593
8594
8595
8596
8597
8598
8599
8600
8601
8602
8603
8604
8605
8606
8607
8608
8609
8610
8611
8612
8613
8614
8615
8616
8617
8618
8619
8620
8621
8622
8623
8624
8625
8626
8627
8628
8629
8630
8631
8632
8633
8634
8635
8636
8637
8638
8639
8640
8641
8642
8643
8644
8645
8646
8647
8648
8649
8650
8651
8652
8653
8654
8655
8656
8657
8658
8659
8660
8661
8662
8663
8664
8665
8666
8667
8668
8669
8670
8671
8672
8673
8674
8675
8676
8677
8678
8679
8680
8681
8682
8683
8684
8685
8686
8687
8688
8689
8690
8691
8692
8693
8694
8695
8696
8697
8698
8699
8700
8701
8702
8703
8704
8705
8706
8707
8708
8709
8710
8711
8712
8713
8714
8715
8716
8717
8718
8719
8720
8721
8722
8723
8724
8725
8726
8727
8728
8729
8730
8731
8732
8733
8734
8735
8736
8737
8738
8739
8740
8741
8742
8743
8744
8745
8746
8747
8748
8749
8750
8751
8752
8753
8754
8755
8756
8757
8758
8759
8760
8761
8762
8763
8764
8765
8766
8767
8768
8769
8770
8771
8772
8773
8774
8775
8776
8777
8778
8779
8780
8781
8782
8783
8784
8785
8786
8787
8788
8789
8790
8791
8792
8793
8794
8795
8796
8797
8798
8799
8800
8801
8802
8803
8804
8805
8806
8807
8808
8809
8810
8811
8812
8813
8814
8815
8816
8817
8818
8819
8820
8821
8822
8823
8824
8825
8826
8827
8828
8829
8830
8831
8832
8833
8834
8835
8836
8837
8838
8839
8840
8841
8842
8843
8844
8845
8846
8847
8848
8849
8850
8851
8852
8853
8854
8855
8856
8857
8858
8859
8860
8861
8862
8863
8864
8865
8866
8867
8868
8869
8870
8871
8872
8873
8874
8875
8876
8877
8878
8879
8880
8881
8882
8883
8884
8885
8886
8887
8888
8889
8890
8891
8892
8893
8894
8895
8896
8897
8898
8899
8900
8901
8902
8903
8904
8905
8906
8907
8908
8909
8910
8911
8912
8913
8914
8915
8916
8917
8918
8919
8920
8921
8922
8923
8924
8925
8926
8927
8928
8929
8930
8931
8932
8933
8934
8935
8936
8937
8938
8939
8940
8941
8942
8943
8944
8945
8946
8947
8948
8949
8950
8951
8952
8953
8954
8955
8956
8957
8958
8959
8960
8961
8962
8963
8964
8965
8966
8967
8968
8969
8970
8971
8972
8973
8974
8975
8976
8977
8978
8979
8980
8981
8982
8983
8984
8985
8986
8987
8988
8989
8990
8991
8992
8993
8994
8995
8996
8997
8998
8999
9000
9001
9002
9003
9004
9005
9006
9007
9008
9009
9010
9011
9012
9013
9014
9015
9016
9017
9018
9019
9020
9021
9022
9023
9024
9025
9026
9027
9028
9029
9030
9031
9032
9033
9034
9035
9036
9037
9038
9039
9040
9041
9042
9043
9044
9045
9046
9047
9048
9049
9050
9051
9052
9053
9054
9055
9056
9057
9058
9059
9060
9061
9062
9063
9064
9065
9066
9067
9068
9069
9070
9071
9072
9073
9074
9075
9076
9077
9078
9079
9080
9081
9082
9083
9084
9085
9086
9087
9088
9089
9090
9091
9092
9093
9094
9095
9096
9097
9098
9099
9100
9101
9102
9103
9104
9105
9106
9107
9108
9109
9110
9111
9112
9113
9114
9115
9116
9117
9118
9119
9120
9121
9122
9123
9124
9125
9126
9127
9128
9129
9130
9131
9132
9133
9134
9135
9136
9137
9138
9139
9140
9141
9142
9143
9144
9145
9146
9147
9148
9149
9150
9151
9152
9153
9154
9155
9156
9157
9158
9159
9160
9161
9162
9163
9164
9165
9166
9167
9168
9169
9170
9171
9172
9173
9174
9175
9176
9177
9178
9179
9180
9181
9182
9183
9184
9185
9186
9187
9188
9189
9190
9191
9192
9193
9194
9195
9196
9197
9198
9199
9200
9201
9202
9203
9204
9205
9206
9207
9208
9209
9210
9211
9212
9213
9214
9215
9216
9217
9218
9219
9220
9221
9222
9223
9224
9225
9226
9227
9228
9229
9230
9231
9232
9233
9234
9235
9236
9237
9238
9239
9240
9241
9242
9243
9244
9245
9246
9247
9248
9249
9250
9251
9252
9253
9254
9255
9256
9257
9258
9259
9260
9261
9262
9263
9264
9265
9266
9267
9268
9269
9270
9271
9272
9273
9274
9275
9276
9277
9278
9279
9280
9281
9282
9283
9284
9285
9286
9287
9288
9289
9290
9291
9292
9293
9294
9295
9296
9297
9298
9299
9300
9301
9302
9303
9304
9305
9306
9307
9308
9309
9310
9311
9312
9313
9314
9315
9316
9317
9318
9319
9320
9321
9322
9323
9324
9325
9326
9327
9328
9329
9330
9331
9332
9333
9334
9335
9336
9337
9338
9339
9340
9341
9342
9343
9344
9345
9346
9347
9348
9349
9350
9351
9352
9353
9354
9355
9356
9357
9358
9359
9360
9361
9362
9363
9364
9365
9366
9367
9368
9369
9370
9371
9372
9373
9374
9375
9376
9377
9378
9379
9380
9381
9382
9383
9384
9385
9386
9387
9388
9389
9390
9391
9392
9393
9394
9395
9396
9397
9398
9399
9400
9401
9402
9403
9404
9405
9406
9407
9408
9409
9410
9411
9412
9413
9414
9415
9416
9417
9418
9419
9420
9421
9422
9423
9424
9425
9426
9427
9428
9429
9430
9431
9432
9433
9434
9435
9436
9437
9438
9439
9440
9441
9442
9443
9444
9445
9446
9447
9448
9449
9450
9451
9452
9453
9454
9455
9456
9457
9458
9459
9460
9461
9462
9463
9464
9465
9466
9467
9468
9469
9470
9471
9472
9473
9474
9475
9476
9477
9478
9479
9480
9481
9482
9483
9484
9485
9486
9487
9488
9489
9490
9491
9492
9493
9494
9495
9496
9497
9498
9499
9500
9501
9502
9503
9504
9505
9506
9507
9508
9509
9510
9511
9512
9513
9514
9515
9516
9517
9518
9519
9520
9521
9522
9523
9524
9525
9526
9527
9528
9529
9530
9531
9532
9533
9534
9535
9536
9537
9538
9539
9540
9541
9542
9543
9544
9545
9546
9547
9548
9549
9550
9551
9552
9553
9554
9555
9556
9557
9558
9559
9560
9561
9562
9563
9564
9565
9566
9567
9568
9569
9570
9571
9572
9573
9574
9575
9576
9577
9578
9579
9580
9581
9582
9583
9584
9585
9586
9587
9588
9589
9590
9591
9592
9593
9594
9595
9596
9597
9598
9599
9600
9601
9602
9603
9604
9605
9606
9607
9608
9609
9610
9611
9612
9613
9614
9615
9616
9617
9618
9619
9620
9621
9622
9623
9624
9625
9626
9627
9628
9629
9630
9631
9632
9633
9634
9635
9636
9637
9638
9639
9640
9641
9642
9643
9644
9645
9646
9647
9648
9649
9650
9651
9652
9653
9654
9655
9656
9657
9658
9659
9660
9661
9662
9663
9664
9665
9666
9667
9668
9669
9670
9671
9672
9673
9674
9675
9676
9677
9678
9679
9680
9681
9682
9683
9684
9685
9686
9687
9688
9689
9690
9691
9692
9693
9694
9695
9696
9697
9698
9699
9700
9701
9702
9703
9704
9705
9706
9707
9708
9709
9710
9711
9712
9713
9714
9715
9716
9717
9718
9719
9720
9721
9722
9723
9724
9725
9726
9727
9728
9729
9730
9731
9732
9733
9734
9735
9736
9737
9738
9739
9740
9741
9742
9743
9744
9745
9746
9747
9748
9749
9750
9751
9752
9753
9754
9755
9756
9757
9758
9759
9760
9761
9762
9763
9764
9765
9766
9767
9768
9769
9770
9771
9772
9773
9774
9775
9776
9777
9778
9779
9780
9781
9782
9783
9784
9785
9786
9787
9788
9789
9790
9791
9792
9793
9794
9795
9796
9797
9798
9799
9800
9801
9802
9803
9804
9805
9806
9807
9808
9809
9810
9811
9812
9813
9814
9815
9816
9817
9818
9819
9820
9821
9822
9823
9824
9825
9826
9827
9828
9829
9830
9831
9832
9833
9834
9835
9836
9837
9838
9839
9840
9841
9842
9843
9844
9845
9846
9847
9848
9849
9850
9851
9852
9853
9854
9855
9856
9857
9858
9859
9860
9861
9862
9863
9864
9865
9866
9867
9868
9869
9870
9871
9872
9873
9874
9875
9876
9877
9878
9879
9880
9881
9882
9883
9884
9885
9886
9887
9888
9889
9890
9891
9892
9893
9894
9895
9896
9897
9898
9899
9900
9901
9902
9903
9904
9905
9906
9907
9908
9909
9910
9911
9912
9913
9914
9915
9916
9917
9918
9919
9920
9921
9922
9923
9924
9925
9926
9927
9928
9929
9930
9931
9932
9933
9934
9935
9936
9937
9938
9939
9940
9941
9942
9943
9944
9945
9946
9947
9948
9949
9950
9951
9952
9953
9954
9955
9956
9957
9958
9959
9960
9961
9962
9963
9964
9965
9966
9967
9968
9969
9970
9971
9972
9973
9974
9975
9976
9977
9978
9979
9980
9981
9982
9983
9984
9985
9986
9987
9988
9989
9990
9991
9992
9993
9994
9995
9996
9997
9998
9999
10000
10001
10002
10003
10004
10005
10006
10007
10008
10009
10010
10011
10012
10013
10014
10015
10016
10017
10018
10019
10020
10021
10022
10023
10024
10025
10026
10027
10028
10029
10030
10031
10032
10033
10034
10035
10036
10037
10038
10039
10040
10041
10042
10043
10044
10045
10046
10047
10048
10049
10050
10051
10052
10053
10054
10055
10056
10057
10058
10059
10060
10061
10062
10063
10064
10065
10066
10067
10068
10069
10070
10071
10072
10073
10074
10075
10076
10077
10078
10079
10080
10081
10082
10083
10084
10085
10086
10087
10088
10089
10090
10091
10092
10093
10094
10095
10096
10097
10098
10099
10100
10101
10102
10103
10104
10105
10106
10107
10108
10109
10110
10111
10112
10113
10114
10115
10116
10117
10118
10119
10120
10121
10122
10123
10124
10125
10126
10127
10128
10129
10130
10131
10132
10133
10134
10135
10136
10137
10138
10139
10140
10141
10142
10143
10144
10145
10146
10147
10148
10149
10150
10151
10152
10153
10154
10155
10156
10157
10158
10159
10160
10161
10162
10163
10164
10165
10166
10167
10168
10169
10170
10171
10172
10173
10174
10175
10176
10177
10178
10179
10180
10181
10182
10183
10184
10185
10186
10187
10188
10189
10190
10191
10192
10193
10194
10195
10196
10197
10198
10199
10200
10201
10202
10203
10204
10205
10206
10207
10208
10209
10210
10211
10212
10213
10214
10215
10216
10217
10218
10219
10220
10221
10222
10223
10224
10225
10226
10227
10228
10229
10230
10231
10232
10233
10234
10235
10236
10237
10238
10239
10240
10241
10242
10243
10244
10245
10246
10247
10248
10249
10250
10251
10252
10253
10254
10255
10256
10257
10258
10259
10260
10261
10262
10263
10264
10265
10266
10267
10268
10269
10270
10271
10272
10273
10274
10275
10276
10277
10278
10279
10280
10281
10282
10283
10284
10285
10286
10287
10288
10289
10290
10291
10292
10293
10294
10295
10296
10297
10298
10299
10300
10301
10302
10303
10304
10305
10306
10307
10308
10309
10310
10311
10312
10313
10314
10315
10316
10317
10318
10319
10320
10321
10322
10323
10324
10325
10326
10327
10328
10329
10330
10331
10332
10333
10334
10335
10336
10337
10338
10339
10340
10341
10342
10343
10344
10345
10346
10347
10348
10349
10350
10351
10352
10353
10354
10355
10356
10357
10358
10359
10360
10361
10362
10363
10364
10365
10366
10367
10368
10369
10370
10371
10372
10373
10374
10375
10376
10377
10378
10379
10380
10381
10382
10383
10384
10385
10386
10387
10388
10389
10390
10391
10392
10393
10394
10395
10396
10397
10398
10399
10400
10401
10402
10403
10404
10405
10406
10407
10408
10409
10410
10411
10412
10413
10414
10415
10416
10417
10418
10419
10420
10421
10422
10423
10424
10425
10426
10427
10428
10429
10430
10431
10432
10433
10434
10435
10436
10437
10438
10439
10440
10441
10442
10443
10444
10445
10446
10447
10448
10449
10450
10451
10452
10453
10454
10455
10456
10457
10458
10459
10460
10461
10462
10463
10464
10465
10466
10467
10468
10469
10470
10471
10472
10473
10474
10475
10476
10477
10478
10479
10480
10481
10482
10483
10484
10485
10486
10487
10488
10489
10490
10491
10492
10493
10494
10495
10496
10497
10498
10499
10500
10501
10502
10503
10504
10505
10506
10507
10508
10509
10510
10511
10512
10513
10514
10515
10516
10517
10518
10519
10520
10521
10522
10523
10524
10525
10526
10527
10528
10529
10530
10531
10532
10533
10534
10535
10536
10537
10538
10539
10540
10541
10542
10543
10544
10545
10546
10547
10548
10549
10550
10551
10552
10553
10554
10555
10556
10557
10558
10559
10560
10561
10562
10563
10564
10565
10566
10567
10568
10569
10570
10571
10572
10573
10574
10575
10576
10577
10578
10579
10580
10581
10582
10583
10584
10585
10586
10587
10588
10589
10590
10591
10592
10593
10594
10595
10596
10597
10598
10599
10600
10601
10602
10603
10604
10605
10606
10607
10608
10609
10610
10611
10612
10613
10614
10615
10616
10617
10618
10619
10620
10621
10622
10623
10624
10625
10626
10627
10628
10629
10630
10631
10632
10633
10634
10635
10636
10637
10638
10639
10640
10641
10642
10643
10644
10645
10646
10647
10648
10649
10650
10651
10652
10653
10654
10655
10656
10657
10658
10659
10660
10661
10662
10663
10664
10665
10666
10667
10668
10669
10670
10671
10672
10673
10674
10675
10676
10677
10678
10679
10680
10681
10682
10683
10684
10685
10686
10687
10688
10689
10690
10691
10692
10693
10694
10695
10696
10697
10698
10699
10700
10701
10702
10703
10704
10705
10706
10707
10708
10709
10710
10711
10712
10713
10714
10715
10716
10717
10718
10719
10720
10721
10722
10723
10724
10725
10726
10727
10728
10729
10730
10731
10732
10733
10734
10735
10736
10737
10738
10739
10740
10741
10742
10743
10744
10745
10746
10747
10748
10749
10750
10751
10752
10753
10754
10755
10756
10757
10758
10759
10760
10761
10762
10763
10764
10765
10766
10767
10768
10769
10770
10771
10772
10773
10774
10775
10776
10777
10778
10779
10780
10781
10782
10783
10784
10785
10786
10787
10788
10789
10790
10791
10792
10793
10794
10795
10796
10797
10798
10799
10800
10801
10802
10803
10804
10805
10806
10807
10808
10809
10810
10811
10812
10813
10814
10815
10816
10817
10818
10819
10820
10821
10822
10823
10824
10825
10826
10827
10828
10829
10830
10831
10832
10833
10834
10835
10836
10837
10838
10839
10840
10841
10842
10843
10844
10845
10846
10847
10848
10849
10850
10851
10852
10853
10854
10855
10856
10857
10858
10859
10860
10861
10862
10863
10864
10865
10866
10867
10868
10869
10870
10871
10872
10873
10874
10875
10876
10877
10878
10879
10880
10881
10882
10883
10884
10885
10886
10887
10888
10889
10890
10891
10892
10893
10894
10895
10896
10897
10898
10899
10900
10901
10902
10903
10904
10905
10906
10907
10908
10909
10910
10911
10912
10913
10914
10915
10916
10917
10918
10919
10920
10921
10922
10923
10924
10925
10926
10927
10928
10929
10930
10931
10932
10933
10934
10935
10936
10937
10938
10939
10940
10941
10942
10943
10944
10945
10946
10947
10948
10949
10950
10951
10952
10953
10954
10955
10956
10957
10958
10959
10960
10961
10962
10963
10964
10965
10966
10967
10968
10969
10970
10971
10972
10973
10974
10975
10976
10977
10978
10979
10980
10981
10982
10983
10984
10985
10986
10987
10988
10989
10990
10991
10992
10993
10994
10995
10996
10997
10998
10999
11000
11001
11002
11003
11004
11005
11006
11007
11008
11009
11010
11011
11012
11013
11014
11015
11016
11017
11018
11019
11020
11021
11022
11023
11024
11025
11026
11027
11028
11029
11030
11031
11032
11033
11034
11035
11036
11037
11038
11039
11040
11041
11042
11043
11044
11045
11046
11047
11048
11049
11050
11051
11052
11053
11054
11055
11056
11057
11058
11059
11060
11061
11062
11063
11064
11065
11066
11067
11068
11069
11070
11071
11072
11073
11074
11075
11076
11077
11078
11079
11080
11081
11082
11083
11084
11085
11086
11087
11088
11089
11090
11091
11092
11093
11094
11095
11096
11097
11098
11099
11100
11101
11102
11103
11104
11105
11106
11107
11108
11109
11110
11111
11112
11113
11114
11115
11116
11117
11118
11119
11120
11121
11122
11123
11124
11125
11126
11127
11128
11129
11130
11131
11132
11133
11134
11135
11136
11137
11138
11139
11140
11141
11142
11143
11144
11145
11146
11147
11148
11149
11150
11151
11152
11153
11154
11155
11156
11157
11158
11159
11160
11161
11162
11163
11164
11165
11166
11167
11168
11169
11170
11171
11172
11173
11174
11175
11176
11177
11178
11179
11180
11181
11182
11183
11184
11185
11186
11187
11188
11189
11190
11191
11192
11193
11194
11195
11196
11197
11198
11199
11200
11201
11202
11203
11204
11205
11206
11207
11208
11209
11210
11211
11212
11213
11214
11215
11216
11217
11218
11219
11220
11221
11222
11223
11224
11225
11226
11227
11228
11229
11230
11231
11232
11233
11234
11235
11236
11237
11238
11239
11240
11241
11242
11243
11244
11245
11246
11247
11248
11249
11250
11251
11252
11253
11254
11255
11256
11257
11258
11259
11260
11261
11262
11263
11264
11265
11266
11267
11268
11269
11270
11271
11272
11273
11274
11275
11276
11277
11278
11279
11280
11281
11282
11283
11284
11285
11286
11287
11288
11289
11290
11291
11292
11293
11294
11295
11296
11297
11298
11299
11300
11301
11302
11303
11304
11305
11306
11307
11308
11309
11310
11311
11312
11313
11314
11315
11316
11317
11318
11319
11320
11321
11322
11323
11324
11325
11326
11327
11328
11329
11330
11331
11332
11333
11334
11335
11336
11337
11338
11339
11340
11341
11342
11343
11344
11345
11346
11347
11348
11349
11350
11351
11352
11353
11354
11355
11356
11357
11358
11359
11360
11361
11362
11363
11364
11365
11366
11367
11368
11369
11370
11371
11372
11373
11374
11375
11376
11377
11378
11379
11380
11381
11382
11383
11384
11385
11386
11387
11388
11389
11390
11391
11392
11393
11394
11395
11396
11397
11398
11399
11400
11401
11402
11403
11404
11405
11406
11407
11408
11409
11410
11411
11412
11413
11414
11415
11416
11417
11418
11419
11420
11421
11422
11423
11424
11425
11426
11427
11428
11429
11430
11431
11432
11433
11434
11435
11436
11437
11438
11439
11440
11441
11442
11443
11444
11445
11446
11447
11448
11449
11450
11451
11452
11453
11454
11455
11456
11457
11458
11459
11460
11461
11462
11463
11464
11465
11466
11467
11468
11469
11470
11471
11472
11473
11474
11475
11476
11477
11478
11479
11480
11481
11482
11483
11484
11485
11486
11487
11488
11489
11490
11491
11492
11493
11494
11495
11496
11497
11498
11499
11500
11501
11502
11503
11504
11505
11506
11507
11508
11509
11510
11511
11512
11513
11514
11515
11516
11517
11518
11519
11520
11521
11522
11523
11524
11525
11526
11527
11528
11529
11530
11531
11532
11533
11534
11535
11536
11537
11538
11539
11540
11541
11542
11543
11544
11545
11546
11547
11548
11549
11550
11551
11552
11553
11554
11555
11556
11557
11558
11559
11560
11561
11562
11563
11564
11565
11566
11567
11568
11569
11570
11571
11572
11573
11574
11575
11576
11577
11578
11579
11580
11581
11582
11583
11584
11585
11586
11587
11588
11589
11590
11591
11592
11593
11594
11595
11596
11597
11598
11599
11600
11601
11602
11603
11604
11605
11606
11607
11608
11609
11610
11611
11612
11613
11614
11615
11616
11617
11618
11619
11620
11621
11622
11623
11624
11625
11626
11627
11628
11629
11630
11631
11632
11633
11634
11635
11636
11637
11638
11639
11640
11641
11642
11643
11644
11645
11646
11647
11648
11649
11650
11651
11652
11653
11654
11655
11656
11657
11658
11659
11660
11661
11662
11663
11664
11665
11666
11667
11668
11669
11670
11671
11672
11673
11674
11675
11676
11677
11678
11679
11680
11681
11682
11683
11684
11685
11686
11687
11688
11689
11690
11691
11692
11693
11694
11695
11696
11697
11698
11699
11700
11701
11702
11703
11704
11705
11706
11707
11708
11709
11710
11711
11712
11713
11714
11715
11716
11717
11718
11719
11720
11721
11722
11723
11724
11725
11726
11727
11728
11729
11730
11731
11732
11733
11734
11735
11736
11737
11738
11739
11740
11741
11742
11743
11744
11745
11746
11747
11748
11749
11750
11751
11752
11753
11754
11755
11756
11757
11758
11759
11760
11761
11762
11763
11764
11765
11766
11767
11768
11769
11770
11771
11772
11773
11774
11775
11776
11777
11778
11779
11780
11781
11782
11783
11784
11785
11786
11787
11788
11789
11790
11791
11792
11793
11794
11795
11796
11797
11798
11799
11800
11801
11802
11803
11804
11805
11806
11807
11808
11809
11810
11811
11812
11813
11814
11815
11816
11817
11818
11819
11820
11821
11822
11823
11824
11825
11826
11827
11828
11829
11830
11831
11832
11833
11834
11835
11836
11837
11838
11839
11840
11841
11842
11843
11844
11845
11846
11847
11848
11849
11850
11851
11852
11853
11854
11855
11856
11857
11858
11859
11860
11861
11862
11863
11864
11865
11866
11867
11868
11869
11870
11871
11872
11873
11874
11875
11876
11877
11878
11879
11880
11881
11882
11883
11884
11885
11886
11887
11888
11889
11890
11891
11892
11893
11894
11895
11896
11897
11898
11899
11900
11901
11902
11903
11904
11905
11906
11907
11908
11909
11910
11911
11912
11913
11914
11915
11916
11917
11918
11919
11920
11921
11922
11923
11924
11925
11926
11927
11928
11929
11930
11931
11932
11933
11934
11935
11936
11937
11938
11939
11940
11941
11942
11943
11944
11945
11946
11947
11948
11949
11950
11951
11952
11953
11954
11955
11956
11957
11958
11959
11960
11961
11962
11963
11964
11965
11966
11967
11968
11969
11970
11971
11972
11973
11974
11975
11976
11977
11978
11979
11980
11981
11982
11983
11984
11985
11986
11987
11988
11989
11990
11991
11992
11993
11994
11995
11996
11997
11998
11999
12000
12001
12002
12003
12004
12005
12006
12007
12008
12009
12010
12011
12012
12013
12014
12015
12016
12017
12018
12019
12020
12021
12022
12023
12024
12025
12026
12027
12028
12029
12030
12031
12032
12033
12034
12035
12036
12037
12038
12039
12040
12041
12042
12043
12044
12045
12046
12047
12048
12049
12050
12051
12052
12053
12054
12055
12056
12057
12058
12059
12060
12061
12062
12063
12064
12065
12066
12067
12068
12069
12070
12071
12072
12073
12074
12075
12076
12077
12078
12079
12080
12081
12082
12083
12084
12085
12086
12087
12088
12089
12090
12091
12092
12093
12094
12095
12096
12097
12098
12099
12100
12101
12102
12103
12104
12105
12106
12107
12108
12109
12110
12111
12112
12113
12114
12115
12116
12117
12118
12119
12120
12121
12122
12123
12124
12125
12126
12127
12128
12129
12130
12131
12132
12133
12134
12135
12136
12137
12138
12139
12140
12141
12142
12143
12144
12145
12146
12147
12148
12149
12150
12151
12152
12153
12154
12155
12156
12157
12158
12159
12160
12161
12162
12163
12164
12165
12166
12167
12168
12169
12170
12171
12172
12173
12174
12175
12176
12177
12178
12179
12180
12181
12182
12183
12184
12185
12186
12187
12188
12189
12190
12191
12192
12193
12194
12195
12196
12197
12198
12199
12200
12201
12202
12203
12204
12205
12206
12207
12208
12209
12210
12211
12212
12213
12214
12215
12216
12217
12218
12219
12220
12221
12222
12223
12224
12225
12226
12227
12228
12229
12230
12231
12232
12233
12234
12235
12236
12237
12238
12239
12240
12241
12242
12243
12244
12245
12246
12247
12248
12249
12250
12251
12252
12253
12254
12255
12256
12257
12258
12259
12260
12261
12262
12263
12264
12265
12266
12267
12268
12269
12270
12271
12272
12273
12274
12275
12276
12277
12278
12279
12280
12281
12282
12283
12284
12285
12286
12287
12288
12289
12290
12291
12292
12293
12294
12295
12296
12297
12298
12299
12300
12301
12302
12303
12304
12305
12306
12307
12308
12309
12310
12311
12312
12313
12314
12315
12316
12317
12318
12319
12320
12321
12322
12323
12324
12325
12326
12327
12328
12329
12330
12331
12332
12333
12334
12335
12336
12337
12338
12339
12340
12341
12342
12343
12344
12345
12346
12347
12348
12349
12350
12351
12352
12353
12354
12355
12356
12357
12358
12359
12360
12361
12362
12363
12364
12365
12366
12367
12368
12369
12370
12371
12372
12373
12374
12375
12376
12377
12378
12379
12380
12381
12382
12383
12384
12385
12386
12387
12388
12389
12390
12391
12392
12393
12394
12395
12396
12397
12398
12399
12400
12401
12402
12403
12404
12405
12406
12407
12408
12409
12410
12411
12412
12413
12414
12415
12416
12417
12418
12419
12420
12421
12422
12423
12424
12425
12426
12427
12428
12429
12430
12431
12432
12433
12434
12435
12436
12437
12438
12439
12440
12441
12442
12443
12444
12445
12446
12447
12448
12449
12450
12451
12452
12453
12454
12455
12456
12457
12458
12459
12460
12461
12462
12463
12464
12465
12466
12467
12468
12469
12470
12471
12472
12473
12474
12475
12476
12477
12478
12479
12480
12481
12482
12483
12484
12485
12486
12487
12488
12489
12490
12491
12492
12493
12494
12495
12496
12497
12498
12499
12500
12501
12502
12503
12504
12505
12506
12507
12508
12509
12510
12511
12512
12513
12514
12515
12516
12517
12518
12519
12520
12521
12522
12523
12524
12525
12526
12527
12528
12529
12530
12531
12532
12533
12534
12535
12536
12537
12538
12539
12540
12541
12542
12543
12544
12545
12546
12547
12548
12549
12550
12551
12552
12553
12554
12555
12556
12557
12558
12559
12560
12561
12562
12563
12564
12565
12566
12567
12568
12569
12570
12571
12572
12573
12574
12575
12576
12577
12578
12579
12580
12581
12582
12583
12584
12585
12586
12587
12588
12589
12590
12591
12592
12593
12594
12595
12596
12597
12598
12599
12600
12601
12602
12603
12604
12605
12606
12607
12608
12609
12610
12611
12612
12613
12614
12615
12616
12617
12618
12619
12620
12621
12622
12623
12624
12625
12626
12627
12628
12629
12630
12631
12632
12633
12634
12635
12636
12637
12638
12639
12640
12641
12642
12643
12644
12645
12646
12647
12648
12649
12650
12651
12652
12653
12654
12655
12656
12657
12658
12659
12660
12661
12662
12663
12664
12665
12666
12667
12668
12669
12670
12671
12672
12673
12674
12675
12676
12677
12678
12679
12680
12681
12682
12683
12684
12685
12686
12687
12688
12689
12690
12691
12692
12693
12694
12695
12696
12697
12698
12699
12700
12701
12702
12703
12704
12705
12706
12707
12708
12709
12710
12711
12712
12713
12714
12715
12716
12717
12718
12719
12720
12721
12722
12723
12724
12725
12726
12727
12728
12729
12730
12731
12732
12733
12734
12735
12736
12737
12738
12739
12740
12741
12742
12743
12744
12745
12746
12747
12748
12749
12750
12751
12752
12753
12754
12755
12756
12757
12758
12759
12760
12761
12762
12763
12764
12765
12766
12767
12768
12769
12770
12771
12772
12773
12774
12775
12776
12777
12778
12779
12780
12781
12782
12783
12784
12785
12786
12787
12788
12789
12790
12791
12792
12793
12794
12795
12796
12797
12798
12799
12800
12801
12802
12803
12804
12805
12806
12807
12808
12809
12810
12811
12812
12813
12814
12815
12816
12817
12818
12819
12820
12821
12822
12823
12824
12825
12826
12827
12828
12829
12830
12831
12832
12833
12834
12835
12836
12837
12838
12839
12840
12841
12842
12843
12844
12845
12846
12847
12848
12849
12850
12851
12852
12853
12854
12855
12856
12857
12858
12859
12860
12861
12862
12863
12864
12865
12866
12867
12868
12869
12870
12871
12872
12873
12874
12875
12876
12877
12878
12879
12880
12881
12882
12883
12884
12885
12886
12887
12888
12889
12890
12891
12892
12893
12894
12895
12896
12897
12898
12899
12900
12901
12902
12903
12904
12905
12906
12907
12908
12909
12910
12911
12912
12913
12914
12915
12916
12917
12918
12919
12920
12921
12922
12923
12924
12925
12926
12927
12928
12929
12930
12931
12932
12933
12934
12935
12936
12937
12938
12939
12940
12941
12942
12943
12944
12945
12946
12947
12948
12949
12950
12951
12952
12953
12954
12955
12956
12957
12958
12959
12960
12961
12962
12963
12964
12965
12966
12967
12968
12969
12970
12971
12972
12973
12974
12975
12976
12977
12978
12979
12980
12981
12982
12983
12984
12985
12986
12987
12988
12989
12990
12991
12992
12993
12994
12995
12996
12997
12998
12999
13000
13001
13002
13003
13004
13005
13006
13007
13008
13009
13010
13011
13012
13013
13014
13015
13016
13017
13018
13019
13020
13021
13022
13023
13024
13025
13026
13027
13028
13029
13030
13031
13032
13033
13034
13035
13036
13037
13038
13039
13040
13041
13042
13043
13044
13045
13046
13047
13048
13049
13050
13051
13052
13053
13054
13055
13056
13057
13058
13059
13060
13061
13062
13063
13064
13065
13066
13067
13068
13069
13070
13071
13072
13073
13074
13075
13076
13077
13078
13079
13080
13081
13082
13083
13084
13085
13086
13087
13088
13089
13090
13091
13092
13093
13094
13095
13096
13097
13098
13099
13100
13101
13102
13103
13104
13105
13106
13107
13108
13109
13110
13111
13112
13113
13114
13115
13116
13117
13118
13119
13120
13121
13122
13123
13124
13125
13126
13127
13128
13129
13130
13131
13132
13133
13134
13135
13136
13137
13138
13139
13140
13141
13142
13143
13144
13145
13146
13147
13148
13149
13150
13151
13152
13153
13154
13155
13156
13157
13158
13159
13160
13161
13162
13163
13164
13165
13166
13167
13168
13169
13170
13171
13172
13173
13174
13175
13176
13177
13178
13179
13180
13181
13182
13183
13184
13185
13186
13187
13188
13189
13190
13191
13192
13193
13194
13195
13196
13197
13198
13199
13200
13201
13202
13203
13204
13205
13206
13207
13208
13209
13210
13211
13212
13213
13214
13215
13216
13217
13218
13219
13220
13221
13222
13223
13224
13225
13226
13227
13228
13229
13230
13231
13232
13233
13234
13235
13236
13237
13238
13239
13240
13241
13242
13243
13244
13245
13246
13247
13248
13249
13250
13251
13252
13253
13254
13255
13256
13257
13258
13259
13260
13261
13262
13263
13264
13265
13266
13267
13268
13269
13270
13271
13272
13273
13274
13275
13276
13277
13278
13279
13280
13281
13282
13283
13284
13285
13286
13287
13288
13289
13290
13291
13292
13293
13294
13295
13296
13297
13298
13299
13300
13301
13302
13303
13304
13305
13306
13307
13308
13309
13310
13311
13312
13313
13314
13315
13316
13317
13318
13319
13320
13321
13322
13323
13324
13325
13326
13327
13328
13329
13330
13331
13332
13333
13334
13335
13336
13337
13338
13339
13340
13341
13342
13343
13344
13345
13346
13347
13348
13349
13350
13351
13352
13353
13354
13355
13356
13357
13358
13359
13360
13361
13362
13363
13364
13365
13366
13367
13368
13369
13370
13371
13372
13373
13374
13375
13376
13377
13378
13379
13380
13381
13382
13383
13384
13385
13386
13387
13388
13389
13390
13391
13392
13393
13394
13395
13396
13397
13398
13399
13400
13401
13402
13403
13404
13405
13406
13407
13408
13409
13410
13411
13412
13413
13414
13415
13416
13417
13418
13419
13420
13421
13422
13423
13424
13425
13426
13427
13428
13429
13430
13431
13432
13433
13434
13435
13436
13437
13438
13439
13440
13441
13442
13443
13444
13445
13446
13447
13448
13449
13450
13451
13452
13453
13454
13455
13456
13457
13458
13459
13460
13461
13462
13463
13464
13465
13466
13467
13468
13469
13470
13471
13472
13473
13474
13475
13476
13477
13478
13479
13480
13481
13482
13483
13484
13485
13486
13487
13488
13489
13490
13491
13492
13493
13494
13495
13496
13497
13498
13499
13500
13501
13502
13503
13504
13505
13506
13507
13508
13509
13510
13511
13512
13513
13514
13515
13516
13517
13518
13519
13520
13521
13522
13523
13524
13525
13526
13527
13528
13529
13530
13531
13532
13533
13534
13535
13536
13537
13538
13539
13540
13541
13542
13543
13544
13545
13546
13547
13548
13549
13550
13551
13552
13553
13554
13555
13556
13557
13558
13559
13560
13561
13562
13563
13564
13565
13566
13567
13568
13569
13570
13571
13572
13573
13574
13575
13576
13577
13578
13579
13580
13581
13582
13583
13584
13585
13586
13587
13588
13589
13590
13591
13592
13593
13594
13595
13596
13597
13598
13599
13600
13601
13602
13603
13604
13605
13606
13607
13608
13609
13610
13611
13612
13613
13614
13615
13616
13617
13618
13619
13620
13621
13622
13623
13624
13625
13626
13627
13628
13629
13630
13631
13632
13633
13634
13635
13636
13637
13638
13639
13640
13641
13642
13643
13644
13645
13646
13647
13648
13649
13650
13651
13652
13653
13654
13655
13656
13657
13658
13659
13660
13661
13662
13663
13664
13665
13666
13667
13668
13669
13670
13671
13672
13673
13674
13675
13676
13677
13678
13679
13680
13681
13682
13683
13684
13685
13686
13687
13688
13689
13690
13691
13692
13693
13694
13695
13696
13697
13698
13699
13700
13701
13702
13703
13704
13705
13706
13707
13708
13709
13710
13711
13712
13713
13714
13715
13716
13717
13718
13719
13720
13721
13722
13723
13724
13725
13726
13727
13728
13729
13730
13731
13732
13733
13734
13735
13736
13737
13738
13739
13740
13741
13742
13743
13744
13745
13746
13747
13748
13749
13750
13751
13752
13753
13754
13755
13756
13757
13758
13759
13760
13761
13762
13763
13764
13765
13766
13767
13768
13769
13770
13771
13772
13773
13774
13775
13776
13777
13778
13779
13780
13781
13782
13783
13784
13785
13786
13787
13788
13789
13790
13791
13792
13793
13794
13795
13796
13797
13798
13799
13800
13801
13802
13803
13804
13805
13806
13807
13808
13809
13810
13811
13812
13813
13814
13815
13816
13817
13818
13819
13820
13821
13822
13823
13824
13825
13826
13827
13828
13829
13830
13831
13832
13833
13834
13835
13836
13837
13838
13839
13840
13841
13842
13843
13844
13845
13846
13847
13848
13849
13850
13851
13852
13853
13854
13855
13856
13857
13858
13859
13860
13861
13862
13863
13864
13865
13866
13867
13868
13869
13870
13871
13872
13873
13874
13875
13876
13877
13878
13879
13880
13881
13882
13883
13884
13885
13886
13887
13888
13889
13890
13891
13892
13893
13894
13895
13896
13897
13898
13899
13900
13901
13902
13903
13904
13905
13906
13907
13908
13909
13910
13911
13912
13913
13914
13915
13916
13917
13918
13919
13920
13921
13922
13923
13924
13925
13926
13927
13928
13929
13930
13931
13932
13933
13934
13935
13936
13937
13938
13939
13940
13941
13942
13943
13944
13945
13946
13947
13948
13949
13950
13951
13952
13953
13954
13955
13956
13957
13958
13959
13960
13961
13962
13963
13964
13965
13966
13967
13968
13969
13970
13971
13972
13973
13974
13975
13976
13977
13978
13979
13980
13981
13982
13983
13984
13985
13986
13987
13988
13989
13990
13991
13992
13993
13994
13995
13996
13997
13998
13999
14000
14001
14002
14003
14004
14005
14006
14007
14008
14009
14010
14011
14012
14013
14014
14015
14016
14017
14018
14019
14020
14021
14022
14023
14024
14025
14026
14027
14028
14029
14030
14031
14032
14033
14034
14035
14036
14037
14038
14039
14040
14041
14042
14043
14044
14045
14046
14047
14048
14049
14050
14051
14052
14053
14054
14055
14056
14057
14058
14059
14060
14061
14062
14063
14064
14065
14066
14067
14068
14069
14070
14071
14072
14073
14074
14075
14076
14077
14078
14079
14080
14081
14082
14083
14084
14085
14086
14087
14088
14089
14090
14091
14092
14093
14094
14095
14096
14097
14098
14099
14100
14101
14102
14103
14104
14105
14106
14107
14108
14109
14110
14111
14112
14113
14114
14115
14116
14117
14118
14119
14120
14121
14122
14123
14124
14125
14126
14127
14128
14129
14130
14131
14132
14133
14134
14135
14136
14137
14138
14139
14140
14141
14142
14143
14144
14145
14146
14147
14148
14149
14150
14151
14152
14153
14154
14155
14156
14157
14158
14159
14160
14161
14162
14163
14164
14165
14166
14167
14168
14169
14170
14171
14172
14173
14174
14175
14176
14177
14178
14179
14180
14181
14182
14183
14184
14185
14186
14187
14188
14189
14190
14191
14192
14193
14194
14195
14196
14197
14198
14199
14200
14201
14202
14203
14204
14205
14206
14207
14208
14209
14210
14211
14212
14213
14214
14215
14216
14217
14218
14219
14220
14221
14222
14223
14224
14225
14226
14227
14228
14229
14230
14231
14232
14233
14234
14235
14236
14237
14238
14239
14240
14241
14242
14243
14244
14245
14246
14247
14248
14249
14250
14251
14252
14253
14254
14255
14256
14257
14258
14259
14260
14261
14262
14263
14264
14265
14266
14267
14268
14269
14270
14271
14272
14273
14274
14275
14276
14277
14278
14279
14280
14281
14282
14283
14284
14285
14286
14287
14288
14289
14290
14291
14292
14293
14294
14295
14296
14297
14298
14299
14300
14301
14302
14303
14304
14305
14306
14307
14308
14309
14310
14311
14312
14313
14314
14315
14316
14317
14318
14319
14320
14321
14322
14323
14324
14325
14326
14327
14328
14329
14330
14331
14332
14333
14334
14335
14336
14337
14338
14339
14340
14341
14342
14343
14344
14345
14346
14347
14348
14349
14350
14351
14352
14353
14354
14355
14356
14357
14358
14359
14360
14361
14362
14363
14364
14365
14366
14367
14368
14369
14370
14371
14372
14373
14374
14375
14376
14377
14378
14379
14380
14381
14382
14383
14384
14385
14386
14387
14388
14389
14390
14391
14392
14393
14394
14395
14396
14397
14398
14399
14400
14401
14402
14403
14404
14405
14406
14407
14408
14409
14410
14411
14412
14413
14414
14415
14416
14417
14418
14419
14420
14421
14422
14423
14424
14425
14426
14427
14428
14429
14430
14431
14432
14433
14434
14435
14436
14437
14438
14439
14440
14441
14442
14443
14444
14445
14446
14447
14448
14449
14450
14451
14452
14453
14454
14455
14456
14457
14458
14459
14460
14461
14462
14463
14464
14465
14466
14467
14468
14469
14470
14471
14472
14473
14474
14475
14476
14477
14478
14479
14480
14481
14482
14483
14484
14485
14486
14487
14488
14489
14490
14491
14492
14493
14494
14495
14496
14497
14498
14499
14500
14501
14502
14503
14504
14505
14506
14507
14508
14509
14510
14511
14512
14513
14514
14515
14516
14517
14518
14519
14520
14521
14522
14523
14524
14525
14526
14527
14528
14529
14530
14531
14532
14533
14534
14535
14536
14537
14538
14539
14540
14541
14542
14543
14544
14545
14546
14547
14548
14549
14550
14551
14552
14553
14554
14555
14556
14557
14558
14559
14560
14561
14562
14563
14564
14565
14566
14567
14568
14569
14570
14571
14572
14573
14574
14575
14576
14577
14578
14579
14580
14581
14582
14583
14584
14585
14586
14587
14588
14589
14590
14591
14592
14593
14594
14595
14596
14597
14598
14599
14600
14601
14602
14603
14604
14605
14606
14607
14608
14609
14610
14611
14612
14613
14614
14615
14616
14617
14618
14619
14620
14621
14622
14623
14624
14625
14626
14627
14628
14629
14630
14631
14632
14633
14634
14635
14636
14637
14638
14639
14640
14641
14642
14643
14644
14645
14646
14647
14648
14649
14650
14651
14652
14653
14654
14655
14656
14657
14658
14659
14660
14661
14662
14663
14664
14665
14666
14667
14668
14669
14670
14671
14672
14673
14674
14675
14676
14677
14678
14679
14680
14681
14682
14683
14684
14685
14686
14687
14688
14689
14690
14691
14692
14693
14694
14695
14696
14697
14698
14699
14700
14701
14702
14703
14704
14705
14706
14707
14708
14709
14710
14711
14712
14713
14714
14715
14716
14717
14718
14719
14720
14721
14722
14723
14724
14725
14726
14727
14728
14729
14730
14731
14732
14733
14734
14735
14736
14737
14738
14739
14740
14741
14742
14743
14744
14745
14746
14747
14748
14749
14750
14751
14752
14753
14754
14755
14756
14757
14758
14759
14760
14761
14762
14763
14764
14765
14766
14767
14768
14769
14770
14771
14772
14773
14774
14775
14776
14777
14778
14779
14780
14781
14782
14783
14784
14785
14786
14787
14788
14789
14790
14791
14792
14793
14794
14795
14796
14797
14798
14799
14800
14801
14802
14803
14804
14805
14806
14807
14808
14809
14810
14811
14812
14813
14814
14815
14816
14817
14818
14819
14820
14821
14822
14823
14824
14825
14826
14827
14828
14829
14830
14831
14832
14833
14834
14835
14836
14837
14838
14839
14840
14841
14842
14843
14844
14845
14846
14847
14848
14849
14850
14851
14852
14853
14854
14855
14856
14857
14858
14859
14860
14861
14862
14863
14864
14865
14866
14867
14868
14869
14870
14871
14872
14873
14874
14875
14876
14877
14878
14879
14880
14881
14882
14883
14884
14885
14886
14887
14888
14889
14890
14891
14892
14893
14894
14895
14896
14897
14898
14899
14900
14901
14902
14903
14904
14905
14906
14907
14908
14909
14910
14911
14912
14913
14914
14915
14916
14917
14918
14919
14920
14921
14922
14923
14924
14925
14926
14927
14928
14929
14930
14931
14932
14933
14934
14935
14936
14937
14938
14939
14940
14941
14942
14943
14944
14945
14946
14947
14948
14949
14950
14951
14952
14953
14954
14955
14956
14957
14958
14959
14960
14961
14962
14963
14964
14965
14966
14967
14968
14969
14970
14971
14972
14973
14974
14975
14976
14977
14978
14979
14980
14981
14982
14983
14984
14985
14986
14987
14988
14989
14990
14991
14992
14993
14994
14995
14996
14997
14998
14999
15000
15001
15002
15003
15004
15005
15006
15007
15008
15009
15010
15011
15012
15013
15014
15015
15016
15017
15018
15019
15020
15021
15022
15023
15024
15025
15026
15027
15028
15029
15030
15031
15032
15033
15034
15035
15036
15037
15038
15039
15040
15041
15042
15043
15044
15045
15046
15047
15048
15049
15050
15051
15052
15053
15054
15055
15056
15057
15058
15059
15060
15061
15062
15063
15064
15065
15066
15067
15068
15069
15070
15071
15072
15073
15074
15075
15076
15077
15078
15079
15080
15081
15082
15083
15084
15085
15086
15087
15088
15089
15090
15091
15092
15093
15094
15095
15096
15097
15098
15099
15100
15101
15102
15103
15104
15105
15106
15107
15108
15109
15110
15111
15112
15113
15114
15115
15116
15117
15118
15119
15120
15121
15122
15123
15124
15125
15126
15127
15128
15129
15130
15131
15132
15133
15134
15135
15136
15137
15138
15139
15140
15141
15142
15143
15144
15145
15146
15147
15148
15149
15150
15151
15152
15153
15154
15155
15156
15157
15158
15159
15160
15161
15162
15163
15164
15165
15166
15167
15168
15169
15170
15171
15172
15173
15174
15175
15176
15177
15178
15179
15180
15181
15182
15183
15184
15185
15186
15187
15188
15189
15190
15191
15192
15193
15194
15195
15196
15197
15198
15199
15200
15201
15202
15203
15204
15205
15206
15207
15208
15209
15210
15211
15212
15213
15214
15215
15216
15217
15218
15219
15220
15221
15222
15223
15224
15225
15226
15227
15228
15229
15230
15231
15232
15233
15234
15235
15236
15237
15238
15239
15240
15241
15242
15243
15244
15245
15246
15247
15248
15249
15250
15251
15252
15253
15254
15255
15256
15257
15258
15259
15260
15261
15262
15263
15264
15265
15266
15267
15268
15269
15270
15271
15272
15273
15274
15275
15276
15277
15278
15279
15280
15281
15282
15283
15284
15285
15286
15287
15288
15289
15290
15291
15292
15293
15294
15295
15296
15297
15298
15299
15300
15301
15302
15303
15304
15305
15306
15307
15308
15309
15310
15311
15312
15313
15314
15315
15316
15317
15318
15319
15320
15321
15322
15323
15324
15325
15326
15327
15328
15329
15330
15331
15332
15333
15334
15335
15336
15337
15338
15339
15340
15341
15342
15343
15344
15345
15346
15347
15348
15349
15350
15351
15352
15353
15354
15355
15356
15357
15358
15359
15360
15361
15362
15363
15364
15365
15366
15367
15368
15369
15370
15371
15372
15373
15374
15375
15376
15377
15378
15379
15380
15381
15382
15383
15384
15385
15386
15387
15388
15389
15390
15391
15392
15393
15394
15395
15396
15397
15398
15399
15400
15401
15402
15403
15404
15405
15406
15407
15408
15409
15410
15411
15412
15413
15414
15415
15416
15417
15418
15419
15420
15421
15422
15423
15424
15425
15426
15427
15428
15429
15430
15431
15432
15433
15434
15435
15436
15437
15438
15439
15440
15441
15442
15443
15444
15445
15446
15447
15448
15449
15450
15451
15452
15453
15454
15455
15456
15457
15458
15459
15460
15461
15462
15463
15464
15465
15466
15467
15468
15469
15470
15471
15472
15473
15474
15475
15476
15477
15478
15479
15480
15481
15482
15483
15484
15485
15486
15487
15488
15489
15490
15491
15492
15493
15494
15495
15496
15497
15498
15499
15500
15501
15502
15503
15504
15505
15506
15507
15508
15509
15510
15511
15512
15513
15514
15515
15516
15517
15518
15519
15520
15521
15522
15523
15524
15525
15526
15527
15528
15529
15530
15531
15532
15533
15534
15535
15536
15537
15538
15539
15540
15541
15542
15543
15544
15545
15546
15547
15548
15549
15550
15551
15552
15553
15554
15555
15556
15557
15558
15559
15560
15561
15562
15563
15564
15565
15566
15567
15568
15569
15570
15571
15572
15573
15574
15575
15576
15577
15578
15579
15580
15581
15582
15583
15584
15585
15586
15587
15588
15589
15590
15591
15592
15593
15594
15595
15596
15597
15598
15599
15600
15601
15602
15603
15604
15605
15606
15607
15608
15609
15610
15611
15612
15613
15614
15615
15616
15617
15618
15619
15620
15621
15622
15623
15624
15625
15626
15627
15628
15629
15630
15631
15632
15633
15634
15635
15636
15637
15638
15639
15640
15641
15642
15643
15644
15645
15646
15647
15648
15649
15650
15651
15652
15653
15654
15655
15656
15657
15658
15659
15660
15661
15662
15663
15664
15665
15666
15667
15668
15669
15670
15671
15672
15673
15674
15675
15676
15677
15678
15679
15680
15681
15682
15683
15684
15685
15686
15687
15688
15689
15690
15691
15692
15693
15694
15695
15696
15697
15698
15699
15700
15701
15702
15703
15704
15705
15706
15707
15708
15709
15710
15711
15712
15713
15714
15715
15716
15717
15718
15719
15720
15721
15722
15723
15724
15725
15726
15727
15728
15729
15730
15731
15732
15733
15734
15735
15736
15737
15738
15739
15740
15741
15742
15743
15744
15745
15746
15747
15748
15749
15750
15751
15752
15753
15754
15755
15756
15757
15758
15759
15760
15761
15762
15763
15764
15765
15766
15767
15768
15769
15770
15771
15772
15773
15774
15775
15776
15777
15778
15779
15780
15781
15782
15783
15784
15785
15786
15787
15788
15789
15790
15791
15792
15793
15794
15795
15796
15797
15798
15799
15800
15801
15802
15803
15804
15805
15806
15807
15808
15809
15810
15811
15812
15813
15814
15815
15816
15817
15818
15819
15820
15821
15822
15823
15824
15825
15826
15827
15828
15829
15830
15831
15832
15833
15834
15835
15836
15837
15838
15839
15840
15841
15842
15843
15844
15845
15846
15847
15848
15849
15850
15851
15852
15853
15854
15855
15856
15857
15858
15859
15860
15861
15862
15863
15864
15865
15866
15867
15868
15869
15870
15871
15872
15873
15874
15875
15876
15877
15878
15879
15880
15881
15882
15883
15884
15885
15886
15887
15888
15889
15890
15891
15892
15893
15894
15895
15896
15897
15898
15899
15900
15901
15902
15903
15904
15905
15906
15907
15908
15909
15910
15911
15912
15913
15914
15915
15916
15917
15918
15919
15920
15921
15922
15923
15924
15925
15926
15927
15928
15929
15930
15931
15932
15933
15934
15935
15936
15937
15938
15939
15940
15941
15942
15943
15944
15945
15946
15947
15948
15949
15950
15951
15952
15953
15954
15955
15956
15957
15958
15959
15960
15961
15962
15963
15964
15965
15966
15967
15968
15969
15970
15971
15972
15973
15974
15975
15976
15977
15978
15979
15980
15981
15982
15983
15984
15985
15986
15987
15988
15989
15990
15991
15992
15993
15994
15995
15996
15997
15998
15999
16000
16001
16002
16003
16004
16005
16006
16007
16008
16009
16010
16011
16012
16013
16014
16015
16016
16017
16018
16019
16020
16021
16022
16023
16024
16025
16026
16027
16028
16029
16030
16031
16032
16033
16034
16035
16036
16037
16038
16039
16040
16041
16042
16043
16044
16045
16046
16047
16048
16049
16050
16051
16052
16053
16054
16055
16056
16057
16058
16059
16060
16061
16062
16063
16064
16065
16066
16067
16068
16069
16070
16071
16072
16073
16074
16075
16076
16077
16078
16079
16080
16081
16082
16083
16084
16085
16086
16087
16088
16089
16090
16091
16092
16093
16094
16095
16096
16097
16098
16099
16100
16101
16102
16103
16104
16105
16106
16107
16108
16109
16110
16111
16112
16113
16114
16115
16116
16117
16118
16119
16120
16121
16122
16123
16124
16125
16126
16127
16128
16129
16130
16131
16132
16133
16134
16135
16136
16137
16138
16139
16140
16141
16142
16143
16144
16145
16146
16147
16148
16149
16150
16151
16152
16153
16154
16155
16156
16157
16158
16159
16160
16161
16162
16163
16164
16165
16166
16167
16168
16169
16170
16171
16172
16173
16174
16175
16176
16177
16178
16179
16180
16181
16182
16183
16184
16185
16186
16187
16188
16189
16190
16191
16192
16193
16194
16195
16196
16197
16198
16199
16200
16201
16202
16203
16204
16205
16206
16207
16208
16209
16210
16211
16212
16213
16214
16215
16216
16217
16218
16219
16220
16221
16222
16223
16224
16225
16226
16227
16228
16229
16230
16231
16232
16233
16234
16235
16236
16237
16238
16239
16240
16241
16242
16243
16244
16245
16246
16247
16248
16249
16250
16251
16252
16253
16254
16255
16256
16257
16258
16259
16260
16261
16262
16263
16264
16265
16266
16267
16268
16269
16270
16271
16272
16273
16274
16275
16276
16277
16278
16279
16280
16281
16282
16283
16284
16285
16286
16287
16288
16289
16290
16291
16292
16293
16294
16295
16296
16297
16298
16299
16300
16301
16302
16303
16304
16305
16306
16307
16308
16309
16310
16311
16312
16313
16314
16315
16316
16317
16318
16319
16320
16321
16322
16323
16324
16325
16326
16327
16328
16329
16330
16331
16332
16333
16334
16335
16336
16337
16338
16339
16340
16341
16342
16343
16344
16345
16346
16347
16348
16349
16350
16351
16352
16353
16354
16355
16356
16357
16358
16359
16360
16361
16362
16363
16364
16365
16366
16367
16368
16369
16370
16371
16372
16373
16374
16375
16376
16377
16378
16379
16380
16381
16382
16383
16384
16385
16386
16387
16388
16389
16390
16391
16392
16393
16394
16395
16396
16397
16398
16399
16400
16401
16402
16403
16404
16405
16406
16407
16408
16409
16410
16411
16412
16413
16414
16415
16416
16417
16418
16419
16420
16421
16422
16423
16424
16425
16426
16427
16428
16429
16430
16431
16432
16433
16434
16435
16436
16437
16438
16439
16440
16441
16442
16443
16444
16445
16446
16447
16448
16449
16450
16451
16452
16453
16454
16455
16456
16457
16458
16459
16460
16461
16462
16463
16464
16465
16466
16467
16468
16469
16470
16471
16472
16473
16474
16475
16476
16477
16478
16479
16480
16481
16482
16483
16484
16485
16486
16487
16488
16489
16490
16491
16492
16493
16494
16495
16496
16497
16498
16499
16500
16501
16502
16503
16504
16505
16506
16507
16508
16509
16510
16511
16512
16513
16514
16515
16516
16517
16518
16519
16520
16521
16522
16523
16524
16525
16526
16527
16528
16529
16530
16531
16532
16533
16534
16535
16536
16537
16538
16539
16540
16541
16542
16543
16544
16545
16546
16547
16548
16549
16550
16551
16552
16553
16554
16555
16556
16557
16558
16559
16560
16561
16562
16563
16564
16565
16566
16567
16568
16569
16570
16571
16572
16573
16574
16575
16576
16577
16578
16579
16580
16581
16582
16583
16584
16585
16586
16587
16588
16589
16590
16591
16592
16593
16594
16595
16596
16597
16598
16599
16600
16601
16602
16603
16604
16605
16606
16607
16608
16609
16610
16611
16612
16613
16614
16615
16616
16617
16618
16619
16620
16621
16622
16623
16624
16625
16626
16627
16628
16629
16630
16631
16632
16633
16634
16635
16636
16637
16638
16639
16640
16641
16642
16643
16644
16645
16646
16647
16648
16649
16650
16651
16652
16653
16654
16655
16656
16657
16658
16659
16660
16661
16662
16663
16664
16665
16666
16667
16668
16669
16670
16671
16672
16673
16674
16675
16676
16677
16678
16679
16680
16681
16682
16683
16684
16685
16686
16687
16688
16689
16690
16691
16692
16693
16694
16695
16696
16697
16698
16699
16700
16701
16702
16703
16704
16705
16706
16707
16708
16709
16710
16711
16712
16713
16714
16715
16716
16717
16718
16719
16720
16721
16722
16723
16724
16725
16726
16727
16728
16729
16730
16731
16732
16733
16734
16735
16736
16737
16738
16739
16740
16741
16742
16743
16744
16745
16746
16747
16748
16749
16750
16751
16752
16753
16754
16755
16756
16757
16758
16759
16760
16761
16762
16763
16764
16765
16766
16767
16768
16769
16770
16771
16772
16773
16774
16775
16776
16777
16778
16779
16780
16781
16782
16783
16784
16785
16786
16787
16788
16789
16790
16791
16792
16793
16794
16795
16796
16797
16798
16799
16800
16801
16802
16803
16804
16805
16806
16807
16808
16809
16810
16811
16812
16813
16814
16815
16816
16817
16818
16819
16820
16821
16822
16823
16824
16825
16826
16827
16828
16829
16830
16831
16832
16833
16834
16835
16836
16837
16838
16839
16840
16841
16842
16843
16844
16845
16846
16847
16848
16849
16850
16851
16852
16853
16854
16855
16856
16857
16858
16859
16860
16861
16862
16863
16864
16865
16866
16867
16868
16869
16870
16871
16872
16873
16874
16875
16876
16877
16878
16879
16880
16881
16882
16883
16884
16885
16886
16887
16888
16889
16890
16891
16892
16893
16894
16895
16896
16897
16898
16899
16900
16901
16902
16903
16904
16905
16906
16907
16908
16909
16910
16911
16912
16913
16914
16915
16916
16917
16918
16919
16920
16921
16922
16923
16924
16925
16926
16927
16928
16929
16930
16931
16932
16933
16934
16935
16936
16937
16938
16939
16940
16941
16942
16943
16944
16945
16946
16947
16948
16949
16950
16951
16952
16953
16954
16955
16956
16957
16958
16959
16960
16961
16962
16963
16964
16965
16966
16967
16968
16969
16970
16971
16972
16973
16974
16975
16976
16977
16978
16979
16980
16981
16982
16983
16984
16985
16986
16987
16988
16989
16990
16991
16992
16993
16994
16995
16996
16997
16998
16999
17000
17001
17002
17003
17004
17005
17006
17007
17008
17009
17010
17011
17012
17013
17014
17015
17016
17017
17018
17019
17020
17021
17022
17023
17024
17025
17026
17027
17028
17029
17030
17031
17032
17033
17034
17035
17036
17037
17038
17039
17040
17041
17042
17043
17044
17045
17046
17047
17048
17049
17050
17051
17052
17053
17054
17055
17056
17057
17058
17059
17060
17061
17062
17063
17064
17065
17066
17067
17068
17069
17070
17071
17072
17073
17074
17075
17076
17077
17078
17079
17080
17081
17082
17083
17084
17085
17086
17087
17088
17089
17090
17091
17092
17093
17094
17095
17096
17097
17098
17099
17100
17101
17102
17103
17104
17105
17106
17107
17108
17109
17110
17111
17112
17113
17114
17115
17116
17117
17118
17119
17120
17121
17122
17123
17124
17125
17126
17127
17128
17129
17130
17131
17132
17133
17134
17135
17136
17137
17138
17139
17140
17141
17142
17143
17144
17145
17146
17147
17148
17149
17150
17151
17152
17153
17154
17155
17156
17157
17158
17159
17160
17161
17162
17163
17164
17165
17166
17167
17168
17169
17170
17171
17172
17173
17174
17175
17176
17177
17178
17179
17180
17181
17182
17183
17184
17185
17186
17187
17188
17189
17190
17191
17192
17193
17194
17195
17196
17197
17198
17199
17200
17201
17202
17203
17204
17205
17206
17207
17208
17209
17210
17211
17212
17213
17214
17215
17216
17217
17218
17219
17220
17221
17222
17223
17224
17225
17226
17227
17228
17229
17230
17231
17232
17233
17234
17235
17236
17237
17238
17239
17240
17241
17242
17243
17244
17245
17246
17247
17248
17249
17250
17251
17252
17253
17254
17255
17256
17257
17258
17259
17260
17261
17262
17263
17264
17265
17266
17267
17268
17269
17270
17271
17272
17273
17274
17275
17276
17277
17278
17279
17280
17281
17282
17283
17284
17285
17286
17287
17288
17289
17290
17291
17292
17293
17294
17295
17296
17297
17298
17299
17300
17301
17302
17303
17304
17305
17306
17307
17308
17309
17310
17311
17312
17313
17314
17315
17316
17317
17318
17319
17320
17321
17322
17323
17324
17325
17326
17327
17328
17329
17330
17331
17332
17333
17334
17335
17336
17337
17338
17339
17340
17341
17342
17343
17344
17345
17346
17347
17348
17349
17350
17351
17352
17353
17354
17355
17356
17357
17358
17359
17360
17361
17362
17363
17364
17365
17366
17367
17368
17369
17370
17371
17372
17373
17374
17375
17376
17377
17378
17379
17380
17381
17382
17383
17384
17385
17386
17387
17388
17389
17390
17391
17392
17393
17394
17395
17396
17397
17398
17399
17400
17401
17402
17403
17404
17405
17406
17407
17408
17409
17410
17411
17412
17413
17414
17415
17416
17417
17418
17419
17420
17421
17422
17423
17424
17425
17426
17427
17428
17429
17430
17431
17432
17433
17434
17435
17436
17437
17438
17439
17440
17441
17442
17443
17444
17445
17446
17447
17448
17449
17450
17451
17452
17453
17454
17455
17456
17457
17458
17459
17460
17461
17462
17463
17464
17465
17466
17467
17468
17469
17470
17471
17472
17473
17474
17475
17476
17477
17478
17479
17480
17481
17482
17483
17484
17485
17486
17487
17488
17489
17490
17491
17492
17493
17494
17495
17496
17497
17498
17499
17500
17501
17502
17503
17504
17505
17506
17507
17508
17509
17510
17511
17512
17513
17514
17515
17516
17517
17518
17519
17520
17521
17522
17523
17524
17525
17526
17527
17528
17529
17530
17531
17532
17533
17534
17535
17536
17537
17538
17539
17540
17541
17542
17543
17544
17545
17546
17547
17548
17549
17550
17551
17552
17553
17554
17555
17556
17557
17558
17559
17560
17561
17562
17563
17564
17565
17566
17567
17568
17569
17570
17571
17572
17573
17574
17575
17576
17577
17578
17579
17580
17581
17582
17583
17584
17585
17586
17587
17588
17589
17590
17591
17592
17593
17594
17595
17596
17597
17598
17599
17600
17601
17602
17603
17604
17605
17606
17607
17608
17609
17610
17611
17612
17613
17614
17615
17616
17617
17618
17619
17620
17621
17622
17623
17624
17625
17626
17627
17628
17629
17630
17631
17632
17633
17634
17635
17636
17637
17638
17639
17640
17641
17642
17643
17644
17645
17646
17647
17648
17649
17650
17651
17652
17653
17654
17655
17656
17657
17658
17659
17660
17661
17662
17663
17664
17665
17666
17667
17668
17669
17670
17671
17672
17673
17674
17675
17676
17677
17678
17679
17680
17681
17682
17683
17684
17685
17686
17687
17688
17689
17690
17691
17692
17693
17694
17695
17696
17697
17698
17699
17700
17701
17702
17703
17704
17705
17706
17707
17708
17709
17710
17711
17712
17713
17714
17715
17716
17717
17718
17719
17720
17721
17722
17723
17724
17725
17726
17727
17728
17729
17730
17731
17732
17733
17734
17735
17736
17737
17738
17739
17740
17741
17742
17743
17744
17745
17746
17747
17748
17749
17750
17751
17752
17753
17754
17755
17756
17757
17758
17759
17760
17761
17762
17763
17764
17765
17766
17767
17768
17769
17770
17771
17772
17773
17774
17775
17776
17777
17778
17779
17780
17781
17782
17783
17784
17785
17786
17787
17788
17789
17790
17791
17792
17793
17794
17795
17796
17797
17798
17799
17800
17801
17802
17803
17804
17805
17806
17807
17808
17809
17810
17811
17812
17813
17814
17815
17816
17817
17818
17819
17820
17821
17822
17823
17824
17825
17826
17827
17828
17829
17830
17831
17832
17833
17834
17835
17836
17837
17838
17839
17840
17841
17842
17843
17844
17845
17846
17847
17848
17849
17850
17851
17852
17853
17854
17855
17856
17857
17858
17859
17860
17861
17862
17863
17864
17865
17866
17867
17868
17869
17870
17871
17872
17873
17874
17875
17876
17877
17878
17879
17880
17881
17882
17883
17884
17885
17886
17887
17888
17889
17890
17891
17892
17893
17894
17895
17896
17897
17898
17899
17900
17901
17902
17903
17904
17905
17906
17907
17908
17909
17910
17911
% memman.tex    edition 6,  Memoir class user manual
%                Author: Peter Wilson
%                Copyright 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004 Peter R. wilson

\documentclass[10pt,letterpaper]{memoir}
%%%%\usepackage{memfixa}
%%%%\usepackage{memfixc}
%%\usepackage{makeidx}
\usepackage{layouts}[2001/04/29]
%%\usepackage{verbatim}
\usepackage{url}
\usepackage{fixltx2e}
\usepackage{alltt}
\usepackage{graphicx}
\makeindex

%%%%%%\usepackage{amsmath}

\ifpdf
  \pdfoutput=1
  \usepackage[plainpages=false,pdfpagelabels,bookmarksnumbered]{hyperref}
  \usepackage{memhfixc}
\fi

%\showindexmarktrue

\newcommand{\theclass}{memoir}

\providecommand{\tx}{TeX}
\providecommand{\ltx}{LaTeX}


\makeatletter

%%% Print and Index macros
\newcommand{\Ppstyle}[1]{\textsl{#1}}
\newcommand{\pstyle}[1]{\Ppstyle{#1}%
            \index{#1 pages?\Ppstyle{#1} (pagestyle)}%
            \index{pagestyle!#1?\Ppstyle{#1}}}            % pagestyle
\newcommand{\Pcstyle}[1]{\textsl{#1}}
\newcommand{\cstyle}[1]{\Pcstyle{#1}%
            \index{#1 chaps?\Pcstyle{#1} (chapterstyle)}%
            \index{chapterstyle!#1?\Pcstyle{#1}}}          % chapterstyle
\newcommand{\Pclass}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
\newcommand{\Lclass}[1]{\Pclass{#1}%
            \index{#1 class?\Pclass{#1} (class)}%
            \index{class!#1?\Pclass{#1}}}                % class name
\newcommand{\Ppack}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
\newcommand{\Lpack}[1]{\Ppack{#1}%
            \index{#1 pack?\Ppack{#1} (package)}%
            \index{package!#1?\Ppack{#1}}}              % package name
\newcommand{\Popt}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
\newcommand{\Lopt}[1]{\Popt{#1}%
            \index{#1 opt?\Popt{#1} (option)}%
            \index{option!#1?\Popt{#1}}}               % option name
\newcommand{\Ie}[1]{\texttt{#1}\index{#1 env?\texttt{#1} (environment)}%
                               \index{environment!#1?\texttt{#1}}}
\newcommand{\Icn}[1]{\texttt{#1}\index{#1 cou?\texttt{#1} (counter)}%
                                \index{counter!#1?\texttt{#1}}}
\newcommand{\Itt}[1]{\texttt{#1}\index{#1tt?\texttt{#1}}}

% print and index an \if... \piif{if...} or friend (e.g., \else)
\newcommand{\piif}[1]{\cs{#1}\index{#1?\cs{#1}}}

%%%\newcommand{\seealso}[2]{\emph{see also} #1}

\newcommand{\listofx}{`List of\ldots'}

% print a begin environment
\newcommand{\senv}[1]{\texttt{\bs begin\{#1\}}}

% print an end environment
\newcommand{\eenv}[1]{\texttt{\bs end\{#1\}}}

% print a file name
\newcommand{\file}[1]{\texttt{#1}}

% print and index a file name
\newcommand{\ixfile}[1]{\file{#1}%
            \index{#1 file?\file{#1} (file)}%
            \index{file!#1?\file{#1}}}

% print & index CTT
\newcommand{\ctt}{\textsc{ctt}}
\newcommand{\pictt}{\ctt\index{CTT?\ctt}}

% index marking
\newcommand{\idxmark}[1]{#1\markboth{#1}{#1}}

\newcommand{\foredge}{foredge}
\newlength{\pwlayi}\setlength{\pwlayi}{0.45\textwidth} % 
\newlength{\pwlayii}\setlength{\pwlayii}{0.45\pwlayi}

%% definition of \meta is taken from doc.dtx
\begingroup
\obeyspaces%
\catcode`\^^M\active%
\gdef\meta{\begingroup\obeyspaces\catcode`\^^M\active%
\let^^M\do@space\let \do@space%
\def\-{\egroup\discretionary{-}{}{}\hbox\bgroup\itshape}%
\m@ta}%
\endgroup
\def\m@ta#1{\leavevmode\hbox\bgroup$\langle$\itshape#1\/$\rangle$\egroup
    \endgroup}
\def\do@space{\egroup\space
    \hbox\bgroup\itshape\futurelet\next\sp@ce}
\def\sp@ce{\ifx\next\do@space\expandafter\sp@@ce\fi}
\def\sp@@ce#1{\futurelet\next\sp@ce}
%% end of \meta and supports


%% The definition of \MakeShortVerb & \DeleteShortVerb
%% are now in the memoir class.

%% The macros \cmd, \cs, \marg, \oarg, \parg are taken from ltxdoc.dtx
% \cmd{\fred} typesets \fred
\def\cmd#1{\cs{\expandafter\cmd@to@cs\string#1}}
\def\cmd@to@cs#1#2{\char\number`#2\relax}
% \cs{fred} typesets \fred
\DeclareRobustCommand{\cs}[1]{\texttt{\char`\\#1}}
% \marg{arg} typesets {<arg>}
\providecommand{\marg}[1]{%
  {\ttfamily\char`\{}\meta{#1}{\ttfamily\char`\}}}
% \oarg{arg} typesets [<arg>]
\providecommand{\oarg}[1]{%
  {\ttfamily\char`\[}\meta{#1}{\ttfamily\char`\]}}
% \parg{x,y} typesets (<x,y>)
\providecommand{\parg}[1]{%
  {\ttfamily\char`\(}\meta{#1}{\ttfamily\char`\)}}

\def\bs{\texttt{\char`\\}}

%%% macro \cmd from Heiko Oberdiek CTT 2001/05/26 (prints and indexes a command)
\newcommand*{\cmdprint}[1]{\texttt{\string#1}}
\def\cmd#1{\cmdprint{#1}%
  \index{\expandafter\@gobble\string#1?\string\cmdprint{\string#1}}}

% print and index \\!
\newcommand{\pixslashbang}{\cmdprint{\\!}\index{"\"\"!?\string\cmdprint{\\}\texttt{"!}}}

% print and index \!
\newcommand{\pixabang}{\cmdprint{\!}\index{"!?\string\cs{}\texttt{"!}}}


\newcommand{\lnc}[1]{\cmdprint{#1}%
  \index{\expandafter\@gobble\string#1len?\string\cmdprint{\string#1} (length)}%
  \index{length!\expandafter\@gobble\string#1len?\string\cmdprint{\string#1}}}

%%%%%% stuff for new LaTeX code environment

% \zeroseps sets list before/after skips to minimum values
\newcommand{\@zeroseps}{\setlength{\topsep}{\z@}
                        \setlength{\partopsep}{\z@}
                        \setlength{\parskip}{\z@}}
\newlength{\gparindent} \setlength{\gparindent}{\parindent}
% now we can do the new environment. This has no extra before/after spacing.
\newenvironment{lcode}{\@zeroseps
  \renewcommand{\verbatim@startline}{\verbatim@line{\hskip\gparindent}}
  \small\setlength{\baselineskip}{\onelineskip}\verbatim}%
  {\endverbatim
   \vspace{-\baselineskip}%
   \noindent
}

%%%%% LaTeX syntax
\newenvironment{syntax}{\begin{center}
                        \begin{tabular}{|p{0.9\linewidth}|} \hline}%
                       {\hline
                        \end{tabular}
                        \end{center}}

\providecommand{\Note}{\textbf{NOTE:}}



%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

% Save file as: DROP.STY               Source: FILESERV@SHSU.BITNET  
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%  DROP.DOC <February 17, 1988>
%  Macro for dropping and enlarging the first letter(s) of a paragraph.
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%
%  Macro written by David G. Cantor, and published Fri, 12 Feb 88, in
%  TeXhax, 1988 #16.  
%  Internet:  dgc@math.ucla.edu
%  UUCP:      ...!{ihnp4, randvax, sdcrdcf, ucbvax}!ucla-cs!dgc
%
%  Modified for use with LaTeX by Dominik Wujastyk, February 17, 1988
%  Internet:   dow@wjh12.harvard.edu
%  Bitnet:     dow@harvunxw.bitnet
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%
%  This LaTeX macro is for dropping and enlarging the first letter(s) of a
%  paragraph.  The argument may be one or more letters.
%
%  Here is an example of its usage:
%
%  \documentstyle[drop]{article}
%  \begin{document}
%    \drop{IN} THE beginning God created the heaven and the earth.  Now the
%    earth was unformed and void, and darkness was upon the face of the
%    deep; and the spirit of God hovered over the face of the waters.
%  \end{document}
%
%  Which will produce something along these lines:
%
%  I I\  I THE beginning God  created the heaven and  the earth.
%  I I \ I Now the earth was unformed and void, and darkness was
%  I I  \I upon the face of the deep; and the spirit of God hov-
%  ered over the face of the waters.
%
%  In the first instance the macro will pause during LaTeX processing and 
%  ask you for the font you wish to use for you drop capital.  When you
%  have something that looks good, then comment out box one in DROP.STY,
%  and comment in box two, replacing "cmr10 scaled \magstep5" with the font
%  of your choice.
%
%  In my opinion (DW) there are no fonts available in the standard
%  TeX/LaTeX set that are ideal for this use, unless you go down to 9pt or 
%  8pt for your text face, and this is too small.  If you have Metafont you
%  should consider generating a cmr17 font at a magstep of two (about 25pt)
%  or three (about 30pt), or even more, depending on the point size of your
%  main text.  Why not go the whole hog and design some really fancy 
%  capitals from scratch!
%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% BOX ONE %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%\typein[\dropinitialfont]{Font for Dropped initial:}  %
%\font\largefont \dropinitialfont                      %
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% BOX TWO %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%\font\largefont= cmr10 scaled \magstep5              %
%\font\largefont= cmbx10 scaled \magstep5              %
%\font\largefont= cmbx17 scaled \magstep3              %
\font\largefont= cmr17 scaled \magstep5              %
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

\def\drop#1#2{{\noindent
    \setbox0\hbox{\largefont #1}\setbox1\hbox{#2}\setbox2\hbox{(}%
    \count0=\ht0\advance\count0 by\dp0\count1\baselineskip
    \advance\count0 by-\ht1\advance\count0by\ht2
    \dimen1=.5ex\advance\count0by\dimen1\divide\count0 by\count1
    \advance\count0 by1\dimen0\wd0
    \advance\dimen0 by.25em\dimen1=\ht0\advance\dimen1 by-\ht1
    \global\hangindent\dimen0\global\hangafter-\count0
    \hskip-\dimen0\setbox0\hbox to\dimen0{\raise-\dimen1\box0\hss}%
    \dp0=0in\ht0=0in\box0}#2}

% end of DROP.STY
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

\newcommand{\versal}[1]{{\noindent
    \setbox0\hbox{\largefont #1}%
    \count0=\ht0                   % height of versal
    \count1=\baselineskip          % baselineskip
    \divide\count0 by \count1      % versal height/baselineskip
    \dimen1 = \count0\baselineskip % distance to drop versal
    \advance\count0 by 1\relax     % no of indented lines
    \dimen0=\wd0                   % width of versal
    \global\hangindent\dimen0      % set indentation distance
    \global\hangafter-\count0      % set no of indented lines
    \hskip-\dimen0\setbox0\hbox to\dimen0{\raise-\dimen1\box0\hss}%
    \dp0=0in\ht0=0in\box0}}

\makeatother

\MakeShortVerb{\|}
% \DeleteShortVerb{\|}


%%% need more space for ToC page numbers
\setpnumwidth{2.55em}
\setrmarg{3.55em}

%%% need more space for ToC section numbers
\cftsetindents{section}{1.5em}{3.0em}
\cftsetindents{subsection}{4.5em}{3.9em}
\cftsetindents{subsubsection}{8.4em}{4.8em}
\cftsetindents{paragraph}{10.7em}{5.7em}
\cftsetindents{subparagraph}{12.7em}{6.7em}

%%% need more space for LoF numbers
\cftsetindents{figure}{0em}{3.0em}

%%% and do the same for the LoT
\cftsetindents{table}{0em}{3.0em}

%%% set up the page layout
\settrimmedsize{11in}{210mm}{*}
\setlength{\trimtop}{0pt}
\setlength{\trimedge}{\stockwidth}
\addtolength{\trimedge}{-\paperwidth}
\settypeblocksize{7.75in}{33pc}{*}
\setulmargins{4cm}{*}{*}
\setlrmargins{1.25in}{*}{*}
\setmarginnotes{17pt}{51pt}{\onelineskip}
\setheadfoot{\onelineskip}{2\onelineskip}
\setheaderspaces{*}{2\onelineskip}{*}
\checkandfixthelayout


\bibliographystyle{alpha}

\newcommand{\prtoc}{ToC}             % print ToC
\newcommand{\prlof}{LoF}
\newcommand{\prlot}{LoT}
\newcommand{\ixtoc}{\index{ToC}}     % index ToC
\newcommand{\ixlof}{\index{LoF}}
\newcommand{\ixlot}{\index{LoT}}
\newcommand{\toc}{\prtoc\ixtoc}      % print & index ToC
\newcommand{\lof}{\prlof\index{LoF}}
\newcommand{\lot}{\prlot\index{LoT}}

\newcommand{\noidxnum}[1]{}

%%% subfigures and subtables
\newsubfloat{figure}
\newsubfloat{table}

%% end preamble
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\begin{document}
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

%% list subfigures
\setcounter{lofdepth}{2}

\index{table of contents|see{ToC}}
\index{list!of figures|see{LoF}}
\index{figure!list of|see{LoF}}
\index{list!of tables|see{LoT}}
\index{table!list of|see{LoT}}
\index{marginal note|see{marginalia}}
\index{footnote!in title|see{thanks}}
\index{counter|noidxnum}
\index{environment|noidxnum}
\index{length|noidxnum}
\index{list|noidxnum}
\index{illustration|seealso{float, figure}}
\index{figure|seealso{float}}
\index{file|noidxnum}
\index{table|seealso{float}}
\index{chapter!style|see{chapterstyle}}
\index{chapter!heading|see{heading}}
\index{page!style|see{pagestyle}}
\index{part!heading|see{heading}}
\index{subfloat|noidxnum}

%%% ToC down to subsections
\settocdepth{subsection}
\frontmatter
\pagestyle{empty}


% half-title page
\vspace*{\fill}
\begin{adjustwidth}{1in}{1in}
\begin{flushleft}
\HUGE\sffamily The
\end{flushleft}
\begin{center}
\HUGE\sffamily  Memoir
\end{center}
\begin{flushright}
\HUGE\sffamily  Class
\end{flushright}
\end{adjustwidth}
\vspace*{\fill}
\cleardoublepage

% title page
\vspace*{\fill}
\begin{center}
\HUGE\textsf{The Memoir Class}\par
\end{center}
\begin{center}
\LARGE\textsf{for}\par
\end{center}
\begin{center}
\HUGE\textsf{Configurable Typesetting}\par
\end{center}

\begin{center}
\Huge\textsf{User Guide}\par
\end{center}
\begin{center}
\LARGE\textsf{Peter Wilson}\par
\end{center}
\vspace*{\fill}
\begin{center}
\textrm{\normalsize T\kern-0.2em H\kern-0.4em P} \\
\textsf{The Herries Press}
\end{center}
\clearpage

% copyright page
\begingroup
\footnotesize
\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
\setlength{\parskip}{\baselineskip}
%%\ttfamily
\textcopyright{} 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004 Peter R. Wilson \\
All rights reserved

The Herries Press, Normandy Park, WA.

Printed in the World 

The paper used in this publication may meet the minimum requirements
of the American National Standard for Information 
Sciences --- Permanence of Paper for Printed Library Materials, 
ANSI Z39.48--1984.

\begin{center}
10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01\hspace{2em}15 14 13 12 11 10 9       
\end{center}
\begin{center}
\begin{tabular}{ll}
First edition:                        & 3 June 2001 \\
Second impression, with corrections:    & 2 July 2001 \\
Second edition:                       & 14 July 2001 \\
Second impression, with corrections:    & 3 August 2001 \\
Third impression, with minor additions: & 31 August 2001 \\
Third edition:                        & 17 November 2001 \\
Fourth edition:                       & 16 March 2002 \\
Fifth edition:                        & 10 August 2002 \\
Sixth edition:                        & 31 January 2004 \\
\end{tabular}
\end{center}

\endgroup

\clearpage
\vspace*{\fill}
\begin{quote}
\textbf{memoir,} \textit{n.} a written record set down as material
  for a history or biography: 
  a biographical sketch:
  a record of some study investigated by the writer:
  (in \textit{pl.}) the transactions of a society.
  [Fr. \textit{m\'{e}moire} --- L. \textit{memoria,} memory ---
   \textit{memor}, mindful.] \\[0.5\baselineskip]
  \hspace*{\fill} 
      \textit{Chambers Twentieth Century Dictionary, New Edition}, 1972.
\end{quote}

\vspace{2\baselineskip}

\begin{quote}
\textbf{memoir,} \textit{n.} [Fr. \textit{m\'{e}moire,} masc., a memorandum,
    memoir, fem., memory $<$ L. \textit{memoria,} \textsc{memory}]
  \hspace{1ex} \textbf{1.} a biography or biographical notice, 
      usually written by a relative or personal friend of the subject 
  \hspace{1ex} \textbf{2.} [\textit{pl.}] an autobiography, 
      usually a full or highly personal account
  \hspace{1ex} \textbf{3.} [\textit{pl.}] a report or record of 
      important events based on the writer's personal observation, 
      special knowledge, etc.
  \hspace{1ex} \textbf{4.} a report or record of a scholarly 
      investigation, scientific study, etc.
  \hspace{1ex} \textbf{5.} [\textit{pl.}] the record of the proceedings
      of a learned society \\[0.5\baselineskip]
  \hspace*{\fill} \textit{Webster's New World Dictionary, Second College Edition}.
\end{quote}

%\vspace{2\baselineskip}
%
%\begin{quote}
%\textbf{memoir,} \textit{n.} a fiction designed to flatter the subject 
%  and to impress the reader. \\[0.5\baselineskip]
%\hspace*{\fill} With apologies to Reuben Thomas and Ambrose Bierce
%\end{quote}

\vspace*{\fill}

\cleardoublepage

% ToC, etc
\pagenumbering{roman}
\pagestyle{headings}
%%%%\pagestyle{Ruled}

\tableofcontents
\clearpage
\listoffigures
\clearpage
\listoftables

%\chapter{Foreword}
\chapter{Preface}

    From personal experience and also from lurking on the \url{comp.text.tex}
newsgroup the major problems with using LaTeX are related to document
design. Some years ago most questions on \texttt{ctt} were answered by
someone providing a piece of code that solved a particular problem, and
again and again. More recently these questions are answered along the
lines of `Use the ---------{} package', and again and again.

    I have used many of the more common of these packages but my filing system
is not always well ordered and I tend to mislay the various user manuals,
even for the packages I have written. The \Pclass{memoir} class is an attempt
to integrate some of the more design-related packages with the LaTeX
\Pclass{book} class. I chose the \Pclass{book} class as the \Pclass{report} class
is virtually identical to \Pclass{book}, except that \Pclass{book} does
not have an \Ie{abstract} environment while \Pclass{report} does; however it is 
easy to fake an \Ie{abstract} if it is needed. With a little bit of tweaking,
\Pclass{book} class documents can be made to look just like \Pclass{article}
class documents, and the \Pclass{memoir} class is designed with tweaking very
much in mind.

    The \Pclass{memoir} class effectively incorporates the facilties that
are usually accessed by using external packages. In most cases the class
code is new code reimplementing package functionalities. The exceptions
tend to be where I have cut and pasted code from some of my packages.
I could not have written the \Pclass{memoir} class without the excellent 
work presented by the implementors of LaTeX and its many packages.

    Apart from packages that I happen to have written I have gained many
ideas from the other packages listed in the \bibname. One way or another
their authors have all contributed, albeit unknowingly. 
The participants in the
\url{comp.text.tex} newsgroup have also provided valuable input, partly
by questioning how to do something in LaTeX, and partly by providing
answers. It is a friendly and educational forum.

{\raggedleft{\scshape Peter Wilson} \\ Seattle, WA \\ June 2001\par}

\chapter{Introduction to the first edition}

    This is not a guide to the general use of LaTeX but rather concentrates
on where the \index{class}\Lclass{memoir} class differs from the standard LaTeX
\Lclass{book} and \Lclass{report} classes. There are other sources that deal with LaTeX in 
general, some of which are listed in the \bibname. Lamport~\cite{LAMPORT94}
is of course the original user manual for LaTeX, while the Companion
series, for example~\cite{GOOSSENS94}, go into further details and auxiliary
programs. The Comprehensive TeX Archive Network (CTAN) is a valuable source
of free information and the LaTeX system itself. For general questions see
the FAQ~\cite{FAQ} which also has pointers to information sources. Among
these are \textit{The Not So Short Introduction to LaTeX2e}~\cite{LSHORT},
Keith Reckdahl's \textit{Using imported graphics in LaTeX2e}~\cite{EPSLATEX}
and Piet van Oostrum's \textit{Page layout in LaTeX}~\cite{FANCYHDR}.
The question of how to use different fonts with LaTeX is left strictly alone;
Alan Hoenig's book~\cite{HOENIG98} is the best guide to this that I know of.


    The first part of the manual discusses briefly some aspects of book
design and typography, independently of the means of typesetting. Among
the several books on the subject listed in the \bibname{} I prefer
Bringhurst's \textit{The Elements of Typographic Style}~\cite{BRINGHURST92}.
I have used the LaTeX \Lclass{book} design, which is the default
\Lclass{memoir} class style, in typesetting Part~\ref{part:art}.

    The second part then goes into some detail on how the \Lclass{memoir}
class can be used to implement a particular design.

    With two exceptions, the \Lclass{memoir} class has all the capabilities
of the standard LaTeX \Lclass{book} class. These exceptions are:
\begin{itemize}
\item The old LaTeX v2.09 font commands --- 
      \cmd{\rm} (roman), 
      \cmd{\tt} (\texttt{typewriter}), 
      \cmd{\sf} (\textsf{sans}),
      \cmd{\bf} (\textbf{bold}), 
      \cmd{\sl} (\textsl{slanted}), 
      \cmd{\it} (\textit{italic}),
      and \cmd{\sc} (\textsc{small caps}) ---
      are not supported and will give error messages if used.
 
      The \cmd{\em} (\emph{emphasis}) command is supported but gives 
a warning message if used.

\item There are no commands for making titles. This is because title pages are
      usually designed individually for each book. The 
     \index{package}\Lpack{titling}
      package~\cite{TITLING} can be used if you want the titling commands.
      The package
      provides extended titling facilities when compared to those in the
      standard LaTeX classes.

\end{itemize}
I hope that, apart from these, the class supports everything that the 
\Lclass{book} class provides.

    The major extra functions provided by the class include:
\begin{itemize}
\item Font sizes for the main text of 9, 10, 11, 12 and 14pt.
\item A reasonably intuitive means of setting the page, text and margin sizes.
\item Page trimming marks.
\item If really required, typesetting as though in the olden typewriter days
      (double spaced, raggedright, no hyphenation, typewriter font).
\item Configurable sectional headings, with several predefined styles for
      chapter headings and simple methods for defining new ones.
\item `Anonymous' section breaks (e.g., a blank or decorated line or two).
\item Configurable page headers and footers, with several predefined styles
      and simple methods for defining new ones.
\item Configurable captions, with several predefined captioning styles and
      methods for defining new ones.
\item Ability to define new `List of...' and new floats with their accompanying
      captions and `List of...'.
\item Control over whether the `List of...', bibliography, index, etc., appear
      in the Table of Contents.
\item Support for epigraphs.
\end{itemize}
Also, along the way you will find other more minor but still useful things.

    As Part~\ref{part:practice} progresses I demonstrate some of the changes
that the \Lclass{memoir} class lets you easily make to the normal LaTeX
page and titling style.

\section{Type conventions}

    The following conventions are used in the manual:
\begin{itemize}
\item \Pclass{The names of LaTeX classes\index{class} and 
              packages\index{package} are typeset in this font.}
\item \Popt{Class options\index{option} are typeset in this font.}
\item \Ppstyle{The names of chapterstyles\index{chapterstyle} and 
               pagestyles\index{pagestyle} are typeset in this font.}
\item \texttt{LaTeX code is typeset in this font.}
\end{itemize}

\section{Caveats}

    At the moment both this manual and the class code are in a beta state.
That is, they hopefully serve the purposes they are intended for, but 
it is probable that there are errors, poor explanations and missing
elements. So, be warned that I'm sure that there will be further releases
and these may not be entirely compatible with the current release.

    That said, I will be grateful for any constructive comments that 
anyone\footnote{I have received valuable comments from
Javier Bezos (\url{jbezos@wanadoo.es}), 
Sven Bovin (\url{sven.bovin@chem.kuleuven.ac.be}),
Scott Pakin (\url{pakin@uiuc.edu}),
and
Paul Stanley (\url{pstanley@essexcourt-chambers.co.uk})
.}
may have, especially regarding errors, mispeaking, and desireable 
enhancements. I can be reached either by posting to \url{comp.text.tex}
or more directly at \url{peter.r.wilson@boeing.com}.

    TeX was designed principally for typesetting documents containing a 
lot of mathematics. In such works the mathematics breaks up the flow
of the text on the page, and the vertical space required for displayed
mathematics is arbitrary. Most non-technical books are typeset on a fixed
grid as they do not have arbitrary insertions into the text.

    TeX is designed to handle arbitrary sized inserts in an elegant manner,
and does this by allowing vertical spaces to stretch and shrink a little
so that the actual height of the typeblock is constant. Therefore LaTeX, being
built on top of TeX, does not typeset on a fixed grid, and it would be a 
very major task to try and make it do so; this has been tried but as far as 
I know nobody has been successful.

    The manual includes many unbreakable names of LaTeX commands,
some of which stick out into the margin. The way of getting rid of these
is to rewrite the text so that they don't come at the end of a typeset
line. This is tedious and I haven't done it because I expect the manual
to be revised and that would throw off any hand tweaking done now.

\chapter{Introduction to the second edition}

    Since the first edition of the manual was published the \Lclass{memoir}
class has undergone some changes and extensions. The changes, to remove
some unfortunate errors, are upwards compatible. The extensions, by 
their nature, are not upward compatible.

    The main extensions and changes include:
\begin{itemize}
\item A \index{option}\Lopt{subfigure} option to counteract an unfortunate 
      interplay\footnote{Discovered by Ignasi Furi\'{o} Caldentey 
      (\url{ignasi@ipc4.uib.es}).}
      if the \Lpack{subfigure} package is used with the class.

\item An \Lopt{article} option so that \Lclass{article} class typesetting
      may be simulated.

\item Incorporation of the essential code from the \Lpack{titling}
      package~\cite{TITLING} (to support the \Lopt{article} option).

\item Incorporation of the essential code from the \Lpack{abstract}
      package~\cite{ABSTRACT} (to support the \Lopt{article} option).

\end{itemize}

    The description of how to modify the \prtoc, \prlof{} and \prlot{} headings
in the first edition was completely wrong, as was the corresponding
description of the \cmd{\newlistof} macro. No noticeable
changes have been made to the class code but the descriptions now
reflect reality. I must have been a few bricks short of a full load when
I wrote the original.

    There are other more minor changes and extensions\footnote{With thanks
to, among others, Kevin Lin (\url{kevinlin@runtop.com.tw}) and
Adriano Pascoletti (\url{pascolet@dimi.uniud.it}).} 
which you may find if you recall the first edition.

    There was no mention of typesetting verse in the first edition,
although the class does provide the normal LaTeX \Ie{verse}
environment. A poem
is usually individually typeset as the appearance often has an
effect on the emotional response when reading it. The \Lpack{verse}
package~\cite{VERSE} may be useful when typesetting poetry.

\chapter{Introduction to the third edition}

    Since the second  edition of the manual was published the \Lclass{memoir}
class has been upgraded from beta code to a production release. Extensions
have been made to both the class and this manual.

    The main extensions and changes include:
\begin{itemize}
\item An \Lopt{openleft} option to enable chapters to start
      on verso pages.

\item Incorporation of the essential code from the \Lpack{verse}
      package~\cite{VERSE} for more flexibility when typesetting
      poetry.

\item Replacement of the macro called \cmd{\makepshook} by
      \cmd{\makepsmarks}. Note that this is a non-upward compatible
      change.

\item The first part of the manual has been reorganised and
      extended, principally
      by providing more typesetting examples.

\item As usual, minor glitches have been removed from both the code
      and the manual; each revision, of course, eliminates the gap between
      advertisement and reality.

\end{itemize}


    There are other more minor changes and extensions\footnote{With thanks
to, among others, Ignasi Furi\'{o} Caldentey (\url{ignasi@ipc4.uib.es}),
Daniel Richard G. (\url{skunk@mit.edu}) and
Vladimir Ivanovic (\url{vladimir@acm.org}).} 
which you may find if you recall the second edition.

\chapter{Introduction to the fourth edition}

    Since the third edition of the manual was published the \Lclass{memoir}
class has been upgraded from version~1.0 to version~1.1. Modifications 
have been made to both the class and this manual.

    The main extensions and changes include:
\begin{itemize}
\item The \Lopt{subfigure} option is no longer required.

\item Subfloats have been added to the class. Steve Cochran kindly gave
      permission for me to use some of his \Lpack{subfigure} package
      code for this.

\item Some packages still use the old, deprecated LaTeX version~2.09
      font commands. I have reluctantly introduced an option
      to enable the old, deprecated font commands to be used.

\item The class now works harmoniously with the \Lpack{natbib}
      package~\cite{NATBIB}.

\item As usual, minor glitches have been removed from both the code
      and the manual; each revision hopefully eliminates the gap between
      advertisement and reality.

\end{itemize}


    There are other more minor changes and extensions\footnote{With thanks
to, among others, 
William Adams (\url{WillAdams@aol.com})
Ignasi Furi\'{o} Caldentey (\url{ignasi@ipc4.uib.es}),
Steven Douglas Cochran (\url{sdc+@cs.cmu.edu}),
Henrik Holm (\url{henrik@tele.ntnu.no}),
and Rolf Niepraschk (\url{niepraschk@ptb.de}).
}
which you may find if you have used earlier editions.

\chapter{Introduction to the fifth edition}

    Since the fourth edition of the manual was published the \Lclass{memoir}
class has been upgraded from version~1.1 to version~1.2. Modifications 
have been made to both the class and this manual.

    The main extensions and changes include:
\begin{itemize}
\item The size options have been extended\footnote{At the
      request of Vittorio De Martino whose children use LaTeX
      for their school projects.}
      to include a \Lopt{17pt} option.

\item A few font sizes corresponding to the font size commands (e.g., \verb?\Large?)
      have been changed to give regular steps between sizes.

\item Boxes that can break over pages and/or contain verbatim text.

\item Several ways of dealing with verbatim text, including footnotes
      that can contain verbatim text.

\item Some control over the typesetting of footnotes. Unfortunately
      this necessitated some changes in the methods for styling
      thanks notes.

\item Comment environments.

\item Convenient methods for file input and output.

\item Additional \verb?\provide...? commands.

\item The \Ie{description} environment has been modified to match
      the appearance of the standard environment. The original
      \Lclass{memoir} form is still available as the \Ie{blockdescription}
      environment.

\item A new optional argument has been added to the \cmd{\chapter} and 
      \cmd{\chapter*} commands for setting header texts.

\end{itemize}

     As usual, minor glitches have been removed from both the code
and the manual. Hopefully, new ones have not been introduced.

\chapter{Introduction to the sixth edition}

    Since the fifth edition of the manual was published the \Lclass{memoir}
class has been upgraded from version~1.2 to version~1.6. 
Many new functions have
been added to the class and this manual has been updated to reflect all
the additions.

    The main extensions and changes include:
\begin{itemize}

\item Major extensions for typesetting arrays and tabulars, including
      continuous tabulars and automatic tabulation.

\item Major extensions to footnote styles and the ability to have
      multiple series of footnotes.

\item Major extensions for indexing, including one column and multiple indexes.

\item Major extensions to crop marks. 

\item \verb?\tableofcontents? and friends can be used multiple times.

\item Section titles (as well as numbers) can be referenced.

\item Sheet numbers and access to the numbers of the last sheet and last page.

\item Various methods for formatting numbers.

\item Better cooperation with the \Lpack{chapterbib} and \Lpack{natbib} packages.

\end{itemize}

     There are many more minor additions.
     As usual, glitches have been removed from both the code
and the manual. Hopefully, new ones have not been introduced.


     Many people have contributed to the \Lclass{memoir} class and this manual
in the forms of code, solutions to problems, suggestions for new functions, 
bringing my attention to errors and infelicities in the code 
and manual, and last but not least in simply being encouraging. 
I am very grateful to the following for all they have done, whether they
knew it or not:
Paul Abrahams,
William Adams,
Donald Arseneau,
Jens Berger,
Karl Berry,
Javier Bezos,
Sven Bovin,
Alan Budden,
Ignasi Furi\'{o} Caldenty,
Ezequiel Mart\'{\i}n C\'{a}mara,
David Carlisle,
Steven Douglas Cochran,
Michael Downes,
Victor Eijkhout,
Danie Els,
Robin Fairbairns,
Simon Fear,
Kai von Fintel,
Daniel Richard G,
Romano Giannetti,
Kathryn Hargreaves,
Sven Hartrumpf,
Florence Henry,
Cartsten Heinz,
Peter Heslin,
Morton H\o{}gholm,
Henrik Holm,
Vladimir Ivanovich,
Stefan Kahrs,
J\o{}gen Larsen,
Kevin Lin,
Matthew Lovell,
Daniel Luecking,
Lars Madsen,
Vittorio De Martino,
Frank Mittelbach,
Rolf Niepraschk,
Patrik Nyman,
Heiko Oberdiek, 
Scott Pakin,
Adriano Pascoletti,
Robert,
Chris Rowley,
Bernd Raichle,
Doug Schenck,
Rainer Sch\"{o}pf,
Paul Stanley,
Reuben Thomas,
Bastiaan Niels Veelo,
Emanuele Vicentini,
J\"{u}rgen Vollmer,
and others.

If I have inadvertently left anyone off the list I apologise, 
and please let me know so that I can correct the omisssion.

    Of course, none of this would have been possible without Donald Knuth's
TeX system and the subsequent development of LaTeX by Leslie Lamport.



%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\chapter{Terminology}
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

    Like all professions and trades, typographers and printers have their
specialised vocabulary.

    First there is the question of pages, leaves and sheets. 
The trimmed sheets of paper\index{paper} that make up a book are called 
\emph{leaves}\index{leaf},
and I will call the untrimmed sheets the \emph{stock}\index{stock} material. 
A leaf
has two sides, and a \emph{page}\index{page} is one side of a leaf. 
If you think of a book
being opened flat, then you can see two leaves. The front of the righthand
leaf, is called the \emph{recto}\index{recto} page of that leaf, 
and the side of the
lefthand leaf that you see is called the \emph{verso}\index{verso} page 
of that leaf. 
So, a leaf has a recto and a verso page. Recto pages are the odd-numbered 
pages and verso pages are even-numbered.

   Then there is the question of folios. The typographical term for
the number of a page is \emph{folio}\index{folio}.
This is not to be confused with
the same term as used in `Shakespeare's First Folio' where the reference is
to the height and width of the book, nor to its use in the phrase
`\emph{folio} signature'\index{signature} where the term refers to the 
number of times a printed sheet is folded. 
Not every page in a book has a printed
folio, and there may be pages that do not have a folio at all. Pages with
folios, whether printed or not, form the \emph{pagination}\index{pagination} 
of the book. Pages
that are not counted in the pagination have no folios.

   A \emph{font}\index{font} is a set of characters. In the days of 
metal type and hot lead a font meant a complete alphabet and auxiliary
characters in a given size. More recently it is taken to mean a complete
set of characters regardless of size. A font of roman type normally
consists of CAPITAL LETTERS, \textsc{small capitals}, lowercase letters,
numbers, punctuation marks, ligatures (such as `fi' and `ffi'), and a
few special symbols like \&.
   A \emph{font family}\index{font!family} is a set of fonts designed to
work harmoniously together, such as a pair of roman and italic fonts.

   The size of a font\index{font} is expressed in points\index{point} 
(72.27 points equals 1 inch
equals 25.4 millimeters). The size is a rough indication of the height
of the tallest character, but different fonts with the same size may have
very different actual heights.

    The typographers' and printers' term for the vertical space between
the lines of normal text is \emph{leading}\index{leading}, which is also
usually expressed in points and is usually larger than the font size.
A convention for describing the font and leading is give the font size 
and leading separated by a slash; for instance $10/12$ for a
10pt font set with a 12pt leading, or $12/14$ for a 12pt font set with a
14pt leading.

    The normal length of a line of text is often called the 
\emph{measure}\index{measure} and is normally specified in terms of
picas\index{pica} where 1 pica equals 12 points (1pc = 12pt).

    Documents may be described as being typeset with a particular font
with a particular size and a particular leading on a particular measure;
this is normally given in a shorthand form. 
A 10pt font with 11pt leading on a 20pc measure is described as
$10/11 \times 20$, and $14/16 \times 22$ describes a 14pt font
with 16pt leading set on a a 22pc measure.

\section{Units of measurement}

    Typographers and printers use a mixed system of units, some of which
we met above. The fundamental unit is the point; \tref{tab:units} lists 
the most common units employed.

\begin{table}
\centering
\caption{Printers units} \label{tab:units}
\begin{tabular}{ll} \hline
Name (abbreviation) & Value \\ \hline
point (pt)\index{point}\index{pt}          &            \\
pica (pc)\index{pica}\index{pc}           & 1pc = 12pt \\
inch (in)\index{inch}\index{in}           & 1in = 72.27pt \\
centimetre (cm)\index{centimetre}\index{cm}     & 2.54cm = 1in \\
millimetre (mm)\index{millimetre}\index{mm}     & 10mm = 1cm \\ 
big point (bp)\index{big point}\index{bp}      & 72bp = 72.27pt \\
didot point (dd)\index{didot point}\index{dd}    & 1157dd = 1238pt \\
cicero (cc)\index{cicero}\index{cc}         & 1cc = 12dd \\
\hline
\end{tabular}
\end{table}

    Points\index{point} and picas\index{pica} 
are the traditional printers units used in English-speaking countries. 
The didot point\index{didot point} and cicero\index{cicero} are the 
corresponding units used in continental Europe. In Japan `kyus'\index{kyus}
(a quarter of a millimetre) may be used as the unit of measurement.
Inches\index{inch} and centimetres\index{centimetre} are the units that we
are all, or should be, familiar with.

    The point system was invented by Pierre Fournier le jeune in 1737 with
a length of 0.349mm. Later in the same century Fran\c{c}ois-Ambroise Didot
introduced his point system with a length of 0.3759mm. This is the value
still used in Europe. Much later, in 1886, the American Type Founders
Association settled on 0.013837in as the standard size for the point, and
the British followed in 1898. Conveniently for those who are not entirely
metric in their thinking this means that 
six picas are approximately equal to one inch.

    The big point\index{big point} 
is somewhat of an anomaly in that is a recent
invention. It tends to be used
in page markup languages, like PostScript\footnote{PostScript is a 
registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.\label{fn:ps}},
in order to make to make calculations quicker and easier.

    The above units are all constant in value. There are also some units
whose value depends on the particular font\index{font} being used. 
The \textit{em}\index{em}
is the nominal height of the current font; it is used as a width measure.
An \textit{en}\index{en} is half an em.
The \textit{ex}\index{ex} is
nominally the height of the letter `x' in the current font. You may also
come across the term \textit{quad}\index{quad}, often as in a phrase
like `starts with a quad space'. It is a length defined in terms of
an em, often a quad is 1em.


\cleardoublepage
\pagenumbering{arabic}

% body
\mainmatter

\part{Art and Theory} \label{part:art}

\chapter{The Parts of a Book}

\section{Introduction}

    This chapter describes the various parts of a book, the 
ordering of the parts, and the typical page numbering scheme used
in books. 



\section{Front matter}


    There are three major divisions in a book: 
the front matter\index{front matter} or preliminaries\index{preliminaries}, 
the main matter\index{main matter} or text, 
and the back matter\index{back matter} or references. 
The main differences as
far as appearance goes is that in the front matter the folios\index{folio} are 
expressed as roman numerals and sectional divisions are not numbered. The 
folios\index{folio} are expressed as arabic numerals in the main and back matter. Sectional
divisions are numbered in the main matter but not in the back matter.

    The front matter\index{front matter} consists of such elements as the title
of the book, a table of contents\ixtoc, and similar items. The first few pages
in the front matter are not paginated\index{pagination} and so do not have folios\index{folio}. The remainder
are paginated and the folios\index{folio} are usually expressed as roman numerals. Not all
books have all the elements described below.

    The first page is a recto \emph{half title}\index{half title page} 
page with no folio\index{folio}. 
The page is very simple and displays just the main title of the book --- 
no subtitle, author, or other information. One purported purpose of this
page is to protect the main title page.

    The first verso page, the back of the half-title page, may contain the 
series title, if the book is one in a series, a list of contributors, 
a frontispiece, or may be blank. The series title may instead be put on the 
half-title page or on the copyright page.

   The \emph{title page}\index{title page} is recto and contains the full 
title of the work, the names of the author(s) or editor(s), and often at the
bottom of the page the name of the publisher, together with the publisher's 
logo if it has one.

    The title page(s) may be laid out in a simple manner or can have various
fol-de-rols, depending on the impression the designer wants to give. In
any event the style of this page should give an indication of the style
used in the main body of the work.

    The verso of the title page is the copyright page\index{copyright page}.
This contains the copyright notice, the publishing/printing history, 
the country where printed, ISBN and/or CIP information. The page is usually 
typeset in a smaller font\index{font!change} than the normal text.

    Following the copyright page may come a dedication or an epigraph\index{epigraph}, 
on a recto page, with the following verso page blank.

    This essentially completes the unpaginated pages.

    The headings\index{heading} and textual forms for the paginated 
pages should be the same as those for the main matter, except that 
headings\index{heading} are usually unnumbered.

    The first paginated page,
usually with roman numerals (e.g., this is folio i),
is recto with the Table of Contents (\toc). If the book contains 
figures\index{figure} (illustrations\index{illustration}) 
and/or tables\index{table}, the List of Figures (\lof) and/or List of Tables (\lot) come 
after the \toc, with no blank pages separating them. The \toc{} should contain
an entry for each following major element. If there is a \lot, say, this 
should be listed in the \toc. The main chapters\index{chapter} must be listed, of course, and
so should elements like a preface\index{preface}, bibliography\index{bibliography} or an index\index{index}.

    There may be a foreword\index{foreword} after the listings, with no blank
separator. A foreword is usually written by someone other than the author, 
preferably an eminent person, and is signed by the writer. The writer's
signature is often typeset in small caps after the end of the piece.

   A preface\index{preface} is normally written by the author, in which he
includes reasons why he wrote the work in the first place, and perhaps to 
provide some more personal comments than would be justified in the body. 
A preface starts on the page immediately following a foreword, or the lists.

   If any acknowledgements are required that have not already appeared in the
preface, these may come next in sequence.

   Following may be an introduction if this is not part of the main text. 
The last elements in the front material may be a list of abbreviations, list
of symbols, a chronology of events, a family tree, or other information of
a like sort depending on the particular work.

    Table~\ref{tab:front} summarises the potential elements in the front
matter.

\begin{table}
\centering
\caption{Front matter}\label{tab:front}
\begin{tabular}{llcc} \hline
Element                      & Page  & Paginated & Leaf \\ \hline
Half-title page              & recto & no        & 1 \\
Frontispiece, etc., or blank & verso & no        & 1 \\
Title page                   & recto & no        & 2 \\
Copyright page               & verso & no        & 2 \\
Dedication                   & recto & no        & 3 \\
Blank                        & verso & no        & 3 \\
Table of Contents\ixtoc            & recto & yes       & 3 or 4 \\
List of Figures\ixlof     & recto or verso & yes       & 3 or 4 \\
List of Tables\ixlot      & recto or verso & yes       & etc. \\
Foreword            & recto or verso & yes       & etc. \\
Preface             & recto or verso & yes       & etc. \\
Acknowledgements    & recto or verso & yes       & etc. \\
Introduction        & recto or verso & yes       & etc. \\
Abbreviations, etc  & recto or verso & yes       & etc. \\
\hline
\end{tabular}
\end{table}


    Note that the titles Foreword, Preface and Introduction are somewhat
interchangeable. In some books the title Introduction may be used for what
is described here as the preface, and similar changes may be made among the 
other terms and titles in other books. 

\subsection{Copyright page}

    Most people are familiar with titles, \toc, prefaces, etc., but like
me are probably
less familiar with the contents of the copyright page\index{copyright page|(}. 
In any event this is
usually laid out by the publishing house, but some authors may like to be,
or are forced into being, their own publisher.

    The main point of the copyright page is to display the 
copyright\index{copyright} notice.
The Berne Convention does not require that published works carry a copyright
notice in order to secure copyright protection but most play it on the safe
side and include a copyright\index{copyright} notice.
This usually comes in three parts: the word \textit{Copyright} or more usually
the symbol \textcopyright, 
the year of publication, 
and the name of the copyright owner.
The copyright symbol matches the requirements of the Universal Copyright
Convention to which the USA, the majority of European and many Asian
countries belong.
The phrase `All rights reserved' is often added to ensure protection under the
Buenos Aires Convention, to which most of the Americas belong. A typical
copyright notice may look like: \\
{\footnotesize \textcopyright{} 2035 by Frederick Jones. All rights reserved.}

    Somewhere on the page, but often near the copyright notice, is the name 
and location(s) of the publisher.

    Also on the copyright page is the publishing history, denoting the edition
or editions\footnote{A second edition should be more valuable than a first
edition as there are many fewer of them.} and their dates, 
and often where the book has been printed. One thing that has puzzled me in
the past is the mysterious row of numbers you often see, looking like: \\
\centerline{\footnotesize\texttt{02 01 00 99 98 97\hspace{2em}10 9 8 7 6 5}}
The set on the left, reading from right to left, are the last two digits
of years starting with the original year of publication.
The set on the right, and again reading from right to left, represents the
potential number of new impressions (print runs). The lowest number in each 
group indicates the edition date and the current impression. So, the example
indicates the fifth impression of a book first published in 1997.

    In the USA, the page often includes the Library of Congress 
Cataloging-in-Publication (CIP)\index{CIP} data, 
which has to be obtained from the
Library of Congress. This provides some keywords about the book.

    The copyright page is also the place for the ISBN\index{ISBN} 
(International
Standard Book Number) number. This uniquely identifies the book. For example:
ISBN 0-NNN-NNNNN-2. The initial 0 means that the book was published in an
English-speaking country, the next group of digits identify the publisher,
the third group identifies the particular book by the publisher, and the final
digit, 2 in the example, is a check digit.

    It is left as an exercise for the reader to garner more information about
obtaining CIP and ISBN data.\index{copyright page|)}

\section{Main matter}

    The main matter\index{main matter|(} forms the heart of the book.

    All pages within the main matter are paginated, even though some folios\index{folio} may
not be expressed. The folios\index{folio} are normally presented as arabic numerals, with 
the numbering starting at 1 on the first recto page of the main matter.

    The main matter is at least divided into \emph{chapters}\index{chapter}, 
unless it is something like a 
young child's book which consists of a single short story. The chapters
may be grouped within \emph{parts}\index{part} which would then be the highest level
of division within the book. Typically both parts\index{part!number} and chapters\index{chapter!number} are numbered.
Obviously, part numbering should be continuous throughout the book, but even
with parts the chapter numbering is also continuous throughout the book.

    The title of a part\index{heading!part} is usually on a recto page which just contains the
part title, and number if there is one. Chapters\index{chapter} also start on recto pages
but in this case the text of the chapter\index{chapter} starts on the same page as the chapter
title.

    Chapters\index{chapter} may be divided into sections, either numbered or unnumbered, with
the numbering scheme starting afresh within each chapter. Similarly sections
may be partitioned into subsections but except for more technical works this 
is usually as fine as the subdivisions need go to. Normally there are no 
required page 
breaks before the start of any subdivisions within a chapter\index{chapter}.

    The title page of a part\index{part}
 or chapter\index{chapter} need not have the folio\index{folio} expressed, nor
a possibly textless verso page before the start of a chapter\index{chapter}, but all other 
pages should display their folios\index{folio}.

    There may be a final chapter\index{chapter} in the main matter called Conclusions, 
or similar, which may be a lengthy summary of the work presented, untouched
areas, ideas for future work, and so on.

    If there are any numbered appendices\index{appendix} 
they logically come at the end of
the front matter. Appendices are often `numbered' alphabetically rather
than numerically, so the first might be Appendix A, the second Appendix B,
and so on.

    An epilogue\index{epilogue} or an afterword\index{afterword} is a 
relatively short piece that the author may
include. These are not normally treated as prominently as the preceding
chapters\index{chapter}, and may well be put into the back matter if they are 
unnumbered.\index{main matter|)}

\section{Back matter}

    The back matter\index{back matter|(}
is optional but if present conveys information ancilliary
to that in the main matter.

    An unnumbered appendix\index{appendix} 
would normally come in the back matter.

    Other elements include Notes, a Glossary\index{glossary}
 and/or lists of symbols\index{symbol} or 
abbreviations\index{abbreviation}, which could be in the 
front matter\index{front matter} 
instead. These elements 
are normally unnumbered, as is any list of contributors\index{contributor}, 
Bibliography\index{bibliography} or Index\index{index}.

    In some instances appendices\index{appendix} 
and notes may be given at the end of each
chapter\index{chapter} instead of being lumped at the back.

    The first element in the back matter starts on a recto page but the 
remainder may start on either recto or verso pages.

    In older books it was often the custom to have a colophon\index{colophon}
as the final element in a book. This is an inscription which includes 
information about the production and design of the book and nearly 
always indicates which fonts\index{font} were used.\index{back matter|)}


\section{Signatures and casting off}
\index{signature|(}

    Professionally printed books have many pages printed per sheet of (large)
paper\index{paper}, which is then folded and cut where necessary to produce a 
\emph{signature} of several smaller sheets. An 
unfolded sheet is called a \emph{broadside}\index{broadside}. 
Folding a sheet in half produces a one sheet 
\emph{folio}\index{folio} signature with two leaves and four pages. 
Folding it in half again and cutting along the original fold gives a 
two sheet \emph{quarto}\index{quarto} signature with four leaves
and eight pages. 
Folding in half again, 
results in a four sheet \emph{octavo}\index{octavo} signature with eight
leaves and 16 pages, and so on as listed in \tref{tab:signatures}.

\begin{table}
\centering
\caption{Common signatures} \label{tab:signatures}
\begin{tabular}{lcccrccrccrc} \hline
Name      & Folds & Size             & \multicolumn{3}{c}{Sheets} & 
\multicolumn{3}{c}{Leaves} & \multicolumn{3}{c}{Pages} \\ \hline
Broadside & 0     & $a \times b$     & &  1 & & &  1 & & &   2 & \\
Folio     & 1     & $b/2 \times a$   & &  1 & & &  2 & & &   4 & \\
Quarto, \emph{4to} & 2 & $a/2 \times b/2$ & & 2 & & & 4 & & & 8 & \\
Octavo, \emph{8vo} & 3 & $b/4 \times a/2$ & & 4 & & & 8 & & & 16 & \\
\emph{16mo} & 4   & $a/4 \times b/4$ & &  8 & & & 16 & & &  32 & \\
\emph{32mo} & 5   & $b/8 \times a/4$ & & 16 & & & 32 & & &  64 & \\
\emph{64mo} & 6   & $a/8 \times b/8$ & & 32 & & & 64 & & & 128 & \\ \hline
\end{tabular}%
\index{broadside}\index{folio}\index{quarto}\index{4to}\index{octavo}%
\index{8vo}\index{16mo}\index{32mo}\index{64mo}%
\end{table}

    In \tref{tab:signatures} the Size column is the untrimmed size of a 
leaf\index{leaf} in 
the signature
with respect to the size of the broadside. When made up into a book the
leaves will trimmed to a slightly smaller size, at the discretion of the
designer and publisher; typically a minimum of 1/8 inch or 3 millimetres
would be trimmed from the top, bottom and foredge of a leaf.

    Other folds can produce other signatures. For example a 
\emph{sexto}\index{sexto},
obtained by folding in thirds and then folding in half, is a three sheet
signature with six leaves and 12 pages.

    In making up the book, the pages in each signature are first fastened
together, usually by sewing through the folds. The signatures are then bound
together and the covers, end papers\index{paper!end} and spine are attached to form
the completed whole.


    Publishers like the final typeset book to be of a length that just fits
within an integral number of signatures\index{signature}, 
with few if any blank pages required
to make up the final signature. Casting off\index{casting off} is the
process of determining how many lines a given text will make in a given
size of type, and hence how many pages will be required.

    To cast off you need to know how many characters there will be in
a line, and how many characters there are, or will be, in the text. 
For the purposes of casting off, `characters' includes punctuation as well
as letters and digits. The
first number can be easily obtained, either from copy fitting tables or
by measurement; this is described in more detail in \S\ref{sec:tblock}.
The second is more problematic, especially when the manuscript has yet
to be written. A useful rule of thumb is that words in an English text
average five letters plus one space (i.e., six characters); 
word length in technical texts might be greater than this.

    To determine the number of words it is probably easiest to type a
representative portion of the manuscript, hand count the words and then
divide that result by the proportion of the complete text that you have
typed. For example, if you have typed 1/20\,th of the whole, then divide
by 1/20, which is equivalent to multiplying by 20. To fully estimate
the number of pages required it is also necessary to make allowance for
chapter\index{chapter} titles, illustrations\index{illustration}, and so forth.

    If it turns out, say, that your work will require 3 signatures plus 2
pages then it will be more convenient to make it fit into 3 signatures,
or 4 signatures minus a page or two. This can be done by expanding or cutting
the text and/or by changing the font\index{font!change} 
and/or by changing the number or width
of lines on a page.

    When I was editing a technical journal the authors were given a word 
limit. The primary reason was not that we were interested in the actual
word count but rather so that we could estimate, and possibly limit, 
the number of pages allotted
to each article; we used \emph{octavo}\index{octavo} 
signatures\index{signature} and no blank pages. 
I suspect that it is
the same with most publishers --- it is the page count not the word count
that is important to them.

    In some special cases, extra pages may be `tipped in'\index{tip in} to
the body of the book. This is most likely to occur for 
illustrations\index{illustration} which
require special paper\index{paper} for printing and it would be too costly to use
that paper\index{paper} for the whole work. Another example is for a fold-out of some sort,
a large map, say, or a triple spread illustration\index{illustration}. The tipped in pages
are glued into place in the book and may or may not be paginated. For
tipped in illustrations\index{illustration}, a List of Illustrations may well start with
a phrase like: `Between pages 52 and 53'.

\index{signature|)}

%%%\clearpage
%%%\raggedbottom
\chapter{The page}  \label{chap:lpage}

    Authors usually want their works to be read by others than themselves,
and this implies that their manuscript will be reproduced in some manner.
It is to be hoped that the published version of their work will attract 
readers and there are two aspects to this. The major is the actual content
of the work --- the thoughts of the author couched in an interesting
manner --- if something is boring, then there are too many other interesting
things for the reader to do than to plow on until the bitter end, 
assuming that he
even started to read seriously after an initial scan. The other aspect is
the manner in which the content is displayed. Or, in other words, 
the \emph{typography}
of the book, which is the subject of this chapter.

    The essence of good typography is that it is not noticeable at first,
or even second or later, glances to any without a trained eye. If your
initial reaction when glancing through a book is to exclaim about its layout
then it is most probably badly designed, if it was designed at all. Good
typography is subtle, not strident. 

    With the advent of desktop publishing
many authors are tempted to design their own books. It is seemingly all
too easy to do. Just pick a few of the thousands of fonts\index{font} that are available,
use this one for headings\index{heading}, 
that one for the main text, another one for
captions, decide how big the typeblock\index{typeblock} is to be, and there you are.

    However, just as writing is a skill that has to be learned, typography
is also an art that has to be learned and practised. There are hundreds
of years of experience embodied in the good design of a book. These are
not to be cast aside lightly and many authors who design their own books
do not know what some of the hard-earned lessons are, let alone that what
they are doing may be the very antithesis of these. An expert can break
the rules, but then he is aware that he has good reasons for breaking them.

    The author supplies the message and the typographer supplies the medium.
Contrary to Marshall McLuhan, the medium is \emph{not} the message, 
and the typographer's job is not to
intrude between the message and the audience, but to subtly increase the
reader's enjoyment and involvement. If a book shouts `look at me!' then it
is an advertisement, and a bad one at that, for the designer.


\section{The shape of a book}

    Books come in many shapes and sizes, but over the centuries certain
shapes have been found to be more pleasurable and convenient than others.
Thus books, except for a very very few, are rectangular in shape. The 
exceptions on the whole are books for young children, although I do
have a book edited by Fritz Spiegl and published by Pan Books entitled
\textit{A Small Book of Grave Humour}, which is in the shape of a tombstone
--- this is an anthology of epitaphs. Normally the height of a book, when 
closed, is greater than the width. Apart from any aesthetic reasons, 
a book of this shape is physically more comfortable to hold than one which 
is wider than it is high.

    It might appear that the designer has great freedom in choosing the
size of the work, but for economic reasons this is not normally the case.
Much typographical design is based upon the availabilty of certain 
standard industrial sizes of sheets of paper\index{paper!size}. A page size of $12 \times 8$
inches will be much more expensive than one which fits on a standard
US letter sheet\index{paper!size!letterpaper} of $11 \times 8 \; 1/2$ inches. Similarly, 
one of the standard sizes
for a business envelope is $4 \; 1/8 \times 9 \; 1/2$ inches. 
Brochures for mailing
should be designed so that they can be inserted into the envelope with 
minimal folding. Thus a brochure size of $5 \times 10$ inches will be 
highly inconvenient, no matter how good it looks visually.

    Over the years books have been produced in an almost infinite variety
of proportions,
where by \emph{proportion}\index{proportion} 
I mean the ratio of the height to the width of a
rectangle. However, certain proportions\index{proportion} occur time after time throughout
the centuries and across many different countries and 
civilizations. This is because some proportions\index{proportion} are inherently
more pleasing to the eye than others are. These pleasing proportions\index{proportion} are
also commonly found in nature --- in  physical, biological, and chemical
systems and constructs. 

    Some examples of pleasing proportions\index{proportion} can be
seen in Japanese wood block prints, such as the \textit{Hoso-ye} size
($2 : 1$) which is a double square, the \textit{Oban} ($3 : 2$),
the \textit{Chuban} ($11 : 8$) and the \textit{Koban} size
($\sqrt{2} : 1$). Sometimes these prints were made up into books, but
were often published as stand-alone art work. Similarly Indian paintings,
at least in the 16th to the 18th century,
often come in the range $1.701 : 1$ to $13 : 9$, thus being around
$3 : 2$ in proportion\index{proportion}.

    In medieval Europe page proportions\index{proportion} were generally in the range
$1.25 : 1$ to $1.5 : 1$. Sheets of paper\index{paper} were typically 
produced in the
proportion\index{proportion} $4 : 3$ ($1.33 : 1$) or $3 : 2$ ($1.5 : 1$). 
These proportions\index{proportion}
have the property that they are reproduced with each alternate
folding of the sheet.
For example, if a sheet starts at a size of $60 \times 40$ 
(i.e., $3 : 2$),
then the first fold will make a double sheet of size $30 \times 40$
(i.e., $3 : 4$). The next fold will produce a quadrupled sheet of size
$30 \times 20$, which is again $3 : 2$, and so on. 
It is an interesting fact,
though, that it is impossible to fold a sheet of paper\index{paper}, no matter how large 
and thin, more than six times altogether. The Renaissance typographers
tended to like taller books, and their proportions\index{proportion} would go up 
to $1.87 : 1$
or so. The style nowadays has tended to go back towards the medieval
proportions\index{proportion}.

    The standard ISO page proportions\index{proportion} are $\sqrt{2} : 1$ 
($1.414 : 1$). These
have a similar property to those of medieval times. However, in this case
each fold reproduces the page proportion\index{proportion}. Thus halving an A0 sheet 
(size $1189 \times 841$ mm) produces an A1 size sheet ($594 \times 841$),
which in turn being halved produces the A2 sheet ($420 \times 594$), down
through the A3, A4 ($210 \times 297$ mm), and A5 sheets.

   There is no one perfect proportion\index{proportion} for a page, although some are 
clearly better
than others. For ordinary books both publishers and readers tend to prefer
books whose proportions\index{proportion} range from the light $9 : 5$ ($1.8 : 1$) 
to the heavy
$5 : 4$ ($1.25 : 1$). Some examples are shown in \fref{flpage:prop}.
 Wider pages, those with proportions\index{proportion} less than
$\sqrt{2} : 1$ ($1.414 : 1$), 
are principally useful for documents that need
extra width for tables\index{table}
, marginal notes\index{marginalia}, or where multi-column\index{column!multiple} printing
is preferred. 

\begin{figure}
\centering
\setlength{\unitlength}{1pc}
\begin{picture}(24,38)
\put(0,4){\begin{picture}(24,34)
  \put(0,0){\framebox(24,34){}}
  \thicklines \put(19.78,0){\line(0,1){34}}
  \thinlines
  \put(16,0){\line(0,1){34}}
  \put(17.78,0){\line(0,1){34}}
  \put(18.48,0){\line(0,1){34}}
  \put(19.2,0){\line(0,1){34}}
  \put(20.81,0){\line(0,1){34}}
  \put(21.33,0){\line(0,1){34}}
  \put(22.63,0){\line(0,1){34}}
  \put(0,-0.5){\begin{picture}(24,2)
    \put(16,0){\makebox(0,0){\textsc{a}}}
    \put(17.78,0){\makebox(0,0){\textsc{b}}}
    \put(18.48,0){\makebox(0,0){\textsc{c}}}
    \put(19.2,0){\makebox(0,0){\textsc{d}}}
    \put(19.78,0){\makebox(0,0){{$\varphi$}}}
    \put(20.81,0){\makebox(0,0){\textsc{e}}}
    \put(21.33,0){\makebox(0,0){\textsc{f}}}
    \put(22.63,0){\makebox(0,0){\textsc{g}}}
    \put(24,0){\makebox(0,0){\textsc{h}}}
    \end{picture}}
  \end{picture}}
  \put(0,0){\begin{picture}(24,4)
    \put(0,0){\begin{picture}(8,4)
      \put(0,2){\textsc{a} $2 : 1$}
      \put(0,1){\textsc{b} $9 : 5$}
      \put(0,0){\textsc{c} $1.732 : 1$ ($\sqrt{3}{} : 1$)}
      \end{picture}}
    \put(8,0){\begin{picture}(8,4)
      \put(0,2){\textsc{d} $5 : 3$}
      \put(0,1){{$\varphi$} $1.618 : 1$ ($\varphi{} : 1$)}
      \put(0,0){\textsc{e} $1.538 : 1$}
      \end{picture}}
    \put(16,0){\begin{picture}(8,4)
      \put(0,2){\textsc{f} $3 : 2$}
      \put(0,1){\textsc{g} $1.414 : 1$ ($\sqrt{2}{} : 1$)}
      \put(0,0){\textsc{h} $4 : 3$}
      \end{picture}}
    \end{picture}}
\end{picture}
\setlength{\unitlength}{1pt}
\caption{Some page proportions} \label{flpage:prop}
\end{figure}



    In books where the illustrations\index{illustration} are the primary concern, the shape of
the illustrations\index{illustration} is generally the major influence on the page proportion\index{proportion}.
The page size should be somewhat higher than that of the average 
illustration\index{illustration}.
The extra height is required for the insertion of captions\index{caption} describing the
illustration\index{illustration}. A proportion\index{proportion} of $\pi{} : e$ ($1.156 : 1$), 
which is slightly higher
than a perfect square, is good for square illustrations.\footnote{Both $e$
and $\pi$ are well known mathematical numbers. $e$ ($= 2.718 \ldots$)
is the base of natural logarithms and $\pi$ ($= 3.141 \ldots$) is the
ratio of the circumference of a circle to its diameter.}
The $e : \pi$
($0.864 : 1$) proportion\index{proportion} is useful for landscape photographs  taken with 
a $4 \times 5$
format camera, while those from a 35mm camera (which produces a negative
with a $2 : 3$ proportion\index{proportion}) are better accomodated on 
a $0.83 : 1$ page.

\subsection{The golden section and Fibonacci series}

\index{golden section|(}
    Typographers need a modicum of mathematical ability, but no more
than an average teenager can do --- basically simple arithmetic. You can
skip this section if you wish as it just provides some background 
mathematical material which might be of interest.

    Since ancient Greek times or even before, the golden section, which
is denoted by the Greek letter $\varphi$ (phi), has been considered to be
a particularly harmonious proportion\index{proportion}. It should come as no surprise, then,
that this also has applications in typography.

    The Greeks were interested in geometry (think of Euclid). They discovered
that if you divide a straight line into two unequal parts then a certain
division appeared to have an especially appealing aesthetic quality about it. 
Call the length of the line $l$ and the length of the two parts $a$ and $b$, 
where $a$ is the smaller and $b$ is the larger. The division in question
is when the ratio of the larger to the smaller division ($b/a$) is the same
as the ratio of the whole line to the larger division ($l/b$).
More formally, two elements embody the golden section, symbolised by
$\varphi$, when the ratio of the larger
to the smaller is the same as the ratio of the sum of the two to the larger.
If the two elements are $a$ and $b$, with $a < b$, then
\begin{equation}
\varphi = \frac{b}{a} = \frac{a+b}{b} = (1+\sqrt{5})/2
\end{equation}

    The golden section has been called by a number of different names
during its history. Euclid\index{Euclid}
 called it the `extreme and mean ratio' while
Renaissance writers called it the `divine proportion\index{proportion}'; now it is
called either the `golden section' or the `golden ratio'. The symbol
$\varphi$ is said to come from the name of the Greek artist 
Phidias\index{Phidias}
(C5th \textsc{bc}) who often used the golden section in his sculpture.
A rectangle whose sides are in the same proportion\index{proportion} as the golden section
is often called a `golden rectangle'.
The front of the Parthenon on the Acropolis in Athens is a golden rectangle,
and such rectangles appear often in Greek architecture.
The symbol of the Pythagoran school was the star pentagram, 
%%%%shown in \fref{flpage:spent}, 
where each line is divided in the golden section.


    The approximate decimal value for $\varphi$ is $1.61803$. 
The number has some unusual properties. If you add one to $\varphi$
you get its square, while subtracting one from $\varphi$ gives its 
reciprocal.
\begin{eqnarray}
  \varphi + 1 & = & \varphi^{2} \\
  \varphi - 1 & = & 1/\varphi
\end{eqnarray}
It also has a very simple definition as the continued fraction
\begin{equation}
\varphi = 1 + \frac{1}{\displaystyle 1 + \frac{1}{\displaystyle 1 + \frac{1}{\displaystyle 1 + \frac{1}{1 + \cdots}}}}
\end{equation}


    In 1202 Leonardo Pisano, 
also known as Leonardo Fibonacci, wrote a
book called \textit{Liber Abbaci.}\footnote{Book of the Abacus.} One of the 
topics he was interested in was population growth. The book included
this exercise: \index{Fibonacci series|(}
\begin{quote}
How many pairs of rabbits\index{rabbit} can be produced from a single 
pair in a year?
Assume that each pair produces a new pair of offspring every month,
a rabbit becomes fertile at age one month, and no rabbits die during the
year.
\end{quote}
After a month there will be two pairs. At the end of the next month the
first pair will have produced another pair, so now there are three pairs.
At the end of the following  month the original pair will have produced a
third pair of offspring and their firstborn will also have produced a pair, 
to make five pairs in all. And so on. 
If, like the rabbits, you are not too exhausted
to continue, you can get the following series of 
numbers\footnote{The numbers at the start of the series
depend on whether you consider the initial pair of rabbits to be adults or 
babies.\label{fn:rabbits}}:
\begin{displaymath}
0,1,1,2,3,5,8,13,21,34, 55, 89 \ldots
\end{displaymath}
After the first two terms, each term in the series is the sum of the two
preceding terms. Also, as one progresses along the series, the ratio of
any adjacent pair of terms oscillates around $\varphi$ ($= 1.618 \ldots$),
approaching it ever more closely.
\begin{eqnarray*}
  8/5 & = & 1.6 \\
  13/8 & = & 1.625 \\
  21/13 & = & 1.615 \\
  34/21 & = & 1.619 \\
  55/34 & = & 1.6176 \\
  89/55 & = & 1.6182
\end{eqnarray*}

    For the mathematically inclined there is another, to me, striking
relationship between $\varphi$ and the Fibonacci series. Define the
Fibonacci numbers as $F_{n}$, where
\begin{equation}
\begin{array}{cccc}
F_{0} = 0;\ \ & F_{1}=1;\ \ & F_{n+2}=F_{n+1} + F_{n},  &  n \geq 0.
\end{array}
\end{equation}
Then
\begin{equation}
 F_{n} = \frac{1}{\sqrt{5}}(\varphi^{n} - (- \varphi)^{-n})
\end{equation}

    Both the Fibonacci series and the golden section appear in nature.
The arrangement of seeds in a sunflower, the pattern on the surface of a 
pinecone, and the spacing of leaves around a stalk all exhibit Fibonacci
paterns (for example see~\cite{CONWAY96}). Martin Gardener~\cite{GARDNER66}
reports on studies that claimed that the average ratio of a person's height
to the height of the navel is $1.618+$ --- suspiciously close to $\varphi$.

\index{Fibonacci series|)}
\index{golden section|)}

%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%%\endinput
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

\section{The spread} \label{sec:spread}
\index{spread|(}

    The typeblock\index{typeblock} is that part of the page which is normally covered with
type. The same proportions\index{proportion} that are useful for the shape of a page are also
useful for the shape of the typeblock\index{typeblock}. This does not mean, though, that the
proportions\index{proportion} of the page and the typeblock\index{typeblock} should be the same. For instance,
a square typeblock\index{typeblock} on a square page is inherently dull.

    When we first start to learn to read we scan horizontally along each line
of text. As our skills improve we tend to scan vertically rather than
horizontally. A tall column\index{column} of text helps in this process, provided that
the column\index{column} is not too wide.

    A page in a book will typically contain several elements. Principal
among these is the typeblock\index{typeblock}, but there are also items like the folio\index{folio}
(that is, the page number), a running head and/or foot which carries the
chapter\index{chapter} and/or book title, and possibly marginalia\index{marginalia} and footnotes\index{footnote}. These latter
elements, although essential to the content of the book, are minor visual
elements compared to the typeblock\index{typeblock}. But even minor decoration can obscure
or kill an otherwise good design.

  The major concern is the positioning of the typeblock\index{typeblock} on the page. 
The mere 
fact of positioning the typeblock\index{typeblock} also has the result of producing margins\index{margin}
onto the page. Page design is a question of balancing the page proportions\index{proportion}
with the proportions\index{proportion} of the typeblock\index{typeblock} and the proportions\index{proportion} of the margins\index{margin} to 
create an interesting yet harmonious composition. A single page, except
for a title page, is never the subject of a design but rather the design
is in terms of the two pages that are on view when a book is opened --- the
left and right hand pages are considered as a whole. More technically, the
design is in terms of a \emph{double spread}.



\begin{table}
\caption{Some page designs} \label{tlpage:allp}
\centering
\DeleteShortVerb{\|}
%\begin{tabular}{|l|l|l|c|} \hline
\begin{tabular}{|r|r|rrrrr|l|} \hline
\multicolumn{1}{|c|}{$P$} & \multicolumn{1}{c|}{$T$} & \multicolumn{5}{c|}{Margins \& Columns} & 
\multicolumn{1}{c|}{Figure}          \\ 
 & & \multicolumn{1}{c|}{$s$} & \multicolumn{1}{c|}{$t$} & \multicolumn{1}{c|}{$e$} & 
     \multicolumn{1}{c|}{$f$} & \multicolumn{1}{c|}{$g$}     &                 \\ \hline
$\sqrt{3}$ & $2$     & $w/13$   & $8s/5$ & $16s/5$ & $16s/5$ &       & \ref{fb:1} left \\ %Bringhurst
$\sqrt{3}$ & $e/\varphi$ & $w/10$ & $2s$ & $2s$    & $3s$    &       & \ref{fb:1} right \\ % Machie
$12/7$     & $1.701$ & $w/7$    & $8s/5$ & $8s/5$  & $14s/5$ &       & \ref{fb:2} left \\ % Grenfell
$e/\varphi$ & $7/4$  & $w/10$   & $5s/4$ & $5s/3$  & $11s/8$ &       & \ref{fb:2} right \\ % JKJ
$\varphi$  & $1.866$ & $w/9$    & $s$    & $2s$    & $7s/3$  &       & \ref{fb:3} left \\ %Paris
$\varphi$  & $\varphi$ & $w/12$ & $2s$   & $5s/2$  & $4s$    &       & \ref{fb:3} right \\ %Dowding
$8/5$      & $1.634$ & $2w/15$  & $7s/5$ & $9s/5$  & $13s/5$ &       & \ref{fb:4} left \\ %Rogers
$19/12$    & $7/4$   & $2w/15$  & $s$    & $9s/8$  & $11s/8$ &       & \ref{fb:4} right \\ %Anatomy
$19/12$    & $\sqrt{3}$ & $w/7$ & $s$    & $5s/4$  & $1.84s$ &       & \ref{fb:5} left \\ % Cornford
$19/12$    & $8/5$   & $w/12$   & $7s/5$ & $8s/5$  & $2s$    &       & \ref{fb:5} right \\ %Abeced
$\pi/2$    & $9/5$   & $w/9$    & $3s/2$ & $5s/2$  & $3s$    &       & \ref{fb:6} left \\ %Dwiggins
$e/\sqrt{3}$ & $1.71$ & $w/10$  & $11s/8$ & $24s/11$ & $8s/3$ &      & \ref{fb:6} right \\ %Two Men
$1.553$    & $1.658$ & $w/11$   & $\varphi s$ & $\varphi s$ & $\varphi s$ & & \ref{fb:7} left \\ %Express
$1.538$    & $\sqrt{7}$ & $w/10$ & $s$   & $23s/6$ & $3s/2$  &       & \ref{fb:7} right \\ %T&H
$3/2$      & $2$     & $w/5$    & $s/2$  & $s$     & $s$     &       & \ref{fb:8} left \\ %Rome
$3/2$      & $1.701$ & $w/9$    & $s$    & $2s$    & $7s/3$  &       & \ref{fb:8} right \\ %Venice
$3/2$      & $\pi/2$ & $w/13$   & $2s$   & $10s/3$ & $30s/7$ &       & \ref{fb:9} left \\ %Magellan
$3/2$      & $3/2$   & $w/9$    & $3s/2$ & $2s$    & $3s$    &       & \ref{fb:9} right \\ %Gutenberg
$3/2$      & $1.68$  & $w/23$   & $2s$   & $5s$    & $2s$    &       & \ref{fb:10} left \\ % Pers Mss
$3/2$      & $3/2$   & $w/10$   & $2s$   & $5s/2$  & $2.85s$ &       & \ref{fb:10} right \\ % Pers Bk
$1.48$     & $1.376$ & $w/12$   & $7s/4$ & $2s$    & $7s/2$  &       & \ref{fb:11} left \\ %Goudy
$13/9$     & $\sqrt{2}$ & $w/30$ & $2s$  & $9s/2$  & $4s$    & $s/2$ & \ref{fb:11} right \\ %Doomsday
$\sqrt{2}$ & $\varphi$ & $w/9$  & $s$    & $2s$    & $2s$    &       & \ref{fb:12} left \\ %Orig A4
$\sqrt{2}$ & $\varphi$ & $w/8$  & $s$    & $5s/3$  & $5s/3$  &       & \ref{fb:12} right \\ %Mod A4
$7/5$      & $1.641$   & $w/7$  & $s$    & $8s/5$  & $8s/5$  &       & \ref{fb:13} left \\ %Emery Walker
$1.294$    & $\varphi$ & $0.176w$ & $1.03s$ & $1.685s$ & $13s/9$ &   & \ref{fb:13} right \\ %LaTeX
$1.294$    & $13/9$  & $w/12$   & $s$    & $2s$    & $10s/7$ & $s/2$ & \ref{fb:14} left \\ %Wilson
$9/7$      & $19/9$  & $2w/5$   & $5s/8$ & $5s/8$  & $5s/6$  &       & \ref{fb:14} right \\ %Kuniyoshi
$5/4$      & $13/11$ & $w/10$   & $3s/2$ & $2s$    & $8s/3$  &       & \ref{fb:15} left \\ %Fens
$7/6$    & $17/15$ & $w/13$   & $s$    & $s$     & $7s/5$  & $.382$ & \ref{fb:15} right \\ %Durer
%$1.176$    & $1.46$  & $0.107w$ & $5s/6$ & $2.41s$ & $3s/2$  &       & \ref{fb:12} left \\ %Art
$e/\pi$    & $0.951$ & $w/9$    & $s$    & $2s$    & $3s/2$  &       & \ref{fb:16} left \\ %Hammer & Hand
$5/7$      & $2/3$   & $w/9$    & $s/2$  & $2s/3$  & $s$     & $s/3$ & \ref{fb:16} right \\ \hline %Hokusai
\end{tabular}
\MakeShortVerb{\|}
\end{table}

  Table~\ref{tlpage:allp} gives some examples of 
page designs. These are arranged in increasing order of
fatness. In this table, and afterwards, I have just used a single number
to represent the ratio of the page height to the width; that is, for example,
$1.5$ instead of $1.5 : 1$ or $12/7$ instead of $12 : 7$.
The following symbols are used in the table:
\begin{description}
\item[Proportions]:
  \begin{itemize}
  \item[$P$] = page proportion = $h/w$
  \item[$T$] = typeblock proportion = $d/m$
  \end{itemize}
\item[Page size]:
  \begin{itemize}
  \item[$w$] = width of page
  \item[$h$] = height of page
  \end{itemize}
\item[Typeblock]:
  \begin{itemize}
  \item[$m$] = measure (i.e., width) of primary typeblock
  \item[$d$] = depth (excluding folios, running heads, etc.)
%%  \item[$n$] = measure of secondary column
%%  \item[$c$] = column width, when there are two columns
  \end{itemize}
\item[Margins]:
  \begin{itemize}
  \item[$s$] = spine margin (back margin)
  \item[$t$] = top margin (head margin)
  \item[$e$] = fore-edge (front margin)
  \item[$f$] = foot margin (bottom margin)
  \item[$g$] = internal gutter (on a multi-column page)
  \end{itemize}
\end{description}
    The designs are also shown in \figurerefname s~\ref{fb:1} 
to~\ref{fb:16}. Each of these shows a double page spread; the 
page width has been kept constant throughout the series to enable easier
visual comparison --- it is the relative proportions\index{proportion}, not the absolute size, 
that are important. I have only shown the pages and the typeblocks\index{typeblock} to avoid
confusing the diagrams with headers\index{header}, footers\index{footer} 
or folios\index{folio}.


\begin{figure}
\centering
\begin{minipage}[b]{\pwlayi}
\drawaspread{\pwlayii}{1.732}{2}{.0769}{1.6}{3.2}{0} % Bringhurst
\end{minipage}
\hfill
\begin{minipage}[b]{\pwlayi}
\drawaspread{\pwlayii}{1.732}{1.684}{.1}{2}{2}{0} % Machiavelli
\end{minipage}
\caption[Two spreads: Canada, 1992 and England, 1970]%
        {Two spreads: (Left) Canada, 1992. % Bringhurst.
         (Right) England, 1970.} \label{fb:1}
\end{figure}

    Shown in \fref{fb:1} are two modern books. On the left is the layout
for Robert Bringhurst's \textit{The Elements of Typographical Style} published
by Hartley \& Marks in 1992, and designed by Bringhurst. The text face is
Minion set with $12$pt leading on a $21$pc measure. The captions are
set in Syntax. The original
size is $227 \times 132$mm. I highly recommend this book if you are
interested in typography. The layout on the right is The Folio Society's
1970 edition of \textit{The Prince} by Niccol\`{o} Machiavelli. The original
size is $216 \times 125$mm and is set in $12/13 \times 22$ Centaur.



\begin{figure}
\centering
\begin{minipage}[b]{\pwlayi}
\drawaspread{\pwlayii}{1.714}{1.701}{.143}{1.6}{1.6}{0} % Grenfell
\end{minipage}
\hfill
\begin{minipage}[b]{\pwlayi}
\drawaspread{\pwlayii}{1.68}{1.75}{.1}{1.25}{1.667}{0} % JKJ
\end{minipage}
\caption[Two spreads: USA, 1909 and England, 1964.]%
        {Two spreads: (Left) USA, 1909.
         (Right) England, 1964.} \label{fb:2}
\end{figure}

    Figure~\ref{fb:2} (left) illustrates a small book by Wilfred T.~Grenfell
entitled \textit{Adrift on an Ice-Pan} published in 1909 by the Riverside
Press of Boston. The text is set with a leading of $16$pt on a $16$pc measure.
The large leading and small measure combine to give a very open appearance.
The original
size is $184 \times 107$mm. On the right is another book from the
Folio Society --- \textit{Three Men in a Boat} by Jerome K.~Jerome printed
in 1964. The original size is $215 \times 128$mm and is typeset with
Ehrhardt at $11/12 \times 22$.

\begin{figure}
\centering
\begin{minipage}[b]{\pwlayi}
\drawaspread{\pwlayii}{1.618}{1.87}{.111}{1}{2}{0} % Paris
\end{minipage}
\hfill
\begin{minipage}[b]{\pwlayi}
\drawaspread{\pwlayii}{1.618}{1.618}{.0833}{2}{2.5}{0} % Dowding
\end{minipage}
\caption[Two spreads: France, 1559 and Canada, 1995]%
        {Two spreads: (Left) France, 1559.
         (Right) Canada, 1995.} \label{fb:3}
\end{figure}

   Jean de Tourmes, a Parisian publisher, printed \textit{Histoire et Chronique}
by Jean Froissart in 1559. This is a history book with the main text in
roman and sidenotes in italic at roughly 80\% of the size of the main text.
The layout is shown in \fref{fb:3} (left). The gutter (not shown) between the main
text and the sidenote column\index{column} is very small, but the change in fonts and sizes
enables the book to be read with no confusion. Another Hartley \& Marks
typography book --- \textit{Finer Points in the Spacing \& Arrangement
of Type} by Geoffrey Dowding --- is shown at the right of \fref{fb:3}.
This is typeset in Ehrhardt at $10.5/14 \times 23$ on a page size of
$231 \times 143$mm.



\begin{figure}
\centering
\begin{minipage}[b]{\pwlayi}
\drawaspread{\pwlayii}{1.6}{1.634}{.1333}{1.4}{1.8}{0} % Rogers
\end{minipage}
\hfill
\begin{minipage}[b]{\pwlayi}
\drawaspread{\pwlayii}{1.583}{1.75}{.1333}{1}{1.125}{0} % Anatonomy
\end{minipage}
\caption[Two spreads: USA, 1949 and 1990]%
        {Two spreads: (Left) USA, 1949.
         (Right) USA, 1990.} \label{fb:4}
\end{figure}

    Bruce Rogers (1870--1957) described how he came to design his 
Centaur typeface in
\textit{Centaur Types}, a privately published book by his studio October
House in 1949. The layout of this book, which of course was typeset in
Centaur, is shown at the left of \fref{fb:4}. Centaur is an upright
seriffed type based on Nicolas Jenson's type as used in \textit{Eusebius}
published in 1470. \textit{Centaur Types} demonstrates typefaces other than
Centaur, and also includes exact size reproductions of the engraver's 
patterns. It is set at $14/16 \times 22$ on a page size of $240 \times 150$mm.
Figure~\ref{fb:4} (right) is the layout of another book on typefaces.
It is \textit{The Anatomy of a Typeface} by Alexander Lawson published by
David R.~Godine in 1990.
This is set in Galliard with $13$pt leading and a measure of $24$pc on
a page size of $227.5 \times 150$mm.


\begin{figure}
\centering
\begin{minipage}[b]{\pwlayi}
\drawaspread{\pwlayii}{1.583}{1.731}{.143}{1}{1.25}{0} % Cornford
\end{minipage}
\hfill
\begin{minipage}[b]{\pwlayi}
\drawaspread{\pwlayii}{1.583}{1.6}{.0833}{1.4}{1.6}{0} % Abcedarium
\end{minipage}
\caption[Two spreads: England, 1908 and USA, 1993]%
        {Two spreads: (Left) England, 1908.
         (Right) USA, 1993.} \label{fb:5}
\end{figure}

    \textit{Microcosmographica Academia} by F. M. Cornford is shown in
\fref{fb:5}. Despite its title, it is written in English and was published
by Bowes \& Bowes, London, in 1908. It is a dryly humourous look at academic
politics as practised in Cambridge University at the turn of the nineteenth
century (possibly the twentieth as well). It is set with $14$pt leading
on $22$pc. The original page size is $216 \times 136$mm.
The right of this figure illustrates a book with another unusual title ---
\textit{The Alphabet Abcedarium} by Richard A.~Firmage  and published by
David R.~Godine in  1993. It is set in Adobe Garamond on a $27$pc measure
with $14$pt leading. The original page size is $227.5 \times 150$mm. The
book gives a history of each letter of the latin alphabet. One
unusual feature is that there is a deep footer\index{footer} on each page
showing many examples of typefaces of the letter being described.


\begin{figure}
\centering
\begin{minipage}[b]{\pwlayi}
\drawaspread{\pwlayii}{1.571}{1.8}{.111}{1.5}{2.5}{0} % Dwiggins
\end{minipage}
\hfill
\begin{minipage}[b]{\pwlayi}
\drawaspread{\pwlayii}{1.562}{1.709}{.1}{1.375}{2.182}{0} % Two Men
\end{minipage}
\caption[Two spreads: USA, 1931 and England, 1968]%
        {Two spreads: (Left) USA, 1931.
         (Right) England, 1968.} \label{fb:6}
\end{figure}


    W.~A.~Dwiggins was, among many other things, an American book designer.
Figure~\ref{fb:6} (left) shows his layout of H.~G.~Wells' \textit{The Time
Machine} for Random House in 1931. The page size is $231 \times 147$mm.
The right of the figure illustrates the layout of a book called 
\textit{Two Men --- Walter Lewis and Stanley Morrison at Cambridge}
by Brooke Crutchley and published by Cambridge University Press in 1968.
Crutchley was the Cambridge University Printer and each year would produce
a limited edition of a book about Cambridge or typography, and preferably
both together. This is typeset in Monotype Barbon with $17.5$ leading on
a $26$pc measure on a $253 \times 162$mm page.



\begin{figure}
\centering
\begin{minipage}[b]{\pwlayi}
\drawaspread{\pwlayii}{1.553}{1.685}{.0909}{1.618}{1.618}{0} % Express
\end{minipage}
\hfill
\begin{minipage}[b]{\pwlayi}
\drawaspread{\pwlayii}{1.538}{2.647}{.1}{1}{3.833}{0} % Thames & Hudson
\end{minipage}
\caption[Two spreads: USA, 1994 and England, 1988]%
        {Two spreads: (Left) USA, 1994.
         (Right) England 1988.} \label{fb:7}
\end{figure}

    A modern technical book layout is given in \fref{fb:7}. The book
is \textit{Information Modeling the EXPRESS Way} by Douglas Schenck and Peter
Wilson, published by Oxford University Press (New York) in 1994. This is
set in Computer Modern Roman at $10/12 \times 27$ on a page 
$233 \times 150$mm. Ruari McLean's \textit{The Thames and Hudson Manual of
Typography} (1988) is at the right in \fref{fb:7}. This is typeset in
$10/11 \times 20$ Monophoto Garamond on a $240 \times 156$mm page. The wide
\foredge{} is used for small illustrations\index{illustration}. Notes are also set in this
margin\index{margin} rather than at the foot of the page.



\begin{figure}
\centering
\begin{minipage}[b]{\pwlayi}
\drawaspread{\pwlayii}{1.5}{2}{.2}{.5}{1}{0} % Rome
\end{minipage}
\hfill
\begin{minipage}[b]{\pwlayi}
\drawaspread{\pwlayii}{1.5}{1.7}{.111}{1}{2}{0} % Venice
\end{minipage}
\caption[Two spreads: Italy, 1523 and 1499]%
        {Two spreads: (Left) Italy, 1523.
         (Right) Italy 1499.} \label{fb:8}
\end{figure}

 Many page layouts in earlier days were constructed by
drawing with compass and ruler, usually based on regular geometric figures; 
the use of squares, pentagons and hexagons being particularly
prevelant.
    Unusually, the typeblock\index{typeblock} in \fref{fb:8} (left) is centered on the page.
The typeblock\index{typeblock} is based on a square, the depth being twice the measure.
The book, \textit{Canzone} by Giangiorgio Trissino, is a volume of poems
and was published in Rome about 1523 by Ludovico degli Arrighi. Prose works
from the same typographer followed the normal style of having the fore-edge
wider than the spine margin\index{margin}.
    The page proportion\index{proportion} in \fref{fb:8} (right) is also a simple $3 : 2$ 
ratio. The proportions\index{proportion} of the typeblock\index{typeblock}, being $1.7$, are based upon 
a pentagon.
The book is \textit{Hypnerotomachia Poliphili} by Francesco Colonna and was
published by Aldus Manutius in Venice in 1499. The story of this,
including some reproductions from the original, is told by Helen
Barolini~\cite{BAROLINI92}.


\begin{figure}
\centering
\begin{minipage}[b]{\pwlayi}
\drawaspread{\pwlayii}{1.5}{1.571}{.0769}{2}{3.333}{0} % Magellan
\end{minipage}
\hfill
\begin{minipage}[b]{\pwlayi}
\drawaspread{\pwlayii}{1.5}{1.5}{.111}{1.5}{2}{0} % Gutenberg
\end{minipage}
\caption[Two spreads: France/Portugal, 1530 and Gutenberg, C15th]%
        {Two spreads: (Left) France/Portugal, 1530.
         (Right) Gutenberg, C15th.} \label{fb:9}
\end{figure}

    In 1519 the Portugese explorer Ferdinand Magellan set sail from 
Sanl\'{u}car de Barramada, near C\'{a}diz in Spain, 
with five ships and about 270 men.
Three years later one ship and 18 men returned, having made the first
circumnavigation. Among the few survivors was Antonio Pigafetta who recorded
the adventure. 
A very few manuscripts of his report are in existence.
The layout of one of these manuscripts which is in the Beinecke Rare
Book and Manuscript Library at Yale is shown at the left of \fref{fb:9}.
The manuscript, which is written in French, is called 
\textit{Navigation et descouurement de la Inde superieure et isles
de Malueque ou naissent les cloux de Girosle} (Navigation and discovery
of Upper India and the Isles of Molucca where the cloves grow) is written
in a beautiful humanistic miniscule. There are 27 lines to a page, which
is $286 \times 190$mm and made of vellum. The text measure is $29.5$
and the `leading' is $21$pt. The wide fore margin\index{margin} is used for sidenotes
indicating highlights of the story. The manuscript was probably prepared 
soon before 1530; the scribe and where he worked is unknown.

    Many of the books produced by Johannes Gutenberg (1398--1468)
and his early successors 
followed the form shown in
\fref{fb:9} (right). This set of proportions\index{proportion} was also often used in
medieval incunabula\footnote{Early books, especially those printed before
1500.}  and manuscripts. The page and typeblock\index{typeblock} proportions\index{proportion}
are the same ($3 : 2$). The margins\index{margin} are in the proportions\index{proportion}
$2 : 3 : 4 : 6$.
A graphical method for constructing this, and similar designs, is 
shown later in \fref{flpage:lgut}.

\begin{figure}
\centering
\begin{minipage}[b]{\pwlayi}
\drawaspread{\pwlayii}{1.5}{1.68}{.043}{2}{5}{0} % Persian Mss
\end{minipage}
\hfill
\begin{minipage}[b]{\pwlayi}
\drawaspread{\pwlayii}{1.5}{1.5}{.1}{2}{2.5}{0} % Persian book
\end{minipage}
\caption[Two spreads: Persia, 1525 and USA, 1975]%
        {Two spreads: (Left) Persia, 1525.
         (Right) USA, 1975.} \label{fb:10}
\end{figure}

     Two versions of the same publication are shown in \fref{fb:10}.
On the left is a Persian manuscript \textit{Khamsch of Nizami} written
about 1525. The page size is about $324 \times 216$mm. The 
illustrations\index{illustration} and
the typeblock\index{typeblock} are inextricably mixed. On the right is a translation of
some of the manuscript published as \textit{Tales from the Khamsch of Nizami}
by the Metropolitan Museum of Art, New York, in 1975. The modern version
has a page size of $300 \times 200$mm, slightly smaller than the original
but in the same proportions\index{proportion}. The typeblock\index{typeblock} is $32$pc wide and the type is
set with a $15$pt leading.

\begin{figure}
\centering
\begin{minipage}[b]{\pwlayi}
\drawaspread{\pwlayii}{1.48}{1.375}{.0833}{1.75}{2}{0} % Goudy
\end{minipage}
\hfill
\begin{minipage}[b]{\pwlayi}
\drawaspread{\pwlayii}{1.45}{1.414}{.0333}{2}{4.5}{2.175} % Doomsday
\end{minipage}
\caption[Two spreads: USA, 1952 and England, 1087]%
        {Two spreads: (Left) USA, 1952.
         (Right) England, 1087.} \label{fb:11}
\end{figure}

    Frederic Goudy was a prolific American type designer. Shown at the left of
\fref{fb:11} is the layout of his book \textit{The Alphabet and Elements
of Lettering} published by the University of California Press in 1952.
This is typeset in his University of California Old Style, which has
interesting ct and st ligatures. The measure is $36$pc and the leading
is $18$pt. The first half of the book gives a short history of the development
of writing and fonts. The second half consists of 27 plates, one for each 
letter of the alphabet, and the last one for the ampersand character. These 
show the evolution of each letter from Roman times to the mid-twentieth
century.


    Figure~\ref{fb:11} (right) shows the layout of the English 
\textit{Domesday Book} which is a manuscript book written in 1087. 
It records all the
domains won by William the Conqueror in 1066. The book is written
in a Caroline miniscule
in two columns\index{column!double}, with 44 lines per column ragged right. The two columns
have slightly different widths. The first part of the book is more meticulously
written than the later parts, where the scribe appears to be in haste to
finish.


\begin{figure}
\centering
\begin{minipage}[b]{\pwlayi}
\drawaspread{\pwlayii}{1.414}{1.618}{.111}{1}{2}{0} % A4 orig
\end{minipage}
\hfill
\begin{minipage}[b]{\pwlayi}
\drawaspread{\pwlayii}{1.414}{1.618}{.125}{1}{1.667}{0} % A4 mod
\end{minipage}
\caption[Two spreads for ISO page sizes]%
        {Two spreads: (Left) ISO (1).
         (Right) ISO (2).} \label{fb:12}
\end{figure}

    Figure~\ref{fb:12} shows two different layouts for a page corresponding
to the ISO international standard proportion\index{proportion} of $\sqrt{2}$. In each case
the typeblock\index{typeblock} is the same and proportioned in the 
golden section\index{golden section}, 
but the margins\index{margin} are different. The layout on the left provides adequate
room for marginal\index{marginalia} notes in the fore-edge.


\begin{figure}
\centering
\begin{minipage}[b]{\pwlayi}
\drawaspread{\pwlayii}{1.404}{1.641}{.143}{1}{1.6}{0} % Emery Walker
\end{minipage}
\hfill
\begin{minipage}[b]{\pwlayi}
\drawaspread{\pwlayii}{1.294}{1.618}{.176}{1.037}{1.685}{0} % Latex
\end{minipage}
\caption[Two spreads: England, 1973 and LaTeX $10pt$ book style]%
        {Two spreads: (Left) England, 1973.
         (Right) LaTeX $10$pt book style.} \label{fb:13}
\end{figure}

    Another of the Cambridge Printer's Christmas books is at the left
of \fref{fb:13}. In this case it is \textit{Emery Walker --- Some Light
on his Theories of Printing and on his Relations with William Morris
and Cobden-Sanderson} by Colin Franklin and published in 1973. The
page size is $295 \times 210$mm with a measure of $31$pc set with
$15$pt leading. On the right is the default layout provided by the
LaTeX $10$pt book class on US letterpaper\index{paper!size!letterpaper}.

\begin{figure}
\centering
\begin{minipage}[b]{\pwlayi}
\drawaspread{\pwlayii}{1.294}{1.444}{.0833}{1}{2}{0.5} % Adrian Wilson
\end{minipage}
\hfill
\begin{minipage}[b]{\pwlayi}
\drawaspread{\pwlayii}{1.286}{2.11}{.4}{.625}{.625}{0} % Kuniyoshi
\end{minipage}
\caption[Two spreads: USA, 1967 and England, 1982]%
        {Two spreads: (Left) USA, 1967.
         (Right) England, 1982.} \label{fb:14}
\end{figure}

    Adrian Wilson, who died in 1988, was an acclaimed American book designer.
His work on book design, \textit{The Design of Books}, out of print since
1988 but reissued in 1993 by
Chronicle Books, is outlined
at the left of \fref{fb:14}. This is in two columns\index{column!double}, with many illustrations\index{illustration},
on letterpaper\index{paper!size!letterpaper} size pages. It is typeset in Palatino and Linotype Aldus
with $12$pt leading. Each column is $18$pc wide. The other layout in this
figure is B.~W.~Robinson's \textit{Kuniyoshi: The Warrior Prints} published
by Phaidon, Oxford in 1982. The page size is $310 \times 242$mm with a
measure of $28.5$pc. The type is set with $13$pt leading. The wide spine
margin\index{margin} is used for some small reproductions of Japanese woodblock prints, 
some of which extend across the binding itself. The majority of the book
has no text apart from captioning the many reproduced prints which take 
up full pages.

\begin{figure}
\centering
\begin{minipage}[b]{\pwlayi}
\drawaspread{\pwlayii}{1.25}{1.182}{.1}{1.5}{2}{0} % Fens
\end{minipage}
\hfill
\begin{minipage}[b]{\pwlayi}
\drawaspread{\pwlayii}{1.167}{1.133}{.077}{1}{1}{0.382} % Durer
\end{minipage}
\caption[Two spreads: England, 1972 and Switzerland, 1980]%
        {Two spreads: (Left) England, 1972.
         (Right) Switzerland, 1980.} \label{fb:15}
\end{figure}

    \textit{The Waterways of the Fens} by Peter Eden with drawings by
Warwick Hutton is another of the Cambridge Printer's Christmas books.
This is set with $17$pt leading on a measure of $27$pc. The original
page size is $195 \times 150$mm and is illustrated on the left 
of \fref{fb:15}. 
The amount of text on a page varies
and there are many line drawings, some of which take a double spread.
On the right of this figure is another art book, namely \textit{D\"{u}rer}
by Fedja Anzelewsky published by Chartwell Books in 1980. This is set in
two columns\index{column!double} with $14$pt leading on a $23.5$pc measure, 
although there are more illustrations\index{illustration} than text. The page
size is $280 \times 240$mm, considerably larger than its companion in
the figure, yet with much smaller margins\index{margin}.

\begin{figure}
\centering
\begin{minipage}[b]{\pwlayi}
%\drawaspread{\pwlayii}{1.176}{1.46}{.107}{.833}{2.41}{0.25} % Art
\drawaspread{\pwlayii}{.865}{.951}{.111}{1}{2}{0} % Hammer & Hand
\end{minipage}
\hfill
\begin{minipage}[b]{\pwlayi}
\drawaspread{\pwlayii}{.714}{.667}{.111}{0.5}{0.667}{0.333} % Hokusai
\end{minipage}
\caption[Two spreads: England, 1969 and USA 1989]%
        {Two spreads: (Left) England, 1969.
         (Right) USA, 1989.} \label{fb:16}
\end{figure}


    Two more layouts for illustrated books are given in \fref{fb:16}.
In this case the illustrations\index{illustration} are drawings in landscape mode (i.e., they
are wider than they are high); the shape of the drawings has had a major
effect on the page proportions\index{proportion}. In the case on the left the page
proportion\index{proportion} is in the ratio $\pi : e$. The measure is longer than usual
at $37$pc and to compensate for this the leading of $17$pt 
is also larger than customary. It is typeset in Centaur.
The book is
\textit{Hammer and Hand} by Raymond Lister with drawings by Richard Bawden.
It was published in 1969 by Cambridge University Press and is another of
the University Printer's Christmas books.
Shown on the right of \fref{fb:16} is \textit{Hokusai --- One Hundred Poets}
by Peter Morse and published by George Braziller in 1989. The introductory
text is set in two columns\index{column!double} as shown. The body consists of illustrations\index{illustration} of
Japanese wood block prints, originally in the large \textit{oban} size
of about $250 \times 380$ mm.

\subsection{A geometric construction}

    Nowadays it is easy to pick and calculate any kind of page proportion\index{proportion}
that takes your fancy, but how did the early printers do it? They certainly
did not have the use of calculators and I suspect that they had only enough
arithmetic to keep their accounts. Printing was a craft and craftsmen did
not release their trade secrets lightly. I believe that most of the designs
were based on simple geometric figures, which required nothing more than
a ruler and a pair of compasses.


 Jan Tschichold gives a simple construction for the layout of many of Gutenberg's 
books~\cite[pages 44--57]{TSCHICHOLD91}, which is shown in \fref{flpage:lgut}.
The construction actually divides the page up into ninths (the point
\textsc{p} in the diagram, which is at the intersection of the main and half
diagonal construction lines, is one third of the way down and across both the
page and the typeblock\index{typeblock}). This construction can be used no matter what the
page proportions\index{proportion} and will give the same relative result.


\begin{figure}
\centering
\setlength{\unitlength}{1pc}
\begin{picture}(20,15)
\put(0,0){\framebox(20,15){}}
\thicklines
 \put(10,0){\line(0,1){15}} % spine
\put(0,0){\line(4,3){20}} % ll to tr diag
\put(20,0){\line(-4,3){20}} % lr to tl diagonal
\put(0,0){\line(2,3){10}}  % ll to tm line
\put(20,0){\line(-2,3){10}} % lr to tm line
\put(13.333,0){\line(0,1){15}} % vertical line thro' half & full diags
\put(14,10){\makebox(0,0)[tl]{\textsc{p}}}
\put(13.333,15){\line(-4,-3){6.667}} % last line
\thinlines
\put(11.111,3.333){\framebox(6.667,10){}}
\put(2.222,3.333){\framebox(6.667,10){}}
\end{picture}
\setlength{\unitlength}{1pt}
\caption{The construction of the Gutenberg page design}
\label{flpage:lgut}
\end{figure}

\index{spread|)}

\section{The typeblock} \label{sec:tblock}


    The typeblock\index{typeblock} is not just a rectangular block of text. If the typeblock\index{typeblock}
does consist of text, then this will normally be broken up into paragraphs\index{paragraph};
it is not good style to have paragraphs that are longer than a page. Also,
the typeblock\index{typeblock} may include tables\index{table} and illustrations\index{illustration} which provide relief from
straight text. Some pages may have chapter or section headings\index{heading}
 on them which
will also break the run of the text. In general the typeblock\index{typeblock} will
be a mixture of text, white space, and possibly non-text items.

    Consider a typeblock\index{typeblock} that includes no illustrations\index{illustration} or tables\index{table}.
The lines of text must be laid out so that they are easy to read.
Common practice, and more recently psychological testing, has shown that
long lines of text are difficult to read. Thus, there is a physiological
upper limit to the width of the typeblock\index{typeblock}. From a practical viewpoint,
a line should not be too short because then there is difficulty in justifying
the text.

    Experiments have shown that the number of characters in a line of
single column\index{column} text on a page should be
in the range 60 to 70 for ease of reading. The range may be as much
as 45 to 75 characters but 66 characters is often
considered to be the ideal number. Much shorter and the eye is dashing
back and forth between each line. Much longer it is hard to pick up the
start of the next line if the eye has to jump back too far --- the same line
may be read twice or the following line may be inadvertently jumped over.
For double column\index{column!double} text the ideal number of characters is around 45, 
give or take 5 or so.

    Bringhurst~\cite{BRINGHURST92} gives a method for determining the number
of characters in a line for any font\index{font!measuring}: 
measure the length of the lowercase
alphabet and use a copyfitting\index{copyfitting} 
table that shows for a given alphabet 
length and line length, the average number of characters in that line.
 Table~\ref{tab:copyfitting} is an
abridged version of Bringhurt's copyfitting table.
For example, it suggests that a font with a length of 130pt should be
set on a measure of about 26pc for a single column\index{column!double} or in an 18pc wide
column if there are multiple\index{column!multiple} columns.
 

\begin{table}
\DeleteShortVerb{\|}
\centering
\caption{Average characters per line} \label{tab:copyfitting}
\begin{tabular}{r|rrrrrrrr} \hline
Pts. & \multicolumn{8}{c}{Line length in picas} \\
     & 10 & 14 & 18 & 22 & 26  & 30  & 35 & 40 \\ \hline
80   & \textit{40} & \textbf{56} & \textbf{72} & 88 & 104 &     &    &    \\
85   & \textit{38} & \textit{53} & \textbf{68} & 83 & 98 & 113 &    &    \\
90   & \textit{36} & \textit{50} & \textbf{64} & 79 & 86 & 107 &    &    \\
95   & 34 & \textit{48} & \textbf{62} & 75 & 89 & 103 &    &    \\
100  & 33 & \textit{46} & \textbf{59} & \textbf{73} & 86 & 99 & 116 &   \\
105  & 32 & \textit{44} & 57 & \textbf{70} & 82 & 95 & 111 &   \\
110  & 30 & \textit{43} & 55 & \textbf{67} & 79 & 92 & 107 &   \\
115  & 29 & \textit{41} & 53 & \textbf{64} & 76 & 88 & 103 &   \\
120  & 28 & \textit{39} & \textit{50} & \textbf{62} & 73 & 84 & 98 & 112 \\
125  & 27 & 38 & \textit{48} & \textbf{59} & \textbf{70} & 81 & 94 & 108 \\
130  & 26 & 36 & \textit{47} & 57 & \textbf{67} & 78 & 91 & 104 \\
135  & 25 & 35 & \textit{45} & 55 & \textbf{65} & 75 & 88 & 100 \\
140  & 24 & 34 & \textit{44} & 53 & \textbf{63} & 73 & 85 & 97 \\
145  & 23 & 33 & \textit{42} & 51 & \textbf{61} & \textbf{70} & 82 & 94 \\
150  & 23 & 32 & \textit{41} & \textit{51} & \textbf{60} & \textbf{69} & 81 & 92 \\
155  & 22 & 31 & \textit{39} & \textit{49} & 58 & \textbf{67} & 79 & 90 \\
160  & 22 & 30 & 39 & \textit{48} & 56 & \textbf{65} & 76 & 87 \\
165  & 21 & 30 & 38 & \textit{46} & 55 & \textbf{63} & 74 & 84 \\
170  & 21 & 29 & 37 & \textit{45} & 53 & \textbf{62} & 72 & 82 \\
175  & 20 & 28 & 36 & \textit{44} & 52 & \textbf{60} & \textbf{70} & 80 \\
180  & 20 & 27 & 35 & \textit{43} & 51 & 59 & \textbf{68} & 78 \\
185  & 19 & 27 & 34 & \textit{42} & \textit{49} & 57 & \textbf{67} & 76 \\
190  & 19 & 26 & 33 & 41 & \textit{48} & 56 & \textbf{65} & 74 \\
195  & 18 & 25 & 32 & 40 & \textit{47} & 54 & \textbf{63} & 72 \\
200  & 18 & 25 & 32 & 39 & \textit{46} & 53 & \textbf{62} & \textbf{70} \\ 
220  & 16 & 22 & 29 & 35 & \textit{41} & \textit{48} & 56 & \textbf{64} \\
240  & 15 & 20 & 26 & 32 & 38 & \textit{44} & 51 & 58 \\
260  & 14 & 19 & 24 & 30 & 35 & 41 & \textit{48} & 54 \\
280  & 13 & 18 & 23 & 28 & 33 & 38 & \textit{44} & 50 \\
300  & 12 & 17 & 21 & 26 & 31 & 35 & 41 & \textit{47} \\
320  & 11 & 16 & 20 & 25 & 29 & 34 & 39 & \textit{45} \\
340  & 10 & 15 & 19 & 23 & 27 & 32 & 37 & 42 \\
\hline
\end{tabular}
\MakeShortVerb{\|}
\end{table}



   The vertical height of the typeblock\index{typeblock} should be constant from page to
page. The lines of text on facing pages should be aligned
horizontally across the spine, which also means that they will be at
the same place on both sides of a leaf. Alignment across the spine
means that the eye is not distracted by an irregularity at the centre
of a spread, and leaf alignment stops ghosting of text through a thin page,
giving a crisper look to the work. 
So, the spacing between lines should
be constant. This implies that the depth of the typeblock\index{typeblock} should be an
integral multiple of the space required for each line; that is, be specified
as a multiple of the leading. A ten point type, for example, will normally
have two points between lines, to give a leading of 12 points. This can be
written as 10/12. Usefully, one pica is 12 points so with a 12pt leading
vertical distances can be conveniently expressed in picas 
(one pica per line). Another
implication of this is that any space left for illustrations\index{illustration} or tables\index{table}, or
the amount of space taken by chapter and section headings\index{heading} 
should also be
an integer multiple of the leading\index{leading}.

    A ten point type set solid is described as 10/10. The theoretical
face of the type is ten points high, from the top of a \emph{d} to the bottom
of a \emph{p}, and the distance of the baseline of one row of text to the
next row of text is also ten points. Note that if a \emph{p} is vertically
above a \emph{b} then the ascender of the \emph{b} will meet the descender
of the \emph{p}. To avoid this, the vertical separation between baselines 
is increased above the type size. Adding two extra points of vertical space
allows the text to breathe, and gives a leading of 12 points. Few fonts
read well when set solid. Typical settings are 9/11, 10/12, 11/13 and 12/15.
Longer measures require more leading than shorter ones, as do darker and larger
fonts compared with lighter and smaller fonts. More leading is also
useful if the text contains many super-\index{superscript} or sub-scripts, 
or many uppercase 
letters.



\subsection{Page color}

    One of the aims of the typographer is to produce pages that are uniform
in `color'\index{page color}. 
By this they mean that the typeblock\index{typeblock} has a reasonably constant
grayness, not being broken up by too much white space which is a distraction
to the reader. There will be white space around headings\index{heading}, 
which is acceptable
as a heading is meant to attract attention. There may be white space between 
paragraphs\index{paragraph}, but this is usually under the control of the designer. There 
may be vertical rivulets of white space when the interword spaces on
adjacent lines coincide; fixing this usually requires some handwork, either
by the author changing his wording so as to alter the location of
the spaces, or by the typesetter tweaking a little bit. 

    Another form of distraction is if too many lines end with hyphens, or
several adjacent lines start or end with the same text; this not only
will cause a rivulet but will make it harder for the reader to reliably
jump to the next line.

    The main font used controls the depth of the color of a page. To
see what color is produced by a particular font it is necessary to look
at a fairly long, preferably a page, piece of normal text. Fonts from
different families produce different colors, and so may mixed fonts from 
the same family. You can try this yourself by typesetting the same page
in, say, Computer Modern Roman, Italic, and Sans fonts.
The books by Rogers~\cite{ROGERS43}, Lawson~\cite{LAWSON90},
Dowding~\cite{DOWDING98}, and 
Morison~\cite{MORISON99} all show pages set in many different fonts.

    

\subsection{Legibility}

    One of the principle requirements on the typography of a document is that
the document is \emph{legible}. Legibility means that the document is designed
to be easily read under a certain set of circumstances. The criteria for
legibility on a poster that is placed on the side of a bus, for example, are
different from those that apply to a book to be read while sitting in an
easy chair. Essentially, the viewer should be able to read the document
with no physical strain caused by the appearance, but the contents, of course,
may lead to anything ranging from acute mental strain to extreme boredom.

    Type faces and the layout of the typeblock\index{typeblock} must be chosen to optimise
between legibility and `artistic' presentation. The design of the document
should be almost invisible, giving full compliments to the author's
communication. However, if you are a master, like
Hermann Zapf~\cite{ZAPF00}, you can break the rules.

    

\subsubsection{Type faces}

    The first European letter forms that have survived are Greek inscriptions
carved into stone. These were freehand carvings with thin strokes. In time,
the lettering became thicker and serifs started to appear. The Romans
picked up on this later style of letter form. In carving inscriptions, they
first wrote the inscription on the stone using a broad, flat brush. This
naturally led to serifs and differing thicknesses of the letter strokes,
depending on the angle of the stroke with respect to the movement and
orientation of the brush.

    Between the Roman times and Gutenberg there were many changes and
experiments in European letterforms. The scribes used different scripts
for titles, subheads, continuous text, illuminated initial letters, and so
on. In time, two families of letterforms evolved, called \emph{majuscules}
and \emph{miniscules}. The former were larger and more formal, while the latter
were smaller and less formal. We now call these two divisions upper case and
lower case. The upper case derives from Roman times, while the lower case
acquired its fundamental form during the reign of the Holy Roman Emperor
Charlemagne a thousand years later.
A further division also appeared, between black letter (what is
commonly referred to as Gothic or Old English) type and the roman type.

    These types were all upright. Italic letterforms were cut in Italy
in the early sixteenth century, as a more cursive style. Initially these were
lower case only, used in conjunction with upper case roman. By the end of
the century, sloped roman capitals were also in use with italic.

\index{font!seriffed|(}
\index{font!sans|(}
    The late nineteenth century saw the appearance again of sans-serif
typefaces.

    Looking carefully at seriffed and sans-serif fonts it is apparent that
the serifs have three main functions:
\begin{enumerate}
\item They help to keep letters apart.
\item At the same time, they help to keep letters in a word together. This
  helps with legibility as research has shown that we tend to recognize
  words by the shape of the word rather than by individual characters.
\item They help to differentiate between individual but similar letters.
\end{enumerate}

Long experience has shown that a seriffed font is easier to 
read\footnote{This is actually somewhat contentious as some take the view
that with enough practice, sans-serif is just as easy to read.}
than a
sans-serif font, particularly if part of the text is obscured. You can
try an experiment yourself to verify this. Try writing a phrase, once
using a sans-serif font and then with a serifed font. Cover up
the top halves of the two phrases and try to make out what they say. Then
repeat this, except this time cover up the bottom halves of the phrase.
Which is easier to read? Here are some example characters, firstly in san-serif:
\begin{center}
{\Huge\sffamily a c l m n p q o}
\end{center}
and then in roman:
\begin{center}
{\Huge a c l m n p q o}
\end{center}

    Sans-serif fonts often require context to decipher the word. 
For example~\cite{MCLEAN80},
seeing this in isolation
\begin{center}
{\Huge\sffamily lll}
\end{center}
does it stand for `Ill', `one hundred and eleven', `three', or something
completely different like a dingbat or a set of cricket stumps?

    
    There are three generally agreed legibility principles for setting text for
continuous reading.

\begin{enumerate}
\item \emph{Sans-serif type is intrinsically less legible than seriffed type}~\cite{WHEILDON95}.

    We have already seen that this is the case --- there is more variety
among seriffed letters than among sans-serif letters. Further, serifs
perform other functions as well, such as binding letters together within
a word.

    This is not to say that a sans-serif letterform is always more illegible
than a roman one. A poor seriffed form can be much more illegible than
a well used good sans-serif. In general, there is an illegibility factor
associated with sans-serif that must be borne in mind; for general
\emph{continuous} reading, a good seriffed form is more likely to be
easy on the eye than a good sans form.

\item \emph{Well designed upper and lower case roman type is easier to read than
any of its variants.}

    This is a guiding principle with many exceptions. Among the variants
can be considered to be italic and bold types. These have usually been
designed for a special purpose, like emphasing\index{emphasis} 
certain pieces of text, rather
than for general legibility. Some italic types, though, are as legible as their
roman counterparts. In the seventeenth century many books were set entirely
in italic, but we have become accustomed to the roman type.

\item \emph{Words should be set closer together than the space between lines.}

    All text is a mixture of ink and white space. The eye, when reading, 
tends to jump over the white spaces. Given a choice between two spaces, it 
will tend to jump over the smaller of the two. If the word spacing is greater
than the line spacing, then you can find yourself skipping from one line
to the next before finishing the first one.

    Further, if the lines are too long, then when the eye jumps back from
the end of one line to the start of the next, it may have difficulty in 
picking up the correct one.

    Text lines are justified by altering the inter-word spacing, and possibly
by hyphenating the last word on the line if the spacing would be too bad
otherwise. Sans-serif fonts often look best if set ragged right, as this will
keep the inter-word spacing constant. Text set in narrow columns\index{column} also often
looks best when set ragged right.


\end{enumerate}

\subsubsection{Seriffed versus sans-seriffed fonts}

    As noted earlier there seems to be a permanent debate over the use
of seriffed and sans fonts. You will have to make up your own mind as
to what is best for any particular work, but here are some general
comments from some of the literature on the subject.

\begin{itemize}
\def\makelabel#1{\noindent #1}
\item[Bohle~\cite{BOHLE90}] notes: Readers prefer a roman typeface for body
  type because they are most used to seeing that face~\cite{REHE72}.
  Roman type may well also be more readable than sans serif faces because
  the serifs help connect the letters to form the word shape when
  we read~\cite{REHE72}.

\item[Craig~\cite{CRAIG92}] says: You will find that the serifs on a typeface
  facilitate the horizontal flow necessary to comfortable reading.

\item[Degani~\cite{DEGANI92}] in a study of pilots reading checklists
  in emergency cockpit situations decided that sans serif faces were
  better than serif faces.

\item[Schriver~\cite{SCHRIVER97}] notes: Serif and sans serif typefaces 
  are likely to be equally preferred by 
  readers~\cite{HARTLEY83,TINKER63}
  and read equally quickly~\cite{GOULD87,HARTLEY83,ZACHRISSOM69}.
  Serif faces may be easier to read in continuous text than sans
  serif faces~\cite{BURT59,HVISTENDAHL75,ROBINSON71,WHEILDON95}.

\item[Wheildon~\cite{WHEILDON95}] did a series of studies with around
250 readers in Sydney, Australia, asking them to rate serif and sans fonts
in a variety of uses. Among the many results he reported:
\begin{itemize}
  \item More than five times as many readers are likely to show good
  comprehension when a serif body type is used instead of a sans serif
  body type.
  \item The top half of [upper case] letters is more recognizable than
  the bottom half.
  \item There is little difference in legibility between headlines
  [section titles] set in serif and sans serif typefaces, or between
  roman and italic.
  \item Headlines set in capital letters are significantly less legible
  than those set in lower case.
\end{itemize}

\end{itemize}

    The consensus, such as it is, seems to lean towards serifed
typefaces for continuous reading, but for titling the choice is
wide open.

\index{font!sans|)}
\index{font!seriffed|)}

\subsection{Widows and orphans}

    Inconvenient page breaks can also cause a hiatus in the reader's perusal
of a work. These happen when a page break occurs near the start or end of
a paragraph\index{paragraph}. 

    A \emph{widow}\index{widow} is where the last line of a paragraph\index{paragraph} is the first
line on the page. The term is sometimes also used to refer to when the
last word in a paragraph\index{paragraph} is on a line by itself. A widow looks forlorn. 
As Robert Bringhurst said, `A widow has a past but no future'.
Typographically, widows should be avoided. Especially to be avoided 
are widows that are
the only line on a page, for example at the end of a chapter\index{chapter}. Five lines
on the last page of a chapter\index{chapter} is a reasonable minimum.

    An orphan\index{orphan} is not nearly so troubling to typographers as a widow. An
\emph{orphan} is where the first one or two lines of a paragraph\index{paragraph} are at the
bottom of a page. Bringhurt's memory trick for orphans is, `An orphan has
a future but no past'.

\subsection{Paragraphs and versals} \label{sec:versal}

\index{paragraph|(}

    Early books did not have paragraphs as we know them nowadays; the text
was written continuously, except for a break at a major division like the
start of a new book in a bible. Instead
the scribes used a symbol like \P\ (the pilcrow) to mark the beginning of
paragraphs. This symbol is derived from the Greek $\Pi$, for
\textit{par\'{a}graphos}. Mind you, they often did not use any punctuation
at all and were sparing in their use of uppercase letters, 
so you might have seen something like this\footnote{But probably not.
The two `paragraphs' are Latin abecedarian sentences.}

\begin{quote}
usque \P\ te canit adcelebratque polus rex gazifier hymnis 
       \P\ transzephyrique globum scandunt tua facta per axem
\end{quote}

    Nowadays paragraphs are ended by stopping the line of text at 
the end of the
paragraph, and then starting the next paragraph on a new line. The question
then becomes: how do you indicate a new paragraph when the last line of the
previous paragraph fills up the measure? There are two solutions, which 
unfortunately you
sometimes see combined. Either indent the beginning of the first line of
each paragraph, or put additional vertical space between the last and
first lines of paragraphs.

    The traditional technique, which has served well for centuries, is to
indent the first line of a paragraph\index{paragraph!indentation}. The indentation need not be large,
about an em will be enough, but more will be required if the typeblock\index{typeblock}
is wide.

    The other method is used mainly in business letters and is a recent 
invention. The first lines of paragraphs\index{paragraph!indentation} are not indented and typically
 one blank line is left between paragraphs. This may
perhaps be acceptable when using a typewriter, but seems to have no real
justification aesthetically. There is also the problem when a paragraph
both ends with a full line and ends a page. As the next paragraph then starts
at the top of the next page, the blank line separating the two paragraphs
has effectively dissappeared, thus leaving the reader in a possible state
of uncertainty as to whether the paragraph continues across the page break
or not.

    If the paragraph is the first one after a heading\index{heading}, 
then there
is no need to indicate that it is a new paragraph --- it is obvious from its
position. So, the first paragraph after a heading\index{heading} 
should not be indented\index{paragraph!indentation}.
In some novels only chapters are headed yet each chapter is broken into
sections by putting additional vertical blank space between the sections.
Like nonindented paragraphs\index{paragraph!indentation}, this can cause problems where a section division
coincides with a page break. In this case, typographers sometimes use a
decoration to separate sections (for example, a short centered row of a few
asterisks).
   

%%%%%%%%\clearpage
%\subsection{Versals}

\drop{S}{}\textsc{ome typographers}\index{versal|(} 
like to start the first paragraph in a chapter
with a versal. A \emph{versal} is a large initial letter, either raised or
dropped. This comes from the scribal tradition of illuminating the first
letter of a manuscript. The versal may be raised or dropped, as already noted,
or it may be placed in the margin\index{margin}, or otherwise treated in a special manner.

\versal{S}\textsc{ome versals,} especially dropped versals, are very difficult
to typeset correctly. Many attempts of this kind are abject failures, so
be warned. For example, compare the dropped versals at the start of these
first two paragraphs. They are both of the same letter and font, yet the first
one is horrible compared to the one starting this paragraph.


\noindent {\huge I}\textsc{t is easier} to start a paragraph with 
a raised
capital than one that is dropped. A raised versal should only be used
where there is naturally some vertical space above it. As you can see, extra
spacing has had to be inserted before this paragraph to accomodate the versal.
There are still problems with typesetting a raised versal but as these tend
to be subtler than with a dropped versal, readers are less likely
to notice problems.

Typically, small caps are used for a little while following a versal to 
provide a transition between the large versal font and the normal body font.
These should not continue throughout the first line as this tends to divorce
it from the remainder of the paragraph. \index{versal|)}

\noindent \textsc{Another way of starting} a paragraph is to use small
caps for the first few words. The font difference highlights the start
of the paragraph but in a much quieter manner than a versal does. Using
normal sized upper-case instead of the small caps is too much of a 
contrast with the lower-case.

\index{paragraph|)}

\subsection{Footnotes}

\index{footnote|(}
    Footnotes are considered to be part of the typeblock\index{typeblock}. They are
typeset in the space allocated for the typeblock\index{typeblock}, in contrast to 
footers\index{footer}
which are typeset below the typeblock\index{typeblock}.

    Footnotes are normally set in the same type style as the typeblock\index{typeblock}. 
That is, if an upright seriffed font is used for the typeblock\index{typeblock}, it is
also used for the footnote. The
type size is smaller to distinguish the note from the body text and often
the leading in the footnote is also reduced from that in the main text body.
The bottom footnote line should be at the same height as the bottom line
of the typeblock\index{typeblock}. This usually requires some adjustment of the vertical 
space before the footnotes.

    A vertical blank space is often used to set off the footnotes from the
main text, and sometimes a short horizontal line is also used as demarcation.

\index{footnote|)}

\section{Folios}

\index{folio|(}

    The word \emph{folio} is a homonym. It can mean a leaf 
(two back-to-back pages) in a book, the size of a book or a book of
folded sheets (as in Shakespeare's first folio), or the printed page number
in a book. Here I use folio in this last sense.

    Documents should have folios, at a minimum to help the reader know where
he is. Occasionally books have their folios placed near the spine but this
positioning is unhelpful for navigation. The more usual positions are
either centered with respect to the typeblock\index{typeblock} or aligned with the outside
of the typeblock\index{typeblock}, and sometimes even in the outside margin\index{margin}. The folios
can be either at the top or bottom of the page but at least on pages 
with chapter\index{chapter} openings are normally placed at the bottom of the page so that
they do not distract from the title text.

    Every page in a document, except perhaps the title and half title pages
in a book, should be numbered, even if the page does not have a folio. 
In books, the folios for the front material are often in roman numerals.
The main and rear matter folios are arabic numerals, with the sequence
starting from 1 after the front matter. In certain technical documents,
folios may be in the form of chapter number\index{chapter!number} and page number, with the page 
number starting from 1 in each new chapter. Other folio schemes are possible 
but unusual.

    Folios should be placed harmoniously with respect to the typeblock\index{typeblock} and
page margins\index{margin}. The font used for the folios need not be the same as that
for the typeblock\index{typeblock} but must at least be complementary and non-intrusive.

\index{folio|)}

\section{Headers and footers}

\index{header|(}\index{footer|(}
    Headers and footers are repetitive material that is placed at either 
the head or the foot of the page. Typically, folios\index{folio} are headers or footers,
but not always as sometimes they are placed in the margin\index{margin} at or below the
first line in the typeblock.\index{typeblock}

   From now on I will not distinguish between headers and footers and 
just use the word header. Sometimes the header is purely decorative (apart
from a folio\index{folio}) like a horizontal line or some other non-textual marking.
Normally they have a functional use in helping the reader locate himself
in the document.

    The most ubiquitous header is one which gives the title of the document.
If this is the only header, then I consider this to be decorative rather
than functional. As a reader I know what document I am reading and do not
need to be reminded every time I turn a page. More useful are headers that
identify the current part of the document, like a chapter\index{chapter} title or number.
When you put the document down and pick it up later to continue reading, these
help you find your place, or if you need to refer back to a previous chapter
for some reason, then it is a boon to have a chapter heading\index{heading} 
on each 
spread. The minimally functional headers are where the document title
is on one page and the chapter heading is on the facing page. In more technical
documents it may be more useful to have headers of chapter and section titles
on alternate pages. 

    Occasionally both headers and footers are used, in which case one normally
has constant text, like a copyright\index{copyright} notice. 
I have the feeling that using
the latter is only functional for the publishers of the document
when they fear photocopying or some such.

    The header text is usually aligned with the spine side 
of the typeblock\index{typeblock}, but may be centered on top of the typeblock\index{typeblock}. In any event,
it should not interfere with the folio\index{folio}. The type style need not be the same
as the style for the typeblock\index{typeblock}. For example, headers could be set in italic
or small caps, which must blend with the style used for the 
typeblock.\index{typeblock}

\index{footer|)}\index{header|)}

\chapter{Picky points}

\section{Introduction}

    The main elements of good typography are legibility and page color.
This chapter discusses some of the smaller points related to these topics.

\section{Word and line spacing}

    Research has shown that the competent reader recognises words by
their overall shape rather than by stringing together the individual letters
forming the words. A surprisingly narrow gap between words
is sufficient for most to distinguish the word boundaries.

    Most typographers state that the space between words in continuous
text should be about the width of the letter `i'. Any closer and the
words run together and too far apart the page looks speckled with white
spots and the eye finds it difficult to move along the line rather than
jumping to the next word in the next line. 
    Figure~\ref{fig:interword} illustrates different values of interword
spacing.

\setlength{\unitlength}{\fontdimen2\font}
\begin{figure}
\centering
%\fbox{%
\begin{minipage}{\textwidth}
\mbox{}\hrulefill\mbox{}
\begin{quotation}
\fontdimen2\font=2\fontdimen2\font
    The following paragraph is typeset with double the normal interword 
spacing for this font.

    Most typographers state that the space between words in continuous
text should be about the width of the letter `i'. Any closer and the
words run together and too far apart the page looks speckled with white
spots and the eye finds it difficult to move along the line rather than
jumping to the next word in the next line. 
Extra spacing after punctuation is not necessary.
\end{quotation}
\begin{quotation}
\fontdimen2\font=\unitlength
    The following paragraph is typeset with the normal interword spacing 
for this font.

    Most typographers state that the space between words in continuous
text should be about the width of the letter `i'. Any closer and the
words run together and too far apart the page looks speckled with white
spots and the eye finds it difficult to move along the line rather than
jumping to the next word in the next line. 
Extra spacing after punctuation is not necessary.
\end{quotation}
\begin{quotation}
%\settowidth{\unitlength}{i}
\settowidth{\fontdimen2\font}{i}
    The interword spacing in the following paragraph is the width 
of the letter `i'.
 
    Most typographers state that the space between words in continuous
text should be about the width of the letter `i'. Any closer and the
words run together and too far apart the page looks speckled with white
spots and the eye finds it difficult to move along the line rather than
jumping to the next word in the next line. 
Extra spacing after punctuation is not necessary.
\end{quotation}
\mbox{}\hrulefill\mbox{}
\end{minipage}
%} % end fbox
\fontdimen2\font=\unitlength \setlength{\unitlength}{1pt}
\caption{Interword spacings}\label{fig:interword}
\end{figure}

    In keeping with avoiding white spots, many typographers do not
recommend extra spacing after punctuation, although this does depend
partly on a country's typographic history and partly on the individual.
I always found typewritten texts with double spaces after the end
of sentences a particular eyesore. However, with typeset texts any 
extra spacing is usually not as large as that.

    The spacing between lines of text should be greater than the interword
spacing, otherwise there is a tendency for the eye to skip to the
next line instead of the next word. Figure~\ref{fig:interline} illustrates
some text typeset with different line spacings. The normal interword
spacing is used in the samples.

\begin{figure}
\centering
%\fbox{%
\begin{minipage}{\textwidth}
\mbox{}\hrulefill\mbox{}
\normalfont\setlength{\unitlength}{\baselineskip}
\begin{quotation}
\normalfont\setlength{\baselineskip}{1em}
    This paragraph is set solid --- the interline spacing is the same
as the font size. The normal interword spacing is used.
    The spacing between lines of text should be greater than the interword
spacing, otherwise there is a tendency for the eye to skip to the
next line instead of the next word. \par
\end{quotation}
\begin{quotation}
\normalfont\setlength{\baselineskip}{\unitlength}
    This paragraph is set with the normal interline spacing for the font.
The normal interword spacing is used.
    The spacing between lines of text should be greater than the interword
spacing, otherwise there is a tendency for the eye to skip to the
next line instead of the next word. \par
\end{quotation}
\begin{quotation}
\normalfont\setlength{\baselineskip}{1.2\unitlength}
    This paragraph is set with the interline spacing 20\% greater than
is normal for the font.
The normal interword spacing is used.
    The spacing between lines of text should be greater than the interword
spacing, otherwise there is a tendency for the eye to skip to the
next line instead of the next word. \par
\end{quotation}
\mbox{}\hrulefill\mbox{}
\end{minipage}
%} % end fbox
\normalfont\setlength{\baselineskip}{\unitlength}
\setlength{\unitlength}{1pt}
\caption{Interline spacings}\label{fig:interline}
\end{figure}

\section{Abbreviations and acronyms}

\index{abbreviation}
    The English style with abbreviations is to put a full stop (period) after
the abbreviation, unless the abbreviation ends with the same letter as the
full word. Thus, it is Mr for Mister, Dr for Doctor, but Prof.~for Professor.
No extra spacing should be used after the full stop, even if extra
spacing is normally used after punctuation.

    Acroynms\index{acronym} are typeset in uppercase but the 
question is, which uppercase?
The simple way is to use the uppercase of the normal font, like UNICEF, but
if there are too many acronyms scattered around the speckled effect starts
to intrude. If the font family has one, then small caps can be used,
giving \textsc{unicef}. If small caps are not available, or appear
undesireable, then a smaller size of the normal uppercase can be used,
such as {\small UNICEF} or {\footnotesize UNICEF}; some experimentation
may be required to select the appropriate size.

\section{Dashes and ellipses}

\index{dash|(}
    Most fonts provide at least three lengths of dashes. The shortest is
the hyphen (-), then there is the en-dash (--) which is approximately the
width of the letter `n', and the largest is the em-dash (---) which is
approximately twice the length of an en-dash. An expert font may provide
more.

   Unsurprisingly, the hyphen is used for hyphenation, such as in em-dash, or
at the end of a line where a word had to be broken.

    The en-dash is normally used between numerals to indicate a range. For
example a reference may refer to pages 21--27 in some journal or book. There
is no space surrounding the en-dash when used in this manner.

    The em-dash, or the en-dash, is used as 
punctuation --- often when making a side 
remark --- as a phrase separator.
 When en-dashes are used as punctuation it is normal to put spaces around them
but the question of spaces around an em-dash appears to be the subject of
some contention. Roughly half the participants in any discussion advocate
spaces while the other half view them as anathema. If you do use em-dashes
be sure to be consistent in your use, or otherwise, of spaces.

    Ellipses\index{ellipses} are those three, or is it four, 
dots indicating something is
missing or continues somewhat indefinitely. In the middle of a sentence,
or clause or \ldots\ they have a space on either side. At the end of
a sentence the English style is to have no spaces and include the full
stop, making four dots in all, like so\ldots.

   Dashes are also used to indicate missing characters or a word. Missing
characters in the middle of a word are indicated by a 2em-dash (a dash that
is twice as long as an em-dash), as in:
\begin{quote}
\textbf{snafu,} \textit{(U.S. slang)} \textit{n.} chaos. --- \textit{adj.}
  chaotic. [\textit{s}ituation \textit{n}ormal --- \textit{a}ll
  \textit{f}------d \textit{u}p.]
\end{quote}
A 3em-dash is used to indicate a missing word. When I lived in Maryland my
local small town newspaper was the \textit{Frederick Post.} 
The following is from an 
obituary I happened to read; I have hidden the name to protect the 
innocent.
\begin{quote}
  Although he had spent the last 92 years of his life here, 
Mr. --------- was not a Fredericktonian.
\end{quote}

\index{dash|)}

\section{Punctuation}

\subsection{Quotation marks}

\index{quotation marks|(}
    Quotation marks surrounding speech and associated punctuation 
are a fruitful source of confusion.

    The American style is to use double quotes at the start(``) and 
end ('') of spoken words. If the speaker quotes in the speech then single
quote marks (` and ') are used to delineate the internal quotation\index{quotation}.

    The English practice is exactly the opposite. Main speech is delineated
by single quotes and internal quotations\index{quotation} by double quotes. In any event,
if single and double quotes are adjacent they should be separated by a thin
space in order to distinguish one from the other --- a full interword space
is too wide.

    As there are likely to be few internal quotations\index{quotation} it seems to me that
the English practice produces a less spotty appearance than the American.
Figure~\ref{fig:qmarks} shows the same text typeset in both the English
and American styles. The example is from Lewis Carroll's 
\emph{Through the Looking Glass and what Alice Found There} 
and has an unusually large number of internal quotations\index{quotation}. 

\begin{figure}
\centering
\begin{minipage}{\textwidth}
\mbox{}\hrulefill\mbox{}
\begin{quotation}
    `There's glory for you!' 

    `I don't know what you mean by ``glory''\,', Alice said. 

    Humpty Dumpty smiled contemptuously. `Of course you don't --- till I tell
you. I meant ``there's a nice knock-down argument for you''!' 

    `But ``glory'' doesn't mean ``a nice knock-down argument''\,', Alice
objected. 

    `When \emph{I} use a word', Humpty Dumpty said, in a rather scornful
tone, `it means just what I choose it to mean --- neither more nor less'.
\end{quotation}
\mbox{}\hrulefill\mbox{}
\begin{quotation}
     ``There's glory for you!'' 

    ``I don't know what you mean by `glory,'\,'' Alice said. 

    Humpty Dumpty smiled contemptuously. ``Of course you don't --- till I tell
you. I meant `there's a nice knock-down argument for you!'\,'' 

    ``But `glory' doesn't mean `a nice knock-down argument,'\,'' Alice
objected. 

    ``When \emph{I} use a word,'' Humpty Dumpty said, in a rather scornful
tone, ``it means just what I choose it to mean --- neither more nor less.''
\end{quotation}
\mbox{}\hrulefill\mbox{}
\end{minipage}
\caption{Quotation marks: top English, bottom American}\label{fig:qmarks}
\end{figure}

    Where to put punctuation marks with quotes is vexatious. Again the
English and American practice tends to differ. The American tendency is
to put commas and periods inside the closing quote mark and colons and
semicolons after the mark. English editors prefer to put punctuation
after the mark.
In either case, it is difficult
to know exactly what to do. I get the impression that for every example
of the `correct' form there is a counter-example.
Some try and avoid the problem altogether by putting the lower marks, 
like commas or periods, 
directly below the quotation mark but that may cause problems if the 
resulting constructs look like question or exclamation marks. 
In \fref{fig:qmarks} I have tried to use the English and American 
punctuation styles in the respective examples but it is likely that there
are misplacements in both. I think it's basically a question of doing what
you think best conveys the sense, provided there is consistency.
\index{quotation marks|)}

\subsection{Footnote marks}

\index{footnote!mark|(}
    Where to put a footnote marker may be another vexed question in spite
of the general principal being easy to state: The mark goes immediately
after the text element that the note refers to.

    There is no doubt what this means\footnote{Except to some I know.} when
the text element is a word in the middle of other words. Doubt raises
its head when the reference is to a phrase, like this one\footnote{I hope
that this is a phrase.\label{fn:phrase}}, 
which is set off within commas, or when the note refers to a complete 
sentence.\footnote{Is this mark in the correct place?\label{fn:sentence}}

    Like punctuation and quotation marks\index{quotation marks}, 
should a footnote mark come before
or after the punctuation mark at the end of a phrase or a sentence? I have
shown both positions\footnote{Marks \ref{fn:phrase} and \ref{fn:sentence}.}
 in the previous paragraph. The 
general rule that I have deduced is that the mark comes after the 
punctuation, but there are always those who like to prove a rule.

\index{footnote!mark|)}

\index{symbol|(}
   There are other marks that may be associated with a word, like 
(registered) trademarks. These may produce ugly gaps. Sometimes these
cannot be avoided but it may be possible to change the text to minimise
the hiccup. There is an example of this on \pref{fn:ps}. I tried various
schemes in identifying `PostScript' as being a registered trademark of
Adobe Systems Incorporated. Among the discarded trials were:
\begin{quote}
\ldots languages like PostScript\texttrademark, presumably \ldots

\ldots languages like PostScript\textsuperscript{\textregistered}, presumably \ldots

\ldots like the PostScript\textsuperscript{\textregistered}{} language, presumably \ldots

\end{quote}
My final solution was to note the registered trademark information in
a footnote:
\begin{quote}
\ldots languages, like PostScript\footnote{PostScript is a registered 
trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.}, presumably \ldots
\end{quote}
In this case I decided that the footnote\index{footnote} was really tied to the word
`PostScript', taking the place of the registered symbol, so I put the
footnote mark\index{footnote!mark} before the comma rather than after it.
\index{symbol|)}

\subsection{Font changes}

\index{font!change|(}

    Sometimes a word or two may be set in a different font from the 
surrounding text, such as when emphasizing\index{emphasis} 
a word by setting it in an
italic font. If the word is followed by a punctuation mark the normal
practice is to set the mark using the new font instead of the normal
font. In some cases the font used for the punctuation may not be
particularly noticeable but sometimes it may be. 

    The frontmatter contains two definitions of the word \textit{memoir,}
which is typeset using a bold font. The definitions thus commence like \\
\hspace*{2em} \textbf{memoir,} \textit{n.} \ldots \\
instead of \\
\hspace*{2em} \textbf{memoir}, \textit{n}. \ldots 

\index{font!change|)}

\section{Narrow measures}

\index{measure!narrow|(}

    Typesetting in a narrow column\index{column} is difficult, especially if you are
trying to make the text flush left and right. As the lines get shorter
it becomes more and more difficult to fit the words in without an excessive
amount of interword spacing or word breaking at the ends of lines. 
In the limit, of course, there
will not be even enough room to put a syllable on a line.

    The best recourse in situations like this is to forget justification
and typeset ragged right. Ragged right looks far better than justified
text with lots of holes in it.
The question then is, to hyphenate or not to hyphenate?\index{hyphenation}

    With no hyphenation there is likely to be increased raggedness at
the line ends when compared with permitting some hyphenation. Hyphenation
can be used to reduce the raggedness but somehow short lines ending with
a hyphen may look a bit odd. This is where you have to exercise your
judgement and design skills.

    Indexes\index{index} are often typeset in double, or even triple or quadruple columns\index{column!multiple},
as each entry is typically short. Also, indexes\index{index} are typically consulted
for a particular entry rather than being read as continuous text. To help
the eye, page numbers are normally typeset immediately after the 
the name of the indexed topic, so indexes\index{index} tend to be naturally ragged right
as a matter of reader convenience.

\index{measure!narrow|)}

    Talking of hyphenation\index{hyphenation},
 each language has its own rules for allowable
hyphenation points. As you might now have come to suspect, English and 
American rules are different even though the language is nominally the same.
Broadly speaking, American English hyphenation points are typically based on
the sound of the word, so the acceptable locations are between syllables.
In British English the hyphenation points tend to be related to the
etymology of the word, so there may be different locations depending on 
whether the word came from the Greek or the Latin. If you are not sure
how a particular word should be hyphenated, look it up in a dictionary
that indicates the potential break points.

\section{Emphasis}

\index{emphasis|(}
    Underlining\index{underline} should \underline{emphatically} \underline{not} be
used to emphasise something in a typeset document. This is a hangover
from the days when manuscripts were typewritten and there was little
that could be done. The other way of emphasising something was to
put extra space between the characters of the w\,o\,r\,d being
e\,m\,p\,h\,a\,s\,i\,s\,e\,d, as has been done twice in this sentence.
As an aside, for me at least, that extra spacing produces the 
illusion that the
characters are slightly larger than normal, which is not the case.

    With the range of fonts and sizes available when typesetting there
are other methods for emphasis, although German typographers have used
letterspacing for emphasis with the fraktur and other similar font types.

    There are basically three aproaches: 
change the {\large size} of the font;
change the \textbf{weight} of the font; or most usually, change the
\emph{shape} of the font. There is a creative tension when trying
to emphasise something --- there is the need to show the reader the 
emphasised
element, but there is also the desire not to interrupt the general flow
of the text. Out of the three basic options, changing the shape seems
to be a reasonable compromise between the need and the desire.
\index{emphasis|)}

\section{Captions and legends}

\index{caption|(}
\index{legend|(}

    I am not entirely sure what is the difference between a
caption and a legend as both terms refer to the title of an illustration\index{illustration}
or table\index{table}. However, legend may also be used to refer to some explanatory 
material within an illustration\index{illustration}, such as the explanation of the symbols
used on a map.

    In any event, captions and legends are usually typeset in a font that
is smaller than the main text font, and which may also be different from the
main font. For example, if the main font is roman and a sans font is used
for chapter titles, then it could be appropriate to use a small size
of the sans font for captions as well.

    The caption for a table\index{table} is normally placed above the table while
captions for illustrations\index{illustration} are placed below.

\index{legend|)}
\index{caption|)}

\section{Tables}

\index{table|(}

    A table is text or numbers arranged in columns\index{column!multiple}, and nearly always
with a `legend'\index{legend} above each column describing the meaning of
the entries in the column. The legends and the column entries are
separated from each other, perhaps by some vertical space but more often
by a horizontal line.

    In general typographers dislike vertical lines in a table, which may
be likely to be used to separate the columns. I'm not sure why this is.
There is an obvious explanation when hand setting the individual characters
as although it would be easy to set horizontal rules it would be very 
difficult to get all the pieces of type with the bits of the vertical rules
aligned properly --- the eye is very sensitive to jags in what is meant to
be a straight line. In the days of digital typography the alignment problem
has gone away, so perhaps the antipathy to vertical lines is a tradition
from earlier days.

    If you want to use vertical lines, just be aware that not everybody
may appreciate your effort.


\index{table|)}



\chapter{Electronic books}
\index{electronic books|(}\index{Ebook|see{electronic books}}
\section{Introduction}

    For want of a better term I am calling electronic books, or Ebooks, 
those documents intended to be read on a computer screen. The vast bulk
of Ebooks are in the form of email but I'm more interested here in 
publications that are akin to hardcopy reports and books that require
more time than a few minutes to read.

    This brief chapter includes some suggestions for the
layout of Ebooks, based on my experience with such works. 
Not considered are internal navigation aids
(e.g., hyperlinks) within and between Ebooks, nor HTML documents where
the visual appearance is meant to set by the viewing software and not 
by the publisher.

\section{Observations}

    Unlike real books which have been available for hundreds of years there
is virtually no experience to act as a guide in suggesting how Ebooks should
appear. 

    The publication medium is obviously very different --- a TV-style 
screen with limited resolution and pretty much fixed in position versus
foldable and markable paper\index{paper} held where the reader finds it best.
These differences lead to the following suggestions.

    A book can be held at whatever distance is comfortable for reading, even
when standing up.
The computer user is normally either sitting in a chair with the monitor
on a desk or table, or is trying to read from a laptop, which may be 
lighter but nobody would want to hold one for any length of time. To try
and alleviate the physical constraints on the Ebook reader the font size
should be larger than normal for a similar printed book. This will provide
a wider viewing range. A larger font will also tend to
increase the sharpness of the print as more pixels will be available for
displaying each character.

    I find it extremely annoying if I have to keep scrolling up and down
to read a page. Each page should fit within the screen, which means that
Ebook pages will be shorter than traditional pages. 
    A suggested size for an Ebook page, in round numbers, is 
about 9 by 6 inches~\cite{ADOBEBOOK} or 23 by 15 centimetres overall.

    The font size should not be less than 12pt. The font may have to be
more robust than you would normally use for printing, as fine hairlines 
or small serifs will not display well unless on a high resolution screen.

    The page design for printed books is based on a double spread. For
Ebooks the design should be based on a single page. The typeblock\index{typeblock} must
be centered on the page otherwise it gets tiring, not to mention
aggravating, if your eyes have to 
flip from side to side when moving from one page to the next. Likewise
any header\index{header} and the top of the typeblock\index{typeblock} must be at a constant height
on the screen. A constant position for the bottom of the text is not
nearly so critical.

    It is more difficult with an Ebook than with a paper\index{paper} book to flip through
it to find a particular place. Navigation aids --- headers\index{header} and footers\index{footer} ---
are therefor more critical. Each page should have both a chapter 
(perhaps also a section) header\index{header} title and a page number. Note that I'm not
considering HTML publications.

    Many viewers for Ebooks let you jump to a particular page. The page
numbers that they use, though, are often based on the sequence number from
the first page, not the displayed folio\index{folio}. In such cases it can be helpful
to arrange for a continuous sequence of page numbers, even if the folios\index{folio}
are printed using different styles. For example, if the front matter uses
roman numerals and the main matter arabic numerals and the last page of the
frontmatter is page xi, then make the first page of the main matter page 12.

    I see no point in Ebooks having any blank pages --- effectively the
concept of recto and verso pages is irrelevant.

    Some printed books have illustrations\index{illustration} that are tipped in, and the tipped
in pages are sometimes excluded from the pagination. In an Ebook the
illustrations\index{illustration} have to be `electronically tipped in' in some fashion, either
by including the electronic source of the illustrations\index{illustration} or by providing
some navigation link to them. Especially in the former case, the
tipped in elements should be included in the pagination.

    Don't forget that a significant percentage of the population is 
color-blind.\index{color|(}\index{color!blind} 
The most common form is a reduced ability to distinguish
between red and green; for example some shades of pink may be perceived
as being a shade of blue, or lemons, oranges and limes may all appear to
be the same color. Along with color-blindness there may be a reduced
capacity to remember colors.

    I have seen Ebooks where color has been liberally used to indicate, say, 
different revisions of the text or different sources for the data in a graph. 
Unless the colors used are really 
distinctive 10\% or more of the potential readership will be lost
or confused. Further,
Ebooks may be printed for reading off-line and if a non-color printer is
used then any colors will appear as shades of grey; these must be such that
they are both readily distinguishable and legible. Yellow on white is almost
as difficult to read as off-white on white or navy blue on black, all of
which I have seen on web sites but rarely after I have tried to print 
the page.

\index{color|)}
\index{electronic books|)}




    







%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%\endinput
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%








%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\part{Practice} \label{part:practice}
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%


\chapter{Starting off} \label{chap:starting}

\pagestyle{headings}
This chapter uses the \pstyle{headings} pagestyle\index{pagestyle}; 
pagestyles are described in \S\ref{chap:signposts}.

    As usual, the \Lclass{memoir} class is called by 
\cmd{\documentclass}\oarg{options}\texttt{\{memoir\}}. The \meta{options}
include being able to select a paper\index{paper!size} size from among a range of sizes, 
selecting a type size, selecting the kind of manuscript, and some related
specifically to the typesetting of mathematics.

\section{Stock paper size options}

    The stock\index{stock} size is the size of a single sheet of the paper\index{paper} you expect to 
put through the printer.
    There are a range of stock\index{stock} paper\index{paper!size} sizes from which to make a selection. 
These include:
\begin{itemize}

\item[\Lopt{a3paper}]\index{paper!size!A3} for a stock size of $420 \times 297$ millimeters
\item[\Lopt{a4paper}]\index{paper!size!A4} for a stock size of $297 \times 210$ millimeters
\item[\Lopt{a5paper}]\index{paper!size!A5} for a stock size of $210 \times 148$ millimeters
\item[\Lopt{a6paper}]\index{paper!size!A6} for a stock size of $148 \times 105$ millimeters
\item[\Lopt{b3paper}]\index{paper!size!B3} for a stock size of $500 \times 353$ millimeters
\item[\Lopt{b4paper}]\index{paper!size!B4} for a stock size of $353 \times 250$ millimeters
\item[\Lopt{b5paper}]\index{paper!size!B5} for a stock size of $250 \times 176$ millimeters
\item[\Lopt{b6paper}]\index{paper!size!B6} for a stock size of $176 \times 125$ millimeters
\item[\Lopt{letterpaper}]\index{paper!size!letterpaper} for a stock size of $11 \times 8.5$ inches
\item[\Lopt{legalpaper}]\index{paper!size!legal} for a stock size of $14 \times 8.5$ inches
\item[\Lopt{executivepaper}]\index{paper!size!executive} for a stock size of $10.5 \times 7.25$ inches
\item[\Lopt{ebook}] for a stock size of $6 \times 9$ inches, principally
                    for `electronic books' intended to be displayed
                    on a computer monitor
\item[\Lopt{landscape}] to interchange the height and width of the stock.

\end{itemize}

    These options, except for \Lopt{landscape}, are mutually exclusive.
The default stock\index{stock} paper\index{paper!size} size is \Lopt{letterpaper}\index{paper!size!letterpaper}.

\section{Type size options}

    The class offers a wider range of type sizes than usual. These are:
\begin{itemize}

\item[\Lopt{9pt}] for 9pt type
\item[\Lopt{10pt}] for 10pt type
\item[\Lopt{11pt}] for 11pt type
\item[\Lopt{12pt}] for 12t type
\item[\Lopt{14pt}] for 14pt type
\item[\Lopt{17pt}] for 17pt type

\end{itemize}

    These options are mutually exclusive.
The default type size is \Lopt{10pt}.

\section{Printing options}

    This group of options includes:

\begin{itemize}

\item[\Lopt{twoside}] for when the document will be published with printing
                        on both sides of the paper\index{paper}.
\item[\Lopt{oneside}] for when the document will be published with only
                        one side of each sheet being printed on.

                        The \Lopt{twoside} and \Lopt{oneside} options
                        are mutually exclusive.

\item[\Lopt{onecolumn}] only one column\index{column!single} of text on a page.
\item[\Lopt{twocolumn}] two equal width columns\index{column!double} of text on a page.

                        The \Lopt{onecolumn} and \Lopt{twocolumn} options
                        are mutually exclusive.

\item[\Lopt{openright}] each chapter\index{chapter} will start on a recto page.
\item[\Lopt{openleft}] each chapter\index{chapter} will start on a verso page.
\item[\Lopt{openany}] a chapter\index{chapter} may start on either a recto or verso page.

                        The \Lopt{openright}, \Lopt{openleft} and 
                        \Lopt{openany} options
                        are mutually exclusive.

\item[\Lopt{final}] for camera-ready copy of your labours.
\item[\Lopt{draft}] this marks overfull lines with black bars and enables
                      some change marking to be shown. There may be other 
                      effects as well, particularly if some packages are used.
\item[\Lopt{ms}] this tries to make the document look as though it was 
                   prepared on a typewriter. Some publishers prefer to receive
                   poor looking submissions.

                   The \Lopt{final}, \Lopt{draft} and \Lopt{ms} options
                   are mutually exclusive.

\item[\Lopt{showtrims}] this option prints marks at the corners of the
                   the sheet so that you can see where the stock\index{stock} must be
                   trimmed to produce the final page size.

\end{itemize}

    The defaults among the printing options are \Lopt{twoside}, 
\Lopt{onecolumn},
\Lopt{openright}, and \Lopt{final}.

\section{Other options}

    The remaining options are:
\begin{itemize}

\item[\Lopt{leqno}] equations will be numbered at the left (the default is
     to number them at the right).

\item[\Lopt{fleqn}] displayed math environments will be indented an amount
                      \cmd{\mathindent} from the left margin\index{margin} (the default is to
                      center the environments).

\item[\Lopt{openbib}] each part of a bibliography\index{bibliography} entry will start on a
                        new line, with second and succeding lines indented
                        by \cmd{\bibindent} (the default is for an entry
                        to run continuously with no indentations).

\item[\Lopt{article}] typesetting simulates the \Lclass{article} class,
  but the \cmd{\chapter} command is not disabled.
  Chapters\index{chapter} do not start a new page and chapter headings\index{heading!chapter} are typeset
  like a section heading\index{heading!sections}. The numbering of 
  figures\index{figure}, etc., is continuous
  and not per chapter. However, a \cmd{\part} command still puts
  its heading\index{heading!part} on a page by itself.

\item[\Lopt{oldfontcommands}] makes the old, deprecated LaTeX version~2.09
  font commands available. Warning messages will be produced whenever
  an old font command is encountered.

\end{itemize}

    None of these options are defaulted.

\section{Remarks}

   Calling the class with no options is equivalent to:
\begin{lcode}
\documentclass[letterpaper,10pt,twoside,onecolumn,openright,final]{memoir}
\end{lcode}
   The source file for this manual starts
\begin{lcode}
\documentclass[letterpaper,10pt]{memoir}
\end{lcode}
which is overkill as both \Lopt{letterpaper} and \Lopt{10pt} are among
the default options.

    Actual typesetting only occurs within the \Ie{document} environment. The
region of the file between the \cmd{\documentclass} command and the start
of the \Ie{document} environment is called the 
\emph{preamble}\index{preamble}. This is where you ask for external packages
and define you own macros if you feel so inclined.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\flushbottom} \cmd{\raggedbottom} \\
\end{syntax}
When the \Lopt{twoside} or \Lopt{twocolumn} option is selected then
typesetting is done with \cmd{\flushbottom}, otherwise it is done
with \cmd{\raggedbottom}.

    When \cmd{\raggedbottom} is in effect LaTeX makes little attempt to
keep a constant height for the typeblock\index{typeblock}; pages may run short.

    When \cmd{\flushbottom} is in effect LaTeX ensures that the typeblock\index{typeblock}
on each page is a constant height, except when a page break is deliberately
introduced when the page might run short. In order to maintain a constant
height it may stretch or shrink some vertical spaces 
(e.g., between paragraphs\index{paragraph}, around headings\index{heading} or around floats\index{float} or other inserts).
This may have a deleterious affect on the color\index{page color} 
of some pages. Serendipitously this has happened on \pref{chap:lpage} where
there is additional space between the paragraphs\index{paragraph} (caused by the next sectional
division having to be put at the top of the next page). You may wish to
compare that page with the following one to see the difference in the 
colors. 

    I could have made the page run short by inserting \cmd{\raggedbottom}
at an appropriate place, followed later by a \cmd{\flushbottom}.

    If you get too many strung out pages with \cmd{\flushbottom} you may
want to put \cmd{\raggedbottom} in the preamble\index{preamble}.

    If you use the \Lopt{ebook} option you may well also want to use the
\Lopt{12pt} and \Lopt{oneside} options.



\chapter{Laying out the page} \label{chap:layingpage}

\pagestyle{ruled}

    This chapter is typeset with the \pstyle{ruled} pagestyle.


\section{Introduction}

    The class provides a default page layout, in which the page size is the
same as the stock\index{stock} size and the typeblock\index{typeblock} is roughly in the middle of
the page.
    This chapter describes the commands provided by the class to help you
produce your own page layout if the default is inappropriate.

    The pages of a book carry the text which is intended to educate, entertain
and/or amuse the reader. The page must be designed to serve the purposes of
the author and to ease the reader's task in assimilating the author's ideas.
A good page design is one which the general reader does not notice. If the
reader is constantly noticing the page layout, even unconsciously, it distracts
from the purpose of the book. It is not the job of the designer to 
shout, or even to murmur, `look at my work'.

    There are three main parts to a page: the page itself, the typeblock\index{typeblock}, and 
the margins\index{margin} separating the typeblock\index{typeblock} from the edges of the page. Of slightly
lesser importance are the headers\index{header} and footers\index{footer}, and possibly marginal\index{marginalia} notes.
The art of page design is obtaining a harmonious balance or rhythm between
all these.

    Although the form is different, the facilities described in this chapter 
are similar to those provided by the \Lpack{geometry} 
package~\cite{GEOMETRY}.

\section{Stock material}

   Printing is the act of laying symbols onto a piece of stock\index{stock} material.
Some print on T shirts by a process called silk screening, where the shapes of
the symbols are made in a screen and then fluid is squeezed through the screen
onto the stock material --- in this case the fabric of the T shirt. Whether or
not this is of general interest it is not the sort of printing or stock
material that is usually used in book production. Books, except for the very
particular, are printed on paper\index{paper}. 

    In the desktop publishing world the stock\index{stock}
paper\index{paper!size} is usually one from a range of standard sizes. In the USA it is typically
letterpaper\index{paper!size!letterpaper} (11 by 8.5 inches) and in the rest of the world A4\index{paper!size!A4} paper 
(297 by 210 mm), with one page per piece of stock\index{stock}. In commercial 
printing the stock\index{stock} material is much larger with several pages being 
printed on each stock\index{stock} piece; the stock\index{stock} is then folded, cut and trimmed to form
the final pages for binding. For our purposes we only consider desktop
publishing.


\section{The page}
 
    We only consider one page per piece of stock\index{stock}. 


\begin{figure}
\centering
\drawpage
\caption{LaTeX page layout parameters for a recto page} \label{fig:anoddpage}
\end{figure}


    The parameters used by LaTeX itself to define the page layout are 
illustrated in \fref{fig:anoddpage}. LaTeX does not actually care about the
physical size of a page --- it assumes that, with respect to the top lefthand
corner, the sheet of paper\index{paper} to be printed is infinitely wide and infinitely
long. If you happen to have a typeblock\index{typeblock} that is too wide or too long for
the sheet, LaTeX will merrily position text outside the physical boundaries.

    The LaTeX parameters are often not particularly convenient if, say, the top
of the text must be a certain distance below the top of the page and the 
\foredge{} margin\index{margin} must be twice the spine margin\index{margin}. It is obviously possible
to calculate the necessary values for the parameters, but it is
not a pleasurable task.

    The class provides various means of specifying the page layout, which are
hopefully more convenient to use than the standard ones. Various
adjustable parameters are used that define the stock\index{stock} size, page size, and so 
on. These differ in some respects from the parameters in the standard classes.
Figure~\ref{fig:oddstock} shows the stock\index{stock} for a recto page, with a page layout,
illustrating the main layout parameters. These may be changed individually
by \cmd{\setlength} or by using the commands described below.

\begin{figure}
\centering
\drawmarginparsfalse
\drawstock
\caption{The main \textsf{memoir} class page layout parameters for a recto page} \label{fig:oddstock}
\end{figure}


    In the code for the standard classes it says:
\begin{quotation}
`The variables \cmd{\paperwidth} and \cmd{\paperheight} should reflect
the physical paper\index{paper!size} size after trimming. For desk printer output this is
usually the real paper\index{paper!size} size since there is no post-processing. Classes for
real book production will probably add other paper\index{paper!size} sizes and additionally
the production of crop marks for trimming.'
\end{quotation}

    This class has introduced the additional lengths \cmd{\stockwidth}
and \cmd{\stockheight} to denote the physical paper\index{paper!size} size \emph{before}
trimming.


    The first step in designing the page layout is to decide on the page size 
and then pick an appropriate stock\index{stock} size. Selecting a standard stock\index{stock} size will
be cheaper than having to order specially sized stock\index{stock} material. 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\setstocksize}\marg{height}\marg{width} \\
\lnc{\stockheight} \lnc{\stockwidth} \\
\end{syntax}
    The class options provide for some common stock\index{stock} sizes. If you have some
other size that you want to use the 
command \cmd{\setstocksize} can be used to
specify that the stock\index{stock} size is \meta{height} by \meta{width}. For example
the following specifies a stock\index{stock} of 9 by 4 inches:
\begin{lcode}
\setstocksize{9in}{4in}
\end{lcode}

The size of the page must be
no larger than the stock\index{stock} but may be smaller which means that after printing
the stock\index{stock} must be trimmed down to the size of the page.
The page may 
be positioned anywhere within the bounds of the stock\index{stock}.

    Page layout should be conceived in terms of a spread\index{spread}; when 
you open a book in the middle what you see is a spread --- a verso page on the
left and a recto page on the right with the spine between them. Most books when
closed are taller than they are wide; this makes them easier to hold when open
for reading. A squarish page when opened out into a wide spread 
makes for discomfort unless the book is supported on a table.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\settrimmedsize}\marg{height}\marg{width}\marg{ratio} \\
\lnc{\paperheight} \lnc{\paperwidth} \\
\end{syntax}
The command \cmd{\settrimmedsize}
can be used to specify 
the height and width of the page (after any trimming). Initially the page
size is made the same as the stock\index{stock} size, as set by the paper\index{paper!size} size option.
The \meta{ratio} argument is 
the amount by which the \meta{height} or the \meta{width} must be multiplied 
by to give the
width or the height. Only two out of the three possible arguments must be 
given values with the other (unvalued) argument given as |*| 
(an asterisk). The lengths \lnc{\paperheight} and \lnc{\paperwidth} are 
calculated according to the given arguments. That is, the command enables
the \lnc{\paperheight} 
and \lnc{\paperwidth} to be specified directly or as one being in a given
ratio to the other.

    If you have used \cmd{\setstocksize} to redefine the stock\index{stock}, then to get
the same page size, do:
\begin{lcode}
\settrimmedsize{\stockheight}{\stockwidth}{*}
\end{lcode}
or for the page to be 90\% of the size of the stock\index{stock}:
\begin{lcode}
\settrimmedsize{0.9\stockheight}{0.9\stockwidth}{*}
\end{lcode}

    The following are three different ways of defining an 8 by 5 inch page.
\begin{lcode}
\settrimmedsize{8in}{5in}{*}
\settrimmedsize{8in}{*}{0.625}  % 5 = 0.625 times 8
\settrimmedsize{*}{5in}{1.6}    % 8 = 1.6 times 5
\end{lcode}

If you look at a well bound hardback book you
can see that the sheets are folded so that they are continuous at the spine, 
where they are sewn together into the binding. The top of the pages should be
smooth so that when the book is upright on a bookshelf dust has a harder 
job seeping between the pages than if the top was all raggedy. Thus, if
the stock\index{stock} is trimmed it will be trimmed at the top. It will also have been
cut at the \foredge s of the pages and at the bottom, otherwise the book
would be unopenable and unreadable.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\settrims}\marg{top}\marg{edge} \\
\lnc{\trimtop} \lnc{\trimedge} \\
\end{syntax}
The command \cmd{\settrims} can be used to specify 
the amount intended to 
be trimmed from the top (\meta{top}) and \foredge{} (\meta{edge}) of the stock\index{stock} 
material to produce the top and fore edge of a recto page. 
Note that the combination of \cmd{\settrims} and \cmd{\settrimmedsize}
locate the page with respect to the stock\index{stock}.
By default the top and edge trims are zero, which means that if any trimming
is required it will be at the spine and bottom edges of the stock\index{stock}.

    You can either do any trim calculation for youself or let LaTeX do it for
you. For example, with an 8in by 5in page on 10in by 7in stock\index{stock}
\begin{lcode}
\settrims{2in}{2in}
\end{lcode}
specifies trimming 2in from the top and \foredge{} of the stock\index{stock}, 
giving the desired page size. Taking a design where, say, the page is 90\% of the
stock\index{stock} size it's easy to get LaTeX to do the calculation:
\begin{lcode}
\setlength{\trimtop}{\stockheight}    % \trimtop = \stockheight
\addtolengh{\trimtop}{-\paperheight}  % \trimtop = \stockheight - \paperheight
\setlength{\trimedge}{\stockwidth}
\addtolength{\trimedge}{-\paperwidth}
\end{lcode}
which will set all the trimming to be at the top and \foredge. If you wanted, say,
equal trims at the top and bottom you could go on as
\begin{lcode}
\settrims{0.5\trimtop}{\trimedge}
\end{lcode}


\section{The typeblock} \label{sec:typeblock2}

    Like the page, the typeblock\index{typeblock} is normally rectangular with the height 
greater than the width.


Table~\ref{tab:cmrlengths} gives the lowercase alphabet lengths for a range
of Computer Modern Roman font sizes; this may be used in conjunction
with \tref{tab:copyfitting} on \pref{tab:copyfitting} when deciding
on an appropriate textwidth. 
\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\xlvchars} \lnc{\lxvchars} \\
\end{syntax}
Based on this table, the two lengths 
\lnc{\xlvchars} and 
\lnc{\lxvchars} are approximately the lengths of a line of text with
45 or 65 characters, respectively, for the type size selected for the document.

    If you are using a different font you can use something like the 
following to calculate and print out the length for you.
\begin{lcode}
\newlength{\mylen}                % a length
\newcommand{\alphabet}{abc...xyz} % the lowercase alphabet
\begingroup                       % keep font change local
% font specification e.g., \Large\sffamily
\settowidth{\mylen}{\alphabet}
The length of this alphabet is \the\mylen.  % print in document
\typeout{The length of the Large sans alphabet is \the\mylen} % in log file
\endgroup       % end the grouping
\end{lcode}
The \cmd{\typeout} macro will print the result to the terminal and the
log file.

\begin{table}
\centering
\caption{Length of CMR lowercase alphabets}\label{tab:cmrlengths}
\begin{tabular}{rr}\hline
\multicolumn{1}{c}{Font} & \multicolumn{1}{c}{Length} \\
\multicolumn{1}{c}{size} & \multicolumn{1}{c}{(points)} \\ \hline
5 pt & 87 \\
6 pt & 94 \\
7 pt & 102 \\
8 pt & 108 \\
9 pt & 118 \\
10 pt & 128 \\
11 pt & 139 \\
12 pt & 150 \\
14 pt & 175 \\
17 pt & 207 \\
20 pt & 245 \\
25 pt & 290 \\ 
\hline
\end{tabular}
\end{table}


 Morten H{\o}gholm has done some curve fitting to the data in 
 \tref{tab:copyfitting}.
He found that the expressions
\begin{displaymath}
L_{65} = 2.042\alpha + 33.41 \mbox{pt}
\end{displaymath}
and
\begin{displaymath}
L_{45} = 1.415\alpha + 23.03 \mbox{pt}
\end{displaymath}
fitted aspects of the data, where $\alpha$ is the length of the
alphabet and $L_{i}$ is the desired linewidth when the line should
contain $i$ characters. He suggested the following macros.
\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\setlxvchars}\oarg{fontspec} \\
\cmd{\setxlvchars}\oarg{fontspec} \\
\end{syntax}
The macros \cmd{\setlxvchars} and \cmd{\setxlvchars} set the lengths 
\lnc{\lxvchars} and \lnc{\xlvchars} respectively for the font \meta{fontspec}.
The default for \meta{fontspec} is \cmd{\normalfont}.

    For example, the values of \lnc{\lxvchars} and \lnc{\xlvchars} after
calling \setlxvchars \setxlvchars[\small\sffamily] 
\begin{lcode}
\setlxvchars \setxlvchars[\small\sffamily] 
\end{lcode}
are: \verb?\lxvchars? = \the\lxvchars, and \verb?\xlvchars? = \the\xlvchars.

    Continuing on this theme, Morten also wrote:
\begin{quotation}
\ldots I was defining some environments that had to have \lnc{\parindent}
as their indentation. For some reason I just wrote \texttt{1.5em} instead
of \lnc{\parindent} because I knew that was the value. What I had 
overlooked was that I had loaded the \Lpack{mathpazo} 
package~\cite{MATHPAZO}, thus
altering various \cmd{\fontdimen}s. Conclusion: the environment would
insert \mbox{1.5 em = 18.0 pt}, whereas the \lnc{\parindent} was only
\mbox{17.6207 pt}.

    This, and other related situations can be avoided if one places
\begin{center}
\cmd{\RequirePackage}\marg{font-package}\cmd{\normalfont}
\end{center}
before \cmd{\documentclass}, but I have to this day never seen this suggested.
I would believe that most document classes have settings that depend on
\emph{current} font settings, which they should do for such things as
\lnc{\parindent}. However the decision to let Computer Modern be the 
default font in LaTeX causes these dimensions to be set to erroneous 
values\ldots
\end{quotation}





    The height of the typeblock\index{typeblock} should be equivalent to an integral number
of lines.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\settypeblocksize}\marg{height}\marg{width}\marg{ratio} \\
\lnc{\textheight} \lnc{\textwidth} \\
\end{syntax}
The command 
\cmd{\settypeblocksize} is the same as
\cmd{\settrimmedsize} except that it sets the \lnc{\textheight} and 
\lnc{\textwidth} for the typeblock\index{typeblock}. For instance, here are three ways of specifying
a 6in by 3in typeblock\index{typeblock}:
\begin{lcode}
\settypeblocksize{6in}{3in}{*}
\settypeblocksize{6in}{*}{0.5}
\settypeblocksize{*}{3in}{2}
\end{lcode}

    The typeblock\index{typeblock} has to be located on the page. There is a relationship
between the page, typeblock\index{typeblock} and margins\index{margin}. The sum of the spine margin\index{margin},
the \foredge{} margin\index{margin} 
and the width of the typeblock\index{typeblock} must equal the width
of the page. Similarly the sum of the upper margin\index{margin}, the lower margin\index{margin} and the
height of the typeblock\index{typeblock} must equal the height of the page. The process
of locating the typeblock\index{typeblock} with respect to the page can be viewed
either as positioning the typeblock\index{typeblock} with respect to the edges of the page
or as setting the margins\index{margin} between the page and the typeblock\index{typeblock}.

    Remembering that the page layout should be defined in terms of the
appearance as a spread, the spine margin\index{margin} is normally half the \foredge{}
margin\index{margin}, so that the white space is equally distributed around the
sides of the text. 

    There is usually more latitude in choosing the proportions\index{proportion} of the upper and
lower margins\index{margin}, though usually the upper margin\index{margin} is less than the lower margin\index{margin}
so the typeblock\index{typeblock} is not vertically centered.

    Two methods are provided for setting the horizontal dimensions on a page.
One where the width of the typeblock\index{typeblock} is fixed and the margins\index{margin}
are adjustable, and the other where the size of the margins\index{margin} determines the
width of the typeblock\index{typeblock}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\setlrmargins}\marg{spine}\marg{edge}\marg{ratio} \\
\lnc{\spinemargin} \lnc{\foremargin} \\
\end{syntax}
The command \cmd{\setlrmargins}
can be used to specify
the side margins\footnote{Only the spine margin is noted in
\fref{fig:oddstock}; the \foredge{} margin\index{margin} is at the opposite side of the 
typeblock.} with the width of the page and the typeblock being fixed.
 
Either zero or one argument values are required, with any
unvalued argument being denoted by an asterisk. There are several cases to 
consider and these are tabulated in \tref{tab:lrmargins}.

    In the Table, $S$ is the calculated spine margin\index{margin}, $E$ is the calculated
\foredge{} margin\index{margin}, and $P_{w}$ and $B_{w}$ are respectively the page and typeblock\index{typeblock} 
widths. 
The \cmd{\setlrmargins} command maintains the relationship
\begin{displaymath}
S + E = K_{w}  = \textrm{constant} \mbox{\space} (= P_{w} - B_{w}).
\end{displaymath}


\begin{table}
\DeleteShortVerb{\|}
\centering
\caption{Arguments and results for \cs{setlrmargins} } \label{tab:lrmargins}
\begin{tabular}{ccc|l} \hline
\meta{spine} & \meta{edge} & \meta{ratio} & Result \\ \hline
 S   & E & r & ambiguous \\
 S   & E & * & ambiguous \\
 S   & * & r & ambiguous \\
 S   & * & * & $E = K_{w} - S$ \\
{*}  & E & r & ambiguous \\
{*}  & E & * & $S = K_{w} - E$ \\
{*}  & * & r & $E + S = K_{w}$, $E = rS$ \\
{*}  & * & * & $E + S = K_{w}$, $E = S$ \\
\hline
\end{tabular}
\MakeShortVerb{\|}
\end{table}

The cases marked ambiguous in the Table are where the particular combination
of argument values may make it impossible to guarantee the relationship.

    Assuming that we have a 3in wide typeblock\index{typeblock} on a 5in wide page and we want
the spine margin\index{margin} to be 0.8in and the \foredge{} margin\index{margin} to be 1.2in (i.e., the
\foredge{} margin\index{margin} is half as big again as the spine margin\index{margin}) this can be
accomplished in three ways (with the \cmd{\pagewidth} and \lnc{\textwidth} being
previously specified and fixed):
\begin{lcode}
\setlrmargins{0.8in}{*}{*}   % specify spine margin
\setlrmargins{*}{1.2in}{*}   % specify foredge margin
\setlrmargins{*}{*}{1.5}     % specify foredge/spine ratio
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\setlrmarginsandblock}\marg{spine}\marg{edge}\marg{ratio}\\
\end{syntax}
The command \cmd{\setlrmarginsandblock}
can be used to specify the spine and \foredge{} margins\index{margin}, where the page width 
is fixed and the width of the typeblock\index{typeblock} depends on the margins\index{margin}. Results
for this command are given in \tref{tab:lrblock}. The same notation is used,
but in this case \cmd{\setlrmarginsandblock} maintains the
relationship 
\begin{displaymath}
S + B_{w} + E = \textrm{constant} \mbox{\space} (= P_{w}).
\end{displaymath}
The width of the typeblock\index{typeblock} is calculated from $B_{w} = P_{w} - S - E$.

\begin{table}
\DeleteShortVerb{\|}
\centering
\caption{Arguments and results for \cs{setlrmarginsandblock} } \label{tab:lrblock}
\begin{tabular}{ccc|l} \hline
\meta{spine} & \meta{edge} & \meta{ratio} & Result \\ \hline
 S   & E & r & $S$, $E$ \\
 S   & E & * & $S$, $E$ \\
 S   & * & r & $E = rS$ \\
 S   & * & * & $E = S$ \\
{*}  & E & r & $S = rE$ \\
{*}  & E & * & $S = E$ \\
{*}  & * & r & ambiguous \\
{*}  & * & * & ambiguous \\
\hline
\end{tabular}
\MakeShortVerb{\|}
\end{table}

    Assuming that we want a 3in wide typeblock\index{typeblock} on a 5in wide page and we want
the spine margin\index{margin} to be 0.8in and the \foredge{} margin\index{margin} to be 1.2in (i.e., the
\foredge{} margin\index{margin} is half as big again as the spine margin\index{margin}) this can be
accomplished in the following ways (with the \lnc{\textwidth} being calculated
from the previously specified \cmd{\pagewidth} and the specified margins\index{margin}):
\begin{lcode}
\setlrmarginsandblock{0.8in}{1.2in}{*}   % specify both margins
\setlrmarginsandblock{0.8in}{*}{1.5}     % specify spine & foredge/spine ratio
\setlrmarginsandblock{*}{1.2in}{0.667}   % specify foredge & spine/foredge ratio
\end{lcode}
If we wanted the margins to be both 1in instead then any of the following 
will do it:
\begin{lcode}
\setlrmarginsandblock{1in}{1in}{*} % specify both margins
\setlrmarginsandblock{1in}{*}{1}   % specify spine & foredge/spine ratio
\setlrmarginsandblock{1in}{*}{*}   % specify spine (foredge = spine)
\setlrmarginsandblock{*}{1in}{1}   % specify foredge & spine/foredge ratio
\setlrmarginsandblock{*}{1in}{*}   % specify foredge (spine = foredge)
\end{lcode}

    That completes the methods for specifying the horizontal spacings. There 
are similar commmands for setting the vertical spacings which are 
described below.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\setulmargins}\marg{upper}\marg{lower}\marg{ratio} \\
\lnc{\uppermargin} \lnc{\lowermargin} \\
\end{syntax}
The command \cmd{\setulmargins} can be used to specify
the upper and lower margins\footnote{Only the upper margin is noted in
\fref{fig:oddstock}; the lower margin\index{margin} is the distance between the bottom
of the typeblock\index{typeblock} and the bottom of the page.} where the heights of the page
and the typeblock\index{typeblock} are fixed. This is similar to \cmd{\setlrmargins}. Using
a slightly different notation this time, with $U$ being the upper margin\index{margin},
$L$ being the lower margin\index{margin}, and $P_{h}$ and $B_{h}$ being the 
\emph{height} of the page
and typeblock\index{typeblock}, respectively, the results are shown in \tref{tab:ulmargins}.
The \cmd{\setlrmargins} command maintains the relationship
\begin{displaymath}
U + L = K_{h}  = \textrm{constant} \mbox{\space} (= P_{h} - B_{h}).
\end{displaymath}


\begin{table}
\DeleteShortVerb{\|}
\centering
\caption{Arguments and results for \cs{setulmargins} } \label{tab:ulmargins}
\begin{tabular}{ccc|l} \hline
\meta{upper} & \meta{lower} & \meta{ratio} & Result \\ \hline
 U   & L & r & ambiguous \\
 U   & L & * & ambiguous \\
 U   & * & r & ambiguous \\
 U   & * & * & $L = K_{h} - U$ \\
{*}  & L & r & ambiguous \\
{*}  & L & * & $U = K_{h} - L$ \\
{*}  & * & r & $L + U = K_{h}$, $L = rU$ \\
{*}  & * & * & $L + U = K_{h}$, $L = U$ \\
\hline
\end{tabular}
\MakeShortVerb{\|}
\end{table}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\setulmarginsandblock}\marg{upper}\marg{lower}\marg{ratio} \\
\end{syntax}
The command \cmd{\setulmarginsandblock}
can be used to specify the upper and lower margins\index{margin}, where the page height 
is fixed and the height of the typeblock\index{typeblock} depends on the margins\index{margin}. Results
for this command are given in \tref{tab:ulblock}. The same notation is used,
but in this case \cmd{\setulmarginsandblock} maintains the
relationship 
\begin{displaymath}
U + B_{h} + L = \textrm{constant} \mbox{\space} (P_{h}).
\end{displaymath}
The height of the typeblock\index{typeblock} is calculated from $B_{h} = P_{h} - U - L$.

\begin{table}
\DeleteShortVerb{\|}
\centering
\caption{Arguments and results for \cs{setulmarginsandblock} } \label{tab:ulblock}
\begin{tabular}{ccc|l} \hline
\meta{upper} & \meta{lower} & \meta{ratio} & Result \\ \hline
 U   & L & r & $U$, $L$ \\
 U   & L & * & $U$, $L$ \\
 U   & * & r & $L = rU$ \\
 U   & * & * & $L = U$ \\
{*}  & L & r & $U = rL$ \\
{*}  & L & * & $U = L$ \\
{*}  & * & r & ambiguous \\
{*}  & * & * & ambiguous \\
\hline
\end{tabular}
\MakeShortVerb{\|}
\end{table}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\setcolsepandrule}\marg{colsep}\marg{thickness} \\
\lnc{\columnsep} \lnc{\columseprule} \\
\end{syntax}
    For twocolumn\index{column!double} text the width of the gutter between the columns must be
specified. LaTeX also lets you draw a vertical rule in the middle of the 
gutter. The macro \cmd{\setcolsepandrule} 
sets the gutter width, \lnc{\columnsep}, to \meta{colsep} 
and \lnc{\columnseprule}, the thickness of the rule, 
to \meta{thickness}. A \meta{thickness} of 0pt means that the rule will be
invisible. Visible rules usually have a thickness of about 0.4pt.
The total width of the twocolumns\index{column!double} of text and the gutter equals the width of
the typeblock\index{typeblock}.

    This completes the main elements of the page --- the page size, the size
of the typeblock\index{typeblock} and the margins\index{margin} surrounding the typeblock\index{typeblock}. 

\section{Headers, footers and marginal notes}
\index{header|(}\index{footer|(}

    A page may have two additional items, and usually has at least one of 
these. They are the running header and running footer. If the page has a folio\index{folio} then it is located either in the 
header or in the footer. The word `in' is used rather lightly here as the folio\index{folio}
may not be actually \emph{in} the header or footer but is always located 
at some constant relative position. A common position for the folio\index{folio} is towards
the \foredge{} of the page, either in the header of the footer. This makes it 
easy to spot when thumbing through the book. It may be placed at the center of
the footer, but unless you want to really annoy the reader do not place it near
the spine.

    Often a page header contains the current chapter title, with perhaps a 
section title on the opposite header, as aids to the reader in navigating 
around the book. Some books
put the book title into one of the headers, usually the verso one, but I see 
little point in that as presumably the reader knows which particular book he
is reading, and the space would be better used providing more useful signposts.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\setheadfoot}\marg{headheight}\marg{footskip} \\
\lnc{\headheight} \lnc{\footskip} \\
\end{syntax}
The command \cmd{\setheadfoot} sets the
\lnc{\headheight} parameter to the value \meta{headheight} and the
\lnc{\footskip} parameter to \meta{footskip}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\setheaderspaces}\marg{headdrop}\marg{headsep}\marg{ratio} \\
\lnc{\headdrop} \lnc{\headsep} \\
\end{syntax}
The command \cmd{\setheaderspaces} is similar to \cmd{\setulmargins}.
Using the notation $U$ for the upper margin\index{margin} (as before), $H_{h}$ for the
\lnc{\headheight}, $H_{s}$ for the \lnc{\headsep} and $D$ for the
\lnc{\headdrop}, where the \lnc{\headdrop} is the distance between the top
of the trimmed page and the top of the header\footnote{The head drop is not
shown in \fref{fig:oddstock}.}, then the macro \cmd{\setheaderspaces}
maintains the relationship
\begin{displaymath}
D + H_{s} = C_{h}  = \textrm{constant} \mbox{\space} (= U - H_{h}).
\end{displaymath}

\begin{table}
\DeleteShortVerb{\|}
\centering
\caption{Arguments and results for \cs{setheaderspaces} } \label{tab:headspaces}
\begin{tabular}{ccc|l} \hline
\meta{headdrop} & \meta{headsep} & \meta{ratio} & Result \\ \hline
 D   & $H_{s}$ & r & ambiguous \\
 D   & $H_{s}$ & * & ambiguous \\
 D   & *       & r & ambiguous \\
 D   & *       & * & $H_{s} = C_{h} - D$ \\
{*}  & $H_{s}$ & r & ambiguous \\
{*}  & $H_{s}$ & * & $D = C_{h} - H_{s}$ \\
{*}  & *       & r & $H_{s} + D = C_{h}$, $H_{s} = rD$ \\
{*}  & *       & * & $H_{s} + D = C_{h}$, $H_{s} = D$ \\
\hline
\end{tabular}
\MakeShortVerb{\|}
\end{table}

The macro \cmd{\setheaderspaces} is for specifying the spacing above and below
the page header.
The possible arguments and results are shown in \tref{tab:headspaces}. Typically,
the \lnc{\headsep} is of more interest than the \lnc{\headdrop}.

\index{footer|)}\index{header|)}

\index{marginalia|(}
   Finally, some works have marginal notes. These really come last in the 
design scheme, providing the margins have been made big enough to accomodate 
them. Figure~\ref{fig:evenstock} shows the marginal note parameters on a verso
page, and also illustrates that some parameters control different 
positions on the stock\index{stock}.


\begin{figure}
\centering
\oddpagelayoutfalse
\drawstock
\caption{The \textsf{memoir} class page layout parameters for a verso page} \label{fig:evenstock}
\end{figure}



\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\setmarginnotes}\marg{separation}\marg{width}\marg{push} \\
\lnc{\marginparsep} \lnc{\marginparwidth} \lnc{\marginparpush} \\
\end{syntax}
The command \cmd{\setmarginnotes}
sets the parameters for marginal notes. The distance \lnc{\marginparsep} 
between the typeblock\index{typeblock} and any note is set to \meta{separation}, the 
maximum width for a note, \lnc{\marginparwidth}, is set to \meta{width}
and the minimum vertical distance between notes, \lnc{\marginparpush},
is set to \meta{push}.

\index{marginalia|)}

\section{Putting it together}

    The page layout parameters just discussed are not always the same
as those that are expected by LaTeX, or by LaTeX packages. The parameters
that LaTeX expects are shown in \fref{fig:anoddpage}. You can either use
the class commands for changing the page layout or change the LaTeX parameters
directly using either \cmd{\setlength} or \cmd{\addtolength} applied to the
parameter(s) to be modified. If you choose the latter route, those class 
parameters which differ from the standard LaTeX parameters will \emph{not} be
modified. 

    The general process of setting up your own page layout is along these
lines:
\begin{itemize}
\item Decide on the required finished page size, and pick a stock\index{stock} size that
      is at least as large as the page.
\item Use \cmd{\setstocksize} to set the values of \lnc{\stockheight}
      and \lnc{\stockwidth}, followed by \cmd{\settrimmedsize} to specify
      the values of \lnc{\paperheight} and \lnc{\paperwidth}.
\item Decide on the location of the page with respect to the stock\index{stock}. If the
      page and stock\index{stock} sizes are the same, then call |\settrims{0pt}{0pt}|.
      If they are not the same size then decide on the appropriate 
      values for \lnc{\trimtop} and \lnc{\trimedge} to position the page on
      the stock\index{stock}, and then set these through \cmd{\settrims}.
\item Decide on the size of the typeblock\index{typeblock} and use \cmd{\settypeblocksize}
      to specify the values of \lnc{\textheight} and \lnc{\textwidth}.
\item Pick the value for the spine margin\index{margin}, and use \cmd{\setlrmargins}
      to set the values for the \lnc{\spinemargin} and \lnc{\foremargin}.

      An alternative sequence is to use \cmd{\setlrmarginsandblock} to
      set the \lnc{\textwidth} for a particular choice of side margins\index{margin}.

\item Pick the value for the upper margin\index{margin} and use \cmd{\setulmargins}
      to set the values for the \lnc{\uppermargin} and \cmd{\lowermargin}.

      An alternative sequence is to use \cmd{\setulmarginsandblock} to
      set the \lnc{\textheight} for a particular choice of upper and
      lower margins\index{margin}.

\item Pick the values for the \lnc{\headheight} and \lnc{\footskip}
      and use \cmd{\setheadfoot} to specify these.

\item Pick your value for \cmd{\headskip} and use \cmd{\setheaderspaces}
      to set this and \lnc{\headdrop}.

\item If you are going to have any marginal\index{marginalia} notes, use \cmd{\setmarginnotes}
      to specify the values for \lnc{\marginparsep}, \lnc{\marginparwidth}
      and \lnc{\marginparpush}.

\end{itemize}

    You can plan and specify your layout in any order that is 
convenient to you. Each of the page layout commands are independent; also if
a value is set at one point, say the \lnc{\textwidth}, and is then
later changed in some way, only the last of the settings is used as the actual
value.


    Comparing \figurerefname s~\ref{fig:oddstock} and~\ref{fig:anoddpage} you can see
the different layout parameters provided by the class and used by standard
LaTeX. For convenience, and because the figures do not show all
the parameters, the two sets of parameters are listed in \tref{tab:stockpage}.

\begin{table}
\centering
\caption{The class and LaTeX page layout parameters}\label{tab:stockpage}
\begin{tabular}{ll} \hline
Class & LaTeX \\ \hline
\lnc{\stockheight}    &  \\
\lnc{\trimtop}        &  \\
\lnc{\trimedge}       &  \\
\lnc{\stockwidth}     &  \\
\lnc{\paperheight}    & \lnc{\paperheight}  \\
\lnc{\paperwidth}     & \lnc{\paperwidth}  \\
\lnc{\textheight}     & \lnc{\textheight}  \\
\lnc{\textwidth}      & \lnc{\textwidth}  \\
\lnc{\columnsep}      & \lnc{\columnsep}  \\
\lnc{\columnseprule}  & \lnc{\columnseprule}  \\
\lnc{\spinemargin}    &  \\
\lnc{\foremargin}     &  \\
                      & \lnc{\oddsidemargin}  \\
                      & \lnc{\evensidemargin}  \\
\lnc{\uppermargin}    &  \\
\lnc{\headdrop}       &  \\
                      & \lnc{\topmargin}  \\
\lnc{\headheight}     & \lnc{\headheight}  \\
\lnc{\headsep}        & \lnc{\headsep}  \\
\lnc{\footskip}       & \lnc{\footskip}  \\
\lnc{\lowermargin}    &  \\
\lnc{\marginparsep}   & \lnc{\marginparsep}  \\
\lnc{\marginparwidth} & \lnc{\marginparwidth}  \\
\lnc{\marginparpush}  & \lnc{\marginparpush}  \\
\hline
\end{tabular}
\end{table}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\checkandfixthelayout} \\
\end{syntax}
    The macro \cmd{\checkandfixthelayout} takes all the class layout parameters, 
checks
that they have `sensible' values (e.g., the \lnc{\textwidth} is not negative),
and then calculates the values for all those LaTeX layout parameters that 
differ from the class parameters. If you have used the class macros to change
the layout in any way, you must call \cmd{\checkandfixthelayout} after you have
made all the necessary changes. As an aid, the final layout parameter values
are displayed on the terminal and written out to the log file.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\typeoutlayout} \\
\cmd{\typeoutstandardlayout} \\
\end{syntax}
The command \cmd{\typeoutlayout} may be used at any point in the document
to display the current class layout parameter values on the terminal and 
to write
them to the log file. The \cmd{\typeoutstandardlayout} does the same thing,
except that it outputs the values of the standard parameters.

    When pdfLaTeX is used to generate a PDF version of a \Lclass{memoir}
document some special setup must be done.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\fixpdflayout} \\
\end{syntax}
The macro \cmd{\fixpdflayout} is automatically called after 
the preamble when pdfLaTeX is used to generate PDF. 
The default definition is effectively:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\fixpdflayout}{\ifpdf\ifnum\pdfoutput>0\relax
  \pdfpageheight=\the\stockheight
  \pdfpagewidth=\the\stockwidth
  \ifdim\pdfvorigin=0pt\pdfvorigin=1in\fi
  \ifdim\pdfhorigin=0pt\pdfhorigin=1in\fi
  \fi\fi}
\end{lcode}
The first settings (\verb?\pdfpage...?) ensure that pdfLaTeX knows the 
size of the physical sheet for printing. The \verb?\...origin? settings
set the pdf origin per the TeX origin, provided that their values are 0pt.
If you have set the origin values yourself, either in a pdfLaTeX 
configuration file or earlier in the preamble, the \cmd{\fixpdflayout} macro 
will not alter them (if you need an origin value to be 0, then set it to
0sp, which is visually indistinguishable from 0pt).

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\fixdvipslayout} \\
\end{syntax}
The macro \cmd{\fixdvipslayout} is automatically called after the preamble
when PDF output is not being produced. It provides the dvips processor
with information about the stock size which a viewer or printer may use.

    With a landscape document and using the processing route
\texttt{latex -> dvips} the resulting \file{.ps} PostScript file may appear
upside-down when viewed with, say, \texttt{ghostview}. If this happens
try putting the following in your preamble:
\begin{lcode}
\addtodef{\fixdvipslayout}{}{%
  \special{!TeXDict begin /landplus90{true}store end }}
\end{lcode}
If required, additional code can be added to \cmd{\fixdvipslayout}
by repeated applications of \cmd{\addtodef}.
Some other potential specials for PostScript printing may be (at least
for an HP 5SiMx LaserJet duplex printer):
\begin{lcode}
\special{!TeXDict begin <</Duplex true>> setpagedevice end} % duplex
\special{!TeXDict begin <</Tumble true>> setpagedevice end} % short side binding\end{lcode}

\subsection{Example} \label{sec:pexamp}

    Suppose you want a page that will fit on both A4\index{paper!size!A4} and US letterpaper\index{paper!size!letterpaper} stock\index{stock},
wanting to do the least amount of trimming. The width of the typeblock\index{typeblock} should
be such that there are the optimum number of characters per line, and the 
ratio of the height to the width of the typeblock\index{typeblock} should equal the golden
section. The text has to start 50pt below the top of the page.
We will use the default \lnc{\headheight} and \lnc{\footskip}.
The ratio of the \foredge{} margin\index{margin} to the spine margin\index{margin} should equal the
golden section\index{golden section}, 
as should the space above and below the header\index{header}. There is
no interest at all in marginal\index{marginalia} notes, so we can ignore any settings for these.

    We can either do the maths ourselves or get LaTeX to do it for us. Let's
use LaTeX. First we will work out the size of the largest sheet that can be
cut from A4\index{paper!size!A4} and letterpaper\index{paper!size!letterpaper}, whose sizes are $297 \times 210$mm and 
$11 \times 8.5$in; A4 is taller and narrower than letterpaper. 
\begin{lcode}
\settrimmedsize{11in}{210mm}{*}
\end{lcode}
The stocksize is defined by the class option, but we have to work out the
trims to reduce the stock\index{stock} to the page. To make life easier, we will only trim
the \foredge{} and the bottom of the stock\index{stock}, so the \lnc{\trimtop} is zero.
The \lnc{\trimtop} and \lnc{\trimedge} are easily specified by 
\begin{lcode}
\setlength{\trimtop}{0pt} 
\setlength{\trimedge}{\stockwidth}
\addtolength{\trimedge}{-\paperwidth}
\end{lcode}
Specification of the size of the typeblock\index{typeblock} is also easy 
\begin{lcode}
\settypeblocksize{*}{\lxvchars}{1.618}
\end{lcode}
and now the upper and lower margins\index{margin} are specified by
\begin{lcode}
\setulmargins{50pt}{*}{*}
\end{lcode}
The spine and \foredge{} margins\index{margin} are specified just by the value of the golden section\index{golden section}, via 
\begin{lcode}
\setlrmargins{*}{*}{1.618}
\end{lcode}
The only remaining calculation to be done is the \lnc{\headdrop} and 
\lnc{\headsep}. Again this just involves using a ratio
\begin{lcode}
\setheaderspaces{*}{*}{1.618}
\end{lcode}
To finish off we have to make sure that the layout is changed 
\begin{lcode}
\checkandfixthelayout
\end{lcode}

\subsection{The page layout of this manual}

\begin{figure}
\currentstock
\oddpagelayouttrue
\twocolumnlayoutfalse
\drawmarginparstrue
\drawparametersfalse
\drawstock
\caption{The recto page layout for this manual}\label{fig:thispagelay}
\end{figure}



    The page layout for this manual is defined in the preamble\index{preamble} as:
\begin{lcode}
\settrimmedsize{11in}{210mm}{*}
\setlength{\trimtop}{0pt}
\setlength{\trimedge}{\stockwidth}
\addtolength{\trimedge}{-\paperwidth}
\settypeblocksize{7.75in}{33pc}{*}
\setulmargins{4cm}{*}{*}
\setlrmargins{1.25in}{*}{*}
\setmarginnotes{17pt}{51pt}{\onelineskip}
\setheadfoot{\onelineskip}{2\onelineskip}
\setheaderspaces{*}{2\onelineskip}{*}
\checkandfixthelayout
\end{lcode}

An illustration of the layout is shown in \fref{fig:thispagelay} which also
lists the parameter values resulting from the code above, to the nearest point.

I initially used the layout defined in \S\ref{sec:pexamp}, which I thought
looked reasonable, but then I decided to use the one above in order
to save paper\index{paper} when anyone printed out the manual. The wider
typeblock\index{typeblock} also makes it easier for TeX when dealing with lines that include
unhyphenatable text, like the LaTeX code.


    Andreas Mathias, via Rolf Niepraschk,\footnote{Email 
from \url{niepraschk@ptb.de} on 2002/02/05.}
has suggested that the following might be better for typesetting the manual
on A4 paper.
\begin{lcode}
\documentclass[a4paper]{memoir}
...
\settrimmedsize{297mm}{210mm}{*}
\setlength{\trimtop}{0pt}
\setlength{\trimedge}{\stockwidth}
\addtolength{\trimedge}{-\paperwidth}
\settypeblocksize{634pt}{448.13pt}{*}
\setulmargins{4cm}{*}{*}
\setlrmargins{*}{*}{1.5}
\setmarginnotes{17pt}{51pt}{\onelineskip}
\setheadfoot{\onelineskip}{2\onelineskip}
\setheaderspaces{*}{2\onelineskip}{*}
\checkandfixthelayout
\end{lcode}

\chapter{Titles and abstracts}

\section{Introduction}

   The typeset format of the \cmd{\maketitle} command is virtually fixed
within the LaTeX standard classes. This class
provides a set of formatting commands that can be used to modify
the appearance of the title\index{title} information; that is, the contents of
the \cmd{\title}, \cmd{\author} and \cmd{\date} commands. 
It also keeps the values
of these commands so that they may be printed again later in the
document.
   The class also inhibits the normal automatic cancellation of titling
commands after \cmd{\maketitle}. This means that you can have multiple
instances of the same, or perhaps different, titles in one document;
for example on a half title page\index{half title page} and the
full title page\index{title page}.
Hooks are provided so that additional titling elements can be defined
and printed by \cmd{\maketitle}.
  The \cmd{\thanks} command is enhanced to provide various configurations
for both the marker symbol and the layout of the thanks\index{thanks} notes.

Questions about how to have a one-column\index{column!single} abstract\index{abstract} in a 
two-column\index{column!double} paper
seem to pop up fairly regularly on the
\texttt{comp.text.tex} newsgroup. While an answer based on responses
on \texttt{ctt} is provided in the FAQ,
the class provides a more author-friendly means
of accomplishing this. Further, additional controls are provided
for the typesetting of the \Ie{abstract} environment in general.

\section{Titles}

\subsection{Styling the titling}


\index{title!styling|(}

   This part of the class is a reimplementation of the \Lpack{titling}
package~\cite{TITLING}.

The class provides a configurable \cmd{\maketitle} command.
The \cmd{\maketitle} command as defined by the class 
is essentially
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\maketitle}{%
   \vspace*{\droptitle}
   \maketitlehooka
   {\pretitle \title \posttitle}
   \maketitlehookb
   {\preauthor \author \postauthor}
   \maketitlehookc
   {\predate \date \postdate}
   \maketitlehookd
   \thispagestyle{title}
}
\end{lcode}
where the \pstyle{title} pagestyle is initially the same as the
\pstyle{plain} pagestyle.
The various macros used within \cmd{\maketitle} are described below.


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\pretitle}\marg{text} \cmd{\posttitle}\marg{text} \\
\cmd{\preauthor}\marg{text} \cmd{\postauthor}\marg{text} \\
\cmd{\predate}\marg{text} \cmd{\postdate}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
These six commands each have a single argument, \meta{text},
which controls the typesetting of the 
standard elements of the document's \cmd{\maketitle}
command. The \cmd{\title} is effectively processed between the 
\cmd{\pretitle} and \cmd{\posttitle} commands; that is, like:
\begin{lcode}
{\pretitle \title \posttitle}
\end{lcode}
and similarly for the \cmd{\author} and \cmd{\date} commands. The 
commands are initialised to mimic the normal result of \cmd{\maketitle}
typesetting in the \Lclass{report} class.
That is, the default definitions of the commands are:
\begin{lcode}
\pretitle{\begin{center}\LARGE}
\posttitle{\par\end{center}\vskip 0.5em}
\preauthor{\begin{center}
           \large \lineskip 0.5em%
           \begin{tabular}[t]{c}}
\postauthor{\end{tabular}\par\end{center}}
\predate{\begin{center}\large}
\postdate{\par\end{center}}
\end{lcode}

They can be changed to obtain different effects. For example to get
a right justified sans-serif title and a left justifed small caps
date:
\begin{lcode}
\pretitle{\begin{flushright}\LARGE\sffamily}
\posttitle{\par\end{flushright}\vskip 0.5em}
\predate{\begin{flushleft}\large\scshape}
\postdate{\par\end{flushleft}}
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\droptitle} \\
\end{syntax}
 The \cmd{\maketitle} command puts the title at a particular height on the 
page. 
 You can change the vertical position of the title via the length
\lnc{\droptitle}. Giving this a positive value will lower the title and a
negative value will raise it. The default definition is: 
\begin{lcode}
\setlength{\droptitle}{0pt}
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\maketitlehooka} \cmd{\maketitlehookb} \\
\cmd{\maketitlehookc} \cmd{\maketitlehookd} \\
\end{syntax}
 These four hook commands are provided so that additional elements may
be added to \cmd{\maketitle}. These are initially defined to do nothing
but can be renewed. For example, some publications
want a statement about where an article is published immediately
before the actual titling text. The following defines a command
\cmd{\published} that can be used to hold the publishing information
which will then be automatically printed by \cmd{\maketitle}.
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\published}[1]{%
   \gdef\puB{#1}}
\newcommand{\puB}{}
\renewcommand{\maketitlehooka}{%
   \par\noindent \puB}
\end{lcode}
You can then say:
\begin{lcode}
\published{Originally published in 
          \textit{The Journal of ...}\thanks{Reprinted with permission}}
...
\maketitle
\end{lcode}
to print both the published and the normal titling information. Note
that nothing extra had to be done in order to use the \cmd{\thanks} command
in the argument to the new \cmd{\published} command.

\index{title page|(}

\begin{syntax}
\senv{titlingpage} text \eenv{titlingpage} \\
\end{syntax}
   When one of the standard classes is used with the \Lopt{titlepage}
option, \cmd{\maketitle} puts the title elements on an unnumbered page
and then starts a new page numbered page 1. 
The standard classes also provide
a \Ie{titlepage} environment which starts a new unnumbered page and at the
end starts a new page numbered 1. You are entirely responsible
for specifying exactly what and where is to go on this title page.
If \cmd{\maketitle} is used  within the \Ie{titlepage} environment it
will start yet another page.

   This class provides neither a \Lopt{titlepage} option nor
a \Ie{titlepage} environment; instead it provides the \Ie{titlingpage}
environment which falls between the \Lopt{titlepage}
option and the \Ie{titlepage} environment. Within the \Ie{titlingpage}
environment you can use the \cmd{\maketitle} command, and any others 
you wish. The \pstyle{titlingpage} pagestyle is used, and 
at the end it starts another ordinary page numbered one. 
The \pstyle{titlingpage} pagestyle is initially defined to be the same
as the \pstyle{empty} pagestyle.

   For example, to put both the title and an abstract\index{abstract} 
on a title page,
with a \pstyle{plain} pagestyle:
\begin{lcode}
\begin{document}
\begin{titlingpage}
\aliaspagestyle{titlingpage}{plain}
\setlength{\droptitle}{30pt} lower the title
\maketitle
\begin{abstract}...\end{abstract}
\end{titlingpage}
\end{lcode}

   By default, titling information is centered with respect to the
width of the typeblock\index{typeblock}.
   Occasionally someone asks on the \texttt{comp.text.tex} newsgroup how
to center the titling information on a title page 
with respect to the width of the physical 
page. If the typeblock\index{typeblock} is centered with respect to the physical page,
then the default centering suffices. If the typeblock\index{typeblock} is not physically
centered, then the titling information either has to be shifted 
horizontally or \cmd{\maketitle} has to be made to think that the typeblock\index{typeblock}
has been shifted horizontally. The simplest solution is to use the
\cmd{\calccentering} and \Ie{adjustwidth*} command and environment. For
example:
\begin{lcode}
\begin{titlingpage}
  \calccentering{\unitlength}
  \begin{adjustwidth*}{\unitlength}{-\unitlength}
    \maketitle
  \end{adjustwidth*}
\end{titlingpage}
\end{lcode}

\index{title page|)}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\title}\marg{text} \cmd{\thetitle} \\
\cmd{\author}\marg{text} \cmd{\theauthor} \\
\cmd{\date}\marg{text} \cmd{\thedate} \\
\end{syntax}
   In the usual document classes, the contents (\meta{text}) of
the \cmd{\title}, \cmd{\author} and \cmd{\date}
macros used for \cmd{\maketitle} are unavailable once \cmd{\maketitle} 
has been
issued. The class provides the \cmd{\thetitle},
\cmd{\theauthor} and \cmd{\thedate} commands that can be used for printing
these elements of the title later in the document, 
if desired. 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\and} \cmd{\andnext} \\
\end{syntax}
   The macro \cmd{\and} is used within the argument to the
\cmd{\author} command to add some extra space between the author's names.
The class \cmd{\andnext} macro inserts a newline instead of a space.
Within the \cmd{\theauthor} macro both \cmd{\and} and \cmd{\andnext}
are replaced by a comma.

   The class does not follow the the standard classes' habit
of automatically killing the titling
commands after \cmd{\maketitle} has been issued. You can have multiple
\cmd{\title}, \cmd{\author}, \cmd{\date} and \cmd{\maketitle} 
commands in your
document if you wish. For example, some reports are issued with
a title page, followed by an executive summary, and then they
have another, possibly modified, title at the start of
the main body of the report. This can be accomplished like this:
\begin{lcode}
\title{Cover title}
...
\begin{titlingpage}
\maketitle
\end{titlingpage}
...
\title{Body title}
\maketitle
...
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\killtitle} \cmd{\keepthetitle} \\
\cmd{\emptythanks} \\
\end{syntax}
    The \cmd{\killtitle} macro makes all aspects of titling, including
\cmd{\thetitle} etc.,
unavailable from the point that it is issued (using this command will save
some macro space if the \cmd{\thetitle}, etc., commands are not required).
Using this command is the class's manual version
of the automatic killing performed by the standard classes.
The \cmd{\keepthetitle} command performs a similar function, except that
it keeps the \cmd{\thetitle}, \cmd{\theauthor} and \cmd{\thedate} commands,
 while killing everything else.

The \cmd{\emptythanks} command discards any text from prior use of 
\cmd{\thanks}.
This command is useful when \cmd{\maketitle} is used multiple times ---
the \cmd{\thanks} commands in each use just stack up the texts for output
at each use, so each subsequent use of \cmd{\maketitle} will output all 
previous \cmd{\thanks} texts together with any new ones. To avoid this,
put \cmd{\emptythanks} before each \cmd{\maketitle} after the first.

\index{title!styling|)}


\subsection{Styling the thanks} \label{sec:thanks}

\index{thanks}
\index{thanks!styling|(}

    The class provides a configurable \cmd{\thanks} command.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\thanksmarkseries}\marg{format} \\
\cmd{\symbolthanksmark} \\
\end{syntax}
 Any |\thanks{}| are marked with symbols in the 
titling and footnotes\index{footnote}.
The command \cmd{\thanksmarkseries} 
can be used to change the marking style. The \meta{format} argument
is the name of one of the formats for printing a counter. The name 
is the same as that of a counter format but without the backslash.
To have the \cmd{\thanks} marks as lowercase letters instead of symbols 
do:
\begin{lcode}
\thanksmarkseries{alph}
\end{lcode}
Just for convenience the \cmd{\symbolthanksmark} command sets the series
to be footnote\index{footnote} symbols.
Using this class the potential names for \meta{format} are:
|arabic|, |roman|, |Roman|, |alph|, |Alph|, and |fnsymbol|. 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\continuousmarks} \\
\end{syntax}
The \cmd{\thanks} command uses the \Icn{footnote} counter, 
and normally the counter
is zeroed after the titling so that the footnote marks\index{footnote!mark} start from 1.
If the counter should not be zeroed, then just specify 
\cmd{\continuousmarks}.
This might be required if numerals are used as the thanks markers.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\thanksheadextra}\marg{pre}\marg{post} \\
\end{syntax}
The \cmd{\thanksheadextra} command will insert
\meta{pre} and \meta{post} before and after the thanks markers in the
titling block. By default \meta{pre} and \meta{post} are empty.
For example, to put parentheses round the titling markers do:
\begin{lcode}
\thanksheadextra{(}{)}
\end{lcode}


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\thanksmark}\marg{n} \\
\end{syntax}
It is sometimes desireable to have the same thanks text be applied to,
say, four out of six authors, these being the first 3 and the last one.
The command \cmd{\thanksmark}\marg{n} is similar to 
\cmd{\footnotemark}\oarg{n} in that it prints a thanks mark identical
to that of the \meta{n}'th  \cmd{\thanks} command. No changes are made
to any thanks in the footnotes\index{footnote}. For instance, in the following
the authors Alpha and Omega will have the same mark:
\begin{lcode}
\title{The work\thanks{Draft}}
\author{Alpha\thanks{ABC},
        Beta\thanks{XYZ} and 
        Omega\thanksmark{2}} 
\maketitle
\end{lcode}

%\begin{syntax}
%\cmd{\thanksgap}\marg{length} \\
%\end{syntax}
%The marks in the titling block printed by the 
%\cmd{\thanks} and \cmd{\thanksmark}
%commands take zero space. This is acceptable if they come at the end of
%a line, but not in the middle of a line. Use the 
%\cmd{\thanksgap} command immediately after a mid-line
%\cmd{\thanks} or \cmd{\thanksmark} command to add \meta{length} amount of
%space before the next word. For example, if there are three authors
%from two different institutions:
%\begin{lcode}
%\author{Alpha\thanks{ABC},
%        Omega\thanks{XYZ}\thanksgap{1ex} and 
%        Beta\thanksmark{1}} 
%\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\thanksmarkstyle}\marg{defn} \\
\end{syntax}
By default the thanks mark at the foot is typeset as a superscript. In
the class this is specifed via
\begin{lcode}
\thanksmarkstyle{\textsuperscript{#1}}
\end{lcode}
where |#1| will be replaced by the thanks mark symbol. You can change
the mark styling
if you wish. For example, to put parentheses round the
mark and typeset it at normal size on the baseline:
\begin{lcode}
\thanksmarkstyle{(#1)}
\end{lcode}


\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\thanksmarkwidth} \\
\end{syntax}
 The thanks mark in the footnote\index{footnote} is typeset right justified in a box
of width \lnc{\thanksmarkwidth}. The first line of the thanks text starts
after this box. The initialisation is 
\begin{lcode}
\setlength{\thanksmarkwidth}{1.8em}
\end{lcode}
giving the default position.

\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\thanksmarksep} \\
\end{syntax}
The value of the length
 \lnc{\thanksmarksep} controls the indentation the
second and subsequent lines of the thanks text, with respect to
the end of the mark box. As examples: 
\begin{lcode}
\setlength{\thanksmarksep}{0em}
\end{lcode}
 will align the left hand ends of of a multiline thanks text, while: 
\begin{lcode}
\setlength{\thanksmarksep}{-\thanksmarkwidth}
\end{lcode}
will left justify any second and subsequent lines of the thanks text. 
This last
setting is the initialised value, giving the default appearance.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\thanksfootmark} \\
\end{syntax}
    A thanks mark in the footnote\index{footnote} region is typeset by \cmd{\thanksfootmark}.
The code for this is roughly:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\thanksfootmark}{%
  \hbox to\thanksmarkwidth{\hfil\normalfont%
     \thanksscript{\thanksfootpre \thefootnote \thanksfootpost}}}
\end{lcode}
where \cmd{\thanksfootpre} and \cmd{\thanksfootpost} are specified via the
\cmd{\thanksfootextra} macro. You should not need to change the definition
of \cmd{\thanksfootmark} 
but you may want to change the default definitions of one or more
of the macros it uses.

\begin{comment}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\thanksscript}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
Note that the thanks mark, together with the |\...pre| and |\...post|
commands form the \meta{text} argument to the \cmd{\thanksscript} command. 
This is initially defined as: 
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\thanksscript}[1]{\textsuperscript{#1}}
\end{lcode}
so that \cmd{\thanksscript} typesets its argument as a superscript, which
is the default for thanks notes. If you would prefer the mark to be
set at the baseline instead, for example, just do: 
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\thanksscript}[1]{#1}
\end{lcode}
 and if you also wanted very small symbols on the baseline you could do:
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\thanksscript}[1]{\tiny #1}
\end{lcode}

Alternatively 
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\thanksscript}[1]{#1}
\thanksfootextra{\bfseries}{.}
\end{lcode}
will give a bold baseline mark followed by a dot.

   Using combinations of these macros you can easily define
different layouts for the thanks footnotes\index{footnote}. Here are some
sample, but to shorten them I have ignored any
|\renewcommand|s and |\setlength|s, leaving these to be implied
as necessary.
\begin{itemize}
\item Setting |\thanksfootextra{}{\hfill}| left justifies the mark
    in its box:
   \begin{itemize}
   \item |\thanksscript{\llap{#1\space}}|, |\thanksmarkwidth{0em}| and \\
         |\thanksmargin{0em}| puts the baseline mark in the margin\index{margin}
         and the text left justified.
   \item Using |\thanksscript{#1}|, |\thanksmarkwidth{1em}| and \\
         |\thanksmargin{-\thanksmarkwidth}| makes the baseline mark 
         and text left adjusted.
   \item |\thanksscript{#1}|, |\thanksmarkwidth{1em}| and
         |\thanksmargin{0em}| puts the baseline mark left adjusted
         and the text indented and aligned, like this marked
         sentence is typeset.
   \end{itemize}

\item Setting |\thanksfootextra{ }| and |\thanksscript{#1}| 
      right justifies the baseline mark and a space in the mark box:
   \begin{itemize}
   \item The normal style is
         defined by |\thanksmarkwidth{1.8em}| and \\
         |\thanksmargin{-\thanksmarkwidth}| which put the mark 
         indented and the text left adjusted, like a normal indented
         paragraph\index{paragraph!indentation}.
   \item |\thanksmarkwidth{1.8em}| and
         |\thanksmargin{0em}| put the mark indented 
         and the text indented and aligned.
   \end{itemize}

\end{itemize}

%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\end{comment}
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\makethanksmark} \\
\cmd{\makethanksmarkhook} \\
\end{syntax}
The macro \cmd{\makethanksmark} typesets both the thanks marker (via
\cmd{\thanksfootmark}) and the thanks text. You probably will not need
to change its default definition. Just in case, though, 
\cmd{\makethanksmark}
calls the macro \cmd{\makethanksmarkhook} before it does any typesetting.
The default definition of this is: 
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\makethanksmarkhook}{}
\end{lcode}
which does nothing.

   You can redefine \cmd{\makethanksmarkhook} to do something useful. For
example, if you wanted a slightly bigger baseline skip you could do:
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\makethanksmarkhook}{\fontsize{8}{11}\selectfont}
\end{lcode}
where the numbers |8| and |11| specify the point size of the font 
and the baseline skip
respectively. In this example 8pt is the normal \cmd{\footnotesize} in
a 10pt document, and 11pt is the baselineskip for \cmd{\footnotesize}
text in an 11pt document (the baseline skip is 9.5pt in a 10pt document); 
adjust these numbers to suit.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\thanksrule} \\
\cmd{\usethanksrule} \\
\cmd{\cancelthanksrule} \\
\end{syntax}
By default, there is no rule above \cmd{\thanks}
text that appears in a \Ie{titlingpage} environment.
If you want a rule in that environment, put \cmd{\usethanksrule} 
before the \cmd{\maketitle} command, which will then print a rule according
to the current definition of \cmd{\thanksrule}.
\cmd{\thanksrule} is initialised to be a copy of \cmd{\footnoterule} as it 
is defined at the
end of the preamble\index{preamble}. The definition of \cmd{\thanksrule} can be changed
after |\begin{document}|. If the definition of \cmd{\thanksrule} is modified
and a \cmd{\usethanksrule} command has been issued, then the redefined
rule may also be used for footnotes\index{footnote}. Issuing the command 
\cmd{\cancelthanksrule} will cause the normal \cmd{\footnoterule} definition
to be used from thereon; another \cmd{\usethanksrule}
command can be issued later
if you want to swap back again.

The parameters for the vertical positioning of footnotes\index{footnote} 
and thanks notes, and the default \cmd{\footnoterule} are the same
(see \fref{fig:fn} on \pref{fig:fn}).
You will have to change one or more of these if the vertical spacings of 
footnotes\index{footnote}
and thanks notes are meant to be different.


\index{thanks!styling|)}

\section{Abstracts}

\index{abstract|(}

    Much of this part of the class is a reimplementation of the 
\Lpack{abstract} package~\cite{ABSTRACT}.

   The typeset format of an \Ie{abstract} in a \Lclass{report} or 
\Lclass{article} class\footnote{The \texttt{abstract} environment is not 
available for the \Lclass{book} class.} document depends on the class
options. The formats are:
\begin{itemize}
\item \Lopt{titlepage} class option: The abstract heading\index{heading!abstract} (i.e., value of 
   \cmd{\abstractname}) is typeset centered in a bold font; the text is set in
   the normal font and to the normal width.
\item \Lopt{twocolumn} class option: The abstract heading\index{heading!abstract} is typeset like
   an unnumbered section; the text is set in the normal font and to the
   normal width (of a single column\index{column!single}). 
\item Default (neither of the above class options): The abstract heading\index{heading!abstract}
   is typeset centered in a small bold font; the text is set in a small
   font and indented like the |quotation| environment.
\end{itemize}

   This class provides an \Ie{abstract} environment and
handles to modify the typesetting of an \Ie{abstract}.

\begin{syntax}
\senv{abstract} text \eenv{abstract} \\
\end{syntax}
There is nothing special about using the \Ie{abstract} environment. 
Formatting is controlled by the macros described below.

   The usual advice~\cite{FAQ} about creating a one-column\index{column!double} 
\Ie{abstract} in a 
\Lopt{twocolumn} document is to write code like this:
\begin{lcode}
\documentclass[twocolumn...]{...}
...
\twocolumn[
   \begin{@twocolumnfalse}
     \maketitle               need full-width title
     \begin{abstract}
        abstract text...
     \end{abstract}
   \end{@twocolumnfalse}
]
... hand make footnotes for any \thanks commands
...
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\senv{onecolabstract} text \eenv{onecolabstract} \\
\cmd{\saythanks} \\
\end{syntax}
The class provides a \Ie{onecolabstract} environment that you can use
for a one column\index{column!single} abstract in a \Lopt{twocolumn} document, and it is used
like this:
\begin{lcode}
\documentclass[twocolumn...]{memoir}
...
\twocolumn[
   \maketitle               need full-width title
   \begin{onecolabstract}
     abstract text...
   \end{onecolabstract}
]
\saythanks  typesets any \thanks commands
...
\end{lcode}
The command \cmd{\saythanks} ensures that any \cmd{\thanks} texts are 
printed out as normal.

    If you want, you can use the \Ie{onecolabstract} environment in place
of the \Ie{abstract} environment --- it doesn't have to be within the 
optional argument of the \cmd{\twocolumn} command. In fact, 
\Ie{onecolabstract} internally uses \Ie{abstract} for the typesetting.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\abstractcol} \\
\cmd{\abstractintoc} \\
\cmd{\abstractnum} \\
\cmd{\abstractrunin} \\
\end{syntax}
    The normal format for an abstract is with a centered, bold title
and the text in a small font, inset from the margins\index{margin}.

The \cmd{\abstractcol} declaration specifies that an abstract in a
\Lopt{twocolumn} class option document should be typeset like a
normal, unnumbered chapter.
The \cmd{\abstractintoc} specifies that the abstract title should
be added to the \toc. The declaration \cmd{\abstractnum} specifies that the 
abstract should be typeset like a numbered chapter and 
\cmd{\abstractrunin} specifies that
the title of the abstract should look like a runin heading; these two
declarations are mutually exclusive. Note that the \cmd{\abstractnum}
declaration has no effect if the abstract is in the \cmd{\frontmatter}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\abstractnamefont} \\
\cmd{\abstracttextfont} \\
\end{syntax}
   These two commands can be redefined to change the fonts used for 
typesetting the heading (defined via \cmd{\abstractname}) of the 
\Ie{abstract} 
environment and the font for typesetting the text of the abstract,
respectively. The default definitions are 
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\abstractnamefont}{\normalfont\small\bfseries}
\newcommand{\abstracttextfont}{\normalfont\small}
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\absleftindent} \lnc{\absrightindent} \\
\lnc{\absparindent} \lnc{\absparsep} \\
\end{syntax}
   This version of \Ie{abstract} uses a list environment for typesetting
the text. These four lengths can be changed (via \cmd{\setlength}
 or \cmd{\addtolength}) to adjust
the left and right margins\index{margin}, the paragraph indentation\index{paragraph!indentation}, and the vertical skip
between paragraphs in this environment. 
The default values depend on whether or not the \Lopt{twocolumn}
class option is used.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\abslabeldelim}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
If the \cmd{\abstractrunin} declaration has been given, 
the heading is typeset as a run-in heading. That is, it is the 
first piece of text on the first line of the abstract text.
The \meta{text} argument of \cmd{\abslabeldelim} is typeset
immediately after the heading. By default it is defined to do nothing, but
if you wanted, for example, the \cmd{\abstractname} to be followed by 
a colon and some extra space you could specify
\begin{lcode}
\abslabeldelim{:\quad}
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\absnamepos} \\
\end{syntax}
   If the \cmd{\abstractrunin} declaration is not used then the heading 
is typeset in its own environment, specified by 
\cmd{\absnamepos}. The default definition is
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\absnamepos}{center}
\end{lcode}
It can be defined to be one of \Ie{flushleft}, \Ie{center},
or \Ie{flushright} to give a left, centered or right aligned heading; 
or to any
other appropriate environment which is supported by a used package\index{package}.

\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\abstitleskip} \\
\end{syntax}
   With the \cmd{\abstractrunin} declaration a horizontal space of length 
\lnc{\abstitleskip} is typeset
before the heading. For example, if \lnc{\absparindent} is non-zero, then:
\begin{lcode}
\setlength{\abstitleskip}{-\absparindent}
\end{lcode}
 will typeset the heading flush left.

Without the \cmd{\abstractrunin} declaration, \lnc{\abstitleskip} is 
aditional vertical 
space (either positive
or negative) that is inserted between the abstract name and the text of
the abstract.

\index{abstract|)}



%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\renewcommand{\printchaptername}{}
\renewcommand{\chapternamenum}{}
\renewcommand{\chapnumfont}{\normalfont\huge\sffamily}
\renewcommand{\chaptitlefont}{\chapnumfont}
\renewcommand{\afterchapternum}{\space}
\setsecheadstyle{\Large\sffamily\raggedright}
\setsubsecheadstyle{\large\sffamily\raggedright}
\setsubsubsecheadstyle{\normalsize\sffamily\raggedright}
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%


\chapter{Document divisions}

    The chapter is typeset using the sectional headings\index{heading} styles specified
at the end of the chapter.


\section{Introduction}

    In this chapter I first discuss the various kinds of divisions
within a book and the commands for typesetting these.

After that I describe the class methods for modifying the appearance
of the chapter and other sectional headings\index{heading}.
    The facilities described here provide roughly the same as you would
get if you used the \Lpack{titlesec}~\cite{TITLESEC} and 
\Lpack{sectsty}~\cite{SECTSTY} packages together; the commands are different,
though.

\section{Book divisions}

    As described earlier there are three main logical divisions to a book;
the front, main and back matter. There are three LaTeX 
commands that correspond to these, namely \cmd{\frontmatter},
\cmd{\mainmatter} and \cmd{\backmatter}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\frontmatter} \cmd{\frontmatter*} \\
\end{syntax}
The \cmd{\frontmatter} declaration sets the folios\index{folio} to be printed in lowercase
roman numerals, starts the page numbering from~i, and prohibits any numbering
of sectional divisions. Caption\index{caption}, equations, etc., will be numbered 
continuously.  The starred version of the command,
\cmd{\frontmatter*}, is similar to the unstarred version except that it
makes no changes to the page numbering or the print style for the folios\index{folio}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\mainmatter} \cmd{\mainmatter*} \\
\end{syntax}
The \cmd{\mainmatter} declaration, which is the default at the start of a document,
sets the folios\index{folio} to be printed in arabic numerals, starts the page numbering 
from~1, and sections and above will be numbered. Float\index{float} captions\index{caption}, equations,
etc.,  will be numbered per chapter\index{chapter}. The starred version of the command,
\cmd{\mainmatter*}, is similar to the unstarred version except that it
makes no changes to the page numbering or the print style for the folios\index{folio}.


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\backmatter} \\
\end{syntax}
The \cmd{\backmatter} declaration makes no change to the pagination or folios\index{folio}
but does prohibit sectional division numbering, and captions\index{caption}, etc., will
be numbered continuously.


\section{Sectional divisions}

    The \theclass{} class lets you divide a document up into seven levels
of named divisions. They range from part\index{part} through chapter\index{chapter} and down to 
sub-paragraph. A particular sectional division is specified by one of
the commands \cmd{\part}, \cmd{\chapter}, \cmd{\section}, \cmd{\subsection},
which is probably as deep as you want to go. If you really need finer
divisions, they are
 \cmd{\subsubsection}, \cmd{\paragraph} and lastly \cmd{\subparagraph}.
All the sectional commands, except for chapters,
 have the same form, so rather than describing 
each one in turn I will use \cmd{\section} to stand for any one of them.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\section}\oarg{toc-title}\oarg{head-title}\marg{title}\\
\cmd{\section*}\marg{title}\\
\end{syntax} 
There are two forms of the command; 
the starred version is simpler, so I'll describe its 
effects first --- it just typesets \meta{title} in the document in the format
for that particular sectional division. Like the starred version, the plain
version also typesets \meta{title} in the document, but it may be numbered.
Diferent forms of the division title are available for the 
Table of Contents (\toc) and a running header\index{header}, as follows:
\begin{itemize}
\item No optional argument: \meta{title} is used for the division title,
      the ToC title and a page header title.
\item One optional argument: \meta{title} is used for the division title;
      \meta{toc-title} is used for the ToC title and a page header\index{header} title.
\item Two optional arguments: \meta{title} is used for the division title;
      \meta{toc-title} is used for the ToC title; \meta{head-title}
      is used for a page header\index{header} title.
\end{itemize}

A \cmd{\section} command restarts the numbering of any \cmd{\subsection}s
from one.
For most of the divisions the \meta{title} is put on the page where the command
was issued. The \cmd{\part} and \cmd{\chapter} commands behave a little 
differently.

The \cmd{\part}\meta{title} command puts the part name (default |Part|),
 number and
\meta{title} on a page by itself. The
numbering of parts\index{part!number} has no effect on the numbering of chapters\index{chapter!number}.

    Later I'll give a list of LaTeX's default names, like |Part|.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\chapter}\oarg{toc-title}\oarg{head-title}\marg{title} \\
\cmd{\chapter*}\oarg{head-title}\marg{title} \\
\end{syntax}

The \cmd{\chapter} command starts a new page and puts
the chapter name (default |Chapter|), number and \meta{title}
at the top of the page. It restarts the numbering of any \cmd{\section}s 
from one. If no optional arguments are specified, \meta{title}
is used as the \toc{} entry and for any page headings. If one optional
argument is specified this is \meta{toc-title} and is used for the
\toc{} entry and for page headings. If both optional arguments
are specified the \meta{head-title} is used for page headings.

The \cmd{\chapter*} command starts a new page and puts
\meta{title} at the top of the page. It makes no \toc{} entry, 
changes no numbers and by default changes no page headings.
If the optional \meta{head-title} argument is given, this is used
for page headings. Use of the optional argument has the side-effect
that the \Icn{secnumdepth} counter is set to |maxsecnumdepth| (see below
for an explanation of these).

    When the \Lopt{article} option is in effect, however, things are slightly
different. New chapters do not necessarily start on a new page.
The \cmd{\mainmatter} command
just turns on sectional numbering and starts arabic page numbering; the 
\cmd{\backmatter} command just turns off sectional numbering.
    The \cmd{\tableofcontents} command and friends, as well as any
other commands created via \cmd{\newlistof}, 
\emph{always}\footnote{This is a consequence of the internal
timing of macro calls.}
call |\thispagestyle{chapter}|. If you are using the \Lopt{article} option you
will probably want to ensure that the \pstyle{chapter} pagestyle is the
same as you normally use for the document.

    Unlike the standard classes the \meta{title} is typeset ragged right.
This means that if you need to force a linebreak in the \meta{title} you 
have to use \cmd{\newline} instead of the more usual \cmd{\\}. For instance
\begin{lcode}
\section{A broken\newline title}
\end{lcode}

    In the standard classes a \cmd{\section} or other divisional heading
that is too close to the bottom of a page is moved to the top of the
following page. If this happens and \cmd{\flushbottom} is in effect, the
contents of the short page are stretched to make the last line flush with
the bottom of the typeblock.
\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\raggedbottomsectiontrue} \\
\cmd{\raggedbottomsectionfalse} \\
\lnc{\bottomsectionskip} \\
\end{syntax}
The \cmd{\raggedbottomsectiontrue} declaration will typeset any pages that 
are short because of a moved divisional header as though \cmd{\raggedbottom}
was in effect for the short page; other pages are not affected. The
length \lnc{\bottomsectionskip} controls the amount of stretch on the short
page. Setting it to zero allows the last line to be flush with the bottom
of the typeblock. The default setting of 10mm appears to remove any stretch.

The declaration \cmd{\raggedbottomsectionfalse}, which is the default,
cancels any previous \cmd{\raggedbottomsectiontrue} declaration.


    
\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\plainbreak}\marg{num} \cmd{\plainbreak*}\marg{num}  \\
\cmd{\fancybreak}\marg{text} \cmd{\fancybreak*}\marg{text}   \\
\end{syntax} 
    The \cmd{\plainbreak} is an anonymous division. It puts \meta{num}
blank lines into the typescript and the first line of the following
paragraph is not indented\index{paragraph!indentation}. Another anonymous division is
\cmd{\fancybreak} which puts \meta{text} centered into the typescript and the
initial line of the following paragraph is not indented\index{paragraph!indentation}. For
example:
\begin{lcode}
\fancybreak{{*}\\{* * *}\\{*}}
\end{lcode}
typesets a little diamond made of asterisks.

    The starred versions of the commands indent the first line of the
following paragraph\index{paragraph!indentation}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\plainfancybreak}\marg{space}\marg{num}\marg{text} \\
\cmd{\plainfancybreak*}\marg{space}\marg{num}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
If a plain break comes at the top or bottom of a page then it is very 
difficult for a reader to discern that there is a break at all.
If there is text on the page and enough space left to put some text
after a break the \cmd{\plainfancybreak} command will use a \cmd{\plainbreak}
with \meta{num} lines, 
otherwise (the break would come at the top or bottom of the page) it
will use a \cmd{\fancybreak} with \meta{text}. The \meta{space} argument is a
length specifying the space needed for the \meta{num} blank lines and some
number of text lines for after the plain break. The starred version of
the command uses the starred versions of the \cmd{\plainbreak} and
\cmd{\fancybreak} commands.

    Unfortunately there is an interaction between the requested, plain,
and fancy break spaces.
    Let $P$ be the space (in lines) required for the plain break, 
$F$ the space (in lines)
required for the fancy break, and $S$ the \meta{space} space (in lines). 
From some experiments it appears that the condition for the plain break 
to avoid the top and bottom of the page is that $S - P > 1$. 
Also, the condition for the fancy break to avoid being put in the middle 
of a page (i.e., not at the top or bottom) is that  $S - F < 3$.
For example, if the plain and fancy breaks take the same vertical space
then $S = P +2$ is the only value that matches the conditions. In general, 
if $F = P + n$ then the condition is $1 < S-P < 3+n$, which means that 
for the \cmd{\plainfancybreak} command the
fancy break must always take at least as much space as the plain break.


\fancybreak{\pfbreakdisplay}

    The \cmd{\plainfancybreak} macro inserts a plain break in the middle of
a page or if the break would come at the bottom or top of a page it
inserts a fancy break instead.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\pfbreak} \cmd{\pfbreak*} \\
\lnc{\pfbreakskip} \\
\cmd{\pfbreakdisplay}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
The \cmd{\pfbreak} macro is an alternate for \cmd{\plainfancybreak} that may
be more convenient to use. The gap for the plain break is given by the
length \lnc{\pfbreakskip} which is initialised to produce two blank lines.
The fancy break, which takes the same vertical space, is given by the
\meta{text} argument of \cmd{\pfbreakdisplay}. The default definition
typesets three asterisks, as shown a few lines before this.

%%\renewcommand{\pfbreakdisplay}{\huge \ding{167}\quad\ding{167}\quad\ding{167}}
\renewcommand{\pfbreakdisplay}{%
  $\clubsuit$\quad$\diamondsuit$\quad$\clubsuit$}
\fancybreak{\pfbreakdisplay}

    You can change the definition of \cmd{\pfbreakdisplay} for a different
style if you wish. The
fancy break just before this was produced via:
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\pfbreakdisplay}{%
  $\clubsuit$\quad\$\diamondsuit$\quad$\clubsuit$}
\fancybreak{\pfbreakdisplay}
\end{lcode}
I used \cmd{\fancybreak} as I'm not sure where the break will come on the
page and the simple \cmd{\pfbreak} macro might just have produced a couple
of blank lines instead of the fancy display.

  The paragraph following \cmd{\pfbreak} is not indented. If you want
it indented use the \cmd{\pfbreak*} starred version.


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\tableofcontents} \cmd{\tableofcontents*} \\
\cmd{\listoffigures} \cmd{\listoffigures*} \\
\cmd{\listoftables} \cmd{\listoftables*} \\
\end{syntax}
In the standard classes the command \cmd{\tableofcontents} typesets a 
Table of Contents (\toc) at the point in the document where it is issued. 
In the \theclass{} class it also adds \emph{its}
title to the \toc. There is a starred version, \cmd{\tableofcontents*}, 
which does not enter itself into the \toc. So, in this class 
\cmd{\tableofcontents*} is equivalent to the standard classes'
\cmd{\tableofcontents}. The class also provides the \cmd{\listoffigures}
and \cmd{\listoftables} commands which typeset a List of 
Figures (\lof) and
a List of Tables (\lot), also entering their titles into the \toc. The 
starred versions of these make no \toc{} entry.

    You can use \cmd{\tableofcontents}, \cmd{\listoffigures}, etc., more
than once in a \Lclass{memoir} class document.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\appendix} \\
\cmd{\appendixname} \\
\end{syntax}
In the standard classes the \cmd{\appendix} command changes the numbering of
chapters\index{chapter!number} to an alphabetic form and changes the names of chapters from 
\cmd{\chaptername} (default |Chapter|)
to the value of \cmd{\appendixname} (default |Appendix|)\index{appendix}. 
Thus, the first and any subsequent \cmd{\chapter}s after 
the \cmd{\appendix} command
will be `Appendix A \ldots', `Appendix B \ldots', and so on. 
This class provides the same command plus some other ways of dealing with
appendices\index{appendix}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\appendixpage}\\
\cmd{\appendixpage*}\\
\cmd{\appendixpagename}\\
\end{syntax}
The \cmd{\appendixpage} command generates a part-like page (but no |Part|
or number) with the title given by the value of \cmd{\appendixpagename} 
(default |Appendices|)\index{appendix}. It also makes an entry in the \toc{} using 
\cmd{\addappheadtotoc} (see below). The starred version generates the 
appendix\index{appendix} page but makes no \toc{} entry.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\addappheadtotoc}\\
\cmd{\appendixtocname}\\
\end{syntax}
The command \cmd{\addappheadtotoc} adds an entry to the \toc. The title is
given by the value of \cmd{\appendixtocname} (default |Appendices|)\index{appendix}.

\begin{syntax}
\senv{appendices} text \eenv{appendices}\\
\end{syntax}
The \Ie{appendices} environment acts like the \cmd{\appendix}\index{appendix} command in that it
resets the numbering and naming of chapters\index{chapter}. However, at the end of the
environment, chapters are restored to their original condition and any
chapter numbers continue in sequence as though the \Ie{appendices} environment
had never been there.

\begin{syntax}
\senv{subappendices} text \eenv{subappendices} \\
\cmd{\namesubappendixtrue} \cmd{\namesubappendixfalse} \\
\end{syntax}
The \Ie{subappendices} environment can be used to put appendices\index{appendix} at the end
of a chapter\index{chapter}. Within the environment \cmd{\section} starts a 
new sub-appendix\index{appendix}. You may put \cmd{\addappheadtotoc} at the start
of the environment if you want a heading entry in the \toc.
If you put the declaration \cmd{\namesubappendixtrue}
\emph{before} the \Ie{subappendices} environment, the sub-appendix number
in the body of the document will be preceded by the value of 
\cmd{\appendixname}. The \cmd{\namesubappendixfalse} declaration may be 
used to switch off this behaviour.




\section{Numbering} \label{sec:secnumbers}

    Each type of sectional division has an associated \emph{level} as
shown in \tref{tab:seclevels}.
Divisions are numbered if the value of the \Icn{secnumdepth} counter
is equal to or greater than their level. For example, with
\begin{lcode}
\setcounter{secnumdepth}{2}
\end{lcode}
then subsections up to parts\index{part!number} will be numbered.

\begin{table}
\centering
\caption{Division levels} \label{tab:seclevels}
\begin{tabular}{lr} \hline
Division       & Level \\ \hline
\cmd{\part}           & -1 \\
\cmd{\chapter}        & 0 \\
\cmd{\section}        & 1 \\
\cmd{\subsection}     & 2 \\
\cmd{\subsubsection}  & 3 \\
\cmd{\paragraph}      & 4 \\
\cmd{\subparagraph}   & 5 \\ \hline
\end{tabular}
\end{table}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\setsecnumdepth}\marg{secname} \\
\cmd{\maxsecnumdepth}\marg{secname} \\
\end{syntax}
Instead of having to remember the levels if you want to change what
gets numbered you can use the \cmd{\setsecnumdepth} command. It
sets \Icn{secnumdepth} so that divisions \meta{secname} and above
will be numbered. The argument \meta{secname} is the name of a sectional
division without the backslash. For example, to have subsections
and above numbered:
\begin{lcode}
\setsecnumdepth{subsection}
\end{lcode}

    The command \cmd{\maxsecnumdepth} sets the maximum value for
\Icn{secnumdepth} that can be used in the document. You can use
\cmd{\setsecnumdepth} anywhere you want in the document to (temporarily)
change the numbering level.

    By default, the class sets:
\begin{lcode}
\maxsecnumdepth{section}
\setsecnumdepth{section}
\end{lcode}
The commands \cmd{\mainmatter} and \cmd{\mainmatter*} set the
\Icn{secnumdepth} to the value specified by \cmd{\maxsecnumdepth}.

    The number setting commands come from the \Lpack{tocvsec2}
package~\cite{TOCVSEC2}.





\section{Part headings}

\index{heading!part|(}

    Part titles \emph{always} start on a new page with the \pstyle{part}
pagestyle.


    Several aspects of the typesetting of the \cmd{\part} title are 
configurable.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\beforepartskip} \cmd{\afterpartskip} \\
\end{syntax}
These two commands effectively control the spacing before and after the part 
title. Their default definitions are:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\beforepartskip}{\null\vfil}
\newcommand{\afterpartskip}{\vfil\newpage}
\end{lcode}
Together, these vertically center any typesetting on the page, and then start
a new page. To move the title upwards on the page, for example, you could do:
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\beforepartskip}{\null\vskip 0pt plus 0.3fil}
\renewcommand{\afterpartskip}{\vskip 0pt plus 0.7fil \newpage}
\end{lcode} 

\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\midpartskip} \\
\end{syntax}
The length \lnc{\midpartskip} is the vertical distance between the part 
number line and the part title. Its default value is 20pt and can be changed
by \cmd{\setlength} or \cmd{\addtolength}. It is probably better to have
the spacing in terms of the \lnc{\baselineskip}, which will change depending
on the font size, instead of a fixed amount.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\printpartname} \cmd{\partnamefont} \\
\cmd{\partnamenum} \\
\cmd{\printpartnum} \cmd{\partnumfont} \\
\end{syntax}
The macro \cmd{\printpartname} typesets the part name 
(the value of \cmd{\partname}) using the font 
specified by \cmd{\partnamefont}. The default is the \cmd{\bfseries} font in
the \cmd{\huge} size. Likewise the part number is typeset by \cmd{\printpartnum}
using the font specified by \cmd{\partnumfont}, which has the same default as
\cmd{\partnamefont}. The macro 
\cmd{\partnamenum}, which is defined to be a space, is called between printing
the part name and the number. All these can be changed to obtain different 
effects. For example, to have a large sans font with the part name flush left:
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\partnamefont}{\normalfont\huge\sffamily\raggedright}
\renewcommand{\partnumfont}{\normalfont\huge\sffamily}
\end{lcode}
or to only print the part number in the default font:
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\printpartname}{}
\renewcommand{\partnamenum}{}
\end{lcode}


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\printparttitle}\marg{title} \cmd{\parttitlefont} \\
\end{syntax}
The title is typeset by \cmd{\printparttitle} using the font specified 
by \cmd{\parttitlefont}. 
By default this is a \cmd{\bfseries} font in the \cmd{\Huge} size. This can
be changed to have, say, the title set raggedleft in a small caps font by
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommmand{\parttitlefont}{\normalfont\Huge\scshape\raggedleft}
\end{lcode}

    The \cmd{\parttitlefont} font is also used by 
\cmd{\appendixpage}, or its starred version, when
typesetting an appendix\index{appendix} page.

\index{heading!part|)}

\section{Chapter headings}

\index{heading!chapter|(}

    The chapter headings are configurable in much the same way as part 
headings, but in addition there are some built in chapter styles that you may
wish to try, or define your own.

    Chapters \emph{always} start on a new page with the \pstyle{chapter}
pagestyle. The particular page, recto or verso, that they start on is
mainly controlled by the class options. If the \Lopt{oneside} option is used
they start on the next new page, but if the \Lopt{twoside} option is
used the starting page may differ, as follows.
\begin{itemize}
\item[\Lopt{openright}] The chapter heading is typeset on the next recto page,
  which may leave a blank verso leaf.
\item[\Lopt{openleft}] The chapter heading is typeset on the next verso page,
  which may leave a blank recto leaf.
\item[\Lopt{openany}] The chapter heading is typeset on the next page and there
  will be no blank leaf.
\end{itemize}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\openright} \cmd{\openleft} \cmd{\openany} \\
\end{syntax}
These three declarations have the same effect as the options of the same name.
They can be used anywhere in the document to change the chapter opening page.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\clearforchapter} \\
\end{syntax}
The actual macro that sets the opening page for a chapter is 
\cmd{\clearforchapter}. The \cmd{\openright}, \cmd{\openleft} and
\cmd{\openany} define \cmd{\clearforchapter} to be respectively
(see \S\ref{sec:moving}) 
\cmd{\cleartorecto}, \cmd{\cleartoverso} and \cmd{\clearpage}. You can
obviously change \cmd{\clearforchapter} to do more than just start a
new page.

    Some books have the chapter headings on a verso page, with perhaps
an illustration\index{illustration} or epigraph\index{epigraph}, and then the text starts on the opposite
recto page. The effect can be achieved like:
\begin{lcode}
\openleft                % chapter title on verso page
\chapter{The title}      % chapter title
\begin{centering}        % include a centered illustration
\includegraphics{...}
\end{centering}
\clearpage               % go to recto page
Start of the text        % chapter body
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\chapterstyle}\marg{style} \\
\end{syntax}
The macro \cmd{\chapterstyle} is rather like the \cmd{\pagestyle} command in 
that it sets the style of any subsequent chapter headings to be \meta{style}.

    The class provides some predefined chapter styles, including the 
\cstyle{default} style which is the familiar LaTeX \Lclass{book} class chapter
headings style. To use the chapterstyle \cstyle{fred} just issue the commmand
|\chapterstyle{fred}|. Different styles can be used in the same document.
The predefined styles include:
\begin{itemize}
\item[\cstyle{default}] The normal LaTeX style.
\item[\cstyle{section}] The heading is typeset like a section; that is, 
there is just the number and the title on one line. 
    See \Cref{chap:topsandtails} on \pref{chap:topsandtails} for an example.
\item[\cstyle{hangnum}] Like the \pstyle{section} style except that the chapter
number is put in the margin\index{margin}. 
    See \Cref{chap:captions} on \pref{chap:captions} for an example.
\item[\cstyle{companion}] This produces chapter headings like those the the
\textit{LaTeX Companion} series of books.
    See \Cref{chap:signposts} on \pref{chap:signposts} for an example.
\item[\cstyle{article}] The heading is typeset like a \cmd{\section}
heading in the \Lclass{article} class. This is similar to the 
\cstyle{section} style but different fonts and spacings are used.
\item[\cstyle{demo}] Try this one to see what it does. On the other
   hand you can look at \Cref{chap:verse} on \pref{chap:verse} to see
   what it looks like.
\end{itemize}


\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\beforechapskip} \lnc{\afterchapskip} \\
\end{syntax}
These two lengths define the spacing before and after the chapter heading.
Their default values are 50pt and 40pt, respectively.



\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\midchapskip} \\
\end{syntax}
The length \lnc{\midchapskip} is the vertical distance between the chapter 
number line and the chapter title. Its default value is 20pt and can be changed
by \cmd{\setlength} or \cmd{\addtolength}. It is probably better to have
the spacing in terms of the \lnc{\baselineskip}, which will change depending
on the font size, instead of a fixed amount.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\printchaptername} \cmd{\chapnamefont} \\
\cmd{\chapternamenum} \\
\cmd{\printchapternum} \cmd{\chapnumfont} \\
\end{syntax}
The macro \cmd{\printchaptername} typesets the chapter name 
(the value of \cmd{\chaptername}, default |Chapter|) using the font 
specified by \cmd{\chapnamefont}. The default is the \cmd{\bfseries} font in
the \cmd{\huge} size. Likewise the chapter number is typeset by 
\cmd{\printchapternum}
using the font specified by \cmd{\chapnumfont}, which has the same default as
\cmd{\chapnamefont}. The macro 
\cmd{\chapternamenum}, which is defined to be a space, is called between printing
the chapter name and the number. 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\printchaptertitle}\marg{title} \cmd{\chaptitlefont} \\
\end{syntax}
The title is typeset by \cmd{\printchaptertitle} using the font specified 
by \cmd{\chaptitlefont}. 
By default this is a \cmd{\bfseries} font in the \cmd{\Huge} size. 


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\insertchapterspace} \\
\end{syntax}
By default a \cmd{\chapter} inserts a small amount of vertical space
into the List of Figures and List of Tables. It calls \cmd{\insertchapterspace}
to do this. The default definition is:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\insertchapterspace}{%
  \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\addvspace{10pt}}%
  \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\addvspace{10pt}}%
}
\end{lcode}
If you would prefer no inserted spaces then 
|\renewcommand{\insertchapterspace}{}| will do the job. 
Different spacing can be inserted by
changing the value of the length arguments to \cmd{\addvspace}.

\index{heading!chapter|)}

\subsection{Defining a chapter style} \label{sec:chapterstyle}

\index{chapterstyle|(}

    The following illustrates the essential parts of the code for typesetting 
a numbered chapter heading.
\begin{lcode}
\chapterheadstart
\printchaptername \chapternamenum \printchapternum
\afterchapternum
\printchaptertitle{The chapter title}
\afterchaptertitle
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\printchapternonum} \\
\end{syntax}

    The essential code for an unnumbered chapter is simpler than 
when there is a number to be typeset.
\begin{lcode}
\chapterheadstart
\pintchapternonum
\printchaptertitle{The chapter title}
\afterchaptertitle
\end{lcode}

The various macros in the above are initially defined as:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommmand{\chapterheadstart}{\vspace*{\beforechapskip}}
\newcommand{\printchaptername}{\chapnamefont \@chapapp}
\newcommand{\chapternamenum}{\space}
\newcommand{\printchapternum}{\chapnumfont \thechapter}
\newcommand{\afterchapternum}{\par\nobreak\vskip \midchapskip}
\newcommand{\printchapternonum}{}
\newcommand{\printchaptertitle}[1]{\chaptitlefont #1}
\newcommand{\afterchaptertitle}{\par\nobreak\vskip \afterchapskip}
\end{lcode}

    A new style is specified by changing the definitions of this last set of 
macros and/or the various font and skip specifications.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\makechapterstyle}\marg{style}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
Chapter styles are defined via the \cmd{\makechapterstyle} command, where
\meta{style} is the style being defined and \meta{text} is the LaTeX code 
defining the style.

    As an example, here is the code for defining the \cstyle{section} chapter
style.
\begin{lcode}
\makechapterstyle{section}{%
  \renewcommand{\printchaptername}{}
  \renewcommand{\chapternamenum}{}
  \renewcommand{\chapnumfont}{\chaptitlefont}
  \renewcommand{\printchapternum}{\chapnumfont \thechapter\space}
  \renewcommand{\afterchapternum}{}
}
\end{lcode}
In this style, \cmd{\printchaptername} is vacuous, so the normal `Chapter'
is never typeset. The same font is used for the number and the title, and
the number is typeset with a space after it. The macro \cmd{\afterchapternum}
is vacuous, so the chapter title will be typeset immediately after the number.

    In the standard classes the title of an unnumbered chapter is typeset
at the same position on the page as the word `Chapter' for numbered chapters.
The macro \cmd{\printchapternonum} is called just before an unnumbered 
chapter title text is typeset. By default this does nothing but you can use
\cmd{\renewcommand} to change this. For example, if you wished the title
text for both numbered and unnumbered chapters to be at the same height on
the page then you could redefine \cmd{\printchapternonum} to insert
the amount of vertical space taken by any `Chapter N' line.

    Bastiaan Veelo 
posted the code for a new chapter style to \pictt{} on 2003/07/22 under the
title \textit{[memoir] [contrib] New chapter style}. His code, which
I have slightly modified and changed the name to \cstyle{veelo},
is below. I have also exercised editorial privilege on his comments.

\begin{quote}
 I thought I'd share a new chapter style to be used with the memoir class 
 The style is tailored for documents that are to be trimmed to a smaller 
 width. When the bound document is bent, black tabs will appear on the 
 fore side at the places where new chapters start as a navigational aid.
 We are scaling the chapter number, which most DVI viewers
 will not display accurately. \\[0.5\onelineskip]
Bastiaan.
\end{quote}

\begin{lcode}
\makeatletter
\newlength{\numberheight}
\newlength{\barlength}
\makechapterstyle{veelo}{%
   \setlength{\beforechapskip}{40pt}
   \setlength{\midchapskip}{25pt}
   \setlength{\afterchapskip}{40pt}
   \renewcommand{\chapnamefont}{\normalfont\LARGE\flushright}
   \renewcommand{\chapnumfont}{\normalfont\HUGE}
   \renewcommand{\chaptitlefont}{\normalfont\HUGE\bfseries\flushright}
   \renewcommand{\printchaptername}{%
     \chapnamefont\MakeUppercase{\@chapapp}}
   \renewcommand{\chapternamenum}{}
   \setlength{\numberheight}{18mm}
   \setlength{\barlength}{\paperwidth}
   \addtolength{\barlength}{-\textwidth}
   \addtolength{\barlength}{-\spinemargin}
   \renewcommand{\printchapternum}{%
     \makebox[0pt][l]{%
       \hspace{.8em}%
       \resizebox{!}{\numberheight}{\chapnumfont \thechapter}%
       \hspace{.8em}%
       \rule{\barlength}{\numberheight}
     }
   }
   \makeoddfoot{plain}{}{}{\thepage}
}
\makeatother
\end{lcode}

\makeatletter
\newlength{\numberheight}
\newlength{\barlength}
\makechapterstyle{veelo}{%
   \setlength{\beforechapskip}{40pt}
   \setlength{\midchapskip}{25pt}
   \setlength{\afterchapskip}{40pt}
   \renewcommand{\chapnamefont}{\normalfont\LARGE\flushright}
   \renewcommand{\chapnumfont}{\normalfont\HUGE}
   \renewcommand{\chaptitlefont}{\normalfont\HUGE\bfseries\flushright}
   \renewcommand{\printchaptername}{%
     \chapnamefont\MakeUppercase{\@chapapp}}
   \renewcommand{\chapternamenum}{}
   \setlength{\numberheight}{18mm}
   \setlength{\barlength}{\paperwidth}
   \addtolength{\barlength}{-\textwidth}
   \addtolength{\barlength}{-\spinemargin}
   \renewcommand{\printchapternum}{%
     \makebox[0pt][l]{%
       \hspace{.8em}%
       \resizebox{!}{\numberheight}{\chapnumfont \thechapter}%
       \hspace{.8em}%
       \rule{\barlength}{\numberheight}
     }
   }
   \makeoddfoot{plain}{}{}{\thepage}
}
\makeatother

    If you implement this you will also need to use the \Lpack{graphicx} 
package~\cite{GRAPHICX} because of the \cmd{\resizebox} macro. 
The \cstyle{veelo} style works best for chapters that start 
on recto pages.

    For details of how the other chapter styles are defined, 
look at the
documented class code. This should give you ideas if you want to define
your own style.

    Note that it is not necessary to define a new chapterstyle if you want
to change the chapter headings --- you can just change the individual macros
without putting them into a style.

\index{chapterstyle|)}

\section{Lower level headings}

\index{heading!sections|(}

    The lower level headings --- sections down to subparagraphs --- are also
configurable, but there is nothing corresponding to chapter styles.

    There are essentially three things that may be adjusted for a heading:
(a) the vertical distance between the baseline of the text above the heading to
the baseline of the heading title, (b) the indentation of the heading from the
left hand margin\index{margin}, and (c) the style (font) used for the heading title. 
Additionally, a heading may be runin to the text or as a display before 
the following text;
in the latter case the vertical distance between the heading and the 
following text may also be adjusted. Figure~\ref{fig:displaysechead} shows the
parameters controlling a displayed sectional heading and \fref{fig:runsechead}
shows the parameters for a runin heading.

    In the following I will use |S| to stand for one of |sec|, |subsec|,
|subsubsec|, |para| or |subpara|, which are in turn shorthand for |section|
through to |subparagraph|.

\begin{figure}
\centering
\setlayoutscale{1}
\drawparameterstrue
\drawheading{}
\caption{Displayed sectional headings} \label{fig:displaysechead}
\end{figure}

\begin{figure}
\centering
\setlayoutscale{1}
\drawparameterstrue
\runinheadtrue
\drawheading{}
\caption{Runin sectional headings} \label{fig:runsechead}
\end{figure}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\setbeforeSskip}\marg{skip} \\
\end{syntax}
The absolute value of the \meta{skip} length argument is the space to leave
above the heading. If the actual value is negative then the first line 
after the heading will not be indented. The default \meta{skip} depends on the
particular level of heading, but for a \cmd{\section} (i.e., when |S = sec|)
it is 
\begin{lcode}
-3.5ex plus -1ex minus -.2ex
\end{lcode}
where the plus and minus values are the
allowable stretch and shrink; note that all the values are negative so that 
there is no indentation of the following text. If you wanted indentation then
you could do
\begin{lcode}
\setbeforesecskip{3.5ex plus 1ex minus .2ex}
\end{lcode}


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\setSindent}\marg{length} \\
\end{syntax}
The value of the \meta{length} length argument is the indentation of
the heading (number and title) from the lefthand margin\index{margin}. This is normally
0pt.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\setSheadstyle}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
This macro specifies the style (font) for the sectional number and title. 
As before, the default value of the \meta{text} argument depends on the
level of the heading. For a \cmd{\subsection} (i.e., |S=subsec|) it is
|\large\bfseries\raggedright|, to typeset in the \cmd{\bfseries} font
in the \cmd{\large} size; the title will also be set ragged right (i.e.,
there will be no hyphenation in a multiline title).

    Note that the very last element in the \meta{text} argument may be a 
macro that takes one argument (the number and title of the heading). So,
if for some reason you wanted \cmd{\subsubsection} titles to be all uppercase,
centered, and in the normal font, you can do
\begin{lcode}
\setsubsubsecheadtstyle{\normalfont\centering\MakeUppercase}
\end{lcode}

    As another example, although I don't recommend this, you can draw a
horizontal line under section titles via:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\ruledsec}[1]{%
  \Large\bfseries\raggedright #1 \rule{\textwidth}{0.4pt}}
\setsecheadstyle{\ruledsec}
\end{lcode}


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\setafterSskip}\marg{skip} \\
\end{syntax}
If the value of the \meta{skip} length argument is positive it is the space 
to leave between the display heading and the following text. If it is negative,
then the heading will be runin and the value is the horizontal space
between the end of the heading and the following text.
The default \meta{skip} depends on the
particular level of heading, but for a \cmd{\section} (i.e., when |S = sec|)
it is |2.3ex plus .2ex|, 
and for a \cmd{\subparagraph} (i.e., |S = subpara|), which is a runin heading, it is
|-1em|.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\@hangfrom}\marg{stuff} \\
\cmd{\sethangfrom}\marg{code} \\
\end{syntax}
Internally all the titling macros use a macro called \cmd{\@hangfrom} which
by default makes multiline titles look like a hanging paragraph\index{paragraph!hanging}. The
default definition of \cmd{\@hangfrom} (in file \file{ltsect.dtx}) is
effectively:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\@hangfrom}[1]{\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{{#1}}%
  \hangindent \wd\@tempboxa\noindent\box\@tempboxa}
\end{lcode}
The argument is put into a box and its width is measured, then a hanging
paragraph\index{paragraph!hanging} is started with the argument as the first thing and second and
later lines indented by the argument's width.

The \cmd{\sethangfrom} macro redefines \cmd{\@hangfrom} to be \meta{code}.
For example, to have the titles set as block paragraphs\index{paragraph!block} instead of hanging
paragraphs\index{paragraph!hanging}, simply do:
\begin{lcode}
\sethangfrom{\noindent #1}
\end{lcode}
Note that you have to use |#1| at the position in the replacement
code for \cmd{\@hangfrom} where the argument to \cmd{\@hangfrom}
is to be located.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\@seccntformat}\marg{stuff} \\
\cmd{\setsecnumformat}\marg{code} \\
\end{syntax}
Internally all the titling macros use a macro called \cmd{\@seccntformat} 
which defines the formatting of sectional numbers in a title. Its
default definition (in file \file{ltsect.dtx}) is effectively:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\@seccntformat}[1]{\csname the#1\endcsname\quad}
\end{lcode}
which formats the sectional numbers as |\thesec...| with a space afterwards.
The command \cmd{\setsecnumformat} redefines \cmd{\@seccntformat} 
to be \meta{code}.
For example, to put a colon and space after the number
\begin{lcode}
\setsecnumformat{\csname the#1\endcsname:\quad}
\end{lcode}
Note that you have to use |#1| where you want the argument 
(sectional number) of \cmd{\@seccntformat} to go.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\hangsecnum} \\
\cmd{\defaultsecnum} \\
\end{syntax}
The macro \cmd{\hangsecnum} is a declaration that makes sectional numbers hang
in the margin\index{margin}. The macro \cmd{\defaultsecnum} is a declaration that reverses the
effect of \cmd{\hangsecnum}, that is, sectional numbers will be typeset in 
their familiar places.


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\Shook} \\
\cmd{\setShook}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
The macro \cmd{\Shook} is called immediately before the typesetting of the
title; its default definition does nothing. The macro \cmd{\setShook} 
redefines \cmd{\Shook} to be \meta{text}. You can use this hook, for example,
to insert a \cmd{\sethangfrom} or \cmd{\setsecnumformat} command into the
definition of a particular section division command.

\index{heading!sections|)}

\section{Heading styles for this chapter}

    As a reference, \tref{tab:secfonts} lists the default fonts used
for the sectional headings. These fonts are all bold but in different
sizes depending on the division level.

\begin{table}
\centering
\caption{Default fonts for sectional headings}\label{tab:secfonts}
\begin{tabular}{ll} \hline
\cmd{\partnamefont}       & |\huge\bfseries| \\
\cmd{\partnumfont}        & |\huge\bfseries| \\
\cmd{\parttitlefont}      & |\Huge\bfseries| \\
\cmd{\chapnamefont}       & |\normalfont\huge\bfseries| \\
\cmd{\chapnumfont}        & |\normalfont\huge\bfseries| \\
\cmd{\chaptitlefont}      & |\normalfont\Huge\bfseries| \\
\cmd{\secheadstyle}       & |\Large\bfseries\raggedright| \\
\cmd{\subsecheadstyle}    & |\large\bfseries\raggedright| \\
\cmd{\subsubsecheadstyle} & |\normalsize\bfseries\raggedright| \\
\cmd{\paraheadstyle}      & |\normalsize\bfseries| \\
\cmd{\subparaheadstyle}   & |\normalsize\bfseries| \\
\hline
\end{tabular}
\end{table}

\index{heading!chapter|(}
\index{chapterstyle|(}

    The commands described below have been put just before the start
of this chapter.

    For this chapter I have used sans fonts instead of bold fonts. The
commands to do this are shown below for chapters down to subsubsections.
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\chapnumfont}{\normalfont\huge\sffamily}
\renewcommand{\chaptitlefont}{\chapnumfont}
\setsecheadstyle{\Large\sffamily\raggedright}
\setsubsecheadstyle{\large\sffamily\raggedright}
\setsubsubsecheadstyle{\normalsize\sffamily\raggedright}
\end{lcode}

    The chapter heading is typeset like a section heading. I redefine
\cmd{\printchaptername} and \cmd{\chapternamenum} to do nothing, which
eliminates the printing of the chapter name and also anything
that may be between the name and the number. Changing \cmd{\afterchapternum}
to be just \cmd{\space} eliminates the vertical space that is normally
between the number and the title, and instead puts a normal word space 
between the number and the title.
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\printchaptername}{}
\renewcommand{\chapternamenum}{}
\renewcommand{\afterchapternum}{\space}
\end{lcode}

    Before the next chapter starts, I want to revert back to the default
divisional styles, so the following code is used at the end of
this chapter.
\begin{lcode}
\chapterstyle{default}
\setsecheadstyle{\Large\bfseries\raggedright}
\setsubsecheadstyle{\large\bfseries\raggedright}
\setsubsubsecheadstyle{\normalsize\bfseries\raggedright}
\end{lcode}
Calling |\chapterstyle{default}| deals with the chapter heading. The other
commands change the lower level fonts back to their default values.


\index{chapterstyle|)}
\index{heading!chapter|)}

\section{Footnotes and headers}

\index{footnote!in heading|(}

    With the sectioning commands the text of the required argument
\meta{title} is used as the text for the section title in the body
of the document.

    When the optional argument \meta{toc-title} is used in a sectioning
command it is moving and any fragile commands must be \cmd{\protect}ed,
while the \meta{title} argument is fixed. The \meta{toc-title} also
serves double duty:
\begin{enumerate}
\item It is used as the text of the title in the \toc;
\item It is used as the text in page headers\index{header}. 
\end{enumerate}

    If the optional argument is not present, then the \meta{title} is
moving and serves the triple duty of providing the text for the body and \toc{}
titles and for page headers\index{header}.

    Some folk feel an urge to add a footnote\index{footnote} to a sectional title, which
should be resisted. If their flesh is weak, then the optional argument must
be used and the \cmd{\footnote} attached to the required argument only.
If the optional argument is not used then the footnote mark\index{footnote!mark} and text is
likely to be scattered all over the place, on the section page, in the \toc,
on any page that includes \meta{title} in its header\index{header}. This is 
unacceptable to any reader. So, a footnoted\index{footnote} title should look like
this:
\begin{lcode}
\chapter[Title text]{Title text\footnote{Do you really have to do this?}}
\end{lcode}

\index{footnote!in heading|)}


\section{Pagination and folios}

    Every page in a LaTeX document is included in the 
pagination\index{pagination}. That is,
there is a number associated with every page and this is the value of
the \Icn{page} counter. This value can be changed at any time via either
\cmd{\setcounter} or \cmd{\addtocounter}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\pagenumbering}\marg{num-style} \\
\cmd{\pagenumbering*}\marg{num-style} \\
\end{syntax}
The macros \cmd{\pagenumbering} and \cmd{\pagenumbering*} cause 
the folios\index{folio} to be printed using
\meta{num-style} for the page number, where \meta{num-style} can be one of: 
\Itt{Alph}, \Itt{alph}, \Itt{arabic}, \Itt{Roman} or 
\Itt{roman} for uppercase and lowercase letters, arabic numerals, and
uppercase and lowercase Roman numerals, respectively. As there
are only 26~letters, \Itt{Alph} or \Itt{alph} can only be
used for a limited number of pages. Effectively, the macros redefine
\cmd{\thepage} to be |\num-style{page}|. 
Additionally, the \cmd{\pagenumbering}
command resets the \Icn{page} counter to one; the starred version does not 
change the counter.

    It is usual to reset the page number back to one each time the style
is changed, but sometimes it may be desireable to have a continuous sequence
of numbers irrespective of their displayed form, which is where
\cmd{\pagenumbering*} comes in handy.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\savepagenumber} \\
\cmd{\restorepagenumber} \\
\end{syntax}
The macro \cmd{\savepagenumber} saves the current page number, and the
macro \cmd{\restorepagenumber} sets the page number to the saved value.
This pair of commands may be used to apparently interrupt the pagination.
For example, perhaps some full page illustrations\index{illustration} will be electronically,
as opposed to physically,
tipped in\index{tip in} to the document and pagination is not required for these.
This could be done along the lines of:
\begin{lcode}
\clearpage          % get onto next page
\savepagenumber     % save the page number
\pagestyle{empty}   % no headers or footers
%% insert the illustrations
\clearpage
\pagestyle{...}
\restorepagenumber
...
\end{lcode}
If you try this sort of thing, you may have to adjust the restored page 
number by one.
\begin{lcode}
\restorepagenumber
% perhaps \addtocounter{page}{1} or \addtocounter{page}{-1}
\end{lcode}
Whether or not this will be necessary depends on the timing of the
|\...pagenumber| commands and TeX's decisions on page breaking.










%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\chapterstyle{default}
\setsecheadstyle{\Large\bfseries\raggedright}
\setsubsecheadstyle{\large\bfseries\raggedright}
\setsubsubsecheadstyle{\normalsize\bfseries\raggedright}
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%



\chapter{Paragraphs and lists}

%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\tightlists
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

    This chapter is typeset with the default sectional 
headings\index{heading!default}.

\section{Introduction}

    Within a sectional division the text is typically broken up into
paragraphs. Sometimes there may be text that is set off from the normal
paragraphing, like quotations\index{quotation} or lists.

\section{Paragraphs}

\index{paragraph|(}

    There are basically two parameters that control the appearance of normal
paragraphs.

\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\parindent} \lnc{\parskip} \\
\end{syntax}
 
    The length \lnc{\parindent} is the indentation of the first line of a
paragraph\index{paragraph!indentation} and the length \lnc{\parskip} is the vertical spacing between
paragraphs, as illustrated in \fref{fig:para}. The value of \lnc{\parskip}
is usually 0pt, and \lnc{\parindent} is usually defined in terms of ems so
that the actual indentation depends on the font being used. If \lnc{\parindent}
is set to a negative length, then the first line of the paragraphs will be 
`outdented' into the lefthand margin\index{margin}.

\begin{figure}
\centering
\drawparameterstrue
\drawparagraph
\caption{Paragraphing parameters}\label{fig:para}
\end{figure}

    A block paragraph\index{paragraph!block} is obtained by setting \lnc{\parindent} to 0em; 
\lnc{\parskip} should be set to some positive value so that there is some
space between paragraphs to enable them to be identified. Most typographers
heartily dislike block paragraphs, not only on aesthetical grounds but also
on practical grounds. Consider what happens if the last line of a block 
paragraph is full and also is the last line on the page. The following
block paragraph will start at the top of the next page but there will be
no identifiable space to indicate an inter-paragraph break.

    It is important to know that LaTeX typesets paragraph by paragraph. 
For example, the \lnc{\baselineskip} that is used for a paragraph is the value
that is in effect at the end of the paragraph, and the font size used for a
paragraph is according to the size declaration (e.g., \cmd{\large} or 
\cmd{\normalsize} or \cmd{\small}) in effect at the end of the paragraph.

\subsection{Hanging paragraphs}

\index{paragraph!hanging|(}

    A hanging paragraph is one where the length of the first few lines differs
from the length of the remaining lines. (A normal indented paragraph 
may be considered 
to be a special case of a hanging paragraph where `few = one'). 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\hangpara}\marg{indent}\marg{num} \\
\end{syntax}

\hangpara{3em}{-3}%
 Using \cmd{\hangpara} at the start of a paragraph will cause the paragraph
to be hung. If the length \meta{indent} is positive the lefthand end of the 
lines will be indented but if it is negative the righthand ends will be 
indented by the specified amount.
    If the number \meta{num}, say N, is is negative the first N lines of
the paragraph will be indented while if N is positive the N+1 th lines onwards
will be indented. This paragraph was set with |\hangpara{3em}{-3}|. There 
should be no space between the \cmd{\hangpara} command and the start of the
paragraph.

\begin{syntax}
\senv{hangparas}\marg{indent}\marg{num} text \eenv{hangparas} \\
\end{syntax}
    The \Ie{hangparas} environment is like the \cmd{\hangpara} command except
that every paragraph in the environment will be hung.

    The code implementing the hanging paragraphs is the same as for
the \Lpack{hanging} package~\cite{HANGING}. Examples of some uses
can be found in~\cite{TTC199}.


    As noted eleswhere the sectioning commands use the internal 
macro \cmd{\@hangfrom} as part of the formatting of the titles.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\hangfrom}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}

\hangfrom{Simple hung paragraphs }(like this one) can be specified
using the \cmd{\hangfrom} macro. The macro puts \meta{text} in a box
and then makes a hanging paragraph of the following material. This
paragraph commenced with \\
\verb?\hangfrom{Simple hung paragraphs }(like ...? \\
and you are now reading the result.


\index{paragraph!hanging|)}

\index{paragraph|)}

\section{Flush and ragged}

    Flushleft\index{flushleft} text has the lefthand end of the lines 
aligned vertically at the lefthand margin\index{margin} and
flushright\index{flushright} text has the righthand end of the lines 
aligned vertically at the righthand margin\index{margin}. The
opposites of these are raggedleft\index{raggedleft} text where the 
lefthand ends are not aligned
and raggedright\index{raggedright} where the righthand end of lines are 
not aligned. LaTeX normally typesets flushleft and flushright.

\begin{syntax}
\senv{flushleft} text \eenv{flushleft} \\
\senv{flushright} text \eenv{flushright} \\
\senv{center} text \eenv{center} \\
\end{syntax}
    Text in a \Ie{flushleft} environment is typeset flushleft and raggedright,
while in a \Ie{flushright} environment is typeset raggedleft and flushright.
In a \Ie{center} environment the text is set raggedleft and raggedright, and each
line is centered. A small vertical space is put before and after each of these
environments.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\raggedleft} \cmd{\raggedright} \cmd{\centering} \\
\end{syntax} 
    The \cmd{\raggedleft} declaration can be used to have text typeset
raggedleft and flushright, and similary the declaration \cmd{\raggedright}
causes typesetting to be flushleft and raggedright. The declaration 
\cmd{\centering} typesets raggedleft and raggedright with each line centered.
Unlike the environments, no additional space is added. 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\raggedyright}\oarg{space} \\
\lnc{\ragrparindent} \\
\end{syntax}
When using \cmd{\raggedright} in narrow columns the right hand edge tends to
be too ragged, and paragraphs are not indented. 
Text set \cmd{\raggedyright} usually fills more of the available
width and paragraphs are indented by \lnc{\ragrparindent}, which is initially
set to \lnc{\parindent}. The optional \meta{space} argument, whose default
is 2em, can be used to adjust the amount of raggedness. As examples:
\begin{lcode}
\raggedyright[0pt]   % typeset flushright 
\raggedyright[1fil]  % same as \raggedright
\raggedyright[0.5em] % less ragged than \raggedright
\end{lcode}

    Remember that LaTeX typesets on a per-paragraph basis, so that putting
the sequence of \cmd{\centering}, \cmd{\raggedleft} declarations in the same
paragraph\index{paragraph} will cause the entire paragraph to be typeset raggedleft and 
flushright --- the \cmd{\centering} declaration is not the one in effect 
at the end of the paragraph.

\section{Quotations}

    LaTeX provides two environments that are typically used for typesetting
quotations\index{quotation}.

\begin{syntax}
\senv{quote} text \eenv{quote} \\
\senv{quotation} text \eenv{quotation} \\
\end{syntax}
     In both of these environments the text is set flushleft and flushright
in a measure that is smaller than the normal textwidth. The only difference
between the two environments is that paragraphs\index{paragraph!indentation} are not indented in the \Ie{quote}
environment but normal paragraphing is used in the \Ie{quotation} environment.

\section{Changing the textwidth}

    The \Ie{quote} and \Ie{quotation} environments both locally change the textwidth,
or more precisely, they temporarily increase the left and right margins\index{margin} by 
equal amounts.
Generally speaking it is not a good idea to change the textwidth but sometimes
it may be called for.

    The commands and environment described below are similar to those
in the \Lpack{chngpage} package~\cite{CHNGPAGE}, but do differ in some 
respects.

\begin{syntax}
\senv{adjustwith}\marg{left}\marg{right} text \eenv{adjustwith} \\
\senv{adjustwith*}\marg{left}\marg{right} text \eenv{adjustwith*} \\
\end{syntax}
The \Ie{adjustwidth} environment temporarily adds the length \meta{left}
to the lefthand margin\index{margin} and \meta{right} to the righthand margin\index{margin}. That is,
a positive length value increases the margin\index{margin} and hence reduces the textwidth,
and a negative value reduces the margin\index{margin} and increases the textwidth. The
\Ie{quotation} environment is roughly equivalent to
\begin{lcode}
\begin{adjustwidth}{2.5em}{2.5em}
\end{lcode}

    The starred version of the environment, \Ie{adjustwidth*},
 is only useful if the left and right
margin\index{margin} adjustments are different. The starred version checks the page number
and if it is odd then adjusts the left (spine) and right (outer) margins\index{margin} 
by \meta{left} and \meta{right} respectively; if the page number is even 
(a verso page) it adjusts the left (outer) and right (spine) margins\index{margin} by
\meta{right} and \meta{left} respectively.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\strictpagechecktrue} \cmd{\strictpagecheckfalse} \\
\end{syntax}
Odd/even page checking may be either strict (\cmd{\strictpagechecktrue})
or lazy (\cmd{\strictpagecheckfalse}). Lazy checking works most of the time
but if it fails at any point then the strict checking should be used.

    As an example, if a figure\index{figure} is wider than the textwidth it will stick out
into the righthand margin\index{margin}. It may be desireable to have any wide figure\index{figure}
stick out into the \foredge{} margin\index{margin} where there is usually more room than at
the spine margin\index{margin}. This can be accomplished by
\begin{lcode}
\begin{figure}
\centering
\strictpagechecktrue
\begin{adjustwidth*}{0em}{-3em}
% the illustration
\caption{...}
\end{adjustwidth*}
\end{figure}
\end{lcode}

    A real example in this manual is \tref{tab:fpp} on \pref{tab:fpp},
which is wider than the typeblock\index{typeblock}. In that case I just centered it by
using \Ie{adjustwidth} to decrease each margin\index{margin} equally. In brief, like
\begin{lcode}
\begin{table}
\begin{adjustwidth}{-1cm}{-1cm}
\centering
...
\end{adjustwidth}
\end{table}
\end{lcode}

    Note that the \Ie{adjustwidth} environment applies to complete paragraphs;
you can't change the width of part of a paragraph\index{paragraph} 
except for hanging paragraphs\index{paragraph!hanging} or more esoterically via \cmd{\parshape}. 
Further, if the adjusted paragraph crosses a
page boundary the margin\index{margin} changes are constant; a paragraph that is, say, 
wider at the right on the first page will also be wider at the right as it
continues onto the following page.

    The \Ie{center} environment horizontally centers its contents
with respect to the typeblock\index{typeblock}. 
Sometimes you may wish to horizontally center some text with respect
to the physical page, for example when typesetting a 
colophon\index{colophon} which may look odd centered with respect
to the (unseen) typeblock\index{typeblock}.

    The calculation of the necessary changes to the spine and \foredge{}
margins\index{margin} are simple. Using the same symbols as earlier in 
\S\ref{sec:typeblock2} ($P_{w}$ and
$B_{w}$ are the width of the trimmed page and the typeblock\index{typeblock}, respectively;
$S$ and $E$ are the spine and \foredge{} margins\index{margin}, respectively) then
the amount $M$ to be added to the spine margin\index{margin} and subtracted from the
\foredge{} margin\index{margin} is calculated as:
\begin{displaymath}
 M = 1/2(P_{w} - B_{w}) - S
\end{displaymath}

For example,
assume that the \lnc{\textwidth} is 5 inches and the \lnc{\spinemargin}
is 1 inch. On US letterpaper\index{paper!size!letterpaper} (\lnc{\paperwidth} is 8.5 inches) the
\foredge{} margin\index{margin} is then 2.5 inches, and 0.75 inches\footnote{On A4\index{paper!size!A4}
paper the result would be different.}  must
be added to the spine margin\index{margin} and subtracted from the \foredge{} to
center the typeblock\index{typeblock}. 
The \Ie{adjustwidth} environment can be used to make the (temporary) change.
\begin{lcode}
\begin{adjustwidth*}{0.75in}{-0.75in} ...
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\calccentering}\marg{length} \\
\end{syntax}
 If you don't want to do the above calculations by hand, 
\cmd{\calccentering} will do it for you. 
The \meta{length}
argument must be the name of a pre-existing length command, 
including the backslash. After calling 
|\calccentering|, \meta{length} is the amount to be added to the
spine margin\index{margin} and subtracted from the foredge margin\index{margin} to center the typeblock\index{typeblock}.
An example usage is
\begin{lcode}
\calccentering{\mylength}
\begin{adjustwidth*}{\mylength}{-\mylength}
text horizontally centered on the physical page
\end{adjustwidth*}
\end{lcode}

   You do not necessarily have to define a new length for the purposes
of \cmd{\calccentering}. Any existing length will do, such as
\lnc{\unitlength}, provided it will be otherwise unused between performing
the calculation and changing the margins\index{margin} (and that you can, if necessary
reset it to its original value --- the default value for \lnc{\unitlength}
is 1pt). 

\section{Lists}

\index{list|(}

    Standard LaTeX provides 4 kinds of lists. There is a general \Ie{list}
environment which you can use to define your own particular kind of list,
and the \Ie{description}, \Ie{itemize} and \Ie{enumerate} lists (which are internally
defined in terms of the general \Ie{list} environment).

    This class provides the normal \Ie{description} list but the \Ie{itemize} and
\Ie{enumerate} lists are extended versions of the normal ones.

\begin{syntax}
\senv{description} \cmd{\item}\oarg{label} ... \eenv{description} \\
\cmd{\descriptionlabel}\meta{style} \\
\end{syntax}
In a \Ie{description} list the style of the \meta{label} is given by the
\meta{style} argument of the \cmd{\descriptionlabel} command. The default
definition is
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\descriptionlabel}[1]{\hspace\labelsep
                                   \normalfont\bfseries #1}
\end{lcode}
which gives a bold label. To have, for example, a sans label instead, do
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand*{\descriptionlabel}[1]{\hspace\labelsep
                                     \normalfont\sffamily #1}
\end{lcode}

    The \Ie{itemize} and \Ie{enumerate} environments below are based on
the \Lpack{enumerate} package~\cite{ENUMERATE}.

\begin{syntax}
\senv{itemize}\oarg{mark} \cmd{\item} ... \eenv{itemize} \\
\end{syntax}
The normal markers for \cmd{\item}s in an \Ie{itemize} list are: 
\begin{enumerate}
\item bullet (\textbullet |\textbullet|), 
\item bold en-dash ({\normalfont\bfseries \textendash} |\bfseries\textendash|),
\item centered asterisk (\textasteriskcentered |\textasteriskcentered|), and
\item centered dot (\textperiodcentered |\textperiodcentered|).
\end{enumerate}
The optional \meta{mark} argument can be used to specify the marker for the
list items in a particular list. If for some reason you wanted to use a 
pilcrow symbol as the item marker for a particular list you could do
\begin{lcode}
\begin{itemize}[\P]
\item ...
...
\end{lcode}



\begin{syntax}
\senv{enumerate}\oarg{style} \cmd{\item} ... \eenv{enumerate} \\
\end{syntax}
The normal markers for, say, the third item in an \Ie{enumerate} list are: 
3., c., iii., and C. The optional \meta{style} argument can be used to
specify the style used to typeset the item counter. An occurrence of
one of the special characters |A|, |a|, |I|, |i|
or |1| in \meta{style} specifies that the counter will be typeset using
uppercase letters (|A|), lowercase letters (|a|), 
uppercase Roman numerals (|I|),
lowercase Roman numerals (|i|), or arabic numerals (|1|). These characters
may be surrounded by any LaTeX commands or characters, but if so the special
characters must be put inside braces (e.g., |{a}|) if they are to be 
considered as ordinary characters instead of as special styling characters.
 For example, to have the
counter typeset as a lowercase Roman numeral followed by a single parenthesis
\begin{lcode}
\begin{enumerate}[i)] 
...
\end{lcode}

\index{list!tight|(}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\tightlists} \cmd{\defaultlists} \\
\end{syntax}
The normal LaTeX \Ie{description}, \Ie{itemize} and \Ie{enumerate} lists have an open
look about them when they are typeset as there is significant vertical space
between the items in the lists. After the declaration \cmd{\tightlists} is
issued, the extra vertical spacing between the list items is deleted. The open
list appearance is used after the \cmd{\defaultlists} declaration is issued.
These declarations, if used, must come \emph{before} the relevant list 
environment(s).

    The class initially sets \cmd{\defaultlists}. If you had noticed that
the lists in this chapter have a different appearance than those in earlier
chapters (or even if you hadn't noticed) then that is because 
the declaration \cmd{\tightlists} was put at the start of this chapter.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\firmlist} \cmd{\tightlist} \\
\end{syntax}
The command \cmd{\firmlist} or \cmd{\tightlist} can be used immediately
after the start of a list environment to reduce the vertical space within
that list. The \cmd{\tightlist} removes all the spaces while the
\cmd{\firmlist} produces a list that still has some space but not as much
as in an ordinary list.

\index{list!tight|)}


\begin{figure}
\centering
\drawparameterstrue
\drawlist
\caption{The layout parameters for general lists}\label{fig:listlay}
\end{figure}

\index{list!new|(}

\begin{syntax}
\senv{list}\marg{default-label}\marg{code} items \eenv{list} \\
\end{syntax}
LaTeX's list environments are defined in terms of a general \Ie{list}
environment; some other environments, such as the \Ie{quote}, \Ie{quotation}
and \Ie{adjustwidth} are also defined in terms of a \Ie{list}.
Figure~\ref{fig:listlay} shows the parameters controlling the layout
of the \Ie{list} environment.

    The \Ie{list} environment takes two arguments. The \meta{default-label}
argument is the code that should be used when the \cmd{\item} macro is
used without its optional \meta{label} argument. For lists like \Ie{enumerate}
this is specified but often it is left empty, such as for the \Ie{adjustwidth}
environment.

    The \meta{code} argument is typically used for setting the particular
values of the list layout parameters. When defining your own types of lists
it is advisable to set each of the parameters unless you know that the default
values are suitable for your purposes. These parameters can all be modified
with either the \cmd{\setlength} or \cmd{\addtolength} commands.

    As an example, here is the specification for a description-like list
that uses an italic rather than bold font for the items, and is somewhat
tighter than the normal \Ie{description} list.

\begin{lcode}
%%%%% An italic and tighter description environment
\newcommand{\itlabel}[1]{\hspace\labelsep\normalfont\itshape #1}
\newenvironment{itdesc}{%
  \list{}{%
    \setlength{\labelsep}{0.5em}
    \setlength{\itemindent}{0pt}
    \setlength{\leftmargin}{\parindent} 
    \setlength{\labelwidth}{\leftmargin}
    \addtolength{\labelwidth}{-\labelsep}
    \setlength{\listparindent}{\parindent}
    \setlength{\parsep}{\parskip}
    \setlength{\itemsep}{0.5\onelineskip}
    \let\makelabel\itlabel}}{\endlist}
\end{lcode}

    This gets used like any other list:
\begin{lcode}
\begin{itdesc}
\item[label] ....
\end{itdesc}
\end{lcode}

Here is another kind of list called \Ie{aglossary} that could be used for 
a glossary or other similar kind of listing.
\begin{lcode}
% Glossary list
\newenvironment{aglossary}%
               {\begin{list}{}% empty label
                            {\setlength{\topsep}{\baselineskip}
                             \setlength{\partopsep}{0pt}
                             \setlength{\itemsep}{0.5\baselineskip}
                             \setlength{\parsep}{0pt}
                             \setlength{\leftmargin}{2em}
                             \setlength{\rightmargin}{0em}
                             \setlength{\listparindent}{1em}
                             \setlength{\itemindent}{0em}
                             \setlength{\labelwidth}{0em}
                             \setlength{\labelsep}{2em}}}%
               {\end{list}}
\newcommand{\gloss}[1]{\item[#1]\mbox{}\\\nopagebreak}
\end{lcode}
In this case it gets used like this
\begin{lcode}
\begin{aglossary}
\gloss{TERM 1} definition
\gloss{TERM 2} ...
\end{aglossary}
\end{lcode}

\index{list!new|)}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\zerotrivseps} \cmd{\restoretrivseps} \cmd{\savetrivseps} \\
\end{syntax}
Several environments, such as \Ie{center}, are defined in terms of a
\Ie{trivlist} (a very simple list form). There is vertical space
before and after such an environment. If you don't want this, then
the declaration \cmd{\zerotrivseps} eliminates such spaces. You can think
of it being defined like:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\zerotrivseps}{%
  \setlength{\topsep}{0pt}%
  \setlength{\partopsep}{0pt}}
\end{lcode}
To restore the spacing call the \cmd{\restoretrivseps} declaration. 
The command \cmd{\savetrivseps} stores the \lnc{\topsep} and
\lnc{\partopsep} values, and \cmd{\restoretrivseps} sets them to
whatever values were stored. The class itself calls \cmd{\savetrivseps}
to keep the default values. 



\index{list|)}



%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\chapterstyle{section}
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\chapter{Tops and tails} \label{chap:topsandtails}

This chapter uses the \cstyle{section} chapterstyle.

 \section{Introduction}

    The following discussions are focussed on the elements at the start
and end of a document; the Table of Contents at the start and the Index\index{index}
at the end.
    The functionality described is equivalent to the combination
of the \Lpack{tocloft} and \Lpack{tocbibind} 
packages~\cite{TOCLOFT,TOCBIBIND}

 In the standard classes the typographic design of the Table of Contents
 (\toc), the List of Figures (\lof) and List of Tables (\lot) is fixed or,
 more precisely, it is buried within the class definitions.

 \section{LaTeX's \prtoc{} methods}

    This is a general description of how LaTeX does the processing
 for a Table of Contents (\toc). As the processing for List of Figures 
(\lof) and
 List of Tables (\lot) is similar I will just
 discuss the \toc.

    First of all, remember that each sectional division has an
associated level as listed in \tref{tab:seclevels} on 
\pref{tab:seclevels}. LaTeX will not typeset an entry in the \toc{}
unless the value of the \Icn{tocdepth} counter is equal to or greater
than the level of the entry.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\maxtocdepth}\marg{secname} \\
\cmd{\settocdepth}\marg{secname} \\
\end{syntax}
The \Lclass{memoir} class \cmd{\maxtocdepth} command sets the maximum 
allowable value
for the \Icn{tocdepth} counter. If used, the command must appear
before the \cmd{\tableofcontents} command. By default, the class
sets |\maxtocdepth{section}|.

    The \Lclass{memoir} class command \cmd{\settocdepth} is somewhat
analagous to the \cmd{\setsecnumdepth} command 
described in \S\ref{sec:secnumbers}.
It sets the value of the \Icn{tocdepth} counter and puts it into
the \toc{} to (temporarily) modify what will appear. 
The command can only be used after the preamble\index{preamble}
but may be used before calling the \cmd{\tableofcontents}.
The \cmd{\settocdepth} and \cmd{\maxtocdepth} macros are from the 
\Lpack{tocvsec2} package~\cite{TOCVSEC2}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\addcontentsline}\marg{file}\marg{kind}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
    LaTeX generates a \file{.toc} file if the document contains a
 \cmd{\tableofcontents} command. The sectioning 
 commands\footnote{For figures and tables it is the 
%% \texttt{\bs caption} command
 \cmd{\caption} command
 that populates the \file{.lof} and \file{.lot} files.}
 put entries into the \file{.toc} file by calling the LaTeX
 \cmd{\addcontentsline} 
 command, where \meta{file} is the file extension (e.g., |toc|),
 \meta{kind} is the kind of entry (e.g., |section| or |subsection|),
 and \meta{text} is the (numbered) title text. In the cases where
 there is a number, the \meta{title} argument is given in the
 form |{\numberline{number} title-text}|.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\phantomsection} \\
\end{syntax}
\Note{} The \Lpack{hyperref} package~\cite{HYPERREF} appears to dislike 
authors using 
 \cmd{\addcontentsline}. To get it to work properly with \Lpack{hyperref}
 you normally have to put \cmd{\phantomsection} (a macro defined within
this class and the \Lpack{hyperref} package) immediately 
 before \cmd{\addcontentsline}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\contentsline}\marg{kind}\marg{text}\marg{page} \\
\end{syntax}
     The \cmd{\addcontentsline} command writes an entry to the given file
 in the form: \\
 \cmd{\contentsline}\marg{kind}\marg{text}\marg{page} \\
 where \meta{page} is the page number.
     For each \meta{kind}, LaTeX provides a command: \\
 \cmd{\l@kind}\marg{title}\marg{page} \\
which performs the actual
 typesetting of the \cmd{\contentsline} entry. 


\begin{figure}
\setlayoutscale{0.8}
\drawtoc
\caption{Layout of a \prtoc{} (\prlof, \prlot) entry} \label{fig:ltoc}
\end{figure}

 
\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\@pnumwidth}\marg{length} \\
\cmd{\@tocrmarg}\marg{length} \\
\cmd{\@dotsep}\marg{number} \\
\end{syntax}
 The general layout of a
 typeset entry is illustrated in \fref{fig:ltoc}. There are three
 internal LaTeX commands that are used in the typesetting. The page
 number is typeset flushright in a box of width \cmd{\@pnumwidth}, and the box
 is at the righthand margin\index{margin}. If the page number is too long to fit into
 the box it will stick out into the righthand margin\index{margin}. The title text
 is indented from the righthand margin\index{margin} by an amount given by \cmd{\@tocrmarg}.
 Note that \cmd{\@tocrmarg} should be greater than \cmd{\@pnumwidth}. Some
 entries are typeset with a dotted leader between the end of the title
 title text and the righthand margin\index{margin} indentation. The distance, in
 \emph{math units}\footnote{There are 18mu to 1em.} between the dots
 in the leader is given by the value of \cmd{\@dotsep}. In the standard
 classes the same values are used for the \toc, \lof{} and the \lot.

    The standard values for these internal commands are:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item |\@pnumwidth| = 1.55em
 \item |\@tocrmarg| = 2.55em 
 \item |\@dotsep| = 4.5
 \end{itemize}
 The values can be changed by using \cmd{\renewcommand}, in spite of the
 fact that the first two appear to be lengths.

    Dotted leaders are not available for Part\index{part} and Chapter\index{chapter} \toc{} entries

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\numberline}\marg{number} \\
\end{syntax}
    Each \cmd{\l@kind} macro is responsible for setting the general 
 \textit{indent} from the lefthand margin\index{margin}, and the \textit{numwidth}.
 The \cmd{\numberline} macro is responsible for typesetting
 the number flushleft in a box of width 
 \textit{numwidth}. If the number is too long for the box then it will
 protrude into the title text. The title text is indented by
 (\textit{indent + numwidth}) from the lefthand margin\index{margin}. That is, the title
 text is typeset in a block of width \\
 (|\linewidth| - \textit{indent} - \textit{numwidth} - |\@tocrmarg|). 

 \begin{table}
 \centering
 \caption[Indents and Numwidths]{Indents and Numwidths (in ems)} \label{tab:indents}
 \begin{tabular}{lcrrrr} \hline
 Entry & Level & \multicolumn{2}{c}{Standard} & \multicolumn{2}{c}{\Lclass{memoir} class} \\
       &       & indent & numwidth & indent & numwidth \\ \hline
 part          & -1 & 0    & --- & 0    & --- \\
 chapter       & 0  & 0    & 1.5 & 0    & 1.5 \\
 section       & 1  & 1.5  & 2.3 & 1.5  & 2.3 \\
 subsection    & 2  & 3.8  & 3.2 & 3.8  & 3.2 \\
 subsubsection & 3  & 7.0  & 4.1 & 7.0  & 4.1 \\
 paragraph     & 4  & 10.0 & 5.0 & 10.0 & 5.0 \\
 subparagraph  & 5  & 12.0 & 6.0 & 12.0 & 6.0 \\
 figure/table  & (1) & 1.5 & 2.3 & 0    & 1.5 \\ 
 subfigure/table & (2) & ---& ---& 1.5  & 2.3 \\ 
\hline
 \end{tabular}
 \end{table}

 Table~\ref{tab:indents} lists the standard values for the \textit{indent}
 and \textit{numwidth}. There is no explicit \textit{numwidth} for a
 part\index{part}; instead a gap of 1em is put between the number and the title text.
 Note that for a sectioning command the values
 depend on whether or not the document class provides the \cmd{\chapter}
 command. Also, which somewhat surprises me, the table\index{table} and figure\index{figure} entries
 are all indented.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\@dottedtocline}\marg{level}\marg{indent}\marg{numwidth} \\
\end{syntax}
    Most of the |\l@kind| commands are defined in terms of the
 \cmd{\@dottedtocline} command. This command takes three arguments: 
the \meta{level} argument is the level as shown in \tref{tab:indents},
and \meta{indent} and \meta{numwidth} are the \textit{indent} and 
\textit{numwidth} as illustrated in \fref{fig:ltoc}.
 For example, one definition of the |\l@section| command is: \\
 |\newcommand*{\l@section}{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}| \\
 If it is necessary to change the default typesetting of the entries,
 then it is usually necessary to change these definitions, but this
class gives you handles to easily alter things without
 having to know the LaTeX internals.

    You can use the \cmd{\addcontentsline} command to add 
\cmd{\contentsline} commands to a file. 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\addtocontents}\marg{file}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
    LaTeX also provides the \cmd{\addtocontents}
 command that will insert \meta{text} into \meta{file}. You can use
 this for adding extra text and/or macros into the file, for processing
 when the file is typeset by \cmd{\tableofcontents} (or whatever other
 command is used for \meta{file} processing, such as \cmd{\listoftables}
 for a \file{.lot} file).

 As \cmd{\addcontentsline} and \cmd{\addtocontents} write their arguments to a
 file, any fragile commands used in their arguments must be \cmd{\protect}ed.
 
    You can make certain adjustments to the \toc{} etc., layout by modifying
some of the above macros. Some examples are:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item If your page numbers stick out into the righthand margin\index{margin}
  \begin{lcode}
  \renewcommand{\@pnumwidth}{3em} 
  \renewcommand{\@tocrmarg}{4em}
  \end{lcode}
 but using lengths appropriate to your document.

 \item To have the (sectional) titles in the \toc, etc., typeset ragged 
right with no  hyphenation
 \begin{lcode}
 \renewcommand{\@tocrmarg}{2.55em plus1fil}
 \end{lcode}
 where the value |2.55em| can be changed for whatever margin\index{margin} space you want.

 \item The dots in the leaders can be eliminated by increasing |\@dotsep|
 to a large value:
  \begin{lcode}
  \renewcommand{\@dotsep}{10000}
  \end{lcode}

 \item To have dotted leaders in your \toc{} and \lof{} but not in your \lot:
 \begin{lcode}
 ...
 \tableofcontents
 \makeatletter \renewcommand{\@dotsep}{10000} \makeatother
 \listoftables
 \makeatletter \renewcommand{\@dotsep}{4.5} \makeatother
 \listoffigures
 ...
 \end{lcode}

 \item To add a horizontal line across the whole width of the \toc{} below 
 an entry for a Part\index{part}:
 \begin{lcode}
 \part{Part title}
 \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\mbox{}\protect\hrulefill\par}
 \end{lcode}
 As  said earlier any fragile commands in \cmd{\addtocontents} and 
\cmd{\addcontentsline} 
 their arguments must be protected
 by preceding each fragile command with \cmd{\protect}. 
 The result of the example above
 would be the following two lines in the \file{.toc} file (assuming that it
 is the second Part and is on page 34):
 \begin{lcode}
 \contentsline {part}{II\hspace {1em}Part title}{34}
 \mbox {}\hrulefill \par
 \end{lcode}
 If the \cmd{\protect}s were not used, then the second line would 
instead be:
 \begin{lcode}
 \unhbox \voidb@x \hbox {}\unhbox \voidb@x \leaders \hrule \hfill \kern \z@ \par
 \end{lcode}

\item To change the level of entries printed in the \toc{} (for example
      when normally subsections are listed in the \toc{} but for
      appendices\index{appendix} only the main title is required)
  \begin{lcode}
  \appendix
  \settocdepth{chapter}
  \chapter{First appendix}
  ...
  \end{lcode}

 \end{itemize}
 Remember, if you are modifying any command that includes an |@| sign then this
 must be done in either a \file{.sty} file or if in the document itself
 it must be 
 surrounded by \cmd{\makeatletter} and \cmd{\makeatother}. For example, if you
 want to modify \cmd{\@dotsep} in the preamble\index{preamble} to your document you have
 to do it like this:
 \begin{lcode}
 \makeatletter
 \renewcommand{\@dotsep}{9.0}
 \makeatother
 \end{lcode}
 

 \section{The class \prtoc{} methods} 

  The class provides various means of changing the look of the \toc, etc.,
without having to go through some of the above. 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\tableofcontents} \cmd{\tableofcontents*} \\
\cmd{\listoffigures} \cmd{\listoffigures*} \\
\cmd{\listoftables} \cmd{\listoftables*} \\
\end{syntax}
 The \toc, \lof, and \lot{} are printed at the point in the document where
 these commands are called, as per normal LaTeX. However, there are
 two differences between the standard LaTeX behaviour and the behaviour
 with this class. In the standard LaTeX classes
 that have \cmd{\chapter} headings\index{heading}, the \toc, \lof{} and \lot{} each appear on
 a new page. With this class they do not necessarily
 start new pages; if you want them to be on new pages you may have to
 specifically issue an appropriate command beforehand. For example:
 \begin{lcode}
  ...
 \clearpage
 \tableofcontents
 \clearpage
 \listoftables
 ...
 \end{lcode}
Also, the unstarred versions of the commands put their headings\index{heading} into the
\toc, while the starred versions do not.

 \subsection{Changing the titles} \label{sec:titles}

    Commands are provided for controlling the appearance of the
\toc, \lof{} and \lot{} titles. 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\contentsname} \cmd{\listfigurename} \cmd{\listtablename} \\
\end{syntax}
Following LaTeX custom, the title texts are the values
 of the \cmd{\contentsname}, \cmd{\listfigurename} and \cmd{\listtablename}
 commands.

 The commands for controlling the typesetting of the \toc, \lof{} and \lot{} titles
all follow a similar pattern So for convenience (certainly mine, 
and hopefully yours)
 in the following
 descriptions I will use |Z| to stand for `toc' or `lof' or `lot'. For
 example, |\Zmark| stands for |\tocmark| or |\lofmark| or |\lotmark|.

    The code for typesetting the \toc{} title looks like:
\begin{lcode}
\tocheadstart
\printtoctitle{\contentsname}
\tocmark
\thispagestyle{chapter}
\aftertoctitle
\end{lcode}
where the macros are described below.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\Zheadstart} \\
\end{syntax}
This macro is called before the title is actually printed.
Its default definition is
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\Zheadstart}{\chapterheadstart}
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\printZtitle}\marg{title} \\
\end{syntax}
The title is typeset via \cmd{\printZtitle}, which defaults to
using \cmd{\printchaptertitle} for the actual typesetting. 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\Zmark} \\
\end{syntax}
 These macros sets the appearance of the running heads on the \toc, \lof, and
 \lot{} pages. The default definition is equivalent to:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommmand{\Zmark}{\@mkboth{\...name}{\...name}}
\end{lcode}
where |\...name| is \cmd{\contentsname} or \cmd{\listfigurename} or
\cmd{\listtablename} as appropriate. You probably don't need to change these, and
in any case they may well be changed by the particular \cmd{\pagestyle} in
use.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\afterZtitle} \\
\end{syntax}
 This macro is called after the title is typeset and by
default it is defined to be \cmd{\afterchaptertitle}.

    Essentially, the \toc, \lof{} and \lot{} titles use the same format
as the chapter titles, and will be typeset according to the current
chapterstyle. You can modify their appearance by either using a
different chapterstyle for them than for the actual chapters, or
by changing some of the macros. As examples:
\begin{itemize}
\item Doing
      \begin{lcode}
      \renewcommand{\printZtitle}[1]{\hfill\Large\itshape #1}
      \end{lcode}
      will print the title right justified in a Large italic font.
\item For a Large bold centered title you can do
      \begin{lcode}
      \renewcommand{\printZtitle}[1]{\centering\Large\bfseries #1}
      \end{lcode}
\item Writing
      \begin{lcode}
      \renewcommand{\afterZtitle}{\thispagestyle{empty}\afterchaptertitle}
      \end{lcode}
      will result in the first page of the listing using the \pstyle{empty}
      pagestyle instead of the default \pstyle{chapter} pagestyle.
\item Doing
      \begin{lcode}
      \renewcommand{\afterZtitle}{%
        \par\nobreak \mbox{}\hfill{\normalfont Page}\par\nobreak}
      \end{lcode}
      will put the word `Page' flushright on the line following
      the title.
\end{itemize}




 \subsection{Typesetting the entries} \label{sec:entries}

 Commands are also provided to enable finer control over the typesetting
 of the different kinds of entries. The parameters defining the default
 layout of the entries are illustrated as part of the \Lpack{layouts}
 package~\cite{LAYOUTS} or in~\cite[page 34]{GOOSSENS94}, and are repeated in
 \fref{fig:ltoc}.

\begin{syntax}
 \cmd{\cftdot}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
  In the default \toc{} typsetting only the more minor entries have dotted
 leader lines between the sectioning title and the page number. The
 class provides for general leaders for all entries.
 The `dot' in a leader is given by the value of \cmd{\cftdot}. Its default
 definition is |\newcommand{\cftdot}{.}| which gives the default
 dotted leader. By changing \cmd{\cftdot} you can use symbols other than
 a period in the leader. For example 
 \begin{lcode}
 \renewcommand{\cftdot}{\ensuremath{\ast}}
 \end{lcode}
 will result in a dotted leader using asterisks as the symbol.

\begin{syntax}
 \cmd{\cftdotsep} \\
 \cmd{\cftnodots} \\
\end{syntax}
    Each kind of entry can control the separation between the dots
 in its leader (see below). For consistency though, all dotted leaders
 should use the same spacing. The macro \cmd{\cftdotsep} specifies the
 default spacing. 
 However, if the separation is too large
 then no dots will be actually typeset. The macro \cmd{\cftnodots} is
 a separation value that is `too large'. 

\begin{syntax}
 \cmd{\setpnumwidth}\marg{length} \\
 \cmd{\setrmarg}\marg{length} \\
\end{syntax}
 The page numbers are typeset in a fixed width box. The command
 \cmd{\setpnumwidth} can be used to change the width
 of the box (LaTeX 's internal \cmd{\@pnumwidth}). 
 The title texts will end before reaching the righthand margin\index{margin}.
 \cmd{\setrmarg} can be used to set this distance 
 (LaTeX 's internal \cmd{\@tocrmarg}).
 Note that the length used in \cmd{\setrmarg} should be greater
 than the length set in \cmd{\setpnumwidth}. These values should remain
 constant in any given document.

    This manual requires more space for the page numbers than the default,
so the following was set in the preamble\index{preamble}:
\begin{lcode}
\setpnumwidth{2.55em}
\setrmarg{3.55em}
\end{lcode}


\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\cftparskip} \\
\end{syntax}
 Normally the \lnc{\parskip} in the \toc, etc., is zero. This may be changed
 by changing the length \lnc{\cftparskip}. Note that the current value
 of \lnc{\cftparskip} is used for the \toc, \lof{} and \lot, but you can change
 the value before calling \cmd{\tableofcontents} or \cmd{\listoffigures} or
 \cmd{\listoftables} if one or other of these should have different values
 (which is not a good idea).


    Again for convenience, in the following I will use |X| to stand for any
of the following:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item |part| for |\part| titles
 \item |chapter| for |\chapter| titles
 \item |section| for |\section| titles
 \item |subsection| for |\subsection| titles
 \item |subsubsection| for |\subsubsection| titles
 \item |paragraph| for |\paragraph| titles
 \item |subparagraph| for |\subparagraph| titles
 \item |figure| for figure |\caption| titles
 \item |subfigure| for subfigure |\caption| titles
 \item |table| for table |\caption| titles
 \item |subtable| for subtable |\caption| titles
 \end{itemize}


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\cftchapterbreak} \\
\end{syntax}
When \cmd{\l@chapter} starts to typeset a \cmd{\chapter} entry in the
\toc{} the first thing it does is to call the macro \cmd{\cftchapterbreak}.
This is defined as:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\cftchapterbreak}{\addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}}
\end{lcode}
which encourages a page break before rather than after the entry. As usual,
you can change \cmd{\cftchapterbreak} to do other things that you feel might
be useful.

\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\cftbeforeXskip} \\
\end{syntax}
 This length controls the vertical space before an entry. It can be changed
 by using \cmd{\setlength}. 

\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\cftXindent} \\
\end{syntax}
 This length controls the indentation of an entry from the left margin\index{margin} 
 (\textit{indent} in \fref{fig:ltoc}). It
 can be changed using \cmd{\setlength}. 

\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\cftXnumwidth} \\
\end{syntax}
 This length controls the space allowed for typesetting title numbers 
 (\textit{numwidth} in \fref{fig:ltoc}). It can
 be changed using \cmd{\setlength}. Second and subsequent lines of a multiline
 title will be indented by this amount.

 The remaining commands are related to the specifics of typesetting
 an entry.
 This is a simplified pseudo-code version for the typesetting of numbered 
 and unnumbered entries.
 \begin{lcode}
 {\cftXfont {\cftXpresnum SNUM\cftXaftersnum\hfil} \cftXaftersnumb TITLE}
         {\cftXleader}{\cftXpagefont PAGE}\cftXafterpnum\par

 {\cftXfont TITLE}{\cftXleader}{\cftXpagefont PAGE}\cftXafterpnum\par
 \end{lcode}
 where |SNUM| is the section number, |TITLE| is the title text and |PAGE| 
 is the page number. In the numbered entry the pseudo-code \\
 |{\cftXpresnum SNUM\cftaftersnum\hfil}| \\
 is typeset within a box of width \lnc{\cftXnumwidth}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\cftXfont} \\
\end{syntax}
 This controls the appearance of the title (and its preceding number, 
 if any). It may be changed using \cmd{\renewcommand}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\cftXpresnum} \cmd{\cftXaftersnum} \cmd{\cftXaftersnumb} \\
\end{syntax}
 The section number is typeset within a box of width \lnc{\cftXnumwidth}.
 Within the box the macro \cmd{\cftXpresnum} is first called, then the
 number is typeset, and the \cmd{\cftXaftersnum}
 macro is called after the number is typeset. The last command
 within the box is \cmd{\hfil} to make the box contents flushleft.
 After the box is
 typeset the \cmd{\cftXaftersnumb} macro is called before typesetting
 the title text. All three of these can be changed by \cmd{\renewcommand}.
 By default they are defined to do nothing.


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\partnumberline}\marg{num} \\
\cmd{\chapternumberline}\marg{num} \\
\end{syntax}
In the \toc, the macros \cmd{\partnumberline} and \cmd{\chapternumberline}
are responsible respectively for typesetting the \cmd{\part} and \cmd{\chapter}
numbers. Internally they use \cmd{\cftXpresnum}, \cmd{\cftXaftersnum}
and \cmd{\cftaftersnumb} as above. If you do not want, say, 
the \cmd{\chapter} number to appear you
can do:
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\chapternumberline}[1]{}
\end{lcode}

\Note{}  Because the \Lpack{hyperref} package~\cite{HYPERREF} 
does not understand
the \cmd{\partnumberline} and \cmd{\chapternumberline} commands,
if you use the \Lpack{hyperref} package you will also have to use
the \Lpack{memhfixc} package, which comes with memoir.



\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\cftXleader} \\
\cmd{\cftXdotsep} \\
\end{syntax}
 \cmd{\cftXleader} defines the leader between the title and the page number;
 it can be changed by \cmd{\renewcommand}.
 The spacing between any dots in the leader is controlled by \cmd{\cftXdotsep} 
 (\cmd{\@dotsep} in \fref{fig:ltoc}).
 It can be changed by \cmd{\renewcommand} and its value must be either a
 number (e.g., 6.6 or \cmd{\cftdotsep}) or \cmd{\cftnodots} (to disable the dots).
 The spacing
 is in terms of \emph{math units} where there are 18mu to 1em.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\cftXpagefont} \\
\end{syntax}
 This defines the font to be used for typesetting the page number. It
 can be changed by \cmd{\renewcommand}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\cftXafterpnum} \\
\end{syntax}
 This macro is called after the page number has been typeset. Its default
 is to do nothing. It can be changed by \cmd{\renewcommand}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\cftsetindents}\marg{entry}\marg{indent}\marg{numwidth} \\
\end{syntax}
 The command 
 \cmd{\cftsetindents} sets the \meta{entry}'s \textit{indent} to the 
length \meta{indent} and its
 \textit{numwidth} to the length \meta{numwidth}. The \meta{entry} argument
 is the name of one of the standard entries (e.g., |subsection|) or the 
name of entry that has been defined within the document.
 For example 
\begin{lcode}
 \cftsetindents{figure}{0em}{1.5em}
\end{lcode}
 will make figure\index{figure} entries left justified.

    This manual requires more space for section numbers in the \toc{} than
the default (which allows for three digits). Consequently the preamble\index{preamble}
contains the following:
\begin{lcode}
\cftsetindents{section}{1.5em}{3.0em}
\cftsetindents{subsection}{4.5em}{3.9em}
\cftsetindents{subsubsection}{8.4em}{4.8em}
\cftsetindents{paragraph}{10.7em}{5.7em}
\cftsetindents{subparagraph}{12.7em}{6.7em}
\end{lcode}
Note that changing the indents at one level implies that any lower level
indents should be changed as well.


 Various effects can be achieved by changing the definitions of \cmd{\cftXfont},
 \cmd{\cftXaftersnum}, \cmd{\cftXaftersnumb}, \cmd{\cftXleader} and 
\cmd{\cftXafterpnum}, 
 either singly or in combination.
 For the sake of some examples, assume that we have the following initial
 definitions
 \begin{lcode}
 \newcommand{\cftXfont}{}
 \newcommand{\cftXaftersnum}{}
 \newcommand{\cftXaftersnumb}{}
 \newcommand{\cftXleader}{\cftdotfill{\cftXdotsep}}
 \newcommand{\cftXdotsep}{\cftdotsep}
 \newcommand{\cftXpagefont}{}
 \newcommand{\cftXafterpnum}{}
 \end{lcode}
 (Note that the same font should be used for the title, leader and page 
 number to provide a coherent appearance).

 \begin{itemize}
 \item To eliminate the dots in the leader:
 \begin{lcode}
 \renewcommand{\cftXdotsep}{\cftnodots}
 \end{lcode}

 \item To put something (e.g., a name) before the title (number):
 \begin{lcode}
 \renewcommand{\cftXpresnum}{SOMETHING }
 \end{lcode}

 \item To add a colon after the section number:
 \begin{lcode}
 \renewcommand{\cftXaftersnum}{:}
 \end{lcode}

 \item To put something before the title number, add a colon after the
    the title number, set everything in bold font,
 and start the title text on the following line:
 \begin{lcode}
 \renewcommand{\cftXfont}{\bfseries}
 \renewcommand{\cftXleader}{\bfseries\cftdotfill{\cftXdotsep}}
 \renewcommand{\cftXpagefont}{\bfseries}
 \renewcommand{\cftXpresnum}{SOMETHING }
 \renewcommand{\cftXaftersnum}{:}
 \renewcommand{\cftXaftersnumb}{\\}
 \end{lcode}

    If you are adding text in the number box in addition to the number,
 then you will probably have to increase the width of the box so that
 multiline titles have a neat vertical alignment; changing box widths
 usually implies that the indents will require modification as 
 well. One possible method of adjusting the box width for the above example
 is:
 \begin{lcode}
 \newlength{\mylen}                  % a "scratch" length
 \settowidth{\mylen}{\bfseries\cftXpresnum\cftXaftersnum}
 \addtolength{\cftXnumwidth}{\mylen} % add the extra space
 \end{lcode} 

 \item To set the section numbers flushright:
 \begin{lcode}
 \setlength{\mylen}{0.5em}    % extra space at end of number
 \renewcommand{\cftXpresnum}{\hfill} % note the double `l'
 \renewcommand{\cftXaftersnum}{\hspace*{\mylen}}
 \addtolength{\cftXnumwidth}{\mylen}
 \end{lcode}
 In the above, the added initial \cmd{\hfill} in the box overrides the
 final \cmd{\hfil} in the box, thus shifting everything to the right hand
 end of the box. The extra space is so that the number is not typeset
 immediately at the left of the title text.

 \item To set the entry ragged left (but this only looks good for single
       line titles):
 \begin{lcode}
 \renewcommand{\cftXfont}{\hfill\bfseries}
 \renewcommand{\cftXleader}{}
 \end{lcode}

 \item To set the page number immediately after the entry text instead of at
       the righthand margin\index{margin}:
 \begin{lcode}
 \renewcommand{\cftXleader}{}
 \renewcommand{\cftXafterpnum}{\cftparfillskip}
 \end{lcode}
 \end{itemize}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\cftparfillskip} \\
\end{syntax}
 By default the \cmd{\parfillskip} value is locally set to fill up the last
 line of a paragraph\index{paragraph}. Just changing \cmd{\cftXleader} puts horrible interword
 spaces into the last line of the title. The \cmd{\cftparfillskip} 
 command  is provided just so that the above effect can be achieved.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\cftpagenumbersoff}\marg{entry} \\
\cmd{\cftpagenumberson}\marg{entry} \\
\end{syntax}
 The command \cmd{\cftpagenumbersoff} will
 eliminate the page numbers for \meta{entry} in the listing, where
 \meta{entry} is the name of one of the standard
 kinds of entries (e.g., |subsection|, or |figure|) or the name of a
 new entry defined in the document.

    The command \cmd{\cftpagenumberson} reverses
 the effect of a corresponding \cmd{\cftpagenumbersoff} for \meta{entry}.
 
 One question that appeared on the \file{comp.text.tex} newsgroup asked
 how to get the titles of Appendices\index{appendix} list in the \toc{} \emph{without} 
 page numbers. Here is a simple way of doing it.
 \begin{lcode}
 ...
 \appendix
 \addtocontents{toc}{\cftpagenumbersoff{chapter}}
 \chapter{First appendix}
 \end{lcode}
 If there are other chapter type headings\index{heading!chapter} to go into the \toc{} after the 
 appendices\index{appendix} (perhaps a bibliography\index{bibliography} or an index\index{index}), 
 then it will be necessary to do a similar 
 \begin{lcode}
 \addtocontents{toc}{\cftpagenumberson{chapter}}
 \end{lcode}
 after the appendices\index{appendix} to restore the page numbering in the \toc.

  At this point, I leave it up to your ingenuity as to other effects that
 you can achieve. However, if you come up with further examples, let me
 know for possible inclusion in a later version of this document.

 \section{New list of\ldots{} and entries}

\index{list!new list of|(}

 \begin{syntax}
\cmd{\newlistof}\marg{listofcom}\marg{ext}\marg{listofname} \\
\end{syntax}
 The command \cmd{\newlistof} 
 creates a new \listofx, and assorted commands to go along with it.
  The first argument, \meta{listofcom} is used to define a new
 command called |\listofcom| which can then be used like |\listoffigures|
to typeset the \listofx. The \meta{ext} argument is the file extension to
be used for the new listing. The last argument, \meta{listofname} is
the title for the \listofx. Unstarred and starred versions of
|\listofcom| are created. The unstarred version, |\listofcom|, will add
\meta{listofname} to the \toc, while the starred version, |\listofcom*|,
makes no entry in the \toc.

 As an example:
 \begin{lcode}
 \newcommand{\listanswername}{List of Answers}
 \newlistof{listofanswers}{ans}{\listanswername}
 \end{lcode}
 will create a new \cmd{\listofanswers} commmand that can be used
to typeset a listing of answers under the
title \cmd{\listanswername}, where the answer titles are in a \file{.ans}
file. 
   It is up to the author of the document to specify the `answer' code
for the answers in the document. For example:
 \begin{lcode}
 \newcounter{answer}[chapter]
 \renewcommand{\theanswer}{\thechapter.\arabic{answer}}
 \newcommand{\answer}[1]{
   \refstepcounter{answer}
   \par\noindent\textbf{Answer \theanswer. #1}
   \addcontentsline{ans}{answer}{\protect\numberline{\theanswer}#1}\par}
 \end{lcode}
 which, when used like: \\ 
 |\answer{Hard} The \ldots|  \\
 will print as:
\begin{syntax}
 \textbf{Answer 1. Hard} \\
 \hspace*{2em} The \ldots \\
\end{syntax}

    As mentioned above, the \cmd{\newlistof} command creates several 
new commands in addition to |\listofcom|, most of which you should now be 
familiar with. For convenience,
 assume that |\newlistof{...}{Z}{...}| has been issued so that
 |Z| is the new file extension and corresponds to the |Z| in
 \S\ref{sec:titles}. Then in addition to |\listofcom| the following 
new commands will be made available.

 The four commands, |\Zmark|, 
 |\Zheadstart|, 
 |\printZtitle|, and
 |\afterZtitle|, 
are analagous to the commands of the same names
described in \S\ref{sec:titles} (internally the class uses
the \cmd{\newlistof} macro to define the \toc, \lof{} and \lot). 
In particular the default definition of |\Zmark| is equivalent to:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\Zmark}{\@mkboth{listofname}{listofname}}
\end{lcode}
However, this may well be altered by the particular \cmd{\pagestyle} in
use.

\begin{syntax}
|Zdepth| \\
\end{syntax}
 The counter |Zdepth| is analagous to the standard
 \Icn{tocdepth} counter, in that it specifies that entries
 in the new listing should not be typeset if their numbering level 
 is greater
 than |Zdepth|. The default definition is equivalent to
\begin{lcode}
\setcounter{Zdepth}{1}
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\insertchapterspace} \\
\cmd{\addtodef}\marg{macro}\marg{prepend}\marg{append} \\
\end{syntax}
Remember that the \cmd{\chapter} command uses \cmd{\insertchapterspace}
to insert vertical spaces into the \lof{} and \lot. If you want similar
spaces added to your new listing then you have to modify
\cmd{\insertchapterspace}. The easiest way to do this is via
the \cmd{\addtodef} macro, like:
\begin{lcode}
\addtodef{\insertchapterspaces}{}%
  {\addtocontents{ans}{\protect\addvspace{10pt}}}
\end{lcode}
The \cmd{\addtodef} macro is described later in \S\ref{sec:addtodef}.

    The other part of creating a new \listofx, is to specify the 
formatting of the entries, i.e., define an appropriate |\l@kind| macro.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\newlistentry}\oarg{within}\marg{cntr}\marg{ext}\marg{level-1} \\
\end{syntax}
 The command \cmd{\newlistentry} creates the commands necessary for
typesetting an entry in a \listofx.
 The first required argument, \meta{cntr} is used to define a new
 counter called |cntr|, unless |cntr| is already defined. 
The optional \meta{within} argument can
 be used so that |cntr| gets reset to one every time the counter called 
 |within| is changed. That is, the first two arguments when |cntr| is not
already defined, are equivalent to
 calling \cmd{\newcounter}\marg{cntr}\oarg{within}. If |cntr| is already
defined, \cmd{\newcounter} is not called. |cntr| is used for the number that
goes along with the title of the entry.

 The second required argument, \meta{ext}, is the file extension for the
 entry listing.
 The last argument, \meta{level-1}, is a number specifying the numbering
 level minus one, 
 of the entry in a listing.


    Calling \cmd{\newlistentry} creates several new commands. Assuming that
 it is called as |\newlistentry[within]{X}{Z}{N}|, where |X| and |Z| are
 similar to the
 previous uses of them (e.g., |Z| is the file extension), 
and |N| is an integer number, then the following
 commands are made available.


  The set of commands |\cftbeforeXskip|, 
 |\cftXfont|, 
 |\cftXpresnum|, 
 |\cftXaftersnum|, 
 |\cftXaftersnumb|, 
 |\cftXleader|, 
 |\cftXdotsep|, 
 |\cftXpagefont|, and
 |\cftXafterpnum|,
  are analagous to the commands of the same names
 described in \S\ref{sec:entries}. Their default values are also
 as described earlier.

 The default values of |\cftXindent| and |\cftXnumwidth| are set according
 to the value of the \meta{level-1} argument (i.e., |N| in this example).
 For |N=0| the settings correspond to those for 
 figures\index{figure} and tables\index{table}, as listed in \tref{tab:indents} for the 
\Lclass{memoir} class.
 For |N=1| the settings correspond
 to subfigures\index{figure!sub-}, and so on.
 For values of |N| less than zero or greater than four, 
 or for non-default values, use the
 \cmd{\cftsetindents} command to set the values.


  |\l@X| is an internal command that typesets an entry in the list, and
 is defined in terms of the above |\cft*X*| commands. It will not typeset
 an entry if |\Zdepth| is |N| or less, where |Z| is the listing's file
 extension.

 The command |\theX| prints the value of the |X| counter. It is initially
 defined so that it prints arabic numerals. If the optional \meta{within}
 argument is used, |\theX| is defined as 
\begin{lcode}
 \renewcommand{\theX}{\thewithin.\arabic{X}}
\end{lcode}
 otherwise as
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\theX}{\arabic{X}}
\end{lcode}


 As an example of the independent use of \cmd{\newlistentry}, the following
 will set up for sub-answers.
 \begin{lcode}
 \newlistentry[answer]{subanswer}{1}
 \renewcommand{\thesubanswer}{\theanswer.\alph{subanswer}}
 \newcommand{\subanswer}[1]{
    \refstepcounter{subanswer}
    \par\textbf{\thesubanswer) #1}
    \addcontentsline{ans}{subanswer{\protect\numberline{\thesubanswer}#1}}
 \setcounter{ansdepth}{2}
 \end{lcode}
 And then:
 \begin{lcode}
 \answer{Harder} The \ldots
   \subanswer{Reformulate the problem} It assists \ldots
 \end{lcode}
 will be typeset as:
\begin{syntax}
\textbf{Answer 2. Harder} \\
\hspace*{2em} The \ldots \\
\hspace*{2em} \textbf{2.a) Reformulate the problem} It assists \ldots \\
\end{syntax}

 By default the answer entries will appear in the List of Answers listing
 (typeset by the |\listofanswers| command).
 In order to get the subanswers to appear, 
 the |\setcounter{ansdepth}{2}| command was used above.

 To turn off page numbering for the subanswers, do \\
 |\cftpagenumbersoff{subanswer}|

    As another example of \cmd{\newlistentry}, suppose that an extra sectioning
 division below |subparagraph| is required, called |subsubpara|.
 The |\subsubpara| command itself can be defined via the LaTeX kernel
 \cmd{\@startsection} command. 
 Also it is necessary to define a |\subsubparamark| macro,
 a new |subsubpara| counter, a |\thesubsubpara| macro and a |\l@subsubpara|
 macro. Using \cmd{\newlistentry} 
 takes care of most of these as shown below (remember
 the caveats about commands with |@| signs in them).
 \begin{lcode}
 \newcommand{\subsubpara}{\@startsection{subpara}
    {6}                            %                    level
    {\parindent}                   %  indent from left margin
    {3.25ex \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}  %     skip above heading
    {-1em}       runin heading with  % 1em between title & text
    {\normalfont\normalsize\itshape} % italic number and title 
 }
 \newlistentry[subparagraph]{subsubpara}{toc}{5}
 \cftsetindents{subsubpara}{14.0em}{7.0em}
 \newcommand*{\subsubparamark}[1]{}  % gobble heading mark
 \end{lcode}
 

     Each \listofx{} uses a file to store the list entries, and these
 files must remain open for writing throughout the document processing.
 TeX has only a limited number of files that it can keep open, and this
 puts a limit on the number of listings that can be used. For a document
 that includes a \toc{} but no other extra ancilliary files (e.g., no
 index\index{index} or bibliography\index{bibliography} output files) the maximum number of LoX's, including
 a \lof{} and \lot, is no more than about eleven. If you try and create too many
 new listings LaTeX will respond with the error message: 
 \begin{center}
 |No room for a new write| 
 \end{center}
 If you get such a message the only recourse is to redesign your document.

\subsection{Example --- plates}

    As has been mentioned earlier, some illustrations\index{illustration} may be 
tipped in\index{tip in} to a book. Often, these are called `plates' if
they are on glossy paper\index{paper} and the rest of the book is on ordinary paper\index{paper}.
We can define a new kind of Listing for these.

\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\listplatename}{Plates}
\newlistof{listofplates}{lop}{\listplatename}
\newlistentry{plate}{lop}{0}
\cftpagenumbersoff{plate}
\end{lcode}
This code defines the \cmd{\listofplates} command to start the listing which
will be titled `Plates' from the \cmd{\listplatename} macro. The entry name
is |plate| and the file extension is |lop|. As plate pages typically do
not have printed folios\index{folio}, the \cmd{\cftpagenumbersoff} command has been
used to prohibit page number printing in the listing.

    If pages are tipped in, then they are put between a verso and a recto 
page. The \Lpack{afterpage} package~\cite{AFTERPAGE} lets you specify 
something that should happen after the current page is finished. The next
piece of code uses the package and its \cmd{\afterpage} macro to
define two macros which let you specify something that is to be
done after the next verso or recto page has been completed.
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\afternextverso}[1]{%
  \afterpage{\ifodd\c@page #1\else\afterpage{#1}\fi}}
\newcommand{\afternextrecto}[1]{%
  \afterpage{\ifodd\c@page\afterpage{#1}\else #1\fi}}
\end{lcode}


    The \cmd{\pageref}\marg{labelid} command typesets the page number
corresponding to the location in the document where 
\cmd{\label}\marg{labelid} is specified. The following code defines
two macros\footnote{These only work for arabic page numbers.} 
that print the page number before or after that given by
\cmd{\pageref}.
\begin{lcode}
\newcounter{mempref}
\newcommand{\priorpageref}[1]{%
  \setcounter{mempref}{\pageref{#1}}\addtocounter{mempref}{-1}\themempref}
\newcommand{\nextpageref}[1]{%
  \setcounter{mempref}{\pageref{#1}}\addtocounter{mempref}{1}\themempref}
\end{lcode}

    With these preliminaries out of the way, we can use code like the 
following for handling a set of physically tipped in plates.
\begin{lcode}
\afternextverso{\label{tip}
  \addtocontents{lop}{%
    Between pages \priorpageref{tip} and \pageref{tip}
    \par\vspace*{\baselineskip}}
  \addcontentsline{lop}{plate}{First plate}
  \addcontentsline{lop}{plate}{Second plate}
  ...
  \addcontentsline{lop}{plate}{Nth plate}
}
\end{lcode}
This starts off by waiting until the next recto page is started, which
will be the page immediately after the plates, and then
inserts the label |tip|. The \cmd{\addtocontents} macro puts its argument
into the plate list |lop| file, indicating the page numbers before and after
the set of plates. With the plates being physically added to the document
it is not possible to use \cmd{\caption}, instead the \cmd{\addcontentsline} 
macros are used to add the plate titles to the |lop| file.

    With a few modifications the code above can also form the basis 
for listing plates that are
electronically tipped in but do not have printed folios\index{folio} or \cmd{\caption}s.

\index{list!new list of|)}



 \section{Extras}

\index{chapter!precis|(}

   Some old style novels, and even some modern text 
 books,\footnote{For example, Robert Sedgewick, \textit{Algorithms},
 Addison-Wesley, 1983.} include a short synopsis of the contents of 
 the chapter either immediately
 after the chapter heading\index{heading!chapter} or in the \toc, or in both places.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\chapterprecis}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
     The command \cmd{\chapterprecis} prints its argument 
 both at the
 point in the document where it is called, and also adds it to the \file{.toc}
 file. For example:
 \begin{lcode}
 ...
 \chapter{}  first chapter
 \chapterprecis{Our hero is introduced; family tree; early days.}
 ...
 \end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\chapterprecishere}\marg{text} \\
\cmd{\chapterprecistoc}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
 The \cmd{\chapterprecis} command calls these two commands to print the
 \meta{text} in the document (the \cmd{\chapterprecishere} command) 
 and to put it into the \toc{} (the \cmd{\chapterprecistoc} command). 
 These can be used individually if required.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\prechapterprecis} \cmd{\postchapterprecis} \\
\end{syntax}
The \cmd{\chapterprecishere} macro is intended for use immediately after 
a \cmd{\chapter}. The \meta{text} argument is typeset in
italics in a \Ie{quote} environment. The macro's definition is:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\chapterprecishere}[1]{%
  \prechapterprecis #1\postchapterprecis}
\end{lcode}
where \cmd{\prechapterprecis} and \cmd{\postchapterprecis} are defined
as:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\prechapterprecis}{%
  \vspace*{-2\baselineskip}%
  \begin{quote}\normalfont\itshape}
\newcommand{\postchapterprecis}{\end{quote}}
\end{lcode}
The \cmd{\prechapterprecis} and \cmd{\postchapterprecis} macros can be 
changed if another style of typesetting is required.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\precistoctext}\marg{text} \cmd{\precistocfont} \\
\end{syntax}
The \cmd{\chapterprecistoc} macro puts the macro \cmd{\precistoctext} into 
the \ixfile{toc} file. The default definition is
\begin{lcode}
\DeclareRobustCommand{\precistoctext}[1]{%
  {\leftskip \cftchapterindent\relax
   \advance\leftskip \cftchapternumwidth\relax
   \rightskip \@tocrmarg\relax
   \precistocfont #1\par}}
\end{lcode}
Effectively, in the \toc{} \cmd{\precistoctext} typesets its argument like 
a chapter title using the \cmd{\precistocfont} (default \cmd{\itshape}).

\index{chapter!precis|)}

 Sometimes it may be desirable to make a change to the global parameters
 for an individual entry. For example, a figure\index{figure} might be placed on
 the end paper\index{paper!end} of a book (the inside of the front or back cover), and
 this needs to be placed in a \lof{} with the page number set as, say
 `inside front cover'. If `inside front cover' is typeset as an ordinary
 page number it will stick out into the margin\index{margin}. Therefore, the parameters
 for this particular entry need to be changed.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\cftlocalchange}\marg{ext}\marg{pnumwidth}\marg{tocrmarg} \\
\end{syntax}
 The command \cmd{\cftlocalchange} 
 will write an entry into the file with extension \meta{ext} to reset 
the global \cmd{\@pnumwidth} and \cmd{\@tocrmarg} parameter lengths. 
 The command should be called again after any special entry to reset
 the parameters back to their usual values. Any fragile commands used
 in the arguments must be protected.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\cftaddtitleline}\marg{ext}\marg{kind}\marg{text}\marg{page} \\
\cmd{\cftaddnumtitleline}\marg{ext}\marg{kind}\marg{num}\marg{title}\marg{page} \\
\end{syntax}
 The command \cmd{\cftaddtitleline} 
 will write a \cmd{\contentsline} entry into \meta{ext} for a \meta{kind}
 entry with title \meta{title} and page number \meta{page}. 
 Any fragile commands used in the arguments must be protected.
That is,
 an entry is made of the form: 
\begin{lcode}
\contentsline{kind}{title}{page}
\end{lcode}
 The command \cmd{\cftaddnumtitleline}
 is similar to \cmd{\cftaddtitleline} except that it also includes 
\meta{num} as the argument to
 \cmd{\numberline}. That is, an entry is made of the form
\begin{lcode}
\contentsline{kind}{\numberline{num} title}{page}
\end{lcode}

 As an example of the use of these commands, 
 noting that the default LaTeX values for 
 \cmd{\@pnumwidth} and \cmd{\@tocrmarg} are 1.55em and 2.55em respectively, 
 one might do the
 following for a figure\index{figure} on the frontispiece\index{frontispiece} page.
 \begin{lcode}
 ...
  this is the frontispiece page with no number
  draw or import the picture (with no \caption)
 \cftlocalchange{lof}{4em}{5em} % make pnumwidth big enough for 
                                % frontispiece and change margin
 \cftaddtitleline{lof}{figure}{The title}{frontispiece}
 \cftlocalchange{lof}{1.55em}{2.55em} % return to normal settings
 \clearpage
 ...
 \end{lcode}
    Recall that a \cmd{\caption} command will put an entry in the \file{.lof}
 file, which is not wanted here. If a caption\index{caption} is required, then you can 
 either craft one youself or, assuming that your general captions\index{caption} are not
 too exotic, use the \cmd{\legend} command (see later).
 If the illustration\index{illustration} is numbered, use 
 \cmd{\cftaddnumtitleline} instead of \cmd{\cftaddtitleline}.


\section{Tails}

    The commands for producing a bibliography\index{bibliography} and an index\index{index} are
the same as for the standard classes, but there are two differences.

\subsection{Bibliography}

\index{bibliography|(}

\begin{syntax}
\senv{thebibliography}\marg{exlabel} \\
\cmd{\bibitem} ... \\
\eenv{thebibliography} \\
\cmd{\bibname} \\
\end{syntax}
The bibliography is typeset within the \Ie{thebibliography} environment.
This takes one required argument, \meta{exlabel}, which is a piece of text
as wide as the widest label in the bibliography. The value of 
\cmd{\bibname} (default `Bibliography') is used
as the title. 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\bibintoc} \cmd{\nobibintoc} \\
\end{syntax}
The declaration \cmd{\bibintoc} will cause the |thebibliography|
environment to add the title to the \toc, while the declaration
\cmd{\nobibintoc} ensures that the title is not added to the \toc. 
The default is \cmd{\bibintoc}.


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\prebibhook} \cmd{\postbibhook} \\
\end{syntax}
The commands \cmd{\prebibhook} and \cmd{postbibhook} are called after 
typesetting the title of the bibliography and after typesetting the list of
entries, respectively. By default, they are defined to do nothing. You may
wish to use one or other of these to provide some general information about
the bibliography. For example:
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\postbibhook}{%
CTAN is the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network and URLS for the 
several CTAN mirrors can be found at \url{http://www.tug.org}.}
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\setbiblabel}\marg{style} \\
\end{syntax}
The style of the labels marking the bibliographic entries can be set
via \cmd{\setbiblabel}. The default definition is
\begin{lcode}
\setbiblabel{[#1]\hfill}
\end{lcode}
where |#1| is the citation mark position, which generates flushleft 
marks enclosed in square brackets. To have marks just
followed by a dot
\begin{lcode}
\setbiblabel{#1.\hfill}
\end{lcode}



    The definition of the \Ie{thebibliography} environment is:
\begin{lcode}
\newenvironment{thebibliography}[1]{%
  \bibsection
  \begin{bibitemlist}{#1}}{\end{bibitemlist}\postbibhook}
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\bibsection} \\
\end{syntax}
The macro \cmd{\bibsection} defines the heading for the \Ie{thebibliography}
environment; that is, everything before the actual list of bibliographic
items starts. Its default definition is:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\bibsection}{%
  \chapter*{\bibname}
  \bibmark
  \ifnobibintoc\else
    \phantomsection
    \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\bibname}
  \fi
  \prebibhook}
\end{lcode}
To change the style of the heading for the bibliography, redefine
\cmd{\bibsection}. For example, to have the bibliography typeset as a
numbered section instead of a chapter, redefine \cmd{\bibsection} as:
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\bibsection}{%
  \section{\bibname}
  \prebibhook}
\end{lcode}

    If you use the \Lpack{natbib} and/or the \Lpack{chapterbib}
packages~\cite{NATBIB,CHAPTERBIB} with the \Lopt{sectionbib} option, 
then \cmd{\bibsection} is
changed appropriately to typeset as a numbered section.

    The \Lpack{jurabib} package~\cite{JURABIB} redefines 
the \Ie{thebibliography}
environment, 
providing its own methods for listing the items. However,
the redefinition also eliminates the opportunity to add the
Bibliography to the Table of Contents and to have some introductory text.
To restore these to the class specification, put the following in your
preamble after loading \Lpack{jurabib}:
\begin{lcode}
\usepackage{jurabib}
\makeatletter
\renewcommand{\bib@heading}{\bibsection}
\makeatother
\end{lcode}
However, thanks to the kindness of Jens Berger, if your version of 
\Lpack{jurabib} is 0.6 or later then 
the fix is not required.


\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\bibitemsep} \\
\end{syntax}
   The \Lpack{natbib} package provides a length, \lnc{\bibsep} which can
be used to alter the vertical spacing between the entries in the bibliography.
Setting \lnc{\bibsep} to 0pt removes any extra space between the entries.
    The equivalent length provided by the class for changing the space between
bibliography entries is \lnc{\bibitemsep}, which by default is set to 
the default value of \lnc{\itemsep}. 

    The bibliography is set as a list, and the spacing between the items is 
(\lnc{\bibitemsep} + \lnc{\parsep}). To eliminate any extra vertical space do
\begin{lcode}
\setlength{\bibitemsep}{-\parsep}
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\biblistextra} \\
\end{syntax}
    A hook, called \cmd{\biblistextra}, is provided that is called at the
end of the bibliography list setup. By default it does nothing but
it can be used, for example, to set all bibliography entries flushleft by
modify the list parameters as shown below.
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\biblistextra}{%
  \setlength{\leftmargin}{0pt}%
  \setlength{\itemindent}{\labelwidth}%
  \setlength{\itemindent}{\labelsep}%
}
\end{lcode}
  


\index{bibliography|)}

\subsection{Index}

\index{index|(}

    The indexing commands have been significantly enhanced with respect
to the standard classes and include the
functionality provided by the \Lpack{makeidx}, \Lpack{showidx} and 
\Lpack{index} packages~\cite{MAKEIDX,INDEX}; these packages should not be used.

    In the standard classes the index is set in two columns.
\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\onecolindextrue} \\
\cmd{\onecolindexfalse} \\
\end{syntax}
The declaration \cmd{\onecolindexfalse}, which is the default, causes
any indexes to be set in two columns. The declaration \cmd{\onecolindextrue}
causes any following indexes to be set in one column. This can be useful
if, for example, you need an index of the first lines of poems.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\makeindex}\oarg{file} \\
\cmd{\printindex}\oarg{file} \\
\end{syntax}
The macro \cmd{\makeindex}, which must be put in the preamble if it is used,
opens an \ixfile{idx} file, which by default is called \file{jobname.idx}, 
where \file{jobname} is the name of the main LaTeX source file. 
If the optional \meta{file} argument is given then a file called
\file{file.idx} will be opened instead. 
The macro \cmd{\printindex} reads an \ixfile{ind}
file called \file{jobname.ind}, which should contain an 
\Ie{theindex} environment
and the indexed items. If the optional \meta{file} argument is given then
the \file{file.ind} file will be read. The \textsc{makeindex} program is often
used to convert an \ixfile{idx} file to an \ixfile{ind} file.



\begin{syntax}
\senv{theindex} entries \eenv{theindex} \\
\cmd{\indexname} \\
\end{syntax}
The index\index{index} is typeset in two columns\index{column!double} within the \Ie{theindex} environment.
The index\index{index} title is given by the current value of \cmd{\indexname} (default
`Index').

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\indexintoc} \cmd{\noindexintoc} \\
\end{syntax}
The declaration \cmd{\indexintoc} will cause the |theindex|
environment to add the title to the \toc, while the declaration
\cmd{\noindexintoc} ensures that the title is not added to the \toc. 
The default is \cmd{\indexintoc}.

\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\indexcolsep} \\
\lnc{\indexrule} \\
\end{syntax}
The length \lnc{\indexcolsep} is the width of the gutter between the two
index columns\index{column!double}. Its default value is 35pt. The length \lnc{\indexrule}, default
value 0pt, is the thickness of a vertical rule separating the two columns.


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\preindexhook} \\
\end{syntax}
    The macro \cmd{\preindexhook} is called after the title is typeset and
before the twocolumn index\index{index} listing starts. By default it does nothing but
can be changed. For example
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\preindexhook}{Bold page numbers are used to indicate
the main reference for an entry.}
\end{lcode}


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\index}\oarg{file}\marg{item} \\
\cmd{\specialindex}\marg{file}\marg{counter}\marg{item} \\
\end{syntax}
The macro \cmd{\index} writes its \meta{item} argument to an \ixfile{idx}
file. If the optional \meta{file} argument is given then it will write
to \file{file.idx} otherwise it writes to \file{jobname.idx}. The page for
the \meta{item} is also written to the \file{idx} file. 
The \cmd{\specialindex} macro writes its \meta{item} argument to the 
\file{file.idx} and also writes the page number (in parentheses) and
the value of the \meta{counter}. This means that indexing can be with 
respect to something other than page numbers. However, if the \Lpack{hyperref}
package is used the special index links will be to pages even though they
appear to be with respect to the \meta{counter}; for example, 
if figure numbers are used as the index reference the hyperref link will be
to the page where the figure appears and not the figure itself.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\see}\marg{item} \cmd{\seename} \\
\cmd{\seealso}\marg{items} \cmd{\alsoname} \\
\end{syntax}
The macro \cmd{\see} can be used in an \cmd{\index} command to tell the 
reader to `see \meta{item}' instead of printing a page number. Likewise
the \cmd{\seealso} macro directs the reader to `see also \meta{items}'.
For example:
\begin{lcode}
\index{Alf|see{Alfred}}
\index{Frederick|seealso{Fred, Rick}}
\end{lcode}
The actual values for `see' and `see also' are given by the 
\cmd{\seename} and \cmd{\alsoname} macros whose default
definitions are:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\seename}{see}
\newcommand{\alsoname}{see also}
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\reportnoidxfilefalse} \\
\cmd{\reportnoidxfiletrue} \\
\end{syntax}
Following the declaration \cmd{\reportnoidxfilefalse}, which is the default,
LaTeX will silently pass over attempts to use an \ixfile{idx} file which has
not been declared via \cmd{\makeindex}. After the declaration
\cmd{\reportnoidxfiletrue} LaTeX will whinge about any attempts to 
write to an unopened file.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\showindexmarktrue} \\
\cmd{\showindexmarkfalse} \\
\end{syntax}
After the declaration \cmd{\showindexmarktrue} (practically) 
all \cmd{\index} and 
\cmd{\specialindex} \meta{item} arguments are listed in the margin of 
the page on which the index command is issued. The default is
\cmd{\showindexmarkfalse}.

\subsubsection{Indexing and the \Lpack{natbib} package}

    The \Lpack{natbib} package~\cite{NATBIB} will make an index 
of citations if
\cmd{\citeindextrue} is put in the preamble after the \Lpack{natbib}
package is called for.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\citeindexfile} \\
\end{syntax}
The name of the file for the citation index is stored in the
macro \cmd{\citeindexfile}. This is initially defined as:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\citeindexfile}{\jobname}
\end{lcode}
That is, the citation entries will be written to the default 
\ixfile{idx} file.
This may be not what you want so you can change this, for example to:
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\citeindexfile}{names}
\end{lcode}
If you do change \cmd{\citeindexfile} then you have to put
\begin{lcode}
\makeindex[\citeindex]
\end{lcode}
\emph{before}
\begin{lcode}
\usepackage[...]{natbib}
\end{lcode}

    So, there are effectively two choices, either along the lines of
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\citeindexfile}{authors} % write to authors.idx
\makeindex[\citeindexfile]
\usepackage{natbib}
\citeindextrue
...
\renewcommand{\indexname}{Index of citations}
\printindex[\citeindexfile]
\end{lcode}
or along the lines of
\begin{lcode}
\usepackage{natbib}
\citeindextrue
\makeindex
...
\printindex
\end{lcode}

\subsubsection{Populating the \file{idx} file}

    In the standard classes, indexed items are written directly to an
\ixfile{idx} file. With the class, however, the indexed items are
written to the \ixfile{aux} file and then on the next LaTeX run the
indexed items in the \ixfile{aux} file are written to the designated
\ixfile{idx} file.

   The disadvantage of this two stage process is that after any change to
the indexed items LaTeX has to be run twice to ensure that the change
is propagated to the \ixfile{idx} file. Then, of course, a new \ixfile{ind}
will have to be created and LaTeX run one more time. However, this process
is very similar to what you have to do if you are using BibTeX to create 
a bibliography.

   The advantage of the approach is that indexed items from \cmd{\include}
files that are not processed on a particular run are not lost. The
standard direct write to an \ixfile{idx} file loses any `non-inluded'
indexed items.

\index{index|)}



%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\chapterstyle{hangnum}
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
 \chapter{Captions and floats} \label{chap:captions}

This chapter uses the \cstyle{hangnum} chapterstyle. Section numbers
are also hung into the margin\index{margin} to match via the declaration \cmd{\hangsecnum}.
\hangsecnum

\newcommand{\pname}{ccaption}

 \section{Introduction}

\index{caption|(}

 Some publishers require, and some authors prefer, captioning styles
 other than the one style provided by standard LaTeX. This chapter
describes how you can implement your own captioning style.

 Some publishers require that documents that include multi-part
 tables\index{table} use a \textit{continuation caption} on all but the first
 part of the multi-part table\index{table}. For the times where such a table\index{table}
 is specified by the author as a set of tables\index{table}, the 
 class 
 provides a simple `continuation' caption command to meet this 
 requirement. It also provides
 a facility for an `anonymous' caption which can be used in any
 float\index{float} environment. 
 Captions can be defined that are suitable for use in non-float
 environments, such as placing a picture in a minipage and captioning
 it just as though it had been put into a normal figure\index{figure} environment.
 Further, a mechanism is provided for defining new float\index{float} environments.

    The commands and environments described below are very similar to
those supplied by the \Lpack{ccaption} package~\cite{CCAPTION}.

 \section{Captions} 


 \subsection{Changing the caption style}

\index{caption!style|(}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\captiondelim}\marg{delim} \\
\end{syntax}
 The default captioning style is to put a delimeter in the form
 of a colon between the caption
 number and the caption title. The command \cmd{\captiondelim}
 can be used to change the delimeter. For example, to have an en-dash instead
 of the colon, |\captiondelim{-- }| will do the trick. Notice that no space is
 put between the delimeter and the title unless it is specified in the
 \meta{delim} parameter. 
 The class initially specifies |\captiondelim{: }|
 to give the normal delimeter.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\captionnamefont}\marg{fontspec} \\
\end{syntax}
 The \meta{fontspec} specified by \cmd{\captionnamefont} is used
 for typesetting the caption name; that is, the first part of the caption
 up to and including the delimeter (e.g., the portion `Table 3:').
 \meta{fontspec} can be any kind of font specification and/or command and/or 
 text. This first part of the caption is treated like: 
|{\captionnamefont Table 3: }|,
 so font declarations, not font text-style commands, are needed for \meta{fontspec}
 For instance, |\captionnamefont{\Large\sffamily}| to specify a large 
sans-serif font.
 The class initially specifies |\captionnamefont{}|
 to give the normal font.
 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\captiontitlefont}\marg{fontspec} \\
\end{syntax}
 Similarly, the \meta{fontspec} specified by \cmd{\captiontitlefont}
 is used for typesetting the title text of a caption. For example,
 |\captiontitlefont{\itshape}| for an italic title text.
 The class initially specifies |\captiontitlefont{}|
 to give the normal font.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\captionstyle}\oarg{short}\marg{normal} \\
\cmd{\raggedleft} \cmd{\centering} \cmd{\raggedright} \cmd{centerlastline} \\
\end{syntax}
Caption styles are set according to the \cmd{\captionstyle} declaration.
Unless the optional \meta{short} argument is given all captions are typeset
according to \meta{normal}. If the optional \meta{short} argument
is specififed, captions that are less than one line in length are typeset
according to \meta{short}. 
 By default the name and title of a caption are typeset as a block 
 (non-indented)
 paragraph\index{paragraph!block}. 

    Sensible values for the arguments include:
\cmd{\raggedleft}, \cmd{\centering}, \cmd{\raggedright}, and
 \cmd{centerlastline}. The class initially specifies
\begin{lcode}
\captionstyle{}
\end{lcode}
which gives the block paragraph style. The \cmd{\centerlastline} style 
gives a block paragraph\index{paragraph!block} but with the last 
line centered.


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\hangcaption} \\
\cmd{\indentcaption}\marg{length} \\
\cmd{\normalcaption} \\
\end{syntax}
 The command \cmd{\hangcaption} will cause captions to be typeset 
with the second
 and later lines of a multiline caption title indented by the width
 of the caption name. The command \cmd{\indentcaption}
 will indent title lines after the first by \meta{length}. These
 commands are independent of the |\captionstyle{...}|. Note that a
 caption will not be simultaneously hung and indented. The \cmd{\normalcaption}
 command undoes any previous \cmd{\hangcaption} or \cmd{\indentcaption} command.
 The class initially specifies \cmd{\normalcaption}
 to give the normal non-indented paragraph\index{paragraph!indentation} style.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\changecaptionwidth} \\
\cmd{\captionwidth}\marg{length} \\
\cmd{\normalcaptionwidth} \\
\end{syntax}
 Issuing the command \cmd{\changecaptionwidth} will cause the captions to
 be typeset within a total width \meta{length} as specified by
 \cmd{\captionwidth}. Issuing the command \cmd{\normalcaptionwidth}
 will cause captions to be typeset as normal full width captions.
 The class initially specifies \cmd{\normalcaptionwidth} and 
 |\captionwidth{\linewidth}|
 to give the normal width. If a caption is being set within the 
 side captioned environments from the \Lpack{sidecap} package~\cite{SIDECAP}
 then it must be a \cmd{\normalcaptionwidth} caption.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\precaption}\marg{pretext} \\
\cmd{\postcaption}\marg{posttext} \\
\end{syntax}
  The commands \cmd{\precaption} and 
 \cmd{\postcaption}
 specify \meta{pretext} and \meta{posttext} that will be processed at the
 start and end of a caption. For example 
\begin{lcode}
\precaption{\rule{\linewidth}{0.4pt}\par}
\postcaption{\rule{\linewidth}{0.4pt}}
\end{lcode}
  will draw a horizontal line above and below the captions.
 The class initially specifies |\precaption{}| and |\postcaption{}|
 to give the normal appearance.

 
    If any of the above commands are used in a float\index{float}, or other, environment
 their effect is limited to the environment. If they are used in the preamble\index{preamble}
 or the main text, their effect persists until replaced by a similar
 command with a different parameter value. The commands do not affect the
 apperance of the title in any \listofx.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\\}\oarg{length} \\
\cmd{\\*}\oarg{length} \\
\end{syntax}
 The normal LaTeX command \cmd{\\} can be used within the
 caption text to start a new line. Remember that \cmd{\\} is a fragile 
 command, so if it is
 used within text that will be added to a \listofx{}
 it must be protected.
 As examples: 
\begin{lcode}
\caption{Title with a \protect\\ new line in both the body and List of}
\caption[List of entry with no new line]{Title with a \\ new line}
\caption[List of entry with a \protect\\ new line]{Title text}
\end{lcode}

 Effectively, a caption is typeset as though it were:
 \begin{lcode}
 \precaption
 {\captionnamefont NAME NUMBER \captiondelim}
 {\captionstyle\captiontitlefont THE TITLE}
 \postcaption
 \end{lcode}
 Replacing the above commands by their defaults leads to the simple
 format: \\
 |{NAME NUMBER: }{THE TITLE}|

 As well as using the styling commands to make simple changes to the
 captioning style more noticeable modifications can also be made.
 To change the captioning style so that the name and title are typeset in
 a sans font it is sufficient to do:
 \begin{lcode}
 \captionnamefont{\sffamily}
 \captiontitlefont{\sffamily}
 \end{lcode}

 \begin{table}
 \centering
 \captionnamefont{\sffamily}
 \captiondelim{}
 \captionstyle{\\}
 \captiontitlefont{\scshape}
 \setlength{\belowcaptionskip}{10pt}
 \caption{Redesigned table caption style} \label{tab:style}
 \begin{tabular}{lr} \hline
  three & III \\
  five  & V \\
  eight & VIII \\ \hline
  \end{tabular}
 \end{table}

 A more obvious change in styling is shown in \tref{tab:style},
 which was coded as:
 \begin{lcode}
 \begin{table}
 \centering
 \captionnamefont{\sffamily}
 \captiondelim{}
 \captionstyle{\\}
 \captiontitlefont{\scshape}
 \setlength{\belowcaptionskip}{10pt}
 \caption{Redesigned table caption style} \label{tab:style}
 \begin{tabular}{lr} \hline
  ...
 \end{table}
 \end{lcode}
 This leads to the approximate caption format (processed within |\centering|): \\
 |{\sffamily NAME NUMBER}{\\ \scshape THE TITLE}| \\
 Note that the newline command (\cmd{\\}) cannot be put in the first part
 of the format (i.e., the |{\sffamily NAME NUMBER}|); it has to go into
 the second part, which is why it is specified via |\captionstyle{\\}|
 and not |\captiondelim{\\}|.

    If a mixture of captioning styles will be used you may want to
 define a special caption command for each non-standard style. For
 example for the style of the caption in \tref{tab:style}:
 \begin{lcode}
 \newcommand{\mycaption}[2][\@empty]{
   \captionnamefont{\sffamily\hfill}
   \captiondelim{\hfill}
   \captionstyle{\centerlastline\\}
   \captiontitlefont{\scshape}
   \setlength{\belowcaptionskip}{10pt}
   \ifx #1\@empty \caption{#2}\else \caption[#1]{#2}}
 \end{lcode}
 \textbf{NOTE:}  Any code that involves the |@| sign must be either in
 a package (\file{.sty}) file or enclosed between a \cmd{\makeatletter} \ldots
 \cmd{\makeatother} pairing.

 The code for the \tref{tab:style} example can now be written as:
 \begin{lcode}
 \begin{table}
 \centering
 \mycaption{Redesigned table caption style} \label{tab:style}
 \begin{tabular}{lr} \hline
  ...
 \end{table}
 \end{lcode}
 Note that in the code for |\mycaption| I have added two
 \cmd{\hfill} commands and \cmd{\centerlastline} compared with the original
 specification.
 It turned out that the original definitions
 worked for a single line caption but not for a multiline caption.
 The additional commands makes it work in both cases, forcing the
 name to be centered as well as the last line of a multiline title,
 thus giving a balanced appearence.

 \index{caption!style|)}


 \subsection{Continuation captions and legends}

\index{caption!continuation|(}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\contcaption}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
    The \cmd{\contcaption} command can be used to put 
 a `continuation' or `concluded'
 caption into a float\index{float} environment. It neither increments the
 float number nor makes any entry into a float listing, but it
 does repeat the numbering of the previous \cmd{\caption} command.
 

   Table~\ref{tab:m} illustrates the use of the \cmd{\contcaption}
 command. The table\index{table} was produced from the following code.
 \begin{lcode}
   \begin{table}
   \centering
   \caption{A multi-part table} \label{tab:m}
   \begin{tabular}{lc} \hline
    just a single line & 1 \\ \hline
   \end{tabular}
   \end{table}

   \begin{table}
   \centering
   \contcaption{Continued}
   \begin{tabular}{lc} \hline
    just a single line & 2 \\ \hline
   \end{tabular}
   \end{table}

   \begin{table}
   \centering
   \contcaption{Concluded}
   \begin{tabular}{lc} \hline
    just a single line & 3 \\ \hline
   \end{tabular}
   \end{table}
 \end{lcode}

   \begin{table}
   \centering
   \caption{A multi-part table} \label{tab:m}
   \begin{tabular}{lc} \hline
    just a single line & 1 \\ \hline
   \end{tabular}
   \end{table}

   \begin{table}
   \centering
   \contcaption{Continued}
   \begin{tabular}{lc} \hline
    just a single line & 2 \\ \hline
   \end{tabular}
   \end{table}

   \begin{table}
   \centering
   \contcaption{Concluded}
   \begin{tabular}{lc} \hline
    just a single line & 3 \\ \hline
   \end{tabular}
   \end{table}

\index{caption!continuation|)}

\index{legend}
\index{caption!anonymous|(}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\legend}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
  The \cmd{\legend} command is intended to be used to put an 
 anonymous 
  caption into a float\index{float} environment, but may be used anywhere.

   \begin{table}
   \centering
   \caption{Another table} \label{tab:legend}
   \begin{tabular}{lc} \hline
    A legendary table & 5 \\
    with two lines    & 6 \\ \hline
   \end{tabular}
   \legend{The legend}
   \end{table}

    For example, the following code was used to produce the two-line
 \tref{tab:legend}. The \cmd{\legend} command can be used within a 
 float\index{float}
 independently of any \cmd{\caption} command.
 \begin{lcode}
   \begin{table}
   \centering
   \caption{Another table} \label{tab:legend}
   \begin{tabular}{lc} \hline
    A legendary table & 5 \\
    with two lines    & 6 \\ \hline
   \end{tabular}
   \legend{The legend}
   \end{table}
 \end{lcode}

     \marginpar{\legend{Title legend}
                This is a marginal note with a legend.}

  Captioned floats\index{float} are usually thought of in terms of the |table|
  and |figure|\index{figure} environments. There can be other kinds of 
float\index{float}.
  As perhaps a more interesting example, the following code produces
  the titled marginal\index{marginalia} note which should be displayed near here.
 \begin{lcode}
     \marginpar{\legend{Title legend}
                This is a marginal note with a legend.}
 \end{lcode}

 If you want the legend text to be included in the \listofx{}
 use the \cmd{\addcontentsline} command in conjunction with the 
 \cmd{\legend}. For example:
 \begin{lcode}
 \addcontentsline{lot}{table}{Titling text} % left justifified
 \addcontentsline{lot}{table}{\protect\numberline{}Titling text} % indented
 \end{lcode}
 The first of these forms will align the first line of the legend text
 under the normal table\index{table} numbers. The second form will align the first
 line of the legend text under the normal table\index{table} titles. In either case,
 second and later lines of a multi-line text will be aligned under
 the normal title lines.

   \begin{table}
   \centering
   \captiontitlefont{\sffamily}
   \legend{Legendary table}
   \addcontentsline{lot}{table}{Legendary table (toc 1)}
   \addcontentsline{lot}{table}{\protect\numberline{}
                                Legendary table (toc 2)}
   \begin{tabular}{lc} \hline
    An anonymous table & 5 \\
    with two lines     & 6 \\ \hline
   \end{tabular}
   \end{table}

 As an example, the \textsf{Legendary table} is produced by the following code:
 \begin{lcode}
   \begin{table}
   \centering
   \captiontitlefont{\sffamily}
   \legend{Legendary table}
   \addcontentsline{lot}{table}{Legendary table (toc 1)}
   \addcontentsline{lot}{table}{\protect\numberline{}Legendary table (toc 2)}
   \begin{tabular}{lc} \hline
    An anonymous table & 5 \\
    with two lines     & 6 \\ \hline
   \end{tabular}
   \end{table}
 \end{lcode}
 Look at the List of Tables to see how the two forms of \cmd{\addcontentsline}
 are typeset.

    As with the \cmd{\caption} command, the spacing before and after
 a legend is controlled by the \lnc{\abovecaptionskip} and 
\lnc{\belowcaptionskip} lengths. 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\namedlegend}\oarg{short-title}\marg{long-title} \\
\end{syntax}
 As a convenience, the \cmd{\namedlegend} 
 command is like the \cmd{\caption} command except that it does not number
 the caption and, by default, puts no entry into a \listofx{} file. Like
 the \cmd{\caption} command, it picks up the name to be prepended to the
 title text from the float\index{float} environment in which it is called (e.g.,
 it will use \cmd{\tablename} if called within a |table| environment). The
 following code is the source of the \textit{Named legendary table}.
 \begin{lcode}
 \begin{table}
 \centering
 \captionnamefont{\sffamily}
 \captiontitlefont{\itshape}
 \namedlegend{Named legendary table}
 \begin{tabular}{lr} \hline
 seven & VII \\
 eight & VIII \\ \hline
 \end{tabular}
 \end{table}
 \end{lcode}

 \begin{table}
 \centering
 \captionnamefont{\sffamily}
 \captiontitlefont{\itshape}
 \namedlegend{Named legendary table}
 \begin{tabular}{lr} \hline
 seven & VII \\
 eight & VIII \\ \hline
 \end{tabular}
 \end{table}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\flegtype}\marg{name} \\
\cmd{\flegtoctype}\marg{title} \\
\end{syntax}
 The macro \cmd{\flegtype}, where |type| is the name 
 of a float\index{float} environment
 (e.g., |table|) is called by the \cmd{\namedlegend} macro. It is provided
 as a hook that defines the \meta{name} to be used as the name in
 \cmd{\namedlegend}. Two defaults are provided, namely:
 \begin{lcode}
 \newcommand{\flegtable}{\tablename}
 \newcommand{\flegfigure}{\figurename}
 \end{lcode}
 which may be altered via \cmd{\renewcommand} if desired. 
 The macro \cmd{\flegtoctype}, where again |type| is the name 
 of a float\index{float} environment
 (e.g., |table|) is also called by the \cmd{\namedlegend} macro. It is provided
 as a hook that can be used to add \meta{title} to the \listofx.
 By default it is defined to do nothing, and can be changed via
\cmd{\renewcommand}. For instance, it could be changed for tables\index{table} as:
 \begin{lcode}
 \renewcommand{\flegtoctable}[1]{
   \addcontentsline{lot}{table}{#1}}
 \end{lcode}

  The \cmd{\legend} command produces a plain, unnumbered heading. It can also
 be useful sometimes to have named and numbered captions outside
 a floating\index{float} environment, perhaps in a |minipage| if you want the table\index{table}
 or picture\index{illustration} to appear at a precise location in your document.

\index{caption!anonymous|)}

\index{caption!fixed|(}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\newfixedcaption}\oarg{capcommand}\marg{command}\marg{float} \\
\cmd{\renewfixedcaption}\oarg{capcommand}\marg{command}\marg{float} \\
\cmd{\providefixedcaption}\oarg{capcommand}\marg{command}\marg{float} \\
\end{syntax}
 The \cmd{\newfixedcaption} 
 command, and its friends, can be used to create a new captioning
 \meta{command} that may be used outside the float\index{float} environment \meta{float}.
 Both the environment \meta{float} and a captioning command, 
 \meta{capcommand}, for that environment must have been defined before
 calling \cmd{\newfixedcaption}. Note that \cmd{\namedlegend} can be used
 as \meta{capcommand}.
 The \cmd{\renewfixedcaption} and \cmd{\providefixedcaption} commands take the same 
 arguments as \cmd{\newfixedcaption}; the three commands are analagous
 to those in the \cmd{\newcommand} family.

 For example, to define a new |\figcaption| command for captioning pictures
 outside the |figure|\index{figure} environment, do\\
 |\newfixedcaption{\figcaption}{figure}| \\
 The optional \meta{capcommand} argument is the name of the float\index{float}
 captioning command that is being aliased. It defaults to \cmd{\caption}.
 As another example, where the optional argument is required, if you
 want to create a new continuation caption command for non-floating
 tables\index{table}, say |\ctabcaption|, then do \\
 |\newfixedcaption[\contcaption]{\ctabcaption}{table}|

 Captioning commands created by \cmd{\newfixedcaption} will be named and
 numbered in the same style as the original \meta{capcommand}, can
 be given a \cmd{\label}, and will appear in the appropriate 
 \listofx. They can also be used within floating\index{float}
 environments, but will not use the environment name as a guide to
 the caption name or entry into the \listofx. For
 example, using |\ctabcaption| in a |figure|\index{figure} environment will still
 produce a \textbf{Table\ldots} named caption.

   Sometimes captions are required on the opposite page to a figure\index{figure}, and
 \cmd{\newfixedcaption} can be useful in this context. For example, if 
figure\index{figure}
 captions should be placed on an otherwise empty page immediately before
 the actual figure\index{figure}, then this can be accomplished by the following hack:
 \begin{lcode}
 \newfixedcaption{\figcaption}{figure}
  ...
 \afterpage{ % fill current page then flush pending floats
   \clearpage
   \begin{midpage}  %  vertically center the caption
   \figcaption{The caption} %  the caption
   \end{midpage}
   \clearpage
   \begin{figure}THE FIGURE, NO CAPTION HERE\end{figure}
   \clearpage
 }  % end of \afterpage
 \end{lcode}
 Note that the \Lpack{afterpage} package~\cite{AFTERPAGE} is required, 
which is part of the
 required tools bundle. The \Lpack{midpage} package supplies the |midpage|
 environment, which can be simply defined as:
 \begin{lcode}
 \newenvironment{midpage}{\vspace*{\fill}}{\vspace*{\fill}}
 \end{lcode}
 The code might need adjusting to meet your particular requirements.
 The \cmd{\cleartoevenpage} command ensures that you get to the next
 even-numbered page (the \cmd{\cleardoublepage} gets you to the next odd-numbered
 page and \cmd{\clearpage} gets you to the next page which may be odd or even).

\index{caption!fixed|)}

 \subsection{Bilingual captions}

\index{caption!bilingual|(}

    Some documents require bilingual (or more) captions. The class 
 provides a set of commands for bilingual captions. Extensions to the
 set, perhaps to support trilingual captioning, are left as an exercise
 for the document author.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\bitwonumcaption}\oarg{label}\marg{short1}\marg{long1}\marg{NAME}\marg{short2}\marg{long2} \\
\cmd{\bionenumcaption}\oarg{label}\marg{short1}\marg{long1}\marg{NAME}\marg{short2}\marg{long2} \\
\end{syntax}
  Bilingual captions can be typeset by the \cmd{\bitwonumcaption} 
 command which has six arguments. 
 The first, optional argument \meta{label}, is the name of a label, if
 required.
 \meta{short1} and \meta{long1} are the short (i.e., equivalent
 to the optional argument
 to the \cmd{\caption} command) and long caption texts for
 the main language of the document. The value of the \meta{NAME} argument
 is used as the caption name for the second language caption, while
 \meta{short2} and \meta{long2} are the short and long caption texts
 for the second language. For example, if the main and secondary languages
 are English and German and a figure\index{figure} is being captioned: \\
 |\bitwonumcaption{Short}{Long}{Bild}{Kurz}{Lang}| \\
  If the short title text(s) is not required, then leave the appropriate
 argument(s) either empty or as one or more spaces, like: \\
 |\bitwonumcaption[fig:bi1]{}{Long}{Bild}{  }{Lang}| \\
 Both language texts are entered into the appropriate \listofx,
 and both texts are numbered.

 Figure~\ref{fig:bi1} is an example of using the above code.
 \begin{figure}
 \centering
 EXAMPLE FIGURE WITH BITWONUMCAPTION
 \bitwonumcaption[fig:bi1]{}{Long \cs{bitwonumcaption}}{Bild}{  }{Lang \cs{bitwonumcaption}} 
 \end{figure}

  The \cmd{\bionenumcaption} command takes the same arguments as 
\cmd{\bitwonumcaption}.
 The difference between the two commands is that \cmd{\bionenumcaption} does
 not number the second language text in the \listofx.
 Figure~\ref{fig:bi3} is an example of using \cmd{\bionenumcaption}.
 \begin{figure}
 \centering
 EXAMPLE FIGURE WITH BIONENUMCAPTION
 \bionenumcaption[fig:bi3]{}{Long English \cs{bionenumcaption}}{Bild}{  }{Lang Deutsch \cs{bionenumcaption}} 
 \end{figure}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\bicaption}\oarg{label}\marg{short1}\marg{long1}\marg{NAME}\marg{long2} \\
\end{syntax}
  When bilingual captions are typeset via the \cmd{\bicaption} 
 command the second language text is not put into
 the \listofx. The command
 takes 5 arguments. 
 The optional \meta{label} is for a label if required.
 \meta{short1} and \meta{long1} are the short and long caption texts for
 the main language of the document. The value of the \meta{NAME} argument
 is used as the caption name for the second language caption. The last
 argument, \meta{long2}, is the caption text
 for the second language (which is not put into the \listofx). 
 For example, if the main and secondary languages
 are English and German: \\
 |\bicaption{Short}{Long}{Bild}{Langlauf}| \\
 If the short title text is not required, then leave the appropriate
 argument either empty or as one or more spaces.

 Figure~\ref{fig:bi2} is an example of using \cmd{\bicaption} and was 
 produced by the following code:
 \begin{lcode}
 \begin{figure}
 \centering
 EXAMPLE FIGURE WITH A RULED BICAPTION
 \precaption{\rule{\linewidth}{0.4pt}\par}
 \midbicaption{\precaption{}\postcaption{\rule{\linewidth}{0.4pt}}}
 \bicaption[fig:bi2]{Short English \cs{bicaption}}{Longingly}{Bild}{Langlauf}
 \end{figure}
 \end{lcode}

 \begin{figure}
 \centering
 EXAMPLE FIGURE WITH A RULED BICAPTION
 \precaption{\rule{\linewidth}{0.4pt}\par}
 \midbicaption{\precaption{}\postcaption{\rule{\linewidth}{0.4pt}}}
 \bicaption[fig:bi2]{Short English \cs{bicaption}}{Longingly}{Bild}{Langlauf}
 \end{figure}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\bicontcaption}\marg{long1}\marg{NAME}\marg{long2} \\
\end{syntax}
  Bilingual continuation captions can be typeset via the \cmd{\bicontcaption} 
 command. In this case, neither language text is put into
 the \listofx. The command
 takes 3 arguments.
 \meta{long1} is the caption text for
 the main language of the document. The value of the \meta{NAME} argument
 is used as the caption name for the second language caption. The last
 argument, \meta{long2}, is the caption text
 for the second language.
 For example, if the main and secondary languages
 are again English and German: \\
 |\bicontcaption{Continued}{Bild}{Fortgefahren}|

\begin{syntax}
 \cmd{\midbicaption}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
 The bilingual captions are implemented by calling \cmd{\caption} twice,
 once for each language. The command \cmd{\midbicaption}, 
 which is similar to the \cmd{\precaption} and \cmd{\postcaption} commands,
 is executed 
 just before calling the second \cmd{\caption}. Among other things,
 this can be used to
 modify the style of the second caption with respect to the first.
 For example, if there is a line above and below normal
 captions, it is probably undesirable to have a double line in the
 middle of a bilingual caption. So, for bilingual captions the
 following may be done within the float\index{float} before the caption:
 \begin{lcode}
 \precaption{\rule{\linewidth}{0.4pt}\par}
 \postcaption{}
 \midbicaption{\precaption{}\postcaption{\rule{\linewidth}{0.4pt}}}
 \end{lcode}
 This sets a line before the first of the two captions, then the
 \cmd{\midbicaption}{...} nulls the pre-caption line and adds a post-caption
 line for the second caption. The class initially specifies
 |\midbicaption{}|.

\index{caption!bilingual|)}

 \subsection{Subcaptions}

\index{caption!subcaption|(}

     The \Lpack{subfigure} package~\cite{SUBFIGURE} enables the captioning of 
sub-figures\index{figure!sub-} within a larger figure\index{figure}, 
and similarly for tables\index{table}. The \Lpack{subfigure} package may 
be used with the class, or you can use the class commands described below.
These commands can only be used inside a float environment for which a
subfloat\footnote{See \S\ref{sec:newsub} on \pref{sec:newsub}.}
has been specified.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\subcaption}\oarg{list-entry}\marg{subcaption} \\
\end{syntax}
The \cmd{\subcaption} command is similar to the \cmd{caption} command. It
typesets an identified \meta{subcaption}, where the identification is
an alphabetic character enclosed in parentheses. If the optional
\meta{list-entry} argument is present, \meta{list-entry} is added to
the caption listings for the float. If it is not present, then 
\meta{subcaption} is added to the listing. The \cmd{\subcaption} macro
should only be used in a fixed width box of some sort, for example
a |minipage| environment, as the \meta{subcaption} will be typeset using
a box which is the width of the environment.

    For example:
\begin{lcode}
\begin{figure}
  \centering
  \begin{minipage}{0.3\textwidth}
    \verb?Some verbatim text?
    \subcaption{First text}
  \end{minipage}
  \hfill
  \begin{minipage}{0.3\textwidth}
    \verb?More verbatim text?
    \subcaption{Second text}
  \end{minipage}
  \caption{Verbatim texts}
\end{figure}
\end{lcode}


If a 
figure that\index{figure}
 includes sub-figures\index{figure!sub-} is itself continued then it may be desireable to
 continue the captioning of the sub-figures. For example, if Figure~3
 has three sub-figures, say A, B and C, and Figure~3 is continued then
 the sub-figures\index{figure!sub-} in the continuation should be D, E, etc.
\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\contsubcaption}\oarg{list-entry}\marg{subcaption} \\
\end{syntax}
The \cmd{\contsubcaption} command is the continued version of 
\cmd{\subcaption}.


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\label}|(|\meta{bookmark}|)|\marg{key} \\
\cmd{\subcaptionref}\marg{key} \\
\end{syntax}
    A \cmd{\label} command may be included in the \meta{subcaption} argument
of \cmd{\subcaption} or \cmd{\contsubcaption}.
Using \cmd{\ref} to refer to the label will typeset the number of the float
(obtained from a labelled \cmd{\caption}) and the subcaption identifier. On
the other hand, using \cmd{\subcaptionref} will typeset just the subcaption
identifier.

    In case the \Lpack{hyperref} package is used, the \cmd{\label} 
command when used inside a \meta{subcaption} argument can take an optional
argument, \emph{enclosed in parentheses \emph{not} square brackets}, 
\meta{bookmark} which will create a bookmark field of the form
`Subfigure 3.2(c)'.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\tightsubcaptions} \cmd{\loosesubcations} \\
\end{syntax}
The \cmd{\tightsubcaptions} declaration will put little vertical space 
around the subcaption, while \cmd{\loosesubcaptions} will add more
whitespace. The default is \cmd{\tightsubcaptions}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\subcaptionsize}\marg{font-size} \\
\cmd{\subcaptionlabelfont}\marg{fontspec} \\
\cmd{\subcaptionfont}\marg{fontspec} \\
\end{syntax}
The size of the font used for subcaptions is set by \cmd{\subcaptionsize}.
The default is:
\begin{lcode}
\subcaptionsize{\footnotesize}
\end{lcode}
The fonts used for the identifier and the subcaption are set by
\cmd{\subcaptionlabelfont} and \cmd{\subcaptionfont}, respectively,
where \meta{fontspec} is one or more font style declarations (e.g., 
|\bfseries\slshape| for a bold, slanted font).
The defaults are:
\begin{lcode}
\subcaptionlabelfont{\normalfont}
\subcaptionfont{\normalfont}
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\subcaptionstyle}\marg{style} \\
\end{syntax}
 By default the identifier and title of a subcaption are typeset as a block 
(non-indented) paragraph\index{paragraph!block}. 
\cmd{\subcaptionstyle} can be used to alter this.
Sensible values for \meta{style} are: \cmd{\centering}, \cmd{\raggedleft} or
\cmd{\raggedright} for styles corresponding to these declarations. 
The \cmd{\centerlastline} style gives a block 
paragraph\index{paragraph!block} but with the last line centered.
The class initially specifies |\subcaptionstyle{}|
to give the normal block paragraph style.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\hangsubcaption} \\
\cmd{\shortsubcaption} \\
\cmd{\normalsubcaption} \\
\end{syntax}
 The \cmd{\hangsubcaption} declaration causes subcaptions to be typeset 
with the identifier above the title. With the \cmd{\shortsubcaption}
declaration subcaptions that are less than one line in length are 
typeset left justified instead of centered.
The \cmd{\normalsubcaption} command undoes any previous 
\cmd{\hangsubcaption} or \cmd{\shortsubcaption} command.
The class initially specifies \cmd{\normalcaption}.

\begin{syntax}
 \cmd{\subtop}\oarg{list-entry}\oarg{subcaption}\marg{text} \\
 \cmd{\subbottom}\oarg{list-entry}\oarg{subcaption}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
 The command \cmd{\subtop} puts a subcaption number on top of
the \meta{text}. If both optional arguments are present, \meta{list-entry}
will be added to the appropriate listing, and an alphabetic identifier
and \meta{subcaption} will be placed above \meta{text}. If only one
optional argument is present, this is treated as \meta{subcaption}; the
identifier and \meta{subcaption} are placed above \meta{text} and
\meta{subcaption} is added to the listing. In all cases, the identifier
is placed above \meta{text} and added to the listing.

    The \cmd{\subbottom} command is similar, except that the identifier
and any \meta{subcaption} is placed below the \meta{text}.

    The main caption can be at either the top or the bottom of the float.

    For example:
\begin{lcode}
\begin{figure}
\subbottom{...} %  captioned as (a) below
\subtop{...}    %  captioned as (b) above
\caption{...}
\end{figure}
\end{lcode}

    As another example, \fref{subfig:sf} and the next paragraph
was produced by the code below.

\begin{figure}
\centering
\subbottom[Subfigure 1]{\fbox{SUBFIGURE ONE}\label{sf:1}}
\hfill
\subbottom[Subfigure 2]{\fbox{SUBFIGURE TWO}\label{sf:2}}
\caption{Figure with two subfigures} \label{subfig:sf}
\end{figure}

    Figure \ref{subfig:sf} has two subfigures, namely \ref{sf:1}
and \subcaptionref{sf:2}.

\begin{lcode}
    Figure \ref{subfig:sf} has two subfigures, namely \ref{sf:1}
and \subcaptionref{sf:2}.
\begin{figure}
\centering
\subbottom[Subfigure 1]{\fbox{SUBFIGURE ONE}\label{sf:1}}
\hfill
\subbottom[Subfigure 2]{\fbox{SUBFIGURE TWO}\label{sf:2}}
\caption{Figure with two subfigures} \label{subfig:sf}
\end{figure}
\end{lcode}


    The major difference between the \cmd{\subcaption} command and the
\cmd{\subtop} and \cmd{\subbottom} commands, apart from the \meta{text}
argument, is that \cmd{\subcaption}
must be used in a fixed width environment while \cmd{\subtop} uses
the width of \meta{text} for the box in which to typeset the
\meta{subcaption}.

\begin{syntax}
 \cmd{\contsubtop}\oarg{list-entry}\oarg{subcaption}\marg{text} \\
 \cmd{\contsubbottom}\oarg{list-entry}\oarg{subcaption}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
  The command \cmd{\contsubtop} 
 will continue the sub-caption numbering scheme across (continued) floats\index{float},
 putting the \meta{subcaption} at the top of the \meta{text}.
 The \cmd{\contsubbottom} command is similar but puts the \meta{subcaption}
 at the bottom of the \meta{text}. In either case, the main caption can 
 be at the top or bottom of the float\index{float}.

    For example:
\begin{lcode}
 \begin{table}
 \caption{...}
 \subtop{...}  % captioned as (a) above
 \subtop{...}  % captioned as (b) above
 \end{table}
 ...
 \begin{table}
 \contcaption{Concluded}
 \contsubtop{...} % captioned as (c) above
 \contsubtop{...} % captioned as (d) above
 \end{table}
 \end{lcode}

    As with the \cmd{\subcaption} command, a \cmd{\label} command may be
used in either the \meta{subcaption} or the \meta{text} arguments to
\cmd{\subtop} and friends.


\index{caption!subcaption|)}

 \subsection{How LaTeX makes captions} \label{sec:ltx}

\index{caption!LaTeX methods|(}

 This section provides an overview of how LaTeX creates captions and
 gives some examples of how to change the captioning style without
 having to use any package. 
 The section need not be looked at more than once unless you like 
 reading LaTeX code
 or you want to make changes to LaTeX's style of captioning.

 The LaTeX kernel provides tools to help in the definition of captions,
 but it is the particular class that decides on their format.

\begin{syntax}
 \cmd{\caption}\oarg{short}\marg{long} \\
\end{syntax}
 The kernel (in \file{ltfloat.dtx}) defines the caption command via 
\begin{lcode}
\def\caption{\refstepcounter\@captype \@dblarg{\@caption\@captype}}
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
 \cmd{\@captype} \\
\end{syntax}
 \cmd{\@captype} is defined by the code that creates a new float\index{float} environment
 and is set to the environment's name (see the code for |\@xfloat|
 in \file{ltfloat.dtx}). For a |figure| environment,
 there is an equivalent to 
\begin{lcode}
\def\@captype{figure}
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
 \cmd{\@caption}\marg{type}\oarg{short}\marg{long} \\
\end{syntax}
 The kernel also provides the \cmd{\@caption} macro as:
\begin{lcode}
 \long\def\@caption#1[#2]#3{
   \par
   \addcontentsline{\csname ext@#1\endcsname}{#1}    <--
     {\protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}{\ignorespaces #2}}
   \begingroup
      \@parboxrestore
      \if@minipage
        \@setminipage
      \fi
      \normalsize
      \@makecaption{\csname fnum@#1\endcsname}{\ignorespaces #3}\par  <--
   \endgroup}
 \end{lcode}
 where \meta{type} is the name of the environment in which the caption
 will be used.
 Putting these three commands together results in the user's view of the caption
 command as |\caption[|\meta{short}|]{|\meta{long}|}|.

 It is the responsibilty of the class (or package) which defines floats\index{float}
 to provide definitions for \cmd{\ext@type}, \cmd{\fnum@type} and 
\cmd{\@makecaption}
 which appear in the definition of \cmd{\@caption} (in the lines marked
 |<--| above).

\begin{syntax}
 \cmd{\ext@type} \\
\end{syntax}
 This macro holds the name of the extension for a \listofx{} file.
 For example for the |figure| float\index{float} environment there is the
 definition equivalent to 
\begin{lcode}
 \newcommand{\ext@figure}{lof}
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
 \cmd{\fnum@type} \\
\end{syntax}
 This macro is responsible for typesetting the caption number. For example,
 for the |figure| environment there is the definition equivalent to
\begin{lcode}
 \newcommand{\fnum@figure}{\figurename~\thefigure}
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
 \cmd{\@makecaption}\marg{number}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
 The \cmd{\@makecaption} macro, where \meta{number}
 is a string such as `Table~5.3' and \meta{text} is the caption text,
 performs the typesetting of the caption, and
 is defined in the standard classes (in \file{classes.dtx}) as the
 equivalent of:
\begin{lcode}
 \newcommand{\@makecaption}[2]{
   \vskip\abovecaptionskip         <- 1
   \sbox\@tempboxa{#1: #2}        <- 2
   \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize
     #1: #2\par                    <- 3
   \else
     \global \@minipagefalse
     \hb@xt@\hsize{\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}
   \fi
   \vskip\belowcaptionskip}        <- 4
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
 \lnc{\abovecaptionskip}
 \lnc{\belowcaptionskip} \\
\end{syntax}
  Vertical space is added before and after a caption (lines marked 1 and 4
 in the code for \cmd{\@makecaption} above) and the amount of space is given
 by the lengths \lnc{\abovecaptionskip} and \lnc{\belowcaptionskip}. The
 standard classes set these to 10pt and 0pt respectively. If you want
 to change the space before or after a caption, use \cmd{\setlength} to change
 the values. In figures\index{figure}, the caption is usually placed below the
 illustration\index{illustration}. The actual space between the bottom of the illustration\index{illustration}
 and the baseline of the first line of the caption
 is the \lnc{\abovecaptionskip} plus the \lnc{\parskip} plus the \lnc{\baselineskip}.
 If the illustration\index{illustration} is in a |center| environment then additional space
 will be added by the |\end{center}|; it is usually better to use 
 the \cmd{\centering} command rather than the |center| environment.

 The actual typesetting of a caption is effectively performed by the code
 in lines marked 2 and 3 in the code for \cmd{\@makecaption}; note that
 these are where the colon that is typeset after the number is specified. 
 If you want to
 make complex changes to the default captioning style you may have to
 create your own version of \cmd{\@caption} using 
 \cmd{\renewcommand}. On the other hand, many such changes can be achieved
 by changing the definition of the 
 the appropriate \cmd{\fnum@type} command(s). For example, to make the 
 figure\index{figure} name and number bold: 
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\fnum@figure}{\textbf{\figurename~\thefigure}}
\end{lcode}

 REMEMBER: If you are doing anything involving commands that include
 the |@| character, and it's not in a class or package file, you have
 to do it within a \cmd{\makeatletter} and \cmd{\makeatother} pairing. So,
 if you modify the \cmd{\fnum@figure} command anywhere in your document
 it has to be done as:
\begin{lcode}
 \makeatletter
 \renewcommand{\fnum@figure}{......}
 \makeatother
\end{lcode}

 \makeatletter
 \renewcommand{\fnum@figure}{\textsc{\figurename~\thefigure}}
 \makeatother
 \begin{figure}
 \centering
 A THOUSAND WORDS\ldots
 \caption{A picture is worth a thousand words}\label{fig:sc}
 \end{figure}

 As an example, \fref{fig:sc} was created by the following code:
\begin{lcode}
 \makeatletter
 \renewcommand{\fnum@figure}{\textsc{\figurename~\thefigure}}
 \makeatother
 \begin{figure}
 \centering
 A THOUSAND WORDS\ldots
 \caption{A picture is worth a thousand words}\label{fig:sc}
 \end{figure}
\end{lcode}

 As another example, suppose that you needed to typeset the \cmd{\figurename}
 and its number in a bold font, replace the colon that normally appears
 after the number by a long dash, and typeset the actual title text in
 a sans-serif font, as is illustrated by the caption for 
 \fref{fig:sf}. The following code does this.

 \makeatletter
 \renewcommand{\fnum@figure}[1]{\textbf{\figurename~\thefigure} --- \sffamily}
 \makeatother
 \begin{figure}
  \centering
  ANOTHER THOUSAND WORDS\ldots
 \caption{A different kind of figure caption}\label{fig:sf}
 \end{figure}

\begin{lcode}
 \makeatletter
 \renewcommand{\fnum@figure}[1]{\textbf{\figurename~\thefigure} 
                                --- \sffamily}
 \makeatother
 \begin{figure}
  \centering
  ANOTHER THOUSAND WORDS\ldots
 \caption{A different kind of figure caption}\label{fig:sf}
 \end{figure}
\end{lcode}
 Perhaps a little description of how this works is in order.
 Doing a little bit of TeX 's macro processing by hand, the typesetting
 lines in \cmd{\@makecaption} (lines 2 and 3) get instantiated like: \\
 |\fnum@figure{\figurename~\thefigure}: text| \\
 Redefining \cmd{\fnum@figure} to take one argument and then not using the
 value of the argument essentially gobbles up the colon. Using \\
 |\textbf{\figurename~\thefigure}| \\
 in the definition causes \cmd{\figurename} and the number to be typeset in
 a bold font. After this comes the long dash. Finally, putting \cmd{\sffamily}
 at the end of the redefinition causes any following text (i.e., the actual 
 title) to be typeset using the sans-serif font.

 If you do modify \cmd{\@makecaption}, then spaces in the definition may be
 important; also you must use the comment (\%) character in the same
 places as I have done above. Hopefully, though, the class provides the
tools that you need to make most, if not all, of any likely caption styles.

\index{caption!LaTeX methods|)}


 \subsection{Captions with footnotes}

\index{caption!footnote|(}
\index{footnote!in caption|(}

    If you want to have a caption with a footnote, think long and hard
 as to whether this is really essential. It is not normally considered
 to be good typographic practice, and to rub the point in LaTeX does not
 make it necessarily easy to do. However, if you (or your publisher)
 insists, read on.

    If it is present, the optional argument to \cmd{\caption} is put into
 the \lof/lot{} as appropriate. If the argument is not present, then the
 text of the required argument is put into the \lof. In the first case,
 the optional argument is moving, and in the second case the required
 argument is moving. The \cmd{\footnote} command is fragile and must be
 |\protect|ed (i.e., |\protect\footnote{}|) if it is used in a moving 
 argument. If you don't want the footnote to appear in 
the \lof, use a
 footnoteless optional argument and a footnoted required argument.

   You will probably be surprised if you just do, for example:
 \begin{lcode}
 \begin{figure}
 ...
 \caption[For LoF]{For figure\footnote{The footnote}}
 \end{figure}
 \end{lcode}
 because (a) the footnote number may be greater than you thought, and (b)
 the footnote text has vanished. This latter is because LaTeX won't typeset
 footnotes from a float\index{float}. To get an actual footnote within the float you
 have to use a minipage, like:
 \begin{lcode}
 \begin{figure}
 \begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
 ...
 \caption[For LoF]{For figure\footnote{The footnote}}
 \end{minipage}
 \end{figure}
 \end{lcode}
 If you are using the standard classes you may now find that you get two 
footnotes for the price of one. Fortunately this will not occur with this 
class, nor will an unexpected increase of the footnote number.

    When using a minipage as above, the footnote text is typeset at the
 bottom of the minipage (i.e., within the float\index{float}). If you want the footnote
 text typeset at the bottom of the page, then you have to use the
 \cmd{\footnotemark} and \cmd{\footnotetext} commands like:
 \begin{lcode}
 \begin{figure}
 ...
 \caption[For LoF]{For figure\footnotemark}
 \end{figure}
 \footnotetext{The footnote}
 \end{lcode}
 This will typeset the argument of the \cmd{\footnotetext} command at the
 bottom of the page where you called the command. Of course, the figure\index{figure}
 might have floated\index{float} to a later page, and then it's a matter of some
 manual fiddling to get everything on the same page, and possibly
 to get the footnote marks\index{footnote!mark} to match correctly with the footnote text.

 At this point, you are on your own.

\index{footnote!in caption|)}
\index{caption!footnote|)}


\index{caption|)}

\section{Floats}


 \subsection{New float environments}

\index{float!new|(}

\begin{syntax}
 \cmd{\newfloat}\oarg{within}\marg{fenv}\marg{ext}\marg{capname} \\
\end{syntax}
 The \cmd{\newfloat} command 
 creates two new floating environments called \meta{fenv} and \meta{fenv*}. 
If there
is not already a counter defined for \meta{fenv} a new one will be created
to be restarted by \meta{within}, if that is specified.
 A caption within
 the environment will be written out to a file with extension \meta{ext}.
 The caption, if present, will start with \meta{capname}. For example, 
the |figure| float for the class is defined as:
\begin{lcode}
\newfloat[chapter]{figure}{lof}{\figurename}
\renewcommmand{\thefigure}{%
  \ifnum\c@chapter>\z@ \thechapter.\fi \@arabic\c@figure}
\end{lcode}
The last bit of the definition is internal code to make sure that if a
figure\index{figure} is in the document before chapter numbering starts, then the figure\index{figure}
number will not be preceded by a non-existent chapter number.


 The captioning style for floats defined with \cmd{\newfloat} is the same as
 for the figures\index{figure} and tables\index{table}.

    The \cmd{\newfloat} command generates several new commands, some of
which are internal LaTeX commands. For convenience, assume that the command
was called as 
\begin{lcode}
\newfloat{X}{Z}{capname}
\end{lcode}
 so |X| is the name of the float
environment and also the name of the counter for the caption, and |Z| is
the file extension.
The following float environment and related commands are then created.

\begin{syntax}
\senv{X} float material \eenv{X} \\
\senv{X*} float material \eenv{X*} \\
\end{syntax}
 The new float environment is called |X|, and can be used as either
 |\begin{X}| or |\begin{X*}|, with the matching |\end{X}| or |\end{X*}|.
It is given the standard default position specification of |tbp|.

\begin{syntax}
 \Icn{Zdepth} \\
\end{syntax}
 The \Icn{Zdepth} counter is analogous to the standard \Icn{tocdepth} counter
 in that it specifies that entries in a listing should not be
 typeset if their numbering level is greater than \Icn{Zdepth}. The
 default definition is |\setcounter{Zdepth}{1}|. To have a subfloat
 of |Z| appear in the listing do |\setcounter{Zdepth}{2}|.


    As a fuller example, suppose you wanted both 
 figures\index{figure} (which come with the
 class), and diagrams. You could then do something like the following.
 \begin{lcode}
 \newcommand{\diagramname}{Diagram}
 \newcommand{\listdiagramname}{List of Diagrams}
 \newlistof{listofdiagrams}{dgm}{\listdiagramname}
 \newfloat{diagram}{dgm}{\diagramname}
 \newfixedcaption{\fdiagcaption}{diagram}
 \newlistentry{diagram}{dgm}{0}
 \begin{document}
 ...
 \listoffigures
 \listfofdiagrams
 ...
 \begin{diagram}
 \caption{A diagram} \label{diag1}
 ...
 \end{diagram}
 As diagram~\ref{diag1} shows ...
 \begin{minipage}{.9\textwidth}
 \fdiagcaption{Another diagram} \label{diag2}
 ...
 \end{minipage}

 In contrast to diagram~\ref{diag1}, diagram~\ref{diag2} provides ...
 \end{lcode}

    As a word of warning, if you mix both floats and fixed environments with the
 same kind of caption you have to ensure that they get printed in the correct
 order in the final document. If you do not do this, then the \listofx{} 
 captions will come out in the wrong order (the lists are ordered according the
 page number in the typeset document, \emph{not} your source input order).

\index{float!new|)}


\subsection{New subfloats} \label{sec:newsub}

\index{subfloat!new|(}

    The \Lpack{subfigure} package defines the |subfigure| and |subtable|
subfloats. The class does not define any subfloats, if you need them you have
to specify them yourself.

\begin{syntax}
 \cmd{\newsubfloat}\marg{fenv} \\
\end{syntax}
 The \cmd{\newsubfloat} command enables the subcaptioning commands
(\cmd{\subcaption}, \cmd{\subtop}, etc.) to be used within the float 
environment \meta{fenv} previously defined via 
|\newfloat|.

    Calling |\newsubfloat{fenv}| will, among other things,
create a new counter called |subfenv| and the command |\thesubfenv| 
for typesetting the counter. The default definition of |\thesubfenv|
is equivalent to:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\thesubfenv}{(\alph{subfenv})}
\end{lcode}
which typesets a lowercase letter enclosed in parentheses. This is
the identifier for subcaptions, and may be changed via \cmd{\renewcommand}.

    If you are not using the \Lpack{subfigure} package and want, say, 
subfigures then in the preamble call:
\begin{lcode}
\newsubfloat{figure}
\end{lcode}
and if you want the subcaptions to appear in the List of Figures, put:
\begin{lcode}
\setcounter{lofdepth}{2}
\end{lcode}
between the |\begin{document}| and \cmd{\listoffigures} commands.

    Further, if you had some subfigures that were originally planned
for use with the \Lpack{subfigure} package and wanted to use these
but without the package, you could:
\begin{lcode}
\let\subfigure\subbottom
\end{lcode}
which will make |\subfigure| an alias for \cmd{\subbottom}.

\index{subfloat!new|)}


 \subsection{Multiple floats}

\index{float!multiple|(}

     As far as LaTeX is concerned, a float is a box with certain 
 restrictions as to where it can be placed. You can effectively 
 put what you like inside a float box. Normally there is just a single
 picture or tabular in a float but you can put as many of these as will
 fit inside the box.

 \begin{figure}
 \centering
 \hspace*{\fill} 
   {ILLUSTRATION 1} \hfill {ILLUSTRATION 2} 
 \hspace*{\fill}
 \caption{Float with two illustrations} \label{fig:mult1}
 \end{figure}

    Three typical cases of multiple figures\index{figure}/tables\index{table} in a single
 float come to mind:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item Multiple illustrations\index{illustration}/tabulars with a single caption.
 \item Multiple illustrations\index{illustration}/tabulars each individually captioned.
 \item Multiple illustrations\index{illustration}/tabulars with one main caption and
       individual subcaptions.
 \end{itemize}

    The \Lpack{subfigure} package is designed for the last of these cases;
 the others do not require a package.

    Figure~\ref{fig:mult1} is an example of multiple illustrations\index{illustration} 
 in a single float with a single caption.
     This figure was produced by the following code.
 \begin{lcode}
 \begin{figure}
 \centering
 \hspace*{\fill} 
   {ILLUSTRATION 1} \hfill {ILLUSTRATION 2} 
 \hspace*{\fill}
 \caption{Float with two illustrations} \label{fig:mult1}
 \end{figure}
 \end{lcode}
 The |\hspace*{\fill}| and |\hfill| commands were used to space the two
 illustrations\index{illustration} equally. Of course |\includegraphics| or |tabular|
 environments could just as well
 be used instead of the |{ILLUSTRATION N}| text.

    The following code produces \figurerefname s~\ref{fig:mult2} and~\ref{fig:mult3}
 which are examples of two separately captioned illustrations\index{illustration} in one
 float.
 \begin{lcode}
 \begin{figure}
 \centering
 \begin{minipage}{0.4\textwidth}
   \centering
   ILLUSTRATION 3
   \caption{Illustration 3} \label{fig:mult2}
 \end{minipage} 
 \hfill
 \begin{minipage}{0.4\textwidth}
   \centering
   ILLUSTRATION 4
   \caption{Illustration 4} \label{fig:mult3}
 \end{minipage} 
 \end{figure}
 \end{lcode}
 In this case the illustrations\index{illustration} (or graphics or tabulars) are put into
 separate |minipage| environments within the float, and the captions
 are also put within the |minipage|s. Note that any required |\label|
 must also be inside the |minipage|. If you wished, you could add yet
 another caption after the end of the two |minipage|s.

 \begin{figure}
 \centering
 \begin{minipage}{0.4\textwidth}
   \centering
   ILLUSTRATION 3
   \caption{Illustration 3} \label{fig:mult2}
 \end{minipage} 
 \hfill
 \begin{minipage}{0.4\textwidth}
   \centering
   ILLUSTRATION 4
   \caption{Illustration 4} \label{fig:mult3}
 \end{minipage} 
 \end{figure}

  Keith Reckdahl~\cite{EPSLATEX} provides more examples of this
 kind of thing.

\index{float!multiple|)}


 \subsection{Where LaTeX puts floats}

\index{float!placement|(}

 The general format for a float environment is: \\
 |\begin{float}[|\meta{loc}|] ... \end{float}| or for double column\index{column!double} floats: \\
 |\begin{float*}[|\meta{loc}|] ... \end{float*}| \\
 where the optional argument \meta{loc}, consisting of one or more characters,
 specifies a location where the float may be placed. Note that the 
 \Lpack{multicol}\index{column!multiple} package~\cite{MULTICOL} 
only supports the starred floats and it will not 
 let you have a single column\index{column!single} float. The possible \meta{loc} values are one
 or more of the following:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item[\texttt{b}] \textit{bottom}: at the bottom of a page. This does not apply
 to double column\index{column!double} floats as they may only be placed at the top of a page.
 \item[\texttt{h}] \textit{here}: if possible exactly where the float environment
 is defined. It does not apply to double column\index{column!double} floats.
 \item[\texttt{p}] \textit{page}: on a separate page containing only 
 floats (no text).
 \item[\texttt{t}] \textit{top}: at the top of a page. 
 \item[\texttt{!}] make an extra effort to place the float at the earliest place
  specified by the rest of the argument.
 \end{itemize}
 The default for \meta{loc} is |tbp|, so the float may be placed at the top, 
 or bottom, or on a float-only page; the default works well 95\% of the time.
  Floats of the same kind are output in
 definition order, except that a double column\index{column!double} float may be output before
 a later single column\index{column!single} float of the same kind, or 
 \textit{vice-versa}\footnote{This little quirk
 is fixed by the \Lpack{fixltx2e} package, at least for tables and figures.
 The package is part of a normal LaTeX distribution.}. 
 A float is never put on
 an earlier page than its definition but may be put on the same or later page
 of its definition. If a float cannot be placed, all
 suceeding floats will be held up, and LaTeX can store no more than 16 held
 up floats. A float cannot
 be placed if it would cause an overfull page, or it otherwise cannot be fitted
 according the the float parameters.
 A |\clearpage| or |\cleardoublepage| or |\end{document}| flushes
 out all unprocessed floats, irrespective of the \meta{loc} and float
 parameters, putting them on float-only pages. 

\begin{syntax}
 \cmd{\suppressfloats}\oarg{pos} \\
\end{syntax}
    You can use the command \cmd{\suppressfloats} to suppress floats
 at a given \meta{pos} on the current page. |\suppressfloats[t]| prevents
 any floats at the top of the page and |\suppressfloats[b]| prevents any
 floats at the bottom of the page. The simple |\suppressfloats| prevents
 both top and bottom floats.

    The \Lpack{flafter} package, which should have come with your LaTeX
 distribution, provides a means of preventing floats from moving
 backwards from their definition position in the text. This can be useful to
 ensure, for example, that a float early in a |\section{}| is not typeset before
 the section heading\index{heading}.

\begin{figure}
\centering
\drawparameterstrue
\drawfloatpage
\caption{Float and text page parameters}\label{fig:fpp}
\end{figure}

\begin{figure}
\centering
\drawparameterstrue
\setlayoutscale{0.9}
\drawfloat
\caption{Float parameters}\label{fig:flp}
\end{figure}

 \begin{table}
\begin{adjustwidth}{-1cm}{-1cm}
 \centering
 \captionnamefont{\small\sffamily}
 \captiontitlefont{\small\sffamily}
 \setlength{\belowcaptionskip}{10pt}
 \caption{Float placement parameters}\label{tab:fpp}
 \begin{tabular}{lp{0.5\linewidth}r} \hline
 Parameter & Controls & Default \\ \hline
 \multicolumn{3}{c}{Counters --- change with \cs{setcounter} } \\ \hline
 \Icn{topnumber}  & max number of floats at top of a page & 2 \\
 \Icn{bottomnumber} & max number of floats at bottom of a page & 1 \\
 \Icn{totalnumber} & max number of floats on a text page & 3 \\
 \Icn{dbltopnumber} & like \Icn{topnumber} for double column\index{column!double} floats & 2 \\ \hline
 \multicolumn{3}{c}{Commands --- change with \cs{renewcommand} } \\ \hline
 \cmd{\topfraction} & max fraction of page reserved for top floats & 0.7 \\
 \cmd{\bottomfraction} & max fraction of page reserved for bottom floats & 0.3 \\
 \cmd{\textfraction} & min fraction of page that must have text & 0.2 \\
 \cmd{\dbltopfraction} & like \cmd{\topfraction} for double column\index{column!double} floats & 0.7 \\
 \cmd{\floatpagefraction} & min fraction of a float page that must have float(s) & 0.5 \\
 \cmd{\dblfloatpagefraction} & like \cmd{\floatpagefraction} for double column\index{column!double} floats & 0.5 \\ \hline
 \multicolumn{3}{c}{Text page lengths --- change with \cs{setlength} } \\ \hline
 \lnc{\floatsep} & vertical space between floats & 12pt \\
 \lnc{\textfloatsep} & vertical space between a top (bottom) float and suceeding (preceding) text & 20pt  \\
 \lnc{\intextsep} & vertical space above and below an \texttt{h} float & 12pt \\
 \lnc{\dblfloatsep} & like \lnc{\floatsep} for double column\index{column!double} floats & 12pt \\
 \lnc{\dbltextfloatsep} & like  \lnc{\textfloatsep} for double column\index{column!double} floats & 20pt \\ \hline
 \multicolumn{3}{c}{Float page lengths --- change with \cs{setlength} } \\ \hline
 \lnc{\@fptop} & space at the top of the page & |0pt plus 1fil| \\
 \lnc{\@fpsep} & space between floats & |8pt plus 2fil| \\
 \lnc{\@fpbot} & space at the bottom of the page & |0pt plus 1fil| \\
 \lnc{\@dblfptop} & like \lnc{\@fptop} for double column\index{column!double} floats & |0pt plus 1fil| \\
 \lnc{\@dblfpsep} & like \lnc{\@fpsep} for double column\index{column!double} floats & |8pt plus 2fil| \\
 \lnc{\@dblfpbot} & like \lnc{\@fpbot} for double column\index{column!double} floats & |0pt plus 1fil| \\ \hline
 \end{tabular}
\end{adjustwidth}
 \end{table}

 Figures~\ref{fig:fpp} and~\ref{fig:flp} illustrate the many float parameters
and \tref{tab:fpp} lists the float parameters and the typical 
 standard default values. All the lengths are rubber lengths, and the actual 
 defaults depend on both the class and its size option.

    Given the displayed defaults, the height of a top float must be 
 less than 70\% of the textheight and there can be no more than 2 top floats
 on a text page. Similarly, the height of a bottom float must not
 exceed 30\% of the textheight and there can be no more than 1 bottom
 float on a text page. There can be no more than 3 floats (top, bottom and here)
 on the page. At least 20\% of a text page with floats must be text.
 On a float page (one that has no text, only floats) the sum of the heights
 of the floats must be at least 50\% of the textheight. The floats on a float
 page should be vertically centered.

    It can be seen that with the defaults LaTeX might have trouble finding
 a place for a float. Consider what will happen if a float is a bottom float
 whose height is 40\% of the textheight and this is followed by a float whose
 height is 90\% of the textheight. The first is too large to actually go at the
 bottom of a text page but too small to go on a float page by itself. The second
 has to go on a float page but it is too large to share the float page with the
 first float. LaTeX is stuck!

    At this point it is worthwhile to be precise about the effect of a
 one character \meta{loc} argument:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item[\texttt{[b]}] means: `put the float at the bottom of a page with some
      text above it, and nowhere else'. The float must fit into the 
      |\bottomfraction| space otherwise it and subsequent floats will be held up.
 \item[\texttt{[h]}] means: `put the float at this point and nowhere else'.
      The float must fit into the space left on the page otherwise it and 
      subsequent floats will be held up.
 \item[\texttt{[p]}] means: `put the float on a page that has no text but may
      have other floats on it'. There must be at least `|\floatpagefraction|'
      worth of floats to go on a float only page before the float will be
      be output.
 \item[\texttt{[t]}] means: `put the float at the top of a page with some
      text below it, and nowhere else'. The float must fit into the 
      |\topfraction| space otherwise it and subsequent floats will be held up.
 \item[\texttt{[!...]}] means: `ignore the |\...fraction| values for this
      float'.
 \end{itemize}

 You must try and pick a combination from these that will let LaTeX find
 a place to put your floats. However, you can 
 also can change the float parameters to make it easier to find places
 to put floats. Some examples are:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item Decrease \cmd{\textfraction} to get more `float' on a text page, but
 the sum of \cmd{\textfraction} and \cmd{\topfraction} and the sum of \cmd{\textfraction}
 and \cmd{\bottomfraction} should not exceed 1.0, otherwise the placement algorithm
 falls apart. A minimum value for \cmd{\textfraction} is about 0.10 --- a page
 with less than 10\% text looks better with no text at all, just floats.

 \item Both \cmd{\topfraction} and \cmd{\bottomfraction} can be increased, and it does
 not matter if their sum exceeds 1.0. A good typographic style is that floats
 are encouraged to go at the top of a page, and a better balance is achieved
 if the float space on a page is larger
 at the top than the bottom.

 \item Making \cmd{\floatpagefraction} too small might have the effect of a
 float page just having one small float. However, to make sure that a float
 page never has more than one float on it, do: 
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\floatpagefraction}{0.01}
\setlength{\@fpsep}{\textheight}
\end{lcode}

 \item Setting \lnc{\@fptop} to |0pt|, \lnc{\@fpsep} to |8pt| and \lnc{\@fpbot}
 to |0pt plus 1fil| will force floats on a float page to start at the top
 of the page.
 \end{itemize}
 If you are experimenting, a reasonable starting position is:
 \begin{lcode}
 \setcounter{topnumber}{3}
 \setcounter{bottomnumber}{2}
 \setcounter{totalnumber}{4}
 \renewcommand{\topfraction}{0.85}
 \renewcommand{\bottomfraction}{0.5}
 \renewcommand{\textfraction}{0.15}
 \renewcommand{\floatpagefraction}{0.7}
 \end{lcode}
 and similarly for double column\index{column!double} floats if you will have any. Actually, don't
bother to try these settings as they are the default for this class.

    One of LaTeX's little quirks is that on a text page, the `height' of a float
 is its actual height plus \lnc{\textfloatsep} or \lnc{\floatsep}, while on a float
 page the `height' is the actual height. This means that when using the default
 \meta{loc} of |[tbp]| at least one of the text page float fractions 
 (\cmd{\topfraction} and/or \cmd{\bottomfraction}) must be
 larger than the \cmd{\floatpagefraction} by an amount sufficient to take account
 of the maximum text page separation value.
 
\index{float!placement|)}

%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\DeleteShortVerb{\|}
\MakeShortVerb{\=}
%%%%\input{tabmanbody}  %% rows & columns
%%%%  tabmanbody.tex

 \chapter{Rows and columns}

\section{Introduction}

    The class provides extensions to the standard \Ie{array} and \Ie{tabular}
environments. These are based partly on a merging of the
 \Lpack{array}~\cite{ARRAY}, 
 \Lpack{dcolumn}~\cite{DCOLUMN},
 \Lpack{delarray}~\cite{DELARRAY}, 
 \Lpack{tabularx}~\cite{TABULARX}, and 
 \Lpack{booktabs}~\cite{BOOKTABS} 
 packages. 
    Much of the material in this chapter strongly reflects the
documentation of these packages.

 However, new kinds of tabular environments are also provided.


\section{General}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\[} \senv{array}\oarg{pos}\marg{preamble} rows \eenv{array} \cmd{\]} \\
\senv{tabular}\oarg{pos}\marg{preamble} rows \eenv{tabular} \\
\senv{tabular*}\marg{width}\oarg{pos}\marg{preamble} rows \eenv{tabular*} \\
\senv{tabularx}\marg{width}\oarg{pos}\marg{preamble} rows \eenv{tabularx} \\
\end{syntax}
The \Ie{array} and \Ie{tabular} environments are traditional and the others
are extensions. The \Ie{array} is for typesetting
math and has to be within a math environment of some kind. The \Ie{tabular}
series are for typesetting ordinary text.

    The optional \meta{pos} argument can be one of \texttt{t}, \texttt{c},
or \texttt{b} (the default is \texttt{c}), and controls the vertical position
of the array or tabular; either the \texttt{t}op or the \texttt{c}enter,
or the \texttt{b}ottom is aligned with the baseline. 
Each row consists of elements separated by
\&, and finished with \cmd{\\}. There may be as many rows as desired.
The number and style of the columns is specified by the \meta{preamble}.
The width of each column is wide enough to contain its longest entry and
the overall width of the \Ie{array} or \Ie{tabular} is sufficient to contain
all the columns. However, the \Ie{tabular*} and \Ie{tabularx} provide
more control over the width through their \meta{width} argument.

\section{The preamble}

    You use the \meta{preamble} argument to the array and tabular 
environments to specify the number of columns and how you want column
entries to appear. The preamble consists of a sequence of options, which
are listed in \tref{tab:tabpream}.

 \begin{table}
 \begin{center}
 \caption{The array and tabular preamble options.} \label{tab:tabpream}
    \setlength{\extrarowheight}{1pt}
    \begin{tabular}{cp{9cm}} \toprule
 \texttt{l}             &  Left adjusted column. \\
 \texttt{c}             &  Centered adjusted column. \\
 \texttt{r}             &  Right adjusted column. \\
 \texttt{p}\marg{width} &  Equivalent to =\parbox[t]=\marg{width}. \\
 \texttt{m}\marg{width} &  Defines a column of width \meta{width}.
                           Every entry will be centered in proportion to
                           the rest of the line. It is somewhat like
                           =\parbox=\marg{width}. \\
 \texttt{b}\marg{width} &  Coincides with =\parbox[b]=\marg{width}. \\
 \texttt{>}\marg{decl}  &  Can be used before an \texttt{l}, \texttt{r},
                           \texttt{c}, \texttt{p}, \texttt{m} or a
                           \texttt{b} option. It inserts \meta{decl}
                           directly in front of the entry of the column.
                           \\
 \texttt{<}\marg{decl}  &  Can be used after an \texttt{l}, \texttt{r},
                           \texttt{c}, =p{..}=, =m{..}= or a =b{..}=
                           option.  It inserts \meta{decl} right
                           after the entry of the column.  \\
 \texttt{|}             &  Inserts a vertical line. The distance between
                           two columns will be enlarged by the width of
                           the line. \\
 \texttt{@}\marg{decl}  &  Suppresses inter-column space and inserts
                           \meta{decl} instead. \\
 \texttt{!}\marg{decl}  &  Can be used anywhere and corresponds with the
                           \texttt{|} option. The difference is that
                           \meta{decl} is inserted instead of a
                           vertical line, so this option doesn't
                           suppress the normally inserted space between
                           columns in contrast to =@{...}=.\\
 \texttt{D}\marg{ssep}\marg{osep}\marg{places} & Column entries aligned
                           on a `decimal point' \\
       \bottomrule
    \end{tabular}
 \end{center}
 \end{table}

    Examples of the options include:
 \begin{itemize}
    \item A flush left column with bold font can be specified
          with =>{\bfseries}l=.
%% Companion, page 106.
\begin{lcode}
\begin{center}
\begin{tabular}{>{\large}c >{\large\bfseries}l >{\large\itshape}c} \toprule
A   & B  & C \\ 
100 & 10 & 1 \\ \bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\end{center}
\end{lcode}

\begin{center}
\begin{tabular}{>{\large}c >{\large\bfseries}l >{\large\itshape}c} \toprule
A   & B  & C \\ 
100 & 10 & 1 \\ \bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\end{center}

    \item
       In columns which have been generated with \texttt{p}, \texttt{m}
       or \texttt{b}, the default value of =\parindent= is
       \textsf{0pt}.

%Companion, page 106.

\begin{lcode}
\begin{center}
\begin{tabular}{m{1cm}m{1cm}m{1cm}} \toprule
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 &
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2         &
3 3 3 3                 \\ \bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\end{center}
\end{lcode}

\begin{center}
\begin{tabular}{m{1cm}m{1cm}m{1cm}} \toprule
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 &
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2         &
3 3 3 3                 \\ \bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\end{center}

       The \lnc{\parindent} can be changed with, for example 
       =>{\setlength{\parindent}{1cm}}p=.

%%Companion, page 107.

\begin{lcode}
\begin{center}
\begin{tabular}{>{\setlength{\parindent}{5mm}}p{2cm} p{2cm}} \toprule
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 &
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 \\ \bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\end{center}
\end{lcode}

\begin{center}
\begin{tabular}{>{\setlength{\parindent}{5mm}}p{2cm} p{2cm}} \toprule
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 &
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 \\ \bottomrule
\end{tabular}
\end{center}

    \item
       The specification =>{$}c<{$}= generates a column in math
       mode in a \Ie{tabular} environment. When used in an \Ie{array}
       environment the column is in LR mode (because the additional
       \$'s cancel the existing \$'s).
    \item
       Using =c!{\hspace{1cm}}c= you get space between two
       columns which is enlarged by one centimeter, while
       =c@{\hspace{1cm}}c= gives you exactly one centimeter
       space between two columns.
\item Elsewhere reasons are given why you should not use vertical
      lines (e.g., the \texttt{|} option) in tables. Any examples
      that use vertical lines are for illustrative purposes only where
      it is advantageous to denote column boundaries, for example
      to show different spacing effects.
 \end{itemize}

 \subsection{D column specifiers} \label{sec:dcolumns}

    In financial tables dealing with pounds
and pence or dollars and cents, column entries
should be aligned on the separator between the numbers. The \texttt{D}
column specifier is provided for columns which are to be aligned on 
a `decimal point'. The specifier takes three arguments.
\begin{syntax}
 \texttt{D}\marg{ssep}\marg{osep}\marg{places} \\
\end{syntax}
\begin{itemize}
\item[\meta{ssep}] is the single character which is used as the
 separator in the source \texttt{.tex} file. Thus it will usually 
be `\texttt{.}' or  `\texttt{,}'.

\item[\meta{osep}] is the separator in the output, this may
 be the same as the first argument, but may be any math-mode
 expression, such as \cmd{\cdot}. A \texttt{D} column
 always uses math mode for the digits as well as the separator.

\item[\meta{places}] should be the maximum number of decimal places
 in the column (but see below for more on this). 
If this is negative, any number of decimal places can
 be used in the column, and all entries will be centred on 
 (the leading edge of) the 
 separator. Note that this can cause a column to be too wide; for instance, 
compare  the first two columns in the example below. 
\end{itemize}

    Here are some example specifications which, for convenience, employ
the \cmd{\newcolumntype} macro described later.

\begin{lcode}
\newcolumntype{d}[1]{D{.}{\cdot}{#1}}
\end{lcode}
    This defines \texttt{d} to be a column specifier taking a single argument 
specifying the number of decimal places, 
and the \file{.tex} file should use `\texttt{.}' as the separator, with
\cmd{\cdot} ($\cdot$) being used in the output.

\begin{lcode}
\newcolumntype{.}{D{.}{.}{-1}}
\end{lcode}
The result of this is that `\texttt{.}' specifies a column of entries to 
be centered on the~`$.$'.

\begin{lcode}
\newcolumntype{,}{D{,}{,}{2}}
\end{lcode}
And the result of this is that `\texttt{,}' specifies a column of 
entries with at most two decimal places after a~`$,$'.

 \newcolumntype{d}[1]{D{.}{\cdot}{#1}}
 \newcolumntype{.}{D{.}{.}{-1}}
 \newcolumntype{,}{D{,}{,}{2}}

 The following table is typeset from this code:
\begin{lcode}
\begin{center}
 \begin{tabular}{|d{-1}|d{2}|.|,|}
 1.2   & 1.2   &1.2    &1,2    \\
 1.23  & 1.23  &12.5   &300,2  \\
 1121.2& 1121.2&861.20 &674,29 \\
 184   & 184   &10     &69     \\
 .4    & .4    &       &,4     \\
       &       &.4     &
 \end{tabular}
 \end{center}
\end{lcode}

 \begin{center}
 \begin{tabular}{|d{-1}|d{2}|.|,|}
 1.2   & 1.2   &1.2    &1,2    \\
 1.23  & 1.23  &12.5   &300,2  \\
 1121.2& 1121.2&861.20 &674,29 \\
 184   & 184   &10     &69     \\
 .4    & .4    &       &,4     \\
       &       &.4     &
 \end{tabular}
 \end{center}

 Note that the first column, which had a negative \meta{places}
 argument is wider than the second column, so that the decimal point
 appears in the middle of the column.

 The third
 \meta{places} argument may specify \emph{both} the number of
 digits to the left and to the right of the decimal place. The third
 column in the next table below is set with =D{.}{.}{5.1}= and in the
 second  table,  =D{.}{.}{1.1}=, to specify
 `five places to the left and one to the right' and `one place to the
 left and one to the right' respectively.  (You may use `,' or other
 characters, not necessarily `.' in this argument.) The column of figures
 is then positioned such that a number with the specified numbers of
 digits is centred in the column.
 
 If you have table headings (inserted with \cmd{\multicolumn}={1}{c}{...}=
 to over-ride the =D= column type) then it may be that neither of the
 above `centred' or `right aligned' forms is quite what you want.
\begin{lcode}
 \begin{center}\small
 \begin{tabular}[t]{|D..{-1}|D..{1}|D..{5.1}|}
\multicolumn{1}{|c|}{head}&
\multicolumn{1}{c|}{head}&
\multicolumn{1}{c|}{head}\\[3pt]
 1.2  & 1.2  &1.2 \\
 11212.2& 11212.2&11212.2  \\
 .4    & .4    &.4         
 \end{tabular}
 \hfill
 \begin{tabular}[t]{|D..{-1}|D..{1}|D..{1.1}|}
\multicolumn{1}{|c|}{wide heading}&
\multicolumn{1}{c|}{wide heading}&
\multicolumn{1}{c|}{wide heading}\\[3pt]
 1.2  & 1.2  &1.2 \\
 .4    & .4    &.4  
 \end{tabular}
 \end{center}
\end{lcode}

 \begin{center}\small
 \begin{tabular}[t]{|D..{-1}|D..{1}|D..{5.1}|}
\multicolumn{1}{|c|}{head}&
\multicolumn{1}{c|}{head}&
\multicolumn{1}{c|}{head}\\[3pt]
 1.2  & 1.2  &1.2 \\
 11212.2& 11212.2&11212.2  \\
 .4    & .4    &.4         
 \end{tabular}
 \hfill
 \begin{tabular}[t]{|D..{-1}|D..{1}|D..{1.1}|}
\multicolumn{1}{|c|}{wide heading}&
\multicolumn{1}{c|}{wide heading}&
\multicolumn{1}{c|}{wide heading}\\[3pt]
 1.2  & 1.2  &1.2 \\
 .4    & .4    &.4  
 \end{tabular}
 \end{center}

 In both of these tables the first column is set with =D{.}{.}{-1}=
 to produce a column centered on the `\texttt{.}', and the second column is
 set with =D{.}{.}{1}= to produce a right aligned column.

 The centered (first) column produces columns that are wider than necessary
 to fit in the numbers under a heading as it has to ensure that the
 decimal point is centered. The right aligned (second) column does not have
 this drawback, but under a wide heading a column of small right
 aligned figures is somewhat disconcerting.

 The notation for the \meta{places} argument also enables columns that 
are centred on the mid-point
 of the separator, rather than its leading edge; for example 
 =D{+}{\,\pm\,}{3,3}= will give a symmetric layout of up to three
 digits on either side of a $\pm$ sign.

 \subsection{Defining new column specifiers}

     You can easily type
 \begin{quote}
   =>{=\meta{some declarations}=}{c}<{=\meta{some more
   declarations}=}=
 \end{quote}
when you have a one-off column in a table, but it gets tedious
 if you often use columns of this form. 
The \cmd{\newcolumntype} lets you define a new column option like, say
 \begin{quote}
   =\newcolumntype{x}{>{=\meta{some declarations}=}{c}<{=\meta{some
   more declarations}=}}=\hspace*{-3cm} 
 \end{quote}
and you can then use the \texttt{x} column specifier in the preamble wherever
you want a column of this kind.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\newcolumntype}\marg{char}\oarg{nargs}\marg{spec} \\
\end{syntax}
The 
\meta{char} argument is the character that identifies the option and \meta{spec}
is its specification in terms of the regular preamble options.
The \cmd{\newcolumntype} command is similar to \cmd{\newcommand} --- 
\meta{spec} itself can take arguments with the optional \meta{nargs}
argument declaring their number. 

    For example, it is commonly required to have both math-mode and text 
columns in the same alignment. Defining:
\begin{lcode}
\newcolumntype{C}{>{$}c<{$}}
\newcolumntype{L}{>{$}l<{$}}
\newcolumntype{R}{>{$}r<{$}}
\end{lcode}
 Then \texttt{C} can be used to get centred text in an
\Ie{array}, or centred math-mode in a \Ie{tabular}. Similarly
\texttt{L} and \texttt{R} are for left- and right-aligned columns.

 The \meta{spec} in a \cmd{\newcolumntype} command may refer to any of
 the primitive column specifiers (see table \ref{tab:tabpream} on page
 \pageref{tab:tabpream}), or to any new letters defined in other
\cmd{\newcolumntype} commands.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\showcols} \\
\end{syntax}
   A list of all the currently active
\cmd{\newcolumntype} definitions is sent to the terminal and log file if
 the \cmd{\showcols} command is given.

\subsection{Notes}

 \begin{itemize}
 \item A preamble of the form ={wx*{0}{abc}yz}= is treated as ={wxyz}=

 \item An incorrect positional argument, such as \texttt{[Q]}, 
 is treated as \texttt{[t]}.

 \item A preamble such as ={cc*{2}}= with an error in
 a $*$-form will generate an error message 
 that is not particularly helpful.

 \item Error messages generated when parsing the column specification
   refer to the preamble argument \emph{after} it has been re-written
   by the \cmd{\newcolumntype} system, not to the preamble entered by the
   user.  

 \item Repeated \texttt{<} or \texttt{>} constructions
 are allowed.  \texttt{>}\marg{decs1}\texttt{>}\marg{decs2}
 is treated the same as \texttt{>}\marg{decs2}\marg{decs1}.

   The treatment of multiple \texttt{<} or \texttt{>}
declarations may seem strange. Using the obvious ordering
of \texttt{>}\marg{decs1}\marg{decs2} has the disadvantage
of not allowing the settings of a  \cmd{\newcolumntype} 
defined using these declarations to be overriden.

 \item The \cmd{\extracolsep} command may be used in \texttt{@}-expressions 
 as in standard \ltx, and also in \texttt{!}-expressions.

   The use of \cmd{\extracolsep} is subject to the following
   two restrictions.  There must be at most one \cmd{\extracolsep}
   command per \texttt{@}, or \texttt{!} expression and the command must be
   directly entered into the \texttt{@} expression, not as part of a macro
   definition. Thus
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\ef}{\extracolsep{\fill}} ... @{\ef}
\end{lcode}
 does not work. However you can use
   something like
\begin{lcode}
\newcolumntype{e}{@{\extracolsep{\fill}}
\end{lcode}
instead.

 \item As noted by the \ltx{} book, a 
   \cmd{\multicolumn}, with the exception of the first column,
   consists of the entry and the \emph{following} inter-column
   material. This means that in a tabular with the preamble
   =|l|l|l|l|= input such as =\multicolumn{2}{|c|}= in
   anything other than the first column is incorrect.

   In the standard array/tabular implementation this error is not 
   noticeable as a =|= takes no horizontal space. But in the class the
   vertical lines take up their natural width and you will see two lines if
   two are specified --- another reason to avoid using \verb?|?.

 \end{itemize}

\section{The array environment}

    Mathematical arrays are usually produced using the \Ie{array} environment.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\[} \senv{array}\oarg{pos}\marg{preamble} rows \eenv{array} \cmd{\]} \\
\cmd{\[} \senv{array}\oarg{pos}\meta{left}\marg{preamble}\meta{right} rows \eenv{array} \cmd{\]} \\
\end{syntax}
    Math formula are usually centered in the columns, but a column of 
numbers often looks best flush right, or aligned on some distinctive
feature. In the latter case the \texttt{D} column scheme is very handy.
\begin{lcode}
\[ \begin{array}{lcr}
   a +b +c & d - e - f & 123 \\
   g-h     &  j k      & 45 \\
    l      &   m       & 6
  \end{array} \]
\end{lcode}

\[ \begin{array}{lcr}
   a +b +c & d - e - f & 123 \\
   g-h     &  j k      & 45 \\
    l      &   m       & 6
  \end{array} \]

    Arrays are often enclosed in brackets or vertical lines or brackets 
or other symbols to
denote math constructs like matrices. The delimeters are often large and have
to be indicated using \cmd{\left} and \cmd{\right} commands.
\begin{lcode}
\[ \left[ \begin{array}{cc}
          x_{1} & x_{2} \\
          x_{3} & x_{4}
          \end{array} \right] \]
\end{lcode}

\[ \left[ \begin{array}{cc}
          x_{1} & x_{2} \\
          x_{3} & x_{4}
          \end{array} \right] \]


    The \Ie{array} environment is an extension of the standard environment
in that it provides a 
 a system of implicit \cmd{\left} \cmd{\right} pairs. If you want an array
 surrounded by parentheses, you can enter:
\begin{lcode}
 \[  \begin{array}({cc})a&b\\c&d\end{array}   \]
\end{lcode}

 \[  \begin{array}({cc})a&b\\c&d\end{array}   \]

Or, a litle more complex
\begin{lcode}
\[ \begin{array}({c})
     \begin{array}|{cc}|
       x_{1} & x_{2} \\
       x_{3} & x_{4}
     \end{array} \\
         y \\
         z
   \end{array} \]
\end{lcode}

\[ \begin{array}({c})
     \begin{array}|{cc}|
       x_{1} & x_{2} \\
       x_{3} & x_{4}
     \end{array} \\
         y \\
         z
   \end{array} \]

 Similarly an environment equivalent to plain TeX's \cmd{\cases} could
 be defined by:\\
\begin{lcode}
 \[  f(x)=\begin{array}\{{lL}.
           0        &if $x=0$\\
           \sin(x)/x&otherwise
           \end{array}  \]
\end{lcode}

 \DeleteShortVerb{\=}
 \newcolumntype{L}{>{$}l<{$}}
 \[  f(x)=\begin{array}\{{lL}.
           0        &if $x=0$\\
           \sin(x)/x&otherwise
           \end{array}  \]
 \MakeShortVerb{\=}

 Here \texttt{L} denotes a column of left aligned L-R text, as described
earlier.
 Note that as the delimiters must always be used in pairs, the  `=.='
 must be used to denote a  `null delimiter'.

 This feature is especially useful if the =[t]= or =[b]=
 arguments are also used. In these cases the result is not equivalent
 to surrounding the environment by \cmd{\left}\ldots\cmd{\right}, as
 can be seen from the following example:
\begin{lcode}
 \begin{array}[t]({c}) 1\\2\\3 \end{array}
 \begin{array}[c]({c}) 1\\2\\3 \end{array}
 \begin{array}[b]({c}) 1\\2\\3 \end{array}
 \quad\mbox{not}\quad
 \left(\begin{array}[t]{c} 1\\2\\3 \end{array}\right)
 \left(\begin{array}[c]{c} 1\\2\\3 \end{array}\right)
 \left(\begin{array}[b]{c} 1\\2\\3 \end{array}\right)
\end{lcode}


 \[
 \begin{array}[t]({c}) 1\\2\\3 \end{array}
 \begin{array}[c]({c}) 1\\2\\3 \end{array}
 \begin{array}[b]({c}) 1\\2\\3 \end{array}
 \quad\mbox{not}\quad
 \left(\begin{array}[t]{c} 1\\2\\3 \end{array}\right)
 \left(\begin{array}[c]{c} 1\\2\\3 \end{array}\right)
 \left(\begin{array}[b]{c} 1\\2\\3 \end{array}\right)
 \]

\section{Tables}

    A table is one way of presenting a large amount of information
in a limited space. Even a simple table can presents facts that could
require several wordy paragraphs --- it is not only a picture that is worth
a thousand words.

    A table should have at least two columns, otherwise it is really a list,
and often has more. The leftmost column is often called the \emph{stub}
and it typically contains a vertical listing of the information categories
 in the other columns. The columns have \emph{heads} (or \emph{headings}) at
the top indicating the nature of the entries in the column, although
it is not always necessary to provide a head for the stub if the
heading is obvious from the table's caption. Column heads
may include subheadings, often to specify the unit of measurement for numeric
data. 

   A less simple table may need two or more levels of headings, in which
case \emph{decked heads} are used. A decked head consists of a \emph{spanner
head} and the two or more column heads it applies to. A horizontal 
\emph{spanner rule} is set between the the spanner and column heads to 
show the columns belonging to the spanner.

  Double decking, and certainly triple decking or more, should be avoided
as it can make it difficult following them down the table. It may be possible
to use a \emph{cut-in head} instead of double decking. A cut-in head is
one that cuts across the columns of the table and applies to all the 
matter below it.

   No mention has been made of any vertical rules in a table, and this is
deliberate. There should be no vertical rules in a table. Rules, 
if used at all, should be horizontal only, and these should be single, 
not double or triple. It's not that ink is expensive, or that practically
no typesetting is done by hand any more, it's that the visual clutter should
be eliminated. 

    For example, in \tref{tab:2views}, \tref{tab:before} is from the \ltx{} book and 
\tref{tab:after} is how Simon Fear~\cite{BOOKTABS} suggests it
should be cleaned up.
\begin{lcode}
\begin{table}
\centering
\caption{Two views of one table} \label{tab:2views}
\subtop[Before]{\label{tab:before}%
 \begin{tabular}{||l|lr||} \hline
 gnats     & gram      & \$13.65 \\ \cline{2-3}
           & each      & .01 \\ \hline
 gnu       & stuffed   & 92.50 \\ \cline{1-1} \cline{3-3}
 emu       &           & 33.33 \\ \hline
 armadillo & frozen    & 8.99 \\ \hline
 \end{tabular}}
\hfill
\subtop[After]{\label{tab:after}%
 \begin{tabular}{@{}llr@{}} \toprule
 \multicolumn{2}{c}{Item} \\ \cmidrule(r){1-2}
 Animal & Description & Price (\$)\\ \midrule
 Gnat  & per gram  & 13.65 \\
       & each      & 0.01 \\
 Gnu   & stuffed   & 92.50 \\
 Emu   & stuffed   & 33.33 \\
 Armadillo & frozen & 8.99 \\ \bottomrule
 \end{tabular}
}
\end{table}
\end{lcode}

\begin{table}
\centering
\caption{Two views of one table} \label{tab:2views}
\subtop[Before]{\label{tab:before}%
 \begin{tabular}{||l|lr||} \hline
 gnats     & gram      & \$13.65 \\ \cline{2-3}
           & each      & .01 \\ \hline
 gnu       & stuffed   & 92.50 \\ \cline{1-1} \cline{3-3}
 emu       &           & 33.33 \\ \hline
 armadillo & frozen    & 8.99 \\ \hline
 \end{tabular}}
\hfill
\subtop[After]{\label{tab:after}%
 \begin{tabular}{@{}llr@{}} \toprule
 \multicolumn{2}{c}{Item} \\ \cmidrule(r){1-2}
 Animal & Description & Price (\$)\\ \midrule
 Gnat  & per gram  & 13.65 \\
       & each      & 0.01 \\
 Gnu   & stuffed   & 92.50 \\
 Emu   & stuffed   & 33.33 \\
 Armadillo & frozen & 8.99 \\ \bottomrule
 \end{tabular}
}
\end{table}
 
\subsection{Fear's rules} \label{sec:fear}

    Simon Fear disapproves of the default LaTeX table rules and
 wrote the \Lpack{booktabs} package~\cite{BOOKTABS} to provide
 better horizontal rules. Like many typographers, he abhors vertical rules.

     In a simple case a table begins with a \cmd{\toprule}, has
 a single row of column headings, then a dividing rule called
 here a \cmd{\midrule}; after the columns of data the table is 
finished off with
 a \cmd{\bottomrule}. Most book publishers set the \cmd{\toprule} and 
 \cmd{\bottomrule} heavier (i.e., thicker, or darker)
 than the intermediate \cmd{\midrule}. 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\toprule}\oarg{wd} 
\cmd{\bottomrule}\oarg{wd} 
\lnc{\heavyrulewidth} \\
\cmd{\midrule}\oarg{wd} 
\lnc{\lightrulewidth} \\
\end{syntax}

 The rule commands here all take a default width (thickness)
 which may be reset within the document.
For the top and bottom rules this
 is \lnc{\heavyrulewidth} and for midrules it is \lnc{\lightrulewidth}
 (fully described below). In very rare cases where you need to have
a special width, you may use the optional argument \meta{wd} length
argument.

    The rule commands go immediately after the closing
\cmd{\\} of the preceding row (except of course \cmd{\toprule}, which
 comes right after the =\tabular{}= command); in other words,
 exactly where plain \ltx{} allows \cmd{\hline} or \cmd{\cline}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\cmidrule}\oarg{wd}=(=\meta{trim}=)=\marg{a--b} 
\lnc{\cmidrulewidth} \\
\end{syntax}
Similar to the normal \cmd{\cline} macro, \cmd{\cmidrule} draws a 
rule across the columns (numbered) \meta{a--b}. 
Generally, this rule
 should not come to the full width of the end columns, and this
 is especially the case when we need to begin a \cmd{\cmidrule}
 straight after the end of another one.
The optional `trimming' commands, which are =(r)=, =(l)= and =(rl)=
 or =(lr)=, indicate whether the right and/or left ends of the
 rule should be trimmed. Note the exceptional use of parentheses
 instead of braces or brackets for this optional argument. For example,
the code
\begin{lcode}
\cmidrule(r){1-2}
\end{lcode}
is used for \tref{tab:after}.

The default width is \lnc{\cmidrulewidth} but the optional
\meta{wd} argument can be used to override this. 

 An example of the commands in use is given by the code used to
 produce the `after' example in \tref{tab:after} above.

 Occasionally extra space is required between certain rows
 of a table; for example, before the last row when it is a
 total of numbers above.
This is simply a matter of inserting \cmd{\addlinespace}
 after the \cmd{\\} alignment marker.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\addlinespace}\oarg{wd}
\lnc{\defaultaddspace} \\
\end{syntax}
Think of \cmd{\addlinespace} as being a white rule of width \meta{wd}.
 The default space is \cmd{\defaultaddspace} which gives rather
 less than a whole line space.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\specialrule}\marg{wd}\marg{abovespace}\marg{belowspace} \\
\end{syntax}
    You should not use double rules in a table; use rules with different 
thicknesses instead. The \cmd{specialrule} can be used for drawing
rules with special thickness and spacing. 
However, the rules already described should be sufficient without
having to resort to \cmd{\specialrule}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\morecmidrules} \\
\end{syntax}
Nevertheless, if you insist on having 
double \cmd{\cmidrule}s you will need the extra command
 \cmd{\morecmidrules} to do so properly, because two
 \cmd{\cmidrule}s  in a row calls for two rules on the same `rule row'. 
Thus in
\begin{lcode}
\cmidrule{1-2}\cmidrule{1-2}
\end{lcode}
 the second command writes a rule that just overwrites the first
 one. Use
\begin{lcode}
\cmidrule{1-2}\morecmidrules\cmidrule{1-2}
\end{lcode}
 which gives you a double rule between columns one and two,
 separated by \cmd{\cmidrulesep}.
Finish off a whole row of rules before giving the
 \cmd{\morecmidrules} command. Note that \cmd{\morecmidrules} has no
 effect whatsoever if it does not immediately follow a
 \cmd{\cmidrule} (i.e., it is not a general space-generating command).

 The new rule commands are not guaranteed to work with \cmd{\hline}
 or \cmd{\cline}.
 More significantly the rules generated by the new commands are pretty
well guaranteed not to connect with verticals generated by ={|}=
 characters in the preamble. This is a feature --- you
 should not use vertical rules in tables.

\subsection{Tabular environments}

\begin{syntax}
\senv{tabular}\oarg{pos}\marg{preamble} rows \eenv{tabular} \\
\senv{tabular*}\marg{width}\oarg{pos}\marg{preamble} rows \eenv{tabular*} \\
\senv{tabularx}\marg{width}\oarg{pos}\marg{preamble} rows \eenv{tabularx} \\
\end{syntax}

    A table created using the \Ie{tabular} environment comes out as
wide as it has to be to accomodate the entries. On the other hand,
both the \Ie{tabular*} and \Ie{tabularx} environments let you specify
the overall width of the table via the additional \meta{width} atrgument.

    The \Ie{tabular*} environment makes any necessary adjustment by altering
the intercolumn spaces while the \Ie{tabularx} environment alters
the column widths. Those columns that can be adjusted are noted by
using the letter \texttt{X} as the column specifier in the \meta{preamble}.
Once the correct column widths have been calculated the \texttt{X}
columns are converted to \texttt{p} columns.

    The following code is used for a regular \Ie{tabular}.
\begin{lcode}
\begin{center}
\begin{tabular}{|c|p{5.5pc}|c|p{5.5pc}|}  \hline
\multicolumn{2}{|c|}{Multicolumn entry!} & THREE & FOUR \\ \hline
one &
\raggedright\arraybackslash The width of this column is fixed (5.5pc). &
three &
\raggedright\arraybackslash Column four will act in the same way as
  column two, with the same width.\\
\hline
\end{tabular}
\end{center}
\end{lcode}

\begin{center}
\begin{tabular}{|c|p{5.5pc}|c|p{5.5pc}|}   \hline
\multicolumn{2}{|c|}{Multicolumn entry!} & THREE & FOUR \\  \hline
one &
\raggedright\arraybackslash The width of this column is fixed (5.5pc). &
three &
\raggedright\arraybackslash Column four will act in the same way as
  column two, with the same width.\\
 \hline
\end{tabular}
\end{center}

    The following examples use virtually the same contents, the major
differences are the specifications of the environment.

 The following \Ie{tabularx} is set with
\begin{lcode}
\begin{tabularx}{250pt}{|c|X|c|X|}
\end{lcode}
and the result is:

 \begin{center}
 \begin{tabularx}{250pt}{|c|X|c|X|}
 \hline
 \multicolumn{2}{|c|}{Multicolumn entry!}&
 THREE&
 FOUR\\
 \hline
 one&
 \raggedright\arraybackslash The width of this column depends on the
 width of the table.\footnote{You can use footnotes in a \texttt{tabularx}!}
&
 three&
 \raggedright\arraybackslash Column four will act in the same way as
 column two, with the same width.\\
 \hline
 \end{tabularx}
 \end{center}

The following \Ie{tabular*} is set with
\begin{lcode}
 \begin{tabular*}{250pt}{|c|p{5.5pc}|c|p{5.5pc}|}
\end{lcode}
Notice that there is no \texttt{X} column; the total width required
for the tabular is less than the specfied width and hence the horizontal
lines spill over the right hand end of the apparent tabular width.
 \begin{center}
 \begin{tabular*}{250pt}{|c|p{5.5pc}|c|p{5.5pc}|}
 \hline
 \multicolumn{2}{|c|}{Multicolumn entry!}&
 THREE&
 FOUR\\
 \hline
 one&
 \raggedright\arraybackslash The width of this column is fixed (5.5pc). &
 three &
 \raggedright\arraybackslash Column four will act in the same way as
 column two, with the same width.\\
 \hline
 \end{tabular*}
 \end{center}

The next \Ie{tabular*} table is set with 
\begin{lcode}
 \begin{tabular*}{300pt}{|@{\extracolsep{\fill}}c|p{5.5pc}|c|p{5.5pc}|}
\end{lcode}

 \begin{center}
 \begin{tabular*}{300pt}{|@{\extracolsep{\fill}}c|p{5.5pc}|c|p{5.5pc}|}
 \hline
 \multicolumn{2}{|c|}{Multicolumn entry!}&
 THREE&
 FOUR\\
 \hline
 one&
 \raggedright\arraybackslash The width of this column's text is fixed (5.5pc). &
 three &
 \raggedright\arraybackslash Column four will act in the same way as
 column two, with the same width.\\
 \hline
 \end{tabular*}
 \end{center}


The following \Ie{tabularx} is set with
\begin{lcode}
\begin{tabularx}{300pt}{|c|X|c|X|}
\end{lcode}
the result is:

 \begin{center}
 \begin{tabularx}{300pt}{|c|X|c|X|}
 \hline
 \multicolumn{2}{|c|}{Multicolumn entry!}&
 THREE&
 FOUR\\
 \hline
 one&
 \raggedright\arraybackslash The width of this column depends on the
 width of the table.&
 three&
 \raggedright\arraybackslash Column four will act in the same way as
 column two, with the same width.\\
 \hline
 \end{tabularx}
 \end{center}

     The main differences between the \Ie{tabularx} and \Ie{tabular*}
environments are:
 \begin{itemize}
 \item \Ie{tabularx} modifies the widths of the \emph{columns},
 whereas \Ie{tabular*} modifies the widths of the inter-column
 \emph{spaces}.
 \item \Ie{tabular} and \Ie{tabular*} environments may be
 nested with no restriction, however if one \Ie{tabularx}
 environment occurs inside another, then the inner one \emph{must} be
 enclosed by ={ }=.
 \item The body of the \Ie{tabularx} environment is in fact the
 argument to a command, and so certain constructions which are not
 allowed in command arguments (like \cmd{\verb}) may not be used.\footnote
 {Actually, \texttt{verb} and \texttt{verb*} may be used, but they may 
 treat spaces incorrectly, and the
 argument can not contain an unmatched {\ttfamily\char`\{} or
 {\ttfamily\char`\}}, or a  {\ttfamily\char`\%} character.}
 \item \Ie{tabular*} uses a primitive capability of \tx{} to
 modify the inter column space of an alignment. \Ie{tabularx}
 has to set the table several times as it searches for the best column
 widths, and is therefore much slower. Also the fact that the body is
 expanded several times may break certain \tx{} constructs.
 \end{itemize}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\tracingtabularx} \\
\end{syntax}
Following the \cmd{\tracingtabularx} declaration all
later \Ie{tabularx} environments will print information
 about column widths as they repeatedly re-set the tables to find the
 correct widths.

 By default the \texttt{X} specification is turned into
 =p{=\meta{some value}=}=. Such narrow columns often
 require a special format, which can be achieved by using the =>= syntax.
For example, =>{\small}X=. Another format which is useful in narrow 
columns is  ragged right, however \ltx's \cmd{\raggedright} macro redefines
\cmd{\\} in a way which conflicts with its use in  \Ie{tabular} or 
\Ie{array}  environments.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\arraybackslash} \\
\end{syntax}
 For this reason the command \cmd{\arraybackslash} is provided;
this may be used after a \cmd{\raggedright}, \cmd{\raggedleft}  or
\cmd{\centering} declaration. Thus a \Ie{tabularx} preamble may include
\begin{lcode}
>{\raggedright\arraybackslash}X
\end{lcode}
 These preamble specifications may of course be saved using the
 command, \cmd{\newcolumntype}. After specifying, say,
\begin{lcode}
\newcolumntype{Y}{>{\small\raggedright\arraybackslash}X}
\end{lcode}
then \texttt{Y} could be used in the \Ie{tabularx} preamble
 argument.
 
\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\tabularxcolumn} \\
\end{syntax}
 The \texttt{X} columns are set using the \texttt{p} column, which
 corresponds  to \cmd{\parbox}=[t]=. You may want them set using, say, the
\texttt{m} column, which corresponds to \cmd{\parbox}=[c]=. It is not
 possible to change the column type using the \texttt{>} syntax, so another
 system is provided.  \cmd{\tabularxcolumn} should be defined to be a macro
 with one argument, which expands to the \Ie{tabular} preamble
 specification that you want to correspond to \texttt{X}. The
 argument will be replaced by the calculated width of a column.

 The default definition is
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\tabularxcolumn}[1]{p{#1}}
\end{lcode}
This may be changed, for instance
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\tabularxcolumn}[1]{>{\small}m{#1}}
\end{lcode}
so that \texttt{X} columns will be typeset as \texttt{m} columns using
the \cmd{\small} font.

 Normally all \texttt{X} columns in a single table are set to the
 same width, however it is possible to make \Ie{tabularx} set
 them to different widths.
 A preamble argument of 
\begin{lcode}
{>{\hsize=.5\hsize}X>{\hsize=1.5\hsize}X}
\end{lcode}
 specifies two columns, the second will be three times as wide as the
 first. However if you want to play games like this you should follow
 the following two rules.
 \begin{enumerate}
 \item Make sure that the sum of the widths of all the \texttt{X}
 columns is unchanged. (In the above example, the new widths still add
 up to twice the default width, the same as two standard \texttt{X}
 columns.)
 \item Do not use \cmd{\multicolumn} entries which cross any \texttt{X}
 column.
 \end{enumerate}
 As with most rules, these may be broken if you know what you are
 doing.

 It may be that the widths of the `normal' columns of the table
 already total more  than the requested total
 width. \Ie{tabularx} refuses to set the 
 \texttt{X} columns to a negative width, so in this case you get a 
 warning ``X Columns too narrow (table too wide)''.

 The \texttt{X} columns will in this case be set to a width of 1em
 and so the table itself will be wider than the requested total width
 given in the argument to the environment.
% This behaviour of the package can be customised slightly
% as noted in the documentation of the code section.

    The standard \cmd{\verb} macro does not work inside a \Ie{tabularx},
just as it does not work in the argument to any macro.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\TX@verb} \\
\end{syntax}
\cmd{\TX@verb} is the `poor man's \cmd{\verb}' 
and is based on page 382 of the \tx Book. As
 explained there, doing verbatim this way means that spaces are not
 treated correctly, and so a \cmd{\verb*} version may well be useless. 
 The mechanism is quite general, and any macro which wants to allow a
 form of \cmd{\verb} to be used within its argument may
\begin{lcode}
\let\verb=\TX@verb
\end{lcode}
It must ensure that the real definition is restored afterwards.

    This version of \cmd{\verb} is subject to the 
following restictions:
 \begin{enumerate}
 \item Spaces in the argument are not read verbatim, but may be skipped
       according to \tx's usual rules.
 \item Spaces will be added to the output after control words, even if
       they were not present in the input.
 \item Unless the argument is a single space, any trailing space,
       whether in the original argument, or added as in (2),
       will be omitted.
 \item The argument must not end with =\=, so =\verb|\|= is not
      allowed, however, because of (3), =\verb|\ |= produces
      =\=.
 \item The argument must be balanced with respect to ={= and =}=. So
      =\verb|{|= is not allowed.
 \item A comment character like \verb?%? will not appear verbatim. It will
       act as usual, commenting out the rest of the input line!
 \item The combinations =?`= and =!`= will appear as
       {\ttfamily?`} and {\ttfamily!`} if the \texttt{cmtt} font is
       being used.
 \end{enumerate}

\section{Free tabulars}

    All the tabular environments described so far put the table
into a box, which \ltx{} treats like a large, even though complex,
 character, and characters are not broken across pages. If you
have a long table that runs off the bottom of the page you can turn
to, say, the \Lpack{longtable}~\cite{LONGTABLE} or \Lpack{xtab}~\cite{XTAB}
packages which will automatically break tables across page boundaries.
These have various bells and whistles, such as automatically putting
on a caption at the top of each page, repeating the column heads, and 
so forth. 

\subsection{Continuous tabulars}

\begin{syntax}
\senv{ctabular}\oarg{pos}\marg{preamble} rows \eenv{ctabular} \\
\senv{ctabular*}\oarg{pos}\marg{width}\marg{preamble} rows \eenv{ctabular*} \\
\end{syntax}
The \Ie{ctabular} environment is similar to \Ie{tabular}, but with a few
differences, the main one 
being that the table will merrily continue across page breaks.
The \meta{preamble} argument is the same as for the previous \Ie{array}
and \Ie{tabular} environments, but the optional \meta{pos} argument
controls the horizontal position of the table, not the vertical. The
possible argument values are 
\texttt{l} (left justified), 
\texttt{c} (centered), or
\texttt{r} (right justified); the default is \texttt{c}.

\begin{lcode}
\begin{ctabular}{lcr}  \toprule
LEFT & CENTER & RIGHT \\  \midrule
l & c & r \\
l & c & r \\
l & c & r \\
l & c & r \\  \bottomrule
\end{ctabular}
\end{lcode}
  
\begin{ctabular}[c]{lcr}  \toprule
LEFT & CENTER & RIGHT \\  \midrule
l & c & r \\
l & c & r \\
l & c & r \\
l & c & r \\  \bottomrule
\end{ctabular}

    The \Ie{ctabular} environment will probably not be used within
a \Ie{table} environment (which defeats the possibility of the table
crossing page boundaries). To caption a \Ie{ctabular} you can define a 
fixed caption. For example:
\begin{lcode}
\newfixedcaption{\freetabcaption}{table}
\end{lcode}
And then \cmd{\freetabcaption} can be used like the normal \cmd{\caption}
within a \Ie{table} float.
\newfixedcaption{\freetabcaption}{table}

\subsection{Automatic tabulars}

    A tabular format may be used just to list things, for example the
names of the members of a particular organisation, or the names of
\ltx{} environments. 

    Especially when drafting a document, or when the number of entries
is likely to change, it is convenient to be able to tabulate a list
of items without having to explicitly mark the end of each row.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\autorows}\oarg{width}\marg{pos}\marg{num}\marg{style}\marg{entries} \\
\end{syntax}
The \cmd{\autorows} macro lists the \meta{entries} in rows; that is,
the entries are typeset left to right and top to bottom. 
The table below was set by \cmd{\autorows} using:
\begin{lcode}
\freetabcaption{Example automatic row ordered table}
\autorows{c}{5}{c}{one, two, three, four, five,
                   six, seven, eight, nine, ten,
                   eleven, twelve, thirteen, fourteen }
\end{lcode}

\freetabcaption{Example automatic row ordered table}
\autorows{c}{5}{c}{one, two, three, four, five,
                   six, seven, eight, nine, ten,
                   eleven, twelve, thirteen, fourteen }

    The \meta{pos} (\texttt{l}, \texttt{c}, or \texttt{r})
argument controls the horizontal position of the
tabular and \meta{num} is the number of columns. The \meta{style}
(\texttt{l}, \texttt{c}, or \texttt{r}) argument specifies the location
of the entries in the columns; each column is treated identically.
The \meta{entries} argument is a comma-separated list of the names to be
tabulated; there must be no comma after the last of the names before the
closing brace.

 Each column is normaly the same width which is large enough to accomodate
the widest entry in the list.
A positive \meta{width} (e.g., \verb?[0.8\textwidth]?), defines the overall
width of the table, and the column width is calculated by dividing \meta{width}
by the number of columns. Any negative value for the \meta{width} width lets 
each column be wide enough for the widest entry in that column; the column width 
is no longer a constant. 

   The next examples illustrate the effect of the \meta{width} argument
(the default value is 0pt).

\begin{lcode}
\freetabcaption{Changing the width of a row ordered table}
\autorows[-1pt]{c}{5}{c}{one, two, three, four, five,
                   six, seven, eight, nine, ten,
                   eleven, twelve, thirteen, fourteen }
\autorows[0pt]{c}{5}{c}{one, two, three, four, five, ... }
\autorows[0.9\textwidth]{c}{5}{c}{one, two, three, four, five, ... }
\end{lcode}

\freetabcaption{Changing the width of a row ordered table}
\autorows[-1pt]{c}{5}{c}{one, two, three, four, five,
                   six, seven, eight, nine, ten,
                   eleven, twelve, thirteen, fourteen }

 \autorows[0pt]{c}{5}{c}{one, two, three, four, five,
                   six, seven, eight, nine, ten,
                   eleven, twelve, thirteen, fourteen }

\autorows[0.9\textwidth]{c}{5}{c}{one, two, three, four, five,
                   six, seven, eight, nine, ten,
                   eleven, twelve, thirteen, fourteen }


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\autocols}\oarg{width}\marg{pos}\marg{num}\marg{style}\marg{entries} \\
\end{syntax}
The \cmd{\autocols} macro lists its \meta{entries} in columns, proceeding
top to bottom and left to right. The arguments, except for \meta{width},
are the same as for \cmd{\autorows}. The column width is always constant throughout
the table and is normally sufficient for the
widest entry. A positive \meta{width} has the same effect as for \cmd{\autorows}
but a negative value is ignored.

    If you need to include a comma within one of the entries in the list
for either \cmd{\autorows} or \cmd{\autocols} you have to use a macro. 
For instance:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\comma}{,}
\end{lcode}
\newcommand*{\comma}{,}

The following examples illustrate these points.

\begin{lcode}
\freetabcaption{Changing the width of a column ordered table}
\autocols{c}{5}{c}{one\comma{} two, three, four, five,
                   six, seven, eight, nine, ten,
                   eleven, twelve, thirteen, fourteen }
\autocols[0.9\textwidth]{c}{5}{c}{one\comma{} two, three, four, five,
                   six, seven, eight, nine, ten,
                   eleven, twelve, thirteen, fourteen }
\end{lcode}

\freetabcaption{Changing the width of a column ordered table}
\autocols{c}{5}{c}{one\comma{} two, three, four, five,
                   six, seven, eight, nine, ten,
                   eleven, twelve, thirteen, fourteen }

\autocols[0.9\textwidth]{c}{5}{c}{one\comma{} two, three, four, five,
                   six, seven, eight, nine, ten,
                   eleven, twelve, thirteen, fourteen }


\section{Spacing}

    Sometimes tabular rows appear vertically challenged.
\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\extrarowheight} \\
\end{syntax}
The length called \lnc{\extrarowheight} can be set to modify
the normal height of \Ie{tabular} (and \Ie{array}) rows. 
If it is a positive
 length, the value is added to the normal height of
 every row of the table, while
 the depth will remain the same. This is important for tables
 with horizontal lines because those lines normally touch the
 capital letters.
 For example, =\setlength{\extrarowheight}{1pt}= was used in the
definition of \tref{tab:tabpream}.

 \subsection{Special variations of \texttt{\textbackslash hline}}

 The family of \Ie{tabular} environments allows
 vertical positioning with respect to the baseline of
 the text in which the environment appears.  By default the
 environment appears centered, but this can be changed to
 align with the first or last line in the environment by
 supplying a \texttt{t} or \texttt{b} value to the
 optional position argument. However, this does not work
 when the first or last element in the environment is a
 \cmd{\hline} command---in that case the environment is
 aligned at the horizontal rule.

 \pagebreak[3]

 Here is an example:
 \begin{center}
 \begin{minipage}[t]{.4\linewidth}
 Tables
 \begin{tabular}[t]{l}
   with no\\ hline \\ commands \\ used
 \end{tabular} versus \\ tables
 \begin{tabular}[t]{|l|}
  \hline
   with some \\ hline \\ commands \\
  \hline
 \end{tabular} used.
 \end{minipage}
 \begin{minipage}[t]{.5\linewidth}
 \begin{verbatim}
 Tables
 \begin{tabular}[t]{l}
  with no\\ hline \\ commands \\ used
 \end{tabular} versus tables
 \begin{tabular}[t]{|l|}
  \hline
   with some \\ hline \\ commands \\
  \hline
 \end{tabular} used.
 \end{verbatim}
 \end{minipage}
\end{center}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\firsthline} \cmd{\lasthline} \\
\lnc{\extratabsurround} \\
\end{syntax}
 Using \cmd{\firsthline} and \cmd{\lasthline} will 
 cure the problem, and the tables will align properly as long
 as their first or last line does not contain extremely large
 objects.
 \begin{center}
 \begin{minipage}[t]{.4\linewidth}
 Tables
 \begin{tabular}[t]{l}
   with no\\ line \\ commands \\ used
 \end{tabular} versus \\ tables
 \begin{tabular}[t]{|l|}
  \firsthline
   with some \\ line   \\ commands \\
  \lasthline
 \end{tabular} used.
 \end{minipage}
 \begin{minipage}[t]{.5\linewidth}
 \begin{verbatim}
 Tables
 \begin{tabular}[t]{l}
   with no\\ line \\ commands \\ used
 \end{tabular} versus tables
 \begin{tabular}[t]{|l|}
  \firsthline
   with some \\ line   \\ commands \\
  \lasthline
 \end{tabular} used.
 \end{verbatim}
 \end{minipage}
 \end{center}

 The implementation of these two commands contains an extra
 dimension, which is called \cmd{\extratabsurround}, to add some
 additional space at the top and the bottom of such an environment.
 This is useful if such tables are nested.
 

 \subsection{Handling of rules}

 There are two possible approaches to the handling of horizontal and
 vertical rules in tables:
 \begin{enumerate}
   \item rules can be placed into the available space without
   enlarging the table, or
   \item rules can be placed between columns or rows thereby enlarging
   the table.
 \end{enumerate}
 This class implements the second possibility while the
 default implementation in the \ltx{} kernel implements the first
 concept.

   With standard \ltx{} adding rules to a table will not affect the
   width or height of the table (unless double rules are used), e.g.,
   changing a preamble from \verb=lll= to \verb=l|l|l= does not
   affect the document other than adding rules to the table. In
   contrast, with this class a table that just fitted the
   \verb=\textwidth= might now produce an overfull box. (But you shouldn't
   have vertical rules in the first place.)


%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
% end of tabman.tex
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

\DeleteShortVerb{\=}
\MakeShortVerb{\|}
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%


\chapter{Margin and foot notes} \label{chap:mnotes}

   The standard classes provide the \cmd{\marginpar} command for putting
things into the margin. The class supports two extra kinds of side notes.
It also provides extended footnoting capabilities.


\section{Footnotes}

    A footnote can be considered to be a special kind of float\index{float} 
that is put at the bottom of a page.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\footnote}\oarg{num}\marg{text} \\
\cmd{\footnotemark}\oarg{num} \cmd{\footnotetext}\oarg{num}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
In the main text, the \cmd{\footnote} command puts a marker at the
point where it is called, and puts the \meta{text}, preceded by the same
mark, at the bottom of the page. If the optional \meta{num} is used
then its value is used for the mark, otherwise the \Icn{footnote}
 counter is stepped and provides the mark's value. 

    You can use \cmd{\footnotemark} to put a marker in the main text; the value
is determined just like that for \cmd{\footnote}. Footnote text can be put 
at the bottom of the page via \cmd{\footnotetext}; if the optional \meta{num}
is given it is used as the mark's value, otherwise the value of the
\Icn{footnote} counter is used.
   It may be helpful, but completely untrue, to think of \cmd{\footnote} being
defined like:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\footnote}[1]{\footnotemark\footnotetext{#1}}
\end{lcode}


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\footref}\marg{label} \\
\end{syntax}
    On occasions it may be desireable to make more than one reference
to the text of a footnote\index{footnote!reference}. This can be done by putting a \cmd{\label}
in the footnote and then using \cmd{\footref} to refer to the label; this
prints the footnote label. For example:
\begin{lcode}
...\footnote{... adults or babies.\label{fn:rabbits}}
...
... The footnote\footref{fn:rabbits} on \pref{fn:rabbits} ...
\end{lcode}
In this manual, the last line above prints:
\begin{syntax}
... The footnote\footref{fn:rabbits} on \pref{fn:rabbits} ... \\
\end{syntax}

    The parameters provided by the standard classes for controlling 
footnotes are illustrated in \fref{fig:fn}.

\begin{figure}
\centering
\drawparameterstrue
\setlayoutscale{0.4}
\drawfootnote
\caption{Footnote layout parameters for the standard classes}\label{fig:fn}
\end{figure}

\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\footnotesep} \\
\verb!\skip\footins! \\
\end{syntax}
The length \lnc{\footnotesep} controls the vertical spacing between footnotes\index{footnote}
(and thanks notes),
and is initialised by the class to give no extra spacing for a
\cmd{\footnotesize} font. You can change the spacing by 
\begin{lcode}
\addtolength{\footnotesep}{...}
\end{lcode}
The length |\skip\footins| defines the vertical spacing between the
bottom of the main text and the top of the first line of the first
footnote\index{footnote}. Likewise this can be changed by 
\begin{lcode}
\addtolength{\skip\footins}{...}
\end{lcode}
The total vertical distance between the bottom of the main text and
the baseline of the first line of the first footnote\index{footnote} is
|\footnotesep + \skip\footins|.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\footnoterule} \\
\end{syntax}
 The \cmd{\footnoterule} macro is defined in the LaTeX kernel and
redefined in the standard classes. An `\texttt{@}less' definition, which is slightly
less efficient than that in the classes, is:
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\footnoterule}{%
   \kern -3pt                   % call this kerna
   \hrule height 0.4pt width 0.4\columnwidth
   \kern 2.6pt                  % call this kernb
}
\end{lcode}
This produces a horizontal rule from the left margin\index{margin} to 40\% of the
\cmd{\columnwidth} with thickness 0.4pt. The rule must not take up any
vertical space, which means that |kerna + kernb| must equal the thickness
of the rule. The rule is located a distance |\skip\footins + kerna|
below the bottom of the main text. So, to move the rule upwards, decrease
the value of |kerna| and increase that of |kernb|, and the reverse to
move the rule downwards.

    This class provides some additional parameters but for a wider
variety of footnote styles you may like to use the \Lpack{footmisc} 
package~\cite{FOOTMISC}.
    The additional class parameters have been chosen so as not to clash with
the \Lpack{footmisc} package. Similar concepts apply to the
\cmd{\thanks} command described in \Sref{sec:thanks} 
starting on \pref{sec:thanks}.

    The \cmd{\footnote} macro essentially does three things:
\begin{itemize}
\item Typesets a marker at the point where \cmd{\footnote} is called;
\item Typesets a marker at the bottom of the page on which \cmd{\footnote}
      is called;
\item Following the marker at the bottom of the page, typesets the text 
      of the footnote.
\end{itemize}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\@makefnmark} \\
\end{syntax}
The \cmd{\footnote} macro calls the kernel command \cmd{\@makefnmark} to
typeset the footnote marker at the point where \cmd{\footnote} is called
(the value of the marker is kept in the macro \cmd{\@thefnmark}). The default
definition typesets the mark as a superscript and is essentially
\begin{lcode}
\def\@makefnmark{\hbox{\textsuperscript{\@thefnmark}}}
\end{lcode}
To get, say, the marker to be typeset on the baseline in the normal font
and enclosed in brackets ---
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand*{\@makefnmark}{ [\@thefnmark]}
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\footfootmark} \\
\lnc{\footmarkwidth} \cmd{\footmarkstyle}\marg{arg} \\
\end{syntax}
The class macro for typesetting the marker at the foot of the page is
\cmd{\footfootmark}. The mark is set in a box of width
\lnc{\footmarkwidth}. If this is negative, the mark is outdented
into the margin, if zero the mark is flush left, and when positive
the mark is indented. The appearance of the mark is contolled by
\cmd{\footmarkstyle}. The default specification is
\begin{lcode}
\footmarkstyle{\textsuperscript{#1}}
\end{lcode}
where the |#1| indicates the position of \cmd{\@thefnmark} in the style.
The default results in the mark being set as a superscript.
For example, to have the marker set on the baseline 
and followed by a right parenthesis, do
\begin{lcode}
\footmarkstyle{#1) }
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\footmarksep} \lnc{\footparindent} \\
\end{syntax}
The mark is typeset in a box of width \lnc{\footmarkwidth} and this is
then followed by the text of the footnote. Second and later lines of the
text are offset by the length \lnc{\footmarksep} from the end of the box.
The first line of a paragraph within a footnote is indented by
\lnc{\footparindent}. 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\foottextfont} \\
\end{syntax}
The text in the footnote is typeset using the \cmd{\foottextfont} font.
The default is \cmd{\footnotesize}.

    Altogether, the class specifies
\begin{lcode}
\footmarkstyle{\textsuperscript{#1}}
\setlength{\footmarkwidth}{1.8em}
\setlength{\footmarksep}{-1.8em}
\setlength{\footparindent}{1em}
\newcommand{\foottextfont}{\footnotesize}
\end{lcode}
to replicate the standard footnote layout. 

    You might like to try the
following combinations of \lnc{\footmarkwidth} and \lnc{\footmarksep}
to see if you prefer the layout produced by one of them to the standard 
layout (which is produced by the first pairing in the list below):
\begin{lcode}
\setlength{\footmarkwidth}{1.8em}  \setlength{\footmarksep}{-1.8em}
\setlength{\footmarkwidth}{1.8em}  \setlength{\footmarksep}{0em}
\setlength{\footmarkwidth}{0em}    \setlength{\footmarksep}{0em}
\setlength{\footmarkwidth}{-1.8em} \setlength{\footmarksep}{1.8em}
\setlength{\footmarkwidth}{0em} \setlength{\footmarksep}{1.8em} \footmarkstyle{#1)\hfill}
\end{lcode}
% width = 1.8, sep = 0 -> indented block para & hung number
% width = sep = 0 -> block paragraph at margin
% width = -1.8, sep = -width -> mark in margin, block para at margin


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\makefootmarkhook} \\
\end{syntax}
Just before a footnote is typeset the macro \cmd{\makefootmarkhook} is
called, which by default does nothing, but you can renew it to do something.
For example:
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\makefootmarkhook}{\raggedright}
\end{lcode}
will cause footnotes to be typeset raggedright.

    Any footnotes after this point will be set according to:
\begin{lcode}
\setlength{\footmarkwidth}{-1.0em}
\setlength{\footmarksep}{-\footmarkwidth}
\footmarkstyle{#1}
\end{lcode}
\setlength{\footmarkwidth}{-1.0em}
\setlength{\footmarksep}{-\footmarkwidth}
\footmarkstyle{#1}



\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\multfootsep} \\
\end{syntax}
In the standard classes if two or more footnotes are applied 
sequentially\footnote{One footnote}\footnote{Immediately followed by another}
then the markers in the text are just run together. The class, like the
\Lpack{footmisc}~\cite{FOOTMISC} and \Lpack{ledmac}~\cite{LEDMAC} packages, 
inserts a separator
between the marks. In the class the macro \cmd{\multfootsep} is used as
the separator. Its default definition is:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\multfootsep}{\textsuperscript{\normalfont,}}
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\feetabovefloat} \\
\cmd{\feetbelowfloat} \\
\end{syntax}
In the standard classes, footnotes on a page that has a float at the
bottom are typeset before the float. I think that this looks
peculiar. Following the \cmd{\feetbelowfloat} declaration footnotes will be
typeset at the bottom of the page below any bottom floats; they will also
be typeset at the bottom of \cmd{\raggedbottom} pages as opposed to being
put just after the bottom line of text. The standard positioning is
used following the \cmd{\feetabovefloat} declaration, which is the default.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\plainfootnotes} \\
\cmd{\twocolumnfootnotes} \\
\cmd{\threecolumnfootnotes} \\
\cmd{\paragraphfootnotes} \\
\end{syntax}
Normally, each footnote starts a new paragraph. The class provides three
other styles, making four in all. Following the \cmd{\twocolumnfootnotes}
declaration footnotes will be typeset in two columns, and similarly
they are typeset in three columns after the \cmd{\threecolumnfootnotes}
declaration. Footnotes are run together as a single paragraph after the
\cmd{\paragraphfootnotes} declaration. The default style is used after
the \cmd{\plainfootnotes} declaration. 

   The style can be changed at any 
time but there may be odd effects if the change is made in the middle of
a page when there are footnotes before and after the declaration. You may
find it interesting to try changing styles in an article type document 
that uses \cmd{\maketitle} and \cmd{\thanks}, and some footnotes on the 
page with the title:
\begin{lcode}
\title{...\thanks{...}}
\author{...\thanks{...}...}
...
\begin{document}
\paragraphfootnotes
\maketitle
\plainfootnotes
...
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\newfootnoteseries}\marg{series} \\
\cmd{\plainfootstyle}\marg{series} \\
\cmd{\twocolumnfootstyle}\marg{series} \\
\cmd{\threecolumnfootstyle}\marg{series} \\
\cmd{\paragraphfootstyle}\marg{series} \\
\end{syntax}

    The class provides for additional series of footnotes; perhaps the
normal footnotes are required, flagged with arabic numerals, and another 
kind of footnote flagged with roman numerals. A new footnote series is
created by the \cmd{\newfootseries} macro, where \meta{series} is an
alphabetic identifier for the series. This is most conveniently a 
single (upper case) letter, for example \texttt{P}. 

    Calling, say, \verb?\newfootnoteseries{Q}? creates a set of macros
equivalent to those for the normal \cmd{\footnote} but with the \meta{series}
appended. These include \cs{footnoteQ}, \cs{footnotemarkQ},
\cs{footnotetextQ} and so on. These are used just like the normal
\cmd{\footnote} and companions.

    By default, a series is set to typeset using the normal style
of a paragraph per note. The series' style can be changed by using one
of the \cs{...footstyle} commands.

    For example, to have a `P' (for paragraph) series using roman numerals 
as markers which, in the main text are superscript with a closing parenthesis
and at the foot are on the baseline followed by an endash, and the text is
set in italics at the normal footnote size:
\begin{lcode}
\newfootnoteseries{P}
\paragraphfootstyle{P}
\renewcommand{\thefootnoteP}{\roman{footnoteP}}
\footmarkstyleP{#1--}
\renewcommand{\@makefnmarkS}{\hbox{\textsuperscript{\@thefnmarkP)}}}
\renewcommand{\foottextfont}{\itshape\footnotesize}
\end{lcode}
This can then be used like:
\begin{lcode}
.... this sentence\footnoteP{A `p' footnote\label{fnp}} 
includes footnote~\footrefP{fnp}.
\end{lcode}
In a minipage a different counter (\texttt{mpfootn...}) is used for a footnote 
than in the main text (\texttt{footn...}).
By default its value is a letter. To change it to, say, a numeral for the
`P' series, do:
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\thempfootnoteP}{\arabic{mpfootnoteP}}
\end{lcode}

   The \cmd{\newfootnoteseries} macro does not create series versions
of the footnote-related length commands, such as \lnc{\footmarkwidth}
and \lnc{\footmarksep}, nor does it create versions of \cmd{\footnoterule}.

   At the foot of the page footnotes are grouped according to their series;
all ordinary footnotes are typeset, then all the first series footnotes 
(if any), then the second series, and so on. The ordering corresponds to
the order of \cmd{\newfootnoteseries} commands.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\footfudgefiddle} \\
\end{syntax}
For paragraphed footnotes \tx{} has to estimate the amount of space they
will take. Unfortunately this \emph{is} an estimate and if it is an
underestimate then the footnotes will flow too low on the page, for example
below the page number. Increasing \cmd{\footfudgefiddle} from its default
vaue of 64, causes \tx{} to allot more space. For instance
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\footfufgefiddle}{70}
\end{lcode}
will at least go some way to curing the problem. You will probably have
to do some experimentation to get a good value.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\fnsymbol}\marg{counter} \\
\cmd{\@fnsymbol}\marg{num} \\
\end{syntax}
The \cmd{\fnsymbol} macro typesets the representation of the counter \meta{counter}
like a footnote symbol. Internally it uses the kernel \cmd{\@fnsymbol} macro
which converts a positive integer \meta{num} to a symbol. If you are not fond of
the standard ordering of the footnote symbols, this is the macro to change. Its
original definition is:
\begin{lcode}
\def\@fnsymbol#1{\ensuremath{\ifcase#1\or *\or \dagger\or \ddagger\or
  \mathsection\or \mathparagraph\or \|\or **\or \dagger\dagger
  \or \ddagger\ddagger \else\@ctrerr\fi}}
\end{lcode}
This, as shown by \verb?\@fnsymbol{1},...\@fnsymbol{9}? produces the series: \makeatletter
\@fnsymbol{1},
\@fnsymbol{2},
\@fnsymbol{3},
\@fnsymbol{4},
\@fnsymbol{5},
\@fnsymbol{6},
\@fnsymbol{7},
\@fnsymbol{8}, and
\@fnsymbol{9}.
%\@fnsymbol{10}  % out of bounds
\makeatother 

\makeatletter
\let\m@mold@fnsymbol\@fnsymbol
\renewcommand{\@fnsymbol}[1]{\ensuremath{%
  \ifcase#1\or *\or \dagger\or \ddagger\or
  \mathsection\or \|\or \mathparagraph\or **\or \dagger\dagger
  \or \ddagger\ddagger \else\@ctrerr\fi}}
\makeatother
    Robert Bringhurst quotes 
the following as the traditional ordering (at least up
to \makeatletter\@fnsymbol{6}\makeatother): \makeatletter
\@fnsymbol{1},
\@fnsymbol{2},
\@fnsymbol{3},
\@fnsymbol{4},
\@fnsymbol{5},
\@fnsymbol{6},
\@fnsymbol{7},
\@fnsymbol{8}, and
\@fnsymbol{9}.
\makeatother 
You can obtain this sequence by redefining \cmd{\@fnsymbol} as:
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\@fnsymbol}[1]{\ensuremath{%
  \ifcase#1\or *\or \dagger\or \ddagger\or
  \mathsection\or \|\or \mathparagraph\or **\or \dagger\dagger
  \or \ddagger\ddagger \else\@ctrerr\fi}}
\end{lcode}
not forgetting judicious use of \cmd{\makeatletter} and \cmd{\makeatother}
if you do this in the preamble\index{preamble}. Other authorities or publishers
may prefer other sequences and symbols.
\makeatletter\let\@fnsymbol\m@mold@fnsymbol\makeatother







\section{Verbatim footnotes}
    
    The macro \cmd{\verbfootnote} can typeset a footnote that includes
some verbatim text.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\verbfootnote}\oarg{num}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}

    The next two paragraph are typeset by this code:
\begin{lcode}
    Below, footnote\footref{fn1} is a \cmd{\footnote} while 
footnote~\ref{fn2} is a \cmd{\verbfootnote}.

    The \cmd{\verbfootnote} command should 
appear\footnote{There may be some problems if color is 
                used.\label{fn1}}
to give identical results as the normal \cmd{\footnote}, 
but it can include some verbatim 
text\verbfootnote{The \verb?\footnote? macro, like all others 
                  except for \verb?\verbfootnote?, can not 
                  contain verbatim text in its argument.\label{fn2}}
in the \meta{text} argument.
\end{lcode}

    Below, footnote\footref{fn1} is a \cmd{\footnote} while 
footnote~\ref{fn2} is a \cmd{\verbfootnote}.

    The \cmd{\verbfootnote} command should 
appear\footnote{There may be some problems if color is 
                used.\label{fn1}}
to give identical results as the normal \cmd{\footnote}, 
but it can include some verbatim 
text\verbfootnote{The \verb?\footnote? macro, like all others 
                  except for \verb?\verbfootnote?, can not 
                  contain verbatim text in its argument.\label{fn2}}
in the \meta{text} argument.



\section{Sidebars}

    It appears that the \cmd{\sidebar} command, which was originally noted
as being experimental, has been used successfully for a variety of tasks.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\sidebar}\marg{text} \\
\cmd{\sidebarfont} \\
\end{syntax}
The \cmd{\sidebar} command is like the \cmd{\marginpar} command in that
it typesets its \meta{text} argument, using the font specified
by \cmd{\sidebarfont}, in the margin. Unlike |\marginpar|,
the \meta{text} will start near the top of the page and may continue onto
later pages if it is too long to go on a single page.

   The default definition of \cmd{\sidebarfont} is 
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\sidebarfont}{\normalfont}
\end{lcode}


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\sidebarform} \\
\end{syntax}

    Sidebars are normally narrow so text is set ragged right. More
accurately, the text is set according to \cmd{\sidebarform} which is defined
as:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\sidebarform}{\rightskip=\z@ \@plus 2em}
\end{lcode}
which is ragged right but with less raggedness than \cmd{\raggedright}
would allow. As usual, you can change \cmd{\sidebarform}, for example:
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\sidebarform}{}            % justified text
\end{lcode}

    You are likely to run into problems if the \cmd{\sidebar} command comes
near a pagebreak, or if the sidebar text gets typeset alongside main
text that has non-uniform line spacing (e.g., around a \cmd{\section}).
Also, the contents of sidebars may not be typeset if they are too near
to the end of the document.

\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\sidebarwidth} \\
\lnc{\sidebarhsep} \\
\lnc{\sidebarvsep} \\
\end{syntax}
The \meta{text} of a \cmd{\sidebar} is typeset in a column of width
\lnc{\sidebarwidth} and there will be a horizontal gap of length 
\lnc{\sidebarhsep} between the typeblock and the \meta{text}. The
length \lnc{\sidebarvsep} is the vertical gap between sidebars that fall
on the same page.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\setsidebarheight}\marg{length} \\
\end{syntax}
The macro \cmd{\setsidebarheight} can be used to specify the height
of a sidebar. The \meta{length} argument should be equivalent to
an integral number of lines. For example:
\begin{lcode}
\setsidebarheight{15\onelineskip}
\end{lcode}


Currently the alignment of the text in a sidebar with the main text
is not particularly good and you may want to do some 
experimentation (possibly through a combination of
\lnc{sidebarvsep} and \cmd{\setsidebarheight}) to make it 
better.\footnote{If you do improve the alignment, 
please let me know how you did it.}

\section{Side notes}

    The vertical position of side notes specified via \cmd{\marginpar}
is flexible so that adjacent notes are prevented from overlapping.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\sidepar}\oarg{left}\marg{right} \\
\lnc{\sideparvshift} \\
\end{syntax}

    The \cmd{\sidepar} macro is similar to \cmd{\marginpar} except that
it produces side notes that do not float --- they may overlap. The same
spacing is used for both \cmd{\marginpar} and \cmd{\sidepar}, namely
the lengths \lnc{\marginparsep} and \lnc{\marginparwidth}. The length
\lnc{\sideparvshift} can be used to make vertical adjustments to the
position of \cmd{\sidepar} notes. By default this is set to a value
of -2.08ex which seems to be the magical length that aligns the top of
the note with the text line.

    By default the \meta{right} argument is put in the right margin. When
the \Lopt{twoside} option is used the \meta{right} argument is put into
the left margin on the verso (even numbered) pages; however, for these pages
the optional \meta{left} argument is used instead if it is present. For
two column text the relevent argument is put into the `outer' margin with 
respect to the column.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\sideparswitchtrue} \cmd{\sideparswitchfalse} \\
\cmd{\reversesidepartrue} \cmd{\reversesideparfalse} \\
\cmd{\parnopar} \\
\end{syntax}

    The default placement can be changed by judicious use of the
\cs{reversidepar*} and \cs{sideparswitch*} declarations. For two sided
documents the default is \cmd{\sideparswitchtrue}, which specifies that
notes should be put into the outer margins; in one sided documents
the default is \cmd{\sideparswitchfalse} which specifies that notes
should always be put into the right hand margin. Following the
declaration \cmd{\reversesidepartrue} notes are put into opposite margin
than that described above 
(the default declaration is \cmd{\reversesideparfalse}).

    When LaTeX is deciding where to place the side notes it checks whether
it is on an odd or even page and sometimes TeX doesn't realise that it has just
moved onto the next page. Effectively TeX typesets paragraph by paragraph 
(including any side notes) and at the end of each paragraph sees if there
should have been a page break in the middle of the paragraph. If there was
it outputs the first part of the paragraph, inserts the page break, and retains
the second part of the paragraph, without retypesetting it, for eventual
output at the top of the new page. This means that side notes for any given
paragraph are in the same margin, either left or right. A side note at the
end of a paragraph may then end up in the wrong margin. The macro 
\cmd{\parnopar} forces a new paragraph but without appearing to (the first
line in the following paragraph follows immediately after the last element
in the prior paragraph with no line break). You can use \cmd{\parnopar}
to make TeX to do its page break calculation when you want it to, by splitting
what appears to be one paragraph into two paragraphs.

    Bastiaan Veelo has kindly provided example code for another
form of a side note, as follows.
\begin{lcode}
%% A new command that allows you to note down ideas or annotations in
%% the margin of the draft. If you are printing on a stock that is wider
%% than the final page width, we will go to some length to utilise the
%% paper that would otherwise be trimmed away, assuming you will not be
%% trimming the draft. These notes will not be printed when we are not
%% in draft mode.
\makeatletter
   \ifdraftdoc
     \newlength{\draftnotewidth}
     \newlength{\draftnotesignwidth}
     \newcommand{\draftnote}[1]{\@bsphack%
       {%% do not interfere with settings for other marginal notes
         \strictpagechecktrue%
         \checkoddpage%
         \setlength{\draftnotewidth}{\foremargin}%
         \addtolength{\draftnotewidth}{\trimedge}%
         \addtolength{\draftnotewidth}{-3\marginparsep}%
         \ifoddpage
           \setlength{\marginparwidth}{\draftnotewidth}%
           \marginpar{\flushleft\textbf{\textit{\HUGE !\ }}\small #1}%
         \else
           \settowidth{\draftnotesignwidth}{\textbf{\textit{\HUGE\ !}}}%
           \addtolength{\draftnotewidth}{-\draftnotesignwidth}%
           \marginpar{\raggedleft\makebox[0pt][r]{%% hack around
               \parbox[t]{\draftnotewidth}{%%%%%%%%% funny behaviour
                 \raggedleft\small\hspace{0pt}#1%
               }}\textbf{\textit{\HUGE\ !}}%
           }%
         \fi
       }\@esphack}
   \else
     \newcommand{\draftnote}[1]{\@bsphack\@esphack}
   \fi
\makeatother
\end{lcode}

    Bastiaan also noted that it provided an example of using the
\lnc{\foremargin} length.
    If you want to try it out, either put the code in your preamble,
or put it into a package (i.e., \file{.sty} file) without the 
\cs{makeat...} commands. 



%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\clearpage
\pagestyle{companion}
\chapterstyle{companion}
\defaultsecnum
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\chapter{Signposts and decoration} \label{chap:signposts}


\newcommand{\tepi}[2]{\epigraph{#1}{#2}}

 \tepi{My soul, seek not the life of immortals; but enjoy to the full
       the resources that are within your reach}
      {\textit{Pythian Odes \\ Pindar}}

    This chapter is typeset using the \cstyle{companion} chapterstyle 
and the \pstyle{companion} pagestyle.

\section{Introduction}

    By now we have covered most aspects of typesetting. As far as
the class is concerned this chapter describes the remaining major element, 
namely headers\index{header} and footers\index{footer}, and the slightly more fun task of typesetting
epigraphs\index{epigraph}.


\section{Page styles}

    The class provides a selection of pagestyles that you can use and if 
they don't suit, then there are means to define your own.

    These facilities were inspired by the \Lpack{fancyhdr} 
package~\cite{FANCYHDR}, although the command set is different.

    The standard classes provide for a footer\index{footer} and header\index{header} for odd and even 
pages. Thus there are four elements to be specified for a pagestyle.
This class partitions the headers\index{header} and footers\index{footer} into left, center and right
portions, so there are a total of 12 elements that have to be specified
for a pagestyle. You may find, though, that one of the built in pagestyles
meets your needs so you don't have to worry about all these specifications.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\pagestyle}\marg{style} \\
\cmd{\thispagestyle}\marg{style} \\
\end{syntax}
   \cmd{\pagestyle} sets the current pagestyle to \meta{style}. On a particular
page \cmd{\thispagestyle} can be used to override the cuurent pagestyle for
the one page.

    Some of the class' commands automatically call \cmd{\thispagestyle}:
\begin{itemize}
\item \cmd{\part} calls |\thispagestyle{part}|; 
\item \cmd{\chapter} calls |\thispagestyle{chapter}|; 
\item if \cmd{\cleardoublepage} will result in an empty verso page it calls
    |\thispagestyle{cleared}| for the empty page.
\end{itemize}

    The page styles provided by the class are:
\begin{itemize}
\item[\pstyle{empty}] The headers\index{header} and footers\index{footer} 
  are empty.
\item[\pstyle{plain}] The header\index{header} is empty and the 
  folio\index{folio} (page number) is centered at the bottom of the page.
\item[\pstyle{headings}] The footer\index{footer} is empty and the 
  header\index{header} contains the the folio\index{folio} at the outer 
  side of the page, and either the chapter or section title. 
  Chapter~\ref{chap:starting} uses this style.
\item[\pstyle{myheadings}] This is like the \pstyle{headings} style except you
     have to specify the titles, if any, to go into the header\index{header}.
\item[\pstyle{ruled}] The footer\index{footer} contains the 
  folio\index{folio} at the outside. The header\index{header} contains 
  either the chapter or section titles, and a line is drawn underneath the 
  header\index{header}. 
  This style is used in \Cref{chap:layingpage}.
\item[\pstyle{Ruled}] This is like the \pstyle{ruled} style except that 
  the headers\index{header} and footers\index{footer} extend into the 
  \foredge{} margin\index{margin}.
  Chapter~\ref{chap:verse} uses this style.
\item[\pstyle{companion}] This is like the pagestyle in the 
     \textit{Companion} series (e.g., see~\cite{GOOSSENS94}).
    For an example, see \Cref{chap:signposts}.
\item[\pstyle{part}] This is the same as the \pstyle{plain} pagestyle.
\item[\pstyle{chapter}]  This is the same as the \pstyle{plain} pagestyle.
\item[\pstyle{cleared}]  This is the same as the \pstyle{empty} pagestyle.
\item[\pstyle{title}]   This is the same as the \pstyle{plain} pagestyle.
\item[\pstyle{titlingpage}] This is the same as the \pstyle{empty} pagestyle.
\end{itemize}

    For the \pstyle{headings} pagestyle above, you have to define your own
titles to go into the header\index{header}. Each sectioning command, say |\sec|, 
calls a macro called |\secmark|. The pagestyles usually define this command
so that it picks up the title, and perhaps the number, of the |\sec|. 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\markboth}\marg{left}\marg{right} \\
\cmd{\markright}\marg{right} \\
\end{syntax}
    \cmd{\markboth} sets the values of two \emph{markers}\index{markers}
to \meta{left} and \meta{right} respectively, at the point in the text 
where it is called. Similarly, \cmd{\markright} sets the value of a
marker to \meta{right}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\leftmark} \cmd{\rightmark} \\
\end{syntax}
The macro \cmd{\leftmark} contains the value of the \meta{left} argument
of the \emph{last} \cmd{\markboth} on the page. The macro \cmd{\rightmark}
contains the value of the \meta{right} argument of the \emph{first}
\cmd{\markboth} or \cmd{\markright} on the page, or if there is not one it
contains the value of the most recent \meta{right} argument.

    So, a pagestyle can define the |\secmark| commands in terms of 
\cmd{\markboth} or \cmd{\markright}, and then use \cmd{\leftmark} and/or
\cmd{\rightmark} in the headers\index{header} or footers\index{footer}. I'll show examples of how this
works later, and this is often how the \pstyle{myheadings} style gets 
implemented.


\section{Making headers and footers}

    As mentioned, the class provides for left, center, and right slots in
even and odd headers\index{header} and footers\index{footer}. This section describes how you can make
your own pagestyle using these 12 slots.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\makepagestyle}\marg{style} \\
\cmd{\aliaspagestyle}\marg{alias}\marg{original} \\
\cmd{\copypagestyle}\marg{new}\marg{original} \\
\end{syntax}
The command \cmd{\makepagestyle} specifies a pagestyle \meta{style} which
is initially equivalent to the \pstyle{empty} pagestyle. 
The \cmd{\aliaspagestyle} macro defines the \meta{alias} pagestyle to be 
the same as the \meta{original} pagestyle. As an example of the latter, 
the class includes the code
\begin{lcode}
\aliaspagestyle{part}{plain}
\aliaspagestyle{chapter}{plain}
\aliaspagestyle{cleared}{empty}
\end{lcode}
The macro \cmd{\copypagestyle} creates a \meta{new} pagestyle with the 
definitions being copies of those for the \meta{original} pagestyle.


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\makeevenhead}\marg{style}\marg{left}\marg{center}\marg{right} \\
\cmd{\makeoddhead}\marg{style}\marg{left}\marg{center}\marg{right} \\
\cmd{\makeevenfoot}\marg{style}\marg{left}\marg{center}\marg{right} \\
\cmd{\makeoddfoot}\marg{style}\marg{left}\marg{center}\marg{right} \\
\end{syntax}
The macro \cmd{\makeevenhead} defines the \meta{left}, \meta{center}, and
\meta{right} portions of the \meta{style} pagestyle header\index{header} for even numbered
(verso) pages. Similarly \cmd{\makeoddhead}, \cmd{\makeevenfoot}, and
\cmd{\makeoddfoot} define the \meta{left}, \meta{center} and \meta{right}
portions of the \meta{style} header\index{header} for odd numbered (recto) pages,
and the footers\index{footer} for verso and recto pages. These commmands for \meta{style}
should be used after the corresponding \cmd{\makepagestyle} for \meta{style}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\makerunningwidth}\marg{style}\marg{length} \\
\lnc{\headwidth} \\
\end{syntax}
The macro \cmd{\makerunningwidth} sets the width of the \meta{style}
pagestyle headers\index{header} and footers\index{footer} to be \meta{length}. The \cmd{\makepagestyle}
sets the width to be the textwidth, so the macro need only be used if some
other width is desired. The length \lnc{\headwidth} is provided as a
(scratch) length that may be used for headers\index{header} or footers\index{footer}, or any other
purpose.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\makeheadrule}\marg{style}\marg{width}\marg{thickness} \\
\cmd{\makefootrule}\marg{style}\marg{width}\marg{thickness}\marg{skip} \\
\end{syntax}
A header\index{header} may have a rule drawn between it and the top of the typeblock\index{typeblock},
and similarly a rule may be drawn between the bottom of the typeblock\index{typeblock}
and the footer\index{footer}. The \cmd{\makeheadrule} macro specifies the the \meta{width}
and \meta{thickness} of the rule below the \meta{style} pagestyle header\index{header}, and
the \cmd{\makefootrule} does the same for the rule above the footer\index{footer}; the
additional \meta{skip} argument is a distance that specifies the vertical
positioning of the foot rule (see \cmd{\footruleskip}).
The \cmd{\makepagestyle} macro initialises the \meta{width} to the 
\lnc{\textwidth} and the \meta{thickness} to 0pt, so by default no rules
are visible.

\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\normalrulethickness} \\
\end{syntax}
\lnc{\normalrulethickness} is the normal thickness of a visible rule, by 
default 0.4pt. It can be changed using \cmd{\setlength}, although I suggest 
that you do not unless perhaps when using the \Lopt{14pt} or \Lopt{17pt}
class options. 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\footruleheight} \\
\cmd{\footruleskip} \\
\end{syntax}
The macro \cmd{\footruleheight} is the height of a normal
rule above a footer\index{footer} (default zero). \cmd{\footruleskip} is a distance 
sufficient to ensure that a foot rule will be placed between the bottom
of the typeblock\index{typeblock} and the footer\index{footer}. Despite appearing to be lengths, if
you really need to change the values use \cmd{\renewcommand}, 
not \cmd{\setlength}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\makeheadposition}\marg{style}\\
    \marg{eheadpos}\marg{oheadpos}\marg{efootpos}\marg{ofootpos} \\
\end{syntax}
The \cmd{\makeheadposition} macro specifies the horizontal positioning
of the even and odd headers\index{header} and footers\index{footer}, respectively, for the \meta{style}
pagestyle. Each of the \meta{...pos} arguments may be |flushleft|, |center|,
or |flushright|, with the obvious meanings. An empty, or unrecognised, argument
is equivalent to |center|. This macro is really only of use if the 
header/footer\index{header}\index{footer} width is not the same as the \lnc{\textwidth}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\makepsmarks}\marg{style}\marg{code} \\
\end{syntax}
The last thing that the \cmd{\pagestyle}\marg{style} does is call the
\meta{code} argument of the \cmd{\makepsmarks} for \meta{style}.
This is normally used for specifying non-default code 
(i.e., code not specifiable via any of the previous macros) for the particular
pagestyle. The code normally defines the marks, if any, that will be used in
the headers\index{header} and footers\index{footer}.


\subsection{Example pagestyles}

    This first example demonstrates most of the page styling commands.
In the \textit{LaTeX Companion} series of 
books~\cite{GOOSSENS94,GOOSSENS97,GOOSSENS99} the header\index{header} is wider 
than the typeblock\index{typeblock}, sticking out into the foredge margin\index{margin}, and has a rule 
underneath it. The page number is in bold and at the outer end of the header\index{header}.
Chapter titles are in verso headers\index{header} and section titles in recto headers\index{header}, both
in bold font and at the spine margin\index{margin}. The footers\index{footer} are empty.

    The first thing to do in implementing this style is to calculate 
the width of the headers\index{header}, which extend to cover any marginal\index{marginalia} notes.
\begin{lcode}
\setlength{\headwidth}{\textwidth}
  \addtolength{\headwidth}{\marginparsep}
  \addtolength{\headwidth}{\marginparwidth}
\end{lcode}
Now we can set up an empty \pstyle{companion} pagestyle and start to change
it by specifying the new header\index{header} and footer\index{footer} width:
\begin{lcode}
\makepagestyle{companion}
\makerunningwidth{companion}{\headwidth}
\end{lcode}
and specify the width and thickness for the header\index{header} rule, otherwise it will 
be invisible.
\begin{lcode}
\makeheadrule{companion}{\headwidth}{\normalrulethickness}
\end{lcode}

    In order to get the header\index{header} to stick out into the foredge margin\index{margin}, 
verso headers\index{header} have to be flushright (raggedleft) and recto headers\index{header}
to be flushleft (raggedright). As the footers\index{footer} are empty, their position
is immaterial.
\begin{lcode}
\makeheadposition{companion}{flushright}{flushleft}{}{}
\end{lcode}

    The current chapter and section titles are obtained from the 
\cmd{\leftmark} and \cmd{\rightmark} macros which are defined via the
\cmd{\chaptermark} and \cmd{\sectionmark} macros. Remember that
\cmd{\leftmark} is the last \meta{left} marker and \cmd{\rightmark}
is the first \meta{right} marker\index{markers} on the page.

Chapter numbers are not
put into the header\index{header} but the section number, if there is one, is put into
the header\index{header}. We have to make sure that
the correct definitions are used for these, and this is where the 
\cmd{\makepsmarks} macro comes into play.
\begin{lcode}
\makepsmarks{companion}{%
  \let\@mkboth\markboth
  \def\chaptermark##1{\markboth{##1}{##1}}% % left & right marks
  \def\sectionmark##1{\markright{%          % right mark
    \ifnum \c@secnumdepth>\z@
      \thesection. \%                       % section number
    \fi
    ##1}}
}
\end{lcode}

    The preliminaries have all been completed, and it just remains to specify
what goes into each header\index{header} and footer\index{footer} slot (but the footers\index{footer} are empty).
\begin{lcode}
\makeevenhead{companion}%
  {\normalfont\bfseries\thepage}{}{\normalfont\bfseries\leftmark}
\makeoddhead{companion}%
  {\normalfont\bfseries\rightmark}{}{\normalfont\bfseries\thepage}
\end{lcode}

    Now issuing the command |\pagestyle{companion}| will produce pages 
typeset with \pstyle{companion} pagestyle headers\index{header}.

    This definition is actually part of the class. If you want to alter it, or
use it as the basis for a style of your own, remember the caveats about
macros with |@| in their names.

\subsection{Special headers}

    If you look at the Index\index{index} you will see that the header\index{header} shows the first and
last entries on the page.
A main entry in the index\index{index} looks like:
\begin{lcode}
\item \idxmark{entry}, page number(s)
\end{lcode}
and in the preamble\index{preamble} to this manual \cmd{\idxmark} is defined as
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\idxmark}[1]{#1\markboth{#1}{#1}}
\end{lcode}
This typesets the entry and also uses the entry as markers so that
the first entry on a page is held in \cmd{\rightmark} and the last
is in \cmd{\leftmark}.

    As index\index{index} entries are usually very short, the Index\index{index} is set in 
two columns\index{column!double}. Unfortunately LaTeX's marking mechanism can be a little
fragile on twocolumn\index{column!double} pages, but the standard 
\Lpack{fixltx2e} package~\cite{FIXLTX2E} corrects this.

    The index\index{index} itself is called by\index{indexing}
\begin{lcode}
\clearpage
\pagestyle{index}
\renewcommand{\preindexhook}{%
The first page number is usually, but not always, the primary reference to
the indexed topic.\vskip\onelineskip}
\printindex
\end{lcode}

\makepagestyle{index}
  \makeheadrule{index}{\textwidth}{\normalrulethickness}
  \makeevenhead{index}{\rightmark}{}{\leftmark}
  \makeoddhead{index}{\rightmark}{}{\leftmark}
  \makeevenfoot{index}{\thepage}{}{}
  \makeoddfoot{index}{}{}{\thepage}

    The \pstyle{index} pagestyle, which is the crux of
this example, is defined here as:
\begin{lcode}
\makepagestyle{index}
  \makeheadrule{index}{\textwidth}{\normalrulethickness}
  \makeevenhead{index}{\rightmark}{}{\leftmark}
  \makeoddhead{index}{\rightmark}{}{\leftmark}
  \makeevenfoot{index}{\thepage}{}{}
  \makeoddfoot{index}{}{}{\thepage}
\end{lcode}
This, as you can hopefully see, puts the first and last index\index{index} entries
on the page into the header\index{header} at the left and right, with the folios\index{folio}
in the footers\index{footer} at the \foredge{} margin\index{margin}.

    I used Pehong Chen's 
\textit{MakeIndex}\index{MakeIndex?\textit{MakeIndex}} program~\cite{CHEN88} 
for converting the raw index\index{index}
data in the \file{.idx} file into the form expected by LaTeX in 
the \file{.ind} file. \textit{MakeIndex} can be configured via an
\file{.ist} file, and the \file{memman.ist} file that I created for
this manual includes the mysterious lines
\begin{lcode}
% output main entry <entry> as: \item \idxmark{<entry>},
item_0  "\n\\item \\idxmark{"
delim_0 "},"
\end{lcode}
Look up either Chen's paper~\cite{CHEN88} or Chapter~12 in~\cite{GOOSSENS94}
for an explanation of this cryptic code.

\index{float!page|(}

\begin{syntax}
\piif{ifonlyfloats}\marg{yes}\marg{no} \\
\end{syntax}
    There are occasions when it is desireable to have different headers\index{header} on
pages that only contain figures\index{figure} or tables\index{table}. If the command \piif{ifonlyfloats}
is issued on a page that contains no text and only floats then the \meta{yes}
argument is processed, otherwise on a normal page the \meta{no} argument
is processed. The command is most useful when defining a pagestyle that 
should be different on a float-only page\index{page!of floats}.

    For example, assume that the \pstyle{companion} pagestyle is to be
generally used, but on float-only pages all that is required is a pagestyle
similar to \pstyle{plain}. Borrowing some code from the \pstyle{companion}
specification this can be accomplished like:
\begin{lcode}
\makepagestyle{floatcomp}
% \headwidth has already been defined for the companion style
\makeheadrule{floatcomp}{\headwidth}%
  {\ifonlyfloats{0pt}{\normalrulethickness}}
\makeheadposition{floatcomp}{flushright}{flushleft}{}{}
\makepsmarks{floatcomp}{\companionpshook}
\makeevenhead{floatcomp}{\ifonlyfloats{}{\normalfont\bfseries\thepage}}%
           {}{\ifonlyfloats{}{\normalfont\bfseries\leftmark}}
\makeoddhead{floatcomp}{\ifonlyfloats{}{\normalfont\bfseries\rightmark}}%
           {}{\ifonlyfloats{}{\normalfont\bfseries\thepage}}
\makeevenfoot{floatcomp}{}{\ifonlyfloats{\thepage}{}}{}
\makeoddfoot{floatcomp}{}{\ifonlyfloats{\thepage}{}}{}
\end{lcode}
The code above for the \pstyle{floatcomp} style should be compared with 
that for the earlier \pstyle{companion} style.

    The headrule is invisible on float pages by giving it zero thickness, 
otherwise it has the \cmd{\normalrulethickness}. The head position is 
identical for both pagestyles. However, the headers\index{header} are empty for
\pstyle{floatcomp} and the footers\index{footer} have centered page numbers 
on float pages; on ordinary pages the footers\index{footer} are empty while the headers\index{header}
are the same as the \pstyle{companion} headers\index{header}.

    The code includes one `trick'. The macro \cmd{\makepsmarks}|{X}{code}|
is equivalent to
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\Xpshook}{code}
\end{lcode}
I have used this knowledge in the line:
\begin{lcode}
\makepsmarks{floatcomp}{\companionpshook}
\end{lcode}
which avoids having to retype the code from |\makepsmarks{companion}{...}|,
and ensures that the code is actually the same for the two pagestyles.


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\mergepagefloatstyle}\marg{style}\marg{textstyle}\marg{floatstyle} \\
\end{syntax}
    If you have two pre-existing pagestyles, one that will be used for
text pages and the other that can be used for float pages, then the
\cmd{\mergepagefloatstyle} command provides a simpler means of combining
them than the above example code for \pstyle{floatcomp}. The argument
\meta{style} is the name of the pagestyle being defined. The
argument \meta{textstyle}
is the name of the pagestyle for text pages and \meta{floatstyle} is the
name of the pagestyle for float-only pages. Both of these must have been 
defined before calling \cmd{\mergepagefloatstyle}. So, instead of the long
winded, and possibly tricky, code I could have simply said:
\begin{lcode}
\mergepagefloatstyle{floatcomp}{companion}{plain}
\end{lcode}

\index{float!page|)}


 \section{Epigraphs} 
\index{epigraph|(}

 \tepi{The whole is more than the sum of the parts.}
      {\textit{Metaphysica \\ Aristotle}}

 Some authors like to add an interesting quotation\index{quotation} at either the start
 or end of a chapter. The class provides commands
 to assist in the typesetting of a single epigraph. Other authors like to 
 add many such quotations\index{quotation} and the class provides environments to
 cater for these as well.
 Epigraphs can be typeset at either the left, the center or the right of 
 the typeblock\index{typeblock}. A few example eipgraphs are exhibited here, and
 others can be found in an article by
 Christina Thiele~\cite{TTC199} where she reviewed the \Lpack{epigraph}
package~\cite{EPIGRAPH} which is included in the class.

 \subsection{The \texttt{epigraph} command}

  The original inspiration for \cmd{\epigraph} was Doug Schenck's
 for the epigraphs in our book~\cite{EBOOK}. That was hard wired for
 the purpose at hand. The version here provides much more flexibility.


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\epigraph}\marg{text}\marg{source} \\
\end{syntax}
  The command \cmd{\epigraph}
 typesets
 an epigraph using \meta{text} as the main text of the epigraph and
 \meta{source} being the original author (or book, article, etc.)
 of the quoted text. By default the epigraph is placed at the right hand 
 side of the typeblock\index{typeblock}, and the \meta{source} is typeset at the bottom
 right of the \meta{text}.


 \subsection{The \texttt{epigraphs} environment}

\begin{syntax}
\senv{epigraphs}  \\
  \cmd{\qitem}\marg{text}\marg{source} \\
  ... \\
\eenv{epigraphs} \\
\end{syntax}
 The \Ie{epigraphs} environment typesets a list of epigraphs, and by default
 places them at the right hand side of the typeblock\index{typeblock}.
  Each epigraph in an \Ie{epigraphs} environment is specified by a 
 \cmd{\qitem} (analagous to the \cmd{\item}
 command in ordinary list environments).
 By default, the \meta{source} is typeset at the bottom right of the
 \meta{text}. 

 

 \subsection{General}

 \tepi{Example is the school of mankind, and they will learn at no other.}
      {\textit{Letters on a Regicide Peace}\\ \textsc{Edmund Burke}}

   The commands described in this section apply to both the \cmd{\epigraph}
 command and the |epigraphs| environment. But first of all, note that an
 epigraph immediately after a heading\index{heading} will cause the first paragraph\index{paragraph!indentation}
 of the following text to be indented. If you want the initial paragraph
 to have no indentation, then start it with the \cmd{\noindent} command.

\begin{syntax}
 \lnc{\epigraphwidth} \\
\cmd{\epigraphtextposition}\marg{flush} \\
\end{syntax}
  The epigraphs are typeset in a minipage of width \lnc{\epigraphwidth}. 
The default
 value for this can be changed using the \cmd{\setlength} command. Typically,
 epigraphs are typset in a measure much less than the width of the typeblock\index{typeblock}.
 In order to avoid bad line breaks, the \meta{text} is normally typeset 
 raggedright. 

    The \meta{flush} argument to the \cmd{\epigraphtextposition} 
declaration
controls the \meta{text} typesetting style. By default this is 
\texttt{flushleft} (which produces raggedright text). The sensible values
are \texttt{center} for centered text, \texttt{flushright} for raggedleft
text, and \texttt{flushleftright} for normal justified text.

    If by any chance you want the \meta{text} to be typeset in some
other layout style, the easiest
way to do this is by defining a new environment which sets the paragraphing
parameters to your desired values. For example, as the \meta{text} is
typeset in a minipage, there is no paragraph indentation. If you
want the paragraphs to be indented and justified then define
a new environment like:
\begin{lcode}
\newenvironment{myparastyle}{\setlength{\parindent}{1em}}{}
\end{lcode}
 and use it as: 
\begin{lcode}
\epigraphtextposition{myparastyle}
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
 \cmd{\epigraphposition}\marg{flush} \\
\end{syntax}
  As noted, the default position of epigraphs is at the right hand side
 of the typeblock\index{typeblock}. The positioning is 
controlled by 
the \meta{flush} argument to the \cmd{\epigraphposition} declaration.
The default value is \texttt{flushright}. This can be changed
 to \texttt{flushleft} for positioning at the left hand side or to
 \texttt{center} for positioning at the center of the typeblock\index{typeblock}.

\begin{syntax}
 \cmd{\epigraphsourceposition}\marg{flush} \\
\end{syntax}
 The \meta{flush} argument to the \cmd{\epigraphsourceposition}
declaration controls the position 
of the \meta{source}.
 The default value is \texttt{flushright}. It can be changed to
 \texttt{flushleft}, \texttt{center} or \texttt{flushleftright}.

 For example, to have epigraphs centered with the \meta{source} at the left,
 add the following to your document.
 \begin{lcode}
 \epigraphposition{center}
 \epigraphsourceposition{flushleft}
 \end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\epigraphfontsize}\marg{fontsize} \\
\end{syntax}
 Epigraphs are often typeset in a smaller font than the main text. The
\meta{fontsize} argument to the \cmd{\epigraphfontsize}
declaration sets the font size to be used.
 If you don't like the default value (\cmd{\small}), you can easily change
it to, say \cmd{\footnotesize} by:
\begin{lcode}
\epigraphfontsize{\footnotesize}
\end{lcode}
		
\begin{syntax}
 \lnc{\epigraphrule} \\
\end{syntax}
 By default, a rule is drawn between the \meta{text} and \meta{source},
 with the rule thickness being given by the value of \lnc{\epigraphrule}.
 The value can be changed by using \cmd{\setlength}.
 A value of \texttt{0pt} will eliminate the rule. Personally, I dislike
 the rule in the list environments.

\begin{syntax}
 \lnc{\beforeepigraphskip} \\
 \lnc{\afterepigraphskip} \\
\end{syntax}
 The two |...skip| commands specify the amount of vertical space inserted
 before and after typeset epigraphs. Again, these can be changed by
 \cmd{\setlength}. It is desireable that the sum of their values should be an 
 integer multiple of the \lnc{\baselineskip}.

 Note that you can use normal LaTeX commands in the \meta{text} and
 \meta{source} arguments. You may wish to use different fonts for the
 \meta{text} (say roman) and the \meta{source} (say italic).

 The epigraph at the start of this section was specified as:
 \begin{lcode}
 \epigraph{Example is the school of mankind,
           and they will learn at no other.}
  {\textit{Letters on a Regicide Peace}\\ \textsc{Edmund Burke}}
 \end{lcode}

 \subsection{Epigraphs before chapter headings}

    The \cmd{\epigraph} command and the |epigraphs| environment typeset
 an epigraph at the point in the text where they are placed. The
 first thing that a \cmd{\chapter} command does is to start off a new page,
 so another mechanism is provided for placing an epigraph just before
 a chapter heading\index{heading!chapter}.
    
\begin{syntax}
 \cmd{\epigraphhead}\oarg{distance}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
  The \cmd{\epigraphhead} macro  stores \meta{text} 
 for printing at \meta{distance} below the header\index{header} on a page.
 \meta{text} can be ordinary text or, more likely, can be either an
 \cmd{\epigraph} command or an |epigraphs| environment. By default, the 
 epigraph will be typeset at the righthand margin\index{margin}.
 If the command is immediately preceded by a \cmd{\chapter} or \cmd{\chapter*} 
 command, the epigraph is typeset on the chapter title page.

    The default value for the optional \meta{distance} argument is set so
 that an \cmd{\epigraph} consisting of a single line of quotation\index{quotation} and a single
 line denoting the source is aligned with the bottom of the `Chapter X'
 line produced by the \cmd{\chapter} command. In other cases you will
 have to experiment with the \meta{distance} value. The value for
 \meta{distance} can be either a integer or a real number. The units
 are in terms of the current value for \lnc{\unitlength}. A typical value
 for \meta{distance} for a single line quotation\index{quotation} and source for 
 a \cmd{\chapter*} might be about 70 (points). A positive value
 of \meta{distance} places the epigraph below the page heading and a negative
 value will raise it above the page heading.

    Here's some example code:
 \begin{lcode}
 \chapter*{Celestial navigation}
 \epigraphhead[70]{\epigraph{Star crossed lovers.}{\textit{The Bard}}}
 \end{lcode}


 The \meta{text} argument is put into a minipage of width \lnc{\epigraphwidth}.
 If you use something other than \cmd{\epigraph} or |epigraphs| for the
 \meta{text} argument, you may have to so some positioning of the text
 yourself so that it is properly located in the minipage. For example
 \begin{lcode}
 \chapter{Short}
 \renewcommand{\epigraphflush}{center}
 \epigraphhead{\centerline{Short quote}}
 \end{lcode}

 The \cmd{\epigraphhead} command changes the page style for the page on
 which it is specified, so there should be no text between the
 \cmd{\chapter} and the \cmd{\epigraphhead} commands. The page style
is identical to the \pstyle{plain} page style except for the inclusion of
the epigraph.
    If you want a more fancy style for epigraphed chapters you will have
to do some work yourself.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\epigraphforheader}\oarg{distance}\marg{text} \\
\cmd{\epigraphpicture} \\
\end{syntax}
The \cmd{\epigraphforheader} macro takes the same arguments as
\cmd{\epigraphhead} but puts \meta{text} into a zero-sized picture at
the coordinate position |(0,-<distance>)|; the macro \cmd{\epigraphpicture}
holds the resulting picture. This can then be used as part of a 
chapter pagestyle, as in
\begin{lcode}
\makepagestyle{mychapterpagestyle}
...
\makeoddhead{mychapterpagestyle}{}{}{\epigraphpicture}
\end{lcode}


\begin{syntax}
 \cmd{\dropchapter}\marg{length} \\
 \cmd{\undodrop} \\
\end{syntax}
 If a long epigraph is placed before a chapter title it is possible that the
 bottom of the epigraph may interfere with the chapter title. The command
 \cmd{\dropchapter} will lower any subsequent chapter titles by 
 \meta{length}; a negative \meta{length} will raise the titles.
 The command \cmd{\undodrop} restores subsequent chapter titles to their default
 positions. For example:
 \begin{lcode}
 \dropchapter{2in}
 \chapter{Title}
 \epigraphhead{long epigraph}
 \undodrop
 \end{lcode}

\index{epigraph|)}

\begin{syntax}
 \cmd{\cleartoevenpage}\oarg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
 On occasions it may be desirable to put something (e.g., an epigraph, a map,
 a picture) on the page facing the start
 of a chapter, where the something belongs to the chapter that is about to 
 start rather than the chapter that has just ended. In order to do this 
 in a document that is going to be printed
 doublesided, the chapter must start on an odd numbered page and the 
 pre-chapter material put on the immediately preceding even numbered page.
 The \cmd{\cleartoevenpage} command is like \cmd{\cleardoublepage} except
 that the page following the command will be an even numbered page, and the
 command takes an optional argument 
 which is applied to the skipped page (if any).

    Here is an example:
\begin{lcode}
 ... end previous chapter.
 \cleartoevenpage
 \begin{center}
 \begin{picture}... \end{picture}
 \end{center}
 \chapter{Next chapter}
\end{lcode}
 If the style is such that chapter headings\index{heading!chapter} are put at the top of the pages,
 then it would be advisable to include |\thispagestyle{empty}| (or |plain|)
 immediately after |\cleartoevenpage| to avoid a heading related to the
 previous chapter from appearing on the page. 

 If the something is like a figure\index{figure} with a numbered caption and the numbering
 depends on the chapter numbering, then the numbers have to be hand set (unless
 you define a special chapter command for the purpose). For example:
\begin{lcode}
 ... end previous chapter.
 \cleartoevenpage[\thispagestyle{empty}] % skipped page, if any, to be empty
 \thispagestyle{plain}
 \addtocounter{chapter}{1} % increment the chapter number
 \setcounter{figure}{0}    % initialise figure counter
 \begin{figure}
 ...
 \caption{Pre chapter figure}
 \end{figure}

 \addtocounter{chapter}{-1} % decrement the chapter number
 \chapter{Next chapter}     % increments chapter & initialises figure numbers
 \addtocounter{figure}{1}   % to account for pre-chapter figure
\end{lcode}
 

 \subsection{Epigraphs on part pages}

\index{epigraph|(}

     The \Lpack{epigraph} package as it stands cannot put an epigraph on the
 same page as a |\part| or |\part*| title page in 
 a \Lclass{book} or \Lclass{report} class. This is because the |\part| command
 internally does some page flipping before and after the title page.
 However, it is easy enough to put epigraphs on part\index{part} pages.

 \begin{itemize}
 \item Create a file called, say, \file{epipart.sty} which looks like this:
 \begin{verbatim}
 % epipart.sty
 \let\@epipart\@endpart
 \renewcommand{\@endpart}{\thispagestyle{epigraph}\@epipart}
 \endinput
 \end{verbatim}

 \item Start your document like:
 \begin{verbatim}
 \documentclass[...]{...}
 \usepackage{epigraph}
 \usepackage{epipart}
 \end{verbatim}

 \item Immediately \emph{before} each |\part| command put an 
 |\epigraphhead| command. For example:
 \begin{verbatim}
 \epigraphhead[300]{Epigraph text}
 \part{Part title}
 \end{verbatim}
 The value of the optional argument may need changing to vertically adjust
 the position of the epigraph. If there is any |\part| that does not have an
 epigraph then an empty |\epigraphhead| command (i.e., |\epigraphhead{}|)
 must be placed immediately before the |\part| command.

 \end{itemize}

     A similar scheme may be used for epigraphs on other kinds of pages. 
 The essential
 trick is to make sure that the \pstyle{epigraph} pagestyle is used for
 the page.
    For an epigraphed bibliography\index{bibliography} 
or index\index{index}, the macros \cmd{\prebibhook}
or \cmd{\preindexhook} can be appropriately modified to do this.

\index{epigraph|)}


%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\clearpage
\pagestyle{Ruled}
\chapterstyle{demo}
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

\chapter{Typesetting verse} \label{chap:verse}

    This chapter uses the \cstyle{demo} chapterstyle and the \pstyle{Ruled}
pagestyle. 

\section{Introduction}

    The typesetting of a poem should be really be dependent on the
particular poem. Individual problems do not usually admit of a
general solution, so this manual and code should be used more
as a guide towards some solutions rather than providing a ready
made solution for any particular piece of verse.

    The doggerel used as illustrative material has been taken 
from~\cite{RUMOUR}.

    Note that for the examples in this section I have made no attempt
to do other than use the minimal (La)TeX capabilities; in particular
I have made no attempt to do any special page breaking so some stanzas
may cross onto the next page --- most undesireable for publication.

    The standard LaTeX classes provide the \Ie{verse} environment which 
is defined as a particular
kind of list. Within the environment you use \cmd{\\} to end a line, 
and a blank line will end a stanza. For example, here is a single
stanza poem:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\garden}{
I used to love my garden \\
But now my love is dead \\
For I found a bachelor's button \\
In black-eyed Susan's bed.
}
\end{lcode}
\newcommand{\garden}{
I used to love my garden \\
But now my love is dead \\
For I found a bachelor's button \\
In black-eyed Susan's bed.
}
When this is typeset as a normal LaTeX paragraph\index{paragraph} (with no paragraph
indentation) it looks like: \\[\baselineskip]
\garden{}

\vspace*{\onelineskip}

   Typesetting it within the \Ie{verse} environment produces:% \\[\baselineskip]

\begin{verse}  
\garden
\end{verse}

%\ablankline

The stanza could also be typeset within the \Ie{alltt} environment, defined
in the standard \Lpack{alltt} package~\cite{ALLTT}, 
using a normal font and no \cmd{\\} line endings.
\begin{lcode}
\begin{alltt}\normalfont
I used to love my garden 
But now my love is dead 
For I found a bachelor's button 
In black-eyed Susan's bed.
\end{alltt}
\end{lcode}
which produces:

\begin{alltt}\normalfont
I used to love my garden 
But now my love is dead 
For I found a bachelor's button 
In black-eyed Susan's bed.
\end{alltt}

The \Ie{alltt} environment is like the \Ie{verbatim} environment except that
you can use LaTeX macros inside it. 
   In the \Ie{verse} environment long lines will be wrapped and indented
but in the \Ie{alltt} environment there is no indentation. 

Some stanzas have certain lines indented, often alternate ones. To
typeset stanzas like this you have to add your own spacing. For
instance:
\begin{lcode}
\begin{verse}
There was an old party of Lyme \\
Who married three wives at one time. \\
\hspace{2em} When asked: `Why the third?' \\
\hspace{2em} He replied: `One's absurd, \\
And bigamy, sir, is a crime.'
\end{verse}
\end{lcode}
is typeset as: 

\begin{verse}
There was an old party of Lyme \\
Who married three wives at one time. \\
\hspace{2em} When asked: `Why the third?' \\
\hspace{2em} He replied: `One's absurd, \\
And bigamy, sir, is a crime.'
\end{verse}

%\ablankline

Using the \Ie{alltt} environment you can put in the spacing via ordinary
spaces. That is, this:
\begin{lcode}
\begin{alltt}\normalfont
There was an old party of Lyme
Who married three wives at one time.
      When asked: `Why the third?' 
      He replied: `One's absurd, 
And bigamy, sir, is a crime.'
\end{alltt}
\end{lcode}
is typeset as

\begin{alltt}
\normalfont
There was an old party of Lyme
Who married three wives at one time.
      When asked: `Why the third?' 
      He replied: `One's absurd, 
And bigamy, sir, is a crime.'
\end{alltt}

More exotically you could use the TeX \cmd{\parshape} 
command\footnote{See the \textit{TeXbook} for how to use this.}:
\begin{lcode}
\parshape = 5 0pt \linewidth 0pt \linewidth 
              2em \linewidth 2em \linewidth 0pt \linewidth
\noindent There was an old party of Lyme \\
Who married three wives at one time. \\
When asked: `Why the third?' \\
He replied: `One's absurd, \\
And bigamy, sir, is a crime.' \par
\end{lcode}
which will be typeset as:

\vspace*{\onelineskip}

\parshape = 5 0pt \linewidth 0pt \linewidth 
              2em \linewidth 2em \linewidth 0pt \linewidth
\noindent There was an old party of Lyme \\
Who married three wives at one time. \\
When asked: `Why the third?' \\
He replied: `One's absurd, \\
And bigamy, sir, is a crime.' \par


\vspace*{\onelineskip}

   This is about as much assistance as standard (La)TeX provides, except
to note that in the \Ie{verse} environment the \cmd{\\*} version of \cmd{\\}
will prevent a following page break. You can also make judicious use
of the \cmd{\needspace} macro to keep things together.

   Some books of poetry, and especially anthologies, have two or more
indexes\index{index}, one, say for the poem titles and another for the first lines.
The \Lpack{index}~\cite{INDEX} and \Lpack{multind}~\cite{MULTIND}
packages provide support for multiple indexes\index{index} in one document.

%\clearpage
\section{Classy verse} 

    The code provided by the \Lclass{memoir} class is meant to help
with some aspects of typesetting poetry but does not, and cannot,
provide a comprehensive solution to all the requirements that
will arise.

    The main aspects of typesetting poetry that differ from typesetting
plain text are:
\begin{itemize}
\item Poems are usually visually centered on the page.
\item Some lines are indented, and often there is a pattern to the
      indentation.
\item When a line is too wide for the page it is broken and the
      remaining portion indented with respect to the original start
      of the line.
\end{itemize}
These are the ones that the class attempts to deal with.

\begin{syntax}
\senv{verse}\oarg{length} ... \eenv{verse} \\
\lnc{\versewidth} \\
\lnc{\stanzaskip} \\
\end{syntax}
The \Ie{verse} environment provided by the class is an extension
of the usual LaTeX environment. The environment takes one optional
parameter, which is a length; for example |\begin{verse}[4em]|.
You may have noticed that the earlier verse examples are all
near the left margin\index{margin}, whereas verses usually look better if they
are typeset about the center of the page. The length parameter,
if given, should be about the length of an average line, and then
the entire contents will be typeset with the mid point of the length
centered horizontally on the page.

The length \lnc{\versewidth} is provided as a convenience. It may be used,
for example, to calculate the length of a line of text for use
as the optional argument to the \Ie{verse} environment: 
\begin{lcode}
\settowidth{\versewidth}{This is the average line,}
\begin{verse}[\versewidth]
\end{lcode}

    The vertical space between stanzas is the length \lnc{\stanzaskip}.
It can be changed by the usual methods.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\\} \cmd{\\*} \cmd{\\>} \verb?\\!? \\
\end{syntax}
Each line in the \Ie{verse} environment, except possibly for the last line
in a stanza, 
must be ended with either \cmd{\\} or \cmd{\\*}. The starred
version prevents a page break before the following line.
    The \cmd{\\>} command causes a break in the line (see the 
description of the \cmd{\verselinebreak} macro). 

The \pixslashbang{}  macro
may be used at the end of a line to signal the end of the stanza. This
would normally be followed by a blank line before the next stanza.

    Each of the |\\...| macros take an optional length argument. In the
case of the \cmd{\\}, \cmd{\\*} and \pixslashbang{} macros it introduces
the specified amount of vertical space. For \cmd{\\>} it specifies
a horizontal space.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\vin} \\
\lnc{\vgap} \\
\lnc{\vindent} \\
\end{syntax}
The command \cmd{\vin} is shorthand for |\hspace*{\vgap}| for use
at the start of an indented line of verse. The length \lnc{\vgap}
(initially 1.5em) can be changed by \cmd{\setlength} or \cmd{\addtolength}.

    Verse lines are sometimes indented according to the space taken by
the text on the previous line.
\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\vinphantom}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
The macro \cmd{\vinphantom} can be used at the start of a line of verse to
give an indentation as though the line started with \meta{text}. For example:
\begin{verse}
\ldots \\
Come away with me.
\end{verse}
\begin{verse}
\vinphantom{Come away with me.} Impossible! \\
\ldots
\end{verse}
The above fragment from a poem was typeset by:
\begin{lcode}
\begin{verse}
\ldots \\
Come away with me.
\end{verse}
\begin{verse}
\vinphantom{Come away with me.} Impossible! \\
\ldots
\end{verse}
\end{lcode}

    \cmd{\vinphantom} may also be used in the middle of any line to 
leave some blank space. For example, compare the two lines below, 
which are produced by this code:
\begin{lcode}
\noindent Come away with me and be my love --- Impossible. \\
          Come away with me \vinphantom{and be my love} --- Impossible.
\end{lcode}

\noindent Come away with me and be my love --- Impossible. \\
Come away with me \vinphantom{and be my love} --- Impossible.


When a verse line is too long to fit within the typeblock\index{typeblock} it is
wrapped onto the next line with a space, given by the value of the
length \lnc{\vindent}. The initial value of \lnc{\vindent} is twice 
\lnc{\vgap}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\verselinebreak}\oarg{length} \\
\end{syntax}
Using the command \cmd{\verselinebreak} will cause 
later text in the
line of the verse to be typeset indented on the following line.
If the optional length argument is given then its value is added
to the normal indentation.
The broken
line will count as a single line as far as the \Ie{altverse}, 
\Ie{patverse}, and \Ie{patverse*} environments are concerned.
The \cmd{\\>} macro is shorthand for \cmd{\verselinebreak}.

\begin{syntax}
\senv{altverse} ... \eenv{altverse} \\
\end{syntax}
Within the \Ie{verse} environment stanzas are separated by a blank line
in the input. Individual stanzas within \Ie{verse} may, however, 
be enclosed in the \Ie{altverse} environment. This has the effect of
indenting the 2nd, 4th, etc., lines of the stanza by the length \lnc{\vgap}.

\begin{syntax}
\senv{patverse} ... \eenv{patverse} \\
\senv{patverse*} ... \eenv{patverse*} \\
\cmd{\indentpattern}\marg{digits} \\
\end{syntax}
As an alternative to the \Ie{altverse} environment, 
individual stanzas within the \Ie{verse} environment may be enclosed
in the \Ie{patverse} environment. Within this environment the indentation
of each line is specified by an indentation pattern, which consists
of an array of digits, $d_{1}$ to $d_{n}$, and the $n^{th}$ line is
indented by $d_{n}$ times |\vgap|. The first line is
not indented, irrespective of the value of $d_{1}$ and if the number of
lines is greater than the pattern length, the trailing lines are not indented.

    The \Ie{patverse*} environment is similar to \Ie{patverse} except
that the indentation pattern will keep repeating until the end of the
environment.

    The indentation pattern for a \Ie{patverse} environment is specified
via the \cmd{\indentpattern} command, where \meta{digits} is a string
of digits (e.g., |3213245281|). 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\linenumberfrequency}\marg{nth} \\
\cmd{\thepoemline} \\
\cmd{\linenumberfont}\marg{font-decl} \\
\lnc{\vrightskip} \\
\end{syntax}
    The lines in a poem may be numbered. The \cmd{\linenumberfrequency} 
declaration
specifies that every \meta{nth} line is to be numbered. If \meta{nth} is
less than 1 then line numbering is switched off, if \meta{nth} is 1 then 
every line will be numbered, and if \meta{nth} is, say 5, every fifth
line will be numbered. The default is |\linenumberfrequency{0}|.

    The counter for the lines is \Icn{poemline}, so the typeset form of the 
line number is specified via \cmd{\thepoemline}
which defaults to arabic numbers. The number is positioned
in the right hand margin at a distance \lnc{\vrightskip} 
(default 1em) from the edge
of the typeblock. The font used for the line numbers is specified
by \cmd{\linenumberfont}. The default definition is: \\
|\linenumberfont{\small\rmfamily}| \\
to produce small numbers in the roman font.


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\flagverse}\marg{text} \\
\lnc{\vleftskip} \\
\end{syntax}
The \cmd{\flagverse} macro can be used at the start of a verse line, and
it typesets its \meta{text} argument at a distance \lnc{\vleftskip} 
(default 3em) to the
left of the verse line. This could be used, for example, to number stanzas.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\poemtitle}\oarg{short}\marg{long} \\
\cmd{\poemtitle*}\marg{long} \\
\cmd{\poemtitlefont}\marg{font} \\
\end{syntax}
\cmd{\poemtitle} typesets the title
of a poem and makes an entry into the \toc. The starred version,
\cmd{\poemtitle*}, makes no \toc{} entry.
The \cmd{\poemtitlefont} macro specifies the font and positioning of 
the poem title. Its initial definition is: \\
|\newcommand{\poemtitlefont}{\normalfont\bfseries\large\centering}| \\
to give a large bold centered title. This can of course be renewed
if you want something else.

\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\beforepoemtitleskip} \\
\lnc{\afterpoemtitleskip} \\
\end{syntax}
These two lengths are the vertical space before and after the 
\cmd{\poemtitle}
title text. They are initially defined to give the same spacing
as for a \cmd{\section} title. They can be changed by \cmd{\setlength} or
\cmd{\addtolength} for different spacings.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\poemtitlemark}\marg{title} \\
\end{syntax}
The \cmd{\poemtitle} macro, but not \cmd{\poemtitle*},
calls the \cmd{\poemtitlemark}\marg{title} macro,
which is defined to do nothing. This would probably be changed by a
pagestyle definition (like \cmd{\sectionmark} or \cmd{\chaptermark} may be
modified).

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\poemtoc}\marg{sec} \\
\end{syntax}
The kind of entry made in the \toc{} by the \cmd{\poemtitle} command is
defined by \cmd{\poemtoc}. The initial definition is: \\
|\newcommand{\poemtoc}{section}| \\
for a section-like \toc{} entry. This can be changed to, say, |chapter|
or |subsection| or \ldots.


%\clearpage
\subsection{Examples}

   Here are some sample verses using the class facilities.

First our old Limerick friend, but titled and centered:
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\poemtoc}{subsection}
\settocdepth{subsection}
\poemtitle{A Limerick}
\settowidth{\versewidth}{There was an old party of Lyme}
\begin{verse}[\versewidth]
There was an old party of Lyme \\
Who married three wives at one time. \\
\vin When asked: `Why the third?' \\
\vin He replied: `One's absurd, \\
And bigamy, sir, is a crime.'
\end{verse}
\end{lcode}
which gets typeset as below. The \cmd{\poemtoc} is redefined
to |subsection| so that the \cmd{\poemtitle} titles
are entered into the \toc{} as unnumbered subsections.
However, the \toc{} normally only lists sections and above, so
I also used \cmd{\settocdepth} to change this to subsections and 
above\footnote{It is changed back at the end of this chapter.}.

\renewcommand{\poemtoc}{subsection}
\settocdepth{subsection}
\poemtitle{A Limerick}
\settowidth{\versewidth}{There was an old party of Lyme}
\begin{verse}[\versewidth]
There was an old party of Lyme \\
Who married three wives at one time. \\
\vin When asked: `Why the third?' \\
\vin He replied: `One's absurd, \\
And bigamy, sir, is a crime.'
\end{verse}

%\ablankline

    Next is the Garden verse within the |altverse| environment. It
is titled and centered. 
\begin{lcode}
\settowidth{\versewidth}{But now my love is dead}
\poemtitle{Loves Lost}
\begin{verse}[\versewidth]
\begin{altverse}
\garden
\end{altverse}
\end{verse}
\end{lcode}
Note how the alternates lines are automatically indented in the 
typeset result below.

\settowidth{\versewidth}{But now my love is dead}
\poemtitle{Loves Lost}
\begin{verse}[\versewidth]
\begin{altverse}
\garden
\end{altverse}
\end{verse}

% \ablankline

It is left up to you how you might want to add information about
the author of a poem. Here is one example of a macro for this:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\attrib}[1]{%
   \nopagebreak{\raggedleft\footnotesize #1\par}}
\end{lcode}
\newcommand{\attrib}[1]{%
   \nopagebreak{\raggedleft\footnotesize #1\par}}

   This can be used as in the next bit of doggerel.
\begin{lcode}
\poemtitle{Fleas}
\settowidth{\versewidth}{What a funny thing is a flea}
\begin{verse}[\versewidth]
What a funny thing is a flea. \\
You can't tell a he from a she. \\
But he can. And she can. \\
Whoopee!
\end{verse}
\attrib{Anonymous}
\end{lcode}

\poemtitle{Fleas}
\settowidth{\versewidth}{What a funny thing is a flea}
\begin{verse}[\versewidth]
What a funny thing is a flea. \\
You can't tell a he from a she. \\
But he can. And she can. \\
Whoopee!
\end{verse}
\attrib{Anonymous}

%\ablankline

The next example demonstrates the automatic line wrapping for overlong
lines.
\begin{lcode}
\poemtitle{In the Beginning}
\settowidth{\versewidth}{And objects at rest tended to remain at rest}
\begin{verse}[\versewidth]
Then God created Newton, \\
And objects at rest tended to remain at rest, \\
And objects in motion tended to remain in motion, \\
And energy was conserved
   and momentum was conserved
   and matter was conserved \\
And God saw that it was conservative.
\end{verse}
\attrib{Possibly from \textit{Analog}, circa 1950}
\end{lcode}

%%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
\poemtitle{In the Beginning}
\settowidth{\versewidth}{And objects at rest tended to remain at rest}
\begin{verse}[\versewidth]
Then God created Newton, \\
And objects at rest tended to remain at rest, \\
And objects in motion tended to remain in motion, \\
And energy was conserved
   and momentum was conserved
   and matter was conserved \\
And God saw that it was conservative.
\end{verse}
\attrib{Possibly from \textit{Analog}, circa 1950}

%\ablankline

The following verse demonstrates the use of a forced linebreak. It also
has a slightly different title style.
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\poemtitlefont}{\normalfont\large\itshape\centering}
\poemtitle{Mathematics}
\settowidth{\versewidth}{Than Tycho Brahe, or Erra Pater:}
\begin{verse}[\versewidth]
In mathematics he was greater \\
Than Tycho Brahe, or Erra Pater: \\
For he, by geometric scale, \\
Could take the size of pots of ale;\\ \settowidth{\versewidth}{Resolve by}
Resolve, by sines \\>[\versewidth] and tangents straight, \\
If bread or butter wanted weight; \\
And wisely tell what hour o' the day \\
The clock does strike, by Algebra.
\end{verse}
\attrib{Samuel Butler (1612--1680)}
\end{lcode}

\renewcommand{\poemtitlefont}{\normalfont\large\itshape\centering}
\poemtitle{Mathematics}
\settowidth{\versewidth}{Than Tycho Brahe, or Erra Pater:}
\begin{verse}[\versewidth]
In mathematics he was greater \\
Than Tycho Brahe, or Erra Pater: \\
For he, by geometric scale, \\
Could take the size of pots of ale;\\ \settowidth{\versewidth}{Resolve by}
Resolve, by sines \\>[\versewidth] and tangents straight, \\
If bread or butter wanted weight; \\
And wisely tell what hour o' the day \\
The clock does strike, by Algebra.
\end{verse}
\attrib{Samuel Butler (1612--1680)}

%\ablankline
%\clearpage

Another limerick, but this time taking advantage of the |patverse|
environment. If you are typesetting a series of limericks you only
need specify one \cmd{\indentpattern} for all of them.
\begin{lcode}
\settowidth{\versewidth}{There was a young lady of Ryde}
\indentpattern{00110}
\poemtitle{The Young Lady of Ryde}
\begin{verse}[\versewidth]
\begin{patverse}
There was a young lady of Ryde \\
Who ate some apples and died. \\
The apples fermented \\
Inside the lamented \\
And made cider inside her inside. 
\end{patverse}
\end{verse}
\end{lcode}

\settowidth{\versewidth}{There was a young lady of Ryde}
\indentpattern{00110}
\poemtitle{The Young Lady of Ryde}
\begin{verse}[\versewidth]
\begin{patverse}
There was a young lady of Ryde \\
Who ate some apples and died. \\
The apples fermented \\
Inside the lamented \\
And made cider inside her inside. 
\end{patverse}
\end{verse}


The next example is a song that I have known since childhood. 
The `forty-niner' in line~\ref{vs:1} refers to the 1849 gold rush.

\clearpage

\begin{lcode}
\settowidth{\versewidth}{Oh my darling, Clementine}
\poemtitle{Clementine}
\begin{verse}[\versewidth]
\linenumberfrequency{3}
\flagverse{1.} In a cavern, in a canyon, \\
Excavating for a mine, \\
Lived a miner, forty-niner, \label{vs:1} \\
And his daughter, Clementine. \\!
\flagverse{\textsc{chorus}} Oh my darling, Oh my darling, \\
Oh my darling, Clementine. \\
Thou art lost and gone for ever. \\
Dreadful sorry, Clementine. \\!
\linenumberfrequency{0}
\end{verse}
\end{lcode}

\settowidth{\versewidth}{Oh my darling, Clementine}
\poemtitle{Clementine}
\begin{verse}[\versewidth]
\linenumberfrequency{3}
\flagverse{1.} In a cavern, in a canyon, \\
Excavating for a mine, \\
Lived a miner, forty-niner, \label{vs:1} \\
And his daughter, Clementine. \\!
\flagverse{\textsc{chorus}} Oh my darling, Oh my darling, \\
Oh my darling, Clementine. \\
Thou art lost and gone for ever. \\
Dreadful sorry, Clementine. \\!
\linenumberfrequency{0}
\end{verse}


 The last example is a much more ambitious use of |\indentpattern|. In
this case it is defined as: \\
|\indentpattern{0135554322112346898779775545653222345544456688778899}| \\
and the result is shown on the next page.


\clearpage
\poemtitle{Mouse's Tale}
\settowidth{\versewidth}{a mouse that morning}
\indentpattern{0135554322112346898779775545653222345544456688778899}
\begin{verse}[\versewidth]
\setlength{\vgap}{1em}
\begin{patverse}
\large Fury said to \\
  a mouse, That \\
  he met \\
  in the \\
  house, \\
\normalsize `Let us \\
  both go \\
  to law: \\
  \emph{I} will \\
  prosecute \\
  \textit{you.} --- \\
  Come, I'll \\
\small take no \\
  denial; \\
  We must \\
  have a \\
  trial: \\
  For \\
\footnotesize really \\
  this \\
  morning \\
  I've \\
  nothing \\
  to do.' \\
  Said the \\
  mouse to \\
\scriptsize the cur, \\
  Such a \\
  trial, \\
  dear sir, \\
  With no \\
  jury or \\
  judge, \\
  would be \\
  wasting \\
  our breath.' \\
\tiny  `I'll be \\
  judge, \\
  I'll be \\
  jury.' \\
  Said \\
  cunning \\
  old Fury; \\
  `I'll try \\
  the whole \\
  cause \\
  and \\
  condemn \\
  you \\
  to \\
  death.'  \par
\end{patverse}
\end{verse}
\attrib{Lewis Carrol, \textit{Alice's Adventures in Wonderland}, 1865}

%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\settocdepth{section}
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

\chapter{Verbatims, boxes, and files}

\section{Introduction}

    This chapter describes some new facilities for handling verbatim
text; new boxes to go around things, including verbatims; and a more 
friendly interface for writing to and reading from files and in some
cases being able to read files verbatim, while putting them
into a box with line numbers.

\section{Verbatims}

    I have included in the class the code for the \Lpack{shortvrb}
package~\cite{SHORTVRB} and an extended version of the \Lpack{verbatim}
package~\cite{VERBATIM}. I have also borrowed from the \Lpack{moreverb}
package~\cite{MOREVERB}.

    When processing text verbatim LaTeX ignores any special meaning
that a character may have. As a special case of this, LaTeX ignores 
\emph{any} character in a comment.
\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\newcomment}\marg{comenv} \\
\end{syntax}
The macro \cmd{\newcomment} creates a new comment environment called
\meta{comenv}. All text within the \meta{comenv} environment will be ignored.
\begin{syntax}
\senv{comment} anything \eenv{comment} \\
\end{syntax}
The class provides one comment environment, namely the \Ie{comment} 
environment which is specified by
\begin{lcode}
\newcomment{comment}
\end{lcode}
This may be useful for `commenting out' large chunks of 
a source document.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\commentsoff}\marg{comenv} \\
\cmd{\commentson}\marg{comenv} \\
\end{syntax}
The declaration \cmd{\commentsoff} switches off the commenting within
the \meta{comenv} comment environment, and the declaration
\cmd{\commentson} switches on commenting within the \meta{comenv}
comment environment. In either case, \meta{comenv} must have been previously
defined as a comment environment via \cmd{\newcomment}.

    Suppose, for example, that you are preparing a draft document for 
review by some others and you want to include some notes for the reviewers.
Also, you want to include some private comments in the source for yourself.
You could use the \Ie{comment} environment for your private comments and
create another environment for the notes to the reviewers. These notes
should not appear in the final document. Your source might then look like:
\begin{lcode}
\newcomment{review}
\ifdraftdoc\else
  \commentsoff{review}
\fi
...
\begin{comment}
Remember to finagle the wingle!
\end{comment}
...
\begin{review}
\textit{REVIEWERS: Please pay particular attention to this section.}
\end{review}
...
\end{lcode}

    LaTeX provides the \cmd{\verb} command for
typesetting short pieces of text verbatim; `short' means less than one
line. If you have to type a lot of verbatim bits, like macro names,
it becomes very tedious to keep on doing \verb!\verb?\amacro?!.
The \cmd{\verb*} macro is similar to \cmd{\verb} except that it
typesets the symbol \verb*? ? in place of a space.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\MakeShortVerb}\marg{verbchar} \\
\cmd{\DeleteShortVerb}\marg{verbchar} \\
\end{syntax}

    With the \cmd{\MakeShortVerb} declaration you can use a single
character instead of |\verb|\meta{char}. The \meta{verbchar}
argument to \cmd{\MakeShortVerb} is a backslash followed by a single 
character, for example |\MakeShortVerb{\?}|. 
You can then use |?...?| instead of |\verb?...?|. To turn off
the use of |?| in this special manner, call |\DeleteShortVerb{\?}|.

\begin{syntax}
\senv{verbatim} anything \eenv{verbatim} \\
\senv{verbatim*} anything \eenv{verbatim*} \\
\end{syntax}
The \Ie{verbatim} and \Ie{verbatim*} environments are used for
typesetting any length of verbatim text.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\setverbatimfont}\marg{font-decl} \\
\end{syntax}
The font that is used for \emph{all} verbatim text is specified
by \cmd{\setverbatimfont}. The default is: \\
|\setverbatimfont{\normalfont\ttfamily}| \\
If you wanted verbatims to be set in a smaller size, then this will
do the trick:
\begin{lcode}
\setverbatimfont{\normalfont\small\ttfamily}
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\tabson}\oarg{num} \\
\cmd{\tabsoff} \\
\end{syntax}
The standard \Ie{verbatim} environment ignores any TABs, or rather
treats a sequence of TABs as a single space. In the class,
if you use the declaration \cmd{\tabson} then TABs will not be ignored
in subsequent verbatims. The declaration \cmd{\tabsoff} turns off
tabbing inside verbatims. The default is |\tabsoff|. By default the class
uses four spaces for each tab. The optional \meta{num} argument to
\cmd{\tabson} will use \meta{num} spaces for each TAB.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\wrappingon} \\
\cmd{\wrappingoff} \\
\lnc{\verbatimindent} \\
\cmd{\verbatimbreakchar} \\
\end{syntax}
Very occasionally it may be useful to wrap long verbatim lines round onto
the following line. After the declaration \cmd{\wrappingon}, verbatim lines
that would extend into the margin will be wrapped (\cmd{\wrappingoff}
returns the behaviour to normal). The second and later parts of a 
wrapped line are indented by the length \lnc{\verbatimindent} which
can be altered in the usual manner. 

    It may be desireable to indicate that a line is continued on the 
next line. That is the role of \cmd{\verbatimbreakchar}. By default
this is defined as: \\
|\newcommand*{\verbatimbreakchar}{\char`\%}| \\
which typesets \% at the end of each line that is wrapped. To have
|/| at the end of each line instead, do:
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand*{\verbatimbreakchar}{\char`\/}
\end{lcode}

    Note that trying both tabbing and wrapping together does not 
always work well. It is best to do only one out of the two, and make
that tabbing.

    There is some more on verbatims in later sections.

\section{Framed boxes}

    You can use framed boxes, looking like the syntax boxes here,
in the standard LaTeX classes but they cannot break over a page.

    The \Ie{framed}, \Ie{shaded} and \Ie{leftbar} environments, which
can break over a page, are from the \Lpack{framed} package~\cite{FRAMED}.

\begin{syntax}
\senv{framed} text \eenv{framed} \\
\senv{shaded} text \eenv{shaded} \\
\senv{leftbar} text \eenv{leftbar} \\
\end{syntax}
The \Ie{framed} environment puts the text into an \cmd{\fbox}-like 
framed box the same width as the text width. The
\Ie{shaded} environment puts the text into a coloured box, and the
\Ie{leftbar} environment draws a vertical line at the left of the text.
In all cases the text and boxes can include page breaks.

\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\FrameRule} \lnc{\FrameSep} \cmd{\FrameHeightAdjust} \\
\Itt{shadecolor} \\
\end{syntax}
The thickness of the rules is the length \lnc{\FrameRule} and the separation
between the text and the box is given by the length \lnc{\FrameSep}.
The height of the frame above the baseline at the top of a page is specified
by the macro \cmd{\FrameHeightAdjust}. The default definitions being:
\begin{lcode}
\setlength{\FrameRule}{\fboxrule}
\setlength{\FrameSep}{3\fboxsep}
\newcommand{\FrameHeightAdjust}{0.6em}
\end{lcode}
The background color in the \Ie{shaded} environment is specified by
\Itt{shadecolor} which you have to specify using the \Lpack{color}
package~\cite{COLOR}. For example:
\begin{lcode}
\usepackage{color}
\definecolor{shadecolor}{gray}{0.75}
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\frameasnormaltrue} \cmd{\frameasnormalfalse} \\
\end{syntax}
Following the declaration \cmd{\frameasnormaltrue} paragraphing within
the environments will be as specified for the main text. After the declaration
\cmd{\frameasnormalfalse} paragraphing will be as though the environments
were like a \Ie{minipage}. The initial declaration is 
\cmd{\frameasnormaltrue}.

    There is one known problem with framing: when framing is used on 
a page where the page header is in a smaller type than the body, the 
header may be moved slightly up or down. This can be avoided by putting
the font size change in a group, but it seems that a larger font does not need
to be grouped. For example:
\begin{lcode}
\makeoddhead{myheadings}{{\tiny Tiny header}}{}{\LARGE Large header}
\end{lcode}
The environments are a little
delicate. You cannot use floats, footnotes or marginpars inside them,
and they do not work in two column mode except for the standard
LaTeX supplied one.

    You can use the \Lpack{framed} package with the \Lclass{memoir} class, in
which case you will get whatever functionality is provided by the package as
it will override the class' code.

\begin{syntax}
\senv{fboxverbatim} anything \eenv{fboxverbatim} \\
\end{syntax}
The \Ie{fboxverbatim} environment is, except for its name,
identical to the \Ie{boxedverbatim} environment from the \Lpack{moreverb}
package~\cite{MOREVERB}. It puts a close fitting rectangular box
around its contents, which are typeset verbatim.


\begin{syntax}
\senv{boxedverbatim} anything \eenv{boxedverbatim} \\
\end{syntax}
The \Ie{boxedverbatim} environment has the flavour of both the
\Ie{framed} and \Ie{fboxverbatim} environments, but it adds its
own bells and whistles. In its simplest usage the contents of the
environment are typeset verbatim in a rectangular box (or boxes as
it allows pagebreaks) like a \Ie{framed} box.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\bvbox} \cmd{\bvsides} \cmd{\bvtopandtail} \cmd{\nobvbox} \\
\end{syntax}
Four different kinds of framing styles are provided for the
\Ie{boxedverbatim} environment. After a \cmd{\bvbox}
declaration the default framing style is used, which draws rectangular
boxes. After the \cmd{\bvsides} declarations, rules are drawn on each
side but there are no top or bottom  rules; the converse is
the \cmd{\bvtopandtail} declaration when only an initial and final 
horizontal rule is drawn and no side rules. No rules at all are
drawn after \cmd{\nobvbox}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\bvtopofpage}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
With the default framing style (\cmd{\bvbox}) a heading can be put
at the top of continuation boxes if there is too much to fit onto
a page. The heading is the \meta{text} of \cmd{\bvtopofpage}.
The default specification is |\bvtopofpage{}| but if you wanted, say, to
indicate that the verbatim was a continuation from the previous
page you could do
\begin{lcode}
\bvtopofpage{\begin{center}\normalfont (Continued)\end{center}}
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\linenumberfrequency}\marg{nth} \\
\cmd{\linenumberfont}\marg{font-decl} \\
\cmd{\resetbvlinenumber} \\
\end{syntax}
Exactly
as in the \Ie{verse} environment line numbers are printed
if the \meta{nth} argument to |\linenumberfrequency| is greater
than zero, and the numbers are set in the font defined via 
\cmd{\linenumberfont}.
At any point outside the environment the line numbers may be reset
to the initial value by \cmd{\resetbvlinenumber}. 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\bvnumbersinside} \\
\cmd{\bvnumbersoutside} \\
\end{syntax}
If the lines are numbered, the numbers can be put inside the box
(\cmd{\bvnumbersinside}) or outside (\cmd{\bvnumbersoutside}).
In either case, numbers are set at the left of the lines.
The default is for numbers inside the box.

    Verbatim tabbing, but not wrapping, applies to the \Ie{boxedverbatim}
environment.

\section{Files}

    Latex gives you the \cmd{\input} command to read a file but is really
not much obvious help if you want to write stuff out to a file.

    TeX has 16 `streams' that can be open simultaneously for writing
out, and there are also 16 input streams. These streams can be attached
to files so that data can be read out and read in from external files.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\newoutputstream}\marg{stream} \\
\cmd{\newinputstream}\marg{stream} \\
\end{syntax}
    The command \cmd{\newoutputstream} creates a new stream
called \meta{stream} for writing out text and commands. 
The \meta{stream} argument must be just alphabetic characters with 
no spaces; for example |myout|.
Similarly, the command \cmd{\newinputstream} creates a new stream for
reading from a file. The \meta{stream} names must be unique --- you cannot
use the same name for both an input and an output stream.

   If you try and create too many streams, TeX will tell you via an error 
message.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\IfStreamOpen}\marg{stream}\marg{true-code}\marg{false-code} \\
\end{syntax}
You can check if a stream \meta{stream} is currently open 
by \cmd{\IfStreamOpen}.
If the stream is open then the \meta{true-code} argument will be processed,
otherwise the stream is closed and the \meta{false-code} argument 
is processed.


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\openoutputfile}\marg{filename}\marg{stream} \\
\cmd{\closeoutputstream}\marg{stream} \\
\end{syntax}
     The macro \cmd{\openoutputfile} opens the
file called \meta{filename} and the output stream \meta{stream}. It
then attaches the file to the stream for writing. Any pre-existing 
contents of \meta{filname} are deleted.

 The macro \cmd{\closeoutputstream} closes the output stream
\meta{stream} and closes whatever file is currently attached to 
\meta{stream}. It then detaches the file from
 the stream.

\begin{syntax}
\senv{writeverbatim}\marg{stream} anything \eenv{writeverbatim} \\
\end{syntax}
 The \Ie{writeverbatim} environment takes one argument, 
the name of an output stream, which must be open. 
The contents of the environment are written
out verbatim to the file currently attached to the stream.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\addtostream}\marg{stream}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
 The command \cmd{\addtostream} writes \meta{text}
to the file currently attached to the output stream \meta{stream}, which
must be open. Any commands within \meta{text} will be processed before
being written. To prevent this, put \cmd{\protect} before any command that
you do not want expanding.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\openinputfile}\marg{filename}\marg{stream} \\
\cmd{\closeinputstream}\marg{stream} \\
\end{syntax}

 The macro \cmd{\openinputfile} opens the
file called \meta{filename} and the input stream \meta{stream}. It
then attaches the file to the stream for reading.
It is an error if \meta{filename} can not be found.

 The macro \cmd{\closeinputstream}closes the input stream
\meta{stream} and closes whatever file
is currently attached to \meta{stream}. It then detaches the file from
the stream.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\readstream}\marg{stream} \\
\cmd{\readaline}\marg{stream} \\
\end{syntax}
 The macro \cmd{\readstream} reads the contents of the file that
is currently associated with the input stream \meta{stream}. This provides
the same functionality as \cmd{\input}\marg{filename} does.

 The macro \cmd{\readaline} reads what TeX considers to be
one line from the file that
is currently associated with the input stream \meta{stream}. Multiple lines
can be read by calling \cmd{\readaline} multiple times. A warning is issued
if there are no more lines to be read (i.e., the end of the file has
been reached).

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\verbatiminput}\marg{filename} \\
\cmd{\readverbatim}\marg{stream} \\
\cmd{\boxedverbatiminput}\marg{filename} \\
\cmd{\readboxedverbatim}\marg{stream} \\
\end{syntax}
The macro \cmd{\verbatiminput} is similar to \cmd{\input} except
that it inputs the contents of the file \meta{filename} as verbatim text.
Similarly, \cmd{\readverbatim} reads the contents of the file that
is currently associated with the input stream \meta{stream} as verbatim
text. These two commands are equivalent to
\begin{lcode}
\begin{verbatim}
  \input{...}
  \readstream{...}
\end{verbatim}
\end{lcode}
except, of course, that you cannot do that.

    To round things out, \cmd{\boxedverbatiminput} inputs the contents
of the \meta{filename} file as boxed verbatim text, and
\cmd{\readboxedverbatim} reads the contents
of the file attached to \meta{stream} as a boxed verbatim. If you could
do it, these commands are equivalent to
\begin{lcode}
\begin{boxedverbatim}
  \input{...}
  \readstream{...}
\end{boxedverbatim}
\end{lcode}

   Tabbing, wrapping and numbering are just as applicable to verbatim
input texts as they are to the corresponding verbatim environments.











%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\clearpage
\pagestyle{Ruled}
\chapterstyle{demo}
%\chapterstyle{veelo}
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

\chapter{Miscellaneous} \label{chap:misc}

\chapterprecis{In which we talk of many things, but not ships
               or shoes or sealing wax, nor cabbages and kings.}

    This chapter uses the \cstyle{demo} chapterstyle and the \pstyle{Ruled}
pagestyle. It started with the \cmd{\chapterprecis} command.

\section{Introduction}

    The class provides some minor additional facilities, which are described
here.

\section{Draft documents}

  The \Lopt{draft} option marks any overfull lines with black rectangles,
otherwise the appearance is the same as for a \Lopt{final} document.

\begin{syntax}
\piif{ifdraftdoc} \\
\end{syntax}
The \piif{ifdraftdoc} macro is provided so that you can add extra
things that you might want to happen when processing a draft; for example
you might want to have each page header\index{header} (or footer\index{footer}) include the word `DRAFT'.
The code to do this can be put into a construct like the following:
\begin{lcode}
\ifdraftdoc
  % special things for a draft document
\else
  % perhaps special things for a non-draft document
\fi
\end{lcode}


\section{Change marks}

    When preparing a manuscript it normally goes through several iterations.
The macros described in this section can be used to identify changes made to 
a document throughout its lifecycle.

   The commands below implement a simplified version of the change
marking in the \Lclass{iso} class~\cite{ISOCLASS}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\changemarkstrue} \cmd{\changemarksfalse} \\
\end{syntax}
The change marking macros only work properly when the \Lopt{draft} class
option is used. Additionaly, the marks are only printed when the 
\cmd{\changemarkstrue} declaration is in effect. Using \cmd{\changemarksfalse}
switches off any marking.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\added}\marg{change-id} \\
\cmd{\deleted}\marg{change-id} \\
\cmd{\changed}\marg{change-id} \\
\end{syntax}
Each of these macros puts a mark and \meta{change-id} into the margin\index{margin} near
where the command is given. The \cmd{\added} macro indicates that something
has been added to the manuscript and uses $\oplus$ as its symbol. The
\cmd{\deleted} macro is for indicating that something has been deleted and uses
the $\neq$ symbol. The macro \cmd{\changed} uses the $\Leftrightarrow$ symbol
to indicate that something has been changed.

    These marking commands should be attached to some word or punctuation
mark in the text otherwise extraneous spaces may creep into the typeset
document.

\section{Trim marks}

    When the \Lclass{memoir} class \Lopt{showtrims} option is used, trim
marks can be placed on each page, usually to indicate where the stock should
be trimmed to obtain the planned page size.

    Trim marks can be placed at each corner of the (trimmed) page, and also
at the middle of each side of the page.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\trimXmarks} \\
\cmd{\trimLmarks} \\
\cmd{\trimFrame} \\
\cmd{\trimNone} \\
\end{syntax}
Some predefined trimming styles are provided. After the declaration
\cmd{\trimXmarks} marks in the shape of a cross are placed at the four
corners of the page. The declaration \cmd{\trimLmarks} calls for corner marks
in the shape of an `L', in various orientations depending on the particular
corner. After \cmd{\trimFrame} a frame will be drawn around each page, 
coinciding with the page boundaries. The declaration \cmd{\trimNone}
disables all kinds of trim marking.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\trimmarks} \\
\cmd{\tmarktl} \cmd{\tmarktr} \cmd{\tmarkbr} \cmd{\tmarkbl} \\
\cmd{\tmarktm} \cmd{\tmarkmr} \cmd{\tmarkbm} \cmd{\tmarkml} \\
\end{syntax}
The \cmd{\trimmarks} macro is responsible for displaying up to 8 marks. The
marks are defined as zero-sized pictures which are placed strategically
around the borders of the page. 

    The command \cmd{\trimmarks} places the pictures \cmd{\tmarktl}, 
\cmd{\tmarktr},
\cmd{\tmarkbl}, and \cmd{\tmarkbr} at the top left, top right,
bottom right and bottom left corners of the page. The pictures
\cmd{\tmarktm}, \cmd{\tmarkmr}, \cmd{\tmarkbm}, and \cmd{\tmarkml} are placed
at the top middle, middle right, bottom middle and middle left of the
edges of the page. All these |\tmark..| macros should expand to zero-sized
pictures.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\trimmark} \\
\end{syntax}
The declaration \cmd{\trimXmarks} uses \cmd{\trimmark} for the corner 
crosses. This is defined as
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\trimmark}{%
  \begin{picture}(0,0)
    \setlength{\unitlength}{1cm}\thicklines
    \put(-2,0){\line(1,0){4}}
    \put(0,-2){\line(0,1){4}}
  \end{picture}}
\end{lcode}
which produces a zero-sized picture of a 4cm cross.

    As an example, to draw short lines marking the half-height of the page, 
try this:
\begin{lcode}
\providecommand{\tmarkml}{}
\renewcommand{\tmarkml}{%
  \begin{picture}(0,0){%
    \unitlength 1mm
    \thinlines
    \put(-2,0){\line(-1,0){10}}
  \end{picture}}}
\providecommand{\tmarkmr}{}
\renewcommand{\tmarkmr}{%
  \begin{picture}(0,0){%
    \unitlength 1mm
    \thinlines
    \put(2,0){\line(1,0){10}}
  \end{picture}}}
\end{lcode}
Thin horizontal lines of length 10mm will be drawn at the middle left and
middle right of the page, starting 2mm outside the page boundary.

\section{Sheet numbering}

    One purpose of trim marks is to show a printer where the stock
should be trimmed. In this application it can be useful to also note the
sheet number on each page, where the sheet number is 1 for the first page 
and increases by 1 for each page thereafter. The sheet number is independent
of the page number.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\thesheetsequence} \\
\end{syntax}
The macro \cmd{\thesheetsequence} typesets the current sheet sequence number
and is analogous to the \cmd{\thepage} macro.

\begin{syntax}
\Icn{lastsheet} \\
\Icn{lastpage} \\
\end{syntax}
The counter \Icn{lastsheet} holds the number of sheets processed during
the \emph{previous} run of LaTeX. Similarly, the counter \Icn{lastpage}
holds the number of the last page processed during the previous run.
Note that the last page number is not necessarily the same as the last
sheet number. For example: \\
\textit{In this document this is 
        sheet \thesheetsequence\ of \thelastsheet\ sheets, 
        and page \thepage\ of \thelastpage.}

The previous sentence was the result of processing the following
code 
\begin{lcode}
\textit{In this document this is 
        sheet \thesheetsequence\ of \thelastsheet\ sheets, 
        and page \thepage\ of \thelastpage.}
\end{lcode}

    You may wish to use the sheet and/or page numbers as part of some
trim marks. The following will note the sheet numbers above the page.
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\trimseqpage}{%
  \begin{picture}(0,0)
    \unitlength 1mm
    \put(0,2){\makebox(0,0)[b]{Sheet: \thesheetsequence\ of \thelastsheet}}
  \end{picture}}
\let\tmarktm\trimseqpage
\end{lcode}


\section{Page breaks before lists}

   A sentence or two may be used to introduce a list (e.g., |itemize|)
and it can be annoying if there is a page break between the introduction
and the first item.
\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\noprelistbreak} \\
\end{syntax}
Putting \cmd{\noprelistbreak} immediately before the |\begin{itemize}|
should prevent a page break. Ideally, there sould be no blank lines
between the end of the introduction and the start of the list. 

\section{Changing counters}

    This is effectively a bundling of the \Lpack{chngcntr} 
package~\cite{CHNGCNTR}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\newcounter}\marg{ctr}\oarg{within} \\
\cmd{\thectr} \\
\end{syntax}
    In LaTeX a new counter called, say |ctr|, is created by the 
\cmd{\newcounter} command as |\newcounter{ctr}|. If the optional \meta{within}
argument is given, the counter \meta{ctr} is reset to zero each time the 
counter called |within| is changed; the |within| counter must exist before
it is used as the optional argument. The command |\thectr| typesets the value
of the counter |ctr|. This is automatically defined for you by the 
\cmd{\newcounter} command to typeset arabic numerals.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\counterwithin}\marg{ctr}\marg{within} \\
\cmd{\counterwithin*}\marg{ctr}\marg{within} \\
\end{syntax}
The \cmd{\counterwithin} macro makes a \meta{ctr} that has been initially
defined by |\newcounter{ctr}| act as though it had been defined by
|\newcounter{ctr}[within]|. It also redefines the |\thectr| command
to be |\thewithin.\arabic{ctr}|. The starred version of the command
does nothing to the original definition of |\thectr|.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\counterwithout}\marg{ctr}\marg{within} \\
\cmd{\counterwithout*}\marg{ctr}\marg{within} \\
\end{syntax}
The \cmd{\counterwithout} macro makes a \meta{ctr} that has been initially
defined by |\newcounter{ctr}[within]| act as though it had been defined by
|\newcounter{ctr}|. It also redefines the |\thectr| command
to be |\arabic{ctr}|. The starred version of the command
does nothing to the original definition of |\thectr|.

    Any number of |\counterwithin{ctr}{...}| and |\counterwithout{ctr}{...}|
commands can be issued for a given counter |ctr| if you wish to toggle
between the two styles. The current value of |ctr| is unaffected by these
commands. If you want to change the value use \cmd{\setcounter}, and to change
the typesetting style use \cmd{\renewcommand} on |\thectr|.

\section{New new and provide commands}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\newloglike}\marg{cmd}\marg{string} \\
\cmd{\newloglike*}\marg{cmd}\marg{string} \\
\end{syntax}
The class provides means of creating new math log-like functions. For
example you might want to do
\begin{lcode}
\newloglike{\Ei}{Ei}
\end{lcode}
if you are using the exponential integral function in your work.
The starred version of the command creates a function that takes limits
(like the \cmd{\max} function).

    The LaTeX kernel defines the \cmd{\providecommand} macro that acts
like \cmd{\newcommand} if the designated macro has not been defined
previously, otherwise it does nothing. The class adds to that limited
repetoire.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\provideenvironment}\marg{name}\oarg{numargs}\oarg{optarg}\marg{begindef}\marg{enddef} \\
\cmd{\providelength}\marg{cmd} \\
\cmd{\providecounter}\marg{ctr}\oarg{within} \\
\cmd{\provideloglike}\marg{cmd}\marg{string} \\
\cmd{\provideloglike*}\marg{cmd}\marg{string} \\
\end{syntax}

    The macros \cmd{\provideenvironment}, \cmd{\providelength}
and \cmd{\providecounter} take the same arguments as their |\new...|
counterparts. If the environment, length or counter has not been defined
then it is defined accordingly, otherwise the macros do nothing except
produce a warning message for information purposes.

   The \cmd{\provideloglike} commands are for math log-like functions,
but they do not produce any warning messages.

\section{Changing macros} \label{sec:addtodef}

     Commands are provided for extending simple macro definitions. 
Get the \Lpack{patchcmd} package~\cite{PATCHCMD} if you need
to make other additions to definitions.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\addtodef}\marg{macro}\marg{prepend}\marg{append} \\
\cmd{\addtoiargdef}\marg{macro}\marg{prepend}\marg{append} \\
\end{syntax}
The macro \cmd{\addtodef} inserts \meta{prepend} at the start of the
current definition of \meta{macro} and puts \meta{append} at the end,
where \meta{macro} is the name of a macro (including the backslash) which 
takes no arguments. The \cmd{\addtoiargdef} macro is similar except that
\meta{macro} is the name of a macro that takes one argument.

 For example the following are two equivalent
definitions of |\mymacro|:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\mymacro}[1]{# is a violinist in spite of being tone deaf}
\end{lcode}
and
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\mymacro}[1]{#1 is a violinist}
\addtoiargdef{\mymacro}{}{ in spite of being tone deaf}
\end{lcode}

    The \cmd{\addtoiargdef} (and \cmd{\addtodef}) commands
can be applied several times to the same \meta{macro}. Revising the
previous example we could have
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\mymacro}[1]{#1 is a violinist}
\addtoiargdef{\mymacro}{Although somewhat elderly, }%
                       { in spite of being tone deaf}
\addtoiargdef{\mymacro}{}{ and a bagpiper}
\end{lcode}
which is equivalent to
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\mymacro}[1]{%
  Although somewhat elderly, #1 is a violinist
  in spite of being tone deaf and a bagpiper}
\end{lcode}

The \meta{prepend} and \meta{append} arguments may include LaTeX code, 
as shown in this extract from the class code:
\begin{lcode}
\addtoiargdef{\date}{}{%
  \begingroup
    \renewcommand{\thanks}[1]{}
    \renewcommand{\thanksmark}[1]{}
    \renewcommand{\thanksgap}[1]{}
    \protected@xdef\thedate{#1}
  \endgroup}
\end{lcode}
Note that in the case of \cmd{\addtoiargdef} an argument can also refer
to the original argument of the \meta{macro}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\addtodef*}\marg{macro}\marg{prepend}\marg{append} \\
\cmd{\addtoiargdef*}\marg{macro}\marg{prepend}\marg{append} \\
\end{syntax}
These starred versions are for use when the original \meta{macro}
was defined via \cmd{\newcommand*}. Using the starred versions is
like using \cmd{\renewcommand*} and the unstarred versions are like
having used \cmd{\renewcommand}. It is the version (starred or unstarred)
of a sequence of |\addto...| commands that counts when determining whether
the equivalent |\renew...| is treated as starred or unstarred.

    The |\addto...| macros cannot be used to delete any code from 
\meta{macro} nor to add anything except at the start and end. Also,
in general, they cannot be used to change the definition of a macro that
takes an optional argument, or that is starred.

\section{String arguments}

    In the code for the class I have sometimes used macro arguments
that consist of a `string', like the |*| arguments in the page layout
macros (e.g., \cmd{\settypeblocksize}), or the |flushleft|, |center| and
|flushright| strings for the \cmd{\makeheadposition} macro.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\nametest}\marg{str1}\marg{str2} \\
\piif{ifsamename} \\
\end{syntax}
The macro \cmd{\nametest} takes two strings 
as the arguments \meta{str1} and \meta{str2}. It sets \piif{ifsamename}
TRUE if \meta{str1} is the same as \meta{str2}, otherwise it sets
\piif{ifsamename} FALSE. For the purposes of \cmd{\nametest}, a string is a
sequence of characters which may include spaces and may include
the |\| backslash character; strings are equal if and only if their
character sequences are identical.


    Typically, I have used it within macros for checking on argument
values. For example:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\amacro}[1]{%
  \nametest{#1}{green}
  \ifsamename
%    code for green
  \fi
  \nametest{#1}{red}
  \ifsamename
%    code for red
  \fi
  ...
}
\end{lcode}

\section{Odd/even page checking}

    It is difficult to check robustly if the current page is odd or even but 
the class does provide a robust method based on writing out a label and then
checking the page reference for the label. This requires at least two LaTeX
runs to stabilise. This has been extracted from the original 
\Lpack{chngpage} package~\cite{CHNGPAGE}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\checkoddpage} \\
\piif{ifoddpage} \\
\cmd{\strictpagechecktrue} \cmd{\strictpagecheckfalse} \\
\end{syntax}
The macro \cmd{\checkoddpage} sets 
\piif{ifoddpage} 
to TRUE if the page number 
is odd, otherwise it sets it to FALSE (the page number is even). The robust
checking methos involves writing and reading labels, which is what is done
after the command \cmd{\strictpagechecktrue} is issued. The simple method is just
to check the current page number which, because of TeX's asynchronous page
breaking algorithm, may not correspond to the actual page number where the
\cmd{\checkoddpage} commmand was issued. The simple, but faster, page checking
method is used after the \cmd{\strictpagecheckfalse} command is issued.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\cplabel} \\
\end{syntax}
When strict page checking is used the labels consist of a number preceded
by the value of \cmd{\cplabel}, whose default definition is |^_| (e.g.,
a label may consist of the characters |^_21|). If this
might clash with any of your labels, change \cmd{\cplabel} with \cmd{\renewcommand}, but
the definition of \cmd{\cplabel} must be constant for any given document.

\section{Moving to another page} \label{sec:moving}

   Standard LaTeX provides the \cmd{\newpage}, \cmd{\clearpage}
and \cmd{\cleardoublepage} commands for discontinuing the current 
page and starting a new one. The following is a bundling of the
\Lpack{nextpage} package~\cite{NEXTPAGE}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\needspace}\marg{length} \\
\end{syntax}
This macro decides if there is \meta{length} space at the bottom of the 
current page. If there is it does nothing, otherwise it starts a new page.
This is useful if \meta{length} amount of material is to be kept together
on one page. The \cmd{\needspace} macro 
depends on penalties for deciding what to do which means that the reserved
space is an approximation. However, except for the odd occasion, the
macro gives adequate results. 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\Needspace}\marg{length} \\
\cmd{\Needspace*}\marg{length} \\
\end{syntax}
    Like \cmd{\needspace}, the \cmd{\Needspace} macro checks if there is
\meta{length} space at the bottom of the current page and if there is not
it starts a new page. The command should only be used between paragraphs;
indeed, the first thing it does is to call \cs{par}. The \cmd{\Needspace}
command checks for the actual space left on the page and is more exacting
than \cmd{\needspace}.

    If either \cmd{\needspace} or \cmd{\Needspace} produce a short page it
will be ragged bottom even if \cmd{\flushbottom} is in effect. With
the starred \cmd{\Needspace*} version, short pages will be flush bottom
if \cmd{\flushbottom} is in effect and will be ragged bottom
when \cmd{\raggedbottom} is in effect.

    Generally speaking, use \cmd{\needspace} in preference to \cmd{\Needspace}
unless it gives a bad break or the pages must be flush bottom.


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\movetoevenpage}\oarg{text} \\
\cmd{\cleartoevenpage}\oarg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
The \cmd{\movetoevenpage} stops the current page and starts typesetting on the
next even numbered page. The |\clear...| version flushes out all 
floats\index{float} before
going to the next even page. The optional \meta{text} is put on the skipped
page (if there is one).

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\movetooddpage}\oarg{text} \\
\cmd{\cleartooddpage}\oarg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
These macros are similar to the |\...evenpage| ones except that they jump
to the next odd numbered page.

    A likely example for the optional \meta{text} argument is
\begin{lcode}
\cleartooddpage[\vspace*{\vfill}THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK\vspace*{\vfill}]
\end{lcode}
which will put `THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK' in the centre of any
potential skipped (empty) even numbered page.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\cleartorecto} \cmd{\cleartoverso} \\
\end{syntax}
These are slightly simpler forms\footnote{Perhaps more robust.} of
\cmd{\cleartooddpage} and \cmd{\cleartoevenpage}. For example, if you wanted
the Table of Contents to start on a verso page, like in 
\textit{The TeXbook} \cite{KNUTH84a}, then do this:
\begin{lcode}
\cleartoverso
\tableofcontents
\end{lcode}

\section{Number formatting}

    Several methods are provided for formatting numbers. Two classes
of number representations are catered for. A `numeric number' is 
typeset using arabic digits and a `named number' is typeset using
words.

    The argument to the number formatting macros is a `number', 
essentially something that resolves to a series of arabic digits. Typical
arguments might be:
\begin{itemize}
\item Some digits, e.g., \verb?\ordinal{123} ->? 
      \ordinal{123} 
\item A macro expanding to digits, e.g., \verb?\def\temp{3}\ordinal{\temp} ->? 
      \begingroup\def\temp{3}\ordinal{\temp}\endgroup % \\

%      Or even, for example, \verb?\ordinal{\pageref{chap:numf}} ->? 
%      \ordinal{\pageref{chap:numf}}
\item The value of a counter, e.g., \verb?\ordinal{\value{page}} ->? 
      \ordinal{\value{page}} 
\item The arabic representation of a counter, e.g., \verb?\ordinal{\thepage} ->? 
      \ordinal{\thepage} 

However, if the representation of a counter is not completely in arabic 
digits, such as \verb?\thesection? which here prints as \thesection, it will 
produce odd errors or peculiar results if it is used as the argument.
For instance: \\
\verb?\ordinal{\thesection} ->? \ordinal{\thesection}

\end{itemize}

\subsection{Numeric numbers}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\cardinal}\marg{number} \\
\cmd{\fcardinal}\marg{number} \\
\cmd{\fnumbersep} \\
\end{syntax}
The macro \cmd{\fcardinal} prints its \meta{number} argument formatted using
\cmd{\fnumbersep} between each triple of digits. The default definition
of \cmd{\fnumbersep} is:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\fnumbersep}{,}
\end{lcode}

    Here are some examples: \\
\verb?\fcardinal{12} ->? \fcardinal{12} \\
\verb?\fcardinal{1234} ->? \fcardinal{1234} \\
\verb?\fcardinal{1234567} ->? \fcardinal{1234567} \\
\verb?\renewcommand{\fnumbersep}{ }\fcardinal{12345678} ->?
  \renewcommand{\fnumbersep}{ }\fcardinal{12345678}
\renewcommand{\fnumbersep}{,}

    The \cmd{\cardinal} macro is like \cmd{\fcardinal} except that there
is no separation between any of the digits.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\ordinal}\marg{number} \\
\cmd{\fordinal}\marg{number} \\
\cmd{\ordscript}\marg{chars} \\
\end{syntax}
The \cmd{\fordinal} macro typesets its \meta{number} argument as a formatted
ordinal, using \cmd{\fnumbersep} as the separator. The macro \cmd{\ordinal}
is similar except that there is no separation between any of the digits.

    Some examples are: \\
\verb?\fordinal{3} ->? \fordinal{3} \\
\verb?\fordinal{12341} ->? \fordinal{12341} \\
\verb?\renewcommand{\ordscript}[1]{\textsuperscript{#1}}\fordinal{2} ->?
  \renewcommand{\ordscript}[1]{\textsuperscript{#1}}\fordinal{2} \\
\verb?\ordinal{1234567} ->? \ordinal{1234567} \\
\verb?This is the \ordinal{\value{chapter}} chapter. ->? 
  This is the \ordinal{\value{chapter}} chapter.


    The characters denoting the ordinal (ordination?) are typeset as 
the argument of \cmd{\ordscript}, whose default definition is:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\ordscript}[1]{#1}
\end{lcode}
As the above examples show, this can be changed to give a different
appearance.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\nthstring} \cmd{\iststring} \cmd{\iindstring} \cmd{\iiirdstring} \\
\end{syntax}
The ordinal characters are the values of the macros \cmd{\nthstring}
(default: th) for most ordinals, \cmd{\iststring} (default: st) for
ordinals ending in 1 like \ordinal{21}, \cmd{\iindstring} (default: nd)
for ordinals like \ordinal{22}, and \cmd{\iiirdstring} (default: rd)
for ordinals like \ordinal{23}.


\subsection{Named numbers}



\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\numtoname}\marg{number} \\
\cmd{\numtoName}\marg{number} \\
\cmd{\NumToName}\marg{number} \\
\end{syntax}
The macro \cmd{\numtoname} typesets its \meta{number} argument using 
lowercase words. The other two macros are similar, except that 
\cmd{\numtoName} uses uppercase for the initial letter of the first word and
\cmd{\NumToName} uses uppercase for the initial letters of all the words.

    As examples: \\
\verb?\numtoname{12345} ->? \numtoname{12345} \\
\verb?\numtoName{12345} ->? \numtoName{12345} \\
\verb?\NumToName{12345} ->? \NumToName{12345} \\
\verb?The minimum number in TeX is \numtoname{-2147483647}? \\
\verb?    (i.e., \fcardinal{-2147483647}) ->? \\
  The minimum number in TeX is \numtoname{-2147483647} 
  (i.e., \fcardinal{-2147483647})

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\ordinaltoname}\marg{number} \\
\cmd{\ordinaltoName}\marg{number} \\
\cmd{\OrdinalToName}\marg{number} \\
\end{syntax}
These three macros are similar to \cmd{\numtoname}, etc., except that they
typeset the argument as a wordy ordinal.

    For example: \\
\verb?This is the \ordinaltoname{\value{chapter}} chapter. ->? 
  This is the \ordinaltoname{\value{chapter}} chapter.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\namenumberand} \cmd{\namenumbercomma} \cmd{\tensunitsep} \\
\end{syntax}
By default some punctuation and conjunctions are used in the representation
of named numbers. According to both American and English practice, a hyphen
should be inserted between a `tens' name (e.g., fifty) and a following 
unit name (e.g., two). This is represented by the value of \cmd{\tensunitsep}.
English practice, but not American, is to include commas (the value of
\cmd{\namenumbercomma}) and conjunctions (the value of \cmd{\namenumberand})
in strategic positions in the typesetting. These macros are initially
defined as:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\namenumberand}{ and }
\newcommand*{\namenumbercomma}{, }
\newcommand*{\tensunitsep}{-}
\end{lcode}
The next example shows how to achieve American typesetting.
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand*{\namenumberand}{ }
\renewcommand*{\namenumbercomma}{ }
The maximum number in TeX is \numtoname{2147483647} (i.e., \cardinal{2147483647}). ->
\end{lcode}
\renewcommand*{\namenumberand}{ }\renewcommand*{\namenumbercomma}{ }%
The maximum number in TeX is \numtoname{2147483647} (i.e., \cardinal{2147483647}). 
\renewcommand*{\namenumberand}{ and }
\renewcommand*{\namenumbercomma}{, }

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\minusname} \cmd{\lcminusname} \cmd{\ucminusname} \\
\end{syntax}
    When a named number is negative, \cmd{\minusname} is put before the
spelled out number. The definitions of the above three comands are:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\lcminusname}{minus }
\newcommand*{\ucminusname}{Minus }
\let\minusname\lcminusname
\end{lcode}
which means that `minus' is normally all lowercase. To get `minus'
typeset with an initial uppercase letter simply:
\begin{lcode}
\let\minusname\ucminusname
\end{lcode}

    Only one version of \cmd{\namenumberand} is supplied as I consider that
it is unlikely that `and' would ever be typeset as `And'. If the initial
uppercase is required, renew the macro when appropriate.

    There is a group of macros that hold the names for the numbers. To
typeset named numbers in a language other than English these will have to be
changed as appropriate. You can find them in the class and patch code. 
The actual picking and ordering of the names is done by an internal macro
called \cmd{\n@me@number}. If the ordering is not appropriate for a
particular language, that is the macro to peruse and modify. Be prepared,
though, for the default definitions to be changed in a later release in case
there is a more efficient way of implementing their functions.

\subsection{Fractions}

    When typesetting a simple fraction in text there is usually a choice
of two styles, like 3/4 or $\frac{3}{4}$, which do not necessarily look 
as though they fit in with their surroundings. These fractions were
typeset via:
\begin{lcode}
... like 3/4 or $\frac{3}{4}$ ...
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\slashfrac}\marg{top}\marg{bottom} \\
\cmd{\slashfracstyle}\marg{num} \\
\end{syntax}
The class provides the \cmd{\slashfrac} command which typesets its
arguments like \slashfrac{3}{4}. Unlike the \cmd{\frac} command which
can only be used in math mode, the \cmd{\slashfrac} command can be
used in text and math modes.

    The \cmd{\slashfrac} macro calls the \cmd{\slashfracstyle} command to
reduce the size of the numbers in the fraction. You can also use
\cmd{\slashfracstyle} by itself.
\begin{lcode}
In summary, fractions can be typeset like 3/4 or $\frac{3}{4}%
or \slashfrac{3}{4} or \slashfracstyle{3/4} because several choices
are provided.
\end{lcode}
In summary, fractions can be typeset like 3/4 or $\frac{3}{4}$
or \slashfrac{3}{4} or \slashfracstyle{3/4} because several choices
are provided.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\textsuperscript}\marg{super} \\
\cmd{\textsubscript}\marg{sub} \\
\end{syntax}
While on the subject of moving numbers up and down, the kernel provides
the \cmd{\textsuperscript} macro for typesetting its argument as though it
is a superscript. The class also provides the \cmd{\textsubscript} macro
for typesetting its argument like a subscript.
\begin{lcode}
You can typeset superscripts like \textsuperscript{3}/4 and 
subscripts like 3/\textsubscript{4}, 
or both like \textsuperscript{3}/\textsubscript{4}.
\end{lcode}
You can typeset superscripts like \textsuperscript{3}/4 and 
subscripts like 3/\textsubscript{4}, 
or both like \textsuperscript{3}/\textsubscript{4}.


\section{An array data structure}

   The class includes some macros for supporting the \Ie{patverse}
environment which may be more generally useful. 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\newarray}\marg{arrayname}\marg{low}\marg{high} \\
\end{syntax}
\cmd{\newarray} defines
the \meta{arrayname} array, where \meta{arrayname} is a name like
|MyArray|. The lowest and highest array indices are set to
\meta{low} and \meta{high} respectively, where both are integer numbers.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\setarrayelement}\marg{arrayname}\marg{index}\marg{text} \\
\cmd{\getarrayelement}\marg{arrayname}\marg{index}\marg{result} \\
\end{syntax}
The \cmd{\setarrayelement} macro
sets the \meta{index} location in the \meta{arrayname} array to be 
\meta{text}. Conversely, \cmd{\getarrayelement} sets the parameterless
macro \meta{result} to the contents of
the \meta{index} location in the \meta{arrayname} array. 
For example: 
\begin{lcode}
\setarrayelement{MyArray}{23}{$2^{23}$}
\getarrayelement{MyArray}{23}{\result}
\end{lcode}
will result in |\result| being defined as |\def\result{$2^{23}$}|.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\checkarrayindex}\marg{arrayname}\marg{index} \\
\piif{ifbounderror} \\
\end{syntax}
\cmd{\checkarrayindex} checks if
\meta{arrayname} is an array and if \meta{index} is a valid index for
the array. If both conditions hold then \piif{ifbounderror} is set
FALSE, but if either \meta{arrayname} is not an array or, if it is,
\meta{index} is out of range then \piif{ifbounderror} is set TRUE.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\stringtoarray}\marg{arrayname}\marg{string} \\
\cmd{\arraytostring}\marg{arrayname}\marg{result} \\
\end{syntax}
The macro \cmd{\stringtoarray} puts each character
from \meta{string} sequentially into the \meta{arrayname} array, starting
at index 1.
The macro \cmd{\arraytostring} assumes
that \meta{arrayname} is an array of characters, and defines the macro
\meta{result} to be that sequence of characters. For example: \\
\begin{lcode}
\stringtoarray{MyArray}{Chars}
\arraytostring{MyArray}{\MyString}
\end{lcode}
is equivalent to |\def\MyString{Chars}|.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\checkifinteger}\marg{num} \\
\piif{ifinteger} \\
\end{syntax}
The command \cmd{\checkifinteger} ckecks if \meta{num} is an integer 
(not less than zero). If it is then \piif{ifinteger} is set TRUE, 
otherwise it is set FALSE.


\section{pdfLaTeX}

    Both LaTeX and pdfLaTeX can be run on the same document. LaTeX produces
a \file{.dvi} file as output, while pdfLaTeX can produce either a
\file{.dvi} or a \file{.pdf} file. 

    By default pdfLaTeX produces a \file{.dvi} file but there may be a
configuration file on your system that makes pdfLaTeX default to
producing a \file{.pdf} instead. To ensure a \file{.pdf} output file 
you have to put the incantation \cmd{\pdfoutput}\texttt{=1} near the start 
of the preamble\index{preamble}. Conversely, to ensure a \file{.dvi}
file put \cmd{\pdfoutput}\texttt{=0} instead.
Unfortunately this command is unknown to LaTeX so if you used LaTeX it 
would hiccup.

\begin{syntax}
\piif{ifpdf} ... |\fi| \\
\end{syntax}
The class provides \piif{ifpdf} which is true when the document is
being processed by pdfLaTeX and false otherwise. You can use it like this:
\begin{lcode}
\ifpdf
  code for pdfLaTeX only e.g., \pdfoutput=1 or \pdfoutput=0
\else
  code for LaTeX only
\fi
\end{lcode}
If there is no LaTeX specific code then don't write the |\else| part.


\section{Leading}

    LaTeX automatically uses different leading\index{leading} for different
font sizes. 
\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\baselineskip} \lnc{\onelineskip} \\
\end{syntax}

At any point in a document the standard LaTeX \lnc{\baselineskip} length
contains the current value of the leading\footnote{This statement ignores
any attempts to stretch the baseline.}. The class provides the length
\lnc{\onelineskip} which contains the initial leading for the normal
font. This value is useful if you are wanting to specify length values
in terms of numbers of lines of text.

\section{Minor space adjustment}

    The kernel provides the \cmd{\,} macro for inserting a thin space in both
text and math mode. There are
other space adjustment commands, such as \pixabang{} for negative thin space, and
\cmd{\:} and \cmd{\;} for medium
and thick spaces, which can only be used in math mode.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\thinspace} \cmd{\medspace} \cmd{\:} \pixabang \\
\end{syntax}
On occasions I have found it useful to be able to tweak spaces in text by some
fixed amount, just as in math mode. The kernel macro \cmd{\thinspace}
specifies a thin space, which is 3/18\,em. 
The class \cmd{\medspace} specifies a medium space of 4/18\,em. 
As mentioned, the kernel macro \cmd{\:} inserts
a medium space in math mode. The class version can be used in both math and
text mode to insert a medium space. Similarly, the class version of 
\pixabang{}
can be used to insert a negative thin space in both text and math mode.

    The math thick space is 5/18\,em. 
To specify this amount of space
in text mode you can combine spacing commands as:
\begin{lcode}
\:\:\!
\end{lcode}
which will result in an overall space of 5/18\,em 
(from $(4 + 4 - 3)/18$).


\section{Cross references}\label{sec:xrefthis}  \label{sec:xref}

    LaTeX supplies the \cmd{\ref} and \cmd{\pageref} commands for cross
referencing to a label or a page which has a label on it.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\fref}\marg{label} \cmd{\figurerefname} \\
\cmd{\tref}\marg{label} \cmd{\tablerefname} \\
\cmd{\pref}\marg{label} \cmd{\pagerefname} \\
\end{syntax}
 
    The class provides these more particular named references to a figure\index{figure!reference},
table\index{table!reference} or page\index{page!reference}. For example the default definitions of \cmd{\fref} and 
\cmd{\pref} are
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\fref}[1]{\figurerefname~\ref{#1}}
\newcommand{\pref}[1]{\pagerefname~\pageref{#1}}
\end{lcode}
and can be used as 
\begin{lcode}
\ldots footnote parameters are shown in~\fref{fig:fn} on~\pref{fig:fn}.
\end{lcode}
which in this document prints as: 
\begin{syntax}
\ldots footnote parameters are shown in~\fref{fig:fn} on~\pref{fig:fn}. \\
\end{syntax}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\Pref}\marg{label} \cmd{\partrefname} \\
\cmd{\Cref}\marg{label} \cmd{\chapterrefname} \\
\cmd{\Sref}\marg{label} \cmd{\sectionrefname} \\
\end{syntax}

    Also provided are named references to labelled 
Part (\cmd{\Pref}), 
Chapter (\cmd{\Cref}) and 
sectional (\cmd{\Sref}) divisions.
These are all defined like
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\Sref}[1]{\sectionrefname\ref{#1}}
\end{lcode}
with no tie between the name and the \cmd{\ref}. 

    In this document
\begin{lcode}
`In \Cref{chap:misc} there is a section 
(\Sref{sec:xrefthis}) about cross references.' 
\end{lcode}
is typeset as: 
\begin{syntax}
`In \Cref{chap:misc} there is a section 
(\Sref{sec:xrefthis}) about cross references.' \\
\end{syntax}
 
    It can be useful to refer to parts of a document by name rather than
number, as in
\begin{lcode}
The chapter \textit{\titleref{chap:bringhurst}} describes \ldots
\end{lcode}
The chapter \textit{\titleref{chap:bringhurst}} describes \ldots

    There are two packages, \Lpack{nameref}~\cite{NAMEREF} and 
\Lpack{titleref}~\cite{TITLEREF},
 that let you refer to things by name instead of number.

    Name references were added to the class as a consequence of adding
a second optional argument to the sectioning commands. I found
that this broke the \Lpack{nameref} package, and hence the
\Lpack{hyperref} package as well, so they had to be fixed. The change 
also broke Donald Arseneau's \Lpack{titleref} package, and it turned out
that \Lpack{nameref} also clobbered \Lpack{titleref}. The class also
provides titles, like \cmd{\poemtitle}, that are not recognised by
either of the packages. From my viewpoint the most efficient
thing to do was to enable the class itself to provide name 
referencing.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\label}\marg{key} \cmd{\ref}\marg{key} \cmd{\pageref}\marg{key} \\
\cmd{\titleref}\marg{key} \\
\cmd{\headnamereftrue} \cmd{\headnamereffalse} \\
\end{syntax}
The macro \cmd{\titleref} is an addition to the usual set of cross referencing
commands. Instead of typesetting a number it typesets the title associated
with the labelled number. This is, of course, only useful if there is an
associated title, such as from a \cmd{\caption} or \cmd{\section} command.
As a bad example:
\begin{lcode}
Labelling for \verb?\titleref? may be applied to:
\begin{enumerate}
\item Chapters, sections, etc.       \label{sec:xref:item1}
...
\item Items in numbered lists, etc. \ldots \label{sec:xref:item3}
\end{enumerate}
Item \ref{sec:xref:item2} in section~\ref{sec:xref} mentions captions
while item \titleref{sec:xref:item3} in the same section 
\textit{\titleref{sec:xref}} lists other things.
\end{lcode}
Labelling for \verb?\titleref? may be applied to:
\begin{enumerate}
\item Chapters, sections, etc.       \label{sec:xref:item1}
\item Captions                       \label{sec:xref:item2}
\item Legends
\item Poem titles
\item Items in numbered lists, etc.  \label{sec:xref:item3}
\end{enumerate}
Item \ref{sec:xref:item2} in section~\ref{sec:xref} mentions captions
while item \titleref{sec:xref:item3} in the same section 
\textit{\titleref{sec:xref}} lists other things.


    As the above example shows, you have to be a little careful in using
\cmd{\titleref}.
Generally speaking, \cmd{\titleref}\marg{key} produces the last named 
thing before the \cmd{\label} that defines the \meta{key}. 

    Chapters, and the lower level sectional divisions, may have three
different title texts --- the main title, the title in the ToC, and a third
in the page header. By default (\cmd{\headnamereffalse}) the ToC title
is produced by \cmd{\titleref}. Following the declaration
\cmd{\headnamereftrue} the text intended for page headers will be produced.

\Note{} Specifically with the \Lclass{memoir} class, 
do not put a \cmd{\label} command inside an
argument to a \cmd{\chapter} or \cmd{\section} or \cmd{\caption}, etc.,
command. Most likely it will either be ignored or referencing it will
produce incorrect values. This restriction does not apply to the standard
classes, but in any case I think it is good practice not to embed any 
\cmd{\label} commands.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\currenttitle} \\
\end{syntax}
    If you just want to refer to the current title you can do so with
\cmd{\currenttitle}. This acts as though there had been a label associated
with the title and then \cmd{\titleref} had been used to refer to that label.
For example:
\begin{lcode}
This sentence in the section titled `\currenttitle' is an example of the
use of the command \verb?\currenttitle?.
\end{lcode}
This sentence in the section titled `\currenttitle' is an example of the
use of the command \verb?\currenttitle?.


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\theTitleReference}\marg{num}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
Both \cmd{\titleref} and \cmd{\currenttitle} use the \cmd{\theTitleReference}
to typeset the title. This is called with two arguments --- 
the number, \meta{num}, and the text, \meta{text}, of the title. The
default definition is:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\theTitleReference}[2]{#2}
\end{lcode}
so that only the \meta{text} argument is printed. You could, for example,
change the definition to
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\theTitleReference}[2]{#1\space \textit{#2}}
\end{lcode}
to print the number followed by the title in italics. If you do this, only use
\cmd{\titleref} for numbered titles, as a printed number for an 
unnumbered title (a) makes no sense, and (b) will in any case be 
incorrect.

    The commands \cmd{\titleref}, \cmd{\theTitleReference} and 
\cmd{\currenttitle} are direct equivalents of those in the \Lpack{titleref}
package~\cite{TITLEREF}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\namerefon} \cmd{\namerefoff} \\
\end{syntax}
   Implementing name referencing has had an unfortunate side effect of
turning some arguments into moving ones; the argument to the \cmd{\legend}
command is one example. If you don't need name referencing you can turn
it off by the \cmd{\namerefoff} declaration; the \cmd{\namerefon}
declaration enables name referencing.



\section{Words and phrases}

    The class provides several macros that expand into English words or 
phrases. To typeset in another language these need to be changed, or an
author or publisher may want some changes made to the English versions. 
The following lists the macros and their default values.
\begin{itemize}
\item[\cmd{\contentsname}]     \contentsname
\item[\cmd{\listfigurename}]   \listfigurename
\item[\cmd{\listtablename}]    \listtablename
\item[\cmd{\abstractname}]     \abstractname
\item[\cmd{\partname}]         \partname
\item[\cmd{\chaptername}]      \chaptername
\item[\cmd{\appendixname}]     \appendixname
\item[\cmd{\appendixtocname}]  \appendixtocname
\item[\cmd{\appendixpagename}] \appendixpagename
\item[\cmd{\bibname}]          \bibname
\item[\cmd{\indexname}]        \indexname
\item[\cmd{\figurename}]       \figurename
\item[\cmd{\tablename}]        \tablename
\item[\cmd{\figurerefname}]    \figurerefname
\item[\cmd{\tablerefname}]     \tablerefname
\item[\cmd{\pagename}]         \pagename
\item[\cmd{\pagerefname}]      \pagerefname
\item[\cmd{\partrefname}]      \partrefname 
     (defined as |\newcommand{\partrefname}{Part~}|)
\item[\cmd{\chapterrefname}]    \chapterrefname 
     (defined as |\newcommand{\chapterrefname}{Chapter~}|)
\item[\cmd{\sectionrefname}]    \sectionrefname 
     (defined as |\newcommand{\sectionrefname}{\S}|)
\end{itemize}
The above definitions are simple --- for example
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\partname}{Part}
\end{lcode} 
and so can be also changed simply.

 The definitions of the macros for the names of numbers are more complex 
--- for example for the number 11 (eleven) 
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand*{\nNamexi}{\iflowertonumname e\else E\fi leven}
\end{lcode}
That is, each definition includes both a lowercase and an uppercase initial
letter, so a bit more care has to be taken when changing these. For specifics
read the documentation of the class code.

\section{Symbols}

    LaTeX lets you typeset an enormous variety of symbols.\index{symbol}
The class adds
nothing to the standard LaTeX capabilities in this respect.
If you want to see what symbols are available then get a copy
of Scott Pakin's 
\textit{The Comprehensive LaTeX Symbol List}~\cite{SYMBOLS}.
You may have to do a little experimentation to get what you want, though.

    For example, the \cmd{\texttrademark} command 
produces the trademark\index{trademark} symbol\texttrademark,
but the \cmd{\textregistered} command produces\textregistered.
When I wanted to use the registered trademark\index{registered trademark}
 symbol it needed to be 
typeset like a superscript
instead of on the baseline. The \cmd{\textsuperscipt} macro typesets
its argument like a superscript\index{superscript}, so using
\begin{lcode}
\textsuperscript{\textregistered}
\end{lcode}
gave the required result\textsuperscript{\textregistered}.

\clearpage

\makeatletter
%% Bringhurst chapter style
\makechapterstyle{bringhurst}{%
  \renewcommand{\chapterheadstart}{}
  \renewcommand{\printchaptername}{}
  \renewcommand{\chapternamenum}{}
  \renewcommand{\printchapternum}{}
  \renewcommand{\afterchapternum}{}
  \renewcommand{\printchaptertitle}[1]{%
    \raggedright\Large\scshape\MakeLowercase{##1}}
  \renewcommand{\afterchaptertitle}{%
    \vskip\onelineskip \hrule\vskip\onelineskip}
}

\setsecheadstyle{\raggedright\scshape\MakeLowercase}
  \setbeforesecskip{-\onelineskip}
  \setaftersecskip{\onelineskip}

%%\setsubsecheadstyle{\renewcommmand\@hangfrom[1]{\noindent ##1}\raggedright\itshape}
\setsubsecheadstyle{\sethangfrom{\noindent ##1}\raggedright\itshape}
  \setbeforesubsecskip{-\onelineskip}
  \setaftersubsecskip{\onelineskip}

%% Bringhurst page style
\makepagestyle{bringhurst}
\makeevenfoot{bringhurst}{\thepage}{}{}
\makeoddfoot{bringhurst}{}{}{\thepage}
\setlength{\pwlayi}{\headsep} % \verb?\setlength{\pwlayi}{\headsep}? headsep=\printlength{\headsep}, pwlayi = \printlength{\pwlayi}.
\addtolength{\pwlayi}{\topskip} % \verb?\addtolength{\pwlayi}{\topskip}? topskip=\printlength{\topskip}, pwlayi=\printlength{\pwlayi}.
\addtolength{\pwlayi}{7.3\onelineskip} % \verb?\addtolength{\pwlayi}{7.3\onelineskip}? onelineskip=\printlength{\onelineskip}, pwlayi=\printlength{\pwlayi}.
\newcommand{\bringpicr}[1]{%
  \setlength{\unitlength}{1pt}
  \begin{picture}(0,0)
    \put(\strip@pt\marginparsep, -\strip@pt\pwlayi){%
      \begin{minipage}[t]{\marginparwidth}
         \raggedright\itshape #1
      \end{minipage}}
  \end{picture}
}

\setlength{\pwlayii}{\marginparsep} % \verb?\setlength{\pwlayii}{\marginparsep}? marginparsep=\printlength{\marginparsep}, pwlayii=\printlength{\pwlayii}.
\addtolength{\pwlayii}{\marginparwidth} % \verb?\addtolength{\pwlayii}{\marginparwidth}?  marginparwidth=\printlength{\marginparwidth}, pwlayii=\printlength{\pwlayii}.
\newcommand{\bringpicl}[1]{%
  \setlength{\unitlength}{1pt}
  \begin{picture}(0,0)
    \put(-\strip@pt\pwlayii, -\strip@pt\pwlayi){%
      \begin{minipage}[t]{\marginparwidth}
        \raggedleft\itshape #1
      \end{minipage}}
  \end{picture}
}

\makepsmarks{bringhurst}{%
  \let\@mkboth\markboth
  \def\chaptermark##1{\markboth{##1}{##1}}
  \def\sectionmark##1{\markright{##1}}
}
\makeevenhead{bringhurst}{\bringpicl{\rightmark}}{}{}
\makeoddhead{bringhurst}{}{}{\bringpicr{\leftmark}}


\renewcommand{\cftchapterfont}{\normalfont}
\renewcommand{\cftchapterpagefont}{\normalfont}
\renewcommand{\cftchapterpresnum}{\bfseries}
\renewcommand{\cftchapterleader}{}
\renewcommand{\cftchapterafterpnum}{\cftparfillskip}
%%%\settocdepth{chapter}

\makeatother

%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\cleardoublepage
\pagestyle{bringhurst}
\chapterstyle{bringhurst}
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\chapter{An example design} \label{chap:bringhurst}

%unitlength=\printlength{\unitlength}, \\
%pwlayi=\printlength{\pwlayi}, \\
%pwlayii=\printlength{\pwlayii}.

\section{Introduction}

    In this chapter I will work through a reasonably complete design
exercise. The chapter is typeset using the results of the exercise.

    Rather than trying to invent something myself I am taking the design
of Bringhurst's 
\textit{The Elements of Typographic Style}~\cite{BRINGHURST92}
as the basis of the
exercise. This is sufficiently different from the normal LaTeX appearance
to demonstrate most of the class capabilities, and also it is a design by
a leading proponent of good typography.

    As much as possible, this chapter is typeset according to the results
of the exercise to provide both a coding and a graphic example.

\section{Design requirements}

    The \textit{Elements of Typographic Style} is typeset using Minion as the
text font and Syntax (a sans font) for the captions. The page layout has been
 shown diagramatically in \fref{fb:1} on \pref{fb:1}, but further details need
to be described for those not fortunate enough to have a copy of their own.

    The trimmed size of a page is 23 by 13.3cm. The foredge is 3.1cm and the
top margin\index{margin} is 1.9cm.

    As already noted, the font for the main text is Minion, with 12pt leading
on a 21pc measure with 42 lines per page. For the purposes of this exercise
I will assume that Minion can be replaced by Computer Modern Roman at 10pt
(like this manual). The captions to figures\index{figure} and tables\index{table} are unnamed and 
unnumbered and typeset in Syntax. The captions give the appearance of being
in a smaller font size than the main text, which is often the case. I'll
assume that the |\small| |\sfseries| CMR font will reasonably do for the
captions. 

    The footer\index{footer} is the same width as the typeblock\index{typeblock} and the folio\index{folio} is placed 
in the footer\index{footer} at the foredge. There are two blank lines between the bottom
of the typeblock\index{typeblock} and the folio\index{folio}.

    There is no header\index{header} in the usually accepted sense of the term but the
chapter title is put on recto pages and section titles are on verso pages.
The running titles are placed in the foredge margin\index{margin} level with the seventh
line of the text in the typeblock\index{typeblock}. The recto headers\index{header} are typeset raggedright
and the verso ones raggedleft.

Bringhurst also uses many marginal\index{marginalia} notes,
their maximum width being about 51pt, and typeset raggedright in a smaller
version of the textfont.

    Chapter titles are in small caps, lowercase, in a larger font than for 
the main text, and a rule is placed between the title and the typeblock\index{typeblock}.
The total vertical space used by a chapter title is three text lines.
Chapters are not numbered in the text but are in the Table of Contents.

    Section titles are again in small caps, lowercase, in the same size as the
text font. The titles are numbered, with both the chapter and section number.

    A subsection title, which is the lowest subdivision in the book, is in
the italic form of the textfont and is typeset as a numbered non-indented
paragraph\index{paragraph}. These are usually multiline as Bringhurst sometimes uses them
like an enumerated list, so on occasion there is a 
subsection title with no following text.

    Only chapter titles are put into the \toc, and these are set raggedright 
with the page numbers immediately after the titles. There is no \lof{} or
\lot.

    Note that unlike the normal LaTeX use of fonts, essentially only three
sizes of fonts are used --- the textfont size, one a bit larger for the
chapter titles, and one a bit smaller for marginal\index{marginalia} notes and captions.
Also, bold fonts are not used except on special occasions, such as when he
is comparing font families and uses large bold
versions to make the differences easier to see.

\section{Specifying the page and typeblock}

    The first and second things to do are to specify the sizes of the page
after trimmming and the typeblock\index{typeblock}. The trimmed size is easy as we have
the dimensions.
\begin{lcode}
\settrimmedsize{23cm}{13.3cm}{*}
\end{lcode}
However, there is a trick to setting the height of the typeblock\index{typeblock} in terms
of lines of text. The
height calculation ensures that an integral number of lines can fit in
the typeblock\index{typeblock}, and as well as the specified height for the block some more
height is added so that the final height is approximately measured from 
the base of the bottom line of text to the top of the first line of text.
This is a complicated way of saying that if you want $N$ lines of text, only
ask for $N-1$. We want 42 lines so we give the height of the typeblock\index{typeblock}
as 41 times the distance between two normal text lines 
(i.e., times \lnc{\onelineskip})
\begin{lcode}
\settypeblocksize{41\onelineskip}{21pc}{*}
\end{lcode}

    To make life easier, we'll do no trimming of the top of the stock\index{stock}
\begin{lcode}
\setlength{\trimtop}{0pt}
\end{lcode}
but will trim the foredge. The next set of calculations first sets the 
value of the \lnc{\trimedge} to be the \lnc{\stockwidth}; subtracting the
trimmed \lnc{\paperwidth} then results in \lnc{\trimedge} being the amount
to trim off the foredge.
\begin{lcode}
\setlength{\trimedge}{\stockwidth}
\addtolength{\trimedge}{-\paperwidth}
\end{lcode}

    The sizes of the trimmed page and the typeblock\index{typeblock} have now been specified.
The typeblock\index{typeblock} is now positioned on the page. The sideways positioning is
easy as we know the foredge margin\index{margin} to be 3.1cm.
\begin{lcode}
\setlrmargins{*}{3.1cm}{*}
\end{lcode}
The top margin\index{margin} is specified as 1.9cm, which is very close to four and a half
lines of text. Just in case someone might want to use a different font size,
I'll specify the top margin\index{margin} so that it is dependent on the font size. The
\lnc{\footskip} can be specified now as well (it doesn't particularly matter
what we do about the header-related lengths as there isn't anything above
the typeblock\index{typeblock}).
\begin{lcode}
\setulmargins{4.5\onelineskip}{*}{*}
\setheadfoot{\onelineskip}{3\onelineskip}
\setheaderspaces{\onelineskip}{*}{*}
\end{lcode}

    Lastly define the dimensions for any marginal\index{marginalia} notes.
\begin{lcode}
\setmarginnotes{17pt}{51pt}{\onelineskip}
\end{lcode}

    If this was for real, the page layout would have to be checked and
implemented.
\begin{lcode}
\checkandfixthelayout
\end{lcode}

    It is possible to implement this layout just for this chapter but
I'm not going to tell you either how to do it, or demonstrate it. Except
under exceptional circumstances it is not good to make such drastic changes
to the page layout in the middle of a document. However, the picture on
\pref{fig:bplayout} illustrates
how this layout would look on US letterpaper\index{paper!size!letterpaper} stock\index{stock}. Looking at the illustration
suggests that the layout would look rather odd unless the stock\index{stock} was trimmed down
to the page size --- another reason for not switching the layout here.

\begin{figure}
\captiontitlefont{\small\sffamily}
\captionstyle{\centerlastline}
\setstocksize{11in}{8.5in}
\settrimmedsize{23cm}{13.3cm}{*}
\settypeblocksize{41\onelineskip}{21pc}{*}
\setlength{\trimtop}{0pt}
\setlength{\trimedge}{\stockwidth}
\addtolength{\trimedge}{-\paperwidth}
\setlrmargins{*}{3.1cm}{*}
\setulmargins{4.5\onelineskip}{*}{*}
\setheadfoot{\onelineskip}{3\onelineskip}
\setheaderspaces{\onelineskip}{*}{*}
\setmarginnotes{17pt}{51pt}{\onelineskip}
\checkandfixthelayout
\currentstock
\oddpagelayouttrue
\twocolumnlayoutfalse
\drawmarginparstrue
\drawparametersfalse
\drawstock
\legend{An illustration of Bringhurst's page layout style when printed
on US letter paper stock. Also shown are the values used for the
page layout parameters for this design.} \label{fig:bplayout}
\end{figure}

\section{Specifying the sectional titling styles}

\subsection{The chapter style}

    Recapping, 
    chapter titles are in small caps, lowercase, in a larger font than for 
the main text, and a rule is placed between the title and the typeblock\index{typeblock}.
The total vertical space used by a chapter title is three text lines.
Chapters are not numbered in the text but are in the Table of Contents.
Titles in the \toc{} are in mixed case.

    The definition of the chapterstyle is remarkably simple, as shown below.
\begin{lcode}
%% Bringhurst chapter style
\makechapterstyle{bringhurst}{%
  \renewcommand{\chapterheadstart}{}
  \renewcommand{\printchaptername}{}
  \renewcommand{\chapternamenum}{}
  \renewcommand{\printchapternum}{}
  \renewcommand{\afterchapternum}{}
  \renewcommand{\printchaptertitle}[1]{%
    \raggedright\Large\scshape\MakeLowercase{##1}}
  \renewcommand{\afterchaptertitle}{%
    \vskip\onelineskip \hrule\vskip\onelineskip}
}
\end{lcode}

    Most of the specification consists of nulling the majority of the normal
LaTeX specification, and modifying just two elements. 

The chapter title (via \cmd{\printchaptertitle}) 
is typeset raggedright using the \cmd{\Large} smallcaps fonts. The 
\cmd{\MakeLowercase} macro is used to ensure that the entire title is 
lowercase before typesetting it. Titles are input in mixed case.

    After the title is typeset the \cmd{\afterchaptertitle} macro
specifies that one line is skipped, a horizontal rule
is drawn and then another line is skipped.

\subsection{Lower level divisions}

    Section titles are in small caps, lowercase, in the same size as the
text font. The titles are numbered, with both the chapter and section number.

The specification is:
\begin{lcode}
\setsecheadstyle{\raggedright\scshape\MakeLowercase}
  \setbeforesecskip{-\onelineskip}
  \setaftersecskip{\onelineskip}
\end{lcode}

    The macro \cmd{\setsecheadstyle} lowercases the title and typesets it
small caps. 

The default skips before and after titles are rubber lengths but this does
not bode well if we are trying to line something up with a particular line
of text --- the presence of section titles may make slight vertical 
adjustments to the text lines because of the flexible spacing. So, we have
to try and have fixed spacings.
A single blank line is used before (\cmd{\setbeforesecskip)}
and after (\cmd{\setaftersecskip}) the title text. 

    A subsection title, which is the lowest subdivision in the book, is in
the italic form of the textfont and is typeset as a numbered non-indented
paragraph\index{paragraph}. The code for this is below.

\begin{lcode}
\setsubsecheadstyle{\sethangfrom{\noindent ##1}\raggedright\itshape}
  \setbeforesubsecskip{-\onelineskip}
  \setaftersubsecskip{\onelineskip}
\end{lcode}

    As in the redefinition of the \cmd{\section} style, there are fixed
spaces before and after the title text. The title is typeset 
(\cmd{\setsubsecheadstyle}) raggedright in a normal sized italic font.
The macro \cmd{\sethangfrom} is used to to redefine the internal
\cmd{\@hangfrom} macro so that the title and number are typeset as a block 
paragraph\index{paragraph!block} instead of the default hanging 
paragraph\index{paragraph!hanging} style. Note the use of
the double |##| mark for denoting the position of the argument to 
\cmd{\@hangfrom}.

\section{Specifying the pagestyle}

    The pagestyle is perhaps the most interesting aspect of the exercise.
Instead of the chapter and section titles being put at the top of the
pages they are put in the margin\index{margin} starting about seven lines below the
top of the typeblock\index{typeblock}. The folios\index{folio} are put at the bottom of the page 
aligned with the outside of the typeblock\index{typeblock}.

    As the folios\index{folio} are easy, we'll deal with those first.
\begin{lcode}
%% Bringhurst page style
\makepagestyle{bringhurst}
\makeevenfoot{bringhurst}{\thepage}{}{}
\makeoddfoot{bringhurst}{}{}{\thepage}
\end{lcode}

    Putting text at a fixed point on a page is typically done by
first putting the text into a zero width picture (which as far as LaTeX
is concerned takes up zero space) and then placing the picture at the
required point on the page. This can be done by hanging it from the
header\index{header}.

    We might as well treat the titles so that they will align with any 
marginal\index{marginalia} notes, which are \lnc{\marginparsep} (17pt) into the margin\index{margin} 
and \lnc{\marginparwidth} (51pt) wide. Earlier in the manual I defined
two lengths called |\pwlayi| and |\pwlayii| which are no longer used.
I will use these as scratch lengths in 
performing some of the necessary calculations.

    For the recto page headers\index{header} the picture will be the \meta{right} part of
the header\index{header} and for the verso pages the picture will be the \meta{left}
part of the header\index{header}, all other parts being empty. 

    For the picture on the \meta{right} the text must be 17pt to
the right of the origin, and some distance below the origin.
From some experiments, this distance turns out to be the \lnc{\headsep}
plus the \cmd{\topskip} plus 7.3 lines, which is calculated as follows:
\begin{lcode}
\setlength{\pwlayi}{\headsep}
\addtolength{\pwlayi}{\topskip}
\addtolength{\pwlayi}{7.3\onelineskip}
\end{lcode}

    There is a nifty internal LaTeX macro called \cmd{\strip@pt} which you
probably haven't heard about, and I have only recently come across. What it
does is strip the `pt' from a following length, reducing it to a plain 
real number. Remembering that the default \lnc{\unitlength} is 1pt we can
do the following, while making sure that the current \lnc{\unitlength}
\emph{is} 1pt:
\begin{lcode}
\makeatletter
\newcommand{\bringpicr}[1]{%
  \setlength{\unitlength}{1pt}
  \begin{picture}(0,0)
    \put(\strip@pt\marginparsep, -\strip@pt\pwlayi){%
      \begin{minipage}[t]{\marginparwidth}
        \raggedright\itshape #1
      \end{minipage}}
  \end{picture}
}
\makeatother
\end{lcode}
The new macro \cmd{\bringpicr}\marg{text} puts \meta{text} 
into a \Ie{minipage} of width \lnc{\marginparwidth}, 
typeset raggedright in an italic font, and puts the top
left of the minipage at the position (|\marginparsep|, -|\pwlayi|) 
in a zero width picture.

    We need a different picture for the \meta{left} as the text needs to be
typeset raggedleft with the right of the text 17pt from the left of the
typeblock\index{typeblock}. I will use the length |\pwlayii| 
to calculate the sum of \lnc{\marginparsep}
and \lnc{\marginparwidth}. Hence:
\begin{lcode}
\makeatletter
\setlength{\pwlayii}{\marginparsep}
\addtolength{\pwlayii}{\marginparwidth}
\newcommand{\bringpicl}[1]{%
  \setlength{\unitlength}{1pt}
  \begin{picture}(0,0)
    \put(-\strip@pt\pwlayii, -\strip@pt\pwlayi){%
      \begin{minipage}[t]{\marginparwidth}
        \raggedleft\itshape #1
      \end{minipage}}
  \end{picture}
}
\makeatother
\end{lcode}
The new macro \cmd{\bringpicl}\marg{text} puts \meta{text} 
into a \Ie{minipage} of width \lnc{\marginparwidth}, 
typeset raggedleft in an italic font, and puts the top
left of the minipage at the position 
(-|(\marginparsep+\marginparwidth)|, -|\pwlayi|) 
in a zero width picture.


    Now we can proceed with the remainder of the pagestyle specification.
The next bit puts the chapter and section titles into the |\...mark| macros.
\begin{lcode}
\makeatletter
\makepsmarks{bringhurst}{%
  \let\@mkboth\markboth
  \def\chaptermark##1{\markboth{##1}{##1}}
  \def\sectionmark##1{\markright{##1}}
}
\makeatother
\end{lcode}

    Finally, specify the evenhead using \cmd{\bringpicl} with the section
title as its argument, and the oddhead using \cmd{\bringpicr} with the
chapter title as its argument.
\begin{lcode}
\makeevenhead{bringhurst}{\bringpicl{\rightmark}}{}{}
\makeoddhead{bringhurst}{}{}{\bringpicr{\leftmark}}
\end{lcode}


\section{Captions and the \prtoc}

    The captions to figures\index{figure} and tables\index{table} are set in a small sans font and
are neither named nor numbered, and there is no \lof{} or \lot.
Setting the caption titles in the desired font is simple:
\begin{lcode}
\captiontitlefont{\small\sffamily}
\end{lcode}

    There are two options regarding table\index{table} and figure\index{figure} captioning: either
use the \cmd{\legend} command (which produces an anonymous unnumbered title)
instead of the \cmd{\caption} command, or
use the \cmd{\caption} command with a modified definition. Just in case
the design might change at a later date to required numbered captions, 
it's probably best to use 
a modified version of \cmd{\caption}. In this case this is simple, just give
the \cmd{\caption} command the same definition as the \cmd{\legend} command.
\begin{lcode}
\let\caption\legend
\end{lcode}


    An aside: I initially used the default caption style (block paragraph) for
the diagram on \pref{fig:bplayout}, but this looked unbalanced so now it
has the last line centered. As a float\index{float} environment, like any other environment,
forms a group, you can make local changes within the float\index{float}. I actually did it
like this:
\begin{lcode}
\begin{figure}
\captiontitlefont{\small\sffamily}
\captionstyle{\centerlastline}
...
\legend{...} \label{...}
\end{figure} 
\end{lcode}
For fine typesetting you may wish to change the style of particular captions.
The default style for a single line caption works well, but for a caption with
two or three lines either the centering or centerlastline style might look
better. A very long caption is again probably best done in a block paragraph style.

    Only chapter titles are included in the \toc. To specify this we
use the \cmd{\settocdepth} command.
\begin{lcode}
\settocdepth{chapter}
\end{lcode}

    The \toc{} is typeset raggedright with no leaders and the page numbers 
coming immediately after the chapter title. This is specified via:
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\cftchapterfont}{\normalfont}
\renewcommand{\cftchapterpagefont}{\normalfont}
\renewcommand{\cftchapterpresnum}{\bfseries}
\renewcommand{\cftchapterleader}{}
\renewcommand{\cftchapterafterpnum}{\cftparfillskip}
\end{lcode}

\section{Preamble or package?}


    When making changes to the document style, or just defining a new
macro or two, there is the question of where to put the changes --- in
the preamble\index{preamble} of the particular document or into a separate package\index{package}?

    If the same changes/macros are likely to be used in more than one
document then I suggest that they be put into a package. 
If just for the single document then the choice remains open.

    I have presented the code in this chapter as though it would be  put
into the preamble\index{preamble}, hence the use of \cmd{\makeatletter} and 
\cmd{\makeatother} to surround macros that include the |@| character. The
code could just as easily be put into a package\index{package} called, say, 
\Lpack{bringhurst}. That is, by putting all the code, except for the
\cmd{\makeatletter} and \cmd{\makeatother} commands, into a file called
\file{bringhurst.sty}. It is a good idea also to end the code in the file
with \cmd{\endinput}; LaTeX stops reading the file at that point and 
will ignore any possible garbage after \cmd{\endinput}.

    You then use the \Lpack{bringhurst} package just like any other by
putting
\begin{lcode}
\usepackage{bringhurst}
\end{lcode}
in your document's preamble\index{preamble}.

\appendix
\appendixpage*

\chapterstyle{normal}
\chapterstyle{section}

\chapter{Packages and macros}
%%%%\pagestyle{ruled}
This chapter is typeset with the \cstyle{section} chapterstyle, otherwise
it uses the layout defined in \Cref{chap:bringhurst}.

\section{Introduction}

    The \Lclass{memoir} class does not provide for everything that you
have seen in the manual. I have used some packages that you are very likely
to have in your LaTeX distribution, and have supplemented these with some
additional macros, some of which I will show you.

\section{Packages}

    The packages that I have used that you are likely to have, and if
you do  not have them please consider getting them, are:
\begin{itemize}
\item \Lpack{url}~\cite{URL} is for typesetting URL's without worrying
  about special characters or line breaking.
\item \Lpack{fixltx2e}~\cite{FIXLTX2E} eliminates some infelicities
      of the original LaTeX kernel. In particular it maintains the order
      of floats\index{float} on a twocolumn\index{column!double} page and ensures the correct marking
      on a twocolumn\index{column!double} page.
\item \Lpack{alltt}~\cite{ALLTT} is a basic package which provides a 
      verbatim-like environment but |\|, |{|, and |}| have their
      usual meanings (i.e., LaTeX commands are not disabled).
\item \Lpack{graphicx}~\cite{GRAPHICX} is a required package for
      performing various kinds of graphical functions. 
\end{itemize}

    The package that I used and you most likely do not have is 
\Lpack{layouts}~\cite{LAYOUTS}. I used it for all the layout diagrams. 
For example, \fref{fig:displaysechead} and \fref{fig:runsechead} 
were drawn simply by:
\begin{lcode}
\begin{figure}
\centering
\setlayoutscale{1}
\drawparameterstrue
\drawheading{}
\caption{Displayed sectional headings} \label{fig:displaysechead}
\end{figure}

\begin{figure}
\centering
\setlayoutscale{1}
\drawparameterstrue
\runinheadtrue
\drawheading{}
\caption{Runin sectional headings} \label{fig:runsechead}
\end{figure}
\end{lcode}
The package also lets you try experimenting with different layout 
parameters and draw diagrams showing what the results would be in a document.

    The version of \Lpack{layouts} used for this manual is 
v2.4 dated 2001/04/30. Earlier versions will fail when attempting
to draw some figures 
( e.g., to draw \fref{fig:oddstock}).

\section{Macros}

    The preamble\index{preamble} of the manual contains many macro definitions, probably
more than most documents would because:
\begin{itemize}
\item I am having to typeset many LaTeX commands, which require
      some sort of special processing;
\item I have tried to minimize the number of external packages needed
      to LaTeX this manual satisfactorily, and so have copied various
      macros from elsewhere;
\item I wanted to do some automatic indexing\index{index};
\item I wanted to set off the syntax specifications and the code examples
      from the main text.
\end{itemize}
To get the whole glory you will have to read the preamble\index{preamble}, but I show a
few of the macros below as they may be of more general interest.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\pstyle}\marg{style} \\
\end{syntax}
The command \cmd{\pstyle} prints its argument in the slanted 
font used for pagestyles
and also makes a pagestyle entry in the index\index{index}. Its definition is
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\pstyle}[1]{\textsl{#1}\index{#1pages@\textsl{#1} (pagestyle)}}
\end{lcode}
The first part prints the argument in the text and the second adds an
entry to the \file{.idx} file. The fragment |#1pages| is what 
the \textsc{makeindex} program will use for sorting entries, and the fragment following the |@| character is what will be put into the index\index{index}.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\cstyle}\marg{style} \\
\end{syntax}
The command \cmd{\cstyle} prints its argument in the slanted 
font used for chapterstyles 
and also makes a chapterstyle entry in the index\index{index}. Its definition is
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\cstyle}[1]{\textsl{#1}\index{#1chaps@\textsl{#1} (chapterstyle)}}
\end{lcode}
which is almost identical to \cmd{\pstyle}. 

    There is both a \cstyle{companion} chapterstyle and a \pstyle{companion}
pagestyle. The strings used for sorting the index\index{index} entries for these are
\texttt{companionchaps} and \texttt{companionpages} respectively, so 
the chapterstyle will come before the pagestyle in the index\index{index}. The reason for distinguishing between the string used for sorting and the actual entry is
partly to distinguish between different kinds of entries for a single name
and partly to avoid any formatting commands messing up the sorted order.



\begin{syntax}
\senv{syntax} syntax \eenv{syntax} \\
\end{syntax}
The \Ie{syntax} environment is for specifying command and environment
syntax. Its definition is
\begin{lcode}
\newenvironment{syntax}{\begin{center}
                        \begin{tabular}{|p{0.9\linewidth}|} \hline}%
                       {\hline
                        \end{tabular}
                        \end{center}}
\end{lcode}
It is implemented in terms of the \Ie{tabular} environment, which forms
a box that will not be broken across a pagebreak. The box frame
is just the normal horizontal and vertical lines that you can use with
a \Ie{tabular}. The width is fixed at 90\% of the text width. As it
is a \Ie{tabular} environment, each line of syntax must be ended with
\cmd{\\}. Note that normal LaTeX processing occurs within the \Ie{syntax}
environment, so you can effectively put what you like inside it.

\begin{syntax}
\senv{lcode} LaTeX code \eenv{lcode} \\
\end{syntax}
I use the \Ie{lcode} environment for showing examples of LaTeX code. It
is a special kind of \Ie{verbatim} environment where the font size is
\cmd{\small} but the normal \lnc{\baselineskip} is used, and each line
is indented. It is defined with the help of the \Lpack{verbatim} package.

    At the bottom the environment is defined in terms of a \Ie{list}, 
although that is not obvious from the code; for details see the 
\Lpack{verbatim} package documentation~\cite{VERBATIM}. I wanted
the environment to be a tight list so started off by defining some
two helper items.
\begin{lcode}
% \@zeroseps sets list before/after skips to minimum values
\newcommand{\@zeroseps}{\setlength{\topsep}{\z@}
                        \setlength{\partopsep}{\z@}
                        \setlength{\parskip}{\z@}}
% \gparindent is the \parindent for the body text
\newlength{\gparindent} \setlength{\gparindent}{\parindent}
\end{lcode}
The macro \cmd{\@zeroseps} sets the before, after and middle skips in
a list to 0pt (\cmd{\z@} is shorthand for 0pt). The value of \lnc{\parindent}
is saved in \lnc{\gparindent}, because this will be the line indentation
in the environment.
\begin{lcode}
% Now we can do the new lcode verbatim environment. 
% This has no extra before/after spacing.
\newenvironment{lcode}{\@zeroseps
  \renewcommand{\verbatim@startline}%
    {\verbatim@line{\hskip\gparindent}}
  \small\setlength{\baselineskip}{\onelineskip}\verbatim}%
  {\endverbatim
   \vspace{-\baselineskip}\noindent
}
\end{lcode}

    The fragment |{\hskip\gparindent}| puts \lnc{\gparindent} space at 
the start of each line.

    The fragment |\small\setlength{\baselineskip}{\onelineskip}| sets the
font size to be \cmd{\small}, which has a smaller \lnc{\baselineskip}
than the normal font, but this is corrected for by changing the local
\lnc{\baselineskip} to the normal skip, \lnc{\onelineskip}. At the end
of the environment there is a negative space of one line to compensate
for a one line space that LaTeX inserts.

    The two versals in \S\ref{sec:versal} were typeset with macros defined
in the preamble\index{preamble}. The first and poorer of the two used the \cmd{\versal}
macro. The second used the \cmd{\drop} macro which was written for
LaTeX v2.09 by David Cantor and Dominik Wujastyk in 1998. Now, if you want
to try your hand at this sort of thing there are some more packages
on CTAN. I have found that the \Lpack{lettrine} package~\cite{LETTRINE} 
serves my needs.



% back end
\backmatter
\clearpage
\pagestyle{ruled}
\chapterstyle{section}

\renewcommand{\prebibhook}{%
CTAN is the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network. Information on how to
access CTAN is available at \url{http://www.tug.org}.
\par\vspace{\onelineskip}}

\begin{thebibliography}{GMS94A}

\bibitem[Ado01]{ADOBEBOOK}
  \emph{How to Create Adobe PDF eBooks}.
  \newblock Adobe Systems Inc.,
  \newblock 2001.
  \newblock (Available from 
             \url{http://www.adobe.com/epaper/tips/acr5ebook/pdfs/eBook.pdf})

\bibitem[Ars99]{URL}
  Donald Arseneau.
  \newblock \emph{The url package}.
  \newblock February, 1999.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN as 
             \url{/macros/latex/contrib/misc/url.sty})

\bibitem[Ars01a]{TITLEREF}
  Donald Arseneau.
  \newblock \emph{The titleref package}.
  \newblock April, 2001.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN as 
             \url{/macros/latex/contrib/misc/titleref.sty})

\bibitem[Ars01b]{FRAMED}
  Donald Arseneau.
  \newblock \emph{The framed package}.
  \newblock July, 2001.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN as 
             \url{/macros/latex/contrib/misc/framed.sty})

\bibitem[Ars01b]{CHAPTERBIB}
  Donald Arseneau.
  \newblock \emph{The chapterbib package}.
  \newblock September, 2001.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN as 
             \url{/macros/latex/contrib/cite/chapterbib.sty})

\bibitem[Bar92]{BAROLINI92}
  Helen Barolini.
  \newblock \emph{Aldus and his Dream Book}.
  \newblock Italica Press
  \newblock (ISBN 0--934977--22--4), 1992.

\bibitem[BDG89]{BIGELOW89}
  Charles Bigelow, Paul Hayden Duensing and Linnea Gentry (Eds).
  \newblock \emph{Fine Print on Type}. 1989.
  \newblock Fine Print, CA (ISBN 0--9607290-X) or
  \newblock Bedford Arts, CA (ISBN 0--938491--17--2).

\bibitem[Boh90]{BOHLE90}
  Robert Bohle.
  \newblock \emph{Publication Design for Editors}.
  \newblock Prentice-Hall,
  \newblock 1990.

\bibitem[Ber02]{JURABIB}
  Jens Berger.
  \newblock \emph{The titlesec and titletoc packages}.
  \newblock September, 2002.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
             \url{/macros/latex/contrib/titlesec})

\bibitem[Bez99]{TITLESEC}
  Javier Bezos.
  \newblock \emph{The titlesec and titletoc packages}.
  \newblock February, 1999.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
             \url{/macros/latex/contrib/titlesec})

\bibitem[Bra94]{MAKEIDX}
  Johannes Braams \textit{et al}.
  \newblock \emph{Standard LaTeX2e packages makeidx and showidx}.
  \newblock November, 1994.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN as 
             \url{/macros/latex/base/makeindx.dtx(ins)})

\bibitem[Bra97]{ALLTT}
  Johannes Braams.
  \newblock \emph{The alltt environment}.
  \newblock June, 1997.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN as 
             \url{/macros/latex/base/alltt.dtx(ins)})

\bibitem[Bri92]{BRINGHURST92}
  Robert Bringhurst.
  \newblock \emph{The Elements of Typographic Style}.
  \newblock Hartley \& Marks
  \newblock (ISBN 0--88179--033--8), 1992.

\bibitem[Bur59]{BURT59}
  C.~L.~Burt.
  \newblock \emph{A Psychological Study of Typography}.
  \newblock Cambridge University Press,
  \newblock 1959.

\bibitem[Car94]{DELARRAY}
  David Carlisle.
  \newblock \emph{The delarray package}.
  \newblock March, 1994.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in
             \url{/macros/latex/required/tools})

\bibitem[Car95]{AFTERPAGE}
  David Carlisle.
  \newblock \emph{The afterpage package}.
  \newblock October, 1995.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in
             \url{/macros/latex/required/tools})

\bibitem[Car98a]{COLOR}
  David Carlisle.
  \newblock \emph{The color package}.
  \newblock May, 1998.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in
             \url{/macros/latex/required/tools})

\bibitem[Car98b]{LONGTABLE}
  David Carlisle.
  \newblock \emph{The longtable package}.
  \newblock May, 1998.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in
             \url{/macros/latex/required/tools})

\bibitem[Car98c]{ENUMERATE}
  David Carlisle.
  \newblock \emph{The enumerate package}.
  \newblock August, 1998.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in
             \url{/macros/latex/required/tools})

\bibitem[Car98d]{REMRESET}
  David Carlisle.
  \newblock \emph{The remreset package}.
  \newblock August, 1998.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in
             \url{/macros/latex/contrib/carlisle})

\bibitem[Car99a]{TABULARX}
  David Carlisle.
  \newblock \emph{The tabularx package}.
  \newblock January, 1999.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in
             \url{/macros/latex/required/tools})


\bibitem[Car01]{DCOLUMN}
  David Carlisle.
  \newblock \emph{The dcolumn package}.
  \newblock May, 2001.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in
             \url{/macros/latex/required/tools})

\bibitem[CR99]{GRAPHICX}
  David Carlisle and Sebastian Rahtz.
  \newblock \emph{The graphicx package}.
  \newblock February, 1999.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in
             \url{/macros/latex/required/graphics})

\bibitem[CB99]{CHAPPELL99}
  Warren Chappell and Robert Bringhurst.
  \newblock \emph{A Short History of the Printed Word}.
  \newblock Hartley \& Marks, 1999.
  \newblock ISBN 0--88179--154--7.

\bibitem[CH88]{CHEN88}
  Pehong Chen and Michael A.~Harrison.
  \newblock `Index Preparation and Processing'.
  \newblock \emph{Software: Practice and Experience}, 19:8, pp. 897--915,
            September, 1988.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in
             \url{/indexing/makeindex/paper})

\bibitem[Chi93]{CMS93}
  \newblock \emph{The Chicago Manual of Style}, Fourteenth Edition.
  \newblock The University of Chicago
  \newblock (ISBN 0--226--10389--7) 1993.


\bibitem[Coc02]{SUBFIGURE}
  Steven Douglas Cochran.
  \newblock \emph{The subfigure package}.
  \newblock March, 2002.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in
             \url{/macros/latex/contrib/subfigure})

\bibitem[CG96]{CONWAY96}
  John H.~Conway and Richard K.~Guy.
  \newblock \emph{The Book of Numbers}.
  \newblock Copernicus, Springer-Verlag
  \newblock (ISBN 0--387--97993--X), 1996.

\bibitem[Cra92]{CRAIG92}
  James Craig.
  \newblock \emph{Designing with Type: A Basic Course in Typography}.
  \newblock Watson-Guptill, NY,
  \newblock 1992.

\bibitem[Dal99]{NATBIB}
  Patrick W.~Daly.
  \newblock \emph{Natural Sciences Citations and References}.
  \newblock May, 1999.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in
             \url{/macros/latex/contrib/natbib})

\bibitem[Deg92]{DEGANI92}
  Asaf Degani.
  \newblock \emph{On the Typography of Flight-Deck Documentation}.
  \newblock NASA Contractor Report \# 177605.
  \newblock December, 1992.
  \newblock (Available from 
             \url{http://members.aol.com/willadams/typgrphy.htm#NASA})


\bibitem[Dow96]{DOWDING96}
  Geoffrey Dowding.
  \newblock \emph{Finer Points in the Spacing \& Arrangement of Type}.
  \newblock Hartley \& Marks
  \newblock (ISBN 0--88179--119--9), 1996.

\bibitem[Dow98]{DOWDING98}
  Geoffrey Dowding.
  \newblock \emph{An Introduction to the History of Printing Types}.
  \newblock The British Library and Oak Knoll Press
  \newblock (ISBN 0--7123--4563--9 \textsc{uk},
                  1--884718--44--2 \textsc{usa}), 1998.

\bibitem[Dow00]{PATCHCMD}
  Michael J.~Downes.
  \newblock \emph{The patchcmd package}.
  \newblock July, 2000.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in
             \url{/macros/latex/contrib/patchcmd})

\bibitem[Eij92]{EIJKHOUT92}
  Victor Eijkhout.
  \newblock \emph{TeX by Topic}.
  \newblock Addison-Wesley, 1992.
  \newblock ISBN 0--201--56882--9.
  \newblock (Available from \url{http://www.eijkhout.net/tbt/}).

\bibitem[Fai00]{FOOTMISC}
  Robin Fairbairns.
  \newblock \emph{footmisc --- a portmanteau package for customising
                  footnotes in LaTeX2e}.
  \newblock March, 2000.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in
            \url{/macros/latex/contrib/footmisc})

\bibitem[Fai98]{MOREVERB}
  Robin Fairbairns.
  \newblock \emph{The moreverb package}.
  \newblock December, 1998.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in
            \url{/macros/latex/contrib/moreverb})

\bibitem[FAQ]{FAQ}
  Robin Fairbairns.
  \newblock \emph{The UK TeX FAQ}.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in
            \url{/help/uk-tex-faq})

\bibitem[Fea03]{BOOKTABS}
  Simon Fear.
  \newblock \emph{Publication quality tables in LaTeX}.
  \newblock March, 2003.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in
            \url{/macros/latex/contrib/booktabs})

\bibitem[Fli98]{LETTRINE}
  Daniel Flipo.
  \newblock \emph{Typesetting `lettrines' in LaTeX2e documents}.
  \newblock March, 1998.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
             \url{/macros/latex/contrib/lettrine})

\bibitem[Fra00]{CROP}
  Melchior Franz.
  \newblock \emph{The crop package}.
  \newblock February, 2000.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
             \url{/macros/latex/contrib/crop})

\bibitem[FOS98]{FRIEDL98}
  Friedrich Friedl, Nicolaus Ott and Bernard Stein.
  \newblock \emph{Typography: An Encyclopedic Survey of Type Designs and
                  Techniques throughout History}.
  \newblock Black Dog \& Leventhal Publishers Inc.
  \newblock (ISBN 1--57912--023--7), 1998.

\bibitem[Gar66]{GARDNER66}
  Martin Gardner.
  \newblock \emph{More Mathematical Puzzles and Diversions}.
  \newblock Penguin Books
  \newblock (ISBN 0--14--020748--1), 1966.

\bibitem[GMS94]{GOOSSENS94}
  Michel Goossens, Frank Mittelbach and Alexander Samarin.
  \newblock \emph{The LaTeX Companion}.
  \newblock Addison-Wesley Publishing Company
  \newblock (ISBN 0--201--54199--8), 1994.

\bibitem[GRM97]{GOOSSENS97}
  Michel Goossens, Sebastian Rahtz and Frank Mittelbach.
  \newblock \emph{The LaTeX Graphics Companion: Illustrating Documents
                  with TeX and PostScript}.
  \newblock Addison-Wesley Publishing Company
  \newblock (ISBN 0--201--85469--4), 1997.

\bibitem[GR99]{GOOSSENS99}
  Michel Goossens and Sebastian Rahtz (with Eitan Gurari,
  Ross Moore and Robert Sutor).
  \newblock \emph{The LaTeX Web Companion: Integrating TeX, HTML and XML}.
  \newblock Addison-Wesley Publishing Company
  \newblock (ISBN 0--201--43311--7), 1999.

\bibitem[Gou87]{GOULD87}
  J.~D.~Gould \textit{et al}.
  \newblock `Reading from CRT displays can be as fast as reading from paper'.
  \newblock \emph{Human Factors}, pp 497--517, 29:5, 1987.

\bibitem[HR83]{HARTLEY83}
  J.~Hartley and D.~Rooum.
  \newblock `Sir Cyril Burt and typography'.
  \newblock \emph{British Journal of Psychology}, pp 203--212, 74:2, 1983.

\bibitem[HM01]{HELLER01}
  Steven Heller and Philip B.~Maggs (Eds).
  \newblock \emph{Texts on Type: Critical Writings on Typography}.
  \newblock Allworth Press
  \newblock (ISBN 1--58115--082--2), 2001.

\bibitem[Hoe98]{HOENIG98}
  Alan Hoenig.
  \newblock \emph{TeX Unbound: LaTeX and TeX strategies for fonts,
                  graphics, and more}.
  \newblock Oxford University Press
  \newblock (ISBN 0--19--509686--X), 1998.

\bibitem[HK75]{HVISTENDAHL75}
  J.~K.~Hvistendahl and M.~R.~Kahl.
  \newblock `Roman vs. sans serif body type: Readability and reader prference'.
  \newblock \emph{AANPA News Research Bulletin}, pp 3--11, 17 Jan., 1975.


\bibitem[Jon95]{INDEX}
  David M.~Jones.
  \newblock \emph{A new implementation of LaTeX's indexing commands}.
  \newblock September, 1995.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in \url{/macros/latex/contrib/camel})

\bibitem[Knu84]{KNUTH84a}
  Donald E.~Knuth.
  \newblock \emph{The TeXbook}.
  \newblock Addison-Wesley Publishing Company
  \newblock (ISBN 0--201--13448--9), 1984.

\bibitem[Lam94]{LAMPORT94}
  Leslie Lamport.
  \newblock \emph{LaTeX: A Document Preparation System}.
  \newblock Addison-Wesley Publishing Company
  \newblock (ISBN 0--201--52983--1), 1994.

\bibitem[LMB99]{CLASSES}
  Leslie Lamport, Frank Mittelbach and Johannes Braams.
  \newblock \emph{Standard document classes for LaTeX version 2e}.
  \newblock September, 1999.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN as \url{/macros/latex/base/classes.dtx})

\bibitem[Law90]{LAWSON90}
  Alexander Lawson.
  \newblock \emph{Anatomy of a Typeface}.
  \newblock David R.~Godine 
  \newblock (ISBN 0--87923--333--8), 1990.

\bibitem[Leu92]{LEUNEN92}
  Mary-Claire van Leunen.
  \newblock \emph{A Handbook for Scholars}.
  \newblock Oxford University Press
  \newblock (ISBN 0--19--506954--4), 1992.

\bibitem[Lon91]{MULTIND}
  F.~W.~Long.
  \newblock \emph{multind}.
  \newblock August, 1991.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN as \url{/macros/latex209/contrib/misc/multind.sty})

\bibitem[McD98]{SECTSTY}
  Rowland McDonnell.
  \newblock \emph{The sectsty package}.
  \newblock November, 1998.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
             \url{/macros/latex/contrib/secsty})

\bibitem[McL75]{MCLEAN75}
  Ruari McLean.
  \newblock \emph{Jan Tschichold: Typographer}.
  \newblock David R.~Godine
  \newblock (ISBN 0--87923--841--0), 1975.

\bibitem[McL80]{MCLEAN80}
  Ruari McLean.
  \newblock \emph{The Thames \& Hudson Manual of Typography}.
  \newblock Thames \& Hudson
  \newblock (ISBN 0--500--68022--1), 1980.

\bibitem[McL95]{MCLEAN95}
  Ruari McLean (Ed).
  \newblock \emph{Typographers on Type}.
  \newblock W.~W.~Norton \& Co.
  \newblock (ISBN 0--393--70201--4), 1995.

\bibitem[Mit95]{DOC}
  Frank Mittelbach.
  \newblock \emph{The doc and shortvrb packages}.
  \newblock May, 1995.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
            \url{/macros/latex/base})

\bibitem[Mit95]{SHORTVRB}
  Frank Mittelbach.
  \newblock \emph{The doc and shortvrb packages}.
  \newblock May, 1995.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
            \url{/macros/latex/base})

\bibitem[Mit98]{MULTICOL}
  Frank Mittelbach.
  \newblock \emph{An environment for multicolumn output}.
  \newblock January, 1998.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
            \url{/macros/latex/required/tools})

\bibitem[MC98]{ARRAY}
  Frank Mittelbach and David Carlisle.
  \newblock \emph{A new implementation of LaTeX's tabular and array environment}.  \newblock May, 1998.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
            \url{/macros/latex/required/tools})

\bibitem[MC00]{FIXLTX2E}
  Frank Mittelbach and David Carlisle.
  \newblock \emph{The fixltx2e package}.
  \newblock September, 2000.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
            \url{/macros/latex/base})

\bibitem[Mor99]{MORISON99}
  Stanley Morison.
  \newblock \emph{A Tally of Types}.
  \newblock David R. Godine
  \newblock (ISBN 1--56792--004--7), 1999.

\bibitem[NG98]{SIDECAP}
  Rolf Niespraschk and Hubert G\"{a}\ss{}lein. 
  \newblock \emph{The sidecap package}.
  \newblock June, 1998.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
            \url{/macros/latex/contrib/sidecap})

\bibitem[Oet]{LSHORT}
  Tobias Oetiker.
  \newblock \emph{The Not So Short Introduction to LaTeX2e}.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
            \url{/info/lshort/english})

\bibitem[Oos96]{FANCYHDR}
  Piet van Oostrum.
  \newblock \emph{Page Layout in LaTeX}.
  \newblock June, 1996.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
            \url{/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr})

\bibitem[Pak01]{SYMBOLS}
  Scott Pakin.
  \newblock \emph{The Comprehensive LaTeX Symbol List}.
  \newblock July, 2001.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
            \url{/info/symbols/comprehensive})

\bibitem[Pug02]{MATHPAZO}
  Diego Puga.
  \newblock \emph{The Pazo Math fonts for mathematical typesetting
                  with the Palatino fonts}.
  \newblock May, 2002.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
            \url{/fonts/mathpazo})

\bibitem[Rahtz01]{NAMEREF}
  Sebastian Rahtz.
  \newblock \emph{Section name references in LaTeX}.
  \newblock January, 2001.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
            \url{/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref})

\bibitem[Rahtz02]{HYPERREF}
  Sebastian Rahtz.
  \newblock \emph{Hypertext marks in LaTeX}.
  \newblock May, 2002.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
            \url{/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref})

\bibitem[Rec97]{EPSLATEX}
  Keith Reckdahl.
  \newblock \emph{Using Imported Graphics in LaTeX2e}.
  \newblock December, 1997.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN as
             \url{/info/epspatex.ps} or \url{/info/epslatex.pdf})

\bibitem[Reh72]{REHE72}
  Rolf Rehe.
  \newblock `Type and how to make it most legible'.
  \newblock \emph{Design Research International}, 1972.

\bibitem[RAE71]{ROBINSON71}
  D.~O.~Robinson, M.~Abbamonte and S.~H.~Evans.
  \newblock `Why serifs are important: The perception of small print'.
  \newblock \emph{Visible Language}, pp 353--359, 4, 1971.

\bibitem[Rog43]{ROGERS43}
  Bruce Rogers.
  \newblock \emph{Paragraphs on Printing}.
  \newblock William E. Rudge's Sons, Inc.
  \newblock (no ISBN), 1943.
  \newblock (Reissued by Dover, 1979, ISBN 0--486--23817--2)

\bibitem[Rog49]{ROGERS49}
  Bruce Rogers.
  \newblock \emph{Centaur Types}.
  \newblock October House
  \newblock (no ISBN), 1949.

\bibitem[SW94]{EBOOK}
  Douglas Schenck and Peter Wilson.
  \newblock \emph{Information Modeling the EXPRESS Way}.
  \newblock Oxford University Press
  \newblock (ISBN 0--19--508714--3), 1994.

\bibitem[SRR99]{VERBATIM}
  Rainer Sch\"{o}pf, Bernd Raichle and Chris Rowley.
  \newblock \emph{A New Implementation of LaTeX's verbatim
                  and verbatim* Environments}.
  \newblock December, 1999.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in
            \url{/macros/latex/required/tools})

\bibitem[Sch97]{SCHRIVER97}
  Karen A.~Schriver.
  \newblock \emph{Dynamics in Document Design}.
  \newblock Wiley \& Sons, 1997.

\bibitem[Thi99]{TTC199}
  Christina Thiele.
  \newblock `The Treasure Chest: Package tours from CTAN', 
  \newblock \emph{TUGboat}, 
  \newblock vol. 20, no. 1, pp 53--58, March 1999.

\bibitem[Tin63]{TINKER63}
  Miles A.~Tinker.
  \newblock \emph{Legibility of Print}.
  \newblock Books on Demand (University Microfilms International), 1963.

\bibitem[Tsc91]{TSCHICHOLD91}
  Jan Tschichold.
  \newblock \emph{The Form of the Book}.
  \newblock Lund Humphries
  \newblock (ISBN 0--85331--623--6), 1991.

\bibitem[Ume99]{GEOMETRY}
  Hideo Umeki.
  \newblock \emph{The geometry package}.
  \newblock November, 1999.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in
            \url{/macros/latex/contrib/geometry})


\bibitem[Whe95]{WHEILDON95}
  Colin Wheildon.
  \newblock \emph{Type \& Layout}.
  \newblock Strathmore Press
  \newblock (ISBN 0--9624891--5--8), 1995.

\bibitem[Wil93]{ADRIANWILSON93}
  Adrian Wilson.
  \newblock \emph{The Design of Books}.
  \newblock Chronicle Books
  \newblock (ISBN 0--8118--0304--X), 1993.



\bibitem[Wil99a]{LAYOUTS}
  Peter Wilson.
  \newblock \emph{The layouts package}.
  \newblock January, 1999.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
            \url{/macros/latex/contrib/layouts})

\bibitem[Wil99b]{TOCVSEC2}
  Peter Wilson.
  \newblock \emph{The tocvsec2 package}.
  \newblock January, 1999.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
            \url{/macros/latex/contrib/tocvsec2})

\bibitem[Wil00a]{EPIGRAPH}
  Peter Wilson.
  \newblock \emph{The epigraph package}.
  \newblock February, 2000.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
            \url{/macros/latex/contrib/epigraph})

\bibitem[Wil00b]{ISOCLASS}
  Peter Wilson.
  \newblock \emph{LaTeX files for typesetting ISO standards}.
  \newblock February, 2000.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
            \url{/macros/latex/contrib/isostds/iso})

\bibitem[Wil00c]{NEXTPAGE}
  Peter Wilson.
  \newblock \emph{The nextpage package}.
  \newblock February, 2000.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN as 
            \url{/macros/latex/contrib/misc/nextpage.sty})

\bibitem[Wil00d]{NEEDSPACE}
  Peter Wilson.
  \newblock \emph{The needspace package}.
  \newblock March, 2000.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN as 
            \url{/macros/latex/contrib/misc/needspace.sty})

\bibitem[Wil00e]{XTAB}
  Peter Wilson.
  \newblock \emph{The xtab package}.
  \newblock April 2000.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
             \texttt{macros/latex/contrib/xtab})

\bibitem[Wil01a]{ABSTRACT}
  Peter Wilson.
  \newblock \emph{The abstract package}.
  \newblock February, 2001.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
            \url{/macros/latex/contrib/abstract})

\bibitem[Wil01b]{CHNGPAGE}
  Peter Wilson.
  \newblock \emph{The chngpage package}.
  \newblock February, 2001.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN as 
            \url{/macros/latex/contrib/misc/chngpage.sty})

\bibitem[Wil01c]{APPENDIX}
  Peter Wilson.
  \newblock \emph{The appendix package}.
  \newblock March, 2001.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
            \url{/macros/latex/contrib/appendix})

\bibitem[Wil01d]{CCAPTION}
  Peter Wilson.
  \newblock \emph{The ccaption package}.
  \newblock March, 2001.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
            \url{/macros/latex/contrib/ccaption})

\bibitem[Wil01e]{CHNGCNTR}
  Peter Wilson.
  \newblock \emph{The chngcntr package}.
  \newblock April, 2001.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN as 
            \url{/macros/latex/contrib/misc/chngcntr.sty})

\bibitem[Wil01f]{HANGING}
  Peter Wilson.
  \newblock \emph{The hanging package}.
  \newblock March, 2001.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
            \url{/macros/latex/contrib/hanging})

\bibitem[Wil01g]{TITLING}
  Peter Wilson.
  \newblock \emph{The titling package}.
  \newblock March, 2001.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
            \url{/macros/latex/contrib/titling})

\bibitem[Wil01h]{TOCBIBIND}
  Peter Wilson.
  \newblock \emph{The tocbibind package}.
  \newblock April, 2001.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
            \url{/macros/latex/contrib/tocbibind})


\bibitem[Wil01i]{TOCLOFT}
  Peter Wilson.
  \newblock \emph{The tocloft package}.
  \newblock April, 2001.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
            \url{/macros/latex/contrib/tocloft})


\bibitem[Wil01j]{MEMOIR}
  Peter Wilson.
  \newblock \emph{The LaTeX memoir class for configurable book 
                  typesetting: Source code}.
  \newblock July, 2001.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
            \url{/macros/latex/contrib/memoir})

\bibitem[Wil01k]{VERSE}
  Peter Wilson.
  \newblock \emph{Typesetting simple verse with LaTeX}
  \newblock July, 2001.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
            \url{/macros/latex/contrib/verse})

\bibitem[Wil01l]{BOOKLET}
  Peter Wilson.
  \newblock \emph{Printing booklets with LaTeX}
  \newblock August, 2001.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
            \url{/macros/latex/contrib/booklet})

\bibitem[Wil03]{LEDMAC}
  Peter Wilson.
  \newblock \emph{ledmac: A presumptuous attaempt to port EDMAC and TABMAC
                  to LaTeX}
  \newblock November, 2003.
  \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
            \url{/macros/latex/contrib/ledmac})

\bibitem[Wil??]{RUMOUR}
Peter Wilson.
\newblock \emph{A Rumour of Humour: A scientist's commonplace book}.
\newblock To be published?


\bibitem[Zac69]{ZACHRISSOM69}
  B.~Zachrissom.
  \newblock \emph{Studies in the Legibility of Printed Text}.
  \newblock Almqvist \& Wiksell, Stockholm, 1969.

\bibitem[Zap00]{ZAPF00}
  Hermann Zapf.
  \newblock \emph{The Fine Art of Letters}.
  \newblock The Grolier Club
  \newblock (ISBN 0--910672--35--0), 2000.



\end{thebibliography}

\clearpage
\pagestyle{index}
%\renewcommand{\chaptermark}[1]{}
\renewcommand{\preindexhook}{%
The first page number is usually, but not always, the primary reference to
the indexed topic.\vskip\onelineskip}
\indexintoc
\printindex

\cleardoublepage
\pagestyle{empty}
\null\vfil

\begin{adjustwidth}{1in}{1in}
\begin{center}
{\Large\textsf{Colophon}}
\end{center}
\begin{center}
This manual was typeset using the LaTeX typesetting system
created by Leslie Lamport and the memoir class. 
The body text is set 10/12pt on a
33pc measure with Computer
Modern Roman designed by Donald Knuth. Other fonts include
Sans, Smallcaps, Italic, Slanted and Typewriter, all from Knuth's 
Computer Modern family.

\end{center}

\end{adjustwidth}

\vfil

\end{document}

\endinput

%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

%%%%%%%%%%%%
patchit  The addendum
%%%%%%%%%%%

% memmanadd.tex     Addendum to the Memoir class user manual
%                   Author: Peter Wilson
%                   Copyright 2002, 2003 Peter R. Wilson
%                             All rights reserved



%\AtBeginDocument{%
%  \ifpdf
%    \ifnum\pdfoutput>0\relax
%      \pdfpageheight=\the\stockheight
%      \pdfpagewidth=\the\stockwidth
%      \pdfvorigin=1in
%      \pdfhorigin=1in
%    \fi
%  \fi}

%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% change fonts
%\renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ppl}   % palatino
\usepackage{mempalatino}
%%\usepackage{pifont}

%%%%%%\usepackage{amsmath}

\ifpdf
  \pdfoutput=1
  \usepackage[pdftex,
              plainpages=false,
              pdfpagelabels,
  hyperfootnotes=false,
              bookmarksnumbered
             ]{hyperref} 
  \usepackage{memhfixc}
\else
  \usepackage[plainpages=false,
              pdfpagelabels,
  hyperfootnotes=false,
              bookmarksnumbered
             ]{hyperref} 
  \usepackage{memhfixc}
\fi


%\showindexmarktrue

\newcommand{\theclass}{memoir}

\providecommand{\tx}{TeX}
\providecommand{\ltx}{LaTeX}

\newsubfloat{table}


\makeatletter

%%% Print and Index macros
\newcommand{\Ppstyle}[1]{\textsl{#1}}
\newcommand{\pstyle}[1]{\Ppstyle{#1}%
            \index{#1 pages?\Ppstyle{#1} (pagestyle)}%
            \index{pagestyle!#1?\Ppstyle{#1}}}            % pagestyle
\newcommand{\Pcstyle}[1]{\textsl{#1}}
\newcommand{\cstyle}[1]{\Pcstyle{#1}%
            \index{#1 chaps?\Pcstyle{#1} (chapterstyle)}%
            \index{chapterstyle!#1?\Pcstyle{#1}}}          % chapterstyle
\newcommand{\Pclass}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
\newcommand{\Lclass}[1]{\Pclass{#1}%
            \index{#1 class?\Pclass{#1} (class)}%
            \index{class!#1?\Pclass{#1}}}                % class name
\newcommand{\Ppack}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
\newcommand{\Lpack}[1]{\Ppack{#1}%
            \index{#1 pack?\Ppack{#1} (package)}%
            \index{package!#1?\Ppack{#1}}}              % package name
\newcommand{\Popt}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
\newcommand{\Lopt}[1]{\Popt{#1}%
            \index{#1 opt?\Popt{#1} (option)}%
            \index{option!#1?\Popt{#1}}}               % option name
\newcommand{\Ie}[1]{\texttt{#1}\index{#1 env?\texttt{#1} (environment)}%
                               \index{environment!#1?\texttt{#1}}}
\newcommand{\Icn}[1]{\texttt{#1}\index{#1 cou?\texttt{#1} (counter)}%
                                \index{counter!#1?\texttt{#1}}}
\newcommand{\Itt}[1]{\texttt{#1}\index{#1tt?\texttt{#1}}}

% print and index an \if... \piif{if...}
\newcommand{\piif}[1]{\cs{#1}\index{#1?\cs{#1}}}

% index command \!
\newcommand{\iexcl}{\index{"!?\cs{!}}}

%%%\newcommand{\seealso}[2]{\emph{see also} #1}

\newcommand{\listofx}{`List of\ldots'}

% print a begin environment
\newcommand{\senv}[1]{\texttt{\bs begin\{#1\}}}

% print an end environment
\newcommand{\eenv}[1]{\texttt{\bs end\{#1\}}}

% print a file name
\newcommand{\file}[1]{\texttt{#1}}

% print and index a file name
\newcommand{\ixfile}[1]{\file{#1}%
            \index{#1 file?\file{#1} (file)}%
            \index{file!#1?\file{#1}}}

% print CTT
\newcommand{\ctt}{\textsc{ctt}}
% print & index CTT
\newcommand{\pictt}{\ctt\index{CTT?\ctt}}

% index marking
\newcommand{\idxmark}[1]{#1\markboth{#1}{#1}}

\newcommand{\foredge}{foredge}
\newlength{\pwlayi}\setlength{\pwlayi}{0.45\textwidth} % 
\newlength{\pwlayii}\setlength{\pwlayii}{0.45\pwlayi}

%% definition of \meta is taken from doc.dtx
\begingroup
\obeyspaces%
\catcode`\^^M\active%
\gdef\meta{\begingroup\obeyspaces\catcode`\^^M\active%
\let^^M\do@space\let \do@space%
\def\-{\egroup\discretionary{-}{}{}\hbox\bgroup\itshape}%
\m@ta}%
\endgroup
\def\m@ta#1{\leavevmode\hbox\bgroup$\langle$\itshape#1\/$\rangle$\egroup
    \endgroup}
\def\do@space{\egroup\space
    \hbox\bgroup\itshape\futurelet\next\sp@ce}
\def\sp@ce{\ifx\next\do@space\expandafter\sp@@ce\fi}
\def\sp@@ce#1{\futurelet\next\sp@ce}
%% end of \meta and supports


%% The definition of \MakeShortVerb & \DeleteShortVerb
%% are now in the memoir class.

%% The macros \cmd, \cs, \marg, \oarg, \parg are taken from ltxdoc.dtx
% \cmd{\fred} typesets \fred
\def\cmd#1{\cs{\expandafter\cmd@to@cs\string#1}}
\def\cmd@to@cs#1#2{\char\number`#2\relax}
% \cs{fred} typesets \fred
\DeclareRobustCommand{\cs}[1]{\texttt{\char`\\#1}}
% \marg{arg} typesets {<arg>}
\providecommand{\marg}[1]{%
  {\ttfamily\char`\{}\meta{#1}{\ttfamily\char`\}}}
% \oarg{arg} typesets [<arg>]
\providecommand{\oarg}[1]{%
  {\ttfamily\char`\[}\meta{#1}{\ttfamily\char`\]}}
% \parg{x,y} typesets (<x,y>)
\providecommand{\parg}[1]{%
  {\ttfamily\char`\(}\meta{#1}{\ttfamily\char`\)}}

\def\bs{\texttt{\char`\\}}

%%% macro \cmd from Heiko Oberdiek CTT 2001/05/26 (prints and indexes a command)
\newcommand*{\cmdprint}[1]{\texttt{\string#1}}
\def\cmd#1{\cmdprint{#1}%
  \index{\expandafter\@gobble\string#1?\string\cmdprint{\string#1}}}

% print and index \\!
\newcommand{\pixslashbang}{\cmdprint{\\!}\index{"\"\"!?\string\cmdprint{\\}\texttt{"!}}}

% print and index \!
\newcommand{\pixabang}{\cmdprint{\!}\index{"!?\string\cs{}\texttt{"!}}}

% print and index a length
\newcommand{\lnc}[1]{\cmdprint{#1}%
  \index{\expandafter\@gobble\string#1len?\string\cmdprint{\string#1} (length)}%
  \index{length!\expandafter\@gobble\string#1len?\string\cmdprint{\string#1}}}

%%%%%% stuff for new LaTeX code environment

% \zeroseps sets list before/after skips to minimum values
\newcommand{\@zeroseps}{\setlength{\topsep}{\z@}
                        \setlength{\partopsep}{\z@}
                        \setlength{\parskip}{\z@}}
\newlength{\gparindent} \setlength{\gparindent}{\parindent}
\setlength{\gparindent}{0.5\parindent}
% now we can do the new environment. This has no extra before/after spacing.
\newenvironment{lcode}{\@zeroseps
  \renewcommand{\verbatim@startline}{\verbatim@line{\hskip\gparindent}}
  \small\setlength{\baselineskip}{\onelineskip}\verbatim}%
  {\endverbatim
   \vspace{-\baselineskip}%
   \noindent
}

%%%% this is the code environment for the book
\newenvironment{bcode}{\@zeroseps
  \renewcommand{\verbatim@processline}{%
    \hskip\gparindent\the\verbatim@line\par}%
  \small\setlength{\baselineskip}{\onelineskip}\verbatim}%
  {\endverbatim\noindent}

%%%%%%%%%%%% for experiments

%\renewenvironment{lcode}{\@zeroseps
%  \renewcommand{\verbatim@startline}{\verbatim@line{ * }}
%  \small\setlength{\baselineskip}{\onelineskip}\verbatim}%
%  {\endverbatim
%   \vspace{-\baselineskip}  
%   \noindent % need the \noindent
%}

%\renewenvironment{bcode}{\@zeroseps
%  \renewcommand{\verbatim@processline}{%
%    * \the\verbatim@line\par}%
%  \small\setlength{\baselineskip}{\onelineskip}\verbatim}%
%  {\endverbatim\noindent}  % need the \noindent



%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

%%%%% LaTeX syntax
\newenvironment{syntax}{\begin{center}
                        \begin{tabular}{|p{0.9\linewidth}|} \hline}%
                       {\hline
                        \end{tabular}
                        \end{center}}

%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% index pagestyle
\makepagestyle{index}
  \makeheadrule{index}{\textwidth}{\normalrulethickness}
  \makeevenhead{index}{\rightmark}{}{\leftmark}
  \makeoddhead{index}{\rightmark}{}{\leftmark}
  \makeevenfoot{index}{\thepage}{}{}
  \makeoddfoot{index}{}{}{\thepage}


%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%Date: Tue, 22 Jul 2003 19:27:13 +0200
%From: Bastiaan Veelo <Bastiaan.N.Veelo@immtek.ntnu.no>
%Newsgroups: comp.text.tex
%CC: "Wilson, Peter R" <peter.r.wilson@boeing.com>
%Subject: [memoir] [contrib] New chapter style
%
%Hello all,
%
%In case anyone is interested, I thought I'd share a new chapter style to 
%be used with the memoir class by Peter Wilson. The style is tailored at 
%documents that are to be trimmed to a smaller width. When the binded 
%document is bent, black tabs will appear on the fore side at the places 
%where new chapters start, as a navigational aid. Sample attached.
%
%Regards,
%Bastiaan.

%% A new chapter style, that suits well for trimmed documents.
%% We are scaling the chapter number, which most DVI viewers
%% will not display accurately.
\makeatletter
   \newlength{\numberheight}
   \newlength{\barlength}
%\makechapterstyle{trim}{%
\makechapterstyle{veelo}{%
   \setlength{\beforechapskip}{40pt}
   \setlength{\midchapskip}{25pt}
   \setlength{\afterchapskip}{40pt}
   \renewcommand{\chapnamefont}{\normalfont\LARGE\flushright}
   \renewcommand{\chapnumfont}{\normalfont\HUGE}
   \renewcommand{\chaptitlefont}{\normalfont\HUGE\bfseries\flushright}
   \renewcommand{\printchaptername}{%
     \chapnamefont\MakeUppercase{\@chapapp}}
   \renewcommand{\chapternamenum}{}
%   \newlength{\numberheight}
%   \newlength{\barlength}
   \setlength{\numberheight}{18mm}
   \setlength{\barlength}{\paperwidth}
   \addtolength{\barlength}{-\textwidth}
   \addtolength{\barlength}{-\spinemargin}
   \renewcommand{\printchapternum}{%
     \makebox[0pt][l]{%
       \hspace{.8em}%
       \resizebox{!}{\numberheight}{\chapnumfont \thechapter}%
       \hspace{.8em}%
       \rule{\barlength}{\numberheight}
     }
   }
   \makeoddfoot{plain}{}{}{\thepage}
}
\makeatother

%%\chapterstyle{veelo}


\MakeShortVerb{\|}
% \DeleteShortVerb{\|}


%%% need more space for ToC page numbers
\setpnumwidth{2.55em}
\setrmarg{3.55em}

%%% need more space for ToC section numbers
\cftsetindents{section}{1.5em}{3.0em}
\cftsetindents{subsection}{4.5em}{3.9em}
\cftsetindents{subsubsection}{8.4em}{4.8em}
\cftsetindents{paragraph}{10.7em}{5.7em}
\cftsetindents{subparagraph}{12.7em}{6.7em}

%%% need more space for LoF numbers
\cftsetindents{figure}{0em}{3.0em}

%%% and do the same for the LoT
\cftsetindents{table}{0em}{3.0em}


%%% set up the page layout
\settrimmedsize{11in}{210mm}{*}
\setlength{\trimtop}{0pt}
\setlength{\trimedge}{\stockwidth}
\addtolength{\trimedge}{-\paperwidth}
\settypeblocksize{7.75in}{33pc}{*}
\setulmargins{4cm}{*}{*}
\setlrmargins{1.25in}{*}{*}
\setmarginnotes{17pt}{51pt}{\onelineskip}
\setheadfoot{\onelineskip}{2\onelineskip}
\setheaderspaces{*}{2\onelineskip}{*}
\checkandfixthelayout


\bibliographystyle{alpha}

\newcommand{\prtoc}{ToC}             % print ToC
\newcommand{\prlof}{LoF}
\newcommand{\prlot}{LoT}
\newcommand{\ixtoc}{\index{ToC}}     % index ToC
\newcommand{\ixlof}{\index{LoF}}
\newcommand{\ixlot}{\index{LoT}}
\newcommand{\toc}{\prtoc\ixtoc}      % print & index ToC
\newcommand{\lof}{\prlof\index{LoF}}
\newcommand{\lot}{\prlot\index{LoT}}

\newcommand{\noidxnum}[1]{}

\newcommand{\Note}{\textbf{NOTE:}}

%%% subfigures
\newsubfloat{figure}
\tightlists

%% end preamble
\typeout{The end of the preamble, begin document is next}
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\begin{document}
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

%% list subfigures
\setcounter{lofdepth}{2}

\index{counter|noidxnum}
\index{file|noidxnum}
\index{environment|noidxnum}
\index{length|noidxnum}
\index{package|noidxnum}
\index{option|noidxnum}

\index{pagestyle|noidxnum}
\index{chapterstyle|noidxnum}

\begin{comment}
\index{table of contents|see{ToC}}
\index{list!of figures|see{LoF}}
\index{figure!list of|see{LoF}}
\index{list!of tables|see{LoT}}
\index{table!list of|see{LoT}}
\index{marginal note|see{marginalia}}
\index{footnote!in title|see{thanks}}
\index{counter|noidxnum}
\index{length|noidxnum}
\index{list|noidxnum}
\index{illustration|seealso{float, figure}}
\index{figure|seealso{float}}
\index{table|seealso{float}}
\index{chapter!style|see{chapterstyle}}
\index{chapter!heading|see{heading}}
\index{page!style|see{pagestyle}}
\index{part!heading|see{heading}}
\index{subfloat|noidxnum}
\end{comment}

%%% ToC down to subsections
\settocdepth{subsection}
\frontmatter
\pagestyle{empty}


% ToC, etc
\pagenumbering{roman}
%%\pagestyle{headings}
\pagestyle{ruled}
\chapterstyle{demo}
%%\chapterstyle{veelo}

% change sections and subsections
\setsecheadstyle{\bfseries\raggedright}
\setsubsecheadstyle{\scshape\raggedright}
\setsubsubsecheadstyle{\itshape\raggedright}


%% Short contents and Different ToC style
\renewcommand{\contentsname}{Short contents}
\let\oldchangetocdepth\changetocdepth
\renewcommand{\changetocdepth}[1]{}
\setcounter{tocdepth}{0} % chapters
\renewcommand{\cftchapterfont}{\hfill\sffamily}
\renewcommand{\cftchapterleader}{ \textperiodcentered\space}
\renewcommand{\cftchapterafterpnum}{\cftparfillskip}
\setpnumwidth{0pt}
\setrmarg{0.3\textwidth}
\tableofcontents
\clearpage

%%% have subsections as a paragraph in the ToC
\makeatletter
\let\oldnumberline\numberline
\renewcommand{\cftsubsectionfont}{\itshape}
\renewcommand{\cftsubsectionpagefont}{\itshape}
\renewcommand{\l@subsection}[2]{\relax
  \def\numberline##1{\textit{##1}~}%
  \leftskip=\cftsubsectionindent
  \rightskip=\@tocrmarg
%  \advance\rightskip \z@ plus \hsize % uncomment this for raggedright
%  \advance\rightskip \z@ plus 2em % uncomment this for semi-raggedright
  \parfillskip=\fill
  \ifhmode ,\ \else\noindent\fi
  \ignorespaces {\cftsubsectionfont #1}~{\cftsubsectionpagefont #2}%\ignorespaces
  \let\numberline\oldnumberline\ignorespaces
}
\AtEndDocument{\addtocontents{toc}{\par}}
\makeatother



%% Default contents
\renewcommand{\contentsname}{Contents}
\let\changetocdepth\oldchangetocdepth
\renewcommand{\cftchapterfont}{\normalfont\sffamily}
\renewcommand{\cftchapterleader}{\sffamily\cftdotfill{\cftchapterdotsep}}
\renewcommand{\cftchapterafterpnum}{}
\makeatletter
\renewcommand{\cftchapterbreak}{\par\addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}}
\makeatother
\setpnumwidth{2.55em}
\setrmarg{3.55em}
\setcounter{tocdepth}{2}
\tableofcontents
%\clearpage
%\listoffigures
%\clearpage
%\listoftables


\cleardoublepage
\pagenumbering{arabic}
\mainmatter




%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\DeleteShortVerb{\|}
\MakeShortVerb{\=}
\input{tabmanbody}  %% rows & columns
\DeleteShortVerb{\=}
\MakeShortVerb{\|}
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%


\chapterstyle{veelo}
\chapter{Miscellaneous} \label{chap:misc}

\section{Chapter style}

    Bastiaan Veelo\footnote{\texttt{Bastiaan.N.Veelo@immtek.ntnu.no}} 
posted the code for a new chapter style to \pictt{} on 2003/07/22 under the
title \textit{[memoir] [contrib] New chapter style}. His code, which
I have slightly modified and changed the name to \cstyle{veelo},
is below. I have also exercised editorial privilege on his comments.

\begin{quote}
 I thought I'd share a new chapter style to be used with the memoir class 
 The style is tailored for documents that are to be trimmed to a smaller 
 width. When the bound document is bent, black tabs will appear on the 
 fore side at the places where new chapters start as a navigational aid.
 We are scaling the chapter number, which most DVI viewers
 will not display accurately. \\[0.5\onelineskip]
Bastiaan.
\end{quote}

\begin{lcode}
\makeatletter
\newlength{\numberheight}
\newlength{\barlength}
\makechapterstyle{veelo}{%
   \setlength{\beforechapskip}{40pt}
   \setlength{\midchapskip}{25pt}
   \setlength{\afterchapskip}{40pt}
   \renewcommand{\chapnamefont}{\normalfont\LARGE\flushright}
   \renewcommand{\chapnumfont}{\normalfont\HUGE}
   \renewcommand{\chaptitlefont}{\normalfont\HUGE\bfseries\flushright}
   \renewcommand{\printchaptername}{%
     \chapnamefont\MakeUppercase{\@chapapp}}
   \renewcommand{\chapternamenum}{}
%   \newlength{\numberheight}
%   \newlength{\barlength}
   \setlength{\numberheight}{18mm}
   \setlength{\barlength}{\paperwidth}
   \addtolength{\barlength}{-\textwidth}
   \addtolength{\barlength}{-\spinemargin}
   \renewcommand{\printchapternum}{%
     \makebox[0pt][l]{%
       \hspace{.8em}%
       \resizebox{!}{\numberheight}{\chapnumfont \thechapter}%
       \hspace{.8em}%
       \rule{\barlength}{\numberheight}
     }
   }
   \makeoddfoot{plain}{}{}{\thepage}
}
\makeatother
\end{lcode}

    The style requires the \Lpack{graphicx} package because of the 
\cmd{\resizebox} macro. I have removed the two \cmd{\newlength} macros to
outside the \cmd{\makechapterstyle} code just in case the style is called more
than once in a document (otherwise there will be `command already defined' 
complaints).

    As a demonstration, this chapter uses the \cstyle{veelo} chapterstyle.
The style works best for chapters that start on recto pages.


\section{Cross referencing} \label{sec:xref}

%This is section \currenttitle.

    The class provides the normal \cmd{\label} and \cmd{\ref} macros
for numeric cross-referencing. For example, the following code and typeset
result
\begin{lcode}
Chapter~\ref{chap:mempack} starts on page~\pageref{chap:mempack}.
\end{lcode}
Chapter~\ref{chap:mempack} starts on page~\pageref{chap:mempack}.


    It can be useful to refer to parts of a document by name rather than
number, as in
\begin{lcode}
The chapter \textit{\titleref{chap:mempack}} describes \ldots
\end{lcode}
The chapter \textit{\titleref{chap:mempack}} describes \ldots

    There are two packages, \Lpack{nameref} and \Lpack{titleref},
 that let you refer to things by name instead of number.

    Name references were added to the class as a consequence of adding
a second optional argument to the sectioning commands. I found
that this broke the \Lpack{nameref} package, and hence the
\Lpack{hyperref} package as well, so they had to be fixed. The change 
also broke Donald Arseneau's \Lpack{titleref} package, and it turned out
that \Lpack{nameref} also clobbered \Lpack{titleref}. The class also
provides titles, like \cmd{\poemtitle}, that are not recognised by
either of the packages. From my viewpoint the most efficient
thing to do was to enable the class itself to provide name 
referencing.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\label}\marg{key} \cmd{\ref}\marg{key} \cmd{\pageref}\marg{key} \\
\cmd{\titleref}\marg{key} \\
\cmd{\headnamereftrue} \cmd{\headnamereffalse} \\
\end{syntax}
The macro \cmd{\titleref} is an addition to the usual set of cross referencing
commands. Instead of typesetting a number it typesets the title associated
with the labelled number. This is, of course, only useful if there is an
associated title, such as from a \cmd{\caption} or \cmd{\section} command.
As a bad example:
\begin{lcode}
Labelling for \verb?\titleref? may be applied to:
\begin{enumerate}
\item Chapters, sections, etc.       \label{sec:xref:item1}
...
\item Items in numbered lists, etc. \ldots \label{sec:xref:item3}
\end{enumerate}
Item \ref{sec:xref:item2} in section~\ref{sec:xref} mentions captions
while item \titleref{sec:xref:item3} in the same section 
\textit{\titleref{sec:xref}} lists other things.
\end{lcode}
Labelling for \verb?\titleref? may be applied to:
\begin{enumerate}
\item Chapters, sections, etc.       \label{sec:xref:item1}
\item Captions                       \label{sec:xref:item2}
\item Legends
\item Poem titles
\item Items in numbered lists, etc.  \label{sec:xref:item3}
\end{enumerate}
Item \ref{sec:xref:item2} in section~\ref{sec:xref} mentions captions
while item \titleref{sec:xref:item3} in the same section 
\textit{\titleref{sec:xref}} lists other things.


    As the above example shows, you have to be a little careful in using
\cmd{\titleref}.
Generally speaking, \cmd{\titleref}\marg{key} produces the last named 
thing before the \cmd{\label} that defines the \meta{key}. 

    Chapters, and the lower level sectional divisions, may have three
different title texts --- the main title, the title in the ToC, and a third
in the page header. By default (\cmd{\headnamereffalse}) the ToC title
is produced by \cmd{\titleref}. Following the declaration
\cmd{\headnamereftrue} the text intended for page headers will be produced.

\Note{} Specifically with the \Lclass{memoir} class, 
do not put a \cmd{\label} command inside an
argument to a \cmd{\chapter} or \cmd{\section} or \cmd{\caption}, etc.,
command. Most likely it will either be ignored or referencing it will
produce incorrect values. This restriction does not apply to the standard
classes, but in any case I think it is good practice not to embed any 
\cmd{\label} commands.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\currenttitle} \\
\end{syntax}
    If you just want to refer to the current title you can do so with
\cmd{\currenttitle}. This acts as though there had been a label associated
with the title and then \cmd{\titleref} had been used to refer to that label.
For example:
\begin{lcode}
This sentence in the section titled `\currenttitle' is an example of the
use of the command \verb?\currenttitle?.
\end{lcode}
This sentence in the section titled `\currenttitle' is an example of the
use of the command \verb?\currenttitle?.


\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\theTitleReference}\marg{num}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}
Both \cmd{\titleref} and \cmd{\currenttitle} use the \cmd{\theTitleReference}
to typeset the title. This is called with two arguments --- 
the number, \meta{num}, and the text, \meta{text}, of the title. The
default definition is:
\begin{lcode}
\newcommand{\theTitleReference}[2]{#2}
\end{lcode}
so that only the \meta{text} argument is printed. You could, for example,
change the definition to
\begin{lcode}
\renewcommand{\theTitleReference}[2]{#1\space \textit{#2}}
\end{lcode}
to print the number followed by the title in italics. If you do this, only use
\cmd{\titleref} for numbered titles, as a printed number for an 
unnumbered title (a) makes no sense, and (b) will in any case be 
incorrect.

    The commands \cmd{\titleref}, \cmd{\theTitleReference} and 
\cmd{\currenttitle} are direct equivalents of those in the \Lpack{titleref}
package.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\namerefon} \cmd{\namerefoff} \\
\end{syntax}
   Implementing name referencing has had an unfortunate side effect of
turning some arguments into moving ones; the argument to the \cmd{\legend}
command is one example. If you don't need name referencing you can turn
it off by the \cmd{\namerefoff} declaration; the \cmd{\namerefon}
declaration enables name referencing.

\section{Needing space}

    There are two new macros in addition to the original \cmd{\needspace}
for reserving space at the bottom of a page. The \cmd{\needspace} macro 
depends on penalties for deciding what to do which means that the reserved
space is an approximation. However, except for the odd occasion, the
macro gives adequate results. 

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\Needspace}\marg{length} \\
\cmd{\Needspace*}\marg{length} \\
\end{syntax}
    Like \cmd{\needspace}, the \cmd{\Needspace} macro checks if there is
\meta{length} space at the bottom of the current page and if there is not
it starts a new page. The command should only be used between paragraphs;
indeed, the first thing it does is to call \cs{par}. The \cmd{\Needspace}
command checks for the actual space left on the page and is more exacting
than \cmd{\needspace}.

    If either \cmd{\needspace} or \cmd{\Needspace} produce a short page it
will be ragged bottom even if \cmd{\flushbottom} is in effect. With
the starred \cmd{\Needspace*} version, short pages will be flush bottom
if \cmd{\flushbottom} is in effect and will be ragged bottom
when \cmd{\raggedbottom} is in effect.

    Generally speaking, use \cmd{\needspace} in preference to \cmd{\Needspace}
unless it gives a bad break or the pages must be flush bottom.

\section{Minor space adjustment}

    The kernel provides the \cmd{\,} macro for inserting a thin space in both
text and math mode. There are
other space adjustment commands, such as \pixabang{} for negative thin space, and
\cmd{\:} and \cmd{\;} for medium
and thick spaces, which can only be used in math mode.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\thinspace} \cmd{\medspace} \cmd{\:} \pixabang \\
\end{syntax}
On occasions I have found it useful to be able to tweak spaces in text by some
fixed amount, just as in math mode. The kernel macro \cmd{\thinspace}
specifies a thin space, which is 3/18\,em. 
The class \cmd{\medspace} specifies a medium space of 4/18\,em. 
As mentioned, the kernel macro \cmd{\:} inserts
a medium space in math mode. The class version can be used in both math and
text mode to insert a medium space. Similarly, the class version of 
\pixabang{}
can be used to insert a negative thin space in both text and math mode.

    The math thick space is 5/18\,em. 
To specify this amount of space
in text mode you can combine spacing commands as:
\begin{lcode}
\:\:\!
\end{lcode}
which will result in an overall space of 5/18\,em 
(from $(4 + 4 - 3)/18$).

\section{Fractions}

    When typesetting a simple fraction in text there is usually a choice
of two styles, like 3/4 or $\frac{3}{4}$, which do not necessarily look 
as though they fit in with their surroundings. These fractions were
typeset via:
\begin{lcode}
... like 3/4 or $\frac{3}{4}$ ...
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\slashfrac}\marg{top}\marg{bottom} \\
\cmd{\slashfracstyle}\marg{num} \\
\end{syntax}
The class provides the \cmd{\slashfrac} command which typesets its
arguments like \slashfrac{3}{4}. Unlike the \cmd{\frac} command which
can only be used in math mode, the \cmd{\slashfrac} command can be
used in text and math modes.

    The \cmd{\slashfrac} macro calls the \cmd{\slashfracstyle} command to
reduce the size of the numbers in the fraction. You can also use
\cmd{\slashfracstyle} by itself.
\begin{lcode}
In summary, fractions can be typeset like 3/4 or $\frac{3}{4}%
or \slashfrac{3}{4} or \slashfracstyle{3/4} because several choices
are provided.
\end{lcode}
In summary, fractions can be typeset like 3/4 or $\frac{3}{4}$
or \slashfrac{3}{4} or \slashfracstyle{3/4} because several choices
are provided.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\textsuperscript}\marg{super} \\
\cmd{\textsubscript}\marg{sub} \\
\end{syntax}
While on the subject of moving numbers up and down, the kernel provides
the \cmd{\textsuperscript} macro for typesetting its argument as though it
is a superscript. The class also provides the \cmd{\textsubscript} macro
for typesetting its argument like a subscript.
\begin{lcode}
You can typeset superscripts like \textsuperscript{3}/4 and 
subscripts like 3/\textsubscript{4}, 
or both like \textsuperscript{3}/\textsubscript{4}.
\end{lcode}
You can typeset superscripts like \textsuperscript{3}/4 and 
subscripts like 3/\textsubscript{4}, 
or both like \textsuperscript{3}/\textsubscript{4}.


\section{Framed boxes}

    Donald Arseneau's \Lpack{framed} package is currently at or beyond
v0.7 while
the original copy used in the class is from an earlier version. The class
version of the \Lpack{framed} functions has been updated to v0.7.

\begin{syntax}
\senv{framed} text \eenv{framed} \\
\senv{shaded} text \eenv{shaded} \\
\senv{leftbar} text \eenv{leftbar} \\
\end{syntax}
The \Ie{framed} environment puts the text into an \cmd{\fbox}-like 
framed box, the
\Ie{shaded} environment puts the text into a coloured box, and the
\Ie{leftbar} environment draws a vertical line at the left of the text.
In all cases the text and boxes can include page breaks.

\begin{syntax}
\lnc{\FrameRule} \lnc{\FrameSep} \cmd{\FrameHeightAdjust} \\
\Itt{shadecolor} \\
\end{syntax}
The thickness of the rules is the length \lnc{\FrameRule} and the separation
between the text and the box is given by the length \lnc{\FrameSep}.
The height of the frame above the baseline at the top of a page is specified
by the macro \cmd{\FrameHeightAdjust}. The default definitions being:
\begin{lcode}
\setlength{\FrameRule}{\fboxrule}
\setlength{\FrameSep}{3\fboxsep}
\newcommand{\FrameHeightAdjust}{0.6em}
\end{lcode}
The background color in the \Ie{shaded} environment is specified by
\Itt{shadecolor} which you have to specify using the \Lpack{color}
package. For example:
\begin{lcode}
\usepackage{color}
\definecolor{shadecolor}{gray}{0.75}
\end{lcode}

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\frameasnormaltrue} \cmd{\frameasnormalfalse} \\
\end{syntax}
Following the declaration \cmd{\frameasnormaltrue} paragraphing within
the environments will be as specified for the main text. After the declaration
\cmd{\frameasnormalfalse} paragraphing will be as though the environments
were like a \Ie{minipage}. The initial declaration is 
\cmd{\frameasnormaltrue}.

    There is one known problem with framing: when framing is used on 
a page where the page header is in a smaller type than the body, the 
header may be moved slightly up or down. This can be avoided by putting
the font size change in a group, but it seems that a larger font does not need
to be grouped. For example:
\begin{lcode}
\makeoddhead{myheadings}{{\tiny Tiny header}}{}{\LARGE Large header}
\end{lcode}

    You can use the \Lpack{framed} package with the \Lclass{memoir} class, in
which case you will get whatever functionality is provided by the package as
it will override the class' code.

\section{Captions}

    The \cmd{\captionstyle} macro has been extended so that it is now 
possible to separately specify the style for short and long
captions.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\captionstyle}\oarg{short}\marg{normal} \\
\cmd{\raggedleft} \cmd{\centering} \cmd{\raggedright} \cmd{centerlastline} \\
\end{syntax}
Caption styles are set according to the \cmd{\captionstyle} declaration.
Unless the optional \meta{short} argument is given all captions are typeset
according to \meta{normal}. If the optional \meta{short} argument
is specififed, captions that are less than one line in length are typeset
according to \meta{short}. 

    Permissable values for the arguments include, but are not limited to,
\cmd{\raggedleft}, \cmd{\centering}, \cmd{\raggedright}, and
 \cmd{centerlastline}. The class initially specifies
\begin{lcode}
\captionstyle{}
\end{lcode}
which gives the normal block paragraph style.

\section{Hung paragraphs}

    As noted eleswhere the sectioning commands use the internal 
\cmd{\@hangfrom} as part of the formatting of the titles.

\begin{syntax}
\cmd{\hangfrom}\marg{text} \\
\end{syntax}

\hangfrom{Simple hung paragraphs }(like this one) can be specified
using the \cmd{\hangfrom} macro. The macro puts \meta{text} in a box
and then makes a hanging paragraph of the following material. This
paragraph commenced with \\
\verb?\hangfrom{Simple hung paragraphs }(like ...? \\
and you are now reading the result.

\chapterstyle{demo}
\chapter{Memoir and packages} \label{chap:mempack}

    The \Lclass{memoir} class does some things differently from the standard
classes. Some packages that might be used with \Lclass{memoir} rely on
the standard methods, and change them to suit their own purposes. Some such
changes may not work with \Lclass{memoir} and the package may not recognize
that it is being used with \Lclass{memoir} and not with a standard class. 

    From my viewpoint, the ideal solution is for the packages to be changed
so that they cooperate with \Lclass{memoir}. However, until that happy
day arrives I have provided the \Lpack{memhfixc} package that attempts to 
make these packages cooperate with the class. 

    Currently, if you use either the \Lpack{hyperref} or the \Lpack{nameref}
package you will also need to use the \Lpack{memhfixc} package. 
The ordering of the \Lpack{memhfixc} and other packages can be important:
\begin{itemize}
\item \Lpack{memhfixc} must be used \emph{after} the \Lpack{hyperref} package.
\item The ordering of \Lpack{memhfixc} and \Lpack{nameref} is immaterial.
\end{itemize}

    There is a basic incompatability between the \Lpack{hyperref} package
and sequential footnotes --- the \cmd{\multfootsep} macro is essentially 
ignored. If that is important to you and you don't mind not having 
hyperreferences to footnotes, call \Lpack{hyperref} like:
\begin{lcode}
\usepackage[hyperfootnotes=false, ...]{hyperref}
\end{lcode}
A similar \Lpack{hyperref} incompatibily also occurs with at least 
the \Lpack{footmisc} package.

    Thinking of the \Lpack{footmisc} package, for some of its options it
changes the kernel output routine. The class itself changes the output routine
in order to add sidebars. Packages, like the version of \Lpack{footmisc}
current at the date of writing (2003/04/28), which change the output 
routine without specifically catering for the \Lclass{memoir} class
are likely to cause problems. As an alternative to the \Lpack{footmisc} 
package, the \Lpack{ledmac} package understands \Lclass{memoir} and provides
further multiple classes of footnotes.



% back end
\backmatter
\clearpage
%\pagestyle{ruled}
%\chapterstyle{section}



 \bibliographystyle{alpha}
 \begin{thebibliography}{WWW99}
    \bibitem[ABH90]{bk:Impatient}
      Paul W.~Abrahams, Karl Berry and Kathryn A.~Hargreaves.
      \newblock \emph{TeX{} for the Impatient}.
      \newblock
       Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1990.
      \newblock (Available from CTAN in \texttt{info/impatient})
    \bibitem[Car94]{DELARRAY}
      David Carlisle.
      \newblock \emph{The delarray package}.
       \newblock March 1994.
      \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
                 \texttt{macros/latex/required/tools})
    \bibitem[Car98]{LONGTABLE}
      David Carlisle.
      \newblock \emph{The longtable package}.
       \newblock May 1998.
      \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
                 \texttt{macros/latex/required/tools})
    \bibitem[Car99]{TABULARX}
      David Carlisle.
      \newblock \emph{The tabularx package}.
       \newblock January 1999.
      \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
                 \texttt{macros/latex/required/tools})
    \bibitem[Car01]{DCOLUMN}
      David Carlisle.
      \newblock \emph{The dcolumn package}.
       \newblock May 2001.
      \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
                 \texttt{macros/latex/required/tools})
    \bibitem[Fea03]{BOOKTABS}
      Simon Fear.
      \newblock \emph{Publication quality tables in \ltx}.
       \newblock March 2003.
      \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
                 \texttt{macros/latex/contrib/booktabs})
    \bibitem[GMS94]{bk:GMS94} 
      M.~Goossens, F.~Mittelbach and A.~Samarin.
       \newblock \emph{The \ltx{} Companion}.
       \newblock
       Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1994.
    \bibitem[Knu84]{bk:knuth}  
       Donald E. Knuth.
       \newblock  \emph{The \TeX{}book}.
       \newblock
       Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1984.
    \bibitem[Lam94]{bk:lamport} 
       Leslie Lamport.
       \newblock  \emph{\ltx\ --- A Document Preparation System}.
       \newblock
       Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1994.
    \bibitem[MC98]{ARRAY}
      Frank Mittelbach and David Carlisle.
      \newblock \emph{A new implementation of LaTeX's tabular and array
                      environment}.
       \newblock May 1998.
      \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
                 \texttt{macros/latex/required/tools})
    \bibitem[Wil00]{XTAB}
      Peter Wilson.
      \newblock \emph{The xtab package}.
       \newblock April 2000.
      \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
                 \texttt{macros/latex/contrib/xtab})
 \end{thebibliography}


\clearpage
\pagestyle{index}
%\renewcommand{\chaptermark}[1]{}
\renewcommand{\preindexhook}{%
The first page number is usually, but not always, the primary reference to
the indexed topic.\vskip\onelineskip}
\indexintoc
\printindex


\end{document}